Index

Sl. No. Description

1 ACSR Conductor for PANTHER, WOLF, DOG, RABBIT
2 Power Transformer Along with RTCC Panel (10 MVA & 6.3 MVA)
3 33 KV 100 KVA−Stn Service – Transformer
4 11 KV Shunt trip SCADA Compatible VCB Panel
5 12KV & 42KV Lightning Arrestor
6 30V,100AH Plante type Battery
7 30V, 35A Auto & manual Float cum Boost Battery Charger
8 ACDB
9 DCDB (30 V)
10 1.1 KV PVC Cable
11 1.1 KV Copper Control Cable
12 33 KV XLPE Cable and 11KV XLPE Cable
13 H-Beam without Galvanization
14 Earth Spike
15 Stay Set
16 Pipe Electrode, Guy Insulator
17 GI Wire, GI Stay Wire
18 Suspension & Tension Clamp (For wolf and Panther)
19 Porcelain Insulator
20 Polymer 11 KV & 33 KV Disc Insulator(B&S type)
21 Polymer 11 KV & 33 KV Pin Insulator
22 33KV CR type Isolators
23 36 KV , 400 AMPS, Rocking Type TPGO Isolator
24 3ph 4 Wire HT CT/PT operated fully Static AMR compatible Tri-vector Energy Meters DLMS compliant – category ‘a’
for 33 KV and 11 KV Feeder Meter
25 33 KV GIS Breaker
26 110V 150 AH Battery with 110v, 45A Auto float cum Boost Battery charger
27 110V DCDB
28 9mtr. PCC Pole
29 RMU(3-way and 4-way)
30 12 kv TPGO Isolator
31 36 kv VCB (outdoor type)
32 33 kV C & R Panel for 33KV Feeder Protection and Metering
33 33kv 400-200/1-1A 2C CT
34 Drawing No. PLN(D)/SS/81 For Trestle for 33kv Isolator (HL)
35 Drawing No. PLN(D)/SS/85 For Cable box supporting framework (11kv)
36 Drawing Related to arrangement for UG Cable laying direct in ground with brick protection in ordinary Location
37 Details of UG Protection Duct for 33kv Cable Joint
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ACSR CONDUCTORS

1. SCOPE:
This specification provides for the manufacture, testing, supply and delivery of
Aluminium Conductors with Steel Re-inforced.

2. STANDARDS :
The conductors shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 398 (Part I &
II) of 1996 with latest amendments.

3. MATERIAL :
The material shall be of best quality and workmanship. The stranded steel re-inforced
conductors shall be manufactured from hard-drawn aluminium wires and galvanized
steel wires, which have the mechanical and electrical properties specified in Schedule
–B. The coating of the galvanized steel wires shall be applied by the hot process or
electrolysis process in accordance with IS: 4826–1968 or latest amendment thereof.
The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as soils and splits.

4. SIZE AND PROPERTIES:

The sizes of stranded steel re-inforced aluminium conductors shall be as given in

Schedule –B which also indicate the values of resistance and strengths etc.

5. TOLERANCES:

The following tolerances shall be permitted:

i. Tolerance on nominal diameter of aluminium wires: ±1 (one) percent.
ii. Tolerance on nominal diameter of galvanized steel wires: ±2 (two) percent.

6. MODULUS OF ELASTICITY & CO-EFFICIENT OF LINEAR EXPANSION:

The values of the final modulus of elasticity and Co-efficient of linear expansion for
ACSR shall be as given hereunder.

No. of Wires Final Modulus of Elasticity Co-efficient of linear expansion/0c.

GN/m2 (Practical)
ACSR 6/1 79 19.1 x 10-6
ACSR 6/7 75 19.8 x 10-6
ACSR 30/7 80 17.8 x 10-6
 7.0 JOINTS IN WIRES :

Aluminium Conductor Steel Re-inforced: No two joints shall occur in the aluminium wires closer
than 15 meters. No joints shall be permitted in galvanized steel wire unless the core consists of
seven or more steel wires. In the later case, joints in individual wires are permitted, but no two
such adjacent joints shall be less than 15 meters.

8.0 STRANDING:

8.1 The wires used in manufacturing of stranded conductors shall satisfy all requirements
of IS: 398/ 1996 (Part-I & II) before stranding. For ACSR, the lay ratio of the different
layers shall be within the limit given under clause No. 9 below.

8.2 In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay and the
outer most layers being right handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and
closely stranded.

8.3 In conductor having multiple layers of aluminium wires, the lay ratio of any aluminium
layers shall be not greater than the lay ratio of the aluminium layer immediately
beneath it.

9. LAY RATIO:

The lay ratio (Ratio of the arial length of a complete turn of the helix formed by an
individual wire in a stranded conductor to the external diameter of the helix) shall be
within the limits given below:

a) Aluminium conductor steel re-inforced.

Lay ratio for Lay ratio for Aluminium Wire

No. of Wires Steel core outside layer inner most layer

Al. Steel Max. Min Max. Min. Max. Min

6 1 - - 14 10 - -
6 7 28 13 14 10 - -
30 7 28 13 14 10 16 10

10. GROSS WEIGHT:

The gross weight of each wooden drum containing conductor of all sizes shall not
exceed 900 kg. with a tolerance limit of ±10 %.
Drums containing conductor having gross weight above 990 kg. will not be accepted in
any case. Also more than two lengths in one conductor drum will not be accepted.

11. STANDARD LENGTH:

Minimum length of ACSR Squirrel & ACSR Weasel Conductors should be 2(two) km. &
in case of ACSR Rabbit, DOG and Wolf, it should be 1(one) Km. Longer lengths are
also acceptable provided they are within gross weight limit. The conductor shall be
supplied in standard lengths of not less than 95% of the total quantity. The quantity of
the conductor in lengths shorter than standard ones shall not exceed 5% of the total
quantity to be supplied.
 Further, single conductor length in respect of such 5 % (maximum) shall be supplied
in random length of not less than 50% of the standard length and shall be supplied in
individual drum. Such random length shall be acceptable to the maximum extent of
5% of the offered quantity.

12. SELECTION OF TEST SAMPLE

Selection of test sample shall be done as per relevant I.S.

13. TESTS :

13.1 The conductors shall be subjected to routine and acceptance test in accordance with the
relevant I.S with latest amendments if any.

13.2 CHECKING OF CONDUCTOR SURFACE, DECLARED LENGTH AND WEIGHT

13.2.1 Out of each lot offered for testing, maximum number of drums to the extent of 10%
will be rewound for checking the surface of conductor, declared length and weight of
conductor in drum.

Necessary arrangements shall be made in the works of the manufacturer for

transferring the conductor from the sample drum to another empty drum after
weighing the sample drum along with the conductor and at the same time measuring
the length of the conductor so transferred by means of meters. Thereafter, the
original sample drum without the conductor shall be weighed and the value shall be
checked with the packing list. In case, any excess length that mentioned in offered
packing list is found in drum during length checking, no benefit will be given to the
manufacturer for the same. However, in case any shortage of conductor is found in
one or more drums, the maximum value of each shortage, in percent(s) shall be
deducted from all the drums offered for inspection.

13.2.2 The inspecting officer will carry out 100% checking of all the drums for inspection by
Weight.

13.2.3 The drum for length measurement shall be selected either by keeping in view the
maximum difference in weight as recorded on the drums packing list and actually
measured or at random.

13.2.4 The inspecting officer will check the Outer diameter and Surface of conductor during
re- winding of the drum for length measurements.

13.2.5 For sealing of both ends of conductor, the position of conductor ends should be
marked clearly on the body of wooden drum to avoid opening of all wooden planks of
the conductor drum.

13.2.6 Necessary care should be taken by the supplier to ensure that Seals provided by the
inspection officer remains intact during transportation and receipt of the drum by
stores wing.

13.3 REJECTION AND RE-TESTING

[Link] per relevant IS with latest amendment if any.

[Link] also reserves the right to check length of the conductor at Store/
Site.
[Link] entire cost of testing for acceptance & routine rests and checking of length
etc shall be borne by the supplier.
14.0 INSPECTION

The purchaser’s representative shall be entitled to have access to the works and all
places of manufacturer. The said representative shall have full facilities for
un-restricted inspection of supplier’s works, raw materials, manufacture of conductor
and conducting necessary tests. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed well
in advance of the time of starting and process of manufacture of conductor in its
various stages. The acceptance of any quantity of materials shall in no way relieve the
supplier of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the specification and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection, if such materials are later found to be defective.
15.0 TEST REPORTS:

15.1 Type test are to be carried out within last 5 (five) years from the due date of
submission of tender and the reports of Type Test successfully carried out from Govt.
approved/ NABL accredited laboratory shall be furnished by the bidder along with their
offer. The Type Test Reports shall bear Logo of NABL accreditation.
All the tests mentioned below shall be conducted on ACSR WOLF Conductor as per IS:
398 (Part-II) 1996 with latest Amendment.

TYPE TEST OF ACSR WOLF CONDUCTOR

Sl. Particulars of Test Clause No.

No.
1. Measurement of diameter of individual 13.2 of IS- 398 (Part-II)
Aluminium and Steel Wires. 1996 with latest amendment
2. Measurement of Lay Ratio/ Direction of Lay. 13.8
3. Breaking load of individual wire. 13.3.1
4. Ductility Test (Torsion/ Elongation). 13.4
5. Wrapping Test (Aluminum and Steel). 13.5
6. Resistance Test. 13.6
7. Galvanizing Test (Uniformity of Galvanizing 13.7
and Mass of coating.
8. Surface Condition Test. 13.9
9. Test for Ultimate Breaking Load on 13.10
Stranded Conductor.
10. Stress Strain Test. 13.11

15.2 The test reports of Routine/ Acceptance tests and checking of length etc. as specified in
Clause no 13 shall be signed jointly by the supplier’s representative and WBSEDCL'S
representative.

16.0 PACKING & MARKING

16.1 GENERAL
i) The conductor shall be wound on non-returnable drum strong enough and provided
within lagging of adequate strength, constructed to protect the conductor against all
displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operation
in the field. The drum shall conform to IS: 1778-1980 as amended upto date and the
dimensions shall be as per drum under column 9 of Table- 2 of the IS.
 ii) The drum shall be suitable for wheel mounting.

iii) The general construction of drum shall be as shown in IS: 1778-1980. However, the
drum shall be suitable for letting off the conductor under controlled tension of the
order of 300 kg minimum.

iv) After application of bituminized and plastic paper protective lagging or circumferential
batten of minimum 50mm. thickness shall be provided suitably, in order to protect
conductor from damage during transit in the event of breakage/detachment of the
external protective lagging. The thickness of the external protective lagging or
circumferential batten shall be sufficient to nail across grains as far as possible to the
flange edges with at least one nail per end. The length of the nails shall be not less
than twice the thickness of the battens. The nails shall not protrude above general
surface and shall not expose sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to
correction.

v) Outside the protective lagging, there shall be minimum two binders consisting of hoop
iron or galvanized steel wire. Each protective lagging shall have recesses to
accommodate hoop binders.

vi) The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the hoop of “B” nails or
bolts on the side of one of the flanges to avoid loosening of the conductor layers
during transit and handling.

16.2 TOLERANCE:
A manufacturing tolerance upto (-)5% subject to maximum one standard drum length
against each item of the order, for the last offered lot, will be allowed.

16.3 MARKING:
Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in indelible ink along
with other essential details:
a) Purchase Order number.
b) Name and address of the consignee
c) Manufacturer’s name or trade mark.
d) Drum number
e) Code name and size of the conductor.
f) Length of the conductor.
g) Gross weight of the drum.
h) Weight of empty drum with protective lagging.
i) Net weight of the conductor
j) Arrow marking for unwinding
k) Position of the conductor end.
l) Lot number.
Before despatch, property identification mark 'WBSEDCL' shall be engraved in each
drum.

16.4 CONSTRUCTION OF DRUMS

(a) All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from
defects that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative
treatment shall be applied to the entire drum with preservative of such a quality which
is not harmful to the conductor.
 (b) FLANGES

(i) The flanges shall be of two ply construction with such ply at right angle of the other
and nailed together. The nails shall be driven from the inside face of flanges, punched
and then cleaned on the outer face. There shall be at least 3 nail per plank of ply with
maximum nail spacing 70- 75 mm.

(ii) There will be a slot in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor; the
entrance shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.

(c) Spindle hole shall be provided at the center of the middle planks of the plies and
spindle planets with 100 mm diameter holes shall be fitted on either side of both the
flanges.

(d) DRUM AND SUPPORTS:

The end supports shall be securely fixed by nailing and may be disc or segmental type.
The middle barrel support of the two ply construction of disc type with a 100 mm
diameter concentric with the holes in flanges shall be provided at the centers of the
barrel supports.

(e) DRUM:
The wooden batons used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be segmental type.
These shall be nailed to the barrel supports with atleast two nails. The batons shall be
closely butted and shall provide a round barrel with smooth surface. The edges of the
batons shall be rounded or compared to avoid damage to the conductor.

(f) DRUM STUDS:

Barrel studs shall be used for the construction of drum. The flanges shall be holed and
the barrel supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a
length on either end sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for
fixing at the required spacing.

(g) IRON COMPONENTS

Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand pound of the flange. All the nails used on the
inner surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be counter sunk at least 5 mm.
deep. The ends of barrel shall generally be flushed with the top of the nuts.

16.5 PROTECTIVE ARRANGEMENT

i) The inner side of the flanges and drum barrel surfaces shall be painted with bitumen
based paint.
ii) Before reeling, cardboard of double corrugated or thick bituminised water proof bamboo
paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside the flanges of drum by means of
suitable adhesive materials. These protective wrappings and the adhesive material used
shall be of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
i) After reeling the conductor, the exposed surface of the outer layer of the conductor shall
be wrapped with water proof, thick, bituminised bamboo paper and also with thick plastic
sheet to prevent the conductor from dirt, grit and damage during transport and handling.

17. PRICE VARIATION:

The price shall be variable on the the basis of prices of Aluminium and Steel as per CACMAI
Price Variation Formula.
For every increase or decrease of Rs. 1,000/ (Rupees One thousand only) per M.T. in the
prices of EC Grade Aluminium Rod and High Tensile Galvanised Steel Wire (HTGS) as per
price circulated by CACMAI, the price of finished Conductors will be increased or decreased
according to the CACMAI Price Variation Formula.
 The price variation will be applicable as per the price prevailing on one month prior to the
date of delivery of the particular lot.

BASE PRICE:
The prices (excluding Excise Duty, VAT, Central Sales Tax, if any) of EC Grade Aluminium
Rod and High Tensile Galvanised Steel Wire (HTGS) as per price circulated by CACMAI as
prevailing on the Base Date as per the Notice Inviting Tender will be the base prices of
Aluminium and Steel.
Weights of Aluminum and Steel per Km. length of respective Conductors are given below:

Item Weight in Kg. per Km.

Description of materials
No. Aluminium Steel Total
01. ACSR:20mm2 (Squirrel) 57.73 27.27 85.00
02. ACSR:30mm2 (Weasel) 86.60 41.10 127.70
03. ACSR:50mm2 (Rabbit) 144.80 68.80 213.60
04. ACSR:100mm2 (DOG) 287.46 105.71 393.17
05. ACSR:150mm2 (WOLF) 437.00 289.00 726.00

18. Documents to be submitted at the time of physical delivery at Consignee Stores:

The following documents are to be submitted by the vendors to the Consignee Stores at the
time of dispatch to stores:-
a) Copy of Purchase order
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction
c) Inspection Test Certificate
d) Guarantee Certificate
e) Proforma Invoice
f) Calculation Sheet for Price Variation on the basis of CACMAI as applicable with base
date of Order
g) Seal list and packing list
h) Challan in triplicate
i) Way bill, if applicable

--------------------------------------X---------------------------------------
SCHEDULE - A

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Conductor (To be filled in by the Tenderer)

1. Code Word
2. Maker’s name and address

a. Aluminium Rods
b. Steel Rods
c. Complete Conductor
3. Stranding and Wire diameter
a. Aluminium
i) Nominal ii) Minimum iii) Maximum
b. Steel
i) Nominal ii) Minimum iii) Maximum
4. Nominal Aluminium Area in sq. mm
5. Sectional Area of Aluminium in Sq. mm.
6. Total Sectional Area in [Link].
7. Cross Sectional area of Nominal Diameter wire in [Link].
a) Aluminium b) Steel c) Overall diameter of conductor in mm.
8. Breaking load of conductor in KN.
9. Minimum breaking load for
a. Aluminium Wire --- i) Before stranding ii) After stranding
b. Steel Wire --- i) Before stranding ii) After stranding
10. Zinc Coating of steel wire
a. Uniformity of coating, number & duration
of dips process test, withstood
i) Before stranding ii) After stranding 1 Min x nos.
½ Min x nos
b. Minimum Weight of coating gm/sq.m
i) Before stranding ii) After stranding
11. Mass in kg. per Km.
a. Aluminium
b. Steel
c. Conductor
12. Resistance in ohm per Km at 200 C i) Aluminium ii) Conductor
13. Continuous maximum current rating of conductor
(Amps. in still air at 450 C ambient temperatures).
14. Modulus of elasticity of conductor
15. Co-efficient of linear expansion per degree centigrade of :
a. Aluminium wire
b. Steel Wire
c. Conductor
16. Standard length of each piece in Km.
17. Approximate dimensions of the drum in mm.
18. Weight of the conductor in one drum in Kg.
19. Weight of the drum in Kg.
20. Gross weight of the drum including weight of the conductor.
21. Standard according to which the conductor will be manufactured and tested.
22. Other particulars if any.

__________________________
(Signature of the Tenderer)
 SCHEDULE -B

SIZES & PROPERTIES OF ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR GALVANISED STEEL

REINFORCED
NOMINAL ALUMINIUM STRANDING AND WIRE SECTIONAL TOTAL APPROXIMAT APPROXI CALCULATE APPROXIM
AREA (mm2) DIAMETER (mm) AREA OF SECTIONAL E OVER-ALL MATE D ATE
ALUMINIU STEEL ALUMINIUM AREA (mm2) DIAMETER MASS RESISTANCE CALCULAT
20 M 6/2.11 1/2.11 (mm2)20.98 24.48 (mm)6.33 (KG/KM)
85 AT 20 Oc MAX
1.394 ED 7.61
30 6/2.59 1/2.59 31.61 36.88 7.77 128 (OHM/KM)
0.9289 BREAKING
11.12
50 6/3.35 1/3.35 52.88 61.70 10.05 214 0.5524 LOAD (KN)
18.25
100 6/4.72 7/1.57 105.00 118.5 14.15 394 0.2792 32.41
150 30/2.59 7/2.59 158.1 194.9 18.13 726 0.1871 67.34

PROPERTIES OF ALUMINIUM WIRES USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF

ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS GALVANISED STEEL REINFORCED
DIAMETER(mm) CROSS SECTIONAL MASS(KG/KM) RESISTANCE AT BREAKING LOAD BREAKING
AREA OF NOMINAL 200C(MAX)(OHM/KM) (MIN) LOAD
DIAMETER WIRE(mm2 ) (KN) AFTER
STRANDIN
G (KN)
NOMINAL MIN MAX
2.59 2.56 2.62 5.269 14.24 5.490 0.89 0.85
3.00 2.97 3.03 7.069 19.11 4.079 1.17 1.11
3.35 3.32 3.38 8.814 23.82 3.265 1.43 1.36
2.11 2.09 2.13 3.497 9.45 8.237 0.63 0.60
4.72 4.67 4.77 17.50 47.30 1.650 2.78 2.64

PROPERTIES OF STEEL WIRES USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF ALUMINIUM

CONDUCTOR STEEL REINFORCED.
DIAMETER (mm) CROSS MASS BREAKING LOAD (MIN) (in KN)
SECTIONAL KG/KM
NOMINAL MIN MAX BEFORE AFTER
AREA OF STRANDING STRANDING
NOMINAL
DIAMETER WIRE
(mm2)
1.57 1.54 1.60 1.936 15.10 2.70 2.57
2.11 2.07 2.15 3.497 27.27 4.60 4.37
2.59 2.54 2.64 5.269 41.09 6.92 6.57
3.00 2.94 3.06 7.069 55.13 9.29 8.83
3.35 3.28 3.42 8.814 68.75 11.58 11.00
 TATI MPLIED TRAN RMER
TYPE
EALED ttpE
~,

SCOPE:

This [Link] covers design, manufacl-ure, assembly, testing at manufacturer's works, supply & deliv,ery of Three
Phase 50 HZ, 33/ 0.415 KV, Delta/Star, Vectol-Group Dynll, two winding, outdoor type, oil immersed naturally Oil & Air
cooled, having Off Load Tap Switch with voltage vai-iation of +5.0% to -7.50% in step or 2.5% at HV side, Non sealed aiid
Sl-ack Core Type Station Service Transformer as per details furnished hereafter.

1.2 The transformers covered by this specification shall be complete in all respect. Any matetials or accessories which may
not here specially mentioned but which is usual and necessary for satisfactory and [Link] free operatioii and
maintenaiice of th-e transformer, shall be supplied without any extra charge.
2. LOCATION:
The transformers may be iiistalled outdoor anywhere ill West Bengal. Th.e elevations of the sites above mean sea level
shall not exceed 1000 met-ers.
3. SYSTEM DETAILS:
Tlie 33 KV systems are non effectively earthed through grounding transformer & 0.415 Irv systems are effectively
earthed at the neutral points of tlle star connected secondary winding of the transformer.
4. ±S£ELA_THERCONDITI_0_NL!S±
01. The area is also subject to heavy nlonsoon I.€`ilis, 80 to 90+% oftlle annual precipitation being in tlie month of
; iHie to October.-
50OC
Maximiim temperature of air in shade
4')C
Minimum temperature of air
60OC
Maxinium temperature of air in sun
98%
Maximum Humidity
100
Average number of thunderstorm clay per annum
Numbel-of moilths of tropical monsoon rainy
4.5
condition per anniim(june to October)
•.\`\;erage rainfall per annum 300cm
250k8/m2
Maximum wind pressure
02. For the purpose of this specififation the maximum daily average ambient temperature shall be 40oC average
over 24 hours period.

5. a)1HAI¥:Ei::Lr]SL c::ryveRrL:,des:ywt,:I::t es:eerc t:LpC:,tLtc°.Tnb }Seh :]]:'du::][:\Srse: ::: :ert::Snets5 PoerctLafLL::tbL:s:tL: t,]otrt:s5° I: fL°8r:T{pta°r::i) L2 :eis£:

all--Ts-e-Ii:iii [ a _ -•i.-__--. _2 I ` llas )erlatest issues

Itl`m [SNum a
IS:2026
Specification I-or Power Transformer- - - - - - - - `- - -Outdooi-TypeoilimmersedDistributionTransformersuto&incluLgjpgj2EqoKVA,33_-KVspe_cificatligLp__`t1Spe+cificationforColdRolledGrainOrientedElectrical- - Steel
IS1.180(Pcirt-1)_---_---------.'-------_i3;_3.6'-i.4

3.

4.
•gT----.f).7. ~~.~~-- [Link] for copper wiSpecifi;TationforAluminumwirerod
re_I-odSpecificationforCraftPaperSpecificationforPressBa-ardSpecificationforTransformer/Mineral OilSpecificationforUpto1.1KVBushing IS:1244£IS:9335

ls:1576IS:335

8. -, - -r -ForPorcelainPal-tl!I/SectionForMetalPart-IS:3 47-1 )ForPorcelainPart-I:,/Section [Link]-ls:3 47I1 )-_ -_`- -i?:2o 6-'(p-: - - -_. I,:.-~`=ft€-Pa.;,-3'CE,PiJ-+.Iia:g=\~ 3,:fjR.`[Link],P&CD E,D
S:3347(Part--
9.

(Part-I/Section-

S:3347(Part-
10. Specification for Outdoor Bushing

(P;]rt-I/Section-

11. Specifical-ion for Marking and Relative positions of----------------.`._-terminals_-------------------E,1`6:n*|`AC„rog=T#p!#itbnot\s::1p;E\D`,S\ti\\

149/Type-C €`s
•-`' 12.•.t!r:..`!t`-.i.

-:,-tlTf:i:\u8#\`§`\-;|rfS
/
CE, P&E Distn. c'E+;h`ifs`t.:i.E,:;ti=prm:&i!4-c\:

TD, AE,P&CD
Ace,p&cD AC 112fJ....`.-..--..€
 S1(,0!!:2005 ,
Spe{:il.i{:ati(}il lbi-Mew:I`;iiii( .il I t``l lil.!J. (}1-iiit`[Link]-
1`(..`,,.i,I(`.1`(`.ill,,!1`

IS 5561
Si.i(":ilicalit)ii for Terniiml (:oiiiit`(`tor l`m-llv & LV
ls5
Speci``icatio-n fo-r Colo`ii-s I-or rr:-itiy mi,\'cd pailits
IS 104
Specific;}tion foi-ready niixecl i]:.iilit., brushing
Zinc Chr()iint(} iHmHHg
S649 .
Tesriiig [Link]-steal sheet.s antl sli-lps .iiitl miignetic~circuits
is '1()()0
(`,iride roi-loading ol. oil Hiim{`i-st>tl Ti.;.msl-oniiers
I.\ i,!57
Sp{`C"-.H:r" loll l-oi-Cl;"1l}lHlto,.:ll-mn!l,o`lont ol` 13ushing .

()2. lil llit-` [Link] urn ctiiilli" he`wet`ii nw ;`htivt`.`li`ii{lal-tl`i ,`i`tl [Link]]ecilic;`tion llip I;ile.r sl.i;]l} to,[Link].

b)Prc-qu:[Link]`qilirement.`-t.([Link]`Scertilie{IlriHisl-{Hliil`rminufacturL`r-

ttcquircmclits I){)climcnt``` rcquirl-(I t{} bc submittc{l

Pt I S L i c e n s e „ :,:`,:,s,:,9no,er KV,fav,i:,opv[:::-.Igew?.`.I,I::).,.d'3S:'I-;3:"I,?l':

bidding is open lo only those [Link] who

possesses valid ISI Liceiise/ Marketing rights for
o`-I-ered ralings for energy emciency level-II as
specified in IS:1180 (Part-I):2014.
({t) 'isf'fic::,:cty£;ng:v:,I_Tf t:-;I::tf:::Ter,'n ds,sT]ei-8g{.tpe€;ity_

1):2014, must bear 'ISI' certificalioii mark. In this

connection, a Notary attested iiliolocopy of the
valid lsI License /marking [Link] must be
submit-ted along with the tender.
(lil) lnabsenceoflslmarkingLicense,theo[-fershall be
liable [`or re)ectiori.
-1.. ._ ,. \ ----,-..-.------------- `_-. -_--`_-`-- -

Type test report. for lendei-ecl t,] :,ha:.,:eT[oest::sop::s :fe¥a#E:#e,;:,,:,2,

rating of ti-ansformers.
specified in IS.-1180(-Part-1):2014., cobper-woilnd -
100 KVA; 33/0.415 KV r,iting distrib`itioii
[Link]- from the Go\.I Stanclai.d t€`st.
Laboraloi-y/Govt. ApprovFd Laboi-atory shan be
submitted along with the [Link] for all Type Tests
as mentioned in the IS: 1180(Part-1) of 2014.

(I i) :]ho:.:ytT]ea ,:estycee:i:f{::dtefsr:°mr :I:[er::ttneg:fs[:;I:,:i:tg bo:.

I-he tendei-.
___----------------------_----
as specified in IS 1180(Part-1):2014. foi
However,
1J\J\,VI Y -I , [Link] bidder-
\-L,\, t -,.- ````-- siil)mitting BIS level-II-an-d [Link] Test certificates
`-__ .--- ____ ___(J

Distribution Transformei-ol-the ONAN type, CRG0 core, Copper wound, non sealed Type havinF l|:VA rating above 10()
KVA and up to & incliiding 200 I{VA and voltage class of 33KV, may also be technically acceplable provicled, ill thi"
case, they-----
-`^`J+,, -~.-,J win have
_--_ __ tp±conduct
_`f I all the Type & special tests as specified in ls: 1180 (Part-1):2014
- 1 for obtaining
, BIS
r A _I__ level-
-_`,`=``1-:,1:.1,I

11 certificates mcludi`ng Lightning Impulse Tes-t and Dynamic Short Circuit test after placement of Order maintaining
the clelivery schedule of lhe NIT. However, for techiio-commercial eligibility of the bidder, the bidder needs .to qiialil-y
the
•tl other
\JIL,-I qualifying
lil,t^J",Jr ..-a . requirement
`,i_ ----- ____ _ as _ per1 ternis & coiidilions of the NIT. All the related
. -costs
I for conducting
1 such -I.:|1-11`^
.,, _ I _t____ Type & I+,I

pecial Tests shan have to be borne by the bidder. All undertaking in this regard is to be submitted along with the bid
d-ocuments by the participating bidders who belong to this category.

c) Thc` rrl-an`sformer .shall conform to the [Link] `spL`cific parameters:

System Voltage
-_ -----------.---------------- _ ---
Rated Voltage HV
--,-.-----------

Rateclvoltag£_L¥___~_ 0.415 KV
Phase 3 phase

Fi-equency 50 HZ subject to flucttiation o( i rt%

_`_. ._-_ --.-------------. ` _

Comiection HV Delta
- -_-_ _ -_

Connection LV brought out)

EREREE-
EII
`t.i
r','

cE, Ci ACE, DTB'f

:E, P&E Distn. CE, Distn. !`Eu'J`i`::i:.:\\
Jrt (- +k,\`{``\1\,``,f,',
------i::I::::i:==--,a----:--:`-_i:
(` `l "{``;`tt.```

ICE, P&CD ACE,co\'*fainjA±,i`t?\©ti`L ACE, Project-III :Ti,:i:,sTn ``usEi:,9`S'b!`5i.n.

l)E,DTD,
l)E,I A,E'P&CD

E=
\ 2/20
 -LVNeutralEarthing
7b The Neutral point of lhe secondary (LV) wiliaiilEii==ll be b::6IITgi:l

outin a separate insulatecl terminal and shall besolidlyearthed.

---,-,---------
Vector Group Dynl 1
S

9 Type of Core CRGO material (Stack Col-e)

~Both HV & LV willding shall be wound from Double paper Covered
10 wi!|din8
copper condiictor.__.__------------.-.-.----.---_-----_.`.100KVA

11

12
Rating

Type of Cooling
- ONAN _-,.-----.-------------____

i. :}' Percelitage Impedance at 75°C 4.5% ± 10% ls tolerance

14 Maximum Temperature Riseoverambient i) Top oil temp. Rise measured by thermometei--35°C

ii) Winding temp. Rise measured by resistance method -40 °C,

Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature ri-;Eiin5EiFE=Ted as

non [Link].V. [Link] foi-a voltage
1516 Taps
variation of +5.0% to -7.50% in step of 2.5% at HV side with its
normal position at 3.
Rated short apparent power ofthestemat33KVasperIS2026
\ 10 0 0 M VA
(Part 5)udiblesoundleve-ls in decibel a _----------------.-___``-__---`.`i)-----Upto5TJKVA-48db
17
rated voltage & frequency ii) 51tol00KVA-51db
iii) 101to300KVA-55db
iv) 301to500KVA-56db..
18 Type Non-Sealed type . ~_..___~__.~__.___

6. RA±|NGANDGENERALDATAFORDISTRIBUTIO_N_TI.tA_N_SFORM_E¥
01. [Link] core Type, Non sealed type, three phase, oil immersed step down two winding distribution transformer
for outdoor installation with weather condition as stated above. -
02. Rating: loo KVA

:: ¥:Ta:t:o:nc°y: :[Tr:a:n:;of:o:fLr=eaeetre:hva:I, t:;es :Lt:bat err:°qru::t]:;I :::tuasLt :I: eorfa=]::;o af:ot:tenroartida L°5u::;st :t:Ldh ::,S,°e:c]:I:dY[::LC:,::

`:i}ecified temperature rise.

05. Type of cooling: ONAN

06. Voltage Ratio: 33/0.415 Kv at normal tap
07. Vector group reference: Dynll

CONNECTIONS:

The primary (HV) winding shall be connected in delta and secondary (LV) winding in star with vector group Dynl [Link]
neutral of the secpndafy (LV) winding shall be brought out to a separate insulated terminal.
The sizt` (Cross section) of the neutral connection conductors and jumpers must be of same size. as that of phase
connecting conductors and jumpers which shall be properly supported and insulated.

8. TEMPERATURE RISE:
Foi-winding 40oC (measiu-ed by resistance) and for top oil 35oC (measured by lhei-iiiomeler) as per cl. No 6.10.2 of ls: 1180
(Part-I):2014whentestedinaccordancewithIS:2026(Part-II).[Link]
loss(NLL at 5oHz+ Load loss at Lowest tap) at lowest tap position.

9. SHORT CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE: .

4.50 % i is tolerance at 75oC, 50Hz.

10. IEBjMINA_IjARRANGEME_NLIEi
Bare on outdoor porcelain bushings suitable for heavily polluted area as per ISS/CBIP specificatioii and other relevant
specification shall be used. The top of the bushing shaH be immersed in the oil when the o" level is at the minimtim
marking Ll of the oH level gauge. The bushing rods should be locked in position so .that, twisting Iof
- leads_is
_ avoided
__ ___ t-1 1 di`ring
.1n /n^_.1`
per ls 1180 (Part-.I)
tightening of nuts of bushing [Link] & LT studs are to be made orbrass for terminal \ connections
L::.i,fs#N;#98:=^,!\`ict:i"__,__
(!!, /-£#flf
CE,P&EDist+n.. T CE,Distn. 'CE,IT&C CE,C
cE,€=S: CE,
.D

..,
(j[1

i.€'\.-I,\qB
s-E,-Q[:,&,i`i;,:`::" DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
:-:E,-p-&:i ACE,ii£-:d`nia:.,i,3:;y+ ACE, prfe EE,ha \
312!0`?i...I
 3 3 Itv S I D E
T}ie terminals shall be through outdoor type bushiiigs conforming to IS:2099 and provided with Bi-metallic terminal
connectors(rigid type) suitable for "Panther" ACSR conductor. Terminal connectors are to be supplied as per Techiiical
specification of Clamps & connectors. The ternlinal connect:ors to be provided in the HV bushing `loiiis shall conform to
IS 5082 so as to comiect the jiimper wit:hout [Link] llie bushing stem.

L.V. SIDE ..,i

Coniiections `.rom [Link] LV termiilals to the respeclive LV switchgears shall be made through three phase 4 col-e
cable. I,T termiiials of [railsformers shan be brguglit oiil lhrougli LV bushing iiiounted on side wall mounted blishing. The
neut..ral terminals shall be broiight out along with LV [Link]}s thi-ough a separate bushing for connection to the
respective switch gears neutral bus. Terminal comiectoi.s are to be supplied as per Technical spi>cifiL`ation of Clamps &
connectors. Tlie teriiiinal comiect:ors to b.e provided in t-he LV bushing stems shall conform I.o ls r.082 so as to coi`iie(`l
the jumper without distiH-bins the hushing [Link].

11. I,E^D.S:
All leads o`. `1"3 wiiidings, coiiiieclions or the windiiig oi. `lieir wires to one another to lerminal bushing shall be pi`opelly
[Link] aiid covered [Link] insulation sleeves. The solclei-iiig malerials shall have higher melting temperature al)ove
300']C and preferably above 400`'C [Link] better thei`nial eiidiirance and material strength. The tenderer shall specifically
mention [Link] metliod anc{ materials t:o be used by [Link] for ieac!, connectioil.

12. CONDUCTOR MATERIAI,:

Electrical Grade Copper (`or but-h liv & LV winding or quality [Link] relevant ISS.
\
13. TANK:
I. Taiik must be or plain surface of conventional type and Tank wall must be fabricated from tested quality o`-
mild steel sheets of adequate thickness conforming to clause no.15 of IS 1180(Part 1) of 2014 for plain
conventional tank. Corrugated tank will not be accepted. It shotild be shaped so as to make welding to a
miiiimum. All welding shall be done electrically and relieved from welding stresses. All wielding shall be
[Link] oil tight and no bulging should occur during service. All seams shall be double welded for absoliite oil
tighlness. The tank wall shall be formecl by stiffener of structural steel for general rigitlily and to dampen
transformer noise lt shall also withstand partial vacuum pressure test as per clause no.15.2 of IS 1180 (Part 1)
of 2014. The [Link] shall have to carry o`it. this [Link]. during iiispection if requested.
Tank clesign shall be siich that the core and winding assembly can be tanked or de-tanked freely and easily.
The thickness or t:aiik [Link] & bottom wall shall be of minimum thickness of 6mm and that for side wall is 4 mm.
Llorizontal & vertical Stiffer shall be tonliiiiiously welded on tlie tank wall.
The maiiufacturer should carry out all welding operations as per relevant ASME standards and will submit a
copy of the weldiiig procedure aiid welder pel-I`ormance qiia]ification [Link] whenever [Link] cluriiig
inspeclion.
The tank plate and [Link] lifting lugs shall be of siich strength that the complete transformer filled with oil can be
lifted by means of a shackle.
Insicle of. tl:e t..aiik shall be paiilted with varnish/Hot oil resistant paint.
One suitable inspectiori hole with cover of adequate size shoiild be provided on the tank cover so that the
busliing ends and tap changer assembly may be easily accessible through that hole. The inspection cover shoulcl
be placed on turret aiid should be provided with lifting handle and air release plug. All the fittings on the top
cover shoiild be plciced on turret. An air release plug should also be provided at the top [Link] of the I-IV
Bushing turrets so t}iat any accumulated air bubble therein may be released through Air Release Plug.
The tank shall be designed in such a way that tlle metallic part inside the H.V biishing shall I.t`inaiii immei-sed in oil
when the oil level is at minimum oil level marking of oil levelgauge
!1, The lank cover shall be bolted on to flanged rim of the tank with a weather proof, hot/cool oil resistant, resilient
gasket in between for oil tightness. If the gaskets compressible, metallic strips shall be provided to prevent over
compression or the gaskets. Busliiiig tiH-rets, covers for pockets of tliermometers and other devices shall be
designecl lo [Link] any ingress of rain water into the lank and the tank cover as a whole shall shed of all [Link]
water. The talik cover s]iould have downward bent edges on all sides so that the gasket imder the top cover is
protected from direct exposure lo weal:her. All the welding of the tank and it's fittings shall be double tyelded
and the weldiiig shall only be doiie by a qualified welders.
The tank design slia}l be such that tlie core & winding assembly can be lifted freely.
Tlie main tank bociy shall be capable or withsl-alidiiig vacuum gauge pressure 250 mm of HG. For 10 mill aiid
subjected to air pressure of 80kpa for 30mins. The pet-manent deflectioii of flat plates, after pl-essui.e/vac`iinn
has beeii released, shall iiot exceed the values givenbelow:
Leiigtli of plate Deflection
Up t6 750 mm. 5mm.
•,r\`
!'
751 lo 1250 nini. 6.50 mm.
+ve & - Ire that
j``}::TnektLa|:Tj::°[[T'T:eL';aL:.:I;::±Fe"r:I::::,qaet:ou,:.testrellgthro
::i--::-::-::i-:i-;:i itt¥`L{?`yh,le
=, P&E Distn. CE, Distn CE

-, -`/.-```t,-f.`'rqfi#=[Link] | h.\Si\..t\,`¢`T-``
CE, P&CD ACE,Cdmmrfufa*r ACE, Project-Ill l&E.+Distn. SE,P&CD DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
4/20
 l;usket used between top cover and tank flange shall be synthetic rubber or synthetic riibberised cork sheet
resistant to hot oil and shall be provided with water tight compound between the tank flange and the gasket.
Gaskets wherever used shall conform to Type Ill as per IS 11149/Type C as per IS 4253(Par[2). Nuts & Bolts
and washers are to be provided for outside use on tank cover & accessories shall be .as follows:
a) Size 12 mmorbelow-Stainless steel
b) Above 12 mm~ Steel with suitable finish like Electro [Link] with passivation or hot dip galvanized. Niits,
bolts, flat washers, spring washers shall be suded and suitably spaced to press the tank cover.

Ill. r}iishing turrets, access hole covers, pockets of thermometers shall be so designed l-o prevent any ingress or
collection of water. Inspection cover is to be placed on a suitable turret and the OTI Thermometer pocket
should be placed on a elevated base so that sleepage of rain water can not take place from the taiil{ top surface.
Another thermometer pocket as per relevant ISS properly wielded on tank top cover is also to be provided and
it's location should be as near to the centre of the of the tank top cover as possible to measure the top oil
temperature by external thermometer. The projected part of the thermometer pocket above the tank cover
should have siiitable threaded portion so that it can be covered with a metallic threadecl cap.

IV. The rating, Sl. No., P.O No. , year & month of manufacture, guaranteed for five years , property of WBSEDCL,
f 'i5set Codification no., Energy efficiency level of Level2 type, marking with standard mark as per clause no. IS
1180 (Partl) of 2014 shall be engraved / Embossed distinctly on the tank body in addition to those Provided in
the name & rating plate. Adequate care shall be taken so that tank does not get damaged during siich engraving.
Alternatively a M.S Sheet of adequate thickness containing those data being engraved in the sheet may be
welded at a suitable location of the tank body. Adequate care must be taken so that the main tank/Hot resistant
paint inside the taiik/Transformer oil do not suffer any gamage during the process of welding.

V. Conservators along with silica gel breathers are to be provided. in the transformers. The conservator shall. be
li!terally dimensioned such that with the lowest ambient [Link] and no load on l-he transformer, the oil
level shall not recede too low and with the highest ambient temperature and permissible over load on the
transformer t:he oil will not spill into the breather pipe or to l-he exterior to waste. The capacity of the
conservator tank shall be made keeping in view the total quantity of oil and it's con'traction & expansion due to
temperature rise.
The conservator shall be provided with oil level indicator of [Link] type with minimum, normal & maximHii
temperature markings. The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the [Link] [o the main talik shall be
within 20 to 50 mm and it should be projected into the conservator in such a way that its end is approximately 20
mm above the bottom of the conservator.
Ionservators shall be provi'ded Oil lilling hole with threaded cover for ab`solute air tightness at the top of
conservator and Air release plug at the bottom.
The conservator pipe hole fitted to the tank cover should be provided with a suitable slanted plate, required so
that while pouring oil into the transformer through the conservator, oil does not fall direcl-ly on the winding.
Care should be taken so that free oil flow is not impeded.
Explosion Vents for transformers shall also be welded on the cover. Air release plug should be [Link] at the top
of the explosion vent.
Conservator tank shall be provided with plain oil gauge of prismatic type with maximum, normal Minimum oil-
ltivel marking visible from the G.L.
Conservator tank shall be provided with dehydrating breathers. Drain Valve shall be provided on conservalo[..
The moisture absorption shall be indicated by a change in the colour of Silica Gel crystals which s-hould be visible
from [Link]. Volume of the breather shall be suitable for 500 gin. of Silica Gel fonforming to IS:3401. A
suitable metallic cover should be provided on the pipe on which breather is provided at a location jiist above the
breather so that it can protect rain water from falling directly onto the breather.
One Bucholtz relay is to be provided at suitable location in the pipe connecting the conservator and main tank.
The Bucholtz I-elay shall have two contacts for alarin and for tripping. The relay shall also comprise drain cock, air
vent, and facility or [Link] wilh air injection/mechanical testing facility. One Shut off valve of s`iitable size is also
\u be provided in the pipe in between conservator and Buchholz relay.
OTI pocket is to be provided.
Marshalling box is to be provided for housing OTl. OTl shall be DIAL type Thermometer with me..-cury Conlacts
preferably of Precimeasure/Perfect control make. The OTI shall have two mercury contacts which can be set at
80° C & 85° C as Alarm & Trip contacts respectively. The Marshalling box shall have adequate conllectors
suitable for coiinection of control cables and wires from OTI. `

VIII. PRESSURE TEST:

•:) Type Test:
The tank shall be subjected to air pressure of 80Kpa above atmosphere for 30 minutes and vacuum of 250 iilni. of
mercury up to 200KVA & 500 mm. of mercury for ratirig above 200KVA for 30 minutes. Th9tpermanent deflection
J,

has been released shall no exceed given below T,

.t.

\ .u`'
fl,

€`1,i,&E Dlstn .-:iif:f:flf'PTa:ep:iflf ~\

Tc,E, P&CD_ ACE,CO\:gn:.u;;5a\ist:*~\ ACE, Prggf g::#[+D\,+stan t\\ ;, DE,DTD, ;~:::&¢:<;\¢,`f

512!0.?..:.,.:..,``....=..-..
 Le [Link].O.f.P_I.ate De fl ecLio n_ f_Q.I.-lftiflgLu_p _t_a_2_O_0_K~y.A.
Up I:o 750mm 5111m
751nim tol250mm 6.5mm
lf required, the manufactiirers should siibmil pressure test certificates for the transformer tanks al-least foi. (Jiie
Tanl{ for each bat-ch eitliei-conducted by their rabi-ica(ors oi-by themselves. Traiisformer [Link] should l]e douhlc
welded electrically as pei. the specification.
b) [Link] Test:
The transformei- lalik witli welded/bolted cover shall be tested at a pressure or 35 [{l'a above atmosphere
pressui-e maiiitaiiied iiiside the tank foi-10 mins. There should be no leakage in any part.

IX. Oil Leakage Test:

The assenibled transfoi-mei- with all fitliiigs incliidiiig the b`ishing ill position shall be lested al a pi-essiire
eciuivalent to twice t:he normal head measured al the base of tlie tank for 8 hr. There should be no leakage cit-:iny
point.

The maiiiil-acliirer shoiilcl submit pressiire tes\ eel-lirii`ale for tlie transformers lanks al le;isl [Link] each batch cilht-`i.
colicliictecl by them {H l)y [Link] I-abricalors, I-or which order is placed wit:h them and tht Higes (both insicle alit-l`
oiitsicle) of the ti-aiisl.()[Link] shoiild bt` tlo`ible weldecl electrically and sci-upulously ;is per the specification.

The magnet:ic core shall be built of low loss `silicoii [Link], cold rolled grain oriented steel. The [Link] shall 1„
of stack core type.
The materials `ised I-oi. insulatilig the slieels, shall have high [Link] resistance [Link] inhibitiiig
propert.y. It shall nol-l)e [Link] by ageiiig from hottest opErating temperature and clamped pressiire of lhr
core and shall iiol disjnl-egrale due lo mechailical modes of col.e vibration. It shall iiol have [Link] least lendem:y 1o
absorb moisture oi. t.o react wit.11 the [Link] parlicles in the insiilating oil lhiis accelei`,„ . i`g sliidge ``ormalion.
The assembled core shall be securely clamped jii [Link] lines and ill the uni[.orm press`H-: [Link] to minimise the iioi`se
from the core.
The core-clamping plate shall be provlded wit.h li``ting eyes for the purposes of tanking and uii-taiiking the a{:live
parts of lhe [Link]. The whole core shall be electrically connected by copper [Link] or adequate section lo the
core frame al two sei)ai`ale poiills for-beHlg eveiit`ially earlhed through the lank to drain off eleclroslatit:
pote]itia] that may be built up.
v. Core base and top ancl bottom ot`yoke shall be s`ipporled with MS Channel ol`proper.``ize aiicl pro[)erly l}ollt`(1
together for stack tyi)e core.
vi. The siipport-ing framework of t:he c{)r,es sh;-Ill lie so designed so as lo avoid tlie presence ijl i}ockels which wo`iltl
prevent complet.e [Link] of the tank through lhe (lrain viilve oi` caiise trapping of air dill-ing filliiig..
vii. Adeq`iate provision sliall made lo I)revent in()vement. of the core and winding relative to the taiilf [Link]
lransporl or inslall:jlion or while in service.
Viii. The cores shall con`-orm lo:
ls:3024 Electrical sheet sleel
ls:64-9 Metliod orlest s(eel shot:I
ix. The maximiHii lliix clensily ill ally part [Link] col-e anc] yoke al normal vollage & rrequeiH`v shall be such th;it th{`
flux deiisily with +12.5% combined [Link] and frequency variation from rated vollagt` & freqiiency does iiot
exceed 1.9 Tesla.
The No I,oad Ciirrent at: rated voltage aiid freq`iency shall not exceed 3% of the full load curreiit and at 112.5%
combined variation 'of voltage & frequency the no load current shall not exceed 6% of full load ci;rrenl.
Successful bidder will offer for core for iiispectjon and/or approval by the purchase during the manti`-acluring
stage. The manufaclurer's call notice for the piirpose should be accompanied with the following documents iis
proof [Link] the use of prime core materials:
(i) Invoiceofsupplier`
(ii) Mil}'s Test. certificat.e
(iii) Pacl{ill8 lisl
(iv) Bill of Landilig
(v) Bill ofelitry certificate lo cus[oiiis. .
Core materials shall be procured eilhel- from core manufacturer or through tlie accredited markeLHig
organisation of repute.

15. WINDING:
The winding shall l)e iiiade of papei. His`ilated {:tji``iniio`is and smooth elecl-rolytic copi`(`I. coiiductoi. & sliall lit-`

provided with lhe reqiiisit.e iiumber of Coils and shall be clesigiied lo withstand the electromet:haiiical st:ress e,xei.i(-`(I
ulider shoi-I. circuit. conditiolis as per lss:2026(Part 5). Foil winding will not be acceptable.
Class "A" insulation shall be used. Papei. insiilation sllall be dr}J and free from punctures ancl other clefecls. Solid
Insulation shall be of best quality. Wot)den support, if used, shall be seasoned and compatible with traiisformer ()il.
]e raw niaterials s}ia}l be made available by tlie anufacturgF`on [Link]
=ii`:==--::::---}T-. '?f-i:,L`

P&E Distn, glft^\AV? cE, q6ffind

/
I
i;--:
{-,\

l &tb\.,.\\S\u„

=E, p&cD ACE,co;}ituiiic\:i5i:I:u ACE, p¥of¥fff E Distn .-., S E,.p,&£f`,±t§`t`:``j:'T4'`fa~#£nc\-DT DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
612!0...¢``-?...`
®
 during Inspection & Testing.
TheinsulationlevelofthewindingsshaHbeasfollowsasperPart-lHofls:2026
Short Duration
yQRE ±perdsil£Q±±agrJJ±±Lpfa±s}
415V
17 0 -`.
33000 V

Thewaveshapeoftheimpulsevoltageshouldbechoppedontah

[Link](ataHvoltage
raling).TheinsulationofbotliH.V&[Link]
be used.
Th{`windingshallalsobesodesignedsuchlhatancoilassembliesofidenticalvoltage&KVAratingshaHbe
[Link].Theniinimutii1"or
coils of H.V. winding shall be 8(Eight). i

BLRAflH±
(1)[Link]
transportorduetoswitching/shortcircuitandothertransientconditionsduringservice.
(2)Coilclampirigrings,if provided,[Link]
other than bakelised paper shall not be used.
E=

T¥T[eN3:gdGinAgNs%aci:bNes=sRs¥:]Tbti%g:onthecoreco_axia||yformagneiicbalanceandsymmetricallyforelectricalbalance
Liberal ducts shall be provided for oil circulation and lovyering hot spot temperature in the winding. Spacers,
wedgesshallberobust&hardinsulationsarefittedinlhewindinglhattheywiHneithermove,norpermilany
relativemovementofanypartofthewindingduringnormalserviceandunderaterminalshortcircuit,without
causingmechanicalinjurytoanyinsulationinthewinding.

1:`l\eslacksQfwiiidi[[Link]}uslab]edevicesshaH
beprovidedfortakingupanypossibleshrinkageofcoilsinservice.
[Link]"wMnotimpede
free-circulation of oil through the ducts.
3 All spacers, Axial wedges/runners used »i windiiigs shall be made of pre-compressed pressboard -sohcL,
[Link]
[Link]/runnersshallbeproperlymilledtodovetailshapesothattheypass
'[Link],culting,millingandpunchingoperationsshaHbecarried
{iutinsuchaway,thatthereshouldnotbealiyburrandclimatipnalvariations.

16. EHSHus
Allbushingsshallconformtotherequirementsoflateslrevisionofls:[Link]
bewellprocessed,[Link]
blisters, burns and other defects.
Thebushingrods&,[Link]
[Link]-
topcoverfortransformersabove100KVA.Fortransformersof100KVAandbelowlhebushingcanbemountedonpipes
Thetesls`isperls2099andls7321shallbeconductedonlhebushings.
TheBushlngscanbeofporcelain/[Link]
For33KV,36KVclassbushingsshallbeusedandfor11l{V,175KVclassbushingandror0.415KV,"KVclassbitshtng
shall be used.
[Link]
bushings.
LlghtninglmpulsevoltageofHVbushingshallbe170KVPclndshorlduralionPowerfrequencyvoltageshaHbe70I(V
(RMS).The LvbushingshalHiave shortduration powerfrequencyvollageshall be 3 KV(RMS) .+
Tbemiiii!ii`micreepagedistanceof33KVbushingsshouldbe900nini.
TheBushingsshallbeof[.[Link]
testing facility for bushing. shall be a,s follows:
Theminimumphasj±j±LPEri±±P±£P±±±B99IJ±£P£±±±±!±±±8
Voltage
Clearance

Phase to Phase
I,.
J,
350 mm. !£,:. ,!;f3`i,ai i

:E. DTD

F I)istn.
CE, P&E Distn. S¥p=ft#, (-\t,\b`.:,\{`Q.,

-s-E`[tyb,'&;*Brft.;,;n DE,DTD, AE,P&CD

?,S--+--i;:ryri:t,-\,.`::£{..
E,P&E Distn.. bE`[tyfFBi{`: 712!f)`.--``:,..
t,'
ACE, p&CD ACE,Co+in-inut`n`j`E:tich` ACE, Project-Ill
 Clearance

Pliase I.o-Phase Phase to [Link]

___ _ _ _ ___

255 in;|| --
140 mm._
_ ----- --

mm for DTR up to 25 KVA and 85 mm. 40 mm.

beyond 25 KVA.
_ _ _ .___.` __J ....-.- ` ..---.---.------.------.--.----- _`-.
s]iall be as follows:
The minimiim phase to phase and phase to earth clea_r_a.nce. in air
_ . in
-__case of Cable End
_ ---.---------- __Box
_ _

Voltage Clearance
Phase to Phase Phase to Earth
-.-.ZZ5-mlli:--_
-3-3 I(.V--_-_. -. `3~5-d-Ii-Till -.--

- - 8--5--,iiiir..--
11-Itv 130 mm _----._.I,.----.--.--_
20 mm.
I- LV 45 ,1,,1,.

The Lighlniiig Impulse Vo}lage level and Arciiig liorii Gap shall be as follows:
_ _._._. . ._ .-.-- ` -.---.-.----....--.-------- _

Lightniiig Impulse Voltage Level Arcing Horn Gap

Voltage
__3TI(V _\,-_------=-....--------------.--------__-
170 KVp 220 mm.

llKV
•__--------..-------.--.---------.-----.-_
95 Kvl' E6_ir
IE NA

17. ELpcHANGE!_`.zTAp_Iiz±n!£±±-
The OFF load lap changiiig shaH be effected by an external 3 phase gang aperaled tap changing switch. Tlle gperating sliaf`
sliaH be brouglil out of the tank and provided with haild wheel so that il can be operated at standing height from pliiith
level and be easily accessible. The tap position should correspond to the voltage variation of (+)5% to (-) 71/7.% ill step ol.
2.5% at HV side with its normal position at 3.
A visual tap position indicator shall be provided near the operating handle and provision shaH be made to. pad lock the
haiidle in each t-ap position. The locking arrangement shall be such that pad lock cannot be ii:{;erted `mless I-eq`iii`ed
[Link].s correspoiiding to the lap positions are correctly connected with full co,ntact pressure.
All coiitacts of the tapping shall be silver plated and held ill position under strong contact pressure.
Taps shaH be provided on high voltage windiiigs. At each lap positions, rated output shan be available within allowable
range of voltage variations. The lap positioii marking should increase in clockwise direction and there should be a stoppei`
lil between maxiiiiuni position i.e.1 and minimum positioti i.e. [Link] tap position marking should be suctl that they "
easily visible and permanent.

18. £QLO_I__,INGARRANGEM_EEI±
I. Tlie lraiisformer slia]l be siiitable I-or loaditig or l00% contituioiis maximinii rating wilH)NAN' cooling witl")i"
exceeding tlie thermal limit at all [Link] positioiis.
" ::i:s::;]['[TTsgr°or;TTae rsesr|::' :fe sf::t:rdat:I:I,Trcr:,t:[Link]:re,::::,tc'ac,a'tL:;::: nogr t:`bpersesbseendt sat'::I #eedasts°e];ta:Ill; ::.r::::a::I::

elliptical oil channels, wielded at their [Link] and bottom to tlie tank.
III ::T]eeeacl,:,°aiir:lc:::Ci }i:oLt:I:;lL::I:S:lir::i;:}tfbre:t:::ar;r:lal::liTS::::ai;;:::(tl:edR¥:l)I:;pa:itt:eflt]apo:i: :::LIH::fL:jib¥a%]:t;:i:rti:Tt:O::: ;t:et: C5j;t ::i]:Tl :i:Ill::l:

part. of the tr{ansfonner in service. The elliptical tubes or elliptical oil channels of pre.+ion steel plate. at least ("
|8SWG
-\, `~ ' ' (orl.25mmthickness).
`-1` ---- ___-_ , ` . ` ., ,__,____ I..._.``
The radiator on the upper side should be placed beneath the LV bushing pocket so that due to oil leakage I-rom
the gaskets of LV bushing oil level does not in any way go below the upper side of top radiator header and in tlie
process effectiveness of the radiators for cooling is not lost.
The manuf-acture will have to provide iliformation regarding wall surface area of taiik radiator cooling t:ube`i
separately as part or the guaranteedotechnical particulars,

19. SURFACE PREPERATION & PAINTING:

+
I -:-.E-NriE#uits, w|.tell applied Hi a [Link] coatrshaH be I-Tee froni riins, sags, wrinl{1es, patchiness, brass [Link]{S

or ot}iei-del-ects.
2. AH pri[iiers sliaH be weu liiarked iiilo lhe su!-face, pcirlicularly ill areas where painting is evident aiid the rti-sl
priming coat shaH be applied as soon as possible [Link] cleailing. The paint shall be applied by airless [Link]
accordiiig to iiianufacturer's recommendation. However, where ever airless spray is not possible,
coliventioiial spray be ilseci.
" . t. :,reL:t[:ea:'o[:.Tt:L::Tt[,ns':]ai'e,f°wr:lil::,:gas[:adg,Woer`:;':EL:1,:: nbde:'tTh::I:lop,i:::i:,'naa]:I:,tte:i,:r°tr:{as[:'yr:,:I:::t]:iTg:''A,:b2e th°r°``gh 'y
`'-`'``t" . cleaiieci ui I usi, siclit
v:lf I ',`f`G+n-,`
i` 2 [Link]:s#*,,ll be by sliol:;i;`si:|e`ai:i`ilg~{IS-95-54)
blast-cleaning{IS 9954). cE§\)i+zis+itffi¢
I i.- `

ACE, DTD .
=, P&E Distn
P&E Dist c:i-if;::i;`,`Stee[ S:i:fr:;c::.;:i;::: - i 1.'',i ~-`4 r\ ,
`.. -if :"..:f+ (- .`lifl\,`\\q„
t h 'g- rf
•`bjfas..,+,p\[Link]
sE,``irE`,`bi€fi`: DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
CE, P&CD ACE,Comrfuh'i€ation ACE, Project-Ill ACE,P&E Distn.
8/20
 • 3. Chipping, scraping, and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven lools can iiot remove firmly

adherent mill-scales. This method shall only be used where blast cleaning is impractical.
Protective coatingi
As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of Subsequent drying,.[Link] shall be given silitable
antj corrosion protection.
Following are the types of paint which in.a.y be suitably used for the items to be to be painted at shop and stipply
of matching paint to site.
a) Hot oil resistant (Prooo or varnish paint for inn;r surface .
b) For external siirfaces one coat of thermo [Link] powder paiiit or one coat of epoxy primer followed by two
coats of synthetic enamel/.polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air drying or stoving.
i) All nuts and bolts used in the transformer for external fittings shall be painted with body paint.
Painting Procedure:
1. All prepared steel surfaces should be painted before visible re-riisting occurs or within 4 hoiirs, whichevel.
is sooner. Chemical treated steel surfaces shall be primed as soon as the surface is dry and while the
surface is still warm.
2. Where the quality offilms impaired by excess film thickness (Wrinkle, mud cracking or general softness)
EI

the supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory paint coatiiig and apply another coating. As a general rille, the
dry film thickness should not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickiiess by more than 25%.
L)amaged paiiitwork:
Any damage occu[-ring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the same standard of corrosion
protection and appearance as tliat was originally applied.
Dry Film thickness:
1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as acontinuous film of uniform Thickness aiicl
free from pours. Overspray, skips, runs, sags, and drips should be avoided. The [Link] may ol-may
not be of Same colour.
2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per manufacturer's
recommendation.
3. Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at the edges.
4. The requirement for dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the materials to be [Link] shall be as given below:

Sl. No. Paint Area to be Total dry film

Type painted l-liickness,
min(Microns)
1 Thermosetl-ing Power Paint lnsia_e_.___ 30
I. 60
'2
LiquidPaint a. Epoxy(Primer) Outside
b. Polyurethane(finisli coat) OTF_ 25 each
c. Hot oil resistant paint/Varnish Inside
____--Hm____.
Test for painted surface:
The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness.
The painted surface shall pass the cross hatch adhesion test and impact test as acceptaiice test ancl sall
spray test and hardness test. as type test as per ASTM standard.
Note: The paint wok shall also come under the coverage of guarantee period of-the equipment.

20. TEST & INspEciroN tAs PER ls: 11_80.{pART_-I]_:2_a_1_4_

All transformers shall be subjected to Routine test at the manufacturer's works. One transformer of each offered lot will
be tested for Temperature rise test at lowest tap position.
The following tests are to be carried out:
01 -ROUTINETEST:
a Measurement of winding resistance at all tap positions.
b Measurement orvoltage Ratio, polarity and phase relationship al all tap positiolis.
% lmpedailce voltage measurement al 750C & 50 Hz.
Measurement or No Load Loss al rated voltage & Freqiiency.
Measurement of Load losses at 75C at 100% Load and at 500/o load at Normal Tap. Measurement of Load losses
atlowestTap at l00% Load forTemperature rise test. `
Measurement of No load Ciirrelit at 100% and 112.50% rated voltage and no load loss.
Measurement of Insulation resistance.
Induced over voltage withstand test.
f-tt-. I
Separal-e source voltage withstand test.
Temperature Rise Test is also to be conducted at lowest tap on one [ransI-ormer foLevery lot offered for

CE, P&E Distn. ':`*in'+l*__®Si.at_¥`RE"``

cE,di
lrth*i&€iBto
El r=-a

i,\t-`i,` .i,f,`L, , 1,,;`:-"

ACE, p&cD ACE,c::`#`inu-a; ACE, Project-Ill ACE,P&E Distn. SE,fp&Et`Bi's`tn DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
\3``
`!\\
-,
I

912!f)i...>...S'.,..:¢-
 lt \li`htilaiicc cut-re[il T}ie iiiaxiiiiilm vc`l\ip t)'` iiill)alrlnce ciu-retlt Ill lransforilier shaH ilol exceed 2% o[-fiill loii(I
ciiri-e= lit as pei-Cr3lp I-oi-t-ransfoI-iiier.

I :,`.a.g[',`[:J`\[tLS:I:8p::"[t;"L`Lt;tor(C]pr::L_V[:[idg98et)&c,(r;;ll:fllcy & 112 5 % Of ralecI Voltage & freqite[icy shoit|d not excee(I

ni. Pi`[Link]. As pei-Clause no.21.5 of ls 1180 (Part-1) 2014

ii. ()it leakageTes[: As I)erclause Ilo. 21.5 ol`I..S 1180 (Part-1) 2014

Note:Tol-acilitaletesling,[Link]-ormers
simiillaiieously.

02 .|ir:dEdTii::.io the I-ouioie tests, the following type iesis, are to be carried outatcpRl/ NABLAccredited third parly

Laboi-atoryoranyothei-GovtrecognizedTeslliouseTi-ansformersforsuclitestsaretobemanufactiiredasperrelevai``
lechmcdl specificalion and approved drawiiig and sholild be [Link] for preliminary testing like rouline and
temperature rise test at lowest tap position prior lo type lesls, by WBSEDCL's testini], `vHlg. A[`ter successli"
complelioiiol`[Link],lraiisformersmaybeseiilfol-lypelestsAftersuccessfulcompletionorTypetesls`he
traiisrormer win be sealed b.v WBSEDCL [Link] Wiiig.
C:))i}T¥;:iT`s`,tt,>:t¥`;:,,:;:;3::*grt:t[:;s.:Y::{{:is`L:ed:I:dLs?L,e:S`:,L:°o::e::::°:':p:pL:C:L::d:`,atsca\:]eN[ociLN;(:)1:I(:i:fit8SoL(Lp8a::.Pt;r2t#42:ii:ewdveshaT)eoi

AH 11"} related [Link] & arrang{:iiienls foI-condiictiiig siich lesls are t.o be borne by lhe manufacturer. The Type [Link]

:|Taen::s°:~,;TeTLe[';,:L:I,y;eBa!:C;%¥|.:;:'t-.::lei:`a:.L['svoen°L:nDt|Dc'o#S{.EL%:tL6;I:::iTt:::io°t%::-,:at,C::I::fma:rt'::aT,::t`{tc,`°ef,t:TseL:1,::I;L`6actu'er`Tt
€

03. The nianuf:]clurei-have lo subiiiit thermal calculatlon of-short circuilwithstand ability for 2 seconds and 3 seconds.

0 't c t:;t:-i::'T: : |`vr,:h:tttTa:tedr„`eg; t`:]t. :]ha: Ltst]Td°ar,t`` :`grec,uL)I:eft?,ne:.:Ttt`:]tta I::iT\'eL:i,`ttattt:cfaiee]:Tf:ceLrsa:L; I:es[Losret : I rAc[L[` i :I:: t::.: I::,i:.:tt:::,rss :!``:t[`]yLJo:

wiiidiiigs roi-2 seconds.

TlielemperaturemthewiiidingafteI-2secs,ol`overc`irrenlmuslnotexceed200oCforAland',7r`ni`CforCuwmdings.

ThelransformersotesleclshaHnotexhibitmorethan2percentvariationinpercentageaftertheshortcir€uittestfroni
theorigina]measuredvaluebeforetestingaccordingtoclause16.11.5.4ofIS:2026(Part-5).

05 [Link]:
test as per [Link] ill
lnspei"n&TesUngol-11":eqiHpmenl/materialsshallbesiibjecledtoroutme&otheracceplance
the relevant. I.S.1180(Part-1) of 2014. uid to reject eitlier I-aw
WBSEDCL,reservestherigh`-tosendltsEngiileersifso,clesii-ed`ow`tliessmanufacturiiigprocec;.`and also shall have the
[Link] o}-l`iliislied
I I Ill |\, I ,,,, `, \ ,.---- __ prod``cls found lo be notI-I- complying with requiremeill of the specification
1 t` _ __ L --L-

riglntoselectany/all]eqiiipiiientfromthelotofreredfoT`tests.

Themanufaclurei`[Link](15)daysadv-all,cc-.`I`^,ticeregarding\readinessofsuchlnspectionandtestmg
andshallsubimtlheselso(`worktestcertificatesofthematerials/equipmentofferedforlnspectionandtestingindicaling
probable date of lnspecttt)n and testing.
Tlie siipplier shall arrange aH possible faciltlies i-ot- such [nspectioii and testing at any time [Link] tlie course {)[`
manufactui-ing, free of. cost.

The transformer may be staged inspected at the raclory of the manuractu[.ei-. The manufailiiier shaH intimale H`
advance in writing [o the purchaser about the stages of manufacture & subsequentreadiness ofth€ transformers
lo enable the purchasei-to carry out stage inspection & final inspection and testingof the finished transformers.
Thestageinspectionwillbecarriedoutatthediscretionofthepurchaserduringtheprocessofmanufactiiringofthe
[Link]-neednotstoptheprocessofproductionbecauseoftheprogrammeofstageinspectioiio`-
lh€ Purchasei-.

Tlies[ageinspectioiiw"[Link]
[Link]{``HHofthePurchaser.

[Link]:
I)) Na me plates Should
1`-1.1`-r.___-_ - P:_Tej.:.:£,(lil::,::d+r°]`:1:}::r::T}:I,:Sw°,ftt:ht:Tetr:aanns]:°art[ii::. two opposite corners are to be provlded Wlth
\ . _ -_

li) The
I I , +~ I-bolts coiinecting
+~ - __ _ _ top [Link] of the transformer with seali,18
1 _ _ I__.-_.`J .|t

holes at their lower portions which lt would go beyoiid iiuts so

i.I L= -r ai:, !r i ;i,`
VI}ire in these holes
o1 \-`:*rf.
:,:`,,Lng&:,?*{pe :f¥`qi-'!.`:,-.? _!``t J
i't''t``:i,i;\tlfy.
CE,C&Thun
cE,!&,nfbq4ElqACE, DTD

-I rux* N**,irfi¥rfu# I Na±,pife

pf&[Link]``i. cET``.5i-S`t`h.'. cE`,IT&`C CE,
`..+

--,,,*,`tr`\<"1§?,ky

DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
E' Distn. SE,-P&E`P`i`st`fi
10/20 a i <
 o6 Testcertificates:-

06.01 Seven Copies of Test Certificates i.r.o offered [Link] are to be furnished to WBSEDCL rot. acceptatice
before issuance of instruct-ion for dispatch of the equipment

21. BRIthmRIHIH iElizREHmREEil

i)TheGeneraloutlinedrawinggivingdetailsofdimensionsoffittingsshouldbesubmittedforeachtypeoftraiisformel-
indicating there on physical centre line & position of centre of gravity.
ii) Cross sectional drawing showing various parts including core coil assembly.
iii)Sketchesforratingplate,Netweiglitofcore&winding,tank,oil,totalweight,POno,propertycolumn&giiaranteec`
loss figiires.
iv) The drawing of the property plate mentioning the items to be provided.
v) Drawing for Marshalling Box along with the wiring diagram.

22. GuarantiJL`il technical Particulars of equipment offered as per Scheditle-A sliould be subniitted by the tenderet-s.
Performance guaranteed s`hall be based on Guaranteed Technical particulai.s (G.T.P.). i

23. QEEEiiQ_L4DL±C_IH
Each transformer shall be capable of carrying sustaitied overload as stated is ]S: 6600.

24. QELR__FLUXJEL
Over fluxing in the core shan be limited to 100/o so that the flux density in the core does not exceed " Tesla (19000
ine/sq. ",.). i
The maxiinum flux density in any part of the core under such condition shaH not exceed 19000 lines/sq. cm. On the basis
ofM4,M5&M6gradesasperls:601Part-2:1973(Specificationforsheetandformagneticcircuitsofelectricalapparal`is
I

oriented steel).

25. =¥hNes:i::}¥a]:I:e°:::ecLfied in |s: 335_ig8o and it shall free from moisture and have uniform quality throughout.

a. Use of recycled oil is not acceptable.

C. Oil sliau be filtered and [ested for breakdown voltage (BDV) and moistiire content before filling.
D. The iH shall be filled under vacuum.
E. The design of the materials and processes used in the manufacture of transformer, shall be such as to reduce to. €i
minimum the risk of development of acidity in the oil.
F. The transformer oil is to be procured from reputed manufacturer only. Durin+g inspection of transformel' the
maniifacturer wilt have to submit the complete test report as collected from the oil manitfacturer, whetiever asltecl,
failing which the transformer will not be accepted.
G. The manufacturer will have the facilil-y of the following test at their works:
1. Breai<down voltage
2. A`-i(\ity test
3. Moistitre coiltent test
4. Resistivity test at 270C and al-900C

Note:[Link]
transformer.
t

26. 'AN]FE=Re¥a£LPEaft¥To¥'t¥]: AtFa¥Sf%:E¥rE£'irt:h the exception of the individual core laminations, core bolts and associatecI

clanlpiilto,iilatesshallbemaintainedatsoniefixedpotentialandcoreshouldbeearthedatlwopoints.

Anything not covered by this specification will be as per relevant lss/ lEC Specifications.
(

a4Q±±NTI±ngGARRA_NGAMEA!±
The Mounting arrangement shall be as per clause no.14 [Link] 1180 (Part 1) of ls2014 or latest amendment thereof. The
transformer may also be placed on elevated concrete base. However the centre to centre distance of holes of the base
chailnels to be used for fixing in pole struclure shall be 415 mrn withoiit any tolerance.

29. BAI±J±l{;_``..i DIAGRAM PLATE: `

2 9. 0 t cAo :ant::tg[ oP:adt:a :reaa,:t[,n5et::: rdgart:uSp: evc::[teadgef nLth£ Le#vn; Ciavu ::]Srr°efn't: ptetr::n::::t, I:}p°efd : ,::e: LWo':'sC:, gs`',Trae',I `# :I,:`e:.:

naine, serial no., Voltages at different Tap positions along with HV winding showing the tappings etc. are lo be
provided aloiig with the transformer.
to be mentioiiecl.
I weight of finished l-raitsformer along with the untanking
eed maxim tf mp ris I & winding [Link]
¥-#i3cat;,`i
l- . k;f,i..,\q5q
I:i--ispL;-:,::;;.`::':
I
-`Es::-iia===?.
DE,DTD,. AE,P&CD
`\
ACE, P&CD ``,\ 11/20 ;`,`' i: ;{
 29°4[]::tLdt|::i:::ff:gal:rdc:°oS,:SL;|teLD°T°R°^::::eds;::c:SLL:°E°(9h'c::,:L`(yBL°et:ea2to7f5[`;C}LL;:°(Baertn]Le)]T::.°2ttoe]d,'tsh°Lt}C"enTentto'ted

29.05 The Guaraliteecl values ofTemperatilre rise ortop oil &windingare to be mentioned.
29.06 "PropertyofwBSEDcl." isalso tobe mentioiied.
29.07 Tlie [Link] also be markedwith standard iiiarkasperclaiise no.13.4ofls 1180 (Part 1)of2014.
?`,

30. MAXIMUMAI.I,OWABI_.ELO±€S__VAlj_U_ES__AND_%"_PEDA_N_£E±

Voltage Ratio Percentage Total Loss at 50% Total Loss at 100% Loadiiig
I_I.I_1_pe±an_ce Loading in Watts ln Wat-I-s

475.00 1650.U()

Note: The Total loss figures at 50 Hz and at 750C at 50% & 100% loading as noted above shall not exceed 7.50% as pei.
clause no. [Link] of IS 1180(Part-1) of 2014.

31. :;eutTa:.=,Pst::.:[F::hf:jr:taj]si==:-t::=t:Targs=ranteed tecitntca[ pat-ticu|ars of equipnient offei-ed as per schedltle. Pet-I-Ortllatl{.e

guaraiitee shall be based on giiaraliteed technical [Link].

32. c:;:;::::=::::g::::::::=:::::::::::=::=:::::=:: eqiHpnieiit supplied to vatious organization shalHlave to be f`urnlshed ill

`-riplicate aloiig with the teiider. +

33. T¥iaiongwithbid,in supportorsupply,deljveryatconsigneestores ([Link].O.,SRV,

Challan etc ) of identical type & rating transformer and also higher capacity with same voltage Ratio and type, to the Govl
& Power Utilit.y, indicatiiig thereon iiames of the Organization, quantity ordered, quantity suppliol ,`long with the teilder.
Credentials foi-Purchase oi-ders shall be within last 3(three) financial years from the date of opening of bid (If opening
dale extended, the lst meiitioned date for opening, shall be considered foi-submission of credential).

34.
T=:::::=:=:=:i::::::£==::E=i;;:i:===:=::::i:i::==clausesasperEnergyEfficiencyLevel-2specifiedmIS:1180(Parl-
1):2014, copper wound 100 KVA; 33/0.41,5 KV transformer from the Govt. standard test Laboratories/G-ovt. approved
laboratories/NABL accredited tliird party laboratory shall be submitted along with the tender for all Type & Special tests
mentioned in relevant clause of IS 1180 (Part 1) of 2014.
The biddel-should submit Test Report of Short circiiit Test and Lightning Impulse voltage {i`st report etc. for the
rating they are offering along with drawing conducted fi-om CPRI, NABL accredited laboratory of third party
/Govt. approved laboratories carried out within Five years along with their offer having identical rating and type as
that of the lenderL.d item as pro-requisites mentioned in GCC, failing which their offer may not be technically
accepted.
Tlie type & special test certi[`icates for an I-atings shaH Iiot be iiiore than 5 years old from the date opening of-the tendei`.

35. Deviations:-
All deviatioiis from the specificalion shall be recorded in the 'Deviation Sheet' with reference to I „pectiye Clauses of tlie
[Link] by drawing4specification for the same. Uilless deviations are recorded ill. the deviation sheet and submittecl
with the offer, it will be takeii for granted that the offer is made in conformity with specification.

36. ifel_idityperi_Qdr

36.01 Validity period of the offer shall be reckoned from the next date of opening of tender providedit is technically
& commercially complete one. Otherwise, it will be counted from the date of receipt of complete information.

36.02 Anything ilot coveriiig by this specification, will be as per relevant CEA/ REC specifical iJiii & ISS/CBIP manual. J,

37. STORE TESTING:

Store testing of supplied DTR at WBSEDCL/vendor store may be done at the discretion of WBSEDCL.

38. FITTINGS:-
The I-ollowing fittings shall be provided with the Traiisformers.
I::i) :;n:i::i] t:]'i`t:ttn::::8:,:::s:-t;:ill:isrd:,l':n:5: ,:Pd::I:;:{::::¥]ret :I: i:;g:.sa: : :l,:ted:i: )1{Ocatl on wl tll in a rlw`i g o f ed rtl,i.i\ii g

````
) :` t
Pole / plint-ll mountmg arrangement.
i .`.Silica gel breather. . i
`\,
-::-=--:T:::::---:,i-:i:i-- `` ..-J.i.:+: f
r! •',i'i,.1r-,,``£=,
4'
T

P&E Distn.
,

CE, Distn
\`+ I. `..
cf-:lid,cii`\'-i,! c D£ \
`€ : . - .`.;! -,rfe
I \ ,,

`\tt
i,tt,\€`\`.\``Llt
cr.- i?i+\nI
E, P&CD ACE,Co+in:¥..a:€i3:jntyr\` ACE,Project-Ill ACE,P&E Distn. sE,~p,?,i,:ri`:th:I ngor
DF,DTD, AF.,P&CD
12/20
 i::;:;';i:lysi:y:::¥ii;:*i:i¥iiitiii::i:ii:¥¥¥:::isi:::;¥iT::¥ii:i:i:ii:itit:ci::ie::d|t::i::e::tL:c:.:::u::tr::]r:::I:a:reL„gsotTtheconse]V`t.t
xvii) Pocket forplacing oTl probe ontop [Link] pocketshould be placed on an elevated' base from top cover
xviii) Thermometer pocket with suitable cap as near to the centre of the top cover aspossible.

;I:X}: ::;:L:n:lfe:aLis:e:¥s:pu:8::S#L:I::::I;H:iiiL:s:tt:I:fg:a:n:#Y:e:e:nc:::ichh °LZ ReL ay an d the cons ervaior

xxii) One thermometer pocket on tank top cover placed as near to the centre of of core yoke as possible witli siritable
threaded cap in addilion to the pocket for OTI
xxiii) Oil level gauge in l-he conservator as specified.
xxiv) Deliydrating Breather as specified lo be filled in the breather pipe of conservator.
xxv) Terminal connectors atHV& Lvterminals as specified
xxvi) Lifting handle for taiik top cover

39. Sis_ETCODIFICATION_tyLQ±

Asset codification no. for the ordered quantity shall be comlpunicated to the supplier after placement or ordet..
Necessary Engrave/Embossing (cold punch) shall be done on the main tank with 28 no font size and DTR nami`
anddiato,[Link]`thanthatusedforlnarkingKVAratingofthcDTR.
]f cold punch on the tank is not possible then separate property plate(details marking of th.c plate shall bL`
submittedwiththetransformcrdrawingforapproval)shallbewelded[othetankwithtlicfollow]ngdctails:-
1. Ratings:
2. Manufacturer's [Link].:
3. Manufacturer's Name:
4. [Link].:
5. Month/Year of Manufacturing:
6. Guaranteedfor5Years
7. Property of : WBsl.:I)CL

8 ¥g::rEgn¥to:£e:fcj,eT:mcwg[:r:yp(eo'|,2:a£Si;,I:tart:lil; ;:n:uo#:e:rr|:-:I::°¥fb2e°r: 4a.s a I I o tte d by th e p u rch a`se r)

§;t:jr:%[;t:§§E[7:i:,:fo:,:¥§::¥±L:¥:;5[e;::rr:;tn¢;:;]0:¥y=C=:ao¥:::n:F]a::b:eLep=\r:I;t;:I:uanndT:[e:::tbc
\

40. 1HT±NG_EQI±IPJ±4IENI:£E±

KV Meter for 33 KV system

Volt Meter (0-1000V)
Mill-Ammeter for leakage current(0-100ma)
PowerAnalyzerofreputedMake(Shoulddisplay3-Phcurrent,voltage,wattandZ3-a]Power).
Meggar -2.5 KV
Thermometer (Preferably Digital): 0-1000C
TTR Meter
WindingRcsistanceMeasurement(PreferablyELTELorreputedmakc)
[Link]&cor..balanceofllKVsystcm. t
Clamp on Ammeter(0-300A)
Instrumentformeasuringthethicknessofcliffercntlayersofpainting.
Instrument/EquipmentsrequiredfortestingofpaintingasperIS1180(Pclrt1)of2014.
[Link].21.5ofls1180(Part-1}20,14
b`+u[EJrLII,lui JLvi I+A `._`,__ _ ___
~ .,., L__ __L _ _ ..__ rt^...`n nn ?1 E= f`f ]q 1 1 Rn rprlrt-1] 2014
[Link];sperClaus`eno.21.5ofls1180(Part-1}
JLJIWJLt,lL,,++ ,.-- __ _ - .- _ fL____f,___.Jn-A:I -j
Test set for measuring Breakdowin voltage of transformer oil.
Tes`tkitformeasurementofacidityoftransformeroil.. •``2

Moistul.e f,t:ra!iLs£&rpT`,9': 'P ft I ,`

Test
ACE, DTD
IT&Crii?C f:-`il,,\\t\\.|+`'

DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
CE,P&E Distn.
ACE, p&cD ACE,c:;kein;'rfeu:h;.;`::iT;¥:;'+:-`` ACE, Project-Ill 13/20 3 `
 xviii} Testsetformeasurementofrcsistivityat270Cand at900C.
Al,I. THE ABOVE TESTING EQUIPMENTS SHALI, BF, AVAILABLE IN THE TESTING LAB AND SHOULD 81.:
CALIBRATEI) FROM NABL ACCRIDIATED LA130RATORY
COPY OF CAI,IBRATI0N CERTIFICATI.:S AS` PER GCC Cl,AUSE NO.8 [Link] BE AVAILABIjF, WITH THE BIDI)I.:R
AS ANS WH13N REQUIRED.
•,,

¢'
-ii::tt-i-.;::-`i .i¥rf,v ,,,.-:1:,-T\(-,"
I

!.'
i`f. `` `1,

P&E Distn. CE, Distn. CE, IT&C c,!j cE, corfeis:#:£H#` i~-g¥i''i? ®por8
CE, P&CD
P&CD CE DTb ACE,DTD``
1
(``, ` t\1\;\`etk;\t.
rf
rii]c c`;+e``,+\|v
u§,A" \ 10
'1\
1,

:, P&CD ACE, Project-Ill

ACE,coin\i+uhi€';i,`:i:+L\r'=;cE,F ACE,P&E Distn.
i
`.S.E, ,PdeE::6,!Qi`-:`.`
i.-,!.. /''\
s' `'\
¥f*g€ DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
14/20 ` `
1`\
 SCHEDULE 0F GUAIIANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
SCHEDULE-A
(As ®p-er clause Ilo.22 of the Specifical-ion)
(To be fiirnished and signed by the tenderer)
Item Size :100 KVA; 33/0.415 KV Stn Service DTR
I [Link].1
Particulai-s

Name of the manufacturer

2 Country of origin I
2(a) Wliether the manufacturer has the BIS certification for
manul;[Link] the item offered?
If yes, Energy efficiency level for which BIS certification is \
submitted?
2(b) Whether the manufacturer has uploaded Type, Special & other
test reports required for BIS certification for manufacturing
the item offered?
3 Applicable standard
T---
4 Maximuiii continuous rating in KVA

5 No load voltage ratio (In KV/KV) t,,

6 Rated frequency (in HZ)

7 Number of phases

8 Type o! Cooling ._- .- .-` _

9 Connections

(i) H.V. Winding

(ii) L.V. Winding

10 Vectoi :\'inbol

11', (i) Temperature also under normal operation condition above

ambient temperature

(a) Top oil (in De`g.C.) tG

(b) [Link] (in Deg.C)

------. --------.--.---.~ __ ---` . -` ` -`

(ii) Maxiinum hot spot temperature of winding (in Deg.C) •--._-------------------`-_-`--

12 Magnetising current referred to H.V. at rated frequency

(a) At 90% rated voltage (in Amps)

+

(b) At 100% rated voltage (in Amps)

_---------.-~-`--_`-``

6=##g#RE __ii`{`,:a,--
I

|trtyf ::[Link]

ACE,\ TD
CE, P&E Distn. CE, Distn. C-E, IT&C\
fair-£ftr'L,3' •\4`\ft\{l"
sjfa~€S`\:.ut DE,DTD, AE,p\&.cD
ACE,P&CD
ACE, P&CD AC ' ACE,
ACE, PProject-Ill
15/20 }
 (c) At 112.5% rated voltage (in Amps)Powerfactorofmagnetisiligcurrentat 100% rated voltage &

I---i=
frequency
-1-+,\1--,----..-.~-----.---_-__ >
14 No [Link] curreiit at rated voltage and rated frequei3cy (in Amps)

15I No load loss in watt at i`ated frequency & voltage

16 Load loss in Watt at 75 Deg C. At rated oiitput and frequency

at 100% loading & at 50% loading in watt
17 Total Loss at 50 Hz & 750C at 1000/o Loading in Watt
18 Total Loss at 50 Hz & 75°C at 50% Loading in Watt
+
19 Percentage Regulation at i-ul] load at 75 Deg.C.

(a) At uiiity power factor

(b) At 0.8 power factoi-lagging

20 Efi;=i=i==T:s at 75 Deg.C. (ill percentage) ::`

(a) At i-ull load

_--. -----.------.---..--.----.. -----.`---.---.---. --.-----_-_--._ ` --.--. --. --.. ` . -` -- _ -

(i) At unity power factor

(b) At 3/4 full load

(i) At unity power factor

+

(ii) At 0.8 powei-factor lagging

(c ) At 1/2 full load

-
(i) At Unity power [Link]

(ii) At 0.8 Powc:I-factor lagging

21`____-- Impedance voltage on rated kvA base at rated current and

f[-equency at 75 Deg.C (in percentage)
-
22123 (a)Resistance voltage at rated current and frequency at 75
Deg.C (in percentage) "

(b) Reactance voltage at rated current and frequency a[ 75 Deg.C

(in percentage)
_
Resistance a[ LI.V. base at 75 Deg.C

(d) HV (between lines) (ohms)

b) LV (between lines) (ohms) J,L

24 Reactance at H.V. base at 50 c/s

t=iiE

f,,; a., . i. i
EEEEEEEa;,i?tiji`{ct;i !. .¥. '

=E , P&E Distn. CE, Distn. CE, IT&C ACE, DTD

lS -, ,",i,^fa£_ i-`.h-,,`Si\1\fi*,,"
RE.:_CD `cR3£::::
ACE, Project-Ill ACE,P&F nistn. ``S.E, P&E~` sErfe€BT\€qu DE,DTD, AE,p&cD
ACE, p&cD ACE,coin-:.{:`pif':.-:
16/20 i
 I!!

25 Withstand time without injury for three phase dead' short circuit `,

at teriH i Hill (in seconds):

26 Short time current rating for short circuit with duration

----__-_(a)[Link](inKAmps)r.(b)[Link](inKAmps)

(c ) Duration in seconds)
27 Permissible over loading with time at max amb. temp

a) 125`/'d load after running with 500/o load with steady temp
ri`se. (hrs.)

b) 125% load after runniiig with 100% load with steady temp
rise. (hrs.)
1

28 Core :
_
(i) Type :

(ii) At 112.5% rated voltage at 50 HZ (in line/sq cm)

t
(iii) Thickness of Stamping±ji±±P±H)(ivTypeofInsulationbet-weencore lamination(v)ApproximateareaofCrossSectionofCoreand yoke (in

[Link])(vi)Material of core clamping plate

(vii) Thickness of Core clamping plate (in mm)

a

(viii) Insulation of Core clamping plate

(ix) Describe local-ion/Method of Core grounding

29 Terminal Arrangement _
(i) high voltage

(ii) low Voltage

30 Positi\J`' Sequence lmpedaiice betweeii HV & LV winding on

rated KVA base at`rated ciirrent and rFequency at 75 Deg.C.
Winding temperature (in percent).ZeroSequenceImpedanceatreference [Link] of 75

31
Deg.C (in percent)

32 Details ofwindings :
`,

(i) Type of Winding :

a) High Voltage ;

b) Low Voltage \

.`'T_.,isS%-thDEJ T[D7'/2o!-., *-ry;3lsi!.`r

of,,f.}.1iiP, (ii) Ma`,Lerial of the windin,.g cgnductor ..
edELff
¥ifaistn`.&cD At
::::`..:-I I

'J ```.'\i``i?~,'.. .'Eipif:i .,

E,:kfhin`erfr'#i#:\n*~'{`.J ACE, pro#T Ag5:\&tE\ ::stn `\S

-I-- ``--:+
 _-----------.-_- ._-__-----------`--_ ___._-.--. -
------__. -~-.-.---.` ------__-_---------.---------..- `
II
(a) High Voltage : _--.------.-----.`-------------__
_- - - - - - .`-`- ,1- - .- .`- - .-_.- - _ .- - - -.- . -`.'- .-.- .- - _ _- - -.- .-_-`_-_- - -_
I
fty-±qu+Ip:li?g-eL---------------.::-------
(iii) Current densil-y of winding at rated KVA. _---.-----------------.-
`_._`----.----.---------_1` `

(a) High Voltage (Amp per [Link]) _---------- I

(b) Low vo i tage (A in p s pe r S q . cm )
._-1-_--.-.------------.-.-`-`
_._-------------.----------`----``--(iv)Insulatingmaterialusedfor--,,

-
+

-------_(b)Lowvoltagewinding .
I
------_ t -------------.-. `-`
(v) Insulating material usecl between -
• dino €

.-_-.----_33iI._-------
- - - ___-- - - _-
®

(b LOb
wvoltagewindinoaiiclcore --.--
-----.-----. ----

I i su lati o n w i ths ta i d res t Vol ta ges -_-----------.__(d)LightningImpulsewithstandtestvolCage(KVPeak)(ii)Powerfrequencywitlistandtestvoltage(inKV

t'

---i
rms for 1 mtn) _._----.-------_ _-----------------_`---
L-------I _---------------.-----.--.--------_-
ii ----.---

\L---.-3-4---L_---35lL--Ii,36 Currentin thewindingatrated KVA

(d)lnducedovervoltagewithstandtestvoltage(inKVrms)__----------.--.--------_-

0(i) Low vol Cage (i n Amps)

~~_..~__
_---._
t(i )HighVoltage(inAmps)

__-
_----------_ _-------.-----._-

Voltage per turn (KV per turn) --I--

'..

Ampere titrn
^-_-+-i
__----------------------------------.-_ I1i i-\i +i,.f'?i\D

i: 37
i:Niimberofturiisi ----._
---__-__-.---------

i (i) Low Voltage _-- - - - -. - -`___+__-_- - - - - - - :- - -, ?,!`.`.- IJ-`-`- ,AACE,DTD

: -.__ . ------------ --- ------
. ----.--i---.-.-------- -. --.----___
._`_-.-.-.--.-..---.-<
-.
I•!, (i i) High Voltage

`. -.I
` . i.`=`.•,t.:,!S-#S--,
'iri3-rTO.--6TTab-pOTiifofrs,-rdiTBF6-rv6TEaFe~va~FTa-tiofi-&~NarTiialiTp
- .,L#

-. cEcalke::
, ''..`.
Er('`.s E'.:\+.
P&E Distn.E,P&CD A C` \|, p&fl:,`b;sthi`n6strfeEfe:.'ft#DE,DT±D:,2O§t`AE,P&,I .` -,.`
:i:'D,stn C ,ACE,Pro#===f ff?,;lE\:stn,
 High Voltage Low Voltage

(iii) Applicable standard

(iv) Insulation withstaild l-est voltage

---.-------- ==--------------..-.--------..--.-----.---..----- _-_'.-._-_-._

(d) Li{!1" iiing Impulse withstand lesl voltage (1.2 x 50

micro seconds (in KV Peak)

(b) Power frequency withstand test voltage (in KV for 1 min )

_ ----.--------------------.- _._ ---

(v) Creepage distance in air

(i) Tot.i! (,n mm)

(ii) Protected (in mm)

(vi) Minimum height of the busliing

_._ -.----------------.--------.-----.- _--_ _--

Miniliiiiiii clearance (in mm)

._ . _ --.,-.----------------------------------- = -----.----.---. I ---- _===__`

LuJft
Between live conductive part-s and [Link] parts to
earthed structure Between Phcisc` to

Phases , Gr(7iintl

(ii) L.\'.
•`.. _1 --.- ~~ .--. ` ----.-----.-.----. ` -----.- `-- _ ` -

40 Approximate weight of Transformer (in Kgs)

_--__ _ ------------.----- _` -_

(i) Core with clamping

__ __ ------ _=_ .._-

(ii) Coil with Insulation

_ ___ ------.------- __ __'. -

(iii) Cot.(` and winding

iI
i (iv) Tank and fitting with accessories

(v) Un-tanking weight

(vi) gil required for tile transformer

L----
_-_----------------_
(vii) Total weight with Core, Winding, oil and fittings
_-----.--------_
41 Details of Tank
- -
• r_i\ e`. (. Typeoftank
'..t
r,•-1\;`&P
. -----------.------------------_-_ `\

\ucE,/;;€:;\;`-;; t`.;;fr` c(:: Ui;7:t`:.Si: ;,+t,i,r \`ACE,Project-Ill ``.S Ai:iq.,aL;.{+f-- ..-,i,=,..,``i.:+`,,`bisth.\\

i.i,
ACE,lDT&:
E Distn.&CD AC

`. . -. ? .3E,.P&ELilf-:.I`-.\; \':-*-.,\i.!i,i,i

CE `\* DE,DTD, AE,P&CD

19/20 a. `
 (in nlm)
(ii) Appl-oximate thickness ol` Sheet

(a) Sides

1_------..-------_
I..,,,+t~-.-..----

(b) Bottom __-------.`._--------.---..-----.-.-. ---.. -. -.-_

_`_--.---

_-.__--------_I ---------- ----'

(c `,` Cover
_---------.---------.----`-
(iii) Vacuum withstand capacity __------.-----.-----`
1)

(iv) Diiiiensioii of base channel (in mm x mm _---------_---` _--------------.-.-.-----_-`

---.----`

-----
42 -_----------,.----.---.-.--,..,.-_
-.-..-- ~---`

(i) Applicable standard ---_

-,,-_------ -------.. -.-__-.----.------``__.----.-. -------_
--..--``
(ii) Total quality of oil (ill litres)

--
__-_

Appro,xinate overall Dimensions (in mm)

(a) Length
_-----_-

(c) I-leighl _-------.----.-----`--..`-nlbushiiigfrom_-------------...----.---_

----_------.---------------------.----.--_
_------.-------------`-_
(d) MinimiHii height of [Link] most
bottom of base chanr,el •-------
_ .------------..-----...---. `_-` --

inimum clearance height for lifting tank

-

___-------..i-.--.-----
cover (in mm)`._,..---------------.' - _-.---------------`--.---`
a tesl ancl oil:ificat-io,ldtestinline witli
A/hether they liave facility foi-Air pressure ------ --
_-----.-__----.---.-.---..--_ +-------I
_1,-.--.-
eake~g_g_r=?_s.t±!|_l..i|e~w_I.i_l] t!±ticlli±lLfleE
hether they have facility for painting an
lh€: technical specification
-_.----------------------------------_-
•_----.-----._ItheTop [Link].
_.----.----__- _----
Marking : whether agreeable to
Punching of transformer Sl. No. on

I
Transformer Rating and Diagram
sset codification number shall be
-._.------.------------_`._____
-- --.-. --_-inthetestingNo.40.00
ist of. te`sting etiuipments available
4.8 b. of manufacturer in line with Cl.
_.._---.----
_---_---

Signature
Name
Designation
Company Seal

i ..,, t`.`.*'-;,, :i,:

E=rt=

-i.
ACE, DTD

CE , P&F_ Distn.
i.i,-c iff tc*i -,,,
CB`, Communication
CE, DTD
C``i`i.;!.ifai`{:,1:
a+i--`? •`S`,l:-,,t\,u :u::f-*:i/`,
~
#ffi_grfi k`i: P&E nist-n
1.i

stn.
sE=iB,a,E,bt:
i:a'-.
DE,DTD, AE,P&CD
f.,~,_ ``` + --,-
ACE, Project-Ill \ ;i-;* sSife}gdys 2:alto `.<.-.a
ACE, P&CD ACE,[Link]
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
12KV,800A,18.4KA,MULTI PANEL
(Incoming, Bus Coupler and Outgoing)
SHUNT TRIP, INDOOR TYPE
SCADA COMPATIBLE
SWITCHGEAR WITH MOTOR
OPERATED SPRING CLOSING
VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

1.0 CODES & STANDARDS:

Ratings, characteristics, tests and test procedures, etc. for the 11kV metal-clad
switchgear panels and all the protection relays, measuring and indicating instruments and the
control and monitoring devices and accessories, including current transformers and voltage
transformers shall comply with the provisions and requirements of the standards of the
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), IS where specified.
The latest revision or edition in effect at the time of bid invitation shall apply. Where
references are given to numbers in the old numbering scheme from IEC it shall be taken to be
the equivalent number in the new five-digit number scheme. The bidder shall specifically state
the precise standard, complete with identification number, to which the various equipment and
materials are manufactured and tested. The bid document may not contain a full list of
standards to be used, as they only are referred to where useful for clarification of the text.

Standard Name / No Standard’s Description

Indian Electricity Rules 1956 Latest edition

Indian electricity act 2003 Latest edition
Switchgear and control gear IEC: 60694, IEC: 60298, IEC: 62271-200, IEC: 60529. IS: 3427, IS
12729, IS 12063, IS:13947, IS: 9046
Circuit Breaker IEC 62271-100, IS 13118, IS 2516
Vacuum Interrupter IEC 60056
Current Transformers IEC:60185, IS 2705

Voltage Transformer IEC:60186, IS 3156

Indicating Instruments IS:1248

Energy Meters As mentioned in Technical Specification of Energy Meter

Relays IS 8686, IS 3231, IS 3842
Control switches and push
IS 6875
buttons
Electromagnetic IEC 61000
Compatibility
Arrangement of switchgear IS 375
bus bars, main connection
and auxiliary wiring
Code of practice for IS 6005
phosphating iron & steel
Colours for ready mixed
IS 5
paints

2.0 Scope of Work: This Specification covers the design and engineering, manufacture,
testing at the manufacturer’s factory, painting, packing for transport, insuring, transportation by
road and delivery at destination point of 12 kV, 800 A, 18.4KA, Multi panel, shunt trip, Indoor
Type, motor operated, spring closing Vacuum Circuit Breaker having SCADA compatible
facilities and complete with all accessories as specified hereinafter.

2.1 UNIT OF MEASUREMENT AND LANGUAGE

In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings prepared by the
manufacturer, the metric units of measurement shall be used. On drawings or printed pamphlets
where other units have been used, the equivalent metric measurements shall be added. All
documents, correspondence, drawings, reports, operating and maintenance
instructions/manuals and nameplate details of the equipment shall be in English language.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:-

 From the geographical condition, the area where the switchgear panels shall be installed
is categorized into the tropical climate zone. In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard
shall be given to the humid tropical conditions under which the switchgear panels shall be called
upon to work. The manufacturer of the switchgear panels shall submit details of his usual
practice of tropicalization which have proven satisfactory for application to the switchgear panels
and associated equipments to prevent rusting and ageing in the tropical climate zone. The
applicable standards for tropicalization shall be listed.

Climatic condition: The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following
site conditions:

Max. Ambient Temperature 50oC

Max. Ambient Temperature for design purpose 40oC

Min. Ambient Temperature 4oC

Max. Relative Humidity 100%

Average no. of rainy days per annum 100 days

Elevation within 1000M from MSL

Maximum Wind Pressure 150kg/m2

Horizontal Acceleration due to seismic force 59/100

Pollution Level Heavily polluted atmosphere
 The switchgear panels shall be installed in a room without air conditioning but with ventilation
to allow natural cooling. Therefore all the protection and control devices employed shall be capable of
operating in this environment without failure for their designed life time. Particularly the power supply
modules of the protection and control devices shall be designed for minimum heat generation and
effective heat dissipation to ensure that the temperature of these devices enclosed in the relay panels
at the above listed ambient temperatures shall not exceed the maximum operating temperature
of the device.

3.1 Tropicalization

(a) All equipment must be designed for operations in the severe tropic climate conditions and
fully comply with climatic aging tests as per IEC 60932-class 2.
In choosing materials their finishes, due regard shall be given to the humid tropical
conditions under which the switchgear will be called upon to work. The manufacturer shall submit
details of his usual practice which have proven satisfactory for application to the parts of the
Switchgear panels, which may be affected by tropical conditions.

(i) Metals:

Iron and Steel are generally to be painted or galvanized as appropriate. Indoor parts may
alternatively have chromium or copper-nickel plates or other approved protective finish.
Small iron and steel parts (other than rustless steel) of all instruments and electrical equipment, the
cores of electromagnets and the metal parts of relays and mechanisms shall be treated in an
appropriate manner to prevent rusting.

(ii) Screws, Nuts, Springs, e.t.c.:

The use of iron and steels shall be avoided in instruments and electrical relays wherever
possible. Steel screws shall be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated or where plating is not possible
owing to tolerance limitations, shall be of corrosion resisting steel. Instrument screws (except those
forming part of a magnetic circuit) shall be of brass or bronze. Springs shall be of non-rusting material,
e.g., phosphor-bronze or nickel silver, as far as possible.

(iii) Rubbers:
Neoprene and similar synthetic compounds, not subject to deterioration due to the climatic
conditions, shall be used for gaskets, sealing rings, diaphragms, etc.

3.2 WORKING STRESS AND EQUIPMENT/APPARATUS DESIGN

3.2.1 General
a) The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they will not suffer
damage under the most adverse conditions nor result in deflections and vibrations, which might
adversely affect the operation of the equipment. Mechanisms shall be constructed to avoid sticking
due to rust or corrosion.
b) The equipment and apparatus shall be designed and manufactured in the best and most
substantial and workmanlike manner with materials best suited to their respective purpose and
generally in accordance with up-to-date recognized standards of good practice.
c) Whenever possible, all similar parts, including spare parts, shall be made interchangeable.
Such parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship and shall be constructed to such
tolerances as to enable substitution or replacement by spare parts easily and quickly.
d) All equipment shall be designed to minimise the risk of fire and consequential damage, to
prevent ingress of vermin and dust and accidental contact with electrically energized or moving
parts. The switchgear panels shall be capable of continuous operation with minimum attention and
maintenance in the exceptionally severe conditions likely to be obtained in a tropical climate and
where the switchgear is called upon to frequently interrupt fault currents on the system and also
where the duty of operation is high.

3.2.2 Strength and quality

a ) All steel castings and welding shall be stress-relieved by heat treatment before machining,
and castings shall be stress-relieved again after repair by welding.
b) Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout, especially in the design of all parts
subject to alternating stresses or shocks.

3.2.3 Designed data for low voltage equipment

Low voltage equipment and installation shall be designed in accordance with

EMC(Electromagnetic Compatibility, IEC 61000) directives. The rating and design criteria for low
voltage equipment shall be as follows:

AC Supply Rating system

i. Rated voltage between phase 415 V AC

ii. Connection type 3ph 4wire
iii. Rated voltage between phase to earth 240 V AC
iv. Grounding system PME
v. Frequency 50 HZ
vi. Voltage variation ± 10 %
vii. Frequency variation ± 5 %
viii. Power frequency 1 min, Test Voltage 3 kV
ix. Thermal rating of conductors 120 % of load
The AC supply shall be used for power circuit and for lighting, indication, motor controls
and similar small power circuits. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment provided under this
tender is to be capable of reliable operation at voltages as low as 85% of the rated voltage, and to
withstand continuously up to 110% supply voltage above the rated value of 240V or 415V AC.

DC Auxiliary Supply Rating

i. Equipment/Device Rated voltage 30V DC

ii. Connection type 2 wire.
iii. Voltage variation 24 to 40 V DC
The auxiliary dc supply shall be used for controls, indication, alarm, protection relays, and
circuit breaker tripping and closing circuit, etc. All equipment and apparatus including the circuit
breakers, protective relays, control devices and accessories, measuring and indicating instruments
and electronic equipment shall be capable of satisfactory operation at 80% to 130% of the rated dc
supply voltage. However, in case of VCB, for tripping the range should be 70% to 110% and for
closing that should be 85% to 110%.

3.2.4 Electrical controls, auxiliaries and power supplies

(a) Responsibility for electrical control and auxiliaries.

The manufacturer shall provide all control, indication, alarm and protection devices and
all auxiliary equipment with wiring and interconnecting cable which are integral parts of
or are directly associated with or mounted on the switchgear panels to be supplied under
this tender. The design of protection and control schemes for the switchgear panels shall
be subject to approval of WBSEDCL.
b) Operation and control.
Interlocking devices shall be incorporated in the control circuit to ensure
safety, and proper sequence and correct operation of the equipment. The scheme will be finalised
during detailed engineering and drawing approval.

3.2.5 Corona and radio interference

a) Switchgear shall electrically be designed to avoid local corona

formation and discharge likely to cause radio interference.
a) The design of jointing of adjacent metal parts and surfaces shall be such as to prevent
corrosion of the contact surfaces and to maintain good electrical contact under service
conditions.

b) Particular care shall be taken during manufacture of busbar and fittings and
 during subsequent handling to ensure smooth surface free from abrasion. All joints on the
busbar and the circuit within the switchgear board shall be silver or tin-plated to ensure good
electrical connection.

4.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence of
authority of documents shall be as follows –

4.1 Enclosure Type Dead front, floor- standing, rigid welded steel frames fully
compartmentalized, Metal clad, Vermin Proof, suitable for
indoor installation and provision for bolting to the floor.

4.2 Enclosure degree of IP 5X for High Voltage compartment and IP4X for Low Voltage
protection compartment
4.3 Enclosure Material CRCA steel
4.4 Load bearing members Minimum 2.5 mm thick
4.5 Doors and covers Minimum 2.0 mm thick
4.6 Gland Plate (detachable 3.0mm MS detachable type for 3 core cable and aluminium
type) 5.0mm for single core cables. Cable compartment shall have
an anti vermin guard plate for protection against entry by rats,
rodents etc.

4.7 Maximum Dimension of 700mmx2000mmx2700mm.

the Panel (WxDxH)

Maximum operating height Operating height 1800 mm (max).

of the panel
P
4.8 Extensibility The Switchgear shall be designed so that future units can
be added to each sides (unless coupled to other euipment).
of of Panel A removable plate will cover any unused openings in the
side of the panel.
4.9 Extension Bus and Bus In case of Single feeder panels, Identical Bus Bars and Bus Wires
Wires for connection with adjacent Incomer / Bus Coupler / Feeder
needs to be supplied.
4.10 Separate compartment for Bus bar, circuit breaker, HV incoming / outgoing cable,
LV instruments & relays.
4.11 Breaker compartment Separate with lockable handle (design with breaker trolley as
door the front cover is not acceptable)
4.12 Breaker to bus Through seal off bushings/Spout
bar compartment
4.13 Breaker to cable Through seal off bushings/Spout
compartment
4.14 Pressure relief devices To be provided for each HV Compartment. Each compartment
shall be separated from adjacent one by sheet steel barrier.
4.15 Bus support insulator Non hygroscopic, track-resistant, high strength, epoxy insulators
(calculation for validating dynamic force withstand
capability to be submitted during detailed engineering)

4.16 Fixing arrangement Concealed hinged Bolted with SS bolts and Neoprene rubber
i. Doors gasket , washer
ii. Covers
iii. Gasket
4.17 Required HV cable 550mm for 11KV
termination height in
the cable
4.18 compartment
Panel Base Frame Steel base frame as per manufacturer’s standard.
4.19 Handle Removable bolted covers for cable chamber and busbar
chamber shall be provided with “C” type handles

4.20 Prevention of Internal Arc Shall be type tested against internal arc as per provision in
IEC 62271-200. The Circuit Breaker, busbars and cable
compartments shall be provided with arc venting outlet. The
doors for the compartment shall be capable of withstanding
the effects of maximum internal arcing fault without being
blown off and causing danger to personnel and other
equipment. This should be proven by successful testing for
18.4 KA with duration 0.1 second as per relevant IEC
standard.
4.21 Test Terminal Block 13 Ways, 50A, 1100V with back connection. Dia of Entries
is 5 mm & overall dimension 250X50 mm, covered with
insulated cover. TTB should be suitable for 3 Phase 4 Wire
Energy Meter.

4.22 Multiway terminal Block Delinking type, Rail/Channel mounted, Terminal Connector
and low voltage wiring to be used in CT Circuit & Screw type for other Circuit. The
Terminal Blocks should be suitable for 2.5 [Link] wire and
covered with insulated transparent cover. Pitch should be
minimum 8mm & 10mm for Screw type & Delinking type
connectors respectively.
The low voltage cable shall be enclosed in grounded
metal conduit when routed through a high voltage
compartment. Control wiring shall be neatly bundled and tie
wrapped where applicable. Wiring shall be protected from
rubbing against door flanges or other parts of the
enclosure.
4.23 Cable Tray Netted Metal cable Tray of suitable size at the rear side of
Switchgear, preferably running at the top along the panel
for carrying the signal cables for SCADA interface to be
provided.
4.24 Remote Terminal Box To be provided suitably at the back side of the panel for
termination of the following cables :
A . Main AC / DC
B . Inter trip from up stream
C . SCADA related terminations
D . Inter connection for Differential protection etc.

4.25 Circuit Breaker

4.25.1 Mounting On withdraw able truck/trolley or carriage, with locking
facility in service position. Switchgear truck/trolley should
be floor mounted. Racking-in and Racking-out should be
such that one person can do it easily.
4.25.2 Switching duty a) Transformer oil filled and dry type
b) Underground cable with up to 10KM.

4.25.3 Interrupting medium Vacuum

4.25.4 Breaker operation Three separate identical single pole units operated through
the common shaft and shall be fully interchangeable both
electrically and mechanically. Circuit breaker poles between
the interrupters and primary plug-in contacts shall be fully
insulated with durable material. Each breaker shall be
provided with Mechanical ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ facility by operating
suitable closing and opening devices. each breaker shall be
provided with Mechanical ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ indicators. Each
breaker shall have three positions-service, test and
isolated/withdrawal marked. mechanical safety interlocks shall
be provided so that it is not possible for a circuit breaker
a. To be put into the cubicle unless the truck is secured in
position.
b. To be either draw out or draw in from and to the service
position unless its contacts are safely open.
c. To be withdrawn or inserted in the fixed housing unless it is
at the withdrawable position.
d. To be operated in service position unless its primary and
secondary isolating contacts are fully engaged.
e. The circuit breaker racking equipment can be padlocked in
closed position.
f. Electrical close/trip operation should be dependent on
Local/Remote switch. However, protection trip and emergency
trip circuit should be independent of Local/Remote Switch.

4.25.5 Operating mechanism Re-strike free, trip free both electrically and mechanically, with
electrical anti-pumping feature
One O-C-O operation possible after failure of power supply to
Local/Remote switch.
the spring charging motor.
Motor wound, spring, charged, stored energy type with
manual charging facility. One no. Breaker Truck operating handle
for every three panels needs to supply.

4.25.6 Trip and Closing Coil To be rated for substation DC voltage. Suitable for operation at
minimum operating voltage of 70% for tripping and 85% for
closing operation. Maximum Burden shall be about 250 watt for
each coil.
 4.25.7 Truck The circuit breaker shall be mounted on an inbuilt carriage to
facilitate isolation and withdrawal of the breaker. Trolley of the
VCB should be horizontally isolated and there should be a
minimum ground clearance of 0.55 meter between thimble
point of cable termination and GL. There should be a
minimum clearance of 300 mm between any 11kV live bus
and GL.
Trolley should be detachable from panel without any additional
supporting trolley i.e. VCB trolley itself move on ground level.
4.26 Breaker Indications and
push buttons

i) Electrical and Mechanical type in front of the panel

ON/OFF/Emergency trip ii) Emergency Off push button will be provided with a
4.26.1 push button protective flap in front of the panel.

4.26.2 Mechanical ON-OFF On breaker trolley front

indication
4.26.3 Operation counter On breaker trolley front
4.26.4 Test-service position On the front of the panel
indicator
4.26.5 Mechanism On breaker trolley front
charge/discharge indicator
4.26.6 Breaker positions Service, test and isolated
4.26.7 Inter changeability The Circuit Breakers of Incomer, Bus Coupler & Feeder
Panels should be interchangeable.
4.26.8 Breaker control On panel front only
Handle Breaker shall be provided with handles for easy handling,
4.26.9 rack in-out operation and manual spring charging as
applicable.
4.27 Functional Requirements
4.27.0 Interlock and safety devices
4.27.1 Breaker compartment door Cannot be opened unless breaker is OFF and racked out to
opening test/isolated position
4.27.2 Breaker compartment door Should be possible even when breaker in isolated position
closing
4.27.3 Racking mechanism safety Mechanical type
interlock
4.27.4 Racking in or out of breaker When the breaker is closed
inhibited
Racking in the circuit Unless the control plug is fully engaged
4.27.5 breaker inhibited

4.27.6 Disconnection of control As long as the breaker is in service position

plug inhibited
4.28 Additional Requirement
Exposure to live parts In case the breaker panel door is required to be opened
during a contingency, the personnel should not be exposed to
any live parts. Suitable shrouds / barriers / insulating sleeves
4.28.1 should be provided as required.
 a. Operation of breaker in a. In either service or test position
Local
b. Operation of breaker in b. Only in Service Position
Remote
4.28.2
c . Protection Trip c . Both in Local and Remote position of LR Switch.
4.28.3 Closing from local Only when local/remote selector switch is in local position
4.28.4 Closing from remote Only when local/remote selector switch is in remote position
4.28.5 Tripping from local Selector Switch in Local
4.28.6 Tripping from remote Selector switch in ‘Remote’ position
4.28.7 Testing of breaker In test or isolated position keeping control plug connected
4.29. Safety shutters
4.29.1 Automatic safety shutter for To fully cover contacts when breaker is withdrawn to test.
primary disconnector Independent operating mechanism for bus bar & cable side
shutters, separately padlockable in closed position.

4.29.2 Label for identification For bus side and cable side shutters
4.29.3 Warning label on shutters of Clearly visible label “isolate elsewhere before earthing” be
incoming and other provided
connections
4.30 Breaker electrical
4.30.1 operation features
Trip coil supervision To be given for breaker close and open condition.

4.30.2 Trip coil supervision relay For indication and alarm

contact
Master Trip Relay (NO) Wired directly to trip coil
4.30.3 Contact

4.30.4 Master trip relay (NC)contact Wired to inhibit closing of breaker

4.30.5 Emergency Trip Push button Wired directly to trip coil of breaker
contact
4.30.6 DC Control supply and AC Fed by single DC and AC Incoming source in bus coupler panel
supply bus in all panels as well as all Incomers in case of total Switch Board. Isolating
fuse units shall be provided for incoming supplies to each
switchgear unit.

4.30.7 PT supply bus in all panels Fed normally by Bus PT with changeover facility.
4.30.8 Spring Charge Limit switch The circuit breaker shall be provided with motor operated spring
Aux. Contact Configuration charged closing. Spring charging by motor should be smooth
and hassle free and there should be nominal sound during
spring charging. Motor should be 230 Volt AC operated,
Tripping of the circuit breakers shall be through "Shunt trip" coils
rated for 30V DC auxiliary supply. It shall be possible to trip the
breaker manually in case of necessity.

2NC --- For Motor circuit

1 NO --- For Breaker Closing Circuit
1 NO --- For Breaker Closing permissive to be used in
IED/Relay.
1 NO --- For panel spring charged indication
AC operated contactor may be used for contact multiplication
of Limit Switch, if required, for indication and spare contacts.

4.30.9 Local/ Remote selector Switch should be 4 pole in each position, 2 way lockable and
switch stay put type.

5.1 Current Transformers Shall be cast resin type with insulation class of E or better.
Contact tips on primary side shall be silver plated. Correct
polarity shall be invariably marked on each primary and
secondary terminal.
Primary shall be wound or bar type, rigid, high conductivity
grade copper conductor. Unavoidable joints on the primary
conductor shall be welded type, preferably lap type. Current
density at any point shall not exceed 1.6 A/[Link]. Suitable
insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for CT
secondary winding. Multi ratio in CT shall be achieved by
reconnection of secondary winding tapping. The secondary
terminals shall have screw type terminals. The screw should
have sufficient length for connection of at least two nos wires
with plain and spring washers and minimum 10 mm clearance
between the adjacent screw.

5.2 CT Mounting To facilitate easy replacement of 11 KV CT afterwards, fixing

of CT in hanging condition/CT base plate fixed at the upper
covering of the CT Chamber may not be acceptable. Fixing in
horizontal upright condition over a base channel is preferable.
CT Secondary connection terminals should be clearly visible
and accessible from the back side of the breaker assembly
just after opening the rear cover plate.

6.0.0 Potential Transformer

6.1.0 Type Potential Transformer should be Three Phase Five Limb
type or it should be combination of three no Single Phase PT
housed in a withdrawable carriage, Shall be cast resin type with
insulation class of E or better. Service position locking
mechanism shall be provided and indicated by bidder in relevant
drawing. Rigidity of primary stud point with earth bus in service
position shall be confirmed.
Contact tips of primary/secondary contacts shall be silver
plated. Correct polarity shall be distinctly marked on primary and
secondary terminal. Secondary terminal studs shall be provided
with at least three nuts, two plain and two spring washers for
fixing leads. The stud, nuts and washers shall be of brass, duly
nickel plated. The minimum outside diameter of the studs shall
be 6 mm. the length of at least 15 mm shall be available on the
studs for inserting the leads. The space clearance between nuts
on adjacent studs when fitted shall be at least 10 mm.

6.2.0 Mounting Rail mounted on top of the Unit and connected on bus side.
It can be plugged into and withdraw from service by pulling
or pushing the PT by the handle provided on the PT. This
action traverses the PT along the rails and shall
automatically operate the spout shutters. The shutter drive
also forms a latch which holds the PT in the service position
and this latch shall be required to be released before PT can
be isolated.
Access to the PT and the reinforcement in the Panel for
allowing a person to stand on the Top should be provided.
Sealing arrangement of the PT with the carriage and
secondary fuses are to be provided.
Mounting of PT on the breaker truck is not acceptable.

7.0.0 Equipment Earthing

7.1 Material of Earthing bus Two separate earthing terminals shall be provided in each
panel and shall be connected to the earth bus within the panel.
The earth bus shall be of copper and shall have adequate cross
sectional area. Earthing conductors shall be of annealed high
conductivity stranded Copper in accordance with Table-4 in
BS.6346 and protected with an extruded PVC sheath of 1100
volt grade. The earthing conductor on the primary equipment as
well as for external connection to substation earthing grid shall
be adequate to carry the rated switchgear short-circuit current of
18.4kA for 1 second.
7.2. Earth bus joints A ground bus rated to carry maximum fault current shall be
furnished along the full length of the panel board. Each
stationary unit shall be grounded directly to ground bus. All
bolted joints in the bus will be effected by connection of
two bolts.

7.3. Size Rectangular Earth Bus of Minimum size 25mmX6mm

7.4. Enclosure and non-current Effectively bonded to the earth bus

carrying part of the
switchboard/components
7.5. Hinged doors Earthed through flexible copper braid
7.6. Circuit breaker frame / Earthed before the main circuit breaker contacts/control circuit
carriage contacts are plugged in the associated stationary
contacts.

7.7. Metallic cases of relays, Connected to the earth bus by independent copper wires of
instruments and other LT size not less than 2.5 sq mm with green colour insulation. For
panel mounted equipment this purpose LT compartment should have a clear designated
earth bus to which earth connections from all components are to
be connected.
7.8. CT & PT Secondary neutral Earthed at one place at the terminal blocks through links.
8.0 Indicating Meters Flush Mounted, back connected, dust proof with Industrial grade
“A” classification and conforms to IS:1248(1968)

8.1 CT operated Ammeter 3 no. Digital Ammeters to be provided in Incomer and Feeder
panels for measuring load current of each phases.
Display : 3 ½ -digit display,
Aux. Power: : 230 V AC
CTR: 600/1A for Incomer and 200/1A for Feeders.(Site
Selectable)
Accuracy Class: 1.0 or less.
Size : 96 X 48 mm.
8.2. Direct Ammeter 1 nos. Separate Digital Ammeter to be provided for
measuring heater current drawal in all the Panels.
Display : 3 ½ -digit display,
Aux. Power: : 230 V AC
Accuracy Class : 1.0 or less.
Size : 96 X 48 mm.

8.3. P T operated Voltmeter One no. Digital Voltmeter to be provided in Incomer Panels
for measurement of Phase to Phase system voltage, along with
a Voltage Selector Switch.
Display : 3 ½ -digit display,
Aux. Power: : 230 V AC
PTR : 11000 / 110 V
Accuracy Class : 1.0 or less.
Size : 96 X 48 mm.
8.4. Direct Voltmeter One no Analog DC Voltmeter to be provided in the Bus
Coupler panel for measurement of Control DC voltage.

9.0 Energy meter One Three Phase, Four Wire CT/PT operated, fully static
AMR compatible TRIVECTOR Energy Meter along with TTB to
be provided in all Incoming and outgoing breaker panels at its
upper most position in a separate metering chamber. Necessary
wiring to be provided with separate terminal block (suitable for
CT/PT connection) for Energy meter connection and as per
detailed technical specification attached in a separate sheet
(Annexure-F).
TTB to be installed in the metering chamber.

10.0 Multi functional Will be supplied by the Utility and to be fixed in the metering
Transducer chamber. Separate TB for connection should be provided.
Space required for Transducer fixing is 100X100mm.
11.0 Indication Flush mounted, insulated from 30V DC supply with appropriate
coloured lens. The lens shall be made of a material, which will
not be softened by the heat from the lamps.
11.1 Lamps High intensity, clustered LED type.
11.1.1 Breaker ON Red
11.1.2 Breaker Off Green
11.1.3 Spring Charged Blue
11.1.4 Auto trip Amber
11.1.5 Service position White
11.1.6 Signal Received from Remote White
12.0. Switches and push Flush mounted on LV compartment door, with shrouded
buttons terminals

12.1 TNC Control Switch with pistol Non Lockable spring return to normal position. Shall have
grip mechanical interlock to prevent accidental operation of the
switch. Terminals shall be screw type and indelibly marked.
2 nos. Contact each for Close and Open, 2 No. NAT,2 nos. NAC
and one for normal position contact is required.

12.2. Local / Remote selector 2 way, 4 poles in each position lockable and stay put type.
switch
12.3 Selector switch for voltmeter 4 Positions ( RY-YB-BR-OFF), 3 ways.
12.4. Toggle ON/Off switches For heater / illumination circuit
12.5 PT Selector switch 4 Position (PT1-PT2-PT3-OFF), 8 Poles in each position. Current
rating 16 Amps
12.6 Push button of IED(Relay) Wired up to specified DI contact of Relay.
Reset
12.7 Emergency trip push button Red colour with stay put, Current rating 10 Amps.
13.0 Internal wiring 450/750 V grade PVC insulated stranded flexible copper wire.

13.1. Wire Size 2.5 sq. mm for CT circuit, 1.5 sq mm for PT and 1.5 sq.
mm for control circuit, 4.0 sq. mm for Main, AC & DC and Bus
wiring.
i. A suitable wiring duct system firmly fixed on the panel
and having covers shall be installed for front to rear and inter
panel wiring to provide easy access for inspection and
replacement of the wires.
ii. Wiring between terminals of the various devices shall
be point to point. Splices or tee connection will not be
acceptable.
Iii. Facilities for short-circuiting the current transformer
secondary while the switchgear is in service shall be
provided.
iv. Wires shall be suitably bunched adequately supported
to prevent sagging. and it shall have sufficient clearance from
High voltage system.
v. Sufficient Bus wires shall be provided for
interconnecting with adjacent units both ways and also for
future connection.
13.2 Wiring Colour code
13.2.1 PT and CT Red Phase : Red, Yellow Phase : Yellow
Blue Phase : Blue, Neutral : Black.
13.2.2 DC Circuit Gray
13.2.3 AC Circuit Black
13.2.4 Earth Green
 13.3 Ferrules At both ends of wire with same stated marking. Plastic ferrules
shall be used conforming IS. Interlocked type (one additional red
colour ferrule for all wires in trip circuit)

13.3.1 Ferrule marking

[Link] AC Circuit H1, H2 ,H3 .............

[Link] Metering CT Circuit D11, D31, D51 ..............

[Link] O/C and E/F protection CT C11, C31, C51 ..................

circuit
[Link] REF/Differential protection CT A11, A31, A51 .........
circuit
[Link] Main DC distribution circuit J1, J2, J3 .............

[Link] Control and protection circuit K1, K2 ,K3 .................

[Link] Indication and annunciation L1, L2 ,L3 ................

circuit
[Link] Motor circuit M1, M2 ,M3 ................

[Link] PT circuit E11, E31, E51, E71.............

[Link] Spare contact circuit U1, U2, U3 .../ S1, S2, S3 .......

13.4 Lugs Tinned copper, pre-insulated, fork type and pin type as
applicable. Only Ring type is acceptable in CT &PT Circuit.

13.5 Spare contacts of relays, Wired up to the terminal blocks

timers etc
13.6 Wiring enclosure Plastic channels, inter panel wiring through PVC sleeves or
suitable grommets.
13.7 Inter panel wiring Wiring with ferrule to be terminated in the adjacent shipping
section will be supplied with one end terminated and the
other end bunched and coiled.
14.0 Terminal Blocks (TB)
14.1. Terminal Blocks (TB) 1100V grade, 10 amps min. rating, Nylon 66, screw type suitable
for 2 nos. Lead.

14.2. Terminal for CT & PT With provision for shorting with screw driver operated sliding
secondary leads link.
a ) CT shorting links shall be provided to short CT circuits
under live system condition.
b ) Isolation links shall be provided on the trip circuits, alarm
and on the VT circuits to allow easy isolation without
disconnecting the wires from TBs.

14.3 Spare terminals 25% in each TB row

14.4 TB shrouds & separators Moulded non-inflammable plastic material
14.5 Clearance
14.5.1 Clearance between 2 sets of 100 mm min.
TB
14.5.2 Clearance with cable gland 250 mm min
plate
14.5.3 Clearance between AC / DC 100 mm min
set of TB
15.0 Test Terminal blocks for 13 Ways, 50A, 1100V with back connection. Dia of Entries
energy meter is 5 mm & overall dimension 250X50 mm, covered with insulated
cover. TTB should be suitable for 3 Phase 4 Wire Energy Meter.
TTB used for CT Circuit should be Link type. Screw type is not
acceptable.
2
16.0 HT Cable Type 3 Core XLPE,11 kV grade , Aluminium,300mm

17.0 HT Cable Termination Cable entry from rear bottom side for Incomer and
Outgoing feeders .The cable termination shall be located at least
250 mm from the CT primary terminals. For Incomer, double
cable termination arrangement to be provided with two sets of
nut and bolts. Copper terminator strip of adequate size shall be
provided for termination of cables and shall have adequate
height inside to accommodate the heat shrinkable type indoor
cable termination.

18.0 Multi-core cable Incoming Panel- External DC supply from DCDB, External AC
termination box-- Purpose supply from ACDB, Remote Electrical Close and trip operation,
Inter trip operation from upstream 33 kV circuit, Breaker spare
aux. Contacts. Spare contacts of L/R Switch and Spring Charge
Limit Switch etc.

Feeder Panel -- Remote electrical close/trip operation, remote

indication for close, trip , spring charged and trip ckt supervision,
status of L/R switch, Local annunciation for remote close and trip
operation, Breaker spare aux. Contacts.

Bus Coupler -- External DC supply from DCDB, External AC

supply from ACDB, Remote Electrical Close and trip operation,
Breaker spare aux. Contact.

External DC and AC supply arrangement to be provided in

Incomer and Bus Coupler panel only in a switch board.

19.0 Operation Counter Each breaker shall be provided with operation counter.

20.0 Vacuum Interrupter Capable to withstand minimum 100 full short circuit operations at
26.3 kA as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. The continuous
Current rating should be more than 800A. Manufacturer’s test
report/literature to be supplied along with tender in duplicate.

21.0 Insulated spacer It shall be made of insulated fibre glass materials shall be
provided in High voltage system, to protect from absorption of
moisture present in the air.
 22.0 PT selection scheme Each Incoming and outgoing breaker panel shall be
provided with suitable manually operated selector switch having
break before make type contacts including necessary wiring for
selection of voltage from different PT secondary’s available for
connection with energy meters.
Each panel should be provided with 3 PT scheme and
current rating of the PT Selector Switch should be minimum 16
Amp.
Voltmeter of incoming breaker panel shall be connected
directly from respective PT secondary of associated unit.

21.0 Relays for protection and

control

21.1 General Features

21.1.1 Relay type Numerical with self monitoring features
21.1.2 Mounting Flush mounted IP 5X with key pad on front
21.1.3 Relay characteristics Numerical IED with Multiple characteristics like IDMT, DMT,
instantaneous with compatible choices of time delays and
multiple settings for multiple functions like over current, earth
fault etc. along with control of breaker, measurement and status
etc. As per detailed technical specification attached in a
separate sheet (Annexure-E).
21.1.4 Relay communication With IEC 61850 protocol by native two nos. RJ45 /F.O, 100
MBPS communication ports. Separate front port (USB/RJ45) for
Relay parameterisation.
21.1.5 Relay input signal From CT & PT, with auxiliary DC supply
21.1.6 Relay terminals Shall be screw type terminals large enough to accommodate 2.5
sq. mm. cables and shall be located at the back of the Relay.

21.1.7 Relay contacts Shall make firmly without bounce and the relay mechanism shall
not be affected by panel vibration or external magnetic field.

21.1.8 Electromagnetic Compatibility Relay thermal rating shall be such that the fault clearance times
on any combination of current and time multiplier settings shall
not exceed the thermal withstand capability of the relay.
Compliant to EMC directives as per IEC.

21.1.9 Relays for auxiliary, Static or attracted armature type with short pickup time of less
supervision, trip and timer than 30 ms.
relays
21.1.10 Relay reset Self reset contacts except for Master Trip relays.
21.1.11 Operation indicators With hand reset operation indicators (flags) or LEDs with
Push buttons for resetting, for analyzing the cause of operation
 21.2 Master Trip relay High Impedance and High speed relay flush mounted having
coil cut-off contact with at least 4NO and 4NC contact and
electrical reset facility capable to make, carry and break trip
coil current of Circuit Breaker and capable for future integration
with SCADA. It should be immune to capacitance discharge
currents and leakage current. Operating time should be less
than 20ms. Terminals shall be screw type to accommodate 1.5
sq. mm. Cable and located at the back of the relay. Terminals
shall be clearly marked. Contact configuration shall be drawn on
the relay casing.
21.3 Fault recording Relay shall have the facility for recording of various
parameters during a fault. It should be possible to set the
duration of record through settable pre fault and post fault time. It
should be possible to down load the data locally or from
SCADA remotely.
21.4 Auxiliary supply Operate on available 30 V. DC supply. To reduce the effect of
Electrolysis, relay coil shall be so connected such that they are
not continuously connected from the positive pole of the station
battery.
21.5 Test facility In built. Necessary test plugs shall be provided.
21.6 Protection in Incomer & 3 phase over current protection & Earth fault protection
Outgoing panel

21.7 Additional requirement

21.7.1 For each breaker panel To be provided with anti pumping relay/contactor (94),
(plug-in type contactor will not be accepted)
21.7.2 Auxiliary relays, coupling To effect interlocks and to exchange signals of status &
relays, transducers etc. control from remote.
22.0 Additional Requirement The schematic diagram of control and indication circuit on a
durable sticker shall be fixed in a suitable place in Incomer and
feeder panels and Annunciation scheme in the Bus Coupler
panel.
The wiring arrangement, position of fuse, TBs etc, in the
panel should be such that each and every connection can be
accessed easily. Fuse tops can be opened /inserted easily.
Only ring type sockets should be used for wire termination in TB/
Relays/ Meters/TTB etc. Fork type socket can be used in
Annunciator only.
Separate switch to be used for cubicle light instead of Door
switch.
Circuit Label incorporating identification, information of
incoming/outgoing/bus coupler breaker shall be provided.
Connection diagram plates for the PT and CT shall be provided
as per provision in the relevant IS.
All name, rating , circuit label, connection diagram plate
shall be fixed with screws or by riveting instead of fixing by
adhesive.
 23.0 Annunciation Scheme 6/8 Window Annunciator shall be provided in each panel
including Bus Coupler panel. It should be Microprocessor based
having inbuilt Accept/Reset/Test/Mute push buttons for trip and
non-trip functions. DC operated common Hooters shall be
provided in Bus Coupler breaker panel. It shall have provision of
inbuilt watch Dog and Fast fault indication with Trip (O/C , E/F
and other trip signals if any )and non-trip alarm i.e AC supply
fail, main DC supply fail at Bus Coupler. The functional details
and scheme will be decided during finalisation of drawings.

24.0 Space Heaters

24.1 Space heaters 60 W, 230 V AC each with timer controlled and switch for
isolation. A Thermostat control unit with variable temperature
control setting shall be installed to control the heater. The 240 V
AC supply for the heater shall be controlled by a suitably rated
single pole miniature circuit breaker.

24.2 Space heater location Two nos. each in Breaker & HV cable compartment
to be mounted on an insulator.

24.3 Space heater Monitoring One AC Ammeter with 0-1.0Amp range shall be
provided in series with the heaters to monitor the current
drawal of the Heaters. Size :96x48mm.
25.0 Switch and sockets
25.1. Illumination Lamp For LV ,cable chamber & energy meter compartment
25.2. 240V AC, 5A Switch & socket In LV chamber
26.0 Name Plates and rating
plate of switchgear

26.1 Material Material shall be stainless steel/anodized aluminium and

shall not be deformed under the service condition. The entries
shall be indelibly marked by engraving with black letter on
white background or vice-versa as specified and 3mm thick
and 100mmX150mm(approx).

26.2 Lettering Engraved, with white letters on black background, for use
inside the control compartment, a white label, engraved in
Black Letters and numbers shall be used. Each major
equipment shall be provided with a rating plate containing the
required information as specified in the relevant IEC standard.
26.3 Name plate for feeder On front and rear side of each panel giving feeder
description & number description. On the rear side the name plate shall be fixed on
the back cover.

26.4 Identification plates/labels at Approved design (not stickers)

each cubicle and each
instrument
26.5 On front top door of panel
Manufacturer name plate

Name of the Manufacturer and Year of Manufacture

27.0 Rating Plate of Switchgear P.O No. and Date
Type, Designation and Serial No.
Rated Voltage and Current
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
1 minute Power frequency withstand voltage
Rated frequency
Rated Current
Breaking Capacity
Short time current making capacity

Operating sequence

Rated voltage of closing and opening coil

Rated voltage of spring charging motor

Property Label “Property of WBSEDCL”

Guarantee for Five Years
 a) Materials shall be new; the best quality of their
28.0 General respective kinds and such as are usual and suitable for work of
like character. All materials shall comply with the latest issues
of the specified standard unless otherwise specified or
permitted by WBSEDCL.
b) Workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to
ensure reliable and vibrations free operations. The design,
dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that the
stresses to which they may be subjected shall not cause
distortion, undue wear, or damage under the most severe
conditions encountered in service.
c) All parts shall conform to the dimensions shown and
shall be built in accordance with approved drawings. All joints,
datum surfaces and meeting components shall be machined
and all castings shall be spot faced for nuts. All machined
finishes shall be shown on the drawings. All screw, bolts, studs
and nuts and threads for pipe shall conform to the latest
standards of the International Organization for Standardization
covering these components and shall all conform to the
standards for metric sizes.
d) All materials and works that have cracks, flaws or other
defects or inferior workmanship will be rejected WBSEDCL.
e) Each of the Switchgear panel shall be of unitised
construction with all necessary accessories like end covers etc.
However the design shall allow for extension on both sides
without limit. Busbar design shall be such that panel to panel
interconnection can be carried out without difficulty as and
when required. In case of Single feeder panels, Identical
Bus Bars for connection with adjacent Incomer / Bus
Coupler / Feeder needs to be supplied.
f) Explosion vents of suitable design shall be provided on
the roof sheet of the busbar/cable/CT's chambers so as to
enable discharge of explosive gases from inside during a
flashover. However the provision of explosion vent shall not
affect the degree of protection/vermin proofing of the panel.

Necessary items of equipment shall be assembled in the

28.1 Assembly factory prior to shipment and routine tests shall be performed
by the manufacturer as per the requirements of the latest issue
of IEC as specified under each equipment in these
specifications to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
WBSEDCL that the switchgear panels comply with the
requirements of the relevant IEC standards.

Casting shall be true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and

28.2 Casting of uniform quality and condition, free from blowholes, porosity,
hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or other injurious defects,
shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose.
 Wherever welding is specified or permitted, a welding
28.3 Welding process, including stress relieve treatment as required if
necessary, conforming to an appropriate and widely
recognized professional standard shall be used. All welders
and welding operators shall be fully qualified by such a
standard.

Instructions shall be engraved on the switchgear panel, on

28.4 Operational Details the circuit breaker compartment describing in simple steps
how to carry out correct and safe isolation, racking-in and
racking-out switching operations on the circuit breaker.
Similar details should be provided for the operation of the
earth switch.

29.0 Surface treatment &

painting
29.1 Surface treatment Sand blasting or by seven tank process
29..2 Paint type Powder coated. Pure polyester base grade A structure finish

29.3 Paint shade RAL 7032 for external & internal surface
29.4 Paint thickness Minimum 80 microns
30.0 Type Test
30.1 Type Tests The product must be of type tested quality as per all tests in
IEC/Indian standards. Such tests shall be done at any NABL
accredited laboratory.

30.2 Type test report validity Last five years from due date of bid submission
period
 A . Switchgear Panel (with circuit breaker installed)
30.3 Type test report to be a. Lightning Impulse Voltage withstand Test
submitted along with the bid b. H.V. dry 1 min power frequency withstand test
c. Short time and peak withstand current test
d. Short circuit test with basic duties
e . Single phase breaking capacity test.
f. Cable charging breaking current test
g. Temperature Rise test
h. IP Test
i. Internal Arc Test as per IEC 62271-200
j. Horizontal Acceleration due to seismic force (if
available)
B. Circuit Breaker
a. Mechanical Endurance Test as per M2 Class of
IEC
C. Current Transformer
a. Short Time Current Test
b. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
c. Temperature Rise Test
D. Potential Transformer
a. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
b. Temperature Rise Test
Copies of test certificates in respect of following
bought out items:-
a. Vacuum Interrupter.
b. Insulators
c. Bus Bar Material
d. Terminal connectors
e. KEMA / CPRI Certification for relay/IED i.r.o.
IEC61850 compliance

Note : All the type test report on Switchgear Panel

& Circuit Breaker to be conducted with
offered Vacuum Interrupter.

1. One no. spring charging handle for every three panels

31.0 Accessories 2. One no. Breaker Truck operating handle for every three
panels
3. The equipment shall be complete with all necessary
accessories and materials in accordance with the
specification
4. The base channel frames for the switchgear for grouting on
the floor shall be complete with anchor bolt, nuts and
levelling attachment.
32.0 Type Test after issuance Besides submission of Type Test Report, carried out
of Order within five years as per Tender Specification, Type Test at
the discretion of WBSEDCL, shall have to be arranged by
the successful Manufacturer from any lot offered for
inspection, sample chosen at random after successful
Routine Test by our Inspection Team, as per relevant ISS
from CPRI/NABL accredited/Government recognized Test
House or Laboratory in presence of WBSEDCL’S
representative.
However the However the necessary cost of the Type Test
charges will be reimbursed to the party on
production of necessary supporting documents.

Enclosed in Annexure-D. Bidder shall have to fill up GTP as

33.0 Equipment Device per Annexure-G, Annexure-H, Annexure-J, Schedule-A,
Schedule Schedule-B, Schedule-C. Bidder shall have to submit
undertakings from Relay and Meter manufacturer as per
Schedule-I and II.
 Bidder shall submit following drawing/documents along with the
34.0 Drawing and bid:-
documentation 1. GA of indoor 9 panel Switchgear showing constructional
features and space required in the front for withdrawal of
breaker truck and in back, other accessories, power and
control cable entry with plan elevation and views.

2. Sectional view of incomer, bus coupler & feeder panels

with parts list.
3. GA of Circuit Breaker truck.
4. GA of Current Transformer
5. GA of Potential Transformer.
6. Technical particulars of Switchgears and brochures for
technical data sheet of vacuum interrupter
7. Relay and device list (Bill of Quantity) with complete details.
8. Technical manual for Relays, Meters, Switches, Instrument
transformer, Terminal block and Test Terminal Block.
9. Four copies of drawing, data and manuals containing
above shall be submitted for approval and afterwards for
final distribution.
10. Two sets of manual, leaflet and drawing for multi panel
board shall be submitted separately to the C.E(Testing),
Distribution Testing Deptt., WBSEDCL.

Successful tenderer shall furnish all above drawings

and following additional drawings for approval before
commencement of supply:-
i. Foundation details for 9 Panel Switchgear.
ii. Equipment door layout for incomer, bus coupler & feeder
panels.
iii. Schematic Diagram for incomer bus coupler & feeder
section of Switchgear
iv. Protection Circuit, Metering circuit, DC control circuit for
incomer bus coupler & feeder section of Switchgear
v. Annunciator and Alarm scheme.
vi. P.T. supply change over scheme.
ix. Terminal block details for incomer, bus coupler & feeder
section.
vii. Cross section view for CTs.
viii. Name Plate & Connection diagram for CTs.
ix. Cross section view for PTs.
x. Name Plate & Connection diagram for PTs.
xi. Rating Plate details of the Panel
xii. Manual for installation, operation and maintenance
procedure.
 Guarantee of the total equipment including any integral part
35.0 Guarantee of the equipment should be for a period of 5 (five) years from
the date of last despatch.

36.0 Routine & Acceptance All the switchgear panels shall be tested in accordance with
Test the requirement of IEC 62271-200.
Tests shall be carried out on the circuit breakers as per the
requirement of IEC 62271-100.
Current transformers and Voltage transformers shall be tested
in accordance with the requirement of IEC 60044-1, IS 2705
and IEC 6044-2, IS 3156 respectively. The Protection Relay
shall be tested in accordance with IEC 60255 & Energy Meter
shall be tested as per relevant IS.
All routine tests at manufacturer’s works shall be carried
out and Test Reports are to be submitted to CE, P&C,
WBSEDCL.

All Acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works

on every lot offered for inspection as per relevant IS & IEC in
presence of the WBSEDCL’s representatives. Selection of
samples for acceptance test as well as rejection and retesting shall
be guided by relevant IS. The entire cost of acceptance and
routine test that to be carried out shall be treated as included in the
quoted price of tendered items.

Six copies of test reports duly signed by the inspecting officers,

shall be submitted to the Chief Engineer, P&C Department , Bidyut
th
Bhavan (4 floor) Salt Lake, Kol -91.

a ) Dimensional Checks
Complete Switchgear Panel b) Operational Tests
test c) Primary Injection Tests
36.1 d) Calibration Tests on Relays and Instruments
e) Power frequency Withstand Test
f) Insulation Test
g) Contact resistance test of Primary joints
h) Power frequency Withstand Test on secondary Wiring

Routine tests.
18.4kA Circuit Breaker test a) Operation test.
( six copies of test report to be b) Dielectric Test on the main circuit.
36.2 submitted with Offer) c) Dielectric tests on controls and auxiliary circuits.
d) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit.
e) Timing test
f) Design and visual checks
g) Test Certificate for all resin cast/moulded components of
circuit breakers whose partial discharge measurement are
specified in the relevant IEC (No. 62271-100, Clause No.6.2.9)
 Routine tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s
Current Transformer Test plant as per the requirement of IEC 60044-1, IS 2705 as listed
( six copies of test report to be below:
36.3 submitted with Offer) i. Polarity test and verification of terminal markings test
ii. Ratio and phase angle error test(accuracy class;
composite error test)
iii. Power frequency tests on primary and secondary
windings
iv. Power frequency withstand tests between
sections(windings)
v. Inter-turn over voltage tests
vi. Partial discharge measurement

Routine tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s plant

Voltage Transformer test as per the requirement of IEC 60044-2, IS 3156 as listed below:-
( six copies of test report to be (a) Polarity tests and verification of terminals
submitted with Offer) (b) Power frequency withstand tests on Primary windings
36.4 (c) Power frequency withstand tests on secondary windings
(d) Power frequency withstand tests between sections
(e) Determination of errors
(f) Partial discharges measurement

Protection Relay Tests a. Relay Pick-up test for all functions and phases
( six copies of test report to be b. Relay timing test for all functions and phases
submitted before with Offer) c. Conformance Test as per IEC 61850

36.5

-----------------------------------

ANNEXURE – A

MANDATORY TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

1.0 Switchgear
1.1 Type Metal clad, air insulated with VCB type circuit
breaker
1.2 Service Indoor
1.3 Mounting Free standing, floor mounted
1.4 System voltage 11KV
1.5 Highest System voltage 12 KV
1.6 Frequency 50HZ, ± 3%
1.7 Phase 3
1.8
1.9 Rated current @ 50 DEG C ambient 800 Amp.
1.10 Short time rating for 3 sec. 18.4KA
1.11 Insulation level (PF rms / impulse 28 / 75 KV
peak)
1.12 System ground Solidly earthed
1.13 Enclosure degree of protection IP 5X for high and low voltage compartment

1.14 Bus bar – Main @ 50 DEG C 1600A, Current Density 1.6 Amp/[Link].(Max)
ambient
1.15 Material electrolytic copper, tinned /Silver plated
1.16 Bus Bar sleeve Full voltage sleeved with shrouds on joints
1.17 Bus identification Colour coded (R-Y-B)
1.18 Bus end connection To be capable to safely withstand stress due to
max. Short circuit current and thermal expansion.
Necessary provision to be made for testing current
transformer primary by removing insulated portion
without difficulty.
1.19 Temperature rise above Ambient 40DEG C for conventional joints, 55DEG C for
silver plated joints
1.20 Riser Bus electrolytic copper, tinned /Silver plated,
800A, Current Density 1.6 Amp/[Link].(Max)
1.21 For the design and erection of Busbars the following minimum clearance shall be observed

1.21.1 Phase to Phase(mm) 110 mm (approx)

(without Insulating Sleeve)
1.21.2 Phase to earth(mm) 90 mm(approx)
(without Insulating Sleeve)
1.22 Minimum nominal creepage distance 19mm/kV.

1.23 Auxiliary DC Supply 30V DC shall be controlled by suitably rated

miniature circuit breaker.

1.24 Auxiliary AC supply 240V AC 50 Hz shall be controlled by suitably rated

(without insulatin miniature circuit breaker.

1.25 Hardware GI

1.26 Earth bus Electrolytic Copper, Rectangular shape,

25X6mm(Min) and to carry 18.4 KA for 1 Second.

1.27 Power and control cable entry From bottom for Power Cable. For control cables
through Remote Terminal Box installed at the
backside of the Panel.
2.0 Circuit Breaker
2.1 Type of isolation & Drawout Horizontal isolation & Horizontal Drawout.

2.2 Voltage class, insulation level, short As specified for switchgear

time rating
2..3 Rated current 800 Amps.

2.4 Duty cycle O – 0.3sec – CO – 3min – CO

2.5 Short circuit rating
2.5.1 AC sym. Breaking current 26.3 KA (for Vacuum Interrupter)
2.5.2 Short circuit making current 65.75KA (for Vacuum Interrupter)
2.6 Operating time
2.6.1 Break time Less than 80 ms.
2.6.2 Make time Less than 100 ms.
2.7. Range of auxiliary voltage
2.7.1 Closing 85% - 110%
2.7.2 Tripping 70% - 110%
2.7.3 Spring charging 85% - 110%
2.8 Auxiliary Switch Properly rated and robust in nature shall be
provided in all panels and wired upto SIC
(Secondary Isolated Contact) with identical SIC and
ferrule numbers and sufficient number of NO and
NC contacts for the following:-
CB ‘ON’ for Local indication –NO contact
CB’ON’ for Remote indication—NO contact
CB’OFF’ for Local Indication --- NC Contact
CB’OFF’ for Remote Indication – NC Contact
CB ‘Auto Trip’ for Local and Remote Indication—NC
Contact. Other Contacts used as per scheme for
closing and tripping and trip ckt supervision.
2.8.1 No. of spare contacts in Aux. Switch Minimum 6 NO + 6 NC
for WBSEDCL use
2.9 No. of spare contacts of service and 2 NO+2NC
test position limit switch contact
2.10 No. of spare contacts of Spring 2 NO + 2 NC
charge limit switch

3.0 Current Transformers for Incoming Panel

3.1. Voltage class, insulation level As specified for switchgear

3.2. Type Triple core, Dual ratio, Cast resin, Indoor type .
Marking on primary and secondary terminal as per
requirement of IEC 60044-1, IS 2705 and shall be
indelibly marked. The secondary terminals shall
have screw type terminals.
3.3. Class of insulation Class E or better
3.4. Ratio 600/400/1-1-1A
3.5. Number of secondary Three, Core 1 : Metering, Core 2 :Protection ,
Core 3 : Protection
3.6. Accuracy class Core 1 : 0.5, Core 2 : 5P15, Core 3 : PS.

3.7 ISF of Metering Core <=5 at lower ratio

3.8 ALF of Protection Core 15
3.9 VA output 15VA for both protection and metering
3.10
3.11 Excitation current and other 30mA at Vk/2 (at lower ratio), Vk>=250 V
particulars of PS class CT’s
 o
3.12 Other particulars RCT = 4 ohms at 75 C at higher ratio and 2ohm at
lower ratio, Panels to be supplied with CT ratio set
at higher ratio. Common terminals for CT secondary
shall be shorted and earthed. Only ring type socket
to be used in CT circuit.
P1 terminal of CT shall be at Bus side.

3.13 Short time current rating 18.4 kA for 1 second

4.0 Current Transformers for Outgoing Panel

4.1. Voltage class, insulation level As specified for switchgear

4.2. Type Dual core, Dual ratio, Cast resin, Indoor type.
Marking on primary and secondary terminal as per
requirement of IEC 60044-1, IS 2705 and shall be
indelibly marked. The secondary terminals shall
have screw type terminals.
4.3. Class of insulation Class E or better

4.4. Ratio 200-100/1-1A

4.5. Number of secondary 2, Core 1 : Metering, Core 2 :Protection

4.6. Accuracy class Core 1 : 0.5, Core 2 : 5P15.
4.7. ISF of Metering Core <=5 at lower ratio
4.8. ALF of Protection Core 15.
4.9 VA output 15 VA for both protection and metering
4.10 Short time current rating 18.4 kA for 1 seconds

4.11 Name Plate of CT indelibly marked Name plate for the current transformer shall be
provided with all the required details as per IEC
60044-1, IS 2705 Standards, including :-
i) The manufacturer’s name
ii) Serial number and a type designation
iii) Rated primary and secondary current
iv) Rated frequency
v) Rated output and corresponding accuracy
class for each secondary winding, including the
rated accuracy limit factor and Instrument
security factor for protection and metering
secondary windings respectively.
vi) The highest voltage of the equipment
vii) The rated Insulation level
viii) The rated short-time thermal current (Ith) and
the rated dynamic current
ix) Class of Insulation
x) Rated continuous thermal current
xi) Property Label – “ Property of WBSEDCL”
xii ) Guranteed for 5 Years

5.0 Voltage Transformers

5.1. Type Dry / Resin cast, draw out type, 3-phase, 5-
limb or it should be combination of three no Single
Phase PT housed in a withdrawable carriage
complete with HV fuses. Copies of Type test
certificate and routine test certificate as per IEC
60044-2, IS 3156 shall be submitted with the tender
for evaluation purpose. Each PT shall be provided
with Vector diagram plate as per relevant provision
of IS showing primary and secondary terminals.

5.2. Rated Voltage

5.2.1 Primary 11000 / √3V
5.2.2 Secondary 110 / √3V
5.3 No of phases 3
5.4 No. of secondary windings 1(one)
5.5 Method of connection Star/Star with both neutral earthed
5.6 Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous, 1.5 for 30 sec.
5.7 Class of insulation Class E or better
5.8 Accuracy class 0.5

5.9 Primary and secondary fuses HRC current limiting type, primary fuse
replacement shall be possible with VT in withdrawn
position
5.10 Voltage class 12KV
5.11 VA Burden 100 VA per phase
5.12 PT mounting Rail mounted on top of the Incomer Panel and
Primary connected on bus side. It can be plugged
into and withdraw from service by pulling or pushing
the PT by the handle provided on the PT. This
action traverses the PT along the rails and shall
automatically operate the spout shutters. The
shutter drive also forms a latch which holds the PT
in the service position and this latch shall be
required to be released before PT can be isolated.

The secondary circuits from all the PTs of the

5.13 PT secondary circuit incoming panels shall be wired up to all the outgoing
panels so that supply to the potential coils of the
meters can be maintained from any of the PTs. Plug
and socket type contacts shall be provided in the PT
secondary. PT secondary terminals shall be
inaccessible from outside. Necessary provision shall
be made for sealing PT while in racked in position.
Vector of the PT will be Both Y/Y connection with
both neutral earthed.
 Name plate for the voltage transformer shall
5.14 Name Plate of PT indelibly marked be provided with all the required details as per
IEC 60044-2, IS 3156 Standards, including :-
i) The manufacturer’s name
ii) Serial number and a type designation
iii) Rated primary and secondary voltage
iv) Rated frequency
v) Rated output and corresponding accuracy
class for each secondary winding,
vi) The highest voltage of the equipment
vii) The rated Insulation level
ix) Class of Insulation for the equipment
x) Rated voltage factor and corresponding rated
time.
xi) The use each secondary winding and it’s
corresponding terminals
xii)Property Label – “ Property of WBSEDCL”
xiii ) Guranteed for 5 Years
Suitable arrangement to be provided to monitor
6.0 Monitoring from Remote the
1. following conditions of 11kV VCB at SCADA
Control Centre end through installing RTU by
WBSEDCL:-
1 . DC healthy
2 .Breaker is ‘OFF’
3 .Breaker is ‘ON’
4 .Spring for closing mechanism is charged
5 .Breaker is in Local
6 .Breaker is in Remote
7. Trip Circuit healthy
8 ..Breaker is not anti-pumping
9 . Tripping due to O/C
10 .Tripping due to E/F

Suitable arrangement should be provided to

7.0 Closing from Remote close the breaker from remote end in case following
conditions are satisfied:-
1. DC healthy
2. Breaker is ‘OFF’
3. Spring for closing mechanism is charged
4. Breaker is in Remote
5. Trip Circuit healthy
6. Breaker is not anti-pumping

Suitable arrangement should be provided to trip

8.0 Tripping from Remote the breaker from remote end in case the breaker is
ON and certain preset conditions to be satisfied
which will be decided during finalisation of drawings.

Annexure - B
Standard Make of Relay and Fitments
 VCB Panel Manufacturer should be the VCB Manufacturer.

Vacuum Interrupter CGL / BEL / SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS / ABB

Relays Alstom, ABB, Siemens, Schneider or any other reputed relay

manufacturers fulfilling relays specification as per Annexure-E
of the technical specification
Current Transformer Plastofab, BMC, Pragati, ECS, Kappa.

Potential Transformer Plastofab, BMC, Pragati, Audio-Vision, ECS.

Breaker Control Switch/LR Kaycee / Alstom / Recom/Switron/L&T/Siemens/ABB

Switch
Voltmeter/PT Selector switch Kaycee / Recom/Switron

Digital Ammeter / voltmeter and AE / Rishav / Secure/Accord/Schneider/Meco

Analog DC Volt Meter
Energy meter Secure Meter Ltd. / Larsen & Toubro Ltd. / Landis & Gyr Ltd. /
Genus Power Infrastructure Ltd.
Push Buttons Alstom / Kaycee / Vaishno/Teknic/Lumen/STS/
Siemens/L&T/Schneider.
Indicating Lamps with lenses Alstom / Kaycee / Vaishno/Teknic/Lumen/STS./ Switron

Panel wiring ECKO / PHOENIX/Finolex/Havels/KEI/RR Kables/Poly Cab

(with ISI mark)
Hooter/Buzzer/Bell ANCHOR / KAYCEE/ Vaishno/STS/JVS/Bharani/Alan

Annunciator MINILEC / ALAN/INSTALARM/EAPL

MCB Siemens/L&T/Schneider/ABB/Kaycee/Legrand/GE

Terminal Block Elmex/Connectwell

TTB DAV Industries/CGL/JVS/Unitech Sales/Keizen/Plastofab

Annexure-C
Legend of Devices associated with Multi panel Shunt trip vacuum Circuit Breaker

Symbol Reference Description

A1, A2, A3 & Ammeter
AH(heater)
V and VDC for Bus Voltmeter
coupler
VS Manual Voltmeter Selector Switch
EM Energy Meter
CS Control switch T-A / T-N-A / C-C spring return type
IL-R CB ‘ON’ Indication Red lamp
IL-G CB ‘OFF’ Indication Green lamp
IL-W ‘Trip /Close signal received from Remote Indication white lamp
IL-B “Spring charged” Indication Blue lamp
IL-A CB “ Auto trip” Indication Amber lamp
PB Push Button
ANN DC operated electric Annunciator
H,HS,TH Heater, Heater Switch, Thermostat
FS Fuse
LK Link
MCB1 MCB, 2 pole 16 A for DC supply
MCB2 MCB, 2 pole 16 A for AC supply
MCB3 MCB, 2 pole for spring charging motor supply
MVS Manual PT selector switch
IR-I Remote inter tripping contact from 33 kV Transformer Control
and relay Panel
TC Tripping Coil
CC Closing Coil
APR Anti-pumping Relay
86 Tripping Relay
52 Vacuum Circuit breaker
52a,52b NO and NC contacts of Breaker Auxiliary switch respectively
PT Potential Transformer
CT Current Transformer
TTB Test Terminal Block
51/50 R-Y-B-N O/C and E/F Relay

Annexure D

Sl Device Quantity
no.
Incomer Feeder Bus coupler
1. Numerical O/C & E/F Relay 1 No. 1 No. Nil
2. Trip Relay 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
3. AC Supervision Relay Nil Nil 1 No.
4. Annuanciator 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
5. AC Ammeter ( CT operated ) 3 No. 3 No. Nil
6. AC Voltmeter 1 No. Nil Nil
7. DC Voltmeter Nil Nil 1 No.
8. Ammeter ( Heater Ckt.) 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
9. Current Transformer 3 No. 3 No. Nil
10. Potential Transformer 1 Set Nil Nil
11. Energy meter 1 No. 1 No. Nil
12. TTB 1 No. 1 No. Nil
13. Indicating Lamp 6 No. 6 No. 4 No.
14. MCB ( DC Ckt) 1 No. Nil 1 No.
15. MCB ( AC Ckt, 16 Amps) 1 No. Nil 1 No.
16. MCB ( Motor ckt.) 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
17. 3 Position PT Selector Switch (16 Amps) 1 No. 1 No. Nil
18. Voltage Selector Switch 1 No. Nil Nil
 19. Electronic Buzzer (DC Volt operated) Nil Nil 1 No.
20. Electronic Buzzer (AC Volt operated) Nil Nil 1 No.
21. Heater with controller 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set
22. T-N-C Switch 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
23. Local – Remote Switch 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
24. Push Button for Emergency Trip 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
25. Push Button for Relay reset 1 No. 1 No. Nil
26. Spring Charging Handle 1 No. for every three Panel.
27. VCB Operating Handle 1 No. for every three Panel
28. HRC Fuse & Link As required As required As required

NB: The Bidder has to include list of other Items for the Equipment to meet our Technical requirement.

Annexure-G

GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

( To be submitted by the Bidder )

1. General :

Name of the Company

Office address

Factory address

2. Panel

Make

Type & Designation

Application Standard

Rated Voltage

Highest Voltage

Normal Current

Frequency

STC for 3 Sec.

Breaking Capacity
 Making Capacity

Power frequency withstand voltage

Impulse withstand voltage

AC Aux. Voltage.

DC Aux. Voltage

Degree of Protection for HV & LV Compartment

Thickness of metal sheet ( mm ).

For load-bearing member

For Doors & covers

Dimension of Incomer Panel in mm ( H x W x D )

Dimension of Outgoing Panel in mm ( H x W x D )

Dimension of Bus-Coupler &

Trunk Panel in mm ( H x W x D )

Single feeder panels to be supplied with Bus Bar

for connection with adjacent Incomer / Bus
Coupler / Feeder. [ Yes / No ]

HV Cable termination height in the cable

compartment

3. Bus Bar

Material

Shape

Cross sectional area of main Bus.

Cross sectional area of Riser.

Type of plating

Normal Current currying capacity

STC for 3 Sec.

 Temp. Rise over ambient at normal current

Current density for main Bus & Riser

Phase to Phase clearance

Phase to ground clearance

Type of insulation

Colour Identification

4. Bus support insulator

Reference Standard.

Make

Material

Dry Power frequency Withstand Voltage for one

minute

Wet Power frequency Withstand Voltage for one

minute

Impulse Withstand voltage

Creepage distance

5. Vacuum Circuit Breaker

Make

Type

Reference Standard

Rated voltage

Highest voltage

Frequency

Normal Current

Breaking capacity

Making capacity
 STC for 3 Sec.

Temp. Rise over ambient at normal current

No of break per phase.

Operating duty cycle

Single Phase Capacitor Breaking capacity

Three Phase Capacitor Breaking capacity

Line Charging Breaking capacity

Cable Charging Breaking capacity

Closing time

Opening time

Mechanical Endurance capacity

Electrical Endurance capacity

Operating mechanism

Type of isolation & Drawout

Details of mechanical interlock provided

DC Wattage of Trip Coil.

DC Voltage range for Trip operation.

DC Wattage of Closing Coil.

DC Voltage range for Closing operation.

Details of electrical interlock.

6. Vacuum Bottle

Make

Rated voltage

Type and model no.

Normal current
 Breaking capacity

Making capacity

STC for 3 Sec.

Maximum contact separation length

Minimum Mechanical life in no. of operation

Minimum Electrical Life in no. of operation at rated

normal current

Minimum Electrical Life in no. of operation at rated

full short circuit current

Power frequency withstand voltage (dry)

Impulse withstand voltage

Contact material

Type of plating

Contact pressure

7. Current Transformer

Make

Reference Standard

Type

Voltage

Frequency

Insulation level

Class of insulation

Ratio (Incomer & Feeder)

Class of accuracy (Incomer & Feeder)

Burden (Incomer & Feeder)

STC for 1 Sec.

 ISF of Metering Core at lower ratio

Vk & Magnetising Current(at lower ratio)

Fixing Arrangement

8. Potential Transformer

Make

Reference Standard

Insulation level

Class of insulation

Type

Frequency

Winding connection

Type of Core connection

Ratio

Class of accuracy

Burden per Phase

Over Voltage Factor for 8 hrs.

Fixing position.

Fixing arrangement

Primary Fuse rating

9. O/C & E/F Relay

Make

Type

Model no.

Ordering Code

10. Trip Relay

 Make

Type

Model no.

Whether Electrically Resettable(Yes/No)

11. Digital Ammeter ( CT operated )

Make

Type

Size

Basic CTR

Accuracy class

AC Aux. voltage

Fixing type.

12. Digital Ammeter ( Heater circuit )

Make

Type

Size

Current range

Accuracy class

AC Aux. voltage

Fixing type.

13. Digital Volt meter ( PT operated )

Make

Type

Size

PTR
 Accuracy class

AC Aux. voltage

Fixing type.

14. Analog Voltmeter ( DC Circuit )

Make

Type

Size

Accuracy class

Fixing type.

15. Energy meter

Make

Type

Model no.

16. Terminal connector

Make

Type

Size

17. Control Switch

Make

Type

Contact configuration

AC & DC Current rating

AC Voltage rating.

18. Spring Charge Limit Switch

Make
 Type

No of contact ( NO + NC )

No of spare contact ( NO + NC )

AC & DC Current rating

AC Voltage rating.

19. Local Remote Switch.

Make

Type

Contact configuration

AC & DC Current rating

AC Voltage rating.

20. Spring charging motor

Make

Type

Rated AC Voltage

Rated wattage

AC Voltage variation for operation

21. Operation counter

Make

Type

Operation count range

22. Space heater

Make

Type

Rated AC Voltage
 Wattage

23. Thermostat

Make

Setting range

24. Indication Lamp

Make

Type

25. Auxiliary contact switch

Make

Type

No of contact ( NO + NC )

No of spare contact ( NO + NC )

AC & DC Current rating

AC Voltage rating.

26. Annunciator

Make

No of window.

Aux voltage

No of inbuilt push switch.

27 Voltage selector switch

Make

Type

28 PT selector switch

Make

Type
 Current Rating

29 TTB

Make

Type

Size

30 Terminal Block

Make

Type

31 MCB

Make

Type

32 Fuse & Link Unit

Make

Type

33 HRC Fuse

Make

Type

34. Control wire

Make

Type

Voltage Grade

Size ( Sq. mm)

For CT & PT

For control indication & annunciation circuit

For main AC & DC and Bus Wiring

 Colour

35. Earth Bus

Material

Shape

Size

36. Painting details

Paint type

Paint shade

Paint thickness

37. Shipping dimension of equipment (HxWxD)

38. Total weight of the equipment

Accessories

39. Spring Charging Handle

VCB Operating Handle

40. Guarantee of the total equipment including any

integral part of the equipment

1 State clearly about compliance of following provisions

as per provision in relevant Clauses of Specification.

a) Name, Rating, Making, Property Plate, Circuit Level,

Connection Diagram

b) Operation Instruction Chart

2 State clearly information about type testing of similar

Equipment in recognized Institution as per Technical
Specification. If yes, mention clearly nature of tests
carried out with Name of Testing Institution.
3 Information about testing facilities available at the
Manufacturer's Works for conducting
Routing/Acceptance Tests.

4 Information about submission of following documents

with the Tender
a) Copies of Type Test Reports.

b) Copies of Tender Drawing Literature & Manual.

Copies of Tender Performance Reports & Credential

c)

Copies of Tender Literature & Leaflets of Device

d)
List of Recommended Spares.
e)
5 Information about submission of Deviation Sheet

---------------------------------------

ANNEXURE-H

GTP for Numerical Feeder (Non directional) Protection Relay

Sl. No. Feature and Function Bidders response

1.1 Make
Type
Ordering code (with supporting
documents)
1.2 Conformance to
i. IEC255-4
ii. IEC 61850

1.3 No. of CT inputs for O/C and E/F

Protection
1.4 Type test report submitted(y/n)
1.5 Relay shall be of Numeric Design
1.6 Relay designed for bay protection and
Control
1.7 Size of Relay LCD screen
1.8 Relay is equipped with CB close and open
key/push buttons
1.9 Relay has following protection functions:
a. Three phase over current
b. Earth fault
c. Thermal overload function
d. Broken conductor protection function
e. Circuit Breaker Maintenance function
2. a. One time delayed element and two
high set elements
b. Setting range and step for IDMT
element for both current and Time
Multiplier Setting
c. Selectable Current/Time Curve for
IDMT element
d. Setting range and step for high set
elements for both current and time delay
3. Sampling rate and frequency of analog
signal
4. Whether remote controllable from
SCADA
5. a. No. of Digital Inputs
b. Voltage rating of Digital Inputs
c. Provision of testing without current
injection
6. Supervision for CB open and Closed
status
7. No. of programmable LEDs and no. of
Latched LEDs
8. Analog Measurement and display
supported
9. Fault Record storage capacity
10. Event storage capacity
11. Disturbance record storage capacity
12. MMI with keypad and LCD provided
13. Rated DC Supply and tolerance
14. Rating of CT/PT secondary
15. Rated frequency
16. a. Operating ambient temperature &
humidity

b. Withstanding capability of
Electromagnetic interference as per
relevant part of IEC 61850
17. Mounting
18. Watchdog

19. a. Nominal Feeder current

b. CT Ratio setting
c. Earth fault current with time delay IEC
Curves, 2nd stage for instantaneous
trip(less than 50 ms)
d. High set with delay
 e. IEC Curves for all O/C and E/F have
user selectable?
20. a. No. of Digital Output Contacts
b. Contact rating
21. Mode of Time Synchronization
22. Type of Lugs and terminators
23. MTBF

24. Lifespan
25. Compliance to Type Test
26. Communication Port
a. Rear port- details
b. Front port-details
27. Whether Communication Ports are
native to the Relay
28. Protocol supported for Rear Port

29. Protocol supported for Front port

30. Start and trip output contacts are freely
programmable
31. Cable for connection of Relay to
laptop(USB port) along with converter
and power supply if required for relay
local setting
32. Basic application software for setting
change, parameterisation
33. CD with software(licensed ) to download
disturbance recorder, event log and
evaluation of those records
34. Graphical configuration tool for I/P, O/P
and functional building block for
protection and control
35. Any other software required for
integration with SCADA.

ANNEXURE-J

GTP for Master Trip Relay

Sl. No. Description Bidder’s Response

01. Manufacturer Name

02. Type and

designation(Literature
to be submitted)
 03. Electrical reset

04. Mounting

04. High Burden relay

05. Operating Time

06. Rated DC supply and

tolerance

07. No. of NO Contact

08. No. of NC Contact

Date : Signature:

Name:

Designation:

Company Seal:

-----------------------------

ANNEXURE-E

Technical Specification for Non-directional over current and earth fault relay

Sl. Feature and Function Technical requirement

No.

1 Purpose and It is intended to automate the Switchgears specified in the scope of supply and use
application Communicable Numeric relays for Protection, Control, Metering and Status monitoring. This
specification is based on the understanding that an integrated Automation System along
with protections shall be provided and same shall have provisions for Integration with
SCADA system. All the feeders shall be remote controlled from Employer’s SCADA and
from the local console of the numerical relays.

Numerical multifunctional combined Microprocessor based Feeder protection and

management relay to protect the 11 kV Feeder from all electrical and other faults along with
reporting system, Disturbance record for fault analysis. Bidder should comply with any
especial requirement or feature asked for retrofitting the relays. Relay should be IEC 61850
compliant. Relay should have 4 CT input for O/C and E/F protection. There should be option
for derivation of E/F internally.
2. Main Protection 1. Relay should have minimum two group of setting. Setting group changeover
Feature required from digital status input.
2. Electrical over load protection with selectable IEC curves with two stage, first stage
to be used as Definite Time / IDMT and second stage to be used as high set for
short circuit protection.
3. Earth fault protection in two stages with IEC characteristics. First stage to be used
as IDMT/Definite Time and second stage to be used as instantaneous elements.
Earth fault element should be suitable for both CBCT and residual type CT
connection.
4. Negative phase sequence Protection with IEC Curves.
5. CB Fail Protection & time settable as per user.
6. The relay should be immune to DC switching while carrying current i.e. no spurious
trip should be generated if relay DC is made On and Off
7. The relay should conform to the IEC255-4 or BS 142 for Inverse time
characteristics.
8. The relay should have features to monitor for broken conductor and CB opening
time.

3. Processor feature Relay shall be completely Numerical with protective elements having software algorithm
based on sampling of analog inputs. Sampling Rate of Analog Signal: The sampling rate
should be 1000 Hz for 50 Hz signal or better for each analog channel. Hardware based
measurements shall not be acceptable.

4. Operational Philosophy The operation of Relay shall be possible both locally from the Switchgear and remote &
Local Work station. The local position shall be displayed in remote / local workstation and
remote operation shall be blocked if the switch is in Local. Clear control priorities shall
prevent initiation of operation of a single switch at the same time from more than one of the
various control levels and there shall be interlocks among various control levels. The priority
shall always be with the lowest enabled control level. Relay accuracy shall not be affected
by system frequency fluctuation.

5. Status/Optical 1. Minimum 7 number status inputs are required

Inputs/Digital inputs 2. All status inputs should be 30 V DC.
3. Setting group is required to be changed with any Digital input status.
4. Trip circuit supervision with DI status
5. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1ms resolution. Contact
bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed as change of state.
6. Relay should have comprehensive self diagnostic feature with remote indication of
relay failure and alarm shall be generated without tripping of circuit
7. Provision of Testing output relays without any current injection.
8. No. of programmable LEDs- at least 4 nos. with latching option.

6. Main measuring and All measurements should be in primary quantities. Minimum following displays are required
reporting feature in alpha numeric:-
1. Three phase (Positive sequence) current
2. Neutral(zero sequence) current
3. All the trips should have clear indication on the relay terminals
4. Resetting should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
5. The default relay LCD shall be user defined to display primary circuit loading.

7. Memory and Recording 1. The relay setting and programming should be stored in EEPROM so that during
Feature Aux. Power failure the said data is not lost.
2. Relay should have event log, trip log and DR record. All logs should go in to history.
3. All tripping of relay should initiate DR in auto without extra binary input. Triggering
 of DR with binary input should be user configurable.
4. The last 2 fault DR records should be in flash memory and DR will not erase in case
of DC supply fail for more than 2 days.
5. Should be able to record at least 5 Oscillographic disturbances and 5 fault records
and 250 event records.
6. Minimum Four no. of latest trip log with cause of trip should be stored in memory
along with date and time stamping. The memory should not be lost with the
switching off of DC.
7. The relay should have fault-recording feature with current waveform and Digital
Input status. The fault waveform should consist of minimum four current waveforms
of three phase current and zero sequence current and DI status. Triggering time for
Pre and Post should have user selectable. This record should be in flash memory
for minimum 7(seven) days even after switching off the DC supply.
8. The fault should be date and time stamped.
9. Communication protocol IEC 61850.
8. Auxiliary Supply 30 V DC to - 25% to + 10%, 2 wire unearthed system. Necessary software shall be in-built
for proper shutdown and restart in case of power failure. Auxiliary supply burden will be
around 20Watt.
9. Rated CT/PT 5/1 Amp(User selectable) , CTs used to be protection class
secondary
10. Rated frequency 50 HZ +/- 3%
11. Ambient condition 1. Operating ambient temperature upto 55 Deg C
2. Operating Humidity upto 100 %
3. Relay shall meet the requirement for withstanding electromagnetic interference
according to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of single component within the
equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to a complete system
breakdown.
12. Module and Mounting 1. Relay should be flush mounted type
2. If module is draw-out type then it should have CT shorting facility of make before
break type.
3. Mounting in switchgears located in non AC rooms.
4. Galvanic isolation between field connection and relay hardware should be there.

13. Watchdog and self The relay should have facility to monitor the healthiness of its circuits and components by
monitoring own monitoring system. In case of any problems, the alarm should be generated by one of
the output contacts. The alarm as soft signal to be sent to SCADA system as well.
Necessary support documentation explaining the self diagnostic feature shall be furnished.

14. Settings Approximate settings possible should be as follows:-

1. Nominal Feeder current 2% to 110 %

2. CT Ratio setting 10-1000(approx.)
nd
3. Earth fault current 5 to 40% with time delay IEC Curves, 2 stage for instantaneous
trip(less than 50 ms)
4. Over current trip- 50% to 200% of 1/5 Amp with time delay as per IEC Curves.
5. High set with delay 200% to 2000%
6. IEC Curves for all O/C and E/F have user selectable.
15. Output Relays Minimum 7 number output relays are required out of which

1. One potential free change over contact should be provided for start inhibit of relay.
2. All o/p contact should be freely programmable.
3. Rating of trip contacts:-
a) Contact durability>10K operation
b) 15 Amp make and carFry for 3 sec for trip contact
c) Make and carry for trip contacts L/R<=40ms
4. Rating of Alarm contacts:- 5 Amp make and carry continuously
for 5 sec.
 Testing of Output relays through keypad on relay fascia and relay HMI software. Output
relay dwell time shall be user programmable or fixed at 100ms.

16. Relay software and 1. The relay should have native IEC 61850 Communication Protocol.
Man Machine Interface 2. Should have password protected key padlock.
3. Necessary software for relay setting , retrieving DR, event log, trip log should be
supplied by the Bidder. Necessary License is to be issued for WBSEDCL, if
required.
4. Bidder has to supply communication hardware for relay setting, DR downloading
from front port. This device should be compatible to USB/Ethernet port.
5. It shall be possible to transfer the data stored in the DFR to computer on
IEEE/COMTRADE format. The data format shall be compatible for dynamic
protection relay testing on relay test kit. COMTRADE data viewing software to be
provided.
6. Multiuser/Corporate license for installation on minimum 7 nos. of PCs.

17. Date and time Date and Time stamping with faults and record. The clock should be powered from internal
cell and should not required setting after every DC switching. The internal cell life minimum
5 years. Time synchronization by IRIG-B or SNTP. For time synchronization through SNTP
is to be provided from clock signal coming from RTU. In case of IRIG-B, time
synchronization will be done with GPS clock signal from GPS receiver located at substation.

18. Lugs and terminators All CT and PT terminals shall be provided as fixed (screwed) type terminals on the relay to
avoid any hazard due to loose connection leading to CT opening or any other loose
connection. Necessary amount of lugs should be supplied along with each relay for CT
connection and control wiring.

19. Manuals, Drawings and 1. The relays should be supplied with manuals with all technical and operating
Literature instructions.
2. All the internal drawings indicating the logics and block diagram details explaining
principle of operation should be given at the time of supply.
3. Mapping details shall be submitted in IEC format.
20. Assistance in As part of this offer, Bidder shall have to provide necessary support during integration of
commissioning relays with the third party SCADA system which will be commissioned in future.

21. Standard 1. MICS document(model implementation conformance statement)

documentation per 2. PICS(protocol implementation conformance statement)
Relay, according to IEC 3. PIXIT document
4. Conformance Test certificate by KEMA/CPRI.
61850
All the above mentioned certificates shall be submitted along with Techno-
commercial Bid.
5. ICD file
6. SCD file
22. Extendibility in Future The Bidder shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to
perform addition of bays in future and complete integration with SCADA by the User.
These software tools shall be able to configure relay, add analog variable, alarm list,
event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for additional bays/equipments which shall be
added in future.
23. Lifespan The supplier should mention following:-

1. Product maturity: The Bidder should mention the time period for which the product
is in the market
2. Expected production life
3. Hardware/Firmware change notification process. Upgrades to be provided free of
cost within the warranty period/5 years whichever is later, if needed.
4. Lifespan of standard tools and processes for relay configuration, querying and
integration.

24. Standards The relay should conform to the IEC255-5 or equivalent BS / ANSI for following:-

1. Overload withstand test

2. Dielectric withstand: 2kV in common, 1 kV in differential mode
3. Impulse Voltage: 5kV in common, 1kV in differential mode
4. Insulation resistance>100 M ohm.
5. Vibration: Shock and bump and Seismic
6. Storing and transportation
7. Radio Interference: IEC 61000 for high frequency disturbance, Transient
disturbance, Electrostatic discharge
8. KEMA/CPRI Certification for the particular model offered with respect to IEC61850
Protocol.

25. Communication Port 1. Two nos. IEC 61850 protocol compliant, 100 MBPS Ethernet RJ45/F.O port for
communication with SCADA system through two managed Ethernet Switches
operating in redundant mode. The communication shall be made in 1+1 mode
between individual IED to Switch, such that failure of one set of LAN shall not affect
the normal operation of SCADA. However, it shall be alarmed in SCADA.
2. Functioning of Relay shall not hamper to fault occurring any interconnected relay.
3. One Front port Ethernet RJ45/USB 2.0 for relay parameterization and configuration
etc. with the help of PC.
4. Relay should generate GOOSE message as per IEC 61850 standard for
interlocking and also ensure interoperability with third party relays.

26. Name Plate and Each IED shall be clearly marked with manufacturer’s Name, type, serial no. and
marking electrical rating data. Name plates shall be made of anodized aluminium with white
engraving on black surface.

27. Performance Relays will be guaranteed for the period of five years from the date of last
Guarantee dispach.
Any problem in the said period should be attended free of charge
inclusive of repair/replacement of relays/ component (both H/W, S/W).
28. Type Test  Dielectric Withstand Test—IEC 60255-5
 High Voltage Impulse Test, class III --- IEC 60255-5(5kV peak, 1.2/50 micro Sec;3
Positive and 3 negative shots at interval of 5 Sec.)
 DC Supply Interruption ---- IEC 60255-11
 AC Ripple on DC supply ---- IEC 60255-11
 Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions --- IEC 61000-4-11
 High frequency Disturbance ---- IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
 Fast Transient Disturbance ---- IEC 60255-22-4, Class-IV
 Surge withstand capability ---- IEEE/ANSI C 37.90.1(1989)
 Degree of Protection
 Electromagnetic compatibility
  Mechanical stress/vibration test
 Temperature withstand
Type test reports for the above tests shall be submitted for the approval of WBSEDCL along
with Tender. Wherever the above mentioned standards and IEC 61850 overlap, the latter
will prevail.

29. Credential as pre- Qualifying Requirement:-

requisite of Tender 1 . Successfully tested and in operation for minimum one year in WBSEB
/WBSEDCL / WBSETCL network.
OR
Copies of performance certificate for minimum two years successful operation of
the offered relay in respect to implementation of IEC 61850 Protocol to any SCADA / Sub
Station Automation System form different Organisations specially in any Power Utility in
India as on the due date of bid opening.
2 . Documentary evidence for being manufacturers like registration Certificate issued
by SSI / NSIC / Directorate of Industries / DGS&D, etc. for qualifying requirement.
3 . The bidder should have testing facilities of all functional tests or should have
arrangement of all functional tests at Government approved Testing Laboratories.
4 . Successful Inter Operability and functional Test :-
Inter Operability Test of offered relay, which complies with other technical
aspects of WBSEDCL’S Technical Specifications, with the existing relays in WBSEDCL
Network will be tested in Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL for which due
intimation for supply of sample of offered relay will be given to the bidder after opening of
the Techno-Commercial bid. The bidder needs to submit the said relay to Distribution
Testing Department, Abhikshan within 15 (fifteen ) days from the said date of intimation.

30. Offer for relay Offer with all relevant documents for numerical relay may be submitted with different
make as per Annexure-B alongwith the Bid but after placement of order, drawing for
approval needs to be submitted with only one type of accepted offered relay.

Checklist for Bill of Material for supply

Sl. No. Material

1. Relay (Model No.) Qty as per Tender

2. Lugs suitable for current and control, wiring Qty as per Tender X Number
of TBs in relay + 20% extra.

3. Cable for connection of Relay to laptop(USB port). 10 set

Along with converter and power supply if
required for relay local setting

4. Manual, Hard copy in good quality paper properly 10 set

bounded

5. Copy of Type Test certificate along with manual With offer

6. Basic application software for setting change, 10 nos.

7. CD with software(licensed ) to download 10 nos.
disturbance recorder, event log and evaluation of
those records

8. Graphical configuration tool for I/P, O/P and 10 nos.

functional building block for protection

9. Any other software required for integration with 10 nos.

SCADA.

N.B All the above tools/ Software should be compatible to WINDOWS XP/WINDOWS NT/WINDOWS 7
Operating System.
 SCHEDULE – I

Undertaking from Relay manufacturer

We hereby confirm that the protective relay(s) type _____________________

i)
ii)
iii)
offered by us against your tender No._____________________ through
M/s._______________________ are in our current range of production. We also
confirm that these relays will not be phased out by us in the next 10 years
from the date of supply. Necessary repairs/replacements if necessary during
this period will be made available by us.

Name & Designation :

Company Seal :

We have offered our relay(s) type _______________________________

i)
ii)
iii)

to M/s. ________________________ against WBSEDCL's tender no.____________.

In this connection we hereby confirm that we would be extending all the
required technical support and back-up guarantee to M/s._______________ for
the above mentioned relay(s).

Name & Designation :

Company Seal :
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING ARRESTORS

1. SCOPE :

1.1. This Specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer's Works, packing,
supply, delivery of 42 KV & 12 KV classes of gapless Lightning Arrestors complete with fittings
and accessories.
1.2. These arrestors shall be of Heavy Duty, Station Class / Distribution Class and Gapless Zinc
Oxide type.
1.3. Arrestors shall be hermetically sealed units suitable for outdoor installation on self-supporting
base or structures.

2. STANDARD :

Arrestors shall conform in general to IEC-99-4 document or its latest amendment and IS/IEC
as follows:

i) IEC-99-4 : Gapless Lightning Arrestor

ii) IS 3070 P-III : Metal Oxide Surge Arrestors without gaps for AC Systems.
iii) IEC 99 P-III : Artificial Pollution Testing of Lightning Arrestor
iv) IEC 270 : Partial Discharge Measurement.
v) IS 2071 : Methods of H V Testing
vi) IS 6209 : Methods for Partial Discharge Measurement
vii) IS 5621 : Hollow Insulators for use in electrical equipment

3. DEVIATION :

Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviation. But any
deviation felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of equipment must be
mentioned in the 'Deviation Schedule' with reasons duly supported by documentary evidences
and advantages of such deviation. Such deviations suggested may or may not be accepted.
But deviations not mentioned in Deviation Schedule will not be considered.

4. DUTY REQUIREMENT :

The Surge Arrestors are being provided to protect the following equipment whose insulation
levels are indicated in the table given below:

Equipment to be protected L I for 42 KV L I for 12 KV

system (KVp) system KVp)
Power Transformer
+/-75
+/-170
Instrument Transformer
+/-170 +/-75
CB/Isolator Phase to ground
+/-170
+/-75
Across open poles
+/-195 -

4.1. The Lightning Arrestors shall be capable of discharging Lightning and switching surges and
temporary power frequency over voltages .The Surge Arrestor shall be capable of discharging
over voltages occurring during switching of unloaded transformers and long lines.

4.2. The Arrestors shall be capable of withstanding Maximum Continuous Operating Voltages
(M.C.O.V).
4.3. The Arrestors supplied shall be suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere.

4.4. The reference current of the Arrestors shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of
grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltages.

5. FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES :

5.1 Arrestor rating upto 42 KV shall be directly mounted on structure as there is no surge
counter.

5.2 Each single pole arrestor shall be provided with suitable name plate, at the base with the
following data :

i) Name of device
ii) Manufacturer's name and trade mark, type and identification
iii) Year of manufacture
iv) Voltage rating & frequency rating.
v) Nominal discharge current
vi) MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage in KV).
vii) Discharge class.
viii) Energy Discharge capability (KJ/KV rating)
ix) Purchase Order reference.
x) Applicable Standard.
xi) Pressure Relief rated current in KA rms (for arrestors fitted with Pressure Relief device)
xii) Serial Number

5.3 Clamp type terminal connector shall be suitable for either ACSR DOG Conductor for 42 KV and
WEASEL / RABBIT Conductor for 12 KV system voltage class L.A. having horizontal/
vertical take off. Detailed particulars have been indicated in the specification for
Clamps and Connector in this bid document.

5.4 Two ground terminal connectors suitable for G.I strip of required size shall be provided on
diagonally opposite sides.

5.5 Necessary hardware such as nuts, bolts, spring washers, etc. shall be supplied for different
units.

5.9 12 KV Lightning Arrestor should be of Distribution Type and should have suitable Fault
Indicator.

6 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES :

6.1 The arrestor elements shall be designed in such a way as to obtain robust construction with
excellent mechanical and electrical properties even after repeated operation. The lightning
arrestors should be adequately designed to operate satisfactorily under temporary power
frequency over voltage as given in Specific Technical Parameters, after discharging two shots
of respective long duration surges. Uniform density of zinc oxide element shall be maintained
to provide uniform current distribution.

6.2 The lightning Arrestors shall be of adequate Pressure Relief Class as per IEC-99-4 , fitted with
Pressure Relief Devices and Arc diverting ports to minimise possibilities of shattering of
porcelain housing.

6.3 Sufficient creepage distance shall be provided to reduce excessive uneven voltages over the
porcelain due to contamination, for which the arrestor shall not fail.

6.4 Seals shall be provided in such a way that these are always effectively maintained even when
discharging the maximum rated lightning current.
6.5 Housing of Insulators shall be of Porcelain, glazed and completely vitrified and free from blow
holes, micro-cracks or void. Porcelain, housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover
will not occur due to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage up to the maximum
design value for the arrestor.

6.6 The end fittings shall be made of non-magnetic and corrosion proof material. It is preferable
that the LAs shall be hermetically sealed with inert gas (Nitrogen).
6.7 Arrestors shall be suitable for mounting on a support structure.

6.8 12 KV Class Distribution Type Lightning Arrestor should have provision for Fault
Indicator/Disconnector.

7 APPLICATION :

The lightning Arrestors are used for protection of incoming and outgoing line and also of the
power transformers from lightning surge as well as from power frequency over voltage.

8 TENDER DRAWINGS, CATALOGUES:

General outline drawing giving plan, elevation, side view and sectional view, top and bottom
connection arrangement with pitch circle diameter and other dimensions of the complete
assembly with surge counter and leakage current measuring meter where applicable, Size of
terminals and lifting lugs, shipping weight etc are to be indicated.

9 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND MANUALS :

9.1 In the event of placement of Order, six (6) copies of drawings and descriptive
literatures shall be furnished to the Chief Engineer, P&CD, Vidyut Bhavan (4th
floor), Salt Lake, Kolkata - 700 091 for approval :

i) General Outline Drawing showing plan, elevation and end views with dimensions and
showing full mounting details with weights.

ii) Dimensional Drawing showing the Arrestor mounted on its base and where applicable
with surge counter and leakage current measuring meter.

iii) Details of Bushing top terminals & terminal connectors.

iv) Shipping Dimensional Drawings with weights.

v) Position of Centre of gravity and clearances with adjacent grounded metallic

structures.

vi) Diagram Plate showing electrical connections of the surge counter and leakage current
measuring meter where applicable.

vii) Rating Plate.

viii) Complete foundation drawings for the structure of Lightning arrestor, where applicable.

9.2 Ten (10) sets of approved drawings and operation and maintenance manuals shall be
submitted for our record and distribution to site.
10 TEST REPORTS AND TYPE TESTS :
The Bidder should submit the Complete Test Reports (including Dynamic Short
Circuit Test Report) & Reports of Type Tests as stipulated in latest relevant
IS/IEC with complete Identification, Date & [Link]., carried out within 5(Five)
Years from Due Date of Tender, from CPRI/ NABL accredited/Govt.
Recognized Test House or Laboratory on Tendered Item of identical design,
With Tender Documents failing which their offer may not be technically
accepted.
11 TEST AT FACTORY AND TEST CERTIFICATES :

i) Each LA. shall comply with the requirements of routine test as specified in the relevant
IEC:99-4 & IS:3070 (Part - III).

ii) Routine test at manufacturer's works shall be carried out in presence of representative
of WBSEDCL.

iii) All routine & acceptance tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works on every
lot offered for inspection as per relevant IEC & IS. Selection of samples for acceptance
test as well as rejection and retesting shall be guided by relevant IEC & IS. Six (6)
copies of Test Reports shall be submitted to the Chief Engineer (P&CD), Vidyut Bhavan
(4th floor), Salt Lake, Kolkata - 700 091 for approval. Adequate extra copies should also
be submitted to Chief Engineer (P&CD) Vidyut Bhavan (4 th floor), Salt Lake, Kolkata -
700 091 for distribution to site.

iv) The Tenderer shall give at least 15 (fifteen) days’ advance notice intimating the actual
date of inspection and details of all tests that are to be carried out. Relevant Type &
Routine Tests’ Certificates obtained from the competent Authorities for all accessories/
bought out items shall have to be furnished.

12. TYPE TESTS after issuance of order :

Besides submission of Type Test Report, carried out within five years as per Tender
Specification, Type Test at the discretion of Ordering authority, shall have to be arranged by the
successful contractor from any lot offered for inspection, sample chosen at random after successful
Routine Test by our Inspection Team, as per relevant ISS from NABL accredited/Govt. Recognized
Test House or Laboratory in presence of WBSEDCL’S representative. In case of failure of the materials
after type test the WBSEDCL will have the right to reject the total supplied lot of the said materials
and the party have to replace the complete lot of materials at his own cost including transportation of
materials at site.
However the necessary cost of the Type Test charges will be reimbursed to the
party on production of necessary supporting documents.

13. Documents to be submitted at the time of physical delivery at consignee stores :

The following documents to be submitted by the vendors to the consignee Stores at the time
of despatch to stores by the vendors:-
a) Copy of Purchase Order.
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction.
c) Inspection Test Certificate.
d) Guarantee Certificate.
e) Proforma Invoice.
f) Calculation Sheet for price Variation on the basis of IEEMA or CACMAI as applicable with
base date of order.
g) Seal list and packing list.
h) Challan in triplicate.
i) Way bill, if applicable.
 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARAMETERS- I

TYPE OF ARRESTOR STATION CLASS DISTRIBUTION

HEAVY DUTY CLASS
GAPLESS
i) Nominal system voltage (KV) 33 11
ii) Highest system voltage (KV) 36 12
iii) System Neutral Earthing NEE(Grounded Through EE
Earthing
Transformer)

iv) BIL of transformers (KVp) 170 75

v) System fault level (KA) 25 16
vi) Maxm. System BIL (KVp) 170 75
LA RATINGS :

i) Rated Voltage (KV) 42 12

ii) Maxm. Continuous operating voltage 36 10
(KVrms)
iii) Nominal Discharge Current (KAp) 10 5
iv) Line discharge class 2 Distribution Class
v) Minimum Energy Discharge capability 5 5
(KJ/KV)
[If there is any Deviation the same may be
mentioned in the Deviation Sheet]
vi) Temporary over voltage withstand 42 12
capability (KVrms) for 10.0 secs
vii) Insulation Housing withstand voltages
i) Lightning Impulse(Dry)
ii) Power frequency(wet) Minimum values as per IEC
for 10 KA
for 5 KA
viii) Minimum creepage Distance acceptable 1100 300
(mm)
i) Pressure Relief Class To be tested in accordance with IEC
ix) (Minimum) High Current Impulse withstand 100 65
(4/10) KA (peak)
x) [Link] Impulse (8/20 micro-
second impulse) residual voltage (KVp) :
5 KA 112 40
10KA - -
xi) Maxm. switching surge (30/60 micro-
second wave) protective level (KVp)
500 Amps 98 21
1000 Amps - -
2000 Amps - -
xii) Maxm. Steep Impulse (1/20 micro-seconds 130 45
impulse) residual voltage at 10 KA (KVp)
xiii) RIV/Partial Discharge (micro-volt / pico- 250 microvolt/ less 1000 microvolt/ less
coulomb) when energised at 1.05 times its than 50 pico-coulomb than 500 pico-
continuous operating voltage shall not coulomb
exceed
xiv) Terminal connection Suitable for ACSR Suitable for
Dog Conductor Weasel/Rabit ACSR
Conductor

xv) Rated Frequency (Hz) 50 50

xvi) Minimum Visible Corona Discharge - -
voltage(KV rms)
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

TYPE OF ARRESTOR STATION CLASS DISTRIBUTION

HEAVY DUTY GAPLESS CLASS
(42KV) (12KV)

i) Nominal system voltage (KV)

ii) Highest system voltage (KV)
iii) System Neutral Earthing
iv) BIL of transformers (KVp)
v) System fault level (KA)
vi) Maxm. System BIL (KVp)
LA RATINGS :

i) Rated Voltage (KV)

ii) Maxm. Continuous operating voltage (KVrms)
iii) Nominal Discharge Current (KAp)
iv) Line discharge class
v) Minimum Energy Discharge capability (KJ/KV)
[If there is any Deviation the same may be
mentioned in the Deviation Sheet]
vi) Temporary over voltage withstand capability
(KVrms) for 10.0 secs
vii) Insulation Housing withstand voltages
i) Lightning Impulse(Dry)
ii) Power frequency(wet)
for 10 KA
for 5 KA
viii) Minimum creepage Distance acceptable (mm)
i) Pressure Relief Class
ix) (Minimum) High Current Impulse withstand
(4/10) KA (peak)
x) [Link] Impulse (8/20 micro-second
impulse) residual voltage (KVp) :
5 KA
10KA
xi) Maxm. switching surge (30/60 micro-second
wave) protective level (KVp)
500 Amps
1000 Amps
2000 Amps
xii) Maxm. Steep Impulse (1/20 micro-seconds
impulse) residual voltage at 10 KA (KVp)
xiii) RIV/Partial Discharge (micro-volt / pico-
coulomb) when energised at 1.05 times its
continuous operating voltage shall not exceed
xiv) Terminal connection
xv) Rated Frequency (Hz)
xvi) Minimum Visible Corona Discharge voltage(KV
rms)

Date: Signature:

Place: Name:

Name of the Company:

Seal of the Company:

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 30 V, 100 AH STATIONARY

BATTERIES

1(i). Scope : The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at the
Manufacturer’s works, delivery by road transport to different sites of West
Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited of Lead Acid
Battery set suitable for Auto and Manual Float cum Boost Battery Charger
with 30 V DC Output. Supervision and erection/commissioning of
devices shall have to be undertaken by mutual acceptance of terms and
conditions for the same, if required.
APPLICATION:
The system requires a reliable and uninterrupted D.C. supply for
supplying D.C. Power to emergency lights, closing and tripping coils of
circuit breakers, relays, semaphores etc.

1(ii). Service conditions:

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.

Maximum ambient temperature ( Degree C) 50

Maximum temperature in shade (Degree C) 45
Minimum Temperature (Degree C) 3
Relative Humidity ( percent) 95
Maximum Annual rain fall (mm) 1450
Maximum wind pressure ( kg/sq. m) 150
Maximum altitude above mean sea level ( Meter) 1500
50
Isoceraunic level ( days per year )

Seismic Level The sites fall within

seismic zone-III and
IV as classified in the
IS:1983
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate
conductive to rust and fungus growth
1(iii). Standards:

Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall conform to latest

applicable Indian standard of equivalent IEC, British or USA standard
and in particular to the following standard (or equivalent IEC British,
USA standard):
The tenderer shall clearly state the standard to which the equipment
offered by him conforms.

IS:
1652/
1991 Specification for stationary lead acid Plante Cell battery

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LEAD ACID BATTERIES (30 V, 100 AH)

1.1 Low maintenance type of Lead Acid stationary Batteries incorporating of

pure Lead Lamellar type with “Plante” formation positive plates assembled
in 2 Volt containers with a capacity of 100 Ampere–hour at 10 hour rate
of discharge to an end voltage of 1.85 V per Cell having Electrical
performance as per IS: 1652/1991 or its latest version amended upto
date.

1.2 The terminals of the battery shall be suitable for receiving cable lugs. 15
Nos. of 2 volts 100 AH Cell connected in series shall form one set of 30
volts 100 AH.

2.0 Application : The device shall be installed in indoor location within

the battery Room of Substations to provide auxiliary DC Power Supply for
following applications:
a) Emergency lighting
b) Circuit breaker/switchgear/protective relay operations
c) Equipment supervision indication
 d) Audio visual annunciation

Under normal conditions, auxiliary DC Power Supply for continuous load will be
met from Battery Charger and storage batteries should be kept under float or
boost charging condition.

But in case of Circuit Breaker/Switchgear/Protective Relay operation and/or in

the event of failure of incoming power supply to Battery Charger, required
auxiliary DC Power supply shall be met from Storage Batteries.

3.0 STANDARD RATING: The standard ratings of batteries shall be 30

Volts DC, 100 AH at 27 Deg C. Duty cycle is to be mentioned.

4.0 Cell Voltage : The nominal voltage of a single cell shall not be less
than 2 volts at the beginning of Charging.
The trickle charging voltage per cell shall be within 2.25 volts to 2.3 volts.
The boost charging voltage per cell shall be upto 2.75 volts.
At the end of the charging, cell shall be floated easily around 2.25 volts without
causing adverse corrosion or loss of water.
5.0 Charging Current:
Trickle charging current shall be between 80 mA to 240 mA.
Boost charging current shall be within following limits:-
a) Starting Rate : 14 Amp
b) Finishing Rate : 7 Amp.

6.0 The expected life span of the batteries shall be minimum 10 years.

7.0 Constructional Feature:

7.1 Type: The storage batteries shall consist of 15 nos. Plante

type Lead Acid Cells of Voltage not less than 2 volts per cell at the beginning
of initial charging.
7.2 Main Components of each cell
7.2.1 Positive Plates
The positive plates of cell shall be constructed from pure lead
consisting of laminations.
7.2.2 Negative Plates
The negative plates shall be pasted type consisting of sturdy lead
alloy grid filled with active material.
7.2.3 Plate Connections
The plug of the plates of like polarity shall be connected to terminal
post for external connections. Suitable plastic buffer, moulded
bottom plate support shall be used for holding plates in proper
position.
7.2.4 Separator
The separators shall be constructed from highly micro-porous and
rigid material of appropriate shape. Separators shall be inert
chemically and shall prevent internal short circuit and shall ensure
minimum internal resistance.
7.2.5 Terminal Posts
The positive and negative terminal posts shall be clearly and
indelibly marked for easy identification. The terminal posts shall be
sealed properly with the lid by rubber grommets or other suitable
device. The terminal posts shall have provision for inter-
cell/outgoing cable connections.
7.2.6 Container
Transparent styrene acryl nitrile (SAN) container for each cell shall
be made of sturdy construction having proven excellent clarity,
outstanding chemical resistant property, rigidity with high
insulating quality. The container shall provide permanent
transparency to enable visual inspection of electrolyte level and
internal condition of cell. Recommended electrolyte level shall be
clearly and indelibly marked.
7.2.7 Cell Lid
Cell lid for covering cell container shall be made from high quality
non-corrosive plastic materials and shall have provision for easy
removal.
7.2.8 Vent Plug
A vent plug of suitable design shall be provided on each cell lid. The
vent plug shall have a micro-porous plastic alloy/ceramic filter
which will prevent escape of acid fume/spreading of acid fume but
will allow free exit of oxygen and hydrogen generated in the process
of charging.
7.2.9 Electrolyte
The electrolyte for the cell shall be battery grade sulphuric acid
conforming to IS:266-1977 or its latest version amended upto date
and diluted with distilled water to specific gravity 1.2 at 27 Deg C.
The lead acid cell batteries shall be supplied in dry and uncharged
condition. Diluted sulphuric acid of approved quality and required
quantity shall be supplied in separate non-returnable porcelain or
any other acid and corrosive proof jars. 10% extra electrolyte shall
have to be supplied.
7.3 Other components of Battery
7.3.1 Cell pillars and connectors :
Cell Pillars and connectors shall be made from highly conductive
material of lead allow having generous cross section ideally suited
for high current duties.
Bolts, nuts, washers etc. for connecting the cells and connectors
shall be coated with anti-corrosive highly conductive material.
7.3.2 Battery Stand
The stand for supporting battery cells shall be provided. The stand
for battery cell shall be of Mild Steel finished with at least three
coats of anti-sulphuric paints of approved shade. The racks shall be
free standing type. Suitable porcelain/plastic insulators shall be
provided between the stand and the battery room floor. Number
 plate to designate each cell of battery shall be provided and shall be
attached on the rack. Provision shall be made for clamping outgoing
cable on the rack. The cell shall be supported on the rack in
suitable row and tier formation with adequate clearance between
adjacent cells.
7.3.3 Polarity Marking
The polarity marking of the terminals shall be marked for
identification. The positive terminal may be identified by “P” or (+)
sign or red colour mark and the negative terminal may be identified
by “N” or (-) or blue colour. Terminal marking shall be permanent
and non-deteriorating.
7.3.4 Life
The Bidder shall quote in his offer the guaranteed life of the
battery when operating under the conditions specified in the
specification.
7.3.5 Battery shall be transported in dry, uncharged condition. The
electrolyte shall be supplied separately in non-returnable container
of acid resistant material. Each battery set shall be supplied with
operation / commissioning manual.
7.3.6 The following characteristics have to be satisfied by the batteries
offered:
i) Loss of capacity on storage of a fully charged battery for 28 days shall
not be more than 3%.
ii) Ampere hour efficiency shall not be less than 97 %.
iii) Distilled water addition once in 6 months should be sufficient to
maintain the electrolyte level.
iv) The battery should withstand conditions of under-floating and over-
floating.
v) The battery should be capable of being maintained at a higher
Electrolyte specific gravity of 1.230 +/- 0.005 without deterioration to
Grid corrosion.
vi) The Bidder should furnish sufficient evidence of his capability to
 manufacture the low maintenance batteries.
7.3.7 Test on Battery:
All tests shall be carried as per the relevant standard. Test shall comprise
of Routine tests and Acceptance Tests.
7.3.8 Routine Test :
These are to be performed at manufacture’s works and shall include the
following test:-
i) Verification of constructional requirement.
ii) Verification of marking.
iii) Verification of dimensions.
iv) Test for capacity.
v) Test for voltage during discharge.
vi) Ampere hour and watt – hour efficiency test.
vii) Test for loss of capacity on storage.
viii) Endurance test.

7.3.9 Acceptance Test:

These tests shall be performed in presence of purchaser’s representative
from the sample selected from the lot offered for supply.
i) Verification of constructional requirement.
ii) Verification of marking.
iii) Verification of dimensions.
iv) Test for capacity.
v) Test for voltage during discharge.
vi) Ampere hour and watt – hour efficiency test.

7.3.10 Important design criteria

Plate connectors and paste shall be designed to contribute maximum

effective surface area, maximum electrical conductivity and superior
voltage characteristics throughout service life. The plates shall be
designed for maximum performance durability and shall not buckle
during different service condition i.e. high rate of discharge and rapid
 fluctuation of load. The container should have provision to avoid short-
circuit of plates due to deposition at the bottom.

7.3.11 Accessories
Following accessories in addition to battery shall have to be supplied in each set
of equipment:
Sl. Item Description Qty
No.
01 Syringe type Hydrometer set complete in all 1 no.
respect and capable of indicating specific
gravity reading in steps of 0.005 for Plante
type Lead Acid Cell Battery
02 Cell Testing Voltmeter (Range: 3-0-3 volts 1 no.
having scale conforming to IS )/ Digital
Multimeter

03 Mercury Glass Thermometer 1 no.

Range: 0-100 Deg C having suitable scale
representing 1Deg C temperature rise.
04 Wall mounting Plastic holder for holding 1 1 no.
no. Hydrometer and 1 no. Thermometer.

05 Plastic syringe: 10 Oz(ounce) 1 set

06 Plastic Funnel : 150 mm dia. 1 no.

07 Acid resistant plastic Jug: 2 ltrs. Capacity 1 no.
08 Rubber Siphon: 12.7 mm dia 2 mtr long 1 no.
09 Rubber apron 2 nos.
10 Rubber gloves 2 Pairs
11 Rubber boots: Knee height 2 Pairs
12 Special tools AS required
13 Battery Stand of Mild Steel 1 no.
14 Inter battery connector of lead plated 14 Nos. +2 extra
copper of cross section not less than 50 sq.
mm.

15 Lead plated set containing 2 nuts,1 bolt

and 2 washers 30 sets+4 extra
16 Sulphuric Acid (10% extra) of 1.190 Specific
Gravity at 27°C sufficient for first filling of
the Battery 1 Lot
8.0 Testing Facilities :
The Bidder must clearly indicate what testing facilities are available in the
works of manufacturer and whether the facilities are adequate to carry
out all Routine, Acceptance Tests. These facilities should be available to
WBSEDCL’s Engineers, if deputed to carry out or witness the tests in the
manufacturer’s works. If any of the tests can not be carried out in the
manufacturer’s works, Bidder shall have to arrange for such testing at
any NABL Accredited/Govt. Test house or Laboratory at his own cost.
9.0 Inspection :
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacturer unless otherwise specially agreed upon by the
manufacturer and the WBSEDCL. The manufacturer shall provide the
WBSEDCL all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy him that the
material is being supplied in accordance with this specification.

10.0 Tests:-
General: The equipment including all components and accessories shall
be subjected to all type of tests including Routine and acceptance tests in
accordance with provision contained in relevant standard.
10.1 Type Test: The Bidder shall have to submit along with their Tender
documents , as pre-requisites, the complete type Test Reports
as stipulated in the relevant IS/IEC, carried out within 5 years from the
due date of Tender, from CPRI/NABL accredited/Govt. recognised Test
House or Laboratory on the offered Item, failing which their offer may not
be technically acceptable.

10.2 Routine and acceptance Tests: Routine &acceptance tests shall have to be
carried out in compliance with provision contained in the relevant
standard and / or to ascertain satisfactory performance of the offered
device at the works of the Manufacturer.
The acceptance tests shall have to be conducted in the presence of
authorised representative of the purchaser before effecting delivery.
11.0 Drawings :
The successful bidder shall have to submit the 6(six) copies of final
drawings, manuals, literatures for approval to the office of the Chief
Engineer (P & E) for approval before starting manufacture of the
equipment. Before despatch of the equipment, 6(six) copies of drawings,
manuals and literature shall be submitted to purchaser for distribution to
different offices of the Company.
In addition to above, every crate of complete set of equipment shall also
contain in waterproof folder, 2(two) sets of drawing, manuals and
literature for commissioning, operation and maintenance at site.

12.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:

Battery shall be delivered to the various consignees of WBSEDCL and

shall be suitably packed to avoid damages during transit. The Battery
with all its integral part will be guaranteed for the period of 5 years from
the date of last dispatch.
In the event of any defect in any of its integral part of the equipment
arising out of faulty design, materials, workmanship within the above
period, the supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the
satisfaction of the purchaser. However, any engineering error, omission,
wrong provision, etc. which do not have any effect on the time period,
shall be attended to as and when observed/pointed out without any price
implication.

13.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The bidder should fill up the details in schedule A – ‘Guaranteed

Technical Particulars’ and the statement such as “as per drawing
enclosed”, “as per WBSEDCL requirement”, “as per IS”, “as per
specification” etc. shall be considered as details not furnished and such
offers may be rejected.
14.0 Schedules:
The Bidder shall fill in the following schedules, which is part and
parcel of the tender specification and offer. If the schedules are not
submitted duly filled in with the offer, the offer shall be liable for rejection.

Schedule A: Guaranteed Technical Particulars

 Schedule ‘A’

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PLANTE TYPE 30V, 100 AH

LEAD ACID CELL BATTERY

Sl Particulars Details
No.

1. Name and Address of the

Manufacturer

2. Application standards

3. Type & Designation as per

standards

4. Manufacturer’s type and

designation

5. Capacity and voltage at 27◦C AH WH FINAL

VOLTAGE
a) At 10hrs. rate of discharge (v)

b) At 5hrs. rate of discharge

c) At 3 hrs. rate of discharge

d) At 1 hrs. rate of discharge

e) At 1 minute rate of discharge

6. Cell details

a) No. of cells per battery

b) No. of positive plates per cell

c)Total no. of plates per cell:

d) Type of positive plate:

e) Type of negative plate:

f) Surface area of plate in [Link]:

g) Construction details and

dimensions of

i) Positive plate

ii) Negative plate

 h) Rated current of each positive
plate:

i)Construction details of separators

including thickness, type and
material

j) Container details:

i) Material of container

ii)Overall dimensions of container

in mm

: Length

: Width

: Height

k) Overall dimension of cell in mm

(including Cell height)

l) Weight of each of cell in kg.

a) Without Acid

b) With acid

m) Clearance in mm between:

i) Top of plates and top of

container

ii) Bottom of plates &

bottom of container

ii) Edges of plates & inner surfaces

of container

n) Cell Lid details:

i) Material

ii) Type

iii) Feature

7. Electrolyte details:

i) Applicable standard of
electrolyte
 ii) Quantity of Electrolyte &
Specific gravity at 27◦C for first
filling in each cell

iii) Quantity of Electrolyte required

for 15 nos. Plante type lead acid
cell plus 10% extra

iv) Specific gravity of electrolyte at

27 ◦C with all cells fully charged

v) Specific gravity of electrolyte at

the end of 10 hour of discharge
rate

8. Cell Pillars &Connectors :

i) Material

ii) Type

iii)Dimension details in mm

iv) Details of inter row inter tier

connectors including bolts, nuts
and washers.

9. Battery Stand:

1) No. of racks per battery

2) No. of cells per rack

3) Formation of row and tier

details

4) Material of stand

5) Particulars of anti-sulphuric
paint to be provided

6) Type and no. of stand insulator

to be provided

10. Nominal cell voltage in volts:

11. Recommended rate of first Start Finish

charging battery cells

1) Current in amps

2) Voltage in volts
 3) Total minimum input during
initial charging in AH

12. Recommended float charge rate

13. Recommended float charge voltage

across the battery terminals

14. Recommended boost charge

voltage across the battery
terminals

15. Guaranteed AH efficiency at 10 hr.

rate of discharge

16. Guaranteed WH efficiency at 10 hr.

rate of discharge

17. Internal Resistance of charged cell

in milli ohm

18. Resistance of the charged battery

including inter connector between
the cell in ohms

19. Short Circuit Current for dead

short circuit across the battery
terminals when

1) Battery in floating mode

2) Battery in boost charge mode

20. Cell voltage characteristics curves

during charging at 0.5,1.0 and 1.5
times normal rate

21. Battery layout arrangement

22. List of accessories to be provided

with battery

Date: Signature:

Place: Name:

Name of the Company:

Seal of the Company:

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
A. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 30 V, 35A AUTO AND MANUAL
FLOAT-CUM-BOOST BATTERY CHARGER

1. Scope: The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at the

Manufacturer’s works, delivery by road transport to different sites of West
Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited for Auto and
Manual Float cum Boost Battery Charger. 30 V DC output in Float Mode:
Continuous 21 Amp load and trickle charging current for Battery. Boost
Charge Mode: Continuous load of 21 Amp and Battery Boost Charge
current of 14 Amp. In addition to above, the Charger is capable of
delivering short time current of 40 Amp for 1 second for tripping of
breaker and lighting purpose.

Supervision and erection of devices shall have to be undertaken by

manual acceptance of terms and conditions for the same, if required.

APPLICATION:

The system requires a reliable and uninterrupted D.C. supply for

supplying D.C. Power to emergency lights, closing and tripping coils of
circuit breakers, relays etc.

2. Service conditions:

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.

Maximum ambient temperature ( Degree C) 50

Maximum temperature in shade (Degree C) 45
Minimum Temperature (Degree C) 3
Relative Humidity ( percent) 95
Maximum Annual rain fall (mm) 1450
Maximum wind pressure ( kg/sq.m) 150
Maximum altitude above mean sea level( Meter) 1500
50
Isoceraunic level ( days per year )

Seismic Level The sites fall

within seismic
zone-III and IV
as classified in
the IS:1983
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate
conductive to rust and fungus growth
3.0 Standards:

Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall conform to latest

applicable Indian standard of equivalent IEC, British or USA standard
and in particular to the following standard (or equivalent IEC British,
USA standard):
IS:3895/1966 Specification for the rectifier equipment
IS:9224 Specification for HRC fuses.
IS: 1248 Indicating instrument.
IS:375 /1963 Specification for wiring
IS: 4540/1968 Mono crystalline semiconductor rectifier
assemblies
IS:2026 Transformers
IS:13947/ 1993 Air Break Switch/Contactor

IS: 5/1978 Colour for ready mix paint

IS: 5421/1981 Printed circuit board
IS: 8828/1993 Miniature circuit breaker
IS:2147 Degree of protection for cubicle
IS:6619 Safety code for semiconductor rectifier
equipment

The tenderer shall clearly state the standard to which the equipment
offered by him conforms.

4.1 SUPPLY: AC input: 240 volts +20 % & - 25%, 50 HZ +/- 5%, Single
phase supply. Input power factor 0.7 minimum at rated load.

4.2 CHARGER SYSTEM OPERATION:

4.2.1. The Battery Charging Equipment shall be float-cum-Boost type with
facility to supply the DC continuous load of 20 Amp also. During normal
operation, the Battery is floated across the Battery charger at 34.5 V (2.3
V per cell) and should be compatible for battery as per specification) and also
supplies the load current 21 Amps. Whenever the battery has run down, it
needs to be boost charged passing higher current of 14 Amps, into batteries for
higher voltage up to 42 V (2.75V maximum per cell). The charger shall provide
this extra voltage for Boost charging.

4.2.2 During boost charging, voltage across the battery terminal will go higher
at the order of about 42 volts for which suitable Automatic solid state
transistorized dropping device shall be provided (maintain 30 Volts +2/- 0V
volts across the load terminal).

4.2.3 Battery Charging Equipment shall be fully automatic for Float and Boost
charging facility with suitable indication on front of the panel by means of LED
indication. For this, automatic solid state changeover relay shall be provided.
During AC mains fail, Battery supplies the load and gets discharged. The extent
of discharge depends on the duration of power failure and the current drawn by
load. When the mains are restored after power failure, Battery shall put on
automatically on boost mode. During this time, load voltage shall be maintained
by load regulator 30 V ± 2 Volt. After the Battery gets fully charged i.e. its
voltage reaches 42 Volts, it should automatically switch over to trickle mode &
when Battery voltage falls below 27 volts, the charger should automatically
switch over to Boost mode. Soft start feature shall be provided in the system.

4.2.4. The manual mode should be fully independent so that no element of

electronic controller comes into its operation. This shall also include an
independent full wave bridge rectifier of suitable rating, output of which
will be connected to load and battery by means of a contactor controlled
switch on the front panel. Output of the charger in manual mode shall
be maintained below 35 volts by means of selector switch connecting
the suitable tap on the secondary side of power transformer by the
operator. Facility should be provided to prevent the excessive in-rush
current into the battery, when the discharged battery suddenly comes
across the float charger after an emergency period.

4.2.5 The battery charger shall have one top and one bottom for Manual &
Auto Bridge circuit. The bottom module (Auto mode) shall be so connected to
the top/other modules that if necessary, it can be taken out for repair by
simply disconnecting few links. Each arm of the bridge shall be provided with
filter circuit as well as fuse protection in order to rectify the fault if any, at the
earliest opportunity.

4.2.6 There shall be 4(four) nos. Feeder specific outgoing MCBs to cater DC
load as and when needed. Out of 4(four) nos., 3 nos. shall be provided
with 32 Amp. MCB for protection circuit and one number with 6 Amp
MCB for emergency light without changeover. The above MCBs
considered excluding Battery circuit.

4.2.7 Automatic changeover of DC load requirement of substation to Battery in

the event of Mains power failure should be without any break. i.e should
be made without incorporating any relay in the output DC supply.

4.2.8 Automatic changeover of output to charger supply with restoration of

incoming power supply and after meeting short time current requirement
from battery.

4.3 RATING: 30V DC output, 35 Amp Auto & Manual dual automatic float
cum boost Battery Charger.

a) Type : Thyristor controlled

 b) At Load Terminal:

During Float charging or Boost charging, the load voltage shall be

maintained 30 V ± 2 Volt for AC input voltage variation of +20% & -
25 % and load variation of 0 to 100 %. Also system shall provide 35
Amps continuous current and also momentary current of 40 Amps
for one second.

c) At Battery Terminal:

Trickle charge voltage 34.50 volts (2.3V per cell) at 400 mA

maximum. Boost charge voltage 42 volts (2.75 V per cell) at 14
amps.

d) RIPPLE:

The ripple content in the DC output of Battery Charger shall be

limited to 2 % RMS.

e) Regulation: +/- 2%

f) Efficiency: More than 70%

g) Method of cooling :Natural air with proper ventilating

arrangement

5.1 COMPONENTS:

5.1.1 The Battery charger shall comprise of following components but not
limited to the same:

a) Double pole AC circuit breaker for AC incoming of the battery

charger (MCB) with auxiliary potential free contact for indication to
SCADA. MCB ratings shall be suitable for 3kA rupturing capacity at
30V DC.

b) Single phase, double wound, Air Natural Cooled, Vacuum

impregnated transformer of CRGO lamination and copper winding.

c) Single phase, full wave half controlled SCR bridge of 40A rating
(Silicon controlled rectifier) together with suitable heat sinks and RC
suppression network to take care of momentary high load of 40
Amp. All the electronic components shall be of high MTBF or heavy
duty type and liberally rated.

d) Automatic solid state voltage / current controller for automatic

control of voltage and current during float/ boost charging the
batteries complete with manual control facility.
 e) Auto /manual mode selector switch (25 A AC rating) with Indication
lamp/ LED for respective position.

f) Float/ Boost indicator lamps/LED.

g) Potentiometers to adjust DC output voltage and current in

respective modes.
h) Battery charging current and voltage requirements are to be
regulated by using voltage current feedback loops.

i) Smoothing (filter) circuit comprising of smoothing choke, and filter

condenser to reduce ripple content in the DC output of the Battery
charger to 2% RMS.

j) DC moving coil Ammeter of 0-25A rating and 72 sq. mm. for load
and 0 to 50 A battery current.

k) DC moving coil Voltmeter of 0-50 V rating and 72 sq. mm. with

selector switch and HRC fuse to measure voltage of Charger/
Battery and Load.

l) Solid state automatic load voltage regulator to maintain the load

voltage of 30 V ± 2 V (rating of the regulator shall be 20 A
continuous and 40 A for one second) during Float charging or Boost
charging of the Batteries.

m) Double pole DC circuit breaker for Battery protection (MCB) with

auxiliary potential free contact for indication to SCADA.

n) DC contactor to by-pass automatic load voltage regulator in the

event of AC mains fails to allow the full battery across the load.
There should not be any discontinuity of DC supply to the bus bar
during any transition period and battery power should be available
for tripping circuit, if necessary, even during boost charging.

o) AC analog Voltmeter 96X 96 [Link] of rating 0 to 300 V.

p) Fuse fail indication lamp/ LED for load and Battery fuses.

q) The indicating instruments shall be of class 1.0 accuracy.

r) The following provisions conforming to relevant IS shall be made on

the front panel:-

(i) Voltmeter to indicate battery/ charger DC voltage.

(ii) Voltmeter for Input AC supply voltage.
(iii) Ammeter to indicate Charge/Discharge current of Battery.
(iv) Ammeter to indicate load DC current.
5.1.2 The Charger shall be provided with following LED of reputed make
Indication:

(i) Supply of power -- Green

(ii) Charger on -- Green
(iii) Battery reverse polarity
(iv) Input power supply fail – Red
(v) Output over/under voltage
(vi) Earth fault

5.1.3 Audio/ Visual alarm to indicate:-

(i) Power failure.

(ii) Charger failure.
(iii) Battery disconnection/failure.
(iv) DC under/Over voltage.
(v) Condenser Fuse failure.
(vi) In case of failure of charger on fault, it should give buzzer as well as
LED indication. However, the buzzer alarm should be provided for battery
fuse fail, load fuse fail and charger trip due to overload indication with
an accept and reset switch. The charger shall have provision for an alarm
relay contact for remote Indication. Suitable terminals with identification
label shall have to be provided.

5.1.4 Controlling arrangement for following functions shall be provided:-

a) Auto/Manual Selector Switch

b) Manual operation controlling device
c) Accept/Reset push button
d) Voltmeter selector switch

5.2 a. Wiring: Charger cubicle shall be supplied completely wired upto

terminal block for purchaser’s external connection using solder less
crimping type copper lugs. All wiring shall be carried out with 750 V
grades PVC insulated multi-strand copper conductor of 2.5 Sq mm and
shall be flame/ vermin proof. All wiring shall be neatly bunched without
affecting access to equipment/ components mounted within the
cabinet. The Charger DC output circuit for Battery and load connection
separately shall be wired with 6.00 [Link] PVC insulated cable.

Suitable two earthing terminal and outgoing terminal shall be

supplied to connect the external supply cables.

Control/Indication/Annunciation circuit shall be wired with suitable size

of PVC insulated cable as per scheme requirement. Colour coded wires
should be used to facilitate easy tracing, as under:-
 i. Single Phase A.C. Circuit:-

(a) Yellow for Phase

(b) Green for Earthing
(c) Blue for Neutral

ii. D.C. Circuit:-

(a) Red for Positive
(b) Black for Negative

iii. Control Wiring:-

(a) Gray for annunciation and other control circuits.

b. Ferrules: Embossed/Engraved core identification ferrules, marked

to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each
wire.

c. Termination:

 The input, battery and load terminals shall be located in easy

accessible positions. The terminals shall be properly labelled for
easy identification of Input (Ph &Neutral), Battery (positive &
negative), Load (Positive &negative) and Emergency Lamp
(Positive & negative).
 The terminals shall be rated at 25 Amps or more depending on
scheme requirement.
 The Input terminals shall be connected to a 3 core PVC
insulated multi-stranded copper conductor cable (minimum 2
mtr. length) with a 16 Amp 3 pin plug socket at the other end.
The earth conductor of the cable shall be provided on the
charger body.
 The charger shall incorporate terminals and fuse of 4 Amp
rating for connecting wires from outside to bring emergency
light into battery circuit in the event of mains failure.
 All control cables should run through the bottom side of the
Charger cubicle with proper gland arrangement.

5.3 Special Feature:

a) All printed circuits boards used in the Battery charger shall be solder
marked, glass, epoxy, FR 4 grade copper clad material having edge type
gold plugging connectors conforming to latest IS-IEC specifications. All
assembled PCB conforming coating on component side & epoxy varnish
on the other side with suitable protective coating for protection against
humidity and corrosion.

b) Transformer shall be with class–B insulation having a continuous

rating at least 125% of the rating of the charger. Reactance of the
transformer shall be suitable to take care of regulation and surges. The
power transformer rectifier unit of the battery charger shall be designed
 for adequate VA rating but in any case it should not be less than 4000
VA and should be rated for 300 V at factor of safety of 3.
The heat dissipation and power control system should be designed with a
factor of safety of 8. Rating of silicon diode should not be less than 40 A.
Please note that necessary documentary evidence, showing transformer
rating of 4000 VA along with test certificate from manufacturer, if
bought-out, shall be enclosed, for approval of the purchaser.

c) Tenderer shall furnish full description and illustration of all

components complete with quantity, make, rating, type, tolerance etc.
including, but not limited to the list of components given below.

d) Following make of components shall be used in the Battery charging

equipment or equivalent approved by C.E. (P&E) WBSEDCL.

i) Switches Kaycee/ Recom

ii) Meters AE/IMP/USHA/RISHAV
iii) Contacts /Relay L&T/Siemens/ABB/C&S
iv) MCB MOS/ABB/Siemens/L&T
v) HRC fuses S&S/Bussman/Siemens/L&T
vi) SCR USHA/HIRECT/IR/Semicron
vii) Diode USHA/KELTRON/IR/Semicron
viii) Lamps/LED Essen/vaishna/Siemens/L&T/Emco
ix) Filter condenser Rescon/Elcon/Kendil
x) Potentiometer Pankaj
xi) Voltmeter A.C. IMP/AE/Rishav/ Meco
e) All other bought out items shall conform to the relevant IS and of
reputed make subject to approval of C.E. (P&E) WBSEDCL.

f) a) The charger cubicle will be indoor type with all associated and
auxiliary equipments mounted therein.

b) The charger cabinet shall be 2 mm. thick sheet steel for Non –
Load bearing members & 3 mm for Load bearing members enclosed
and shall be dust and vermin proof. The maximum overall
dimension of the charger shall be height-1500 mm. Width – 700
mm. and depth - 600 mm.

c) The cabinet shall be free standing floor mounting type with a

provision for proper ventilation. Backside Cover will be double door
type. Necessary arrangement on front, back & top side shall be
provided for easy access to different components for
repair/maintenance etc. The enclosures of the cabinet shall provide
at least degree of protection IP-42 as specified in IS: 13947.

d) All doors, removable covers and plates shall be provided with

neoprene gasket all around. Louvers, when provided shall have
screens and filters. The screen shall be of fine wire mesh made of G.I.
wire.
 e) All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled phosphate and then
applied with two coats of Zinc primer and two coats of finishing epoxy
powder coating or polyethylene protective coating of light gray as per
IS : 631, both inside and outside. The cabinet legs shall be of adequate
height and strength and should provide minimum clearance of 500
mm from ground.

f) All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge types conforming to IS: 2208

mounted on plug type fuse bases.

g) Electrical indicating instruments shall be flush mounted on panel

with only flanges projecting. Dial shall be white with black number
and lettering.

h) Control and instrument switches shall be of rotary type.

i) Indicating lamps shall be LED type with low watt consumption. The
LEDs shall be provided with series resistors.

j) Strip type space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided inside

cabinet to prevent moisture condensation.

k) All door mounted equipments as well as equipment mounted inside

the cabinet shall be provided with individual labels with equipment
designation engraved on aluminium/plastic plate (stickers are not
acceptable).

l) POLARITY MARKING:-

The polarity marking of the terminals shall be marked for identification.

The positive terminal may be identified by “P” or (+) sign or Red colour
mark and the negative terminal may be identified by “N” or (-) or Blue
colour. Terminal marking shall be permanent and non-deteriorating.

m) TERMINALS

Battery charger cabinet shall be provided with two separate suitable

earthing terminals. Separate terminals shall be provided for connecting
load and battery leads to the charger. All terminals shall be of M12 size.
Suitable copper lugs shall be provided by the supplier for use of the
purchaser for connecting the load wiring. It would be the bidder’s
responsibility to prove the adequacy of its design by submitting all
technical particulars and relevant graphs to show suitability of charger
for supplying load on continuous basis.

The following documents shall be necessarily enclosed along with Tender

Submission:

i) General Arrangement and cross sectional drawing showing

 device positions, dimensional details and erection
arrangement of Charger.
ii) Schematic diagram of charger showing different components
iii) Wiring diagram of the charger including ferrule numbering
iv) operation & maintenance manuals
v) Type test report.

n) All Deviations from this specification shall be set out by the bidder and
should be brought out clearly in the Deviation sheet.

5.4 Method of cooling of charger equipment shall be specified by the

bidder.

6.0 Technical Particulars of Matching Lead Acid Cell Battery for 30 V, 100
AH

6.1 Standard rating

15 nos. 2 volts, 100AH at 27 Deg C when discharged at 10 hours with final cell
voltage not less than 1.85 Volts.

Range of charging Current and Final Cell voltage

a) Range of Float Charging : 80mA to 240mA

b) Range of Boost charging
i) Starting Current : 14 Amp
ii) Finished rate : 7 Amp.
c) Cell voltage at the end of charge
i) Float charge condition : 2.3 V per cell
ii) Boost Charge condition : 2.75V per cell
d) Permissible cell voltage at : 1.75V
the end of discharge

6.2 Ampere Hour capability of each cell of Battery

Amp-Hour 100AH
Capacity
Discharge 10H
duration
Final Voltage 1.85V

7.0 Nameplate Information

Battery Charger nameplate information shall be determined in agreement with
the Employer. This information may include for example:

 Name of manufacturer and country

 Type, design, and serial number
  Rated frequency
 Rated Output Voltage and Current
 Purchase Order number and date
 Month and year of supply
 Property label: ‘Property of WBSEDCL’
 Guarantee : Five years

8.0 Type Tests:-

The following tests shall constitute the type tests as per IS: 3136-1965
and IS:4540-1968 (latest amended):

a) DC voltage current test.

b) Automatic voltage regulator operation.
c) Efficiency test.
d) Ripple Voltage test.
e) High Voltage test.
f) Temperature rise test.

9.0 List of Routine Tests as follows:-

 Physical checking of charger as per approved drawing.

 Insulation resistance test.
 High voltage test (2.0 KV).
 Line regulation test at No Load and full load in test at load in Float/ boost
mode.
 Full load ripple content measurement test at load terminals in float and
boost mode.
 Voltage regulation test at load terminal and Battery terminals in float and
boost mode.
 DC short circuit test without blowing HRC fuses and without tripping
MCBs at load terminal and also at Battery charger output terminals
with observation of total current limit.
 Efficiency measurement test at full load and 20% load.
 Checking of automatic operation Float to Boost, Boost to float mode as per
Battery condition.
 Checking of Battery voltage, load voltage and Load current Boost Mode at
different charging current.
 Temperature rise test of complete charger at full load current (21+14) Amp
@ ambient temperature.
 Checking of battery & Load Terminal voltage in manual Mode operation
at different position of Manual Mode Selector Switch.
 Checking of automatic connection of Battery to load in case of ‘Mains
Failure’ or Charger Trip’ conditions.
  Checking of Float voltage setting range and Boost current setting Range
in Automatic Mode.
 Any other routine test shall be carried as per IS: 4540 on the complete
battery Charging equipment.

9.1 For acceptance of lot all above routine tests shall be carried out on
selected 2 samples.

10.0 Testing Facilities:

The Bidder must clearly indicate what testing facilities are available in the
works of manufacture and whether the facilities are adequate to carry out
all Routine, Acceptance Tests. These facilities should be available to
WBSEDCL’s Engineers, if deputed to carry out or witness the tests in the
manufacture’s works. If any of the tests can not be carried out in the
manufacturer works, Bidder shall have to arrange for such testing at any
NABL Acceredited/ Govt. Test House or Laboratory at Bidder’s cost.

11.0 Inspection :
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacturer unless otherwise specially agreed upon by the
manufacturer and WBSEDCL. The manufacturer shall provide the
WBSEDCL all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy him that the
material is being supplied in accordance with this specification.

12.0 Tests:-

General: The equipment including all components and accessories shall

be subjected to all type of tests including Routine and acceptance tests in
accordance with provision contained in relevant standard.

12.1 Type Test: The Bidder shall have to submit along with their Tender
documents, as pre-requisites, the complete Type test Reports as
stipulated as per Clause No.8.0 of the specification, carried out within
5 years from the due date of Tender, from CPRI/NABL accredited/Govt.
recognised Test House or Laboratory on the offered Item, failing which
their offer may not be technically acceptable. However, in case of failure to
submit the same, submission of type test report on 20.5 Amp Auto &
Manual Float-cum-Boost Charger during submission of Tender is
essential.

If the Tenderer fails to produce the said type test report on the offered
item during submission of tender, he will have to submit the said type
test report before opening of price bid at his own cost.

12.2 Routine and acceptance Tests: Routine &acceptance tests shall have to be
carried out in compliance with provision contained in the relevant
standard and / or to ascertain satisfactory performance of the offered
 device at the works of the Manufacturer.
The acceptance tests shall have to be conducted in the presence of
authorised representative of the WBSEDCL before effecting delivery.

13.0 Drawings:
The successful bidder shall have to submit the 6(six) copies of drawings,
manuals, literatures for approval to the office of the Chief Engineer (P & E)
for approval before starting manufacture of the equipment. It is desired
that the complete schematic of the charger is provided on a permanently
laminated/engraved plate of suitable thickness which has to be
bolted/riveted at the four corners on the inside face of rear door. In
addition, one more plate of similar type and dimension shall be provided
on the outside of the rear door providing guidelines and instructions for
operation of the charger. The guidelines and schematic to be provided on
the plates shall be as per approved drawings.

Before despatch of the equipment, 6(six) copies of drawings, manual and

literature shall be submitted to WBSEDCL for distribution to different
offices of the Company.
In addition to above, every crate of complete set of equipment shall also
contain in waterproof folder, 2(two) sets of drawing, manuals and
literature for commissioning, operation and maintenance at site.

14.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:

Battery Chargers shall be delivered to the various consignees of

WBSEDCL and shall be suitably packed to avoid damages during transit.
The Battery Charger with all its integral part will be guaranteed for the
period of 5 years from the date of last dispatch.
In the event of any defect in any integral part of the equipment arising out
of faulty design, materials, and workmanship within the above period, the
supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the satisfaction
of the WBSEDCL. However, any engineering error, omission, wrong
provision, etc. which do not have any effect on the time period, shall be
attended to as and when observed/pointed out without any price
implication.

15.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

The bidder should fill up the details in schedule A – ‘Guaranteed

Technical Particulars’ and the statement such as “as per drawing
enclosed”, “as per WBSEDCL requirement”, “as per IS”, “as per
specification” etc. shall be considered as details not furnished and such
offers will be rejected.
16.0 Schedules:
The Bidder shall fill in the following schedules, which is part and
parcel of the tender specification and offer. If the schedules are not
submitted duly filled in with the offer, the offer shall be liable for rejection.
Schedule A ----- Guaranteed Technical Particulars.

17.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

17.1. Immediately on receipt of this order you shall have to submit a “Quality
Assurance Plan” indicating the specific quality control procedure and
practices adopted in the major activities of production to ensure its
standard.

17.2 The successful Bidder shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit
following information to the purchasers.

(i) List of raw material as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub
suppliers selected from those furnished alongwith offer.

(ii)Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories.

(iii)Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for purchaser's inspection.
The quality assurance plan and purchaser's hold points shall be discussed
between the purchaser and supplier, before the QAP is finalized.

17.3 The successful Bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought
out accessories and central excise passes for raw material at the time of routine
testing of the fully assembled equipment.
 Schedule ‘A’

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 30V, 35 A (14A+21A) BATTERY

CHARGER SUITABLE FOR 30 VOLT 100 AH LEAD ACID PLANTE TYPE
BATTERY

Sl. Description Particulars

No.
1 Name of manufacturer
2 Type of charger
3 Indicate specification to which the offered
charger conforms
4 Rated Input supply voltage
5 Rated Input current
Input Power Factor
6 Output voltage with range of variation
7 Output current range
8 Output current
a) Max. Battery charging current
b) Max. continuous DC external load
current
c) Max. continuous output current
9 Output voltage Regulation
a) No load
b) Full load
10 Ripple factor

11 Efficiency

12 Method of Cooling

13 Painting details
14. Whether separate terminals of M-12 size
for connecting load and charger leads to
the battery terminals has been provided.
15 Provision of LEDs for indication purpose
16 Provision of Audio/ Visual alarm
17 Provision of labels for individual
components
18 Provision of ferrules
19 Provision of separate terminals for
connecting battery and load
20 Provision of two separate Earthing
terminals
21 Weight of the complete charger
22 Overall dimensions of battery charger
23 Thickness of the sheet enclosure
24 Make and rating of Miniature Circuit
Breaker for AC Input supply
25 Make & rating of main transformer
26 Make and type of rectifier SCR
27 Rating of rectifier SCR in Amps
28 PIV value of rectifier diode
29 Output in Amps of complete rectifier stack
30 Make, Type & range of Voltmeter
31 Expected service life of Charger
32 Commitment for availability of spares
during service life
33 Applicable Standards
34 List of accessories to be provided with the
Charger
35 Recommended particulars of matching
Battery
36 Technical particulars of different
components including make, type and
rating
37 Description of operating principle of
Auto/Manual float cum boost charger with
functions of different components
supported by drawing and block diagram

Place: Signature with Date:

Name of the Company: Name & Designation:

Seal of the Company:

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Co. Limited.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
415 V A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

(FOR 33/11 KV SUB STATIONS)

WBSEDCL
Page 1 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing at works and

supply of Indoor type A.C. Distribution Boards for power supply to yard
lighting, Battery charger, 33 kV substation equipments, compressors etc.
The system shall be AC 3 Phase, 4 Wire, 433 Volts, 50 HZ with effectively
grounded neutral.

2.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.

2.1 Maximum ambient temperature (Degree C) 50

2.2 Maximum temperature in shade (Degree C) 45
2.3 Minimum temperature of Air in shade (Degree C) 3.5
2.4 Relative Humidity (Percent) 10-100
2.5 Maximum annual rain fall (mm) 1450
2.6 Maximum wind pressure (Kg/ [Link]) 150
2.7 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (metre) 1000
2.8 Isokeraunic level (Days per year) 50
2.9 Seismic level (Horizontal Acceleration) 0.3g
Moderately Hot and Humid tropical climate conducive
2.10 to rust and fungus growth -

3.0 STANDARDS:

3.1 Components mounted on the ACDB shall confirm to the latest

revisions of the following standards:

Degree of protection provided for

A IS: 13947 enclosure for low voltage control gear
and switchgear & MCCB

B IS 5 Painting
C IS: 13947/1993 Part-III Switch Fuse Disconnector unit
amended up to date
IS 2705 amended up to
D date CTs

WBSEDCL
Page 2 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

E IS 8828/1996 amended MCB

upto date
F IS 1248 Indicating instruments
G IS 375 Wiring
IS: 13703/1993 Part-I &
H II HRC Fuses

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

These A C Distribution Boards shall be supplied as per this

specification.

4.1 Rated Voltage:

Rated voltage for the Distribution Board and its constituent items like
Switch Fuse Disconnector unit, MCBs, busways etc. shall be 3 phase 4 wire
A.C. 433 volts, 50 Hz with solidly grounded neutral. The supply voltage may
vary by ± 10% of rated voltage. All the equipments used in the Board shall
operate satisfactorily at this voltage variation.

4.2 General Requirements:

4.2.1 Each Distribution Board shall be free standing floor mounted

having compact design. The Board shall be closed, dust protected, weather
proof and shall be made vermin proof with a special type lining e.g.
Neoprene gasket, around the edges of the doors. The distribution board
shall comply degree of protection IP 43. MCBs shall be operating vertically
upward for ON/OFF operation. The entire distribution board shall have
uniform finish and shall be sturdy. The distribution boards shall be of
modular construction with provision for complete compartmentalisation of
all feeders. It shall be of dead front type comprising dust-tight and vermin
proof sheet steel cabinets suitable for indoor installation. The doors of
cabinets shall be lockable. Handle shall be made of reputed make. The DB
shall be provided with double door in front having 2 nos. hinges (for each
door) which should be suitable for movement of 120 degree and 2 no. knobs
to be provided on the door corners. All instruments and control devices
shall be mounted on the front of cabinets and fully wired to the terminal
blocks. All switches provided on the distribution board shall be on front
side of the cabinets, operable from outside.

WBSEDCL
Page 3 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

4.2.2 Each Distribution Board shall be made out of at least 2.0 mm

thick cold rolled steel sheet, suitably reinforced to provide flat level surface.
Size 1000(H) x 750(W) x 300(D) mm. Gland plate shall be 3.0mm thick. No
welds, rivets, hinges or bolts shall be visible from outside. The doors shall
be fitted with double leaf neoprene rubber gaskets.

4.2.3 All cables shall enter and leave from bottom. Suitable cable
terminal blocks with cable lugs, for a minimum of 22 nos., (to be finalised
during detailed engineering as per requirement) shall be provided inside
each cabinet for the incoming and outgoing cables. The terminals shall be
serially numbered to facilitate installation and maintenance. Main busbars
shall be accommodated in busbar chambers and cable alleys arranged by
their side. Compression type cable glands shall be provided to hold the
cables to avoid any pressure or tension on the terminal block connections.
The terminal blocks shall be easily accessible for inspection and checking.
Panels shall have cable supports and metallic clips for supporting power
and control cables for internal wiring of the panels.

4.2.4 The busbars shall consist of tinned electrolytic copper of cross-

sectional area of a minimum of 30mm x 5mm, suitable for carrying their
rated continuous current without their temperature exceeding 85 deg C.
The busbars shall be continuous throughout each section. The busbars
shall have current rating to suit the requirements corresponding to the
loads incident thereon under the various operating conditions and shall
withstand the applicable voltage and maximum short circuit stress. The
busbars shall be insulated from supporting structure by means of durable
non-hygroscopic, non-combustible and non-tracking polyester fibreglass
material or porcelain. Busbars shall be encased in heat-shrunk sleeves of
insulating material which shall be suitable for the operating temperature of
busbars during normal service. The busbar joints shall be provided with
removable thermosetting plastic shrouds.

The busbars shall be housed in totally enclosed busbar chambers. The

incoming connections from the busbar to the various feeders shall be so
designed as not to disturb cable connections and to ensure safety to the
operating and maintenance personnel and to facilitate working outside any
outgoing module without the need for switching off in-feed to the adjacent
modules, as far as possible. The phase and neutral busbar shall be of high
conductivity, adequate uniform cross section and current density shall not
be more than 1.6 Amp/sq. mm.

A cable alley preferably 230 mm wide shall be provided in each vertical

section for taking cables into the compartments.

4.2.5 All doors shall be provided with mechanical interlocking

WBSEDCL
Page 4 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

arrangements along with keys. The distribution board shall have no door
on rear side.

4.2.6 Danger board (Caution Plate) shall be fitted suitably on inner door
of the DB. Danger board shall be of 100x100 mm size with details as per
WBSEDCL standard format (CAUTION, ‘Danger Sign’, 440V).

4.2.7 The AC boards shall be provided with the following equipments

wherever applicable:

i. Busbars shall be of rectangular shape of size 30mm x 5mm, made

of tinned electrolytic copper suitable for 200A continuous rating.

ii. Terminal arrangement with necessary equipment for connecting

the incoming supply.

iii. Voltage and current measurement in the incomer feeder.

iv. Outgoing modules with switch / MCB units of adequate

capacity for the outgoing feeders.

v. Necessary cable glands and terminal blocks.

v. Adequate number of spare terminals on terminal blocks for

external connections.

vi. The number of outgoing feeders from AC boards shall be such

that each substation equipment is fed by separate feeder with 20%
as spare.

4.2.8 The ventilating louvers should be covered from inside by a

perforated sheet or wire mesh.

4.2.9 All sheet metal used for DB shall undergo seven tank mechanical/
chemical cleaning process & painting shall be done using powder coating
process. Colour of the Paint shall be admiral gray as per shade no. 632 of
IS 5 on exterior and white from interior sides.

WBSEDCL
Page 5 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.0 MAJOR COMPONENTS:

5.1 Incoming cable for ACDB shall be terminated on terminal connectors

provided at the bottom. Connection between incomer terminals and
Switch Fuse Disconnector unit shall be with 50 sq. mm copper cable.
Outgoing shall be connected with 35 sq. mm copper cable.

For 125 A MCB, 50 sq. mm. stranded cable shall be used. For all
32 A rated MCBs, 16 sq. mm. stranded cable; and, for all 16A rated
MCBs, 10 sq. mm. cable shall be used.

All MCBs, cable used in the DB shall be of reputed make and ISI
marked.

5.2 Incoming circuit:

Incoming circuit shall have one no. 3 phase, 433 volt Switch Fuse
Disconnector unit of nominal current rating of 200Amps conforming to IS:
13947/1993 amended up to date and fitted with HRC fuses and 3 No. LT
resin cast CTs having CT ratio of 200/5 A with burden 10VA & accuracy
class 1. Switch Fuse Disconnector unit shall be of reputed make.

To receive incoming cable, one no. 4 way bolted type connector of suitable
size shall be provided. Provision for one kWH meter (3 ph, 4 wire) of flush
mounted type with complete wiring and connected CTs shall be made in
the panel.

Incoming cable for incomer LT XLPE, 4 C, 120 sq. mm shall be provided

by WBSEDCL.

WBSEDCL
Page 6 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.3 Outgoing circuits:

Sr. Feeder Cable size Purpose

No. Rating
1 TPN 125 A 4 core 50 sq. a. Filtration/ Miscellaneous
MCB mm. LT PVC
cable
2 TPN 32 A 4 core 16 sq. a. Water supply
MCBs mm LT PVC b. Outdoor lights
cable c. Yard light
d. Spare (1 nos.)
3 TPN 16 A 4 core 10 sq. a. OLTC for Power
MCBs mm LT PVC Transformers (3 nos.)
cable b. Spare (1 no.)
4 DP 32 A 2 core 16 sq. a. Indoor lights
MCBs mm LT PVC b. Battery Charger1
cable c. battery Charger 2
d. Spare (1 no.)
5 DP 16 A 2 core 10 sq. a. 33 kV Panel AC supply (1
MCBs mm LT PVC nos.)
cable b. 11 kV panel AC supply (1
nos.)
c. Supply for RTU
d. Supply for UPS
e. RTCC (3nos.)
f. Spare (1 nos.)

5.3.1 Total 22 Nos. Outgoing circuits shall be provided as per the details
given below.

MCBs shall comply following specifications as per IS 8828/1996.

a) Rated voltage & freq. shall be 230V & 50 Hz respectively for DP

MCBs.
b) Rated current shall be 125A/ 32A/16 A as mentioned above.

c) Rated short circuit capacity shall be min. 6 KA at 0.7 p.f. lag

d) Service short circuit capacity shall be 6KA as per table 15 of IS:
8828 /1996.
e) MCBs shall have fixed un adjustable time / current
characteristics.

WBSEDCL
Page 7 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

f) Under voltage release and shunt-trip release coils are not required.
Only overload release and short circuit release shall be provided.
g) Tripping time shall be as per (clause No. 8.6.1) table 6 of IS: 8828
/1996. Tripping mechanism thermal magnetic type.
h) MCBs having precision moulded case and cover of flame
retardant high strength thermo plastic material with high
melting point, low water absorption, high dielectric strength
and temperature with stand capacity shall be capable of
carrying out given no. of operation cycles as per clause No. 9.11
of IS: 8828 /1996.
i) Limits of temperature rise shall be as per (clause No. 9.8) table 5 of
IS: 8828/1996.
j) Standard range of instantaneous tripping shall be type 'B' as per
(clause No.5.3.5) table 2 of IS: 8828 /1996.

5.3.2 All MCB outgoing terminals shall be terminated on terminal

connectors of 10 mm. Stud type provided at the bottom.

5.3.3 The enclosure shall be provided with proper earthing arrangement.

Earthing arrangement shall consist of 2 G.I. Bolts of 12 mm x 50mm
(min.) with 2 spring/ plain washers and 2 check nuts.

5.3.4 PVC cable glands of adequate size shall be provided for all incoming
and outgoing cables.

5.3.5 The moving contacts of all poles of multipole circuit breaker shall be
so mechanically coupled that all poles, except the switched neutral, if
any, make and break substantially together, whether operated
manually or automatically, even if an overload occurs on one
protected pole only.

A switched neutral pole shall open after and close before the protected
pole(s). The mechanism should be quick make, quick break with trip free
mechanism.

Both side terminal should be suitable for direct cabling as well as bus
bar connection and should take wire up to cross section area of 25 sq. mm.

WBSEDCL
Page 8 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Detailed specification is tabulated below:-

Standard IS:8828:96 & IEC:60898:2002

Type/Series B&C
Rated Current(AC) 20A for SPN, 36A for TPN
Rated Voltage(AC) Volt 240/415
Rated short circuit breaking capacity kA 10
Ambient temperature (deg C) -5 to +55
Protection class IP-20

5.4 Indicating Instruments:

Principal requirements of indicating instruments are as follows:

5.4.1 Ammeter:

Ammeter shall comply the following requirements

Class of accuracy 1.0

Range 0-200 Amps
Mounting Flush type
Size 96 x 96mm
Type Analog
Operating Current 5 A from CT Secondary

5.4.2 Ammeter selector switch:

Ammeter Selector switch shall be a four-position rotary type with R, Y, B

and 'OFF' positions marked clearly on 48 x 48 mm brushed aluminum plate
with black handle. The Switch should be screw mounting type with finger
touch proof terminals. Terminal wire should be inserted from the side of the
switch terminal. Terminal screw must be captive to avoid misplace during
maintenance. The switch shall be of 12 A rating with insulation level of 1100 V.

5.4.3 Volt Meter:

Voltmeter shall comply the following requirements

Class of accuracy 1.0

Mounting Flush type
Size 96x 96 mm
Range 0-600 volts
Type Analog

WBSEDCL
Page 9 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.4.4 Volt Meter selector switch:

Voltmeter Selector switch shall be a seven-position rotary type ( 6 way & off)
with 3 phase to phase & 3 phase to neutral position marked clearly on 48 x 48
mm brushed aluminium plate with black handle. The Switch should be screw
mounting type with finger touch proof terminals. Terminal wire should be
inserted from the side of the switch terminal. Terminal screw must be captive
to avoid misplace during maintenance. The switch shall be of 12 A rating with
insulation level of 1100 V.

5.4.5 Indicating Lamps:

Indicating lamps, for indicating voltage presence in three phases, shall be

panel mounting type 23 mm with rear terminal connections having low wattage
LEDs cluster type. Lamps shall have translucent lamp covers to diffuse lights,
coloured red, yellow, green or blue as specified. The lamp cover shall be
preferably of screw-on type, unbreakable and moulded from heat resisting fast
coloured material. Conventional bulbs are not acceptable. The intensity of light
should be minimum 100 mili cd at 20 mA. Indication lamp should be suitable
to operate on 230 V AC.
Necessary wiring shall be provided accordingly.

5.4.6 MARKING

Each compartment shall be provided with legible and indelibly marked/

engraved name plate.
Name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each module,
name plates with bold letters shall be provided for feeder designation. Each
device shall also suitably marked for identification inside the panels. Name-
plates with full and clear inscriptions shall be provided inside the panels for all
isolating switches, links, fuse blocks, test blocks and cable terminals. Every
switch shall be provided with a nameplate giving its function clearly. Switches
shall also have clear inscriptions for each position indication e.g. ‘ON’ ‘OFF’ etc.

WBSEDCL
Page 10 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.4.7 Earthing Arrangements:

Two nos. Earthing studs of galvanized M.S. 25 X 6 mm shall be provided

for external earth connections at the bottom. These should be complete with
plain washer, spring washer, nuts etc. Earthing Bolts must be welded to
prevent removal of the same from the cabinet.
Flexible stranded copper connector (braided conductor) should be
connected of copper equivalent 10 sq. Mm size between door and box
enclosure. This flexible braided cable should be terminated using gland and
proper size nut/bolts at both ends.

5.4.8 Mounting Clamps:

The CTs box, ACDB box are to manufacture with suitable mounting
arrangement on wall/steel support by means of 4 nos. 25X6 mm size clamps
having hole dia. 14mm, fixed over the body as per drawing.

5.4.9 Gland Plate:

The removable gland plate should be provided in the lower portion of the
box to accommodate all brass glands (according to requirement) for incoming
and outgoing cables.

5.4.10 Name Plate:

Aluminium sheet 2 mm engraved with details should be provided duly

refitted over front door.
a. ACDB
b. P.O No.
c. ‘Property of WBSEDCL’
d. Name of the Manufacturer

6.0 CONTROL WIRING

Each ACDB shall be furnished completely factory wired upto terminal

blocks ready for external connections.
All wires shall consist of 1100V grade PVC insulated flexible stranded copper
wires with a cross-section of 2.5 sq. mm suitable for switchboard wiring and
complying with the requirement of relevant IS. Each wire shall bear an
identifying ferrule or tag at each end or connecting point.
Control cables for external connections shall consist of stranded copper
wire with 1.5, 2.5, 4.0 sq. mm or higher cross-sectional areas and shall enter

WBSEDCL
Page 11 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

from the bottom.

All interconnecting/outgoing control wiring shall terminate on stud type
terminals on terminal blocks. The terminals shall be marked with identification
numbers to facilitate connections.
The terminal blocks shall be made of moulded, non-inflammable, plastic
material and arranged to provide maximum accessibility for inspection and
maintenance. All terminal block shall have transparent plastic cover.
The terminals shall be made of hard brass and diameter of not less than
6 mm. The studs shall be securely locked within the mounting base to prevent
turning. The terminal blocks shall be provided with twenty(20) percent spare
terminals. The terminals shall be suitable for connections through tinned
copper crimped lugs.
Wiring shall be complete in all respect to ensure proper functioning of
the control, protection and monitoring scheme.
Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing
wire numbers as per wiring diagram.

7.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:

MCBs & other components used in ACDB shall be fully type tested as per
relevant IS and this specification. The successful Bidder shall furnish detailed
type test reports before commencement of supply.

All the Type Tests shall be carried out from laboratories which are accredited
by the National Board of Testing and Calibration Laboratories (NABL) of
Government of India such as CPRI Bangalore/ Bhopal, ERDA Baroda, to prove
that the MCBs & other components used in ACDB meet requirements of the
specification.

8.0 DRAWINGS:

Successful bidder shall submit the detailed drawings along with component
details/makes etc. for necessary approval.
9.0 INSPECTION:

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall provide reasonable testing and inspection facilities and co-
operation without any charge to satisfy him that the material is being supplied
is in accordance with this specification. The proto of ACDB shall be inspected
& checked by Ordering Authority or his representative for approval before
commencement of supply.

WBSEDCL
Page 12 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

10.0 SCHEDULES:

The tenderer shall fill in the following schedules, which form part of the tender
specification and order. If the schedules are not submitted duly filled in with
the offer, the offer shall be liable for rejection.

Schedule ‘A’ - Guaranteed Technical Particulars.

Schedule ‘B’ - Tenderer’s Experience

11.0 Deviations

Deviation from this specification, if any, shall be clearly bought out in

the offer. Unless owner explicitly accepts such deviations, it shall be
constructed that the offer fully complies with the specification.

WBSEDCL
Page 13 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

SCHEDULE ‘A’

Mandatory particulars of ACDB

1. ACDB Panel

Type Floor standing, Structure mounted

Indoor type.
Rated voltage 433 Volt
Highest voltage 600 Volt
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated normal current 200 A
Dimension of the panel H : 1000 mm, W : 750 mm, D : 300 mm
Sheet material CRCA
Thickness of metal sheet Load bearing member : 3.0 mm
Non Load bearing member : 2.0 mm
Panel door Double door at the front side
Cable entry Bottom
2. Bus Bars

Type Three phase four wire

Rated Voltage 433 V
Normal Current 200 Amps.
Material High conductivity Tinned Electrolytic
Copper.
Shape Rectangular
Size 30 mm X 5 mm
Cross sectional area 150 sq. mm
Type of plating Tin plated
Insulation Insulating sleeve.
No. of Bus Four

3. Switch Fuse Disconnector

WBSEDCL
Page 14 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Make Havel’s
Type TPN Switch Fuse Unit with HRC Fuse
Link
Current Rating 200A
4. TPN MCB
Make Havel’s/ C&S
Current rating 125A, 32A, 16A
Voltage rating 433 Volt
5. DP MCB
Make Havel’s/ C&S
Current rating 32A, 16A
Voltage rating 230 V
6. Low Voltage Terminal connector
Make Elmex / Connectwel / Phonix
Type Locking Stud
Size Suitable for 4.0 sq. mm control wire.
7. Low Voltage CT

Make KAPPA
Type Ring Type
Voltage level 600 volt
Ratio 200/5 Amps
Class 1.0
Burden 10 VA
8. Ammeter

Make AE
Type Analog
CTR 200/5 Amps
Accuracy Class 1.0
Size 96 mm X 96 mm
Mounting Flush mounting
9. Ammeter Selector Switch

WBSEDCL
Page 15 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Make KAYCEE
Type 4 Position ( R Y B and Off )
Current rating 16 Amps
Volt meter
Make AE
10.
Type Analog
Accuracy Class 1.0
Size 96 mm X 96 mm
Mounting Flush mounting
11. Voltmeter Selector Switch
Make KAYCEE
Type 4 Position ( RN-YN-BN-Off)
Current rating 10 Amps
12. Energy meter
Type 3 Phase 4 Wire, CT operated
CTR 200/ 5 Amps
Accuracy Class 1.0
Voltage 433 V
13. Control wire
Make KEI/Relicab/Polycab/RR Cable
Voltage grade 750V
Size 2.5 [Link]
Colour Red Phase : Red,
Yellow Phase : Yellow
Blue Phase : Blue
Neutral: Black.
Earth circuit: Green.
14. Earthing Terminal
Material Copper
Shape Rectangular
Size 25 mm x 6 mm
Provision To be provided on both sides of the panel

15. Painting details

WBSEDCL
Page 16 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Surface cleaning process 7 Tank process.

Paint thickness 60-80 micron
Paint shade RAL 7032
16. Indicating Lamp
Make VAISHNO
Type LED
Rated Voltage 230V AC
Colour Red Phase : Red,
Yellow Phase : Yellow
Blue Phase : Blue
17. Name Plate details
Manufacturer To be provided
Rated voltage 440 Volt.
Rated current 200 Amps
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Serial number To be provided
Purchase Order reference To be provided
Size 60mm x 40mm
Plate thickness 2 mm
18. HRC Fuse Link & Neutral Link with base
Make GE
19. Caution Board
Size 100mm x 100mm
Plate thickness 3 mm
20. Property Plate ῾PROPERTY OF WBSEDCL’

21. Guarantee 12 months from the date of

commission and 18 months from the
date of supply, whichever is earlier.

WBSEDCL
Page 17 of 18
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR A. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

SCHEDULE ‘B’

SCHEDULE OF TENDERER's EXPERIENCE

The tenderer shall furnish here the list of the similar orders
executed/under execution by him to whom a reference may be made
by the purchaser in case he considers such reference necessary.

Sr. No. Name of the Value of Period supply Name and

client & order & address to
description commissioning whom ref
of the order can be
made

NAME OF THE FIRM ______________________________________________________

NAME & SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER ________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

DESIGNATION ________________________________________________

DATE _____________________

WBSEDCL
Page 18 of 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR
D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

(FOR 33 KV SUB STATIONS)

WBSEDCL
Page 1 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing at works and
supply of Indoor type D.C. Distribution Boards for protection system of the
33 kV substation. The system shall be DC, 30 V.

2.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.

2.1 Maximum ambient temperature (Degree C) 50

2.2 Maximum temperature in shade (Degree C) 45
2.3 Minimum temperature of Air in shade (Degree C) 3.5
2.4 Relative Humidity (Percent) 10-100
2.5 Maximum annual rain fall (mm) 1450
2.6 Maximum wind pressure (Kg/ [Link]) 150
2.7 Maximum altitude above mean sea level (metre) 1000
2.8 Isokeraunic level (Days per year) 50
2.9 Seismic level (Horizontal Acceleration) 0.3g
Moderately Hot and Humid tropical climate
2.10 conducive to rust and fungus growth -

3.0 STANDARDS:

3.1 Components mounted on the ACDB shall confirm to the latest

revisions of the following standards:

A IS: 13947 Degree of protection provided for

enclosure for low voltage control
gear and switchgear & MCCB

B IS 5 Painting
C IS: 13947/1993 Part-III Switch Fuse Disconnector unit
amended up to date
D IS 2705 amended up to date CTs
E IS 8828/1996 amended MCB
upto date
F IS 1248 Indicating instruments
G IS 375 Wiring
H IS: 13703/1993 Part-I & II HRC Fuses

WBSEDCL
Page 2 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

These D C Distribution Boards shall be supplied as per this

specification.

4.1 Rated Voltage:

Rated voltage for the Distribution Board and its constituent items like
Switch Fuse Disconnector unit, MCBs, busways etc. shall be single phase 2
wire D.C. 30 volts. The supply voltage may vary by ± 10% of rated voltage.
All the equipments used in the Board shall operate satisfactorily at this
voltage variation.

4.2 General Requirements:

4.2.1 Each Distribution Board shall be free standing floor mounted

having compact design. The Board shall be closed, dust protected, weather
proof and shall be made vermin proof with a special type lining e.g.
Neoprene gasket, around the edges of the doors. The distribution board
shall comply degree of protection IP 43. MCBs shall be operating vertically
upward for ON/OFF operation. The entire distribution board shall have
uniform finish and shall be sturdy. The distribution boards shall be of
modular construction with provision for complete compartmentalisation of
all feeders. It shall be free-standing, dead front type comprising dust-tight
and vermin proof sheet steel cabinets suitable for indoor installation. The
doors of cabinets shall be lockable. Handle shall be made of reputed make.
The DB shall be provided with double door in front having 2 nos. hinges
which should be suitable for movement of 120 degree and 2 no. knobs to be
provided on the door corners. All instruments and control devices shall be
mounted on the front of cabinets and fully wired to the terminal blocks. All
switches provided on the distribution board shall be on front side of the
cabinets, operable from outside.

4.2.2 Each Distribution Board shall be made out of at least 2.0 mm

thick cold rolled steel sheet, suitably reinforced to provide flat level surface.
Size 1000(H) x 750(W) x 300(D) mm. Gland plate shall be 3.0mm thick. No
welds, rivets, hinges or bolts shall be visible from outside. The doors shall
be fitted with double leaf neoprene rubber gaskets.

4.2.3 All cables shall enter and leave from bottom. Suitable cable
terminal blocks with cable lugs shall be provided inside each cabinet for the
incoming and outgoing cables. The terminals shall be serially numbered to
facilitate installation and maintenance. Main busbars shall be

WBSEDCL
Page 3 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

accommodated in busbar chambers and cable alleys arranged by their side.

Compression type cable glands shall be provided to hold the cables to avoid
any pressure or tension on the terminal block connections. The terminal
blocks shall be easily accessible for inspection and checking. Panels shall
have cable supports and metallic clips for supporting power and control
cables for internal wiring of the panels.

4.2.4 The DC Distribution Board shall have double bus arrangement

with change over switch. The Distribution Board shall have provision for
one set of +ve and –ve connected to Charger-1 and another set of +ve and –
ve connected to Charger-2. Each busbars shall consist of tinned electrolytic
copper of cross-sectional area of a minimum of 25mm x 3mm, suitable for
carrying their rated continuous current without their temperature
exceeding 85 deg C. The busbars shall be continuous throughout each
section. The busbars shall have current rating to suit the requirements
corresponding to the loads incident thereon under the various operating
conditions and shall withstand the applicable voltage and maximum short
circuit stress. The busbars shall be insulated from supporting structure by
means of durable non-hygroscopic, non-combustible and non-tracking
polyester fibreglass material or porcelain. Busbars shall be encased in heat-
shrunk sleeves of insulating material which shall be suitable for the
operating temperature of busbars during normal service. The busbar joints
shall be provided with removable thermosetting plastic shrouds.

The busbars shall be housed in totally enclosed busbar chambers. The

incoming connections from the busbar to the various feeders shall be so
designed as not to disturb cable connections and to ensure safety to the
operating and maintenance personnel and to facilitate working outside any
outgoing module without the need for switching off in-feed to the adjacent
modules, as far as possible. The busbars shall be of high conductivity,
adequate uniform cross section and current density shall not be more than
1.6 Amp/sq. Mm.

A cable alley preferably 230 mm wide shall be provided in each vertical

section for taking cables into the compartments.

4.2.5 All doors shall be provided with mechanical interlocking

arrangements along with keys. The distribution board shall have no door
on rear side.

4.2.6 Danger board (Caution Plate) shall be fitted suitably on inner door
of the DB. Danger board shall be of 100x100 mm size with details as per
WBSEDCL standard format.

WBSEDCL
Page 4 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

4.2.7 The DC boards shall be provided with the following equipments

wherever applicable:

i. Double bus arrangement with change over switch with provision

for one set of +ve and –ve connected to Charger-1 and another set
of +ve and –ve connected to Charger-2. Each busbars shall consist
of tinned electrolytic copper of cross-sectional area of a minimum
of 25mm x 3mm.

ii. Terminal arrangement with necessary equipment for connecting

the incoming supply.

iii. Voltage and current measurement in the incomer feeder.

iv. Outgoing modules with switch / MCB units of adequate

capacity for the outgoing feeders and 20% spare feeder units of
each rating.

v. Necessary cable glands and terminal blocks.

vi. Adequate number of spare terminals on terminal blocks for

receiving connections for external connections.

vii. The number of outgoing feeders from DC boards shall be such

that each substation equipment is fed by separate feeder with 20%
as spare.

4.2.8 The ventilating louvers should be covered from inside by a

perforated sheet.

4.2.9 All sheet metal used for DB shall undergo seven tank mechanical/
chemical cleaning process & painting shall be done using powder coating
process. Colour of the Paint shall be admiral gray as per shade no. 632 of
IS 5 on exterior and white from interior sides.

5.0 MAJOR COMPONENTS:

5.1 Incoming cables for DCDB shall be terminated on terminal connectors

provided at the bottom. Connection between incomer terminals and MCBs
shall be with 50 sq. mm copper cable. Outgoing shall be connected with
35 sq. mm copper cable.

WBSEDCL
Page 5 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

For all 32 A rated MCBs, 16 sq. mm. stranded cable shall be used. For all
16A rated MCBs, 10 sq. mm. stranded cable shall be used.

All MCBs, cable used in the DB shall be of reputed make and ISI
marked.

DCDB should have 2 sets of Bus Bars in Two separate compartments to

facilitate termination of Incomers from two sets of Battery and Chargers.
One Change over switch should be provided to facilitate DC supply to
outgoing load circuit in the event of failure of anyone of the battery/
Charger. The change over switch should be 2 way 2 position for changing
over of both incomer individually.

5.2 Incoming circuit:

Two double pole MCBs of 63 Amps capacity shall act as Incoming breaker
of load bus. Change over switch of 63 Amps DP is to be provided.

Incoming cable for incomer LT XLPE, 2 C, 120 sq. mm shall be provided

by WBSEDCL.

5.3 Outgoing Circuits:

Sr. Feeder Cable size Source-1 Source-2

No. Rating
1. Double pole 2 core 16 sq. 04 nos. 04 nos.
DC MCB mm LT PVC
32A,250 V cable
2. DP 16 A 2 core 10 sq. 08 nos. 08 nos.
MCBs, 250 V mm LT PVC
cable

5.3.1 Total 24 Nos. outgoing circuits shall be provided as per the details
given below.

MCBs shall comply following specifications as per IS 8828/1996.

a) Rated voltage & freq. shall be 240V & 50 Hz respectively for DP

MCBs.
b) Rated current shall be 32A/16 A as mentioned above.

c) Rated short circuit capacity shall be min. 6 KA at 0.7 p.f. lag

d) Service short circuit capacity shall be 6KA as per table 15 of IS:

WBSEDCL
Page 6 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

8828 /1996.
e) MCBs shall have fixed un adjustable time / current
characteristics.
f) Under voltage release and shunt-trip release coils are not required.
Only overload release and short circuit release shall be provided.
g) Tripping time shall be as per (clause No. 8.6.1) table 6 of IS: 8828
/1996. Tripping mechanism thermal magnetic type.
h) MCBs having precision moulded case and cover of flame
retardant high strength thermo plastic material with high
melting point, low water absorption, high dielectric strength
and temperature with stand capacity shall be capable of
carrying out given no. of operation cycles as per clause No. 9.11
of IS: 8828 /1996.
i) Limits of temperature rise shall be as per (clause No. 9.8) table 5 of
IS: 8828/1996.
j) Standard range of instantaneous tripping shall be type 'B' as per
(clause No.5.3.5) table 2 of IS: 8828 /1996.

5.3.2 All MCB outgoing terminals shall be terminated on terminal

connectors of 10 mm. stud type provided at the bottom.

5.3.3 The enclosure shall be provided with proper earthing arrangement.

Earthing arrangement shall consist of 2 G.I. Bolts of 12 mm x 50mm (min.)
with 2 spring/ plain washers and 2 check nuts.

5.3.4 PVC cable glands of adequate size shall be provided for all
incoming and out going cables.

5.3.5 The moving contacts of all poles of multi-pole circuit breaker shall
be so mechanically coupled that all poles, except the switched neutral, if any,
make and break substantially together. Whether operated manually or
automatically even if an overload occurs on one protected pole only.

Both side terminal should be suitable for direct cabling as well as

bus bar connection and should take wire up to cross section area of 25
[Link].

Detailed specification is tabulated below:-

Standard IS:8828:96 & IEC:60898:2002

Type/Series B&C
Rated Current(DC) 20A for SPN, 36A for DP
Rated Voltage(DC) Volt 30
Rated short circuit breaking capacity 10
kA
Ambient temperature(deg C) -5 to +55
Protection class IP-20

WBSEDCL
Page 7 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.3.6
i. One Mains failure Alarm relay.
ii. One Earth Fault alarm relay
iii. One 30 Volt DC Bell to be operated by the Mains failure alarm
relay.
iv. One 30 volt DC Buzzer to be operated by the earth fault alarm
relay.

5.3.7 AC/DC Change Over Contacts

Emergency lighting circuit shall be provided by the Bidder such that the
lights normally burn on AC 240 Volts, 50 Hz but in case of failure of AC
supply, these come up on DC supply with the help of automatic change over
contactors and again change over to AC supply with the restoration of AC
supply. There shall be two number double pole ON/OFF switches with HRC
fuses one each for AC and DC supply.

5.4 Indicating Instruments:

Principal requirements of indicating instruments are as follows:

5.4.1 D.C Ammeter:

Ammeter shall comply the following requirements

Class of accuracy 1.0

Range 15 Amps
Mounting Flush type
Size 96 x 96mm
Type Analog

5.4.3 D.C Volt Meter:

Voltmeter shall comply the following requirements

Class of accuracy 1.0

Mounting Flush type
Size 96x 96 mm
Range 0-40 volts
Type DC moving coil

WBSEDCL
Page 8 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.4.5 Indicating Lamps:

Indicating lamps shall be panel mounting type 23 mm with rear terminal

connections having low wattage LEDs cluster type. Lamps shall have
translucent lamp covers to diffuse lights, coloured red for ‘DC ON’ condition.
The lamp cover shall be preferably of screw-on type, unbreakable and moulded
from heat resisting fast coloured material. Conventional bulbs are not
acceptable. The intensity of light should be minimum 100 milli cd at 20 mA.
Indication lamp should be suitable to operate on 30 V DC.
Necessary wiring shall be provided accordingly.

5.4.6 MARKING
Each compartment shall be provided with legible and indelibly marked/
engraved name plate.
Name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each module,
name plates with bold letters shall be provided for feeder designation. Each
device shall also suitably marked for identification inside the panels. Name-
plates with full and clear inscriptions shall be provided inside the panels for all
isolating switches, links, fuse blocks, test blocks and cable terminals. Every
switch shall be provided with a nameplate giving its function clearly. Switches
shall also have clear inscriptions for each position indication e.g. ‘ON’ ‘OFF’ etc.

5.4.7 Earthing Arrangements:

Two nos. Earthing studs of galvanized M.S. 25 X 6 mm shall be provided

for external earth connections at the bottom. These should be complete with
plain washer, spring washer, nuts etc. Earthing Bolts must be welded to
prevent removal of the same from the cabinet.
Flexible stranded copper connector (braided conductor) should be
connected of copper equivalent 10 sq. mm. size between door and box
enclosure. This flexible braided cable should be terminated using gland and
proper size nut/bolts at both ends.

5.4.8 Mounting Clamps:

The DCDB box are to manufacture with suitable mounting arrangement

on wall/steel support by means of 4 nos. 25X6 mm size clamps having hole
dia. 14mm, fixed over the body as per drawing.

5.4.9 Gland Plate:

The removable gland plate should be provided in the lower portion of the
box to accommodate all brass glands (according to requirement) for incoming
and outgoing cables.

WBSEDCL
Page 9 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

5.4.10 Name Plate:

Aluminium sheet 2 mm engraved with details should be provided duly

refitted over front door.
a. DC Distribution Box
b. P.O No.
c. ‘Property of WBSEDCL’

6.0 CONTROL WIRING

Each DCDB shall be furnished completely factory wired up to terminal

blocks ready for external connections.
All wires shall consist of 1100V grade PVC insulated flexible stranded copper
wires with a cross-section of 2.5 sq. Mm suitable for switchboard wiring and
complying with the requirement of relevant IS. Each wire shall bear an
identifying ferrule or tag at each end or connecting point.
Control cables for external connections shall consist of stranded copper
wire with 1.5, 2.5, 4.0 sq. Mm or higher cross-sectional areas and shall enter
the bottom.
All interconnecting/outgoing control wiring shall terminate on stud type
terminals on terminal blocks. The terminals shall be marked with identification
numbers to facilitate connections.
The terminal blocks shall be made of moulded, non-inflammable, plastic
material and arranged to provided maximum accessibility for inspection and
maintenance. All terminal block shall have transparent plastic cover.
The terminals shall be made of hard brass and diameter of not less than
6 mm. The studs shall be securely locked within the mounting base to prevent
turning. The terminal blocks shall be provided with twenty(20) percent spare
terminals. The terminals shall be suitable for connections through tinned
copper crimped lugs.
Wiring shall be complete in all respect to ensure proper functioning of
the control, protection and monitoring scheme.
Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing
wire numbers as per wiring diagram.

7.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:

MCBs & other components used in DCDB shall be fully type tested as per
relevant IS and this specification. The successful Bidder shall furnish detailed
type test reports before commencement of supply.

All the Type Tests shall be carried out from laboratories which are accredited
by the National Board of Testing and Calibration Laboratories (NABL) of
Government of India such as CPRI Bangalore/ Bhopal, ERDA Baroda, to prove
that the MCBs & other components used in DCDB meet requirements of the

WBSEDCL
Page 10 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

specification.

8.0 DRAWINGS:

Successful bidder shall submit the detailed drawings along with component
details/makes etc. for necessary approval.

9.0 INSPECTION:

All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall provide reasonable testing and inspection facilities and co-
operation without any charge to satisfy him that the material is being supplied
is in accordance with this specification. The proto of DCDB shall be inspected
& checked by Ordering Authority or his representative for approval before
commencement of supply.

10.0 SCHEDULES:

The tenderer shall fill in the following schedules, which form part of the tender
specification and order. If the schedules are not submitted duly filled in with
the offer, the offer shall be liable for rejection.

Schedule ‘A’ - Guaranteed Technical Particulars.

Schedule ‘B’ - Tenderer’s Experience

11.0 Deviations

Deviation from this specification, if any, shall be clearly bought out in

the offer. Unless owner explicitly accepts such deviations, it shall be
constructed that the offer fully complies with the specification.

WBSEDCL
Page 11 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

SCHEDULE ‘A’

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF DCDB

Sr. No. Parameter Name

1. Enclosure fabricated from M.S sheet Y/N

of 2.0 mm thickness
2. All sheet metal work has undergone 7 Y/N
tank chemical processing and powder
coating
3. Colour of enclosure from inside is Y/N
white
4. Colour of enclosure from outside is as Y/N
per our specification
5. Busbar is of electrolytic tinned copper Y/N
of size 1.6 sq. mm with 200 A rating
and without joints.
6. Make and type of switch Fuse Y/N
Disconnector Unit
7. No. of 1 ph 36 A DP MCBs provided Y/N

8. Make and type of 1 Ph 36 A DP MCBs Y/N

9. No. of 1ph 16 A DP MCBs provided Y/N

10. Make and type of 1 Ph 16 A DP MCBs Y/N

11. All MCBs are type tested and having Y/N

short circuit rating of Min. 6 KA at
0.7 pf lag
12. Ammeter is having range of 0-15 A Y/N
and accuracy class 1.0
13. Make and type of Ammeter Y/N

14. Voltmeter is having range of 0-40V Y/N

and accuracy class 1.0
15. Make and type of voltmeter Y/N

WBSEDCL
Page 12 of 14
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

16. Indicating lamps are of LED type with Y/N

22.5 mm dia.
17. Wiring between MCBs and terminal Y/N
connectors is with specified stranded
copper wire as per specification
18. Terminal connectors are of bolted Y/N
type provided as per specification
19. Detachable gland plate is provided Y/N
with knockout type arrangement for
providing cable glands at the bottom
20. Cable glands as per requirements Y/N
provided separately

WBSEDCL
Page 13 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR D. C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

SCHEDULE ‘B’

SCHEDULE OF TENDERER's EXPERIENCE

The tenderer shall furnish here the list of the similar orders
executed/under execution by him to whom a reference may be made
by the purchaser in case he considers such reference necessary.

Value of
Sr. No. Name of the order Period supply Name and

client & & address to

description whom ref
of commissioning can
the order be made

NAME OF THE FIRM-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

---------

NAME & SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER-----------------------------------------------

--------

DESIGNATION--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------

DATE--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------

------------------------------

WBSEDCL
Page 14 of 14
WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTION
COMPANY LIMITED
(A Govt. of West Bengal Enterprise)
Office of the Chief Engineer,
Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan, 4th. floor,
Bidhannagar, Kolkata – 700091.

Technical Specification

for
1.1 KV Grade PVC Armoured Aluminum Cable

Tender No. P-31 & P-32/2015-16/PC-III

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1.1 KV Grade PVC Armoured
Aluminum Cable

1.0 Scope :
This Specification covers the requirement of PVC insulated Cables for working voltages upto and
including 1100 Volts suitable for LV side of Distribution Transformers, any other LV use in 3-Phase
(Earthed) System.

2.0 Location :
2.1 The Cable shall be laid/buried directly in ground anywhere in West Bengal and terminated for
outdoor connection.

2.2 The Cables may be laid within covered Cable Trenches in Cable Racks/Ladder/Air for certain
portion of length.

3.0 Standards :
The Cables all conform broadly, to the latest issue of the following standards including all
additional, alterations and modifications thereof.

3.1 IS : 1554 (Part-I) : 1988 with latest amendment.

(Specification for PVC insulated heavy duty Electric Cables for working voltages upto and including
1100 Volts)

3.2 IS : 8130 : 1984, IS: 10462 (Part-I) : 1983 with latest amendment.

4.0 Shape of Cables :

All Cables shall be of circular/ sector shaped with neutral conductor as per relevant IS.

5.0 Conductors :
5.1 Aluminium Conductor complying with IS:8130:1984 with latest amendment shall be used.

5.2 The Conductors shall be stranded for Cross Section above 10 sq. mm. & Solid Single Conductor
for Cross Section of 4 sq. mm., 6 sq. mm. & 10 sq. mm.

6.0 Insulation :
6.1 The Conductor shall be provided with PVC insulation applied by extrusion. Thickness of insulation
should be as per IS:1554 (Part-I)1988 with latest amendment. Type of insulation shall be A for
general purpose PVC.

6.2 Inner Sheath :

The laid up cores shall be provided with Inner Sheath applied by extrusion. It shall be ensured
that the shape of Cable is as circular as possible. Thickness of Inner Sheath should be as per
IS:1554 (Part-I)1988 with latest amendment.

6.3 Outer Sheath :

The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the inner sheath in case of unarmoured cable
& over the armouriedng in case of armoured Cable. The colour of outer sheath is black unless
otherwise specified Thickness of outer sheath should be as per IS: 1554 (Part-I) : 1988 & IS:
1042 (Part-I) : 1983 with latest amendment.

7.0 Test and Test Certificates :

7.1 All the type tests and routine tests shall be carried out in the Manufacturer’s Works as per
IS:1554(Part-I) 1988 or latest amendment thereof.

7.2 The tests commensurate under ‘Acceptance Tests’ in the relevant IS shall be carried out as
‘Acceptance Test’

In addition to above, the following tests for PVC insulation and sheath should also be carried out
as per IS:5831:84 with latest amendment during acceptance.

a) Physical tests for insulation and sheath.

i) Tensile strength and Elongation at break.
ii) Ageing test (Optional)
iii) Shrinkage test.
iv) Hot-deformation test (Optional)
 b) Fire-Resistance test (Optional)

7.3 All tests shall be performed in presence of Purchaser’s representative, if so desired by the
Purchaser. The manufacturer shall give at least thirty (30) days advance notice of shop tests.

7.4 All tests carried out at Works shall be furnished in six (6) copies for approval of the purchaser.

7.5 The Cable shall be despatched from Works only after receipt of Purchaser’s written approval of
shop test reports.

8.0 MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION :

The Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark shall be identified throughout the length of the Cable
either by embossing on the sheath or by means of a tape bearing the following particulars.

(a) Manufacturer’s Name or Trade Mark

(b) Voltage Grade
(c) Nominal Section & material of Conductor and Number of Cores
(d) Year of Manufacture.
(e) Inscription for length of Cables at 1 meter interval
(f) Name of the Purchaser : WBSEDCL
(g) Marking “ELECTRIC” shall be embossed throughout the length of the Cable at 1 meter
spacing (for PVC Cable conforming to IS:1554 with latest amendment only)

9.0 PACKING & TOLERANCE :

9.1 The Cable shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drums each containing length of 250 Meters
of Cable with tolerance of + 5% per drum subject to overall maximum minus (-) 1% on total
quantity will be accepted.

Size of Cable Cable Length in each Drum

4 Core x 10 sq. mm. 500 Meters ± 5%
4 Core x 25 sq. mm. 500 Meters ± 5%
4 Core x 50 sq. mm. 250 Meters ± 5%
4 Core x 120 sq. mm. 250 Meters ± 5%
4 Core x 180 sq. mm. 250 Meters ± 5%
4 Core x 300 sq. mm. 250 Meters ± 5%

9.2 The drums shall be proofed against attack by white ant or termite, conforming to IS:10418:1982
with latest amendment.

10.0 ARMOURING :
Galvanized Flat Steel Strip armouring shall be done for 3 ½ Core / 2 Core/4 Core and for Single
Core, the armouring shall be of any metallic non-magnetic Wire, Strip.

11.0 MARKING :
The following information shall be marked on each drum :

(a) Drum identification No.

(b) Manufacturer’s Name, Brand Name or Trade Mark.
(c) Nominal cross-sectional area of the Conductor of the Cable.
(d) No. of Cores.
(e) Type and Voltage of the Cable.
(f) Length of the Cable on the drum.
(g) Direction of rotation of Drum (by means of an arrow)
(h) Approximate Weight : Tare : Gross
(i) Year of Manufacture.
(j) Purchase Order No.
(k) Month of Delivery.
(l) Name of the Purchaser : WBSEDCL

11.1 The Drums may also be marked with ISI Certificate Mark, if applicable.
12.0 DESCRIPTION :
1.1 KV Grade multicore stranded Aluminium Conductor PVC insulated, extruded PVC inner
sheathed, galvanized steel strip armoured, extruded PVC outer sheathed conforming to IS:1554
(Part-I)1988 read with its latest amendment and desired (as per tender specification) technical
specification.

1.1 KV Grade multicore (4-Core 4 [Link]., 6 [Link]. & 10 [Link].) Solid Aluminium Conductor
PVC insulated, extruded PVC inner sheathed, galvanized steel wire armoured, extruded PVC outer
sheathed, conforming to IS:1554 (Part-I) 1988 read with its latest amendment and desired (as
per tender specification) technical specification.

13.0 DRAWING DATA & MANUAL :

The following informations shall be furnished in triplicate along with Tenders :
(a) Manufacturer’s leaflet giving construction details, dimensions and characteristics of different
Cables.
(b) Current rating of Cables including de-rating factor due to grouping, ambient temperature
and type of various installations.
(c) Write up, sketch illustrating the manufacturer’s recommendation and spliting, jointing and
termination of cables.
(d) List of customers to whom the cable of similar rating have been supplied.

14.0 Type Test Report Type Test Report for the type tests conducted in accordance with
IS:1554(Part-I): 1988 with latest amendment and other relevant IS/IEC
with latest amendment within last 5 years from the due date of Opening of
Tender on identical Cables (as per Tender Specification) from CPRI/ NABL
accredited Test House or Laboratory are to be submitted along with the
tender otherwise tender may be rejected. The Certificates of the NABL
accredited Test House or Laboratory should bear the Logo of NABL
accreditation.

15.0 Valid Calibration Certificate of instruments/equipment used for testing purpose

conducted by NABL accredited Laboratory provided the certificate bears an
accreditation body logo. For testing equipment where NABL accreditation is not
available, calibration certificate from educational institutions like IIT’s, NIT’s, J.U.,
C.U., B.H.U. only can be accepted provided they demonstrate tracebility.

16.0 Documents to be submitted at the time of physical delivery at consignee

stores:

The following documents are to be submitted by the venders to the consignee

stores at the time of
Dispatch to stores by the venders:

a) Copy of Purchase Order

b) Copy of dispatch instruction
c) Inspection Test certificate
d) Guarantee certificate
e) Proforma Invoice
f) Calculation Sheet for price variation on the basis of IEEMA or CACMAI as
applicable with base date of order
g) Seal list and packing list
h) Challan in triplicate
i) Way Bill, if applicable

______________________________
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
1.1 KV Grade PVC Armoured Aluminum Cable
Detailed GTP in tabular form as per spec.

SL. NAME OF MANUFACTURER M/s.-------------------------

NO
A) Size of Cable 4 x 10 sq. mm 4 x [Link] 4 x 50 [Link]
Rated Voltage 1100V
B) Standard Referred IS: 1554(1), 8130, 5831, 10810, 10462 & 3975
C) Conductor
i) Material H2/H4 Grade Al of Class I/ Class II as per IS:8130/84
ii) Nominal Area of Cross-section (sq. mm) 10 25 50
iii) No/Dia of Wires before compaction (in mm) 1/3.57 7/2.18 7/3.03
iv) Shape of conductor Solid Circular Stranded Compact Shaped
Insulation
D) i) Material PVC Type -A
ii) Nom. Thickness (mm) 1.00 1.20 1.40
iii) App. Dielectric strength (Kv/mm) 15-25KV/mm
iv) Suitability with regard to temperature, Yes
moisture, acid, oil and alkaline surrounding
E) Inner Sheath
i) Material PVC Type -ST-1
ii) Minmum thickness of sheath (mm) 0.30 0.30 0.40
F) Armouring
a) Material & Type G.S. Strip, Single Layer - Helically
b) [Link]/dimen of armour wires/Strips in mm 4.0 X 0.8
G) Outer sheath
i) Material PVC Type -ST-1
ii) Minimum thickness of sheath (mm) 1.40 1.40 1.56
iii) Nominal thickness of sheath (mm)
H) Approx. overall dia of Cable (in mm) 19-20 24.2-25 30.2-32.0
I) Method of core identification By colour coding (Red, Yellow, Blue & Black)
J) Electrical Properties :-
i) Maximum d.c. resistance of conductor at 3.08 1.200 0.641
20⁰ C (Ohm/Km)
ii) Maxmimum permissible conductor 70°C
temperature(°C) under full load
iii) Rated volatge 1100V
iv) Maximum operating voltage 1100V
v) Permissible voltage variation ±10%
vi) Rated frequency 50HZ
vii) Permitted frequency variation ±5%
viii) Minimum specific insulation resistance at
1 x 10¹° [Link]
70⁰C (Ohm-Cm)
ix) Continuous current carrying capacities as
per IS:3961 PT-II/67
In Air at 400 C (Amps) 40 70 105
In Ground at 300 C (Amps) 46 76 110
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
1.1 KV Grade PVC Armoured Aluminum Cable
Detailed GTP in tabular form as per spec.

SL. NAME OF MANUFACTURER M/s.-------------------------

NO
A) Size of Cable 120 [Link] 185 [Link] 300 [Link]
Rated Voltage 1100V
B) Standard Referred IS: 1554(1), 8130, 5831, 10810, 10462 & 3975
C) Conductor
i) Material H2/H4 Grade Al of Class I/ Class II as per IS:8130/84
ii) Nominal Area of Cross-section (sq. mm) 120 185 300
iii) No/Dia of Wires before compaction in mm 19/2.9 37/2.55 37/3.25
iv) Shape of conductor Stranded Compact Shaped
Insulation
D) i) Material PVC Type -A
ii) Nom. Thickness (mm) 1.60 2.00 2.40
iii) App. Dielectric strength (Kv/mm) 15-25 KV/mm
iv) Suitability with regard to temperature, Yes
moisture, acid, oil and alkaline surrounding
E) Inner Sheath
i) Material PVC Type -ST-1
ii) Minmum thickness of sheath (mm) 0.50 0.60 0.70
F) Armouring
a) Material & Type G.S. Strip, Single Layer – Helically
b) [Link]/dimen of armour wires/Strips in mm 4.0 X 0.8
G) Outer sheath
i) Material AS PER IS PVC Type -ST-1
ii) Minimum thickness of sheath (mm) 1.88 2.04 2.52
iii) Nominal thickness of sheath (mm)
H) Approx. overall dia of Cable (in mm) 42.5-44.0 51.8- 53.0 64.5-66.0
I) Method of core identification By colour coding (Red, Yellow, Blue & Black)
J) Electrical Properties :-
i) Maximum d.c. resistance of conductor at 0.253 0.164 0.100
20⁰ C (Ohm/Km)
ii) Maxmimum permissible conductor 70°C
temperature(°C) under full load
iii) Rated volatge 1100V
iv) Maximum operating voltage 1100V
v) Permissible voltage variation ±10%
vi) Rated frequency 50HZ
vii) Permitted frequency variation ±5%
viii) Minimum specific insulation resistance at
1 x 10¹° [Link]
70⁰C (Ohm-Cm)
ix) Continuous current carrying capacities as
per IS:3961 PT-II/67
In Air at 400 C (Amps) 180 240 315
In Ground at 300 C (Amps) 185 235 305
WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED
(A Govt. of West Bengal Enterprise)

Office of the Chief Engineer,

Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan, 4th. floor,
Bidhannagar, Kolkata – 700091

Technical Specification

for
1.1 KV Copper Control Cable

TENDER NO. P-13/2016-17/PC-III

Page 1 of 7
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 1.1 KV GRADE COPPER CONTROL CABLE

1.00 SCOPE :
The specification cover the design, manufacture, at manufacturer’s works, supply and delivery of
1.1 KV grade PVC insulated armoured stranded Copper Control Cables for use in different 33/11 KV
Sub-Stations of West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited in the State of west
Bengal .

2.00 GENERAL INFORMATIONS :

The Control Cables are required for the control, protection, instrumentation, auxiliary Power Supply.
Each tender must be accompanied by full information required in the bidding schedule together with
pertinent manufacturer’s literatures, drawings, instruction manuals to enable the purchaser to make
an appraisal of the quality and suitability of the materials offered. Failure to comply with the
provision may be sufficient reasons to reject the bid.

3.00 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS :

All materials shall comply by this specification shall comply with the applicable provisions of the
latest edition of Indian Standards, Indian Electricity Rules, Indian Electricity Act and other
applicable statutory provisions, rules and regulations.

The following standards with latest amendment would apply to the specification.
1. IS-1554 (Part-I) – PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables.
2. IS-8130-Conductors for insulated electric Cables and flexible cord.
3. IS-3961 (Part-II)- Recommended current ratings for PVC insulated and PVC sheathed heavy
duty Cables.
4. IS-5831-PVC insulated and sheath of Electric Cable.
5. IS:3975-Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armoring of cables.
6. IS: 10810- Methods of test for cables .
7. IS: 10418- Cable drums for electric cables.

4.00 CLIMATIC AND ISOCERAUNIC CONDITIONS :

4.10 The climatic conditions at site under which the material shall operate satisfactory are as follows :
a) Maximum ambient temperature (0C) : 50
b) Minimum ambient temperature (0C) : 4
c) Maximum Yearly average ambient temperature (0C) : 32
d) Maximum relative humidity (%) : 100
e) Average number of thunderstorm days per annum : 100
f) Average annual rainfall (Cm) : 200
g) Maximum wind pressure (Kg/M2) : 150
h) Earthquake acceleration (g) : 0.04 x 2 g
i) Height above Sea Level (m) : Not exceeding 1000

4.20 The material offered shall be suitable for continuous operation at the full rated capacity under the
above conditions.

5.00 DESIGN CRITERIA / Technical Requirements :

The Cables will be used for control protection and instrumentation, auxiliary Power Supply
connections of the various equipment and various applications in substation etc. All such purposes
PVC insulated armoured control cable of minimum 2.5 [Link] with stranded copper conductor shall
be used .

5.10 The Cable will be laid in ground or on ladder type trays or drawn in conduit in a hot, humid and
tropical atmosphere. The trays may be over head, suspended or run in concrete trenches with
removable covers. The tenderer shall indicate clearly the de rating factor for the above conditions.
5.11 The maximum conductor temperature for various classes and type of cables shall be limited to safe
value as per applicable I.S. Cables shall be marked with ISI Certification Mark, if any.

5.12 The material of PVC insulated copper conductor shall be made from high conductivity copper rods
complying IS: 613-1964 and its amendments. The conductors shall consist of Stranded Electrolyte
annealed bare Copper Confirming to Class-2 of IS:8130-1984 & its amendments

5.13 Wire before stranding shall be approximately circular in cross-section. Smooth, uniform in quality
and free from scale, spills and other defects.

Page 2 of 7
5.14 Cores shall be identified as per IS:1554(Part-I) for the cable up to 5C and cable with more than 5C,
the identification of cores shall be by printing legible Hindu Arabic Numerals on all cores as per
clause no .10.3 of IS:1554(Part-I) and its amendments.

5.15 The Normal Current rating of all PVC insulated cables shall be as per IS: 3961 and its amendments.

5.16 Cable shall be designed to withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under steady
state and transient operating condition.

5.17 The 1100V grade control cable shall be FRLS Type ST-2 Category C-2 conforming to IS: 1554(Part-
I) and its amendments.

5.18 Progressive sequential embossing of the length of cable in metre at every one metre shall be
provided on the outer sheath of all cable with marking “WBSEDCL”.

5.19 Repaired cables shall not be accepted.

5.20 ARMOURING

5.20 Armouring shall be applied over the insulation over the inner sheath for the multi core cables. The
armouring shall be galvanized round steel wires and its nominal diameter shall conform to clause
no. 13.3 of IS: 1554(Part-I) and its amendment.

5.30 Insulation:

The Insulation of sheath shall consists of a compound based on Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).

5.40 Outer Sheath :

The Outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion. The Outer sheath shall be FRLS Type ST-2 Category
C-2 conforming to IS: 5831 and its latest amenment.
5.41 Outer sheath shall be fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) type, FRLS Type ST-2 Category C-2 to IS:
1554(Part-I) and its amendments.
5.42 Minimum thickness of PVC outer sheath ,standard colour and tolerance on thickness of armoured
cables shall be as per clause no.14.4.2 of IS: 1554(Part-I) and its amendments.
5.43 The cable shall have outer sheath of a material with an oxygen index of not less than 29 and a
temperature index of not less than 250deg. Centigrate with smoke density 40% and halogen
density 20%.

5.44 All cables shall pass fire resistance /heat resistance test as per IS: 1554(Part-I).

5.50 INNER SHEATH :

For multi core armoured cables,the inner sheath shall be extruded PVC. The filler and inner sheath
for common covering shall be non-hygroscopic, fire retardant (FR) material and shall be softer than
insulation. The thickness of inner sheath shall be as per clause no. 12.3 of IS: 1554 (Part-I) and its
amendments and suitable for operating temperature of cables.

6.00 SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS :

6.10 1100 Volts Grade Heat Resisting (HR) Copper Cables suitable for use where the combination of
ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor temperature not
exceeding 85 deg.C under normal continuous operation and 160 deg.C under short-circuit condition
with stranded annealed copper conductor, HR PVC insulated, HR extruded PVC inner sheathed,
round galvanized steel wire armoured (for multicore cable only) and overall sheath shall be FRLS
Type ST-2 Category C-2 generally conform to latest revision of IS:1554 (Part-I) and its latest
amendments. The cores shall be colour coded as per I.S. for easy identification.

6.11 CURRENT RATING :

The Cables will have current rating derating factors for an ambient temperature of 45 deg.C and
ground cable is required to be taken into consideration. The current ratings shall be based on the
maximum temperature 85 deg.C for continuous operation at the rated current.

Page 3 of 7
6.12 OPERATION :
Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under Power Supply System frequency variation of
+ 5% and voltage variation of + 10%.

7.00 PACKING AND MARKING :

7.10 The Cables shall be wound on a drum ( Ref. IS : 10418-1972 and its amendments) of suitable size
and packed . The ends of cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material. The
Cables shall be packed in non-returnable wooden drums. The wooden drums should be bearing
distinguishing number with following information duly stenciled on the outer side of one flange.
1. Name of the Manufacturer.
2. Reference Indian Standard of Cable.
3. Normal sectional area of the Conductor of the Cable.
4. Number of Cores.
5. Type of Cable & Voltage for which it is suitable.
6. Length of Cable in this drum.
7. Number of lengths on drum(if more than one)
8. Direction of rotation of Drum ( by means of arrow).
9. Gross Weight.
10. Colour code (in case of single core cable).
11. Purchase Order No. & Date.
12. Year of Manufacture.
13. Property of WBSEDCL.
14. Date of Delivery.

8.00 DRUM AND DRUM LENGTH OF CABLES :

8.10 Drums shall be proofed against attack by white ant and termite, Conforming to IS -10418-1982. A
layer of water proof paper shall be applied to the surface of drum and over the outer most cable
layer.

8.11 The Cables shall be supplied in Drum lengths of 500 Mtr. which shall be subject to tolerance of not
more than (+/-)5%.WBSEDCL HAVE THE OPTION OF REJECTING CABLES DRUMS WITH SHORTER
LENGTH. However, the total quantity of cables after taking in to consideration of all cable drums of
each size shall be within the tolerance of (+/-) 2%. The no. of drums and the drum length shall be
finalized by the purchaser at time of placement of order.

8.12 Embossing on the outer sheath of the Cable with marking “WBSEDCL” and length of the Cable in
meters at suitable intermittent distance , preferably 1 Mtr. should be done.

9.00 DRAWING DATA & MANUAL:

The following information shall be furnished in triplicate along with the tenders :
(a) Manufacturer’s leaflets giving construction details, dimensions and characteristics of different
Cables.
(b) Current rating of cables including derating factor due to grouping, ambient temperature and
Type of various installations.
(c) Write up sketch illustrating the manufacturer’s recommendation for spliting, jointing and
termination of different type of cables.

d) List of customers to whom the cable for similar rating have been supplied.

10.00 TESTS :

10.10 Routine Tests in accordance with the provision of relevant standard specification shall be carried
out for each drum of finished cable lengths.

Type tests and acceptance tests on the samples taken on random basis from the lot of cables
offered for inspection shall have to be carried out as per relevant Indian Standard Specification to
prove the general qualities and design of a given type of cable and for the purpose of acceptance of
the lot.

Page 4 of 7
10.11 TYPE TEST REPORTS for the type tests conducted in accordance with IS:1554 (Part-I )
with latest amendment for similar type of Cables (as per Tender Specification) : Type Test
Report for the type tests conducted in accordance with IS:1554 (Part-I) with latest amendment
and other relevant IS/IEC with latest amendment within last 5 years from the due date of
Opening of Tender on identical Cables having same voltage grade, same design, same conductor
material & size (as per Tender Specification) from CPRI/ NABL accredited Test House or
Laboratory are to be submitted along with the tender otherwise tender may be rejected. The
Certificates of the NABL accredited Test House or Laboratory should bear the Logo of NABL
accreditation.

10.12 WITNESSING OF TESTS :

The tabulation for each test result shall contain corresponding I.S. specified limiting figures to
facilitate checking of test Results. Six (6) copies of type tests certificate lot-wise for each type of
cables should be sent to the purchaser for acceptance. Type Test Certificate for each lot and routine
test certificate for each drum of cables shall be submitted to the Purchaser for approval before
despatch of cables from the Works. The test certificates shall be completed with all results.

11.00 TECHNICAL GUARANTEED PARTICULARS :

11.10 Technical characteristics shall be guaranteed by the bidder. Technical guaranteed particulars shall
be furnished in triplicate as per format annexed herewith along with other relevant particulars with
the tenders. In case of failure of materials to meet the guarantee, WBSEDCL shall have right to
reject the material.
12.00 List of testing equipment/instruments made available at the manufacturer’s premises is to be
submitted along with tender paper.

Page 5 of 7
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 1.1 KV COPPER CONTROL CABLE

Detailed GTP in tabular form as per spec.

M/s. ---------------------------------------------------------------
NAME OF MANUFACTURER
-------
Cable Size: 4 Core 2.5 sq. 8 Core 2.5 sq. 12 Core 2.5 sq.
mm. mm. mm.
1 Rated Voltage 1.1K V
2 Standard Referred IS: 1554 (Part-I)/1988 up to latest amendment
Conductor
Stranded Electrolyte annealed bare Copper Confirming to Class-2
i) Material
of IS:8130-1984 & its amendments
3 ii) Nominal Area of Cross-
2.5
section (sq. mm)
iii) Total no. of Conductor/ Core 7
iv) Shape of conductor Circular
Insulation
i) Material HR PVC Type C as per IS: 5831-1984 & its amendments
ii) Nom. Thickness (mm) As per IS: 1554 (Part-I) :1984 and its amendments
4
iii) Suitable by with regard
to temperature, moisture,
Yes
acid, oil and alkaline
surrounding
Inner sheath
FR PVC Category C-1 PVC Type ST-2, as per IS:5831-1988 & its
5 i) Material
latest amendments
ii) Minimum thickness of sheath
0.30 mm
(mm)
Armouring
a) Material & Type Galvanized Steel rounded Wire
6
b) Nom. dia of armour wires in
1.40 1.40 1.6
mm
Outer sheath
i) Material FRLS Black Type ST-2
7
ii) Minimum thickness of sheath
1.24 1.40 1.40
(mm)
Approx. overall dia of
8 16.00 20.00 22.50
cable(in mm)
4C - Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
9 Method of core identification
8C & 12C – All Grey with numbering
Electrical Properties :-
i) Maximum D.C. resistance of 7.41 as per IS:8130 (Part-I): 1984
conductor at 20⁰ C (Ohm/Km) to comply with FRLS property
ii) Maximum permissible
conductor temperature(°C) 85
under full load
iii) Rated voltage (KV) 1.1
10 iv) Maximum operating voltage 10% Higher than the Rated Voltage
v) Permissible voltage variation ±10%
vi) Rated frequency 50Hz
vii) Permitted frequency
±5%
variation
viii) Minimum voltage resistivity
at 27oC/ 85 oC (Ohm/Cm) 1 x 10¹3 /1 x 10¹° [Link]

Page 6 of 7
Page 7 of 7
WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTION COMPANY
LIMITED
(A Govt. of West Bengal Enterprise)
Office of the Chief Engineer,
Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan, 4th. floor,
Bidhannagar, Kolkata – 700091.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

XLPE ARMOURED ALUMINUM CABLE SUITABLE
FOR 3 Core & 1 Core

a) NON-EFFECTIVELY EARTHED 33 KV SYSTEM

AND

b) EFFECTIVELY EARTHED 11 KV SYSTEM

Tender No. P-12/2016-17/PC-III

Page 1 of 14
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
XLPE CABLE SUITABLE FOR USE IN NON-EFFECTIVELY EARTHED 33 KV SYSTEM
AND EFFECTIVELY EARTHED 11 KV SYSTEMS

1. SCOPE :

1.1 The specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply and delivery in proper
packed condition of different grades of 1 or 3 core, Aluminum Conductor, Cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, PVC sheathed, Armoured, screened Power Cables.

2. DEVIATION :
Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviation. But any
deviation felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of equipment must
be mentioned in the „Deviation Schedule‟ with reasons duly supported by documentary
evidences and advantages of such deviation. Such deviation suggested may or may not
be accepted. But deviations not mentioned in „Deviation Schedule‟ will not be considered
afterwards.

3. LOCATION :

3.1 The Cables may be laid buried directly in ground at a depth of one meter in average,
anywhere in West Bengal and terminated for outdoor connection to a power transformer
or to overhead lines.

3.2 The Cables may also be laid within covered cable trenches, in cable racks or open air
ladder trays etc. for certain portions of lengths.

4.0 SYSTEM DEAILS :

4.1 Voltage grade (KV) of cable :: 19/33 6.35/11

required
4.2 Service Voltage :: 33 KV 11 KV
4.3 Highest Voltage :: 36 KV 12 KV
4.4 Earthing System :: Delta connected system Solidly Earthed
earthed through Earthing
transformer
4.5 B.I.L. For Cable :: 170 KV for 33 KV Grade 75 KV for 11 KV Grade
4.6 Fault Level (Maxm.) :: See Clause 7.06 See Clause 7.06
4.7 Frequency :: 50 C./S 50 C/S

5.0 WEATHER CONDITION :

5.1 Monsoon prevails generally from the month of June to October with showers sometimes
heavy, acidic, smoky, industrial and foggy.
5.2 Maximum ambient temperature :: 50 degree C.
5.3 Minimum ambient temperature :: 4 degree C
5.4 Thermal resistance of soil :: 150 degree C-Cm/Watt
5.5 Maximum Daily average ambient temp :: 40 degree C
5.6 Maximum relatively humidity :: 100.00%
5.7 Average rainfall per annum :: 200 cm

Page 2 of 14
 5.1 Monsoon prevails generally from the month of June to October with showers sometimes
heavy, acidic, smoky, industrial and foggy.
5.8 Maximum height above the Sea level :: 1000 Meters

6.0 STANDARDS:

6.1 The Cable shall conform to the following standards to the extent of WBSEDCL’s
requirement is fulfilled.

1) IS: 7098 (Part-II) : Specification for cross-linked polyethylene Insulated PVC

(Latest) Sheathed Cables for working Voltages from 3.3 KV up to and
including 33 KV
2) IS:8130-1984 : Specification for Conductors for insulated electric cables and
flexible cords
3) IS:5831-1984 : PVC insulation & sheath of electric cables
4) IS: 3975-1970 : Armour for cables (for 3 Core)
5) IS:10810-1984 : Methods of test for Cables.
6) IS:10418-1982 : Cable Drums for Electric Cables.

6.2 The cable, joints, outdoor termination and their accessories and fittings may conform to other
Indian and/or equivalent Standards or important publications to improve upon their
performance, but shall not fall short of the requirement of this specification. The tenderer
shall clearly indicate such standards in their offers.

7.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS & PERFORMANCE:

7.01 Description of Cables:

a) 19/33 KV Grade: Stranded compacted circular Aluminum (H4 Grade)

Conductor, shielded with black extruded semi-
conducting compound XLPE insulated, core shielded
with black extruded semi-conducting compound,
black semi-conducting tape and a copper tape,
coloured strips having Red, Yellow & Blue for core
identification, shielded cores laid up with fillers, binder
taped and Black extruded PVC (Type ST-2) inner
sheath, single layer of round galvanized steel
wire/strip armoured and black extruded PVC (Type
ST-2), overall sheathed, conforming generally to
IS:7098(Part-II).

b) 6.35/11KV Grade: Stranded compacted circular Aluminum (H4 Grade)

Conductor, shielded with black extruded semi-
conducting compound XLPE insulated, core shielded
with black extruded semi-conducting compound,
copper tape, coloured strips having Red, Yellow & Blue
for core identification, shielded cores laid up with
fillers, binder taped and Black extruded PVC (Type
ST-2) inner sheath, single layer of galvanized flat
steel strip armoured and Blue extruded PVC (Type
ST-2) overall sheathed, conforming generally to
IS:7098(Part-II) and its latest amendments.

Page 3 of 14
7.02 Voltage Grade : 19/33KV (For 33 KV System) 6.35/11KV (For 11 KV System)

7.03 Size of Cable : 95 sq. mm. 95 sq. mm.

185 [Link]. 185 [Link].
240 [Link]. 240 [Link].
300 [Link]. 300 [Link].
400 [Link]. 400 [Link].
500 [Link]. 500 [Link].

7.04 Service Voltage : 33 KV 11 KV

7.05 [Link] temp. : 90 degree C at maxm. continuous current.

7.06 Permissible 33 K.V System 11K.V. System

Maxm. 1) 47.1 KA for 1Sec for 33 KV 1) 47.0 KA(895.47MVA) for 1 sec for 11 KV 500
Short Ckt. 500 [Link] [Link]
Current for 2) 37.6 KA for 1Sec for 33 KV 2) 37.6 KA (716.37MVA) for 1 sec for 11 KV 400
conductors 400 [Link] sq mm
3)28.2K.A(1612 MVA)for 1Sec 3)28.2K.A(537MVA)for 1Sec for 11KV 300 Sq mm
for 33 KV 300 Sq mm
4)22.56 K.A(1289 MVA)for 4)22.6 K.A(429MVA)for 1Sec for 11KV 240 Sq
1Sec for 33 KV 240 Sq mm mm
5)17.39 K.A(994 MVA)for 1Sec 5)17.39 K.A(331 MVA)for 1Sec for 11KV 185 Sq
for 33KV 185 Sq mm mm
6) 8.93 KA(170 MVA) for 1 sec. for 11 KV 95 [Link].
Short Ckt. 2 KA for 3 Secs for all ratings Combine Earth Fault Current of Screen & Armour
Current – (KA for 1 sec.)
Single 1. 4.85 for 3C x 95 sq. mm.
Phase to 2. 5.81 for 3C x 185 sq. mm.
Earth 3. 6.76 for 3C x 300 sq. mm.
4. 7.32 for 3C x 400 sq. mm.
Considering Cu tape width & thickness as 50 and 0.04
mm respectively. Steel Strip Armour of Trapezium cross
section with dimensions 4.0, 3.4 & 0.8 (distance
between parallel sides) mm and 30,37,44 & 47 numbers
of strip.
It is indicative only, bidder shall design for type A
armouring with E/F current. However WBSEDCL also
request the bidders to furnish their calculations of
Earth Fault current for combined screen & armour
considering Cu tape thickness 0.06 mm (min) as
mentioned in Cl. No. 7.12

7.07 Maximum Permissible : 130 degree C for one hour

emergency overload temp.
at 25% overload to 100 hrs.
per year or 500 hrs. in life
of Cable
7.08 Maxm. Permissible short : 250 degree C for one second
circuit Temperature
7.09 Conductor Material : Material to IS: 8130, H4 Grade Aluminium Conductor, stranded
compacted circular
7.10 Conductor screening : Extruded, cross linked, semi-conducting compound of 1.0 mm.
thickness for 33 KV and thickness of conductor screening shall be
0.5 mm (nominal) thickness for 11 KV Cable.
7.11 Insulation : XLPE of thickness, 8.8 mm. (Nominal) for 33 KV and 3.6 mm.
(Nominal) for 11 KV

Page 4 of 14
7.12 Insulation Screening : :: Combination of black extruded semi-conducting compound & semi-
For 33 KV conducting tape as the non-metallic part and annealed copper 0.06
mm (minimum) thick tape lapping as metallic part. For 1 Core
Cable, the non-magnetic metal armour will act as metallic part
insulation screening.
For 11 KV : : It is same but semi-conducting tape is not required

7.13 Inner Sheathing : Black extruded PVC Type ST-2 compound for 33 KV and Black
extruded PVC (Type ST-2) inner sheath for 11 KV and
thickness as per ISS. For 1 Core there will be no inner sheath.
7.14 Armouring : Single layer of round galvanized steel wires/strips for 33 KV (3
Core) and galvanized flat steel strips for 11 KV (3 core) as per IS.
For
1 Core, there will be flat galvanized steel armour made of non-
magnetic metal.
7.15 Overall Sheathing : Coloured PVC Type ST-2 compound to IS:5831, extruded for both
33 KV (green) and 11 KV (blue). Thickness shall be as per ISS.
7.16 Approx length of Cable in a : 250 meters with a tolerance of + 5% (for 3-Core). 500 Metres +
Drum 5% (for 1 Core). But overall tolerance of item wise PO quantity
shall be -1% (minus 1%).
7.17 End Sealing : H.S. Caps (See Clause 8.11) (Heat Shrinkable)

7.18 Max. tan-delta at room : 0.004

a) temp., at nominal Phase to
Neutral Voltage (Uo)
b) Maxm. Increment of tan- : 0.002
delta between 0.5 Uo to 2
Uo at room temp
7.19 Partial Discharge Value : 10 pc (max.) at 1.73Uo (for routine test)
Impulse Tests : 170 KV for 33 KV and 75 KV for 11 KV as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)/
7.20 2011.

7.21 H.V. Tests between : 48 KV (rms) for 33 KV for 5 minutes and as per ISS for 11 KV
Conductors &
Screen/Armour
Maximum D.C Resistance : As per relevant I.S.S
7.22 per KM

* N.B. : The above parameters are applicable for 3-Core and 1-Core Cable, if not otherwise
specified.

8.0 CABLE CONSTRUCTION:

8.1 XLPE Underground Cable is to be manufactured in continuous catenary process at
controlled elevated temperature and pressure in inert atmosphere with use of suitable
materials for XLPE main insulation with semi-conducting screen. The inner and outer
semi-conducting sheaths and main polyethylene insulation between the sheaths are to be
simultaneously extruded during the Tripple Extrusion Process of manufacturing and main
insulation of the Cable is to be extruded unfilled. The XLPE Cable in this specification does
not have any metal sheath and the short circuit rating of the cable will depend on the
conductivity and continuity of the strands of the armour wires which shall be ensured by
guarding against corrosion.

8.2 CONDUCTOR SCREEING:

A semi-conducting cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) screening shall be extruded over the
conductor to act as an electrical shield which together with the elimination of the so called
“Strand Effect” prevents to a great extent air ionization on the surface of the conductor.

8.3 INSULATION:
The main insulation of the Cable shall be extruded unfilled, chemically cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) inert gas cured satisfying the requirement of IS: 7098(Part-II).

Page 5 of 14
8.4 INSULATING SCREEN:
The screen shall be made up as given in 7.12. The metal screen eliminates tangential
stress of rotating electrostatic field surrounding the conductor and uniform electrical
stress in the insulation.
The semi-conducting polyethylene (XLPE) screen shall be extruded over the main
polyethylene insulating wall to prevent partial discharge at the surface of the insulation.
The copper tape shall be wrapped over the semi conducting tape or extrusion as
mentioned earlier for 3 core cables. The metal screen so formed around the cores shall be
in contact with one another as the cores are laid up at triangular configuration. For single
core cable, Aluminium wire armouring shall constitute the metallic part of insulation
screen. Conductor screening, insulation and insulation screening shall be extruded in
triple extrusion processes so as to obtain continuously smooth interfaces.

8.5 The mechanical and chemical properties of the materials for semi conducting screens are
much more important than their electrical properties, but for obtaining the high overall
degree of electrical properties of an E.H.V. cable, the inner and outer semi conducting
screens and the main polyethylene insulation between the screens shall be
simultaneously extruded during the manufacturing process known as “tripple extrusion”.
The advantages are:

i) The partial discharge level at the surface of the insulation is brought to a

minimum.
ii) There will be no displacement of the semi conducting screen and insulation during
expansion and contraction due to load cycles and bending.
iii) The semi conducting screens are easily removable during jointing and termination
operations.

8.6 LAYING UP:

The phase identification of the cores shall be by colour strip as per I.S.S. for 3 core
cables only.

Core Colour
Red
Yellow
Blue
The screened cores shall be laid up with interstices filled with PVC fillers and taped with a
binder tape as to obtain a reasonably circular cable.

8.7 INNER SHEATH:

The cable core shall be supplied with bedding of PVC (inner sheath) in the form of
extruded PVC sheath for 33KV cables. Black extruded PVC (Type ST-2) inner sheath
shall be used for 11 KV Cable and thickness as per Para 7.13 and as per ISS.

8.8 ARMOUR:
The cable shall be wire armoured/Steel strip in case of 33 KV and Strip armoured in case
of 11 KV, 3 Core cables to ensure an adequate return path for the flow of fault current
and also to provide suitable mechanical protection. The Steel Strips of required size in
requisite number as per para 7.14 shall be laid closely in the spiral formation to protect
the circumference of the cable fully and to provide adequate cross sectional area for flow
of maximum fault current within limits of specified temperature rise and duration of fault.
The direction of the lay of the armour shall be opposite to that of the cable cores. In case
of Single Core Cable the armour should be of non-magnetic material.

8.9 OUTER SEATH:

A reliable serving shall be necessary for maintaining conductivity of the armour
particularly under corrosive condition in the form of jacket. The cable shall therefore be
finished with an extruded PVC overseath of thickness as per para 7.15.

Page 6 of 14
 The quality of PVC over sheath (Jacket) shall be ensured for service reliability against
moisture intrusion and shall conform to type ST-2 of IS:5831.
The colour of the outer sheath shall be as follows :
For 33 KV Cable : GREEN & For 11 KV Cable : BLUE
The sheaths shall be protected against white ants, vermin and termites by suitable,
reliable and durable measures.
The supplier shall suggest suitable materials for use, in the event of damage to the over
sheath to prevent passage of moisture along the cable.

8.10 CABLE IDENTIFICATION:

The following shall be embossed on the outer sheath for the identification.
a) Manufacturer‟s Name or Trade Mark.
b) Type of Cable / Cable Code
c) Voltage Grade.
d) Nominal section & Material of conductor and number of crores.
e) Month & Year of manufacture.
f) Inscription for length of cables at 1.0 meter interval.
g) Name of the purchaser : WBSEDCL
h) Marking “Electric” shall be embossed throughout the length of the Cable at 1.0 metre
spacing.
i) Type of insulation i.e. XLPE.
8.11 SEALING OF CABLE ENDS :
The cable ends of cable in the wooden/ steel drum for delivery shall be sealed with heat
shrinkable caps.

9.0 DRUMS:
The Cable shall be packed in non-returnable wooden or steel drums (Preferably Wooden
drum).
9.1 The following information shall be marked on each drum.

a) Drum identification No.

b) Manufacturer’s Name, Trade Name/Trade Mark, if any.
c) Nominal sectional area of the conductor of the cable.
d) No. of Cores.
e) Type of Cable and Voltage Grade with Cable Code.
f) Length of the Cable in Cable Drum.
g) Direction of rotation of Drum (by means of an arrow)
h) Approximate Weight : Tare : Gross
i) Year and Country of Manufacture.
j) Purchase Order No.
k) Date of Delivery & Due Date
l) Name of the Purchaser : WBSEDCL

Drums shall be proofed against attack by white ants or termite conforming to IS : 10418. The
Drums may also be marked with ISI Certificate Mark, if applicable.

9.2 Safe Pulling Force: 30 N/mm2 (for Conductor)

10.0 Tests to be performed as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)/2011 & IS:8130/1984 and its
amendments.

10.1A Type Test: All the tests mentioned below are to be made as per details given in
IS:10810. The party shall submit Type Test report from CPRI or ERDA or NABL
accredited third party LAB as per IS:7098/II/2011 and it latest amendment and
other relevant IS/ IEC for each offered item of identical type, voltage grade, size,
material and design, carried out within 5 years from the due date of opening of
tender. Type Test Certificate should bear NABL Logo. Accreditation of NABL LAB
should be displayed in the official website of NABL

Page 7 of 14
 a) Tests on conductor
i) Tensile Test (for aluminium) (not applicable for compacted conductor as
per IS:8130-1984)
ii) Wrapping Test (for aluminium) (not applicable for compacted conductor as
IS:8130-1984)
iii) Resistance Test.
b) Tests for armouring Wires strips.

c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath

d) Physical test for insulation.

i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
ii) Ageing in air oven.
iii) Hot test.
iv) Shrinkage test
v) Water absorption (Gravimetric)

e) Physical tests for outer sheath

i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
ii) Ageing in air oven.
iii) Shrinkage test.
iv) Hot deformation.
v) Heat shock.
vi) Loss of mass in air oven.
vii) Thermal stability.

f) Partial discharge test.

g) Bending test.
h) Dielectric power factor test.

i) As a function voltage.
1) As a function of temperature.

i) Insulation resistance (Volume resistivity) Test.

j) Heating cycle test.
k) Impulse with stand test.
l) High voltage test.
m) Flammability test.

10.1B The following tests on screened cable shall be performed successively on the same
test sample of completed cable, not less than 10m. in length between the test
accessories.

a) P.D. Test.
b) Bending Test followed by P.D. Test.
c) Dielectric power factor as a function of voltage.
d) Dielectric power factor as a function of temperature.
e) Heating cycle test followed by dielectric power factor as a function of voltage and
[Link].
f) Impulse withstand test and
g) High voltage test as per para 7.21.
If a sample fails in test (g) one more sample shall be taken for this test, preceded
by tests (b) & (e).
10.2 Acceptance Test: The following shall constitute Acceptance Tests:
a) Tensile test (for aluminium)
b) Wrapping test (for aluminium)
c) Conductor resistance test.
d) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.

Page 8 of 14
 e) Hot set test for insulation.
f) Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and outer sheath.
g) P.D. test (for screened cables) only on full drum length.
h) High Voltage test, and
i) Insulation resistance (VOLUME RESISTIVITY) TEST

10.3 ROUTINE TESTS:

The routine test shall be carried out on all cables manufactured in accordance with this
specification.

The following routine tests shall be made on cable length as specified in the ISS.
a) Conductor resistance test.
b) Partial discharge test on full drum length.
c) High voltage test as per para 7.21

10.4 TEST WITNESS:

1. All Tests shall be performed in presence of Purchaser‟s representative if so desired

by the Purchaser.
2. The contractor, shall give at least fifteen (15) days advance notice for witnessing
such tests.

11. TEST CERTIFICATE:

11.1 Certified copies of all routine tests carried out at Works shall be furnished in Six (6) copies
for approval of the purchaser.
11.2 The cables shall be dispatched from Works only after receipt of Purchaser‟s written
approval of shop test reports.
11.3 Type Test Certificates of the Cable offered shall be furnished. Otherwise the cable shall
have to be type tested on similar rating as per Clause – 10 free of any charges to prove
the design.

12. DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURES, TEST RESULTS ETC.:

The following details for the cable shall be submitted with bid.
a) Manufacturer‟s Catalogue giving cable construction details and characteristics.
b) Manufacturing process in detail for cables highlighting the steps to control.
i) Contamination.
ii) Formation of water trees.
iii) Effects of byproducts of cross-linking.
iv) Stress control etc.
c) Cross section drawing of the cable.
d) Cable current ratings for different types of installation inclusive of all de rating
factors due to ambient temperature, grouping etc.
e) Over-Load characteristics of the cable without endangering the normal life and
electrical quality of the insulation.
f) Complete technical data of the cables.
g) List of Customers to whom the Cable of similar rating have been supplied.
h) Copy of Type Test Report carried out within last 5 years from the due date of
opening of Tender on similar type of Cable in a NABL accredited/Govt. approved
Test House or Laboratory is to be submitted along with the tender otherwise
tender may be rejected.

Type Test (after placement of order) : Besides submission of Type Test Report
carried out within last 5 years as per tender specification, type test at the
discretion of the ordering authority shall have to be arranged by the successful
contractor from any lot offered for inspection sample chosen at random after
successful routine test by our inspection team as per relevant ISS from CPRI/NABL

Page 9 of 14
 accredited/Govt. recognized Test House or Laboratory in presence of WBSEDCL‟s
representative.

However the necessary cost of the type test charges will be reimbursed to the
party on production of necessary supporting documents.

i) Valid Calibration Certificate of instruments/equipment used for Testing purpose

conducted by NABL accredited Laboratory provided the certificate bears an
accreditation body logo. For testing equipment where NABL accreditation is not
available, calibration certificate from educational institutions like IIT‟s, NIT‟s, J.U.,
C.U., B.H.U. only can be accepted provided they demonstrate traceability.
j) Documents to be submitted at the time of physical delivery at consignee stores :
The following documents are to be submitted by the venders to the consignee
stores at the time of dispatch to stores by the venders :

a) Copy of Purchase Order

b) Copy of dispatch instruction
c) Inspection Test certificate
d) Guarantee certificate
e) Proforma Invoice
f) Calculation Sheet for price variation on the basis of IEEMA or CACMAI as
applicable with base date of order
g) Seal list and packing list
h) Challan in triplicate
k) Way Bill, if applicable

Page 10 of 14
 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
11 KV ARMOURED ALUMINIUM XLPE CABLES
(To be filled in by the Supplier)

NAME OF MANUFACTURER &

1 ADDRESS
:
2 Voltage Grade. : 6.35/11 KV 6.35/11 KV 6.35/11 KV 6.35/11 KV
3 Core & Cross Section No x sq. mm. : 3 x 400 3 x 300 3 x 185 3 x 95
4 Type & Designation (as per ISS) : A2XFY A2XFY A2XFY A2XFY
IS: 7098(PT-2) IS: 7098(PT-2) IS: 7098(PT-2) IS: 7098(PT-2)
1985, IS: 8130 - 1985, IS: 8130 -1984, 1985, IS: 8130 - 1985, IS: 8130 -1984,
1984, IS:5831 – 1984, IS:5831 – 1984, 1984, IS:5831 – 1984, IS:5831 – 1984,
5 List of Standards applicable : IS:3975 – 1999, IS: IS:3975 – 1999, IS: IS:3975 – 1999, IS: IS:3975 – 1999, IS:
10810 – 1984 & IS: 10810 – 1984 & IS: 10810 – 1984 & IS: 10810 – 1984 & IS:
10418 - 1982 10418 - 1982 10418 - 1982 10418 - 1982

a Service Voltage : 11KV 11KV 11KV 11KV

b Neutral Earthing : 6.35KV 6.35KV 6.35KV 6.35KV
Maximum. Conductor
6 :
temperature
a Continuous (in Deg. C) :
b Short time (in Deg.C ) :
7 Conductor :
H4 Grade H4 Grade H4 Grade H4 Grade
Material to IS-
a : Aluminium of Aluminium of Class- Aluminium of Aluminium of
8130(Class/Grade) Class-2 2 Class-2 Class-2
b Size ([Link].) : 400 300 185 95
No./Nominal diameter of wires
:
c in each.
Conductor (no./mm.) :
Shape of conductor(Circuler/ Stranded Circular Stranded Circular Stranded Circular Stranded Circular
d : Compacted Compacted Compacted Compacted
other shaped)
Shielding/screening on
8 :
Conductor
Semi-conducting Semi-conducting Semi-conducting Semi-conducting
a Material : compound compound compound compound
b Type : Extruded Extruded Extruded Extruded
c Whether thermosetting? :
9 Insulation :
a Material :
b Type : Extruded Extruded Extruded Extruded
c Thickness (mm) :
Shielding / screening on
10 insulation :
Semi-conducting Semi-conducting Semi-conducting Semi-conducting
a Material : compound compound compound compound
b Type : Extruded Extruded Extruded Extruded
Thickness (mm) :
c i) Non-metallic :
ii) Metallic :

Signature with Designation & Seal

With Name of the Firm

Page 11 of 14
 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
11 KV ARMOURED ALUMINIUM XLPE CABLES
(To be filled in by the Supplier)

11 Inner – sheath :
a Material :
b Type :
Minimum Thickness of
c :
sheath (mm)
d Extruded/Wrapped :
e Approx. outside diameter :
12 Armouring :
Galvanised Steel Galvanised Steel Galvanised Steel Galvanised Steel
a Material : Strip Strip Strip Strip
b Size :
D.C. resistance at 20 deg.C
c :
(Ohm/Km.)
d A.C. resistance at 20 deg.C :
13 Overall Sheath :
PVC (Blue PVC (Blue PVC (Blue PVC (Blue
a Material : Colour) Colour) Colour) Colour)
b Type : ST-2 ST-2 ST-2 ST-2
c Thickness (mm.)
d Colour of Sheath : Blue Blue Blue Blue
Approx. overall diameter of
14 :
the Cable (mm.)
Continuous current rating
:
for
15
standard condition, laid
:
direct
a In ground at temp 30 deg.C :
b In duct at temp 30 deg.C :
c In air at temp40 deg.C :
Charging current attracted
16 :
system voltage A/KM
Short Circuit Current in KA
17 :
(Maxm.)
a for 1 sec :
b for 0.5 sec :
Combine Earth Fault Current
18 for Screen and Armour in KA
for 1 sec

Signature with Designation & Seal

With Name of the Firm

Page 12 of 14
 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
11 KV ARMOURED ALUMINIUM XLPE CABLES
(To be filled in by the Supplier)

19 Electrical Parameters :
Maxm. D.C. resistance/km :
a of conductor at 20 deg.C
:
(Ohm/Km)
AC resistance/kilometer of :
b conductor at 90 deg.C(approx.)
:
(Ohm/Km)
Reactance/kilometer(approx.)
c :
(Ohm/Km)
Capacitance/Kilometer(approx.)
d :
(um/Km)
Di-electric losses at rated :
(Uo/U) system KV, 50
e :
cycles/sec
in Watts/KV/Phase) :
i) tan-delta at 0.5 Uo :
ii) tan-Delta at Uo :
f
iii) tan-Delta at 1.5 Uo :
iv) tan-Delta at 2 Uo :
Vol. Resistivity at 27
20 :
deg.C(ohm/Cm)
Recommended minimum
21 :
bending radius
Derating factor for following
:
22 ambient
temperature in Air/Ground :
a at30 deg. C :
b at35 deg. C :
c at45 deg. C :
d at 50 deg.C :
23 Cable Drums :
Standard Length of Cable/Drum
a 250±5% 250±5% 250±5% 250±5%
(Mtrs)
b Net weight of cable/Drum (kg)
Generally as per Generally as per Generally as per Generally as per
c Dimension of Drum IS: 10418-1982 IS: 10418-1982 IS: 10418-1982 IS: 10418-1982
d Shipping weight (Kg)
24 Safe pulling force (Kg.) :
25 Partial discharge value :

Signature with Designation & Seal

With Name of the Firm

Page 13 of 14
 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR
11 KV ARMOURED ALUMINIUM XLPE CABLES
(To be filled in by the Supplier)

Details of the protective

measures against attack by
26 white ante varmints etc. to :
be XLPE’s outer sheath
during manufacture
Inert Gas Inert Gas Inert Gas
Inert Gas
Type of curing of XLPE (Nitrogen) (Nitrogen) (Nitrogen)
27 : (Nitrogen) curing
insulations through CCV Line
curing through curing through curing through
CCV Line CCV Line CCV Line
Cut ends of the Cable shall Heat shrinkable Heat shrinkable Heat shrinkable Heat shrinkable
28 :
be sealed and caps and caps and caps and caps
Cable identification shall be
29 made as per class 8.10 :
(Yes/No)
Cable Drums shall be
marked with the with the
30 :
informations of Clauses 9.1
conspicuously (Yes/No)
Name of Name of Name of
Name of Manufacturer,
Manufacturer, Manufacturer, Manufacturer,
ELECTRIC,
ELECTRIC, ELECTRIC, ELECTRIC,
WBSEDCL (Project
WBSEDCL (Project WBSEDCL (Project WBSEDCL (Project
Name- on Cable as
Name- on Cable as Name- on Cable as Name- on Cable as
well as on Drum) , 11
well as on Drum), 11 well as on Drum), 11 well as on Drum), 11
KV XLPE Armoured
31 Embossing : Cable, Size, Cable
KV XLPE Armoured KV XLPE Armoured KV XLPE Armoured
Cable, Size, Cable Cable, Size, Cable Cable, Size, Cable
Type, Month & Year
Type, , Month & Year Type, , Month & Year Type, , Month & Year
of Manufacturing,
of Manufacturing, of Manufacturing, of Manufacturing,
Sequential length
Sequential length Sequential length Sequential length
Marking by printing in
Marking by printing Marking by printing Marking by printing
each meter interval
in each meter interval in each meter interval in each meter interval

Signature with Designation & Seal

With Name of the Firm

Page 14 of 14
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED
(A GOVT. OF WEST BENGAL ENTERPRISE)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 13M/11M HOT ROLLED STEEL BEAMS (JOISTS)

 1. SCOPE:
This specification covers manufacture, testing at works and supply of Hot Rolled Steel
Beams (Joists).
2. STANDARDS:
The Mild Steel shall be conforming to IS: 2062-2011 modified up to date with Grade
Designation: E250 (Fe 410) and Quality: “A”.
The dimensions of Hot Rolled Steel Beams shall be conforming to IS: 808-1989 amended
up to date and tolerance as per IS: 1852-1895 modified up to date.
3. DIMENSIONS AND SECTIONAL PROPERTIES: Length-11M/13M

Moment of

Radius of
Designation

Depth

Width

Gyration
Mass

Root radius

modulus
Sectional
Area

Inertia
Thickness

Web Flange
M a D B t T R1 R2 Ix Iy rx ry Zx Zy
Kg/m Cm2 mm mm mm mm mm mm Cm4 Cm4 Cm Cm Cm3 Cm3
SC150 37.1 47.4 152 152 7.9 11.9 11.7 3 1970 700 6.45 3.84 259 91.9
4. ROLLING AND CUTTING TOLERANCE:
4.1 Dimensional Tolerance
Designation Depth Width

D B
mm mm
SC150 /-2 /-4 + +

Other dimensional tolerance will be in conformity to IS 1852: 1895 modified up to

date.
4.2 Mass Tolerance
The tolerance on mass per metre of individual section shall be +/- 2.5 percent of the
specified mass i.e 37.1Kg/m.
4.3 Cutting Tolerance
Cutting tolerance shall be within + 100, - 0 mm from the specified values.

TS STEEL BEAM (JOIST) Page 1

 5. EMBOSSING ON EACH JOIST:
Following distinct non-erasable embossing to be made on each Steel Beams (Joists):
 Name & Logo of the manufacturer.
 ISI mark.
 Designation of steel and Size of the JOIST

TS STEEL BEAM (JOIST) Page 2

 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
FOR
Holt Rolled Steel Beams (Joists)
1. Steel Beams (Joists):
1.1 Dimensions and Properties:
[Link]. Particulars SC150 Manufacturer’s Data
1 Length of Joist in Mtr. 11/13Mtr
2 Weight Kg/m 37.1kg/m
3 Depth (D) of section in mm 152mm
4 Width(W) of section in mm 152mm
5 Thickness of flange(T) in mm 11.9mm
6 Thickness of web (t) in mm 7.9mm
7 Root radius in mm R1 11.7mm
R2 3mm
8 Moment of Inertia
4
Ix(cm4) 1970 cm
4
Iy(cm4) 700 cm
9 Radius of Gyration (cm)
rx 6.45cm
ry 3.84cm
10 Sectional modulus
Zx(cm3) 259 cm3
Zy(cm3) 91.9 cm3

1.2 Mechanical properties:

[Link]. Test Requirement as per IS Manufacturer’s
2062:2011 with Grade Data
Designation: E250 (Fe
410) and Quality: “A”
A Tensile Test: Min250
i. Yield Stress (MPa)
ii. Tensile Strength(MPa) Min 410
iii. Percentage Elongation A, Min 23
at Gauge Length, Lo=5.65
B Bend test: Internal Bend Diameter:
The test piece at room temperature 2XThickness of test piece.
shall withstand bending without
cracking through 180o to an internal
diameter not greater than:

Page 1
GTP STEEL BEAMS (JOIST)
1.3 Chemical properties:
[Link]. Test Requirement as per IS Manufacturer’s
2062:2011 with Grade Data
Designation: E250 (Fe
410) and Quality: “A”
1 Carbon% 0.23
2 Manganese% 1.5
3 Sulphur% 0.045
4 Phosphorous% 0.045
5 Silicon% 0.4
6 Carbon equivalent %( Max.) 0.42
7 Mode of De-oxidation Semi-killed or killed

Signature of the Bidder with Company Seal

**This form is to be duly filled in by the Bidder and submitted along with the Tender

Page 2
GTP STEEL BEAMS (JOIST)
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY [Link] LTD.
OFFICE OF THE MATERIAL CONTROLLER :: CENTRAL STORES & PURCHASE DEPARTMENT
BIDYUT BHAWAN (10TH FLOOR) :: BIDHANNAGAR :: BLOCK-DJ :: SECTOR-II::KOLKATA-700091
Ph- 033-2359-8397 :: Fax No. : 033-2359-1921

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. EARTHING ROD

1. SCOPE :
This specification covers the technical details of G.I. Earthing Rod complete with the
necessary fittings.

2 The earthing rod should be 1853 mm (i.e. 25 + 1752 + 76) long fabricated from 20
mm dia M.S. Rod, the bottom of which to be made cut of the same rod in the shape of
a cone – 76 mm long and the forged head made out of the same rod with 30 mm (dia)
= 25 mm (height). The earthing arrangements should consist of G.I. Bolt/nut and
washers. The earthing rod will be as per this office drawing No.S&P/MC/Misc/8.
The raw materials, as required for manufacture, shall coply with the relevant latest
Indian Standard with all amendments, additions and alternation, for obtaining the
required strength.

3 The rod including the head portion should be smoothly and contineously hot dip
galvanised as per relevant I.S.S. Other portion i.e. Bolts, nuts and washers should be
hot dip galavanised or Zinc electro-plated. For Zinc electro plating manufacturers will
have to give undertaking for satisfactory performance in the Test Certificate while
offering inspection.

4 No crack should develop and deformation in the top head and/or bending of rod should
not be appreciable while the rods will be driven into the ground by the application of
heavy intermitant block not less than 7.5 Kg. Hammer and in a manner asis usual for
driving rods into the grounds.

5 GUARANTEE, TESTING & INSPECTION :

Eight copies of test certificates should be furnished along with the offer of inspection.
Following tests will be carried out by our inspecting Engineers before acceptance of any
materials :

i) Galvanising tests as per the relevant I.S.S. On 1% of the offered lot upto the maximum
of 5 Nos.

ii) Diamensional check on 1% of the offered lot upto the maximum of 10 Nos.

iii) Stores test by hammaring (7/8 times) the rods into the normal soil by a hammer (not
less than 7.5 Kg) on 1% of the offered lot upto the maximum of 2 nos.

6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIES
FOR 1ST SAMPLE

A. Failure in Galvanising test and diamentional check upto 1/5th will conform the lot for
(a) acceptance. But in case of dimentional check failure upto 1/5th will be restricted upto as
follows :

i) 1% on total length

ii) 7½% on other dimension except 15 mm, 25 mm & 40 mm of small forged portion.

iii) No failure will be accepted in 15 mm, 25 mm, & 40 mm of small forged portion.
If the failure is beyond the above tolerance, re-sampling may be made as per clause 6
B. If the failure in each of the above tests are more than 1/5th but less than or equal to
2/5th resampling in the same mannar will be made for the test(s) in which failed.

C. However, if the failure in any of the above tests is greater than 2/5th the whole lot will
be rejected.

D. For 2nd Sample :

In case of failure as (a) above the lot will conform for acceptance.
However, if the failure in any of the above tests is greater than 1/5th the whole lot will
be rejected.
No resampling will be made in case of failure in stress tests by hammering.
Any defect found during Inspection/Testing of the Earthing rod or after delivery in the
site in respect of Galvanising, welding and in the quality of the associated materials
shall make the whole lot liable for rejection. The rejected materials shall be taken back
by the supplier at his own cost from the place of delivery within ten days from the date
of intimation in this respect.
Earthing Rods with all fittings mounted on them shall be supplied in boundles of ten.
TELERANCE :
- ½% on total length., - 5% on other dimensions.
- 10% on 15 mm, 25 mm, & 40 mm of small forged portion.
Any tolerance on the positive side will be accepted.

9 MARKING :
Manufacturers identification marking is to be punched on the Head of the Earth Rod.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE ELECTRODES

1.1 SCOPE

This specification covers the technical details of G.I. Pipe electrodes complete with
necessary fittings.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION
Pipe Electrode shall be of 50 mm dia, heavy gauge GI pipe of 3 mtr. length (as per IS
1239 Part-I, 2004 or latest) in a single piece with perforation of 12 mm dia holes @ 150
mm from each other at right angle along with removable type top cap & 250 mm
clamp. Number of pipes may be connected in parallel with a separation equal to the
driven depth (minimum 2 m separation) so long as each is situated outside the
resistance area of any other. For DTR locations the electrodes shall preferably encircle
the DTR DP if space permits. Pipes may be coupled together to give longer lengths in
special conditions. Deeply driven pipes shall be employed where the soil resistivity
decreases with depth or where the sub strata of low resistivity occur at depths greater
than those where the rods are normally driven.
The typical installation of pipe earthing electrode shall be as per fig. 14 of IS : 3043,
1987.
The raw materials, as required for manufacture shall comply with the relevant latest
Indian Standards with all amendments, additions and alterations for obtaining the
required strength.
Inspection pit with cover of size as mentioned in BPS is to be made at Power Substation
locations only & for DTR earthing there shall be no inspection pit. At DTR locations all
the steel and metal parts to be earthed by pipe earthing (as per BPS) as per the drawing
enclosed with this specification. The earth pit shall be duly filled with homogeneous
layer of finely broken coke (having granule size not more than 25mm thick), Charcoal,
salt and sand. The homogeneous mixture shall be maintained up to a distance of 150
mm for the pipe on all sides. The electrodes shall be connected with each other to form
parallel network. The top edge of the pipe shall be at least 200 mm below the ground
level. The G.I. strips shall be fixed not less than 300 mm deep from the ground level.
The tenderers shall quote the charges for earthing inclusive of the cost of mixture of
coke, charcoal, salt etc, excavation and backfilling.
Pole earthing supports shall be properly earthed in line with IS and as per relevant
drawings.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LT & HT GUY INSULATORS

1.1 SCOPE

The scope covers design, manufacture, testing, transport to site, insurance, storage, erection
and commissioning of the strain type porcelain Guy Insulators used in distribution
overhead power lines.

1.2 STANDARD

This insulators shall comply with Indian Standard specification IS:5500-1969 and as
amended from time to time except where they conflict with the requirements in this
[Link] conforming to any other internationally accepted standard which
ensure equal or higher quality than the standard mentioned will be acceptable.
1.3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The insulators shall be designed for Climatic Condition as specified in annexure.

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

This porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smooth glazed.

The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction at
any part of the insulator shall not lead to its deterioration.

The glaze, unless otherwise specified, shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall cover the
entire porcelain surface parts except those areas that serves as supports during firing or are
otherwise required to be left unglazed.

1.5 INSULATOR CHARACTERISTICS

The Guy Strain Insulators shall have the electrical and mechanical characteristics as shown
below :

L.T. Strain Type Porcelain Guy Insulator

1) Length 90 mm
2) Diameter 65 mm
3) Cable hole dia 16 mm +/- 1.5
4) Minimum failing load 44 kN 41
5) Creepage distance mm 18 kV
6) Dry one minute power frequency withstand voltage (rms) 8 kV
7) Wet one minute power frequency withstand voltage (rms)
 H.T. Strain Type Porcelain Guy Insulator (11 kV)
1) Length 140 mm
2) Diameter 85 mm
3) Cable hole dia 25 mm + 1.5
4) Minimum failing load 88 kN
5) Creepage distance 48 mm
6) Dry one minute power frequency withstand voltage 27 kV (rms)
7) Wet one minute power frequency withstand voltage 13 kV (rms)

1.6 TEST

All insulators shall comply with different tests as per IS:5300 or it's latest amendments. Type test
certificate shall be submitted.

1.7 MARKING

Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following :

- Name of trade mark of the manufacturer

- Year of manufacture

Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing. Insulators may also be
marked with the ISI certification mark.

1.8 DRAWING

Drawing specifically showing all dimensions is to be submitted along with technical Bid.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE AND G.I. STAY WIRE

1.0 SCOPE:

The s p eci fi c at i on covers manufacture, testing preferably at m an u f a c t u r e r ’ s

works before despatch, supply and delivery of G.I. Wire and G.I. Stranded Stay Wire.

2.0 STANDARDS:

i) The G.I. wire shall comply with IS: 280 – 2006 with the latest amendments and
galvanising shall comply with IS: 4826 – 1979 with the latest amendments.

ii) The galvanised stranded stay wire shall comply with IS: 2141 – 2000 with the
latest amendments and galvanising shall comply with IS: 4826 – 1979 with the
latest amendments.

3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

3.1 a) The requirements for chemical composition for the wires as per IS: 280 – 2006
shall conform to those given in IS: 7887 – 1992. Chemical composition as per the
Clause No. 6 of IS: 7887 – 1992 is given below:

Chemical composition :

i) The Ladle analysis of steel when analysed in accordance with relevant parts of
IS: 228 or any other established instrumental/chemical method shall be as
given below:

Constituent Percent
Carbon 0.18 to 0.230
Manganese 0.30 to 0.60
Sulphur 0.050 Max.
Phosphorus 0.050 Max.

ii) Product Analysis:

Permissible variation in case of product analysis from the limits specified under
Clause No. 6.1 of IS: 7887 – 1992 shall be as follows:

Variation over specified maximum

Constituent limits, percent, max.
Carbon 0.02
Manganese 0.03
Sulphur 0.005
Phosphorus 0.005

b) The stranded stay wires as per IS: 2141 – 2000 shall not contain sulphur and
phosphorus exceeding 0.060 percent each.

3.2 All finished wires shall be circular in section and be well and clearly drawn to the
dimension specified. The wire shall be round, free from splits, scale, surface flaws, rough
jagged and imperfect edges and other harmful surface defects.

3.3 The wire shall be in continuous length. However, the joints, if reqd., should
conform to IS- 2141-2000.

3.4 Galvanising shall be heavy as per IS: 4826 – 1979 with the latest amendments.

3.5 For the purpose of galvanising, the wire shall be coated with Zinc conforming to at
least Grade Zn 98 specified in IS 209 – 1966. The Zinc coating shall be uniform,
adherent, reasonably smooth and free from imperfections as per IS: 4826 – 1979
with the latest amendments.
4.0 SIZE AND DETAILS:

4.1 FOR GALVANISED MILD STEEL WIRE :

4.1.1 Diameter of G.I. Wires shall be as per the items of the Tender. Tolerances
permitted on the diameter of wire shall be as per IS: 280 - 2006.
4.1.2 Tensile properties of the wire shall be as follows:
Tensile strength of galvanised M.S. Wire shall be 300 – 550 N/mm2.
4.1.3 Type of coating of galvanise shall be heavy as per IS: 4826 – 1979 and the wires
shall be galvanised after drawing & annealing.
4.1.4 Weight per metre length of the wire shall be stated by the Tenderer.

4.2 FOR GALVANISED STRANDED STAY WIRE :

4.2.1 Diameter of G.I. Stay Wires shall be as per the items of the Tender.
Tolerances permitted on the diameter of wire shall be as per IS: 2141 – 2000.

4.2.2 Grade as per Size of the Minimum

IS:2141-1979 Stay wire Tensile
Strength or latest

4 As per the items 700 N / mm2

of the
Tender

4.2.3 Minimum breaking force of single wire and strand shall be as per IS: 2141 – 2000.

4.2.4 Type of coating of galvanise shall be heavy as per IS: 4826 – 1979 and the wires
shall be galvanised after drawing, but without annealing.

4.2.5 Weight per metre length of the stranded stay wire shall be stated by the Tenderer.

5.0 TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATES :

5.1 Test Report (To be submitted alongwith the Bid)

Copy of Test Report carried out within last five years on the items of material of the
Tender in a NABL accredited Test House or Laboratory shall be submitted along
with the tender as Pre-requisite. If there be any deficiency regarding non-
submission of the Test Report, WBSEDCL reserves the right to cancel the tender
unilaterally.

5.2 The following Acceptance Tests shall be carried out as per the relevant IS Codes.

5.2.1 Acceptance Tests for G.I. Wires according to IS: 280 –2006:
a) Chemical Composition Test
b) Verification of diameter
c) Mechanical properties like Tensile Test, Wrapping Test, Bend Test etc.
d) Coating Test for galvanise
e) Test for conformity.

5.2.2 Acceptance Tests for G.I. Stay Wires according to IS: 2141–2000:

a) Chemical Composition Test

b) Ductility Test
c) Verification of wire diameter
d) Tensile and Elongation Test
e) Galvanising Test
f) Test for conformity.
6.0 MARKING:

Each coil shall be provided with a tag made of metal of suitable size
securely attached on the inner part of the coil bearing the following information :

A. Manufacturer’s name or Trade Mark.

B. Lot number and coil number.
C. Quality and size of material.
D. BIS Certification mark, if any.

7.0 TOLERANCE IN QUANTITY:

Tolerance in supply of total quantity will be allowed upto -2 % to +1% of the

ordered quantity for each item.

8.0 PACKING:

Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly.

9.0 WEIGHT OF COIL:

Weight of each coil shall be between 50 Kgs. & 100 Kgs.

10.0 PRICE :

The Price shall be FIRM.

11.0 Documents to be submitted at the time of physical delivery at consignee stores :

The following documents to be submitted by the venders to the Consignee Stores at

the time of despatch to stores by the venders:-

a) Copy of Purchase Order.

b) Copy of Despatch Instruction
c) Inspection Test Certificate
d) Guarantee Certificate
e) Proforma Invoice
f) Calculation Sheet.
g) Seal list and packing list
h) Challan in triplicate
i) Way bill, if applicable.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH TENSION LINE HARDWARE
AND ACCESSORIES FOR ACSR PANTHER & WOLF CONDUCTOR

1.1.0 SCOPE :

This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacture‟s works

before despatch, supply and delivery of Conductor Accessories and Line
Hardwares for Over Head Lines to be used as 33KV Line by Wolf Conductor &
Panther conductor.

1.2.1 STANDARDS:

The materials covered under this specification shall comply with the
requirements of the latest version of the following standards as amended upto
date, except where specified otherwise.

i) IS-2486 Part-I,II & III : Insulator fittings for Over Head Power Lines with
nominal voltage greater than 1,000 Volt.

ii) IS-2121 Part-I & II : Conductor Accessories for Over Head Power Lines

iii) IS-2629 : Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of

Iron and Steel.

iv) IS-2633 : Method of testing for uniformity of coating on

Zinc coated articles.

1.2.2 The materials conforming to any other national standards which ensure equal
or better performance shall also be acceptable. The salient point of these
specifications and points of difference between these and the above
specifications, shall be clearly brought out in the Bid.

1.3.0 MATERIAL & WORKMANSHIP :

1.3.1 The material offered shall be of best quality, workmanship, well finished and of
latest proven design and conform to the best modern practices adopted in the
extra high voltage field. All castings shall be free from internal defects like
blow-holes, cracks, inclusion, shrinkage etc. and shall be smooth. All
mechanical surface shall be true, smooth and well finished.

1.3.2 Metal fittings of specified material for Conductor Accessories and overhead
Line Hardwares are required to have excellent mechanical properties such as
strength, toughness and high corrosion resistance and free from corona
formation. All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured
that contact resistance is reduced to the minimum and localized heating
phenomenon is averted.

1.3.3 All items shall be supplied complete in all respect and shall include all fittings
necessary for completing the assembly. The tenderers shall be responsible for
satisfying himself that the Accessories and Hardwares offered are complete
and suitable for the proposed attachment and for the size of the specified
conductor.
1.3.4 All bolts, nuts, bolt-heads shall be the whiteworth standard thread. Bolt heads
and nuts shall be hexagonal. However, if required, nuts shall be locked in an
approved manner. The thread in nuts and tapped holes shall be cut after
galvanizing and shall be well lubricated or greased. All other threads shall be
cut before galvanizing. The bolt threads shall be under-cut to take care of
increase in diameter due to galvanizing. Rivet (Cotterpin) in place of Bolt &
Nuts shall not be acceptable. Bolts & nuts should be ASP/BI/GKW or equivalent
make. Spring washers shall be electro galvanized.

1.3.5 The general design of Conductor Accessories and overhead Line Hardwares
shall be such as to ensure uniformity, high strength, freedom from corona
formation and high resistance against corrosion even in case of high level of
atmosphere pollution.

1.3.6 All hooks, eyes, pins, bolts, Suspension Clamps and other fittings for attaching
insulators to the Rail Pole or to the line conductor shall be so designed as to
reduce to a maximum any damage to the conductor and insulator or other
fitting arising from the conductor vibration.

1.3.7 The design of the fittings shall be such as to avoid local corona formation or
discharges likely to cause interference to tele-Transmission of signals of any
kind.

1.4.0 GALVANIZATION :

1.4.1 All ferrous parts of Conductor, Accessories and Line hardware shall be
galvanized in accordance with IS: 2629-1966 recommended practice for hot
dip galvanizing of iron and steel or any other equivalent authoritative
standards. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined as per methods for
testing weights, thickness and uniformity of coating of hot-dip galvanized
articles as stipulated in IS: 2633-1972 or any other equivalent authoritative
standard. The zinc used for galvanization shall conform to grade ZN 98 of
IS:209. The galvanized parts shall withstand four (4) dips of 1 minute each
while testing uniformity of zinc coating as per IS: 2633-1972.

1.4.2 Spring washers shall be made of spring steel of coil rectangular shape as per
IS: 1573 Service Condition 4.

1.5.0 REQUIREMENT OF INSULATOR STRING ASSEMBLIES :

1.5.1 Hardware for suspension and tension insulators shall be suitable for insulators
with nominal pin shank diameters of 16mm.

1.5.2 Each insulator string hardware shall generally include the following hardware
components and each set of hardware shall be supplied complete in every
respect.

1.5.3 Both suspension and tension type of hardware shall be of Ball and Socket type
and should invariably be with security clip.

1.5.4 Suspension assembly for Single Suspension Set shall comprise of the
following:-

a) Support Hook
b) Ball Link
c) Socket eye with „R‟ type security clip
d) Suspension Clamp
1.5.5 Tension assembly for Single Tension Set shall comprise of the following:-

a) Cross Arm Strap

b) Ball Clevis
c) Socket eye/clevis with „R‟ type security clip
d) Compression type Dead End Clamp

1.5.6 The Suspension and Tension Clamps shall be suitable for the following sizes of
conductor. Ultimate Mechanical strength of the hardware would in no case be
lower than the following :

Conductor Size Overall Diameter Ultimate mechanical strength

(approx.) (Single)
(mm.)
Suspension Tension
(KN.) (KN.)
WOLF (ACSR) 18.13 70 70
PANTHER (ACSR) 21.0 70 70

1.5.7 MATERIALS :

Materials for the various components of the hardwares shall be as follows:-

a) Cross Arm Strap Mild Steel

b) Ball Hook or Eye Hook/Support Hook Forged steel/Mild steel
c) Ball Clevis Forged steel
d) Ball link Forged steel
e) Socket Eye Forged steel
f) Suspension Clamp Aluminium Alloy
g) Dead End Clamp (Compression Type)
i) Aluminium Sleeve Aluminium
ii) Steel Sleeve Forged steel

The bidder shall be responsible to satisfy himself that all the hardware fittings
included in a string are entirely suitable for Rail Pole structures and conductor
specified in the schedule of price.

1.6.0 INSULATOR HARDWARE FITTINGS :

1.6.1 CROSS ARM STRAP :

Cross Arm Strap shall be made of Mild Steel complete with Bolt & Nut.

1.6.2 BALL HOOK/EYE HOOK/SUPPORT HOOK :

This shall be made from drop forged steel and smooth finished for Ball Hook
/Eye Hook and from Mild Steel for Support Hook.

1.6.3 BALL CLEVIS/BALL LINK/SOCKET EYE :

All these fittings shall be made of forged steel. Balls and sockets shall be
suitable for insulators with nominal pin shank diameter of 16mm.
1.6.4 SUSPENSION CLAMP :

Suspension Clamp will consist of one set clamp made of Aluminium Alloy &
steel, one socket eye made of forged steel, one Ball link made of forged steel
and one support hook made of mild steel.
Suspension Clamp shall be suitable for ACSR “Wolf” & ACSR “Panther”
conductor without armour rod. Ultimate Tensile Strength of Hardware shall be
70 KN and Ultimate Tensile Strength of Suspension Clamp shall be 45 KN in
case of “Wolf” conductor. Ultimate Tensile Strength of both the Hardware and
Suspension Clamp shall be 70 KN in case of “Panther” conductor.

1.6.5 DEAD END CLAMP (COMPRESSION TYPE) :

The dead end clamps shall be suitable for supporting ACSR Conductor. The
steel sleeve of dead end clamp shall be single piece obtained by process of
drop forging and shall not be made by joining, welding, shrink fitting or any
other process for more than one piece of material. The steel sleeve shall be
hot dip galvanized and outer sleeve shall be made of aluminum.

The dead end clamp shall be compression type with provision for compressing
jumper terminal at one end. The clamp shall not permit slipping or damage to
or failure of the complete conductor at any part thereof at a load less than
95% of the ultimate tensile strength of conductor. The conductivity of the
clamp shall not be less than that of conductor. Non-Compression zone shall be
clearly marked on each dead end clamp.

1.7.0 UNIVERSAL JOINTING COMPOUND :

PENTEX “HV” Universal Jointing Compound is a chemically inert compound

based on a special petroleum to provide high electrical efficiency. Compound
provides low resistance connections over the entire operating temperature
range. It shall be used with all compression, accessories and bolted fittings.

1.8.0 TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATES :

A copy of Type Test Report carried out within last 5 years on similar Clamp in a
NABL accredited Test House/Laboratory shall be submitted along with the
tender. Otherwise, the tender may be rejected.

The following tests shall be carried out as per latest amendment of IS: 2486
(Part-I) :

A. TYPE TEST FOR CLAMP :

a) Visual Examination.

b) Verification of dimensions.

c) Slip Strength Tests.

d) Ultimate Strength Tests.

e) Galvanizing/Electroplating Tests.
 B. TYPE TEST FOR INSULATOR STRING FITTINGS EXCEPT CLAMP :

a) Visual Examination.

b) Verification of dimensions.

c) Mechanical Test.

d) Galvanizing Test.

e) Chemical Composition Test.

C. ACCEPTANCE TEST FOR CLAMP :

a) Visual Examination.

b) Chemical Composition Test.

c) Verification of dimensions.

d) Mechanical Tests.

e) Ultimate Strength Tests.

f) Galvanizing Tests.

D. ACCEPTANCE TEST FOR INSULATOR STRING FITTINGS EXCEPT

CLAMP :

a) Visual Examination.

b) Chemical Composition Test.

c) Verification of dimensions.

d) Ultimate Strength Tests.

e) Galvanizing Tests.

E. ROUTINE TESTS FOR BOTH CLAMP & FOR INSULATOR STRING

FITTINGS EXCEPT CLAMP :

a) Visual Examination

b) Mechanical routine test

1.9.0 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

The specific technical particulars of ACSR Conductor are given as hereunder :

1.9.1 SYSTEM PARTCULARS :

(i) CONDUCTOR :

a) Type WOLF ACSR PANTHER ACSR

b) Stranding & wire Diameter(mm.) 30/2.59 Aluminium 30/3.0 Aluminium
7/2.59 Steel 7/3.0 Steel
 c) Approx. total wt. (Kg./Km.) 726 976
d) Overall Diameter (mm.) 18.13 21.00
e) Ultimate Strength (Kg.) 6867 9127

ii) DISC INSULATORS :

SUSPENSION TENSION
a) Type : Ball & Socket Ball & Socket
b) Ball Size-As per IS:2486 Pt-II : 16 mm. „B‟ 16 mm. „B‟
c) Diameter : 254mm. 254mm
d) Spacing : 145mm. 145mm
e) E.M. Strengh : 70KN 70KN
f) Number : 3 nos 3 nos

iii) SUSPENSION CLAMPS :

a) Material : Aluminium Alloy & Steel

b) Slip Strength : 8 to 15% of ultimate strength of conductor
c) Minimum Failing Load (KN) : 70 KN

iv) TENSION CLAMPS (COMPRESSION TYPE) :

a) Material : Aluminium & Steel

b) Slip Strength : Not less than 95% of ultimate strength of
conductor
c) Minimum Failing Load (KN) : 70 KN

1.10.0 Documents to be submitted at the time of physical delivery

at consignee stores :

The following documents to be submitted by the venders to the consignee

Stores at the time of despatch to stores by the venders:-
a) Copy of purchase Order.
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction
c) Inspection Test Certificate
d) Guarantee Certificate
e) Proforma Invoice
f) Calculation Sheet for price Variation on the basis of IEEMA or CACMAI
as applicable with base date of order.
g) Seal list and packing list
h) Challan in triplicate
i) Way bill, if applicable.
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

1. INSULATOR STRING HARDWARE :

i) Maker‟s Name and Address :

ii) Size and designation of ball and socket with

Standard specification to which conforming :

iii) Material :

a) Cross Arm Strap

b) Ball Hook or Eye Hook or Support Hook
c) Ball Clevis
d) Ball Link
e) Socket Eye
f) Suspension Clamp
g) Dead End Clamp (compression type)

iv) Minimum Failing Load

v) Standard specification to which galvanizing conforms

vi) Reference to drawing attached

vii)Reference to type tests and other test reports attached

2. TENSION CLAMPS :

Compression Type

i) Material

ii) Breaking Strength

iii) Slipping Strength

iv) Angle of inclination of jumper Terminal

v) Electrical Conductivity
a) Result of heating cycle test carried out

b) Value of Electrical resistance

vi) a) Whether a graph showing the power
losses in watts against current in amp
is enclosed ?

b) Magnetic power losses in watts.

vii) Make of Bolts and nuts used

3. SUSPENSION CLAMPS :

i) Material

ii) Breaking Strength

iii) Slipping Strength

iv) Angle of inclination of jumper Terminal

v) Electrical Conductivity
a) Result of heating cycle test carried out

b) Value of Electrical resistance

vi) a) Whether a graph showing the power
losses in watts against current in amp
is enclosed ?

b) Magnetic power losses in watts.

vii) Make of Bolts and nuts used

Signature .......................................

Name .............................................

Seal of the Farm ..............................

Name of the Farm ............................

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 POST INSULATORS, 11 KV & 33 KV PIN

INSULATORS AND 11 KV, B&S TYPE 45 KN & 70 KN DISC INSULATORS.

1.0 SCOPE :
1.1 This specification covers Design, Manufacture, Testing of Manufacturer‟s Works, Supply &
Delivery of Porcelain Make, 11 KV Pin Insulators with minimum creepage distance 230
mm & 320 mm, 33 KV pin Insulators with minimum creepage distance 580 mm & 840
mm,11 KV Post Insulators and 11 KV,B & S Type Disc Insulators(45 KN & 70KN)to be used
for power lines. Deviation, if any, from this Specification shall be clearly mentioned with
reasons for such deviation, otherwise no deviation from Specification will be permitted.

1.2 The materials offered shall be complete with all component and accessories which are
necessary or usual for their efficient performance and satisfactory maintenance. Such
parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of the contact, whether specifically indicated
or not in the specification.

2.0 STANDARD :

2.1 The Insulators covered by this specification should conform to the latest editions of Indian
Standard Specification IS:731, IS:2544 and IS:5350 or any other authoritative standard.
Standard adopted should be clearly stated in the Tender in that case a copy of the
standard should be submitted with the Tender without fail.

3.0 DEVIATION : -
Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviations. But any
deviation felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of the Pin, Post and
Disc Insulators must be mentioned under Deviation Schedule. Such deviation suggested
may or may not be accepted. Deviation not mentioned in Deviation Schedule will not be
considered afterwards even if the same is mentioned elsewhere.

4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT :

4.1 The Porcelain shall be sound, free from defect, thoroughly vitrified and Smoothly glazed.
The Insulators shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall Cover all the Porcelain parts of the
Insulators except those areas which Serve as support during fixing or left un-glaze for the
purpose of assembly.

4.2 Cement used in construction of insulators shall not cause fraction by expansion or
loosening by construction and propose care must be taken in “Curing”. The cement used
shall not give rise to Chemical Reaction with the metal Fittings and its thickness shall be
uniform as possible.

4.3 The design of Insulators shall be such that stores due to expansion or Contraction of any
part of Insulators shall not lead to deterioration.

5.0 PIN INSULATORS :

5.1 The Pin Insulators shall be so designed that the porcelain part should not directly come in
contact with any hard material.

5.2 For this purpose the pin insulators shall be fitted with a Zinc/Lead thimble designed to fit
with the small / large steel head of the pin.
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

6.0 POST TYPE INSULATORS :

6.1 11KV POST INSULATORS:

i) The post type insulators shall be suitable for outdoor use and cap & base type. Caps &
base shall have plain machined faces & zigs shall be used for drilling bolt holes on the cap
& in the base for easy & perfect assembly. Regarding Test for Mechanical strength for post
Insulators, all the necessary tests are as per [Link], [Link], & [Link] of IS:2544-1973
with latest amendments are to be carried out at the manufacturer‟s premises.

ii) For each of the Post Insulators / Insulator sets Bolts, Nuts, Set Screws & Washers shall be
supplied as follows :
a) Requisite numbers of set Screws & Spring Washers for assembling the Post Insulator
unit.
b) Requisite numbers of set screws & spring washers for fixing bus-bar Support to the cap
in the top Post Insulator.
c) One set of Bolts, Nuts & Washers or Lock nuts & plain washers for mounting the
Insulators on the support steel structures of bus support.

iii) 5% spare Nuts & Bolts with washers shall have to be supplied of no extra cost by the
purchaser with each consignment.

iv) The Post Insulator shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly verified, smoothly glazed.
The glaze shall be brown in colour. The glaze shall cover the exposed Porcelain parts of
the Insulator.

v) The Post Insulator shall be designed and manufactured to avoid stresses due to expansion
and contraction which may lead to deterioration, stress concentration due to direct
engagement of Porcelain with metal fittings and shapes which do not facilitate cleaning by
normal methods.

vi) Cement used in the construction of post insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion
or loosening by contraction and shall not give rise to chemical reaction with the metal
fittings and its thickness shall be uniform.

vii) All ferrous metal parts except those of stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanised and
uniform zinc coating shall satisfy the requirement of IS:[Link] parts shall be galvanised
after machining and the galvanised surface shall be smooth.

viii) The tapped holes suitable for bolts with threads shall have anti-corrosion protection. The
effective length of the thread shall not be less than the nominal diameter of the Bolt.

ix) The electrical and mechanical characteristics of Post Insulator shall conform to the specific
technical parameters of this specification.

x) Post Insulator shall be suitable for upright mounting on steel structures & the Cap &
Pedestal of Post Insulators shall be of Malleable Cast Iron.
7.0 DISC INSULATORS :
7.1 The Insulator discs shall be Cap and Ball Pin type with Ball and Socket coupling suitable for
use in suspension or tension strings.
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

7.2 The porcelain shall be brown colour, non porous having high dielectric mechanical
and thermal strength, free from internal stresses, blisters, laminations, voids, foreign
matters, imperfections or other defects, which might in any way render it unsuitable as
insulator shells. Porcelain shall be smoothly glazed to remain unaffected by climatic
condition, ozone, acids, alkalis, zinc or dust.
The glaze shall have bright luster, smooth surface, a good performance under extreme
weather condition of tropical climate and dust resistant. The glaze shall not crack or chip
due to aging under normal service condition or while handling during transit or erection.

7.3
Cem Cement used in the construction of Insulators shall not cause fracture by expansion or
loosening by contraction and must have high compressive and shearing strength and be
free from change in volume due to aging and temperature change. The cement shall not
give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings. Rapid hardening cement with special
sand shall be used for assembly of metal parts.
7.4 The Caps and Ball Pins of Disc Insulator shall be hot dip galvanised and mechanically
strong. The Ball Pins shall move freely in the Cap Socket, but shall be so designed that they
do not disengage while in service. The Caps shall be made of heat treated malleable cast
iron. These shall be free from cracks, shrinks, air holes, burrs and rough edges. All load
bearing surfaces shall be smooth and uniform so as to distribute loading stress evenly
7.5 The Ball Pins shall be of forged steel and so designed that they will not yield or distract
under loaded conditions. The ball and socket insulators shall be provided with „R‟ /‟W‟ clip
to prevent uncoupling of insulator units from each other. The „R‟ /‟W‟ clip shall be made of
phosphor bronze or stainless steel to safe guard against corrosion.
The electrical and mechanical characteristics of the Disc. Insulator shall conform to Specific
Technical Parameters of this Specification.
Note :
i) The disc insulators shall be of Ball & Socket type.
ii) The cap of disc insulators shall be of Malleable Cast Iron whereas the ball pins shall be of
Forged steel.
iii) All metal parts shall be of Hot dip galvanized as per IS: 2633.

8.0 WEATHER CONDITIONS :

The Insulators shall be suitable for use under the following climatic conditions :
i) Maxm ambient temperature of the air : 50 0C .

ii) Minm ambient temperature of the air : ( - ) 40C.

iii) Maxm. daily average ambient temperature : 40 0C.
iv) Maxm. yearly weighted average ambient temperature : 320C
v) Maxm. relative humidity : 100%.
vi) Average number of thunder storm : 85 days / annum.
vii) Maxm rain fall : 200 Cm / annum.
viii) Maxm. Wind pressure : 200 Kg / M2
ix) Earthquake acceleration (g): As per IS: 1983 (1984) for Class III & IV Zone.
x) No. of months of tropical monsoon condition per annum : 5 months (June -Oct.),

9.0 TEST AT MANUFACTURER`S WORKS AND TEST CERTIFICATES : -

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

Following acceptance tests shall be carried out at the works of the manufacturer and five (5)
copies of test results shall be submitted to the Chief Engineer (P&C) for approval. An advance notice of
thirty (30) days shall be given before the date when the test will be carried out:

i) Verification of dimensions.
ii) Temperature cycle test.
iii) Mechanical strength test.
iv) P.F. Puncture test.
v) Porosity test
vi) Galvanizing test
vii) Electromechanical failing load test. (for Disc. Insulator String only).

10.0 TENDER DRAWING / LEAFLETS AND TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES FOR PIN, POST & DISC
INSULATORS :-

The following Drawings, Leaflets and Type Test Certificates shall have to be submitted
alongwith each Tender.
i) Dimensional General Arrangement Drawing showing all fittings and accessories,
sectional Drawing etc. of individual Pin, Post & Disc insulators.
ii) Leaflets of individual Pin, Post & Disc Insulators.

11.0 TYPE TESTS & TEST REPORTS :

The Bidder should submit the complete Type Test Reports as stipulated in latest relevant
IS/IEC including Mechanical Performance Test & Thermal- Mechanical Performance test(for
Disc Insulators) with complete Identification, Date & [Link]., carried out within 5 (Five) years
from Due Date of Tender in any NABL accredited/Govt. recognized Test House or Laboratory
on the Tendered Items (Pin, Post & Disc Insulators) of identical drawing, design of same CD
as per Tender Specification with the Bid failing which their offer may not be technically
accepted.

The Certificates of the NABL accredited/Govt. recognized Test House or

Laboratory should, however, bear the Logo of NABL accreditation.

12.0 TYPE TESTS AFTER ISSUANCE OF ORDER :

Besides submission of Type Test Report, carried out within five years as per
Tender Specification, Type Test at the discretion of Ordering authority, shall have to be
arranged by the successful contractor or WBSEDCL on his own may conduct the same from any
lot delivered to site, as per the relevant ISS from any NABL accredited/Government recognized
Test House or Laboratory in presence of WBSEDCL‟S representative. In case of failure of the
materials after type test the WBSEDCL will have the right to reject the total supplied lot of the
said materials and the party have to replace the complete lot of materials at his own cost
including transportation of materials at site.

However the necessary cost of the Type Test charges, if arranged by the
party, only be reimbursed to the party on production of necessary supporting
documents.
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

13.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AT THE TIME OF PHYSICAL DELIVERY AT CONSIGNEE

STORES
The following documents to be submitted by the vendors to the consignee Stores at the
time of despatch to stores by the vendors:-
a) Copy of Purchase Order.
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction.
c) Inspection Test Certificate.
d) Guarantee Certificate.
e) Proforma Invoice.
f) Calculation Sheet for price Variation on the basis of IEEMA or CACMAI as applicable
with base date of order.
g) Seal list and packing list.
h) Challan, in triplicate.
i) Way bill, if applicable.
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

14.0 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

14.1 11 KV PIN INSULATORS :

[Link]. Description Rating

Environment Moderately Polluted heavily polluted
atmospheres atmospheres

1. Nominal system Voltage 11 KV 11 KV

2. Highest system Voltage : 12 KV 12 KV
3. Minimum Specific Creepage Distance : 230 mm 320 mm
4. Minimum failing load : 5 KN 5 KN
5. P.F Visible Discharge Voltage : 09 KVrms 09 KVrms
6. P.F Minimum flash over voltage
a) Dry : 75KVrms 75KVrms
b) Wet : 45KVrms 45KVrms
7. Impulse flashover voltage
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a)Positive : 95KVp 95KVp
b)Negative : 100KVp 100KVp
8. P.F. Withstand Voltage :
a)Dry : 60KVrms 60KVrms
b)Wet : 35KVrms 35KVrms
9. Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
micro second wave :
a) Positive : 75KVp 75KVp
b) Negative : 80 KVp 80 KVp
10. Power Frequency puncture withstand
voltage : 105KVrms 105KVrms
Remarks : Each Insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following :
(a) Name/Trade Mark of the Manufacturer
(b) Month & Year of the Manufacture
(c) Country of Manufacture
(d) Minimum failing load in newtons , Minimum Creepage Distance
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

14.2 33 KV PIN INSULATORS :

[Link]. Description Rating

Environment Moderately heavily polluted
Polluted atmospheres
atmospheres
1. Nominal system Voltage 33 KV 33 KV
2 Highest system Voltage : 36 KV 36 KV
3. Minimum Specific Creepage Distance : 580 mm 840 mm
4. Minimum failing load : 10 KN 10 KN
5. P.F Visible Discharge Voltage : 27 KVrms 27 KVrms
6. P.F Minimum flash over voltage
a) Dry : 130KVrms 130KVrms
b) Wet : 90KVrms 90KVrms
7. Impulse flashover voltage
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a)Positive : 210KVp 210KVp
b)Negative : 230KVp 230KVp
8. P.F. Withstand Voltage :
a)Dry : 95KVrms 95KVrms
b)Wet : 75KVrms 75KVrms
9. Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
micro second wave :
a) Positive : 170KVp 170KVp
b) Negative : 180 KVp 180 KVp
10. Power Frequency puncture withstand
voltage : 180KVrms 180KVrms

Remarks : Each Insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following :
(e) Name/Trade Mark of the Manufacturer
(f) Month & Year of the Manufacture
(g) Country of Manufacture
(h) Minimum failing load in newtons , Minimum Creepage Distance
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

14.3 11 KV POST INSULATORS :

Sl Description Rating
No. 11 KV
1 Nominal system voltage/Working : 11 KV
voltage
2 Highest system voltage : 12 KV
3 No. of units per Stack : 1
4 Minimum specific Creepage distance : 25 mm per KV
5 P.F Visible Discharge Voltage : 9 KV rms
6 P.F. Withstand Voltage
a) Dry : 60 KV rms
b) Wet : 35 KV rms
7 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
micro second wave :
a) Positive : 75 KVp
b) Negative : 80 KVp
8 P.F. Minimum flash over voltage
a) Dry : 70 KV rms
b) Wet : 45 KV rms
9 Impulse flashover voltage
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive : 95 KVp
b) Negative : 120 KVp
10 Power Frequency puncture withstand : 105 KV rms
voltage on single unit
11 Cantilever strength on single unit
a) Upright : 5 KN
b) Inverted : 3 KN
12 Tensile Strength : 15 KN
13 Torsional Strength : 200 Nm
14 Compression Strength : 30 KN
15 Height : 254 mm
16 Insulation Part Diameter : 152 mm
17 Pitch Circle Diameter
a) Top : 57 mm
b) Bottom : 57 mm
18 Conforming standard : As per IS

Remarks : Each Insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following :
(a) Name/Trade Mark of the Manufacturer
(b) Month & Year of the Manufacture
(c) Country of Manufacture
(d) Minimum failing load in newtons
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

14.4 11 KV DISC. INSULATOR :

Rating
Sl. 11 KV 11 KV
No. Description (BALL & SOCKET (BALL & SOCEKT
TYPE – 70 KN) TYPE –45 KN)
1 Nominal system voltage : 11 KV 11 KV
2 Highest system voltage : 12 KV 12 KV
3 Total Creepage distance : 320 mm 320 mm
4 Spacing : 145mm 145mm
5 Minimum Failing Load : 70KN 45 KN
6 P.F. visible discharge voltage : 9KV rms 9KV rms
7 P.F. Minimum flash over voltage
a) Dry : 75 KV rms 75 KV rms
b) Wet : 45 KV rms 45 KV rms
8 Impulse flashover voaltage
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive : 115 KVp 115 KVp
b) Negative : 120 KVp 120 KVp
9 P.F. withstand voltage
a) Dry : 60 KV rms 60 KV rms
b) Wet : 35 KV rms 35 KV rms
10 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 :
micro second wave :
a) Positive : 75 KVp 75 KVp
b) Negative : 80 KVp 80 KVp
11 P.F. puncture withstand voltage : 1.3 times the 1.3 times the
actual dry actual dry
flashover voltage flashover voltage
of the unit of the unit
12 Nominal Dia of Ball, Ball pin, Socket & : As per IS As per IS
Security Cap
13 Porcelain Diameter : 255 mm 255 mm

Remarks : Each Insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the following :
(a) Name/Trade Mark of the Manufacturer
(b) Month & Year of the Manufacture
(c) Country of Manufacture
(d) Minimum failing load in newtons
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 KV PIN NSULATOR with 230 mm minimum

Creepage Distance

(To be filled in & submitted by the Tenderer with the Techno-Commercial Bid)

[Link]. Description

1. Name of the Manufacturer :

2. Nominal system Voltage (KV rms) :
3 Highest system Voltage (KV rms) :
4. Height of the Insulator (mm)
5. Dia. of Largest shed (mm) :
6. Weight per unit (Kg)
7. Conductor Groove (mm)
8. Creepage Distance (mm)
9. Minimum failing load (KN) :
10. Power Frequency Visible Discharge :
Voltage (KV rms)
11. Minimum Withstand Test Voltage
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV :
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave
Impulse Withstand Voltage
a)Positive Wave (KV peak)
b) Negative Wave (KV peak)
12. Power Frequency Puncture Withstand :
Voltage (KV rms)
13. Minimum flash over voltage :
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave :
Impulse Flashover Voltage (KV
peak)
a)Positive Wave (KV peak) :
b) Negative Wave (KV peak) :
14. Colour of Glaze :
15. Marking on Insulator(To specify as per
:
I.S. & Tender Specification)

Signature …………………………………………

Name ………………………………………

Company Seal Designation …………………………………….

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 KV PIN NSULATOR with 320 mm minimum

Creepage Distance

(To be filled in & submitted by the Tenderer with the Techno-Commercial Bid)

[Link]. Description

1. Name of the Manufacturer :

2. Nominal system Voltage (KV rms) :
3 Highest system Voltage (KV rms) :
4. Height of the Insulator (mm)
5. Dia. of Largest shed (mm) :
6. Weight per unit (Kg)
7. Conductor Groove (mm)
8. Creepage Distance (mm)
9. Minimum failing load (KN) :
10. Power Frequency Visible Discharge :
Voltage (KV rms)
11. Minimum Withstand Test Voltage
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV :
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave
Impulse Withstand Voltage
a)Positive Wave (KV peak)
b) Negative Wave (KV peak)
12. Power Frequency Puncture Withstand :
Voltage (KV rms)
13. Minimum flash over voltage :
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave :
Impulse Flashover Voltage (KV
peak)
a)Positive Wave (KV peak) :
b) Negative Wave (KV peak) :
14. Colour of Glaze :
15. Marking on Insulator(To specify as per
:
I.S. & Tender Specification)

Signature …………………………………………

Name ………………………………………

Company Seal Designation …………………………………….

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33 KV PIN NSULATOR with 580 mm minimum

Creepage Distance

(To be filled in & submitted by the Tenderer with the Techno-Commercial Bid)

[Link]. Description

1. Name of the Manufacturer :

2. Nominal system Voltage (KV rms) :
3 Highest system Voltage (KV rms) :
4. Height of the Insulator (mm)
5. Dia. of Largest shed (mm) :
6. Weight per unit (Kg)
7. Conductor Groove (mm)
8. Creepage Distance (mm)
9. Minimum failing load (KN) :
10. Power Frequency Visible Discharge :
Voltage (KV rms)
11. Minimum Withstand Test Voltage
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV :
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave
Impulse Withstand Voltage
a)Positive Wave (KV peak)
b) Negative Wave (KV peak)
12. Power Frequency Puncture Withstand :
Voltage (KV rms)
13. Minimum flash over voltage :
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave :
Impulse Flashover Voltage (KV
peak)
a)Positive Wave (KV peak) :
b) Negative Wave (KV peak) :
14. Colour of Glaze :
15. Marking on Insulator(To specify as per
:
I.S. & Tender Specification)

Signature …………………………………………

Name ………………………………………

Company Seal Designation …………………………………….

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33 KV PIN NSULATOR with 840 mm minimum

Creepage Distance

(To be filled in & submitted by the Tenderer with the Techno-Commercial Bid)

[Link]. Description

1. Name of the Manufacturer :

2. Nominal system Voltage (KV rms) :
3 Highest system Voltage (KV rms) :
4. Height of the Insulator (mm)
5. Dia. of Largest shed (mm) :
6. Weight per unit (Kg)
7. Conductor Groove (mm)
8. Creepage Distance (mm)
9. Minimum failing load (KN) :
10. Power Frequency Visible Discharge :
Voltage (KV rms)
11. Minimum Withstand Test Voltage
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV :
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave
Impulse Withstand Voltage
a)Positive Wave (KV peak)
b) Negative Wave (KV peak)
12. Power Frequency Puncture Withstand :
Voltage (KV rms)
13. Minimum flash over voltage :
i) Power Frequency One Minute Dry (KV
rms)
ii) Power Frequency One Minute Wet :
(KV rms)
iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave :
Impulse Flashover Voltage (KV
peak)
a)Positive Wave (KV peak) :
b) Negative Wave (KV peak) :
14. Colour of Glaze :
15. Marking on Insulator(To specify as per
:
I.S. & Tender Specification)

Signature …………………………………………

Name ………………………………………

Company Seal Designation …………………………………….

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 KV POST INSULATOR

(To be filled in & submitted by the Tenderer with the Techno- Commercial Bid)
[Link]. Description Rating
11 KV
1. Name of the Manufacturer :
2. Particulars for Insulator :
a) Type of Insulator :
b) Nominal System Voltage (KVrms) :
c ) Highest System Voltage (KV rms) :
d) Height of the Insulator (in mm) :
e) Diameter of the Largest Shed (in mm) :
f) Creepage Distance (in mm) :
g) Weight of complete Unit (Kg) :
h) Weight of Insulator only (Kg) :
i) No. of Units per Stack :
3.0 Electrical Characteristics (for one Insulator) :
3.1 Visible Discharge Voltage (KV rms)
3.2 Withstand Voltage :
(i) Dry Power Frequency (KV rms) :
(ii) Wet Power Frequency (KV rms)
(iii) 1.2/50 micro-second wave Impulse Withstand :
Voltage
a)Positive Wave (KV peak) :
b) Negative Wave (KV peak)
3.3 Flash Over Voltage :
(i) Power Frequency Flash Over Voltage (KV rms) :
a) One Minute Dry :
b) One Minute Wet
(ii) 1.2/50 micro-second Wave Impulse Flashover :
Voltage
a)Positive Wave (KV peak) :
b)Negative Wave (KV peak) :
3.4 Power Frequency puncture withstand voltage One Minute (KV :
rms) on single unit
3.5 Mechanical Characteristics :
(i) Cantilever strength
a) Upright :
b) Inverted :
(ii) Torsional Strength :
(iii) Tensile Strength :
(iv) Compression Strength :
(v) Failing Load :
3.6 Pitch Circle Diameter
Top :
Bottom :
3.7 Standard to which the Insulator conforms :
3.8 Marking on Insulator (To specify as per I.S. & Tender :
Specification)
Note : Values for Insulators should be given in Metric Units.

Signature …………………………………………

Name ………………………………………

Company Seal Designation …………………………………….

 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DIST. COM. LTD.
Office of the Chief Engineer , Procurement & Contracts Department
Vidyut Bhavan( 4th Floor),Bidhannagar, Block-DJ : Sector-II
Kolkata-700 091 : Phone No.033-2359-8397 : Fax No.033-2359-1921

GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 KV DISC. INSULATORS (B&S TYPE)

(To be filled in & submitted by the Tenderer with the Techno- Commercial Bid)

Rating
[Link]. Description 11 KV 11 KV
(BALL & SOCKET (BALL & SOCEKT
TYPE – 70 KN) TYPE – 45 KN)

1 Nominal system voltage (KVrms) :

2 Highest system voltage (KVrms) :
3 Minimum Creepage distance :
4 a) Height of complete Unit (mm) :
b) Weight of complete Unit (Kg)
c) Weight of Insulator Portion (Kg)
5 Tension strength :
6 P.F. visible discharge voltage (KVrms) :
7 P.F. Minimum flash over voltage
a) One Min Dry (KVrms) :
b) One Min Wet (KVrms) :
8 Impulse flashover voltage :
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive (KVpeak) :
b) Negative (KVpeak) :
9 P.F. withstand voltage
a) One Min. Dry :
b) One Min Wet :
10 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 :
micro second wave : (KVpeak)
11 P.F. puncture withstand voltage :
(KVrms)
12 Nominal dia of Ball, Ball Pin, Socket & :
Security Clip
13. Min. Failing Load (KN) :
14. Size of the Disc –
a) Diameter (mm) :
b) Unit Spacing (mm) :
15. Other Dimension of the Ball & :
Socket(mm)
16. Colour of Glaze :
17. Marking on Insulator(To specify as :
per I.S. & Tender Specification)
18. Grade of Material used and Ref. to :
relevant Std. i.r.o. Cap, Ball Pin &
Security Clip

Signature …………………………………………

Name ………………………………………

Company Seal Designation …………………………………….

 Specification for Polymer Disc Insulator

Scope : This specification cover the design, manufacturing, testing at

manufacturers works, transport to site, insurance, unloading & storage of 11 KV
& 33 KV Polymer Disc Insulator (B & S type) suitable for use in 11 KV & 33
KV Overhead Lines situated in any part of West Bengal under the jurisdiction
of WBSEDCL.

General Requirements :

1 . The Composite insulators will be used on lines on which the

conductor will be ACSR of size up to 100 [Link]. The insulators
should withstand the conductor tension, the reversible wind load
as well as the high frequency vibrations due to wind.

2 . Insulator shall be suitable for 3 Phase, 50 Hz effectively

earthed 11KV Overhead Lines and 33 KV Impedance Grounded
distribution system in a moderately/heavily polluted atmosphere.

3 . Bidder must be an indigenous manufacturer and supplier

of composite insulators of rating 11KV or above o r must have
developed proven in house technology and manufacturing process for
composite insulators of above rating. The Bidder shall furnish necessary
evidence in support of the above along with the bid, which can be in
the form of certification from the utilities concerned, or any other
documents to the satisfaction of the owner.
4 . Insulators shall be suitable for both Suspension & Strain type of load and
shall be of tongue & clevis type.
5 . Insulator shall be suitable for the long Rod Type. The diameter
of Composite Insulator shall be as per technical specification.
6 . Insulators shall have sheds with good self-cleaning properties.
Insulator shed profile, spacing, projection etc. and selection in respect
of polluted conditions shall be generally in accordance with the
commendation of IEC- 60815/ IS: 13134.
7 . The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage
distance shall be allowed as follows in line with-IEC 61109:

± (0.04d + 1.5) mm when d ≤ 300 mm

± (0.025d+6) mm when d > 300 mm
 Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length or
creepage distance as the case may be. However, no negative tolerance shall be
applicable to creepage distance.
8 . The composite insulators including the end fitting connection shall be
standard design suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make
conforming to relevant IEC/IS standards.
9. All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or
projections. No part shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The
insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and manufactured that it shall
avoid local corona formation and not generate any radio interference beyond
specified limit under the operating conditions.
10 . Inter- changeability: The composite insulator together with the tongue
& clevis fittings shall be of standard design suitable for use with the hardware
of any other indigenous make confirming to relevant standards referred
herewith.

Service condition : The insulators to be supplied against this specification

shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following
topical condition :
a ) Max. ambient temperature : 50 º C
b ) Min. ambient temperature : -5 º C
c ) Relative humidity : 10 % to 100 %
d ) Avarage number of rainy days : 100 / annum.
e ) Max. Anual Rainfall : 1500 mm
f ) Max. Wind Pressure : 150 Kg/ sq. Meter
g ) Max. Wind Velocity : 50 Km/ hour
h ) Max. Altitude above MSL : 1000 Meter.
i ) Seismic level : 0.3 g ( Horizontal acceleration )
j ) Avarage Thunder storm : 45 Days per annum.
k ) Climatic condition : Moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conductive to rust and
fungus groth. Polution level is
high. Some area with seashores
having saline atmosphere.
System Parameters :

a) Nominal system voltage : 11 KV & 33 KV.

b) Highest system voltage : 12 KV & 36 KV.
c) Power frequency : 50 Hz.
d) Number of Phases : Three.
e) System earthing : 11 KV Solidly earthed,
33 KV Impedence earth.
Standard : The following Indian / International Standards with latest
revisions and amendments shall be referred while accessing conformity of
insulators with this specification.

Sl. Indian Title International

No. Standard Standard
1. Definition, test methods and acceptance IEC : 61109
criteria for composite insulators for a.c.
overhead lines above 1000V
2. IS : 731 Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines IEC : 60383
with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V
3. IS : 2071 Methods of High Voltage Testing IEC : 60060-1

4. IS : 2486 Specification for insulator fittings for IEC : 60120

overhead power lines with a nominal voltage IEC : 60372
greater than 1000V General Requirements
and Tests Dimensional Requirements
Locking Devices
5. Thermal Mechanical Performance test and IEC : 60575
mechanical performance test on string
insulator units
6. IS : 13134 Guide for the selection of insulators in IEC : 60815
respect of polluted conditions
7. Characteristics of string insulator units of the IEC : 60433
long rod type
8. Hydrophobicity classification guide STRI guide
1.92/1
9. Radio interference characteristics of overhead CISPR:18-2
power lines and high-voltage equipment part
10. IS : 8263 Methods of RI Test of HV Insulators IEC : 260437

11. Standard for insulators – Composite- ANSI C29 13-

Distribution Dead-end type 2000
12. IS : 4759 Hot dip zinc coatings on structural steel & ISO : 1459
other allied products ISO : 1461
13. IS : 2629 Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip ISO-1461 (E)
Galvanisation for iron and steel
14. IS : 6745 Determination of weight of zinc coating on ISO : 1460
zinc coated iron and steel articles
15. IS : 3203 Methods of testing of local thickness of ISO : 2178
electroplated coatings
16. IS : 2633 Testing of Uniformity of coating of zinc
coated articles
17 Standard specification for glass fiber strands ASTMD 578-05
 18 Standard test method for compositional ASTM E 1131-03
analysis by Thermo-gravimetric
19 IS : 4699 Specification for refined secondary zinc

Technical Requirement :
1 . Composite Insulators shall be designed to meet the light quality,
safety and reliability and are capable of withstanding a wide range of
environmental conditions.
(a) Core : The internal insulating part
(b) Housing : The external insulating part.
(c) Metal and fittings : For attaching to hardware to support
conductor.
Core : It shall be a glass-fibber reinforced epoxy resin rod of high
strength (FRP rod). Glass fibbers and resin shall be optimized in the FRP rod.
Glass fibbers shall be Boron free electrically corrosion resistant (ECR) glass
fibber or Boron free E-Glass and shall exhibit both high electrical
integrity and high resistance to acid corrosion. The matrix of the FRP rod
shall be Hydrolysis resistant. The FRP shall be manufactured through
Pultrusion process. The FRP rod shall be void free.
Housing (Sheath) :
The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone
elastometric compound or silicone alloy compound of a thickness of 3 mm
minimum. It shall be one-piece housing using injection Moulding Principle
to cover the core. The elastomer housing shall be designed to provide the
necessary creepage distance and protection against environmental influences,
external pollution and humidity. Housing shall conform to the requirement of
IEC 61109/92-93 with latest amendments.
It shall be extruded or directly moulded on core and shall
have chemical bonding with the FRP rod. The strength of the bond shall be
greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. Sheath material in the bulk
as well as in the sealing / bonding area shall be free from voids.
Manufacturer should furnish a description of its quality assurance
programme including fabrication; testing and inspection for any material (i.e
rubber) Components (i.e. rod) or hardware (i.e. end filings). The manufacturer
has had fabricated by others should also be included. Manufacturing methods
and material composition documentation will be a part of Technical Bid to be
submitted along with offer.

WEATHERSHEDS :
The composite polymer Weathersheds made of silicone
elastometric compound or silicon alloy shall be firmly bonded to the
sheath, vulcanized to the sheath or moulded as part of the sheath and
shall be free from imperfections. The Weathersheds should have silicon
content of minimum 30% by weight. The strength of the Weathersheds to
sheath interface shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The
interface, if any, between sheds and sheath (housing) shall be free from
voids.

METAL END FITTINGS:

End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall
be made of Malleable Cast Iron or Spherical Graphite Cast Iron. Hardware of
respective specified mechanical load and shall be hot dip galvanized with Zinc
coated with minimum 99.95% purity of electrolytic high grade Zinc in
accordance with IS 2629. The material used in fittings shall be corrosion
resistant.
Metal end fittings shall be uniform and without sharp edges or
corners and shall be free of cracks, flakes, silvers, slag, blow-holes shrinkages
defects and localized porosity.
They shall be connected to the rod by means of a controlled
compression technique. As the main duty of the end fittings is the transfer of
mechanical loads to the core the fittings should be property attached to the core
by a coaxial or hexagonal compression process and should not damage the
individual fibbers or crack the core.
The gap between fittings and sheath shall be sealed by
flexible silicone elastometric compound or silicone alloy compound sealant,
system of attached of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior sealing
performance between housing, i.e. seamless sheath and metal connection. The
sealing must be moisture proof.
The dimensions of end fittings of insulators shall be in
accordance with the standard dimensions stated in IEC: 60120/IS:2486
Part-II/1989.
The finished surface shall be smooth and shall have a good
performance. The surface shall not crack or get chipped due to ageing effect
under normal and abnormal service conditions or while handling during transit
or erection.
The design of the fittings and the insulators shall be such that
there is no local corona formation or discharges likely to cause the interference
to either should or vision transmission.

Workmanship :

a ) All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the

best engineering practices adopted in the high voltage filed. Bidders shall
offer only such insulators as are guaranteed by them to be satisfactory and
suitable for continued good service in power transmission lines.
 b ) The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages
shall be such as to give maximum working load, highest mobility, best
resistance to corrosion, good finish and elimination of sharp edges and corners.
c ) The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion
and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
d ) The core shall be sound and free of cracks and voids that may adversely
affect the insulators.
e ) Weather sheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound and
smooth and shall be free from defects and excessive flashing at parting lines.
f ) End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough
edges. End fittings should be effectively sealed to prevent moisture ingress.
Effectiveness of sealing system must be supported by test documents. All
surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth without projecting points
or irregularities, which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall be
smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly.
g ) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average
coating of zinc equivalent to 610 gm/sq.m. or 87µm thickness and shall be in
accordance with the requirement of IS:4579. The zinc used for galvanizing shall
be of purity 99.5% as per IS : 4699. The zinc coating shall be uniform,
adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free from imperfections
such as flux, ash rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized
metal parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at least four successive dips each
lasting for one (1) minute duration under the standard preece test. The
galvanizing shall be carried out only after any machining.

Drawing :

The bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing of
each insulator unit including a cross sectional view of the long rod insulator
unit. The drawing shall include but not be limited to the following information:
(a) Long rod diameter with manufacturing tolerances
(b) Minimum Creepage distance with positive tolerance
(c) Protected creepage distance
(d) Eccentricity of the long rod unit
(i) Axial run out
(ii) Radial run out
(e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics
(f) Weight of composite long rod units
(g) Identification mark
(h) Manufacturer’s catalogue number

Marking: Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the
following:
 a ) Name & Trade mark of the manufacturer
b ) Month & Year of manufacturing
c ) Voltage & Type
d ) Minimum Failling Load ( in KN)
e ) “WBSEDCL” marking

Type Test : The following Type Test shall have to be conducted as per
reference IEC mentioned above on insulator unit, components, materials or
complete strings :

a ) Sudden Load Release Test

b ) Thermal Mechanical Pre-stress Test
c ) Dry Positive & Negative Lightning Impulse voltage withstand test
d ) Dry Positive & Negative Lightning Impulse Flashover voltage test
e ) Dry & Wet Power Frequency Voltage withstand test
f ) Dry & Wet Power Frequency Voltage Flashover test
g ) Mechanical Failing Load test.
h ) Radio Interference test
i ) Recovery of Hydrophobicity test.
j ) Dye Penetration Test.
k ) Water Diffusion Test
l ) Chemical composition test for Silicon content
m ) Brittle facture resistance test.
n ) Damage Limit proof & Mechanical Withstand Test.

Routine Test :
a ) Identification of marking
b ) Visual inspection
c ) Mechanical routine test

Acceptance Test : The following test will be carried out at manufacturers

works during inspection of the offered insulators before delivery :
a ) Visual examination
b ) Verification of dimension
c ) Galvanizing test
d ) Mechanical performance test
e ) Mechanical Failing Load test
Testing Facilities:

The tenderer must clearly indicate what testing facilities are available
in the works of the manufacturer and whether facilities are adequate to carry out
all Routine & Acceptance Test.
These facilities should be available to WBSEDCL’s Engineers if
deputed or carry out or witness the tests in the manufacturer works. If any test
cannot be carried out at the manufacturer’s work, the reasons should be clearly
stated in the tender. The insulators shall be tested in accordance with the
procedure detailed in IEC 61109/92-93 with latest amendments.

Inspection:
All Acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works in
presence of the WBSEDCL’s and manufacturers representatives. In addition to
above, all routine tests are also to be carried on the insulator as per relevant IS /
IEC. The entire cost of acceptance and routine test that to be carried out as per
relevant IS / IEC shall be treated as included in the quoted price of Insulator. The
manufacturer shall give at least 21(twenty one) days advance notice intimating the
actual date of inspection and details of all tests that are to be carried out from the
date when the tests will be carried out.
Routine tests on all insulators shall be carried out as per IEC / IS and test reports
shall be submitted along with respective inspection offer to CE, P&CD,
WBSEDCL

Sampling & Rejection during inspection:

The sampling and rejection procedure for Acceptance Test
shall be as per IEC 61109.

Packing:
a ) All insulators shall be packed in strong corrugated box of min. 7
ply duly palette or wooden crates. The gross weight of the crates along with the
material shall not normally exceed 100 Kg to avoid handling problem. The
crates shall be suitable for outdoor storage under wet climate during rainy
season.
b ) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough
handling during transit, storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.
c ) Suitable cushioning, protective padding or dunn age or spacers
shall be provided to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.
d ) Each wooden case / crate / corrugated box shall have all the
markings stenciled on it in indelible ink.
e) The bidder shall provide instructions regarding handling and
storage precautions to be taken at site.
Gurantee :

In the event of any defect in the equipment / materials arising out

of faulty design, materials, workmanship within a period of 12 (twelve)
months of commissioning or 18 (eighteen) months from the date of last
despatch of any integral part of the equipment / materials whichever is
earlier the supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the
satisfaction of the purchaser.
If the supplier fail to do so within a reasonable time, WBSEDCL
reserves the right to effect repair or replacement by any other agency and
recover charges for repair or replacement from the supplier.

Quality Assurance Plan :

1 . The successful bidder shall submit following information along with

the bid.
2. Test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.
3. Statement giving list of important raw material, their grades along with
names of sub-suppliers for raw materials, list of standards according to which
the raw materials are tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw materials
in presence of bidder’s representative.
4. List of manufacturing facilities available.
5. Level of automation achieved and lists of areas where manual processing
exists.
6. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are
normally carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
7. List of testing equipments available with the bidder for final testing
equipment along with valid calibration reports.
8. The manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing Quality Assurance Plan
(QAP) for approval & the same shall be followed during manufacture and
testing.
9. The successful bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought
out raw materials/accessories and central excise passes for raw material at the
time of inspection.
10. The Owner’s representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to
the works and all places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component
parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for
unrestricted inspection of the Supplier’s and sub-Supplier’s works, raw
materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as
detailed herein.
 11. The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only
under packed condition. The owner shall select samples at random from the
packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. The lot offered for inspection shall
be homogeneous and shall contain insulators manufactured in 3-4 consecutive
weeks.
12. The Supplier shall keep the Owner informed in advance of the time of
starting and the progress of manufacture of material i/n their various stages so
that arrangements could be made for inspection.
13. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it
has been satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the owner in writing waives
off the inspection. In the later case also the material shall be dispatched only
after satisfactory testing specified herein has been completed.
14. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the
Supplier of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material are
later found to be defective.

ANNEXURE: A

Test on Insulator units :

1. RIV Test (Dry) : The insulator string along with complete hardware
fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level below 100 micro volts at
one MHz when subjected to 50 Hz voltage of 10 kV & 30 kV for 11 kV &
33 kV class insulators respectively under dry condition. The test procedure
shall be in accordance with IS: 8263/IEC: 437/CISPR 18-2.

2. Brittle Fracture Resistance Test : Brittle fracture test shall be carried

out on naked rod along with end fittings by applying “1n HNO3 acid” (63 g
conc. HNO3 added to 937 g water) to the rod. The rod should be held at
80% of SML for the duration of the test. The rod should not fail within the
96 Hour test duration. Test arrangement should ensure continuous wetting of
the rod with Nitric acid.

3. Recovery of Hydrophobicity & Corona Test :

i) The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl
alchohol. Allow the surface to dry and spray with water. Record the
Hydrophobicity classification in line with STRI guide for Hydrophobicity
classification (Extract enclosed at Annexure-D) Dry the sample surface.
 (ii) The sample shall subjected to mechanical stress by bending the
Sample over a ground electrode. Corona is continuously generated by applying
12 kV to a needle like electrode placed 1 mm above the sample surface.
Tentative arrangement shall be as shown in Annexure-E. The test shall be
done for 100 hrs.

(iii) Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with Water
and record the HC classification. Dry the surface and repeat The corona
treatment as at Clause-2 above. Note HC classification. Repeat the cycle for
1000 Hrs. or until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.

(iv) Allow the sample to recover and repeat Hydrophobicity

Measurement at several time intervals. Silicone rubber should recover to HC 1
– HC 2 within 24 to 48 hours, depending on the Material and the intensity of
the corona treatment.

4. Chemical composition test for Silicon content :

The content of silicon in the composite polymer shall be evaluated by
EDX (Energy Dispersion X-ray) Analysis or Thermo-gravimetric analysis.
The test may be carried out at CPRI or any other NABL accredited laboratory.

Specific Technical particulars for 11 KV & 33 KV Disc Insulator

11 KV Disc 33 KV Disc
Type of insulator Polymeric composite Polymeric
Disc Insulator composite
Disc Insulator
Reference Standard IEC 61109 IEC 61109
Material of FRP Rod Boron free ECR Boron free ECR
Material of sheds Silicon Rubber Silicon Rubber
Type of metal end fittings Ball & Socket Ball & Socket
Nominal Ball Pin Diameter 16 mm 16 mm
Material of end fittings SGCI / MCI SGCI / MCI
Material of sealing compound RTV Silicon RTV Silicon
Colour of sheds Grey Grey
Rated voltage 11 KV 33 KV
Highest voltage 12 KV 36 KV
Dry Power Frequency 60 KV 95 KV
Withstand voltage
Wet Power Frequency 35 KV 75 KV
Withstand voltage
Dry Power Frequency 75 KV 130 KV
Flashover Voltage
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) 9 KV 27 KV
Wet Power Frequency 45 KV 90 KV
Flashover Voltage
Dry Lightning Impulse Positive : 75 KV Positive : 170 KV
withstand voltage Negative :80 KV Negative : 180 KV
Dry Lightning Impulse Positive : 95 KV Positive : 210 KV
Flashover voltage Negative : 100 KV Negative : 230 KV
RIV at 1 MHz when energised
at 10 KV / 30 KV (rms) under < 50 microvolt < 70 microvolt
dry condition
Creepage distance ( min ) 320 mm 900 mm
Min Failing load 45 KN 70 KN
Dia of FRP Rod 16 mm 16 mm
Length of FRP Rod ( min ) 200 mm 425 mm
Dia of weather sheds 100 mm 110 mm
Thickness of housing 3 mm 3 mm
Dry arc distance 170 mm 380 mm
Method of fixing sheds to Injection moulding Injection moulding
housing
No of weather sheds (min) Three Eight
Type of sheds Aerodynamic Aerodynamic
Type of packing Wooden/Corrugated Wooden/Corrugated
box box
No of insulator in each pack Thirty Twenty
Guarantee 12 months from 12 months from
commissioning or 18 commissioning or
months from the date 18 months from the
of last despatch. date of last
despatch.
 Annexure B

G T P to be filled up by the Bidder

Name of the manufacturer :

Address of works :

11 KV Disc 33 KV Disc
Type of insulator
Reference Standard
Material of FRP Rod
Material of sheds
Type of metal end fittings
Material of end fittings
Nominal Ball Pin Diameter
Material of sealing compound
Colour of sheds
Rated voltage
Highest voltage
Dry Power Frequency Withstand
voltage
Wet Power Frequency Withstand
voltage
Dry PF Flashover Voltage
Wet PF Flashover Voltage
Dry Lightning Impulse withstand
voltage
Positive
Negative
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover
voltage
Positive
Negative
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at
10 KV / 30 KV (rms) under dry
condition
Creepage distance ( min )
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF)
Minimum Failing load
Dia of FRP Rod
Length of FRP Rod
Dia of weather sheds
Thickness of housing
Dry arc distance
Method of fixing sheds to housing
No of weather sheds
Type of sheds
Dia of bottom end fitting
Centre to centre distance between
Tongue & Clevis
Weight of composite insulator
Type of packing
No of insulator in each pack
Weight of Insulator
Gross weight of package
Marking
Gurantee
 Specification for Polymer Pin Insulator

Scope : This specification cover the design, manufacturing, testing at

manufacturers works, transport to site, insurance, unloading & storage of 11 KV
& 33 KV Polymer Pin Insulator suitable for use in 11 KV & 33 KV Overhead
Lines situated in any part of West Bengal under the jurisdiction of WBSEDCL.

General Requirements :

1 . The Composite insulators will be used on lines on which the

conductor will be ACSR of size up to 100 [Link]. The insulators
should withstand the conductor tension, the reversible wind load
as well as the high frequency vibrations due to wind.

2 . Insulator shall be suitable for 3 Phase, 50 Hz effectively

earthed 11KV Overhead Lines and 33 KV Impedance Grounded
distribution system in a moderately/heavily polluted atmosphere.

3 . Bidder must be an indigenous manufacturer and supplier

of composite insulators of rating 11KV or above o r must have
developed proven in house technology and manufacturing process for
composite insulators of above rating. The Bidder shall furnish necessary
evidence in support of the above along with the bid, which can be in
the form of certification from the utilities concerned, or any other
documents to the satisfaction of the owner.
4 . Insulator shall be suitable for the long Rod Type.
5 . Insulators shall have sheds with good self-cleaning properties.
Insulator shed profile, spacing, projection etc. and selection in respect
of polluted conditions shall be generally in accordance with the
commendation of IEC- 60815/ IS: 13134.
6 . The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage
distance shall be allowed as follows in line with-IEC 61109:

± (0.04d + 1.5) mm when d ≤ 300 mm

± (0.025d+6) mm when d > 300 mm

Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length or

creepage distance as the case may be. However, no negative tolerance shall be
applicable to creepage distance.
 7 . The composite insulators including the end fitting connection shall be
standard design suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make
conforming to relevant IEC/IS standards.
8 . All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or
projections. No part shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The
insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and manufactured that it shall
avoid local corona formation and not generate any radio interference beyond
specified limit under the operating conditions.

Service condition : The insulators to be supplied against this specification

shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following
topical condition :
a ) Max. ambient temperature : 50 º C
b ) Min. ambient temperature : -5 º C
c ) Relative humidity : 10 % to 100 %
d ) Avarage number of rainy days : 100 / annum.
e ) Max. Anual Rainfall : 1500 mm
f ) Max. Wind Pressure : 150 Kg/ sq. Meter
g ) Max. Wind Velocity : 50 Km/ hour
h ) Max. Altitude above MSL : 1000 Meter.
i ) Seismic level : 0.3 g ( Horizontal acceleration )
j ) Avarage Thunder storm : 45 Days per annum.
k ) Climatic condition : Moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conductive to rust and
fungus groth. Polution level is
high. Some area with seashores
having saline atmosphere.
System Parameters :

a) Nominal system voltage : 11 KV & 33 KV.

b) Highest system voltage : 12 KV & 36 KV.
c) Power frequency : 50 Hz.
d) Number of Phases : Three.
e) System earthing : 11 KV Solidly earthed,
33 KV Impedence earth.

Standard : The following Indian / International Standards with latest

revisions and amendments shall be referred while accessing conformity of
insulators with this specification.
 Sl. Indian Title International
No. Standard Standard
1. Definition, test methods and acceptance IEC : 61109
criteria for composite insulators for a.c.
overhead lines above 1000V
2. IS : 731 Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines IEC : 60383
with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V
3. IS : 2071 Methods of High Voltage Testing IEC : 60060-1

4. IS : 2486 Specification for insulator fittings for IEC : 60120

overhead power lines with a nominal voltage IEC : 60372
greater than 1000V General Requirements
and Tests Dimensional Requirements
Locking Devices
5. Thermal Mechanical Performance test and IEC : 60575
mechanical performance test on string
insulator units
6. IS : 13134 Guide for the selection of insulators in IEC : 60815
respect of polluted conditions
7. Characteristics of string insulator units of the IEC : 60433
long rod type
8. Hydrophobicity classification guide STRI guide
1.92/1
9. Radio interference characteristics of overhead CISPR:18-2
power lines and high-voltage equipment part
10. IS : 8263 Methods of RI Test of HV Insulators IEC : 260437

11. Standard for insulators – Composite- ANSI C29 13-

Distribution Dead-end type 2000
12. IS : 4759 Hot dip zinc coatings on structural steel & ISO : 1459
other allied products ISO : 1461
13. IS : 2629 Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip ISO-1461 (E)
Galvanization for iron and steel
14. IS : 6745 Determination of weight of zinc coating on ISO : 1460
zinc coated iron and steel articles
15. IS : 3203 Methods of testing of local thickness of ISO : 2178
electroplated coatings
16. IS : 2633 Testing of Uniformity of coating of zinc
coated articles
17 Standard specification for glass fiber strands ASTMD 578-05
18 Standard test method for compositional ASTM E 1131-03
analysis by Thermo-gravimetric
19 IS : 4699 Specification for refined secondary zinc
Technical Requirement :
1 . Composite Insulators shall be designed to meet the light quality,
safety and reliability and are capable of withstanding a wide range of
environmental conditions.
(a) Core : The internal insulating part
(b) Housing : The external insulating part.
(c) Metal end fittings : For attaching to hardware to support
conductor.
Core: It shall be a glass-fibber reinforced epoxy resin rod of high
strength (FRP rod). Glass fibbers and resin shall be optimized in the FRP rod.
Glass fibbers shall be Boron free electrically corrosion resistant (ECR) glass
fibber or Boron free E-Glass and shall exhibit both high electrical
integrity and high resistance to acid corrosion. The matrix of the FRP rod
shall be Hydrolysis resistant. The FRP shall be manufactured through
Pultrusion process. The FRP rod shall be void free.
Housing (Sheath) :
The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone
elastometric compound or silicone alloy compound of a thickness of 3 mm
minimum. It shall be one-piece housing using injection Moulding Principle
to cover the core. The elastomer housing shall be designed to provide the
necessary creepage distance and protection against environmental influences,
external pollution and humidity. Housing shall conform to the requirement of
IEC 61109/92-93 with latest amendments.
It shall be extruded or directly moulded on core and shall
have chemical bonding with the FRP rod. The strength of the bond shall be
greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. Sheath material in the bulk
as well as in the sealing / bonding area shall be free from voids.
Manufacturer should furnish a description of its quality assurance
programme including fabrication; testing and inspection for any material (i.e
rubber) Components (i.e rod) or hardware (i.e. end filings). The manufacturer
has had fabricated by others should also be included. Manufacturing methods
and material composition documentation will be a part of Technical Bid to be
submitted along with offer.

WEATHERSHEDS :
The composite polymer Weathersheds made of silicone
elastometric compound or silicon alloy shall be firmly bonded to the
sheath, vulcanized to the sheath or moulded as part of the sheath and
shall be free from imperfections. The weathersheds should have silicon
content of minimum 30% by weight. The strength of the weathershed to
sheath interface shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The
interface, if any, between sheds and sheath (housing) shall be free from
voids.

METAL END FITTINGS :

End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. Hardware of
respective specified mechanical load and shall be hot dip galvanized in Zinc
coated with minimum 99.95 % purity of electrolytic high grade Zinc in
accordance with IS 2629. The material used in fittings shall be corrosion
resistant.
Metal end fittings shall be uniform and without sharp edges or
corners and shall be free of cracks, flakes, silvers, slag, blow-holes shrinkages
defects and localized porosity.
They shall be connected to the rod by means of a controlled
compression technique. As the main duty of the end fittings is the transfer of
mechanical loads to the core the fittings should be property attached to the core
by a coaxial or hexagonal compression process and should not damage the
individual fibers or crack the core.
The gap between fittings and sheath shall be sealed by
flexible silicone elastometric compound or silicone alloy compound sealant,
system of attached of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior sealing
performance between housing, i.e. seamless sheath and metal connection. The
sealing must be moisture proof.
The dimensions of end fittings of insulators shall be in
accordance with the standard dimensions stated in IEC: 60120/IS:2486
Part-II/1989.
Nominal dimensions of the pin insulator shall be in accordance
with the Specific Technical Particulars . No joints in pin will be allowed.
Outer portion of Pin should be Zinc coated with minimum 99.95% purity of
electrolytic high grade Zinc.
The finished surface shall be smooth and shall have a good
performance. The surface shall not crack or get chipped due to ageing effect
under normal and abnormal service conditions or while handling during transit
or erection.
The design of the fittings and the insulators shall be such that
there is no local corona formation or discharges likely to cause the interference
to either should or vision transmission.
Bottom end metal fitting (Shank) of Pin Insulator should be as
per IS: 2486. Length of thread on shank should be minimum110 mm f o r
1 1 K V P i n and 130 mm for 33 KV Pin insulator. Shank diameter is 20 mm
for 11 KV Pin Insulator & 24 mm for 33 KV Pin Insulator. Minimum Collar
diameter should be 40 mm and its minimum thickness should be of 5 mm.
Two number nuts as per IS 1363 (P-III) and 4 mm thick Spring Washer shall
be as per IS 3063 with latest amendments if any, Nuts and spring washer shall
be hot dip galvanized.

Workmanship :

a ) All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the

best engineering practices adopted in the high voltage filed. Bidders shall
offer only such insulators as are guaranteed by them to be satisfactory and
suitable for continued good service in power transmission lines.
b ) The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages
shall be such as to give maximum working load, highest mobility, best
resistance to corrosion, good finish and elimination of sharp edges and corners.
c ) The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion
and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
d ) The core shall be sound and free of cracks and voids that may adversely
affect the insulators.
e ) Weather sheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound and
smooth and shall be free from defects and excessive flashing at parting lines.
f ) End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough
edges. End fittings should be effectively sealed to prevent moisture ingress.
Effectiveness of sealing system must be supported by test documents. All
surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth without projecting points
or irregularities, which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall be
smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly.
g ) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average
coating of zinc equivalent to 610 gm/sq.m. or 87µm thickness and shall be in
accordance with the requirement of IS:4579. The zinc used for galvanizing shall
be of purity 99.5% as per IS : 4699. The zinc coating shall be uniform,
adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free from imperfections
such as flux, ash rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized
metal parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at least four successive dips each
lasting for one (1) minute duration under the standard preece test. The
galvanizing shall be carried out only after any machining.

Drawing :

The bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing of
each insulator unit including a cross sectional view of the long rod insulator
unit. The drawing shall include but not be limited to the following information :
(a) Long rod diameter with manufacturing tolerances
(b) Minimum Creepage distance with positive tolerance
(c) Protected creepage distance
 (d) Eccentricity of the long rod unit
(i) Axial run out
(ii) Radial run out
(e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics
(f) Weight of composite long rod units
(g) Identification mark
(h) Manufacturer’s catalogue number

Marking : Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the
following :
a ) Name & Trade mark of the manufacturer
b ) Month & Year of manufacturing
c ) Voltage & Type
d ) Minimum Failling Load ( in KN)
e ) “WBSEDCL” marking

Type Test : The following Type Test shall have to be conducted on insulator
unit, components, materials or complete strings ;
a ) Sudden Load Release Test
b ) Thermal Mechanical Pre-stress Test
c ) Dry Positive & Negative Lightning Impulse voltage withstand test
d ) Dry Positive & Negative Lightning Impulse Flashover voltage test
e ) Dry & Wet Power Frequency Voltage withstand test
f ) Dry & Wet Power Frequency Voltage Flashover test
g ) Mechanical Failing Load test.
h ) Radio Interference test
i ) Recovery of Hydrophobicity test.
j ) Dye Penetration Test.
k ) Water Diffusion Test
l ) Chemical composition test for Silicon content
m ) Brittle facture resistance test.
n ) Damage Limit proof & Mechanical Withstand Test.

Routine Test :

a ) Identification of marking
b ) Visual inspection
c ) Mechanical routine test

Acceptance Test : The following test will be carried out at manufacturers

works during inspection of the offered insulators before delivery :
a ) Visual examination
b ) Verification of dimension
 c ) Galvanizing test
d ) Mechanical performance test
e ) Mechanical Failing Load test.

Testing Facilities :

The tenderer must clearly indicate what testing facilities are available in the
works of the manufacturer and whether facilities are adequate to carry out all
Routine & Acceptance Tests. These facilities should be available to
WBSEDCL’s Engineers if deputed or carry out or witness the tests in the
manufacturer works. If any test cannot be carried out at the manufacturer’s
work, the reasons should be clearly stated in the tender. The insulators shall be
tested in accordance with the procedure detailed in IEC 61109/92-93 with latest
amendments.

Inspection :
All Acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works in
presence of the WBSEDCL’s and manufacturers representatives. In addition to
above, all routine tests are also to be carried on the insulator as per relevant IS /
IEC. The entire cost of acceptance and routine test that to be carried out as per
relevant IS / IEC shall be treated as included in the quoted price of Insulator. The
manufacturer shall give at least 21(twenty one) days advance notice intimating the
actual date of inspection and details of all tests that are to be carried out from the
date when the tests will be carried out.
Routine tests on all insulators shall be carried out as per IEC / IS and test reports
shall be submitted along with respective inspection offer to CE, P&CD,
WBSEDCL

Sampling & Rejection during inspection :

The sampling and rejection procedure for Acceptance Test
shall be as per IEC 61109.

Packing :
a ) All insulators shall be packed in strong corrugated box of min. 7
ply duly palette or wooden crates. The gross weight of the crates along with the
material shall not normally exceed 100 Kg to avoid handling problem. The
crates shall be suitable for outdoor storage under wet climate during rainy
season.
b ) The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough
handling during transit, storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.
c ) Suitable cushioning, protective padding or dunn age or spacers
shall be provided to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.
 d ) Each wooden case / crate / corrugated box shall have all the
markings stenciled on it in indelible ink.
e) The bidder shall provide instructions regarding handling and
storage precautions to be taken at site.

Guarantee :

In the event of any defect in the equipment / materials arising out

of faulty design, materials, workmanship within a period of 12 (twelve)
months of commissioning or 18 (eighteen) months from the date of last
despatch of any integral part of the equipment / materials whichever is
earlier the supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the
satisfaction of the purchaser.
If the supplier fail to do so within a reasonable time, WBSEDCL reserves
the right to effect repair or replacement by any other agency and recover
charges for repair or replacement from the supplier.

Quality Assurance Plan :

1 . The successful bidder shall submit following information along with

the bid.
2. Test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.
3. Statement giving list of important raw material, their grades along with
names of sub-suppliers for raw materials, list of standards according to which
the raw materials are tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw materials
in presence of bidder’s representative.
4. List of manufacturing facilities available.
5. Level of automation achieved and lists of areas where manual processing
exists.
6. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are
normally carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
7. List of testing equipments available with the bidder for final testing
equipment along with valid calibration reports.
8. The manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing Quality Assurance Plan
(QAP) for approval & the same shall be followed during manufacture and
testing.
9. The successful bidder shall submit the routine test certificates of bought
out raw materials/accessories and central excise passes for raw material at the
time of inspection.
10. The Owner’s representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to
the works and all places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component
parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities for
unrestricted inspection of the Supplier’s and sub-Supplier’s works, raw
materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as
detailed herein.
11. The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only
under packed condition. The owner shall select samples at random from the
packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. The lot offered for inspection shall
be homogeneous and shall contain insulators manufactured in 3-4 consecutive
weeks.
12. The Supplier shall keep the Owner informed in advance of the time of
starting and the progress of manufacture of material i/n their various stages so
that arrangements could be made for inspection.
13. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it
has been satisfactorily inspected and tested unless the owner in writing waives
off the inspection. In the later case also the material shall be dispatched only
after satisfactory testing specified herein has been completed.
14. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the
Supplier of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material are
later found to be defective.

ANNEXURE: A

Test on Insulator units

1. RIV Test (Dry) : The insulator string along with complete hardware
fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level below 100 micro volts at
one MHz when subjected to 50 Hz voltage of 10 kV & 30 kV for 11 kV &
33 kV class insulators respectively under dry condition. The test procedure
shall be in accordance with IS: 8263/IEC: 437/CISPR 18-2.

2. Brittle Fracture Resistance Test : Brittle fracture test shall be carried

out on naked rod along with end fittings by applying “1n HNO3 acid” (63 g
conc. HNO3 added to 937 g water) to the rod. The rod should be held at
80% of SML for the duration of the test. The rod should not fail within the
96 Hour test duration. Test arrangement should ensure continuous wetting of
the rod with Nitric acid.

3. Recovery of Hydrophobicity & Corona Test :

i) The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl
alchohol. Allow the surface to dry and spray with water. Record the
Hydrophobicity classification in line with STRI guide for Hydrophobicity
classification (Extract enclosed at Annexure-D) Dry the sample surface.
 (ii) The sample shall subjected to mechanical stress by bending the
Sample over a ground electrode. Corona is continuously generated by applying
12 kV to a needle like electrode placed 1 mm above the sample surface.
Tentative arrangement shall be as shown in Annexure-E. The test shall be
done for 100 hrs.

(iii) Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with Water
and record the HC classification. Dry the surface and repeat The corona
treatment as at Clause-2 above. Note HC classification. Repeat the cycle for
1000 Hrs. or until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.

(iv) Allow the sample to recover and repeat hydrophobicity

Measurement at several time intervals. Silicone rubber should recover to HC 1
– HC 2 within 24 to 48 hours, depending on the Material and the intensity of
the corona treatment.

4. Chemical composition test for Silicon content :

The content of silicon in the composite polymer shall be evaluated by
EDX (Energy Dispersion X-ray) Analysis or Thermo-gravimetric analysis.
The test may be carried out at CPRI or any other NABL accredited laboratory.

Mandatory particulars for 11 KV & 33 KV Pin Insulator

11 KV Pin 33 KV Pin
Type of insulator Polymeric composite Polymeric composite
Pin Insulator Pin Insulator
Reference Standard IEC 61109 IEC 61109
Material of FRP Rod Borron free ECR Borron free ECR
Material of sheds Silicon Rubber Silicon Rubber
Material of Top End Fittings SGCI /MCI/FORGED SGCI /MCI/ FORGED
STEEL STEEL
Material of Bottom End Fittings FORGED STEEL FORGED STEEL
Material of sealing compound RTV Silicon RTV Silicon
Colour of sheds Grey Grey
Rated voltage 11 KV 33 KV
Highest voltage 12 KV 36 KV
Dry Power Frequency 60 KV 95 KV
Withstand voltage
Wet Power Frequency 35 KV 75 KV
Withstand voltage
Dry Power Frequency 75 KV 130 KV
Flashover Voltage
Wet Power Frequency 45 KV 90 KV
Flashover Voltage
Dry Lightning Impulse Positive : 75 KV Positive : 170 KV
withstand voltage Negative : 80 KV Negative : 180 KV
Dry Lightning Impulse Positive : 95 KV Positive : 210 KV
Flashover voltage Negative : 100 KV Negative : 230 KV
RIV at 1 MHz when energised
at 10 KV / 30 KV (rms) under < 50 microvolt < 70 microvolt
dry condition
Creepage distance ( min ) 320 mm 900 mm
Min Failing load 5 KN 10 KN
Dia of FRP Rod 20 mm 24 mm
Length of FRP Rod (min) 165 mm 300 mm
Dia of weather sheds 100 mm 110 mm
Thickness of housing 3 mm 3 mm
Dry arc distance 150 mm 300 mm
Method of fixing sheds to Injection moulding Injection moulding
housing
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF) 9 KV 27 KV
No of weather sheds (min) Three Eight
Type of sheds Aerodynamic Aerodynamic
Dia of bottom end fitting 20 mm 24 mm
Thread length of bottom end 110 mm (Min) 130 mm (min)
fitting
Type of packing Wooden / Corrugated Wooden / Corrugated
box box
No of insulator in each pack Thirty Twenty

Guarantee 12 months from 12 months from

commissioning or 18 commissioning or 18
months from the date months from the date
of last despatch. of last despatch.
 Annexure B

G T P to be filled up by the Bidder

Name of the manufacturer:

Address of works:

11 KV Pin 33 KV Pin
Type of insulator
Reference Standard
Material of FRP Rod
Material of sheds
Material of Top End Fittings
Material of Bottom End Fittings
Material of sealing compound
Colour of sheds
Rated voltage
Highest voltage
Dry Power Frequency Withstand
voltage
Wet Power Frequency Withstand
voltage
Dry PF Flashover Voltage
Wet PF Flashover Voltage
Dry Lightning Impulse withstand
voltage
Positive
Negative
Dry Lightning Impulse Flashover
voltage
Positive
Negative
RIV at 1 MHz when energised at
10 KV / 30 KV (rms) under dry
condition
Creepage distance ( min )
Visible Discharge Voltage (PF)
Minimum Failing load
Dia of FRP Rod
Length of FRP Rod
Dia of weather sheds
Thickness of housing
Dry arc distance
Method of fixing sheds to housing
No of weather sheds
Type of sheds
Dia of bottom end fitting
Thread length of bottom end
fitting
Weight of composite insulator
Type of packing
No of insulator in each pack
Weight of Insulator
Gross weight of package
Marking
Guarantee
 WEST BENGAL STATE ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTION COMPANY LIMITED

SECTION - 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33KV [Link] ISOLATOR
1.0.0 SCOPE:

1.0.1 This specification covers for design manufacture, testing at manufacturer’ works, supply
and delivery of outdoor type 33 KV, 3-phase, triple pole, double break, gang operated,
centre rotating type Isolator with / without gang operated Earth switches, including
Insulators and complete in all respects with arcing horns , bimetallic connectors,
operating mechanism, indicating devices, fixing details etc. , as described herein and
briefly listed in ‘ schedule of requirements and desired delivery’.

The supporting structure for the isolators are excluded from the scope of this speci-
fication. Drawings for the details of structures for different types of isolators shall be
furnished to the successful tenderers to facilitate design of mounting arrangements
etc.

1.0.2 The technical specifications contained in this section are for guidance of the tenderers.
Deviations if any, from the purchaser’s specification proposed by the tenderer will be
considered provided these are necessary either to improve the utility, performance
and efficiency of the equipment or to secure overall economy.

2.0.0 STANDARDS:

2.0.1 Isolators covered by this specification shall conform to latest edition of IS: 9921(Part-I to
V) & IEC Publication No. 129 (as amended up to date) unless specifically stated
otherwise in this specification.

2.0.2 For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used herein shall have the
meaning as defined in latest edition of IS : 9921 (1) or IEC Publication No. 129 (as
amended up to date ).

2.0.3 Porcelain Post Insulators for the Isolators shall confirm to IS: 2544 and/or IEC: 168 as
amended up to date except to the extent of explicitly modified in this technical
specification. Porcelain Post Insulators of Isolator shall be guided by relevant technical
specifications of Post Insulator.

Unless otherwise specified, the rating as well as performance & testing of the isolator shall
confirm to the latest revisions of all the relevant standards.
 [Link]. Standard No. Title

Alternating current isolators (disconnectors) and

1 IS:1818 earthing switches

2 IS:9921 -do-

3 IEC:129 -do-

4 IS:2544 Insulators

5 IS 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures

6 IS:4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosures

7 IS:4722 Rotating Electrical Machines

Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising of iron

8 IS:2629 and steel

9 IS:4759 Hop dip galvanization coating on Structural Steel.

Method of testing weight thickness and uniformity of

10 IS:2633 coating on fasteners

11 IS:1573 Electro plated coating of zinc on Iron & Steel.

12 IS:3033 Spring Washers

13 IS:2016 Plain washers

14 IE Rules 1956 Indian Electricity Rules

15 IEC:168 Tests on Indoor and Outdoor post Insulator

Recommended current rating for PVC Insulated and

16 IS:3961 PVC Sheeted heavy Duty Cables.

17 IS: 5561 Power Connectors

18 IS:1554 PVC Cables

Guide for marking of Insulated conductors and

19 IS:5578 arrangement for switchgear bus bar main connectors &

Auxiliary wirings.

IS:11353 Guide for Uniform system of marking and identification of

20 conductors and apparatus terminals.
3.0.0 T Y P E :

3.0.1 The 33 KV isolator shall be outdoor type, three phase, double break, centre rotating
type suitable for manual operation.

All isolators as given in the schedule of requirements shall be suitable for horizontal
upright mounting on structure or P.C.C. pole structures. Each pole unit of the multipole
Isolators shall be of identical construction and mechanically linked for gang operation.
 Each pole of the Isolator shall be provided with two sets of contacts to be operated in
series and the moving contacts blades shall rotate in horizontal plane.

3.0.2 The design shall be such that the operating mechanism with the linkages shall be
suitable for mounting on any of the outer pole ends without much difficulty and with
minimum shifting of parts.

3.0.3 Moving contacts of all isolators shall rotate through 90 degree from their “Fully
Closed Position” to “fully open position” so that the break is distinct and clearly
visible from ground level.

3.0.4 The isolators offered by the tenderers shall be designed for normal current rating of
400 Amps. and suitable for continuous service at the system voltage specified
[Link] isolators shall be suitable to carry the rated current continuously and full short
circuit current for three seconds at site condition without any appreciable rise in temp-
erature. These shall also be suitable for operation at 110% rated (normal)
voltage. The Isolators are not required to operate under load but they shall be suitable
for isolating low capacitive/inductive current. The limits of magnitudes of the same
shall be furnished by the tenderers in schedule “A” of Guaranteed Technical Particulars.

3.0.5 The isolators and earthing switches are required to be used in electrically exposed
installations and this should be taken into account while fixing the clearance between
phases and between phase and earth.

4.0.0 R A T I N G :

4.0.1 The isolator shall comply with the following technical requirements :-

I T E M:
i ) System frequency with + 3 % variation ( Hz) : 50

ii) Nominal system voltage (KV r.m.s.) : 33

iii) Maximum system voltage (KV r.m.s.)/ Rating Voltage : 36

iv) Maximum continuous current rating (Amps.) : 400

v) Rated short time current for 3 seconds (KA r.m.s) : 28.8

vi) Rated peak withstand current (KA peak) : 72

vii) 1.2/50 micro-sec lightning impulse withstand voltage (KV peak)

a) To earth and between poles : 170
b) Across the isolating distance : 195

viii) Rated one minute power frequency

withstand voltage ( KV r.m.s.)
a) To earth and between poles : 70
b) Across the isolating distance : 80
 ix) No. of poles : 3

5.0.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:

5.0.1 The atmosphere in the area is laden with industrial and town gases and smoke with
dust in suspension during the dry months and subject to tough colder months. The
temperature variation between the daily minimum and maximum is large. Humidity
occasionally rises upto 100%. Heavy lightning is usually in the area during the months
from May to November. The area is also subjected to heavy monsoon rain, 80 to 90 %
of the annual precipitation being in the month of June to October.

The climatic and isoceraunic conditions at site are given below :

a) Maximum temperature of air : 50 C

b) Minimum temperature of air : 4 C

c) Maximum temperature of the air in sun : 60 C

d) Maximum daily average ambient temperature : 45 C

e) Maximum yearly average ambient temperature : 30 C

f) Maximum relative humidity : 100 %

g) Average No. of thunderstorm days per annum : 100

h) Average No. of dust storm days per annum : 5

i) Average No. of rainy days per annum : 80

j) Average No. of stormy rainfall days per annum

(exceeding ½ “ in 24 hours) : 10

k) Average rainfall per annum : 200 cm.

l) Maximum wind pressure : 150 kg / Sq. cm.

m) Average wind pressure : 71.3 kg / Sq. Cm.

n) Height above sea level : not exceeding 1000 metres.

o) Earthquake acceleration : 0.04 x 2 g.

p) Climate : Moderately hot & humid

tropical climate, conductive to
rust & fungus growth

6.0.0 M A I N C O N T A C T S :

6.0.1 All isolators shall have heavy duty, self aligning and high pressure, line type contacts
 made of high conductivity, corrosion resistant, hard-drawn electrolytic copper strips
of proper thickness and contact area. Fixed contacts should consist of loops of above
copper strips suitable for 400 Amps. rating. The hard -drawn electrolytic copper
strips should be silver plated of 20 micron thickness and fixed contacts should
be backed by powerful Phosphor Bronze/Stainless Steel Springs of suitable
numbers.

6.0.2 The isolator blades forming the moving contacts shall be made from tube of high
conductivity hard-drawn electrolytic copper having 38 mm. Outer dia and for
wall thickness 10 SWG for 400 Amps. rating. Current density for other current
carrying copper parts should not exceed 1.75Amp/[Link].

6.0.3 These fixed and moving contacts shall be able to carry the rated current
continuously and the maximum fault current of 28. 8KA at 33KV for 3 seconds
without any appreciable rise in temperature. The isolator blades shall retain form
and straightness under all conditions of operation including all mechanical stresses
arising out of operation as well as under rated short circuit condition

6.0.4 Fixed guides shall be provided so that even when the blades are out of alignment by
one inch (maximum) at the time of closing of switches, proper seating of the blades in
between the contacts and adequate pressure to give enough contact surface are
ensured, whenever possible, the blades shall be counter balanced by weights & springs at
the end of the travel both on opening and closing of the isolator. The springs shall be
made of durable and non-rusting type alloy.

6.0.5 The contacts shall be self cleaning by the wiping action created by the movements of
the blades. The surface of the contacts shall be rendered smooth and silver-plated.

6.0.6 Isolator main switch shall be required to make or break the line charging current when no
significant change in voltage occurs across the isolating distance on account of make or
break.

6.0.7 Fixed contacts shall be mounted on a block or channel welded to 10 mm thick

[Link] with holes for fixing on insulators. Slots shall be provided for marginal
adjustment of height of contacts. The contacts shall rest on a brass block and with initial
tension. Suitable device shall be provided to prevent dashing.

7.0.0 EARTH SWITCH:

7.0.1 If necessary, line earth switches shall be provided.

Line earth switches shall consist of three earthing blades per Isolator which normally
rest against the frame when the connected isolator is in closed position. The earthing
blades for three phases shall be mechanically linked to a coupling shaft which shall be
capable of being fitted on either side of the isolator. The earthing blades shall match
and be similar to the main switch blades and shall be provided at the hinge-ends with
suitable flexible conductors with terminal lug for connecting to the station ground bus.
 The earthing blades shall be operated by a separate mechanism but shall be
mechanically interlocked with the main switch so that the earthing blades can be
closed only when the main switches are in open position . The earthing blades shall
be gang operated and all the three blades will operate simultaneously.

Material of the earthing blades and contacts shall be same as those of main switch. The
earthing blades shall have the same short time current rating (thermal &
dynamic) as that of main switch. Earthing blades shall be capable to discharge
the trapped charge of the line.

7.0.2 Earth switch wherever provided shall be electrically interlocked so that earth
switch can be operated only when the main isolator is open or vice-versa.

8.0.0 F I X E D AND MOVING ARCING HORNS :

8.0.1 Suitable Phosphor Bronze Arcing Horns made from 6 mm. dia rod of smooth and even
surface required for guiding main contacts shall be provided on the fixed and moving
contacts of the isolator.
Feature of the Arcing Horns should be to “Make before and Break after” main
contacts.

9.0.0 C O N N E C T O R S :

9.0.1 The isolators shall be supplied complete with high conductivity bimetallic clamping
type of terminal connectors made from Aluminium Alloy ( LM - 6 grade ) suitable for
connecting100 sq mm ACSR ‘DOG’ or Panther conductor. The support plate on
which the conductor shall seat, shall be universal type i.e. rigid type connector for
conductors shall have to be fitted on support plate without altering or modifying the
support plate. Current density for terminal connector (Aluminium) shall be 1A/Sq
mm max. The entry of conductors to the isolators along with the phase centres of the
isolators i.e. the centre line of the conductors and bushings of the isolators in a phase
shall be in a straight line. Suitable precautions shall be taken to inhabit bimetallic action
with the aluminium conductors.

10.0.0 OPERATING MECHANISM :

10.0.1 The operating mechanism shall be simple & ensure quick and effective operation. Manual
operating mechanism for main isolator as well as earth switch shall be through lever/hand
on the operating shaft.

The design shall be such as to enable one man to operate it with nominal effort. The
operating mechanism shall be suitable to hold the main switch or earth switch in closed or
open position to prevent operation by gravity, wind, short circuit, seismic acceleration,
vibration, shock, accidental touching.

10.0.2 The isolator blade shall be in positive continuous control throughout the entire cycles
of operation. The operating rods and pipes shall be rigid enough to maintain positive
 control under most adverse conditions and to withstand all torsional and bending
stresses arising from operation. Operation of the switches at any speed should not
result in improper functioning, in displacement of parts / mechanism after final
adjustment has been made. All holes in cranks, linkages etc. having moving pins
shall be drilled and fitted accurately so as to prevent slackness and least motion.

10.0.3 Centre line of the operating mechanism and operating handle shall be mounted at
1.187 meters height from the ground level. The operating rod shall conform to
IS:1239 Part - I and II ( 1979 / 1982 ). The nominal bore of the pipes shall be 40mm. (
class - B medium). The outer diameter will be 48.8mm Maxm. /47.9 mm Minm.
and wall thickness of 3.25 mm. Guide bearing shall be provided wherever necessary,
all brackets, clamps, angles or other attachments for fixing the operating mechanism to
the isolating switch supporting structures , shall be supplied by the successful tenderer.

10.0.4 Provision shall be made for padlocking the operating mechanism of disconnecting and
ground switches, in both open and close positions.

11.0.0 I N S U L A T O R (IS: 2544-1973):

The disconnecting switch shall be provided with six nos. 22 KV post Insulators of 2×22 KV
Stack type per pole i.e. total 18 nos. insulators per Isolator.

11.0.2 Pertinent particulars of the insulators will be as follows:

[Link]. PartIculars Quantity / Dimension

1 No. of Units 2 Unit of 22KV Stack type

2 Height 508 mm.

[Link]. PartIculars Quantity / Dimension

3 Cap pitch circle diameter 76 mm.

4 Base Pitch circle diameter 76 mm.

5 Diameter of Cap and Base 108 mm.

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 33 KV (2x22 KV) KV POST INSULATORS :

Sl Description Rating

No. 33 KV (2x22 KV)

1 Nominal system voltage/Working : 33 KV

voltage
2 Highest system voltage : 36 KV
Sl Description Rating

No. 33 KV (2x22 KV)

3 No. of units per Stack : 2

4 Minimum specific Creepage : 25 mm per KV

distance
5 P.F Visible Discharge Voltage : 27 KV rms

6 P.F. Withstand Voltage

a) Dry : 95 KV rms

b) Wet : 75 KV rms

7 Impulse withstand voltage

1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive : 170 KVp

b) Negative : 180 KVp

8 P.F. Minimum flash over voltage

a) Dry : 130 KV rms

b) Wet : 90 KV rms

9 Impulse flashover voltage

1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive : 210 KVp

b) Negative : 230 KVp

10 Power Frequency puncture : 150 KV rms

withstand voltage on single unit
11 Cantilever strength on stack

a) Upright : 4.5 KN

b) Inverted : 3.4 KN

12 Tensile Strength : 30 KN

13 Torsional Strength : 680 Nm

14 Compression Strength : 40 KN

15 Height : 508 mm

16 Insulation Part Diameter : 210 mm

 Sl Description Rating

No. 33 KV (2x22 KV)

17 Pitch Circle Diameter

a) Top : 76 mm

b) Bottom : 76 mm

18 Conforming standard : As per IS

12.0.0 B E A R I N G S :

12.0.1 Bearing shall be ball or roller type and shall be protected from weather by means of
covers and grease retainers. Bearing pressures shall be kept low to ensure long life
and ease of operation . Bearing housing shall be made of die cast metal with smooth
surface and suitably machined for seating the bearings. Two nos. of bearings with
adequate shaft diameter and distance between the bearings shall be provided to
avoid wobbling during operations. Complete details of bearing bushes, housing,
greasing etc. shall be furnished with the tender.

12.0.2 All hinges / movable joints in current carrying parts shall be shunted with flexible
copper conductor having adequate length and size to prevent breaking due to repeat-
ed bending.

13.0.0 S Y S T E M E A R T H I N G :

13.0.133 KV system will be treated as non-effectively earthed. Flexible conductor of at least 50

[Link] and shall be tinned or suitably treated against corrosion shall be provided at the
lower end of the vertical operating shaft for connection to the Station Ground Bus.

13.0.2 The frame of the isolator and earthing switch shall be provided with two reliable earthing
terminals for connection to station earth bus so also clamping screw suitable for carrying
specified short time current. The diameter of clamping screw shall be at least 12
mm. The connecting point shall be marked with earth symbol.

14.0.0 CLEARANCES :

14.0.1 The centre to centre distance between the insulators of adjacent phases in
assembled position of the 33 KV isolator with arcing horns shall be 1370 mm.
The centre to centre distance between the insulators of adjacent poles of the
same phase in the assembled position of the 33 KV isolator shall be 457 mm.
14.0.2 The clearance between live parts and grounded structures shall not be less than those
specified in the relevant Indian standards. The length of break in full open position
shall be at least 10 % in excess of the dry arcing distances of the insulators of
relevant voltage class specified in relevant standards.

14.0.3 Clearance of Isolator mounting structure top/Bus height from ground level:

Sl. DESCRIPTION Clearance from G.L Operating REMARKS

No Rod

A Isolator suitable for Height of the top of Length of Bus height from G.L
mounting on P.C.C Pole isolator mounting the Rod
Structure channel from G.L

For High Level Arrangement

a) i) With Earth Switch 6500.0 mm. 5313 mm Not applicable

ii) Without Earth Switch 6387.5 mm. 5200. 5 mm 6200 mm.

b) For Low Level Arrangement :

i) Without Earth Switch 5387. 5 mm. 4200. 5 mm 4500 mm.

15.0.0 S U P P O R T I N G STRUCTURES :

15.0.1The isolators shall be provided with rigid, self supporting galvanised supporting structure.
Bases shall be suitable for mounting on P.C.C. Pole Structures as given above.

15.0.2 Bolt holes on the bases for fixing on the structures together with requisite numbers of
mounting bolts and nuts plus 5% spares shall be provided by the suppliers.

16.0.0 DESIGN, MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP:

16.0.1 The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp points, edges and similar corona
producing surfaces. Where this is impracticable, adequate shields are to be provided.

16.0.2 All metal parts shall be of such material or treated in such a way so as to avoid rust
corrosion and deterioration due to continuous exposure to atmosphere and rain, all
current carrying parts shall be non ferrous metals or alloys.

16.0.3 Bolts screws and pins shall be provided with standard locking devices viz. locknuts,
spring washers, keys etc. and when used with current carrying parts, they shall be
 made of stainless steel or other high conductivity and wear resistant alloys.

16.0.4 The switches should not need lubrication of any parts except at very long interval of
one year minimum.

16.0.5 Each phase of isolator shall be provided with rigid base fabricated from steel sections.
The base shall be suitable for mounting on support structures.

16.0.6 Down pipe :- 50 mm ID Class B pipe shall be provided for operating the isolator.
The pipe shall be terminated into a suitable swivel or universal type joint between the
insulator bottom bearing and the operating mechanism.

16.0.7 Tandom pipes shall be of at least 25 mm ID and Class B. One pipe shall be used
for phase coupling of double break isolators. Base plate of insulators for connection of
tandom pipe shall be made out of one piece of at least 10mm thick M.S. Plate.
Bolt and shackle device shall be used to connect tandom pipe to the base plate.

16.0.8 Full particulars of the following items shall be furnished with drawings and descriptions
along with the tender:-

i. Contacts- material , current density etc.

ii. Design of contact pressure
iii. Contact support and fixing arrangement on insulators
iv. Bearing, housing of bearing, bushes etc.
v. Balancing of height
vi. Coupling pipes, joints, connection adjustments
vii. Base plate
viii. Down pipe , guide joints
ix. Brass bushes and bearing at various joints
x. Nuts, Bolts and fasteners
xi. Interlocking device
xii. Operating mechanism, type of gear, auxiliary switch, size and thickness of
box, degree of protection, gland plate gland etc.

Offers without the above information or with incomplete information shall not be
acceptable.

17.0.0 CONTROL CABINET :

17.0.1 The control cabinet of each operating mechanism shall be made out of 12 SWG sheet
steel in the form of plate or casting. Control cabinet shall be provided with hinged doors
along with padlocking arrangement. Sloping rain hood shall be provided to cover all sides.
15 mm thick neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be provided to ensure degree of
protection of at least IP55 as per IS: 2147. The cabinet shall be suitable for fixing on
support structure. Details shall be provided with the offer.

18.0.0 GLAND PLATES AND GLANDS:

18.0.1 A removable gland plate with double compression type brass cable glands shall be
provided with each operating mechanism for terminating all cables.

19.0.0 AUXILLIARY SWITCH:

19.0.1 Main switch operating mechanism shall be equipped with reliable auxiliary switch(4NO
and 4 NC contacts) exclusively for purchaser’s interlocking and protection purpose.
Auxilliary switch and contacts shall be capable of carrying atleast 10 Amp. Continuously.
Quick make and break (QMB) type auxiliary switch shall have snap action built in within
the switch. The auxiliary switch shall be actuated by a cam or similar arrangement
directly mounted on the Isolator shaft without any intermediate levers, linkages etc. to
ensure fool-proof operation.

20.0.0 TERMINAL BLOCK AND WIRING:

20.0.1 Main switch operating mechanism shall be provided with 1100 V grade stud type
terminal block. Auxilliary switch shall be wired upto the terminal block with 20% extra.
All wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade PVC insulated 2.5 sq. mm copper
conductor. Maximum conductor temperature shall be as per IS 3961.

21.0.0 PROTECTIVE COATINGS:

21.0.1 All ferrous parts including bolt , nuts and washers of the switch assemblies shall be
galvanised to withstand at least four nos. of one minute dips in copper sulphate
solution of requisite strength as per IS : 2633.

21.0.2 PAINTING, GALVANISING AND CLIMATE PROOFING:

All interiors and exteriors of enclosures, cabinet and other metal parts shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, grease and other adhering foreign matter
and the surfaces treated by recognised phosphating (seven tank process). After such
preparation of surfaces, two coat of zinc oxide primer shall be given by suitable storing
and air drying etc. before final painting. Colour of the final paint shall be of shade no. 631
of IS:5 i.e epoxy light gray. The final painted equipment shall present esthetically
pleasing appearance free from any dent or uneven surface.

Paint inside the metallic housing shall be of anti condensation type and the paint on
outside surfaces shall be suitable for outdoor installation.

All ferrous parts not suitable for painting such as structural steel, pipes rods, levers,
linkages, nuts and bolts used in other than current path etc. shall be hot dip galvanised.
Galvanisation shall be done after completion of fabrication which shall be capable to
prevent corrosion in view of the severe climatic conditions. Thickness of zinc coating shall
not be less than 610 gm of zinc per sq. meter of surface. Zinc coating shall be smooth
clean and of uniform thickness and free from defect. Preparation of galvanising and the
galvanising itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the coated
material. The quality shall be established by tests as per IS 2633. Galvanising of nuts and
 bolts shall be carried out by centrifugal or suitable process so that the bolts will easily fit
into the tapped holes/nuts.

All components shall be given adequate treatment of climate proofing so as to withstand

corrosion and severe service conditions.

Complete details of painting, galvanising and climate proofing of the equipments shall be
furnished in the tender.

22.0.0 GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND OTHER DATA:

22.0.1 Guaranteed technical particulars and other data of the isolators and earthing switches
should be given in the form in ‘Schedule - A ‘. Any other particulars considered
necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to those listed in the schedule.

22.0.2 NAME PLATES: - Isolator, Earth switches shall be provided with a name plate which
shall contain information as per Table -I of latest version of IS : 9921 ( Part-V).

23.0.0 S P A R E S :

23.0.1The tenderer shall submit lists of spares recommended by him for five years’ efficient
operation of one isolator of each type , with their item wise price separately . Spares
shall be interchangeable with identical parts of the disconnecting switches and shall
be of the same materials, identical workmanship and having same characteristics.
The cost of following spares shall be quoted separately.
a. Contacts
b. Moving Blades
c. Springs
d. Bearings
In addition, list of optional spares may be enclosed.

4.0.0 T E S T S :

24.0.1Type Tests:

The complete Isolator shall be subjected to type test in accordance with the
provisions of relevant ISS and our specification.
Copies of complete type test certificates of similar Isolator of identical rating and
design as well as on 33KV(2×22KV) Post Insulators already conducted in NABL
Accredited/Govt. approved laboratory containing NABL Logo & carried out within
five years from the due date of submission of tender shall be submitted along
with the tender otherwise the offer will be rejected. Mechanical Endurance Test
shall be conducted on the main switch as well as earth switch of each type.

24.0.2 Routine & Acceptance Tests :

The equipment shall be subjected to routine & acceptance tests in accordance with the
provisions of relevant standards.
24.0.3 Test Witness:

a) Routine & Acceptance test shall have to be performed in presence of purchaser

without any extra cost. The supplier / manufacturer shall give fifteen (15) days
advance notice for conducting such tests.

b) Purchaser shall have the right to select any number on random sampling basis for
testing from the equipment offered for inspection and in the event of failure in such
test, the purchaser shall have the right to reject the whole lot and or else cancel any
subsequent order placed on the supplier .

24.0.4 Special Test :

Following test shall be carried out in presence of purchaser’s representative.

Sr.
No. Name of the Test Standard to which it conforms
IS
1 Tests on Insulators & Our Technical specification : 2544

2. ----------do--------- IEC : 168

3 Tests on terminal connectors IS : 5561

Tests on Galvanised
4 components IS : 2633

Operation tests on operating

5 mechanism and interlock

24.0.5 TYPE TESTS AFTER ISSUANCE OF ORDER:

Besides submission of Type Test Report, carried out within five years as per Tender Specification,
Type Test at the discretion of Ordering authority, shall have to be arranged by the successful
contractor or WBSEDCL on his own may conduct the same from any lot delivered to site, as per
the relevant ISS from any NABL accredited/Government recognized Test House or Laboratory in
presence of WBSEDCL’S representative. In case of failure of the materials after type test, the
WBSEDCL will have the right to reject the total supplied lot of the said materials and the party
have to replace the complete lot of materials at his own cost including transportation of materials
at site.

24.0.6 Test Report:

Six (6) copies of routine & acceptance test reports shall have to be furnished to the
purchaser for approval before despatch of the equipment.

25.0.0 D R A W I N G S D A T A AND MANUALS ;

25.0.1The following drawings & details in respect of the isolating and earth switches shall be
furnished in triplicate with the tender :

i) G.A. drawings describing dimension, Constructional feature & technical arrange-

 ment with list of parts .

ii) Drawing showing details of main contacts (fixed and moving), arcing horns,

post isolators, terminal pads & connectors.

iii) Drawings showing the mechanical interlock between earth and isolating switches.

iv) Drawings showing the manual operation device.

v) Manual for installation, operation and maintenance procedure.

vi) Technical leaflets of individual component describing design and constructional

features.

vii) Test Reports, literatures, phamplets of the bought out items and raw
material.

viii) Schematic Drawing

25.0.2 The tenderer shall submit the following information alongwith offer:

a. List of raw material and bought out item and the name of sub-
supplier.
b. Type test report of the raw material and bought out items.
c. Quality Assurancce Plan with hold points for purchaser’s inspection.
d. The successful tenderer shall submit routine test certificates of bought
out items at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled Isolator.

25.0.3 Six copies of above mentioned drawings, data and manuals of offered equipment shall
have to be submitted for approval and final distribution afterwards along with soft copies
of documents in MS OFFICE and drawings in AUTO CAD format only.

25.0.4 In addition to above, each crate containing mentioned equipment shall also accompany,
in water proof folder, a set of approved drawings ,data and manuals as mentioned above.

25.0.5 Before starting manufacture of the equipment , the supplier shall have to take approval
of the design drawings from the purchaser.

26.0.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

26.0.1 The tenderer shall invariably furnish following information for each type of Isolator
alongwith his offer, failing which his offer shall be liable for rejection:-

i. Statement giving list of important raw material, including but not limited to

a. Copper
b. Steel
c. Spring
d. Bearings
e. Nuts and Bolts
 f. Operating Mechanism and its components
ii. Name of sub-suppliers for raw materials, list of standards according to which raw
materials are tested, copies of test certificates.

iii. List of manufacturing facilities available.

iv. Level of automation available.

v. List of areas in manufacturing process where stage inspection are normally carried
out.

vi. Special features provided in the equipment to make it maintenance free.

vii. List of testing equipment available.

27.0.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH :

27.0.1 The materials shall be packed by wooden planks of suitable thickness to protect against
damage in transit and in such a way that individual units can be despatched at a time
complete in all respect so that erection is not held up for want of any equipment.

28.0.0 P R I C E S :
28.0.1The tenderer shall furnish the prices for the equipment in price schedule of this specifi-
cation . Price should be firm.

29.0.0 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATES;

29.0.1Copies of performance certificates of similar equipment supplied to various organization

shall have to be furnished in triplicate along with the tender as Pre-requisites.

29.02 CREDENTIALS :

Tenderer shall furnish document in support of supply & delivery of similar equipment to
WBSEB/WBSEDCL/Other Power Utilities/Other Govt. Deptt. in earlier occasions indicating
thereon names of the organization, quantity ordered , quantity supplied along with the
tender as Pre-requisites. Copies of Purchase Orders and copies of Inspection Offer Letter,
Copies of Despatch Instruction, copies of signed challan in support of execution of
order(s) are to be submitted in support of Credential.

30.0.0 V A L I D I T Y P E R I O D :

Validity Period of the offer shall be reckoned from the next date of opening of the tender
provided of receipt of complete information and will be valid for a minimum period of 120
days from thereon. However, WBSEDCL may ,on the merit of the case, request extension
of validity of offer for a further suitable period without any change in terms & conditions
of the offer.

31.0.0 D E V I A T I O N S FROM SPECIFICATION :

Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviation. But any
deviation felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of equipment must
be mentioned in the Deviation Schedule with reasons duly supported by documentary
 evidence. Such deviations suggested may or may not be accepted by the WBSEDCL.
Deviations not mentioned in Deviation schedule will not be considered.

32.0.0 S C H E D U L E O F REQUIREMENTS AND DESIRED DELIVERY :

32.0.1 The quantity mentioned in this schedule are provisional and are subject to change
by + 25% at the time of ordering.

33.0.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:

The equipment shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance for a period of 66 months
from the date of receipt at site in good condition or 60 months from the date of
commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case of failure within this period the supplier will
make good the faulty equipment at no extra cost to the purchaser.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

34.0.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AT THE TIME OF PHYSICAL DELIVERY TO THE

CONSIGNEE STORES

The following documents to be submitted by the Vendors to the Consignee Stores at the time of
physical delivery :-
a) Copy of Purchase Order.
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction.
c) Inspection Test Certificate.
d) Guarantee Certificate.
e) Proforma Invoice.
f) Seal list and packing list.
g) Challan in triplicate.
h) Way bill, if applicable.
Enclo : Schedule “A”
SCHEDULE- A
(To be filled in and signed by the tenderer).
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED DATA AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR 33 KV CR TYPE ISOLATOR

1. Maker’s Name and address :

2. Type :

3. Model :

4. Rated Voltage :

5. Maximum permissible continuous

service voltage :
6. Maximum continuous current rating :

7. No. of Poles :

8.a)Short time current rating:

 i. For 1 second :
ii. For 3 second :

b) Short circuit making current :

for earth switch, if any

9. Current density at the minimum

cross section of switch blade :

10. Temperature rise corresponding to:

a) Maximum continuous current rating :
at 40 degree C ambient temperature

b) Derating factor for higher :

ambient temperature

c) Short time current rating:

i. For one second :
ii. For three second :

11.a) Maximum charging current that can

be safely interrupted by the switch :
b) Maximum capacitive current that can
be safely interrupted by the switch :
c) Maximum Transformer off load
breaking capacity :
d) Maximum line charging breaking capacity :
[Link] required to open the switch :

13. Clearance (Minimum) :

a) Between live parts and ground :
b) Between phase/poles :
c) Between fixed contact and blade
in open position :

14. Particulars of switch contacts:-

a) Material :
b) Type :

c) Contact area :
d) Contact pressure :
e) Whether silver plated or not? :

15. Location and type of bearing :

16. Millivolt drop of Isolator with 100A.(DC):-

a) Before operation of Isolators:
i. Across terminal :
ii. Across contact :
b) After carrying out mutually agreed No. of operations :
i. Across Terminal :
ii. Across contact :

17. Size of connecting bolts and nuts :

18. Whether connector provided & if so indicate :
the type and materials used .

19. Type of interlocking to be provided :

for Isolator with earth switch

20. No. of operations that switch can

withstand without deterioration of contact :

21. No. of times the switch can be operated

without any need for inspection :

22. Type of mounting :

23. Net weight of one complete 3 pole

Isolating switch :

24. Actual dimension of the Isolating :

switch per phase

25. Shipping dimension of the largest packages :

26. Support Insulator :

1. Particulars of Insulators:

a) Type of Insulators :
b) Name of Manufacturer of Insulators:
c) Height of the Insulators:
d)Diameter of the largest Shed:
e)No of units per stack:

2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(FOR ONE INSULATOR)

2.1 FLASH OVER VOLTAGE

i) Dry Power frequency voltage(KVrms):

ii) Wet Power frequency voltage(KVrms):
iii) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro
sec.(+ve)(KVpeak):
iv) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(-ve)
(KVpeak) :
2.2 WITHSTAND VOLTAGE

i) Dry Power frequency voltage(KVrms):

ii) Wet Power frequency voltage(KVrms):
iii) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro
sec.(+ve)(KVpeak):
iv) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(-ve)
(KVpeak) :

2.3 VISIBLE DISCHARGE VOLTAGE(KVrms):

2.4 POWER FREQUENCY PUNCTURE WITH STAND

VOLTAGE OF UNIT :

2.5 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

a) Cantilever strength upright(KN) :

b) Cantilever strength under hung (Inverted)(KN) :
c) Torsional strength(Nm) :
d) Tensile strength(KN) :
e) Compression strength(KN) :

2.6 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

a) Minimum Creepage distance(mm):

b) Weight of complete unit(kg) :
c) Weight of nonferrous Parts(total)(kg) :
d) Weight of ferrous Parts(total)(Kg) :

2.7 STANDARD TO WHICH INSULATOR

CONFORMS:

---------------------------------------------

Signature
 West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited.
Office of the Chief Engineer, Procurement & Contracts Department,
Bidyut Bhavan (4th floor),DJ-Block,Bidhannagar,Kolkata-700 091.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 36 KV , 400 AMPS,ROCKING TYPE TPGO. ISOLATOR

1. SCOPE :
This specification covers Design, Manufacture, Testing at manufacturer’s works, supply
and delivery of Three Post Rocking Type , Single Air Break 36 KV , 3 Phase , 400 Amps .
Gang Operated, including Insulators and complete in all respect with Arcing Horns,
bimetallic connectors, operating mechanism, indicating devices, fixing details etc. of Off-
Load Isolator suitable for outdoor installation on DP/ Sub-Stn Structures with either
Horizontal or Vertical mounting.

The supporting structure for the isolators are excluded from the scope of this speci-
fication. Drawings for the details of structures for different types of isolators shall
be compatible with the standard Double Pole structures of 33 KV line of WBSEDCL.

2. APPLICABLE STANDARD :
The Isolator shall conform to prevailing specification: IS – 9921 (Part: I –IV) , with
latest amendment in general & IEC publication no. 129 (as amended up to date) and to our
specification in particular.

Porcelain Post Insulators for the Isolators shall confirm to IS: 2544 and/or IEC: 168 as
amended up to date except to the extent of explicitly modified in this technical
specification. Porcelain Post Insulators of Isolator shall be guided by relevant technical
specifications of Post Insulator.

Unless otherwise specified, the rating as well as performance & testing of the isolator shall
confirm to the latest Divisions of all the relevant standards.

[Link]. Standard No. Title

Alternating current isolators (disconnectors) and

1 IS:1818 earthing switches

2 IS:9921 -do-

3 IEC:129 -do-

4 IS:2544 Insulators

5 IS 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures

6 IS:4691 -do-

7 IS:4722 Rotating Electrical Machines

Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising of

8 IS:2629 iron and steel

9 IS:4759 Hop dip galvanization coating on Structural Steel.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 1/18

 [Link]. Standard No. Title

Method of testing weight thickness and uniformity

10 IS:2633 of coating on
fasteners

11 IS:1573 Electro plated coating of zinc on Iron & Steel.

12 IS:3033 Spring Washers

13 IS:2016 Plain washers

14 IE Rules 1956 Indian Electricity Rules

15 IEC:168 Tests on Indoor and Outdoor post Insulator

Recommended current rating for PVC Insulated

16 IS:3961 and PVC Sheeted
heavy Duty Cables.
17 IS: 5561 Power Connectors

18 IS:1554 PVC Cables

Guide for marking of Insulated conductors and

19 IS:5578 arrangement for
switchgear bus bar main connectors & Auxiliary
wirings.

Guide for Uniform system of marking and

20 IS:11353 identification of conductors
and apparatus terminals.

3.0.0 T Y P E :

3.0.1 The 33 KV isolator shall be outdoor type, three phase, single break, suitable for
manual operation.

All isolators as given in the schedule of requirements shall be suitable for upright mounting
on structure or P.C.C. pole structures. Each pole unit of the multipole Isolators shall be of
identical construction and mechanically linked for gang operation.

3.0.2 The design shall be such that the operating mechanism with the linkages shall be
suitable for mounting on any of the outer pole ends without much difficulty and with
minimum shifting of parts.

3.0.3 Moving contacts of all isolators shall rotate for sufficient angular displacement from
their “Fully Closed Position” to “fully open position” so that the break is distinct and clearly
visible from ground level.

3.0.4 The isolators offered by the tenderers shall be designed for normal current rating of
400 Amps. and suitable for continuous service at the system voltage specified herein.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 2/18

 The isolators shall be suitable to carry the rated current continuously and full short
circuit current for three seconds at site condition without any appreciable rise in temp-
erature. These shall also be suitable for operation at 110% rated (normal) voltage. The
Isolators are not required to operate under load but they shall be suitable for isolating
low capacitive/inductive current. The limits of magnitudes of the same shall be
furnished by the tenderers in “Annexture E” of Guaranteed Technical Particulars.

3.0.5 The isolators are required to be used in electrically exposed installations and this
should be taken into account while fixing the clearance between phases and between
phase and earth.

4.0.0 R A T I N G :

4.0.1 The isolator shall comply with the following technical requirements :-

i) Nominal System Voltage 33 KV. (RMS)

ii) Maximum System Voltage 36 KV(RMS)
iii) System Frequency 50 Hz (+ 3%)
iv) Rated current 400 Amps
v) Rated Short Time Current Rating for 3 sec 28.8 KA(rms)
vi) Rated Peak withstand Current(KA Peak) 72
vi) No. of Poles 3
vii) No. of Phases 3
viii) Phase center for Isolator 1220 mm
ix) Minimum clearance between Fixed and Moving Contacts 520 mm
x) Height of the Post Insulators to be used in the Isolator 508 mm
xi) Center to Center distance of Mounting Holes at the Base 770 mm
channel
xii) Impulse withstand Voltage ( to Earth and between Poles ) 170 KV peak
Impulse withstand Voltage ( Across the Isolating Distance) 195 KV Peak
xiii) )Power frequency withstand Voltage (to Earth and between 70 KV RMS
Poles)
Power frequency withstand Voltage (Across the Isolating 80 KV RMS
Distance)
xiv) Operating Mechanism Manual
xv) System Neutral Earthing Non-effectively earthed
xvi) Maximum Temperature Rise As per provision in relevant IS
In “Closed‟ position, the Isolating switch must withstand the mechanical and thermal
effects of Short Circuit Current for 3 sec.

5.0.0 CLIMATIC CONDITION :

The atmosphere in the area is laden with industrial gases and smokes with dust in
suspension during dry months and subject to long colder months. The temperature
variation between the daily average and maximum is large. Humidity occasionally rises
upto 100%. Heavy lightning is useful in this area during the month of May to November.
The area is also subjected to heavy monsoon rains 80% to 90% of the annual precipitation
being in the month of June to October.

5.0.1 DETAILED ATMOSPHERE CONDITION IS STATED BELOW :

a) Max. Temp. of air 50 deg C
b) Min. Temp. of air 4 deg C
c) Max. Temp. of air in Sun 60 deg C
d) Max. daily average ambient temp. 45 deg C

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 3/18

 e) Max. yearly average ambient temp. 30 deg C
f) Max. relative humidity 100%
g) Average No of thunderstorm days per annum. 100
h) Average Nos. of dust storm days per annum 5
i) Average No. of rainy days per annum 100

j) Average no. of stormy rainfall days per annum(exceeding 10

4" in 24 hours)
k) Average rainfall per annum 200 Cm
l) Max. wind pressure 150 Kg /m2
2
m) Average wind pressure 71.3 Kg /m
n) Height above sea level not exceeding
1000 metres.
o) Earthquake acceleration 0.04 x 2 g.
p) Climate Moderately hot &
humid
tropical climate,
conductive to rust
& fungus growth

6.0.0 M A I N C O N T A C T S :

6.0.1 All isolators shall have heavy duty, self aligning and high pressure, line type contacts
made of high conductivity, corrosion resistant, hard-drawn electrolytic copper strips
50mmX3mm jaw type. Fixed contacts should be suitable for 400 Amps. rating. The
hard -drawn electrolytic copper strip should be silver plated of 20 micron thickness and
fixed contacts should be backed by powerful Phosphor Bronze/Stainless Steel Springs
of suitable numbers.

6.0.2 The isolator blades forming the moving contacts shall be made from rod of high
conductivity hard-drawn electrolytic copper having 20 mm. dia and for wall thick-
ness should be sufficient for for 400 Amps. rating. Current density for other current
carrying copper parts should not exceed 1.75Amp/ sq. mm.

6.0.3 These fixed and moving contacts shall be able to carry the rated current continuously
and the maximum fault current of 28. 8KA at 33KV for 3 seconds without any appreciable
rise in temperature. The isolator blades shall retain form and straightness under
all conditions of operation including all mechanical stresses arising out of operation as
well as under rated short circuit condition

6.0.4 Fixed guides shall be provided so that even when the blades are out of alignment by
one inch (maximum) at the time of closing of switches, proper seating of the blades in
between the contacts and adequate pressure to give enough contact surface are
ensured, whenever possible, the blades shall be counter balanced by weights & springs at
the end of the travel both on opening and closing of the isolator. The springs shall be made
of durable and non-rusting type alloy.

6.0.5 The contacts shall be self cleaning by the wiping action created by the movements of
the blades. The surface of the contacts shall be rendered smooth and silver-plated.

6.0.6 Isolator main switch shall be required to make or break the line charging current when no
significant change in voltage occurs across the isolating distance on account of make or
break.

7.0.0 C O N N E C T O R S :

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 4/18

7.0.1 The isolators shall be supplied complete with high conductivity bimetallic single grooved
bolted type of terminal connectors made from Aluminium Alloy ( LM - 6 grade ) suitable for
connecting 100 sq mm ACSR ‘DOG’ conductor. The support plate on which the
conductor shall seat, shall be universal type i.e. rigid type connector for conductors
shall have to be fitted on support plate without altering or modifying the support plate. The
other Connector shall be fitted at the free end of the “Flexible Jumper‟.
Current density for terminal connector (Aluminium) shall be 1A/Sqmm max.
The entry of conductors to the isolators along with the phase centres of the isolators
i.e. the centre line of the conductors and bushings of the isolators in a phase shall
be in a straight line. Suitable precautions shall be taken to inhabit bimetallic action with
the aluminium conductors.
The connectors shall be made as per Drawing No : WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2 & 6

8.0.0 O P E R A T I N G MECHANISM :

8.0.1 The operating mechanism shall be simple & ensure quick and effective operation. Manual
operating mechanism for main isolator shall be through lever/hand on the operating shaft.
The design shall be such as to enable one man to operate it with nominal effort. The
operating mechanism shall be suitable to hold the main switch in closed or open position to
prevent operation by gravity, wind, short circuit, seismic acceleration, vibration, shock,
accidental touching.

8.0.2 The isolator blade shall be in positive continuous control throughout the entire cycles
of operation. The operating rods and pipes shall be rigid enough to maintain positive
control under most adverse conditions and to withstand all torsion and bending
stresses arising from operation. Operation of the switches at any speed should not
result in improper functioning, in displacement of parts / mechanism after final
adjustment has been made. All holes in cranks, linkages etc. having moving pins
shall be drilled and fitted accurately so as to prevent slackness and least motion.

9.0.0 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT & CONSTRUCTION :

9.0.1 The Isolator shall be of Outdoor & Channel-mounted type for Single Break Operation with
Two Fixed Posts and one Rocking Post per Phase as per Drawing No : WBSEDCL/32-ROC /2 .
9.0.2 The Isolator shall be provided with Connectors at both ends as per Drawing No:
WBSEDCL/ 33 – ROC / 2 & 6 .
9.0.3 Operating Mechanism with Padlocking Arrangement at “OFF” and “ON “ Position as per
Drawing No: WBSEDCL / 33 – ROC / 2, 3 & 7 .
The Operating Mechanism shall be fabricated from M.S. Flats / Rods.
The hinged socket which will take the vertical pipe should be made from 30 mm. x 5
mm. flat and the hinge arrangement should be perfect, so that the vertical up and down
operation takes place without any obstruction.

The crank lever is to be made from 30mm.x 30mm. x 5mm. M.S. Angle, duly pressed at
one end and to be bolted at the vertical pipe end and the other end to the square shaft by
a clamp. The clamp of crank lever (Lever Angle) should also be made from 30mm. x 5mm.
M.S. Flat with sufficient room to take the square shaft. The G.I. bolts should not be less
than 12mm. dia for clamping the square bar. Eye type intermediate guide should be of
12mm. dia, 325mm. long or as necessary in length provided with nut, locknut and 2 nos.
flat washers. ID of the eye shall be minimum 55mm to give free play of the pipe during
operation.

i) Single piece 38mm/40mm square M.S. Galved „Phase Coupling Shaft‟ shall be length
2600 mm.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 5/18

 ii) Vertical operating G.I. Pipe 40 mm. nominal bore with 10 SWG (3.2mm) wall
thickness, 6mtr. In length, in not more than two equal lengths, with coupler shall have
to be supplied.

iii) The handle for „Operating Pipe‟ should be suitable for gripping by two hands of the
operator on wearing 33 KV hand gloves and the same should be covered with
corrugated polythene / rubber sleeve. “ON‟ and “OFF‟ indicating name plate shall be
weatherproof & corrosion proof riveted /pasted with resin based adhesive securely
on the body of the Isolator operating handle.

iv) Counter Balancing Spring :

The Roller assembly shall be provided with Balancing Spring and spring holding lever.
During the „Make & Break‟ operation, when the roller assembly moves „Back‟ & „Forth‟,
the spring holding lever also will move in the same direction freely through the spring ,
compressing and expanding the spring .

10.0.0 FIXED CONTACTS :

i) The Fixed Contacts shall be made from Electrolytic Copper strip 50mm. x 3 mm. jaw
type , to be electro silver plated with 20 micron deposit , as per Drawing
No. WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2 & 4.

ii) The „Fixed Contact Guards‟ shall also to be made from M.S. Strip 38 mm. x 1.5 mm
(16 SWG) shaped properly and galvanized as per Drawing No. WBSEDCL/33-
ROC/4.

iii) Two nos. Stainless compression Steel Springs made from 16 SWG wire shall be used at
both side of the „Fixed Contact‟ through 6mm. dia. 90mm. long stainless steel
threaded at both ends and provided with stainless steel nuts, check nuts and flat
washers . The contact pressure of not less than 50 Kg. has to be achieved. The Spring
Mechanism shall have to be provided so as to ensure that the speed of opening of
Contact is independent of the speed of manual operation as per Drawing No.
WBSEB/33-ROC/4.

11.0.0 MOVING CONTACTS :

The “Moving Contacts‟ shall be made from 20 mm. dia. Hard-Drawn Electrolytic Copper Rod.
One end of the Rod shall be flattened upto 150 mm. in length by “Drop Forging‟
arrangement and provided with holes so that the same is bolted on the moving insulator.
The other end is to be bent suitably for making contact into the „Fixed Contact jaw„
(forming Line-Contact) . The palmed portion of the copper rod should have minimum
28mm. / 30mm. width x 8mm. thickness. The bolts used for fixing the „Moving Contact‟ with
the „Insulator– Cap‟ shall be stainless steel. The round portion of the moving contact shall
be silver electro-plated with 20 micron deposit (minimum), as per Drawing No.
WBSEDCL/33- ROC/ 2 & 3.

12.0.0 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT :

Terminal plate shall be made from Hard-Drawn Electrolytic Copper Flat 38mm x 8mm. x
150mm. length , so that, the Arcing Horn and the Connector may be clamped. Terminal
at the outgoing side (back-plate) shall also be made from electrolytic copper 38mm x 8mm
x 165mm. A pantograph holder made of C.I. Galved. 38mm x 6mm having an eye at the
center to take one end of the pantograph assembly shall be fitted with the terminal pad on
the Insulator top , as per Drawing No. WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2 & 5.

13.0.0 FLEXIBLE BREADED TAPE :

A flexible link made from fine tinned copper breaded tape of minimum size 40mm.
(width) x 6mm. thickness having minimum weight of 0.900 Kg/meter length shall

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 6/18

 connect the Moving Contact with the Terminal Pad‟ through the Pantograph . The flexible
tape will be treated as a part of the Isolator and the temperature rise should be within
the allowable limit as per ISS when full load current is passed through the Isolator. The
length of the breaded tape will be 1000mm. in each phase. Both ends of the tape shall
be suitably terminated by Tinned Copper Sockets, securely fixed to the Terminal Pad of
the Rocking Insulator with nuts, bolts and washers etc. at one end and the other end at
the outgoing Terminal Pad. The Connector shall be such as to facilitate easy replacement
during future maintenance as per Drawing No. WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2.

14.0.0 PANTOGRAPH ASSEMBLY :

The Pantograph shall be fabricated from 30mm. x 3mm. M.S. Flat duly galvanized and
fitted with hinge for folding and unfolding the pantograph during „Back & Forth‟
movement of the insulator assembly. It shall have sufficient width to accommodate the
flexible tape. Twisted M.S. Flat (25mm x 3mm) pieces shall be used to hinge the
Pantograph ends with Rocking & Fixed Insulators as per Drawing No. WBSEDCL / 33-ROC
/ 2 & 5.

15.0.0 FIXED AND MOVING ARCING HORN :

Phosphor Bronze Arcing Horns are to be made from [Link] rod for smooth and
even surface. The two parallel limbs of the “Fixed Arching Horn” snail be spaced strictly
as per Drawing [Link]/33-ROC/ 2 & 6 ; so that, the spring action remains
unaltered and permanent. The moving Arching Horn will have 'Eye' at one end for bolting
with the Moving Contact at its flat space and in addition, a clamp made of non-ferrous
strip 16mm. wide x 20 SWG thick to be provided for tightening the Arcing Horn with
the Moving Contact at round portion. Feature of the Arching Horns should be to Make
Before & Break After main contacts so that, they can break magnetizing / charging
current to avoid any damage to the contacts.

16.0.0 ROCKING BASE :

The Moving Post Insulator shall have to be fitted on a Rocker for 'Back' and 'Forth'
movement. A Cast Iron Galvanized Roller Body shall be supported on M.. S. Fulcrums
fitted at both Side of the Base Channel with bolts & nuts. The side supports shall have
Brass Bush/Glass-Nylon bush bearing for easy swivel movement of the Roller Body upon
which the Insulator column is fitted. The design of the roller body (swivel) shall be such as
to make it capable of withstanding mechanical endurance test as per relevant I S.
The Rocker assembly shall be made as per Drawing No.:WBSEDCL/33 -ROC/ 2 & 7.

17.0.0 BASE CHANNEL :

The Base Channel shall be of size 100mmx 50mmx 5mm of suitable length without any
sharp edge. The M.S. Galvd. Channel should be of Hot- Rolled quality .Mounting Holes at
the Base Channel shall be 770 mm. apart center to center. One of the Holes shall be
slotted 20x40mm. and the other 20mm dia. Six nos. 18 mm. dia M.S. Bolts of
suitable length completed with nuts and washers may be supplied. Length of Base
Channel shall be 1100 mm (approx), as per Drawing No..WBSEDCL/33-ROC/ 2 & 7.

18.0.0 EARTHING :
i) The [Link] neutral is non-effectively Earthed. The Isolator shall be provided
with Earthing terminals, fixed with bolts and nuts, the diameter of the bolts being
12mm in at least one of the three Base Channels provided in each set of Isolator.
ii) Each Operating Handle shall be provided with Earthing terminal along with Bolt and
Nut of above mentioned sizes .
iv) All the Earthing Terminals shall be made and marked invariably with Earthing
symbol as per Drawing No. WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2

19.0.0 PAINTING GALVANISING AND CLIMATE PROOFING :

All interiors and exteriors of enclosures, cabinet and other metal parts shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, grease and other adhering foreign
matterand the surfaces treated by recognised phosphating (seven tank process). After
such preparation of surfaces, two coat of zinc oxide primer shall be given by suitable
Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 7/18
 storing and air drying etc. before final painting. Colour of the final paint shall be of shade
no. 631 of IS:5 i.e epoxy light gray. The final painted equipment shall present
esthetically pleasing appearance free from any dent or uneven surface.

Paint inside the metallic housing shall be of anti condensation type and the paint on
outside surfaces shall be suitable for outdoor installation.

All ferrous parts not suitable for painting such as structural steel, pipes rods, levers,
linkages, nuts and bolts used in other than current path etc. shall be hot dip galvanised.
Galvanisation shall be done after completion of fabrication which shall be capable to
prevent corrosion in view of the severe climatic conditions. Thickness of zinc coating shall
not be less than 610 gm of zinc per sq. meter of surface. Zinc coating shall be smooth
clean and of uniform thickness and free from defect. Preparation of galvanising and the
galvanising itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the coated
material. The quality shall be established by tests as per IS 2633. Galvanising of nuts and
bolts shall be carried out by centrifugal or suitable process so that the bolts will easily fit
into the tapped holes/nuts.

All components shall be given adequate treatment of climate proofing so as to withstand

corrosion and severe service conditions.

Complete details of painting, galvanising and climate proofing of the equipments shall be
furnished in the tender.

20.0.0 MARKING :
Name Plate‟ shall have to be provided in each channel of Isolator with the information
as specified in clause no. 10.1 of IS 1818-1972. The Name Plate should be weather
proof & corrosion proof .
Manufacture‟s serial number and customer‟s order reference shall be indicated in
the Name Plate .

21.0.0 TOLERANCE :
+5% tolerance shall be allowed in the measurement of dimensions for acceptance.

22.0.0 PACKING :
Materials shall be packed by wooden crates of suitable thickness to protect
against damage in transit and in way that individual unit can be dispatched at a time
complete in all respects so that erection is not held up for want of any components .

23.0.0 DRAWINGS , DATA AND MANUALS :

1) Drawings (Drawing Nos. WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2-7 in 6 sheets) are enclosed with this

Technical Specification.
Following Drawings shall have to be furnished by the Tenderer at the time of submission
of the Tender in triplicate:
i) G.A. Drawing showing dimensions, design features and technical arrangements
including Bill of Materials.
ii) Part drawing for Fixed & Moving Contacts with details of fixtures.
iii) Part drawing for Operating Mechanism and lever assembly with details of fixtures.
iv) Part drawing for Rocking Base and Pantograph assembly with details of fixtures.
v) Part drawing for Terminal Pad, Connectors, Flexible copper braided tape, Fixed &
Moving Arcing Horns with details of fixtures .
Six copies of the Drawings of the offered Isolators shall have to be submitted for
Approval of the Design Drawings from the Purchaser before starting manufacturing of

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 8/18

 the Equipment.
Before starting manufacture of the equipment, the supplier shall have to take
approval of the design drawings from the purchaser.

23.0.1 Technical leaflets of individual component describing design and construction features
are to be submitted in triplicate with the Tender.

23.0.2 Manuals for installation, operation and maintenance procedure are to be submitted
in triplicate with the Tender.

23.0.3 Six copies of above mentioned drawings, data and manuals of offered equipment shall
have to be submitted for approval and final distribution afterwards along with soft copies
of documents in MS OFFICE and drawings in AUTO CAD format only.

23.0.4 The tenderer shall submit the following information alongwith offer:

a. List of raw material and bought out item and the name of sub-
supplier.
b. Type test report of the raw material and bought out items.
c. Quality Assurancce Plan with hold points for purchaser’s inspection.
d. The successful tenderer shall submit routine test certificates of bought
out items at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled Isolator.

24.0.0 TEST & TEST REPORTS

24.0.1 TYPE TESTS :

Type test report from NABL Accredited laboratory containing NABL Logo of the complete
isolator sets along with 33KV(2×22KV) Post Insulator as per relevant ISS(Latest Issue)
are to be submitted with tender, Otherwise tender may be rejected. Type test should
be carried out on the Isolators having similar rating & design of WBSEDCL. However, if
type tests have already been carried out on different design, then fresh type tests from a
NABL Accredited laboratory containing NABL Logo have to be submitted as per relevant
I.S. before opening of Price Bid.. Type Test reports of the post insulators as per relevant
ISS(Latest Issue) shall also have to be submitted with tender otherwise tender may be
rejected. All charges have to be borne by the manufacturer.

24.0.2 ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS :

The equipment shall be subjected to routine & acceptance tests in accordance with
provisions of relevant standards.

24.0.3 TEST WITNESS :

Routine & Acceptance tests shall have to be performed in presence of purchaser without
any extra cost. The supplier/ manufacturer shall give at least 15(Fifteen) days‟ advance
notice for conducting such tests .

24.0.4 TEST REPORTS :

Six (6) copies of routine & acceptance reports shall have to be furnished to the purchaser
for approval before dispatch of the offered equipment.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 9/18

 25.0.0 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATES :
Copies of performance certificates of similar equipment supplied to various organization
shall have to be furnished in triplicate along with the tender as Pre-requisites.

26.0.0 CREDENTIALS :
Tenderer shall furnish document in support of supply & delivery of similar equipment to
WBSEDCL/Other Power Utilities/Other Govt. Deptt. in earlier occasions indicating thereon
names of the organization, quantity ordered , quantity supplied along with the tender as
Pre-requisites. Copies of Purchase Orders and copies of Inspection Offer Letter, Copies of
Despatch Instruction, copies of signed challan in support of execution of order(s) are to be
submitted in support of Credential.

27.0.0 PRICE :
The price (quoted price ) should include the price of equipment including all accessories as
per schedule of requirement .

28.0.0GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :

Tenderer shall furnish Guaranteed Technical Particulars & other informations of offered
equipment as per proforma given in Part – E & F of this Technical Specification.

29.0.0 DEVIATION :
All deviations from the specification shad be recorded in the "Deviation Sheet" with
reference to respective-clauses of the specification by drawing specification for the
same.
Unless deviations are recorded in the deviation sheet and submitted with the offer, it will
be taken for granted that the offer is made in conformity with the specification.

30 .0. 0 VALIDITY PERIOD :

Validity Period of the offer shall be reckoned from the next date of opening of the tender
provided of receipt of complete information and will be valid for a minimum period of 120
days from thereon. However, WBSEDCL may ,on the merit of the case, request extension
of validity of offer for a further suitable period without any change in terms & conditions of
the offer.

31.0.0 COMPLETENESS OF SUPPLY :

Any fittings, Accessories or Apparatus which may have not been mentioned in this
specification but which are necessary for Isolators‟ efficient operation, performance and
satisfactory maintenance shall be deemed to be included in the Contract and shall be
supplied by the Contractor without any extra charges . All Isolators shall be complete in
all respects whether the details are mentioned in the specification or not .

Nuts which may work loose in operation must be provided with spring washers / split pins
Deviation if any , from the Purchaser‟s specification proposed by the Tenderer may be
considered provided these are necessary either to improve the Utility , Performance and
Efficiency of the Equipment or to secure overall economy . Tender Drawings shall have to

be submitted by the Tenderer showing details of equipment.

The complete Isolator shall be manufactured and supplied against this specification except
that for supporting structures which are excluded from the scope of this specification.

The supplying structures for the Isolators are excluded from the Scope of this specification.

Drawings for the details of structure for mounting of the Isolators shall be furnished by
the Purchaser to facilitate design of mounting arrangement etc. to the concerned
controlling officer / ate executor prior to actual execution.

Pedestal Insulators shall be supplied as per specific requirements laid down in the
Technical Specification.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 10/18

 Test certificates for the offered Isolators shall be furnished as per Guide lines laid down in
the Technical Specification.

G.T.P. and other technical particulars of the offered Isolators shall be furnished as per
proforma given in Annexture – E & F of this Technical Specification.

ENCL: Proforma of schedule of G.T.P. and Drawing No

: WBSEDCL/33-ROC/2-7 ( 6 sheets )

32.0.0 The quantity mentioned in this schedule are provisional and are subject to change
by + 25% at the time of ordering.
33.0.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:

The equipment shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance for a period of

60 months from the date of last despatch. In case of failure within this period
the supplier will make good the faulty equipment at no extra cost to the
purchaser

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT OF PEDESTAL INSULATOR(36 KV. , 400 AMPS TYPE)

1.00 Each set of 36 KV. TPGO Isolator shall be provided with 9 Stacks ( 2 unit 22 KV Post
insulator per stack ) of Pedestal insulators duly fitted .

2.00 The Post Insulator shall in general conform to the latest issue of ISS – 2544 / 1973 with
all amendments thereof .

3.0 The porcelain shall be sound , free from defects thoroughly verified and smoothly glazed .
The post insulator shall be Brown in colour as per general practice. The glaze shall cover all
the porcelain parts of the insulator except those areas which serve as support during firing
or left unglazed, for the purpose of assembly.

4.0 Cement used in the construction of insulators shall not cause fracture by expansion or
loosening by contraction and proper care must be taken in 'curing' cement shall not give rise
to chemical reaction with the metal fittings and it‟s thickness shall be as uniform as
possible.

5.00 The design of the insulators shall be such that stress due to expansion or contraction of any
part of insulators shall not lead to deterioration . The porcelain shall not engage directly with
hard metal.

6.00 The post insulators shall be cemented only ciby the manufactured insulator.
Suitability of cementing shall be ensured by required tests specified in the relevant IS

7.00 At the time of inspection one or more insulator(s)may be dismantled by the

Purchaser's Representative from the isolators offered for inspection and the contractor

shall arrange at his own cost for both Mechanical and Electrical Tests at the insulator
manufacturers laboratory within reasonable time as per latest ISS failing which entire
lot may be rejected.

8.00 The isolator supplier shall collect a certificate from the manufacturer of insulators
that cementing has been done by them.

9.00 The disconnecting switch shall be provided with six nos. 22 KV post Insulators of
2×22 KV Stack type per pole i.e. total 18 nos. insulators per Isolator.

10.0.0 Pertinent particulars of the insulators will be as follows:

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 11/18

 [Link]. PartIculars Quantity / Dimension

1 No. of Units 2 Unit of 22KV Stack type

2 Height 508 mm.

3 Cap pitch circle diameter 76 mm.

4 Base Pitch circle diameter 76 mm.

5 Diameter of Cap and Base 108 mm.

10.0.1 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 33 KV (2x22 KV) KV POST INSULATORS :

Sl Description Rating
No. 33 KV (2x22 KV)
1 Nominal system voltage/Working : 33 KV
voltage
2 Highest system voltage : 36 KV
3 No. of units per Stack : 2
4 Minimum specific Creepage distance : 25 mm per KV
5 P.F Visible Discharge Voltage : 27 KV rms
6 P.F. Withstand Voltage
a) Dry : 95 KV rms
b) Wet : 75 KV rms
7 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
micro second wave :
a) Positive : 170 KVp
b) Negative : 180 KVp
8 P.F. Minimum flash over voltage
a) Dry : 130 KV rms
b) Wet : 90 KV rms
9 Impulse flashover voltage
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive : 210 KVp
b) Negative : 230 KVp
10 Power Frequency puncture withstand : 150 KV rms
voltage on single unit
11 Cantilever strength on single unit
a) Upright : 4.5 KN
b) Inverted : 3.4 KN
12 Tensile Strength : 30 KN
13 Torsional Strength : 680 Nm
14 Compression Strength : 40 KN
15 Height : 508 mm
16 Insulation Part Diameter : 210 mm
17 Pitch Circle Diameter
a) Top : 76 mm
b) Bottom : 76 mm
18 Conforming standard : As per IS

TEST CERTIFICATES / INSPECTION AND TESTING

1.0 ISOLATOR:
1. The bidder shall submit complete test report along with type test report from

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 12/18

 NABL Accredited/Govt. approved Laboratory containing NABL Logo of the complete Isolator
sets of identical rating and design along with 33KV (2x22 KV) Post Insulator as stipulated in
relevant IS/IEC with complete identification, date & Sl. No. on tendered item/items with the
tender. If however type tests already carried on isolators out are of different design, then
fresh type test from NABL Accredated laboratory containing NABL logo have to be submitted
as per relevant ISS before opening the price bid. All the charges for those tests are3 to be
borne by the bidder.

1.01) The complete Isolator along with 33KV Post Insulator should be tested as per
latest edition of ISS – 1818 , ISS – 2633 , and ISS – 9921 ( Part I – IV ) & IS-
2544 for Type Tests in NABL Accredited Laboratory and the type test certificates
are to be submitted with the tender.

1.02) The dimensions of the Fixed & Moving Contacts of the sample Isolators ,
tested successfully for Type Tests in an approved Laboratory , should at least
conform to the dimensions as specified in the specification.

1.03) Following “Acceptance Tests‟ shall be carried out at the works of the
Manufacturer as per relevant ISS before delivery of each lot in presence of our
Engineers. The contractors shall furnish „Routine Test‟ reports of each unit
comprising „Millivolt Drop‟ Test, „Operation Test‟ and „One Minute Power Frequency
Voltage Withstand Test‟; in six copies along with each lot offered.

a) Temperature Rise Test

b) Millivolt Drop Test

c) One Minute Power frequency Voltage Withstand Test

d) Operation Test

Operation test for the total height of the Isolators on selected samples shall have to
be arranged by the Manufacturer .

e) Uniformity of Silver Coating on the Copper Contacts .

f) Uniformity of Zinc Coating on Ferrous Parts ( Galvanisation Test ) :

Samples at random will be selected from the lot offered for above testing and if any
one of test piece fails , the lot will be rejected .
Contact pressure . Material Quality . Dimensions of the Isolator Contacts and other
components shall also be verified/measured (with the approved Drawing) . Quoted
price should include charges for above stated Acceptance Tests and Type Tests ( if
required ) .

1.04) TESTING OF MATERIALS

The Purchaser reserves the right to get the metal/raw material of any component tested
at any approved Laboratory at the cost of the contractor , in case of any doubt over the
quality of such metal / raw material especially for Copper and Alluminium components .

2.00 PEDESTAL INSULATOR :

2.01) The Pedestal Insulator to be fixed and supplied along with the Isolators will be
tested both for Mechanical and Electrical characteristics as per late issue of ISS - 2544.
Complete Type Test Certificates from the Manufacturer shall also to be furnished, for
both Electrical and Mechanical Tests.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 13/18

 2.02) One or more Insulator(s) may be dismantled by the Purchaser's
Representative, from Isolators offered for inspection and the Contractor shall
arrange at his own cost for both Mechanical and Electrical Tests at the insulator
manufacturer's Laboratory within reasonable time as per latest ISS.

2.03) The Test values in respect of ' Impulse Voltage Test ' and ' Power Frequency
Voltage Withstand Test' on the complete isolators without grounding connectors,
should not be less than those specified in ISS and as detailed below :

System Impulse Withstand Voltage One Minute Power Frequency Withstand

Voltage Positive & Negative Polarity Voltage (RMS)
Across Isolating To Earth and Across Isolating To Earth &
Distance Between Distance Between Poles
36 KV 195 KV 170 KV 80 KV 70 KV

3. TYPE TESTS AFTER ISSUANCE OF ORDER:

Besides submission of Type Test Report, carried out within five years as per
Tender Specification, Type Test at the discretion of Ordering authority, shall have to be
arranged by the successful contractor or WBSEDCL on his own may conduct the same from any
lot delivered to site, as per the relevant ISS from any NABL accredited/Government recognized
Test House or Laboratory in presence of WBSEDCL’S representative. In case of failure of the
materials after type test, the WBSEDCL will have the right to reject the total supplied lot of the
said materials and the party have to replace the complete lot of materials at his own cost
including transportation of materials at site.

4. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AT THE TIME OF PHYSICAL DELIVERY TO THE

CONSIGNEE STORES

The following documents to be submitted by the Vendors to the Consignee Stores at the time of
physical delivery :-
a) Copy of Purchase Order.
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction.
c) Inspection Test Certificate.
d) Guarantee Certificate.
e) Proforma Invoice.
f) Seal list and packing list.
g) Challan in triplicate.
h) Way bill, if applicable.

ENCLO: ANNEXURE E & F

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 14/18

 ANNEXURE E

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 36KV.400AMPS ROCKING

TYPE TRIPLE POLE GANG OPERATED AIR BREAK ISOLATING SWITCHES

(TO BE FILLED BY THE TENDERER)

1. Maker’

2. Particulars of Isolating Switches:

a) Type
b) Model
c) Number of Poles
d) Voltage rating
e) Maximum permissible continuous service voltage
f) Current rating in Amps :-
i. Normal(Continuous rating)
ii. Maximum & Short time current rating for 1 Sec.

iii. Maximum & Short time current rating for 3 Sec.

g) Current Density at Minimum Cross section of switch blade

h) Type, Material and contact pressure (in kg.)

of [Link] and stainless steel spring :-
i. Moving Contact
ii. Fixed Contact
[Link] Spring

k) Whether contacts are silver faced or tin plated

(the thickness may be indicated)

l) Temperature rise obtained during type test as per clause

No.11.1.7 of IS:1818 of the following at the full rated
current in degree centigrade over an ambient temperature of
50 OC
i. Contacts
ii. Terminals
iii. Compression Springs

m) Rerating factor for higher ambient temperature

n) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits(in milli
volt drop) which was obtained during type test as specified
in relevant Clause of IS :1818 and IS 9921
i. Contacts(fixed and Moving)
ii. Terminals
o) Frequency
p) Type and material of the terminal connector provided

q) Diameter, wall thickness and length of [Link] pipe

r) Size and length of base mounting M.S. Galvanised channel

provided for the three phase :
s) a) Clearance between live parts of Phase in mm.

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 15/18

 b)Clearance between live parts of Phase in mm

c) centre distance between the Insulators of the adjacent

phases in mm. in the assembled position of the switch :

t) Mounting /Fixing Hole Centre Distance in the Base Channel

and Sizes
u) i) Maximum charging current that can be safely
interrupted by the switch
ii) Maximum capacitative current that can be safely
interrupted by the switch
iii) Maximum transformer off load breaking capacity
current that can be safely interrupted by the switch
iv) Maximum line charging breaking capacity

v Torque required to open the switch

x) Clearance between fixed contact & blade in open

condition
y) Particulars of switch contacts:

i) Material

ii) Type

iii) Contact Area

iv) Contact Pressure

v) Whether silver plated or not?

z) Millivolt drop of isolator with 100A (D.C):

i) Before operation of Isolator

ii) Across Terminal

iii) Across Contact

iv) After carrying out mutually agreed no. of operations

v) Across terminal

vi) Across contact

aa) Size of connecting Bolts & Nuts

ab) Whether connector is provided & if so indicate the

type & materials used
ac) No. of operations that the switch withstand without
deterioration of contact

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 16/18

 ad) No. of times the switch can be operated without any
need for inspection
ae) Type of Mounting

af) Net weight of one complete 3 pole isolating switch

ag) Actual dimension of the isolating switch per phase

ah) Shipping dimension of the largest packages

ai) Support Insulator As per Annexture ‘F’

--------------------------------------
Signature with seal

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 17/18

 ANNEXURE F

SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 36KV 400 A PEDESTAL INSULATORS

(TO BE FILLED BY TENDERS)

[Link].
1. Particulars of Insulators:

a) Type of Insulators :
b) Name of Manufacturer of Insulators:
c) Height of the Insulators:
d)Diameter of the largest Shed:
e)No of units per stack:

2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(FOR ONE INSULATOR)

2.1 FLASH OVER VOLTAGE

i) Dry Power frequency voltage(KVrms):
ii) Wet Power frequency voltage(KVrms):
iii) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(+ve)(KVpeak):
iv) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(-ve) (KVpeak) :

2.2 WITHSTAND VOLTAGE

i) Dry Power frequency voltage(KVrms):
ii) Wet Power frequency voltage(KVrms):
iii) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(+ve)(KVpeak):
iv) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(-ve)(KVpeak):

2.3 VISIBLE DISCHARGE VOLTAGE(KVrms):

2.4 POWER FREQUENCY PUNCTURE WITH STAND

VOLTAGE OF UNIT :

2.5 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

a) Cantilever strength upright(KN) :
b) Cantilever strength under hung (Inverted)(KN) :
c) Torsional strength(Nm) :
d) Tensile strength(KN) :
e) Compression strength(KN) :

2.6 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

a) Minimum Creepage distance(mm):
b) Weight of complete unit(kg) :
c) Weight of nonferrous Parts(total)(kg) :
d) Weight of ferrous Parts(total)(Kg) :

2.7 STANDARD TO WHICH INSULATOR CONFORMS:

---------------------------------------------
Signature with seal

Spec for 33 KV TPGO Isolator(Rocking Type) Page 18/18

 Technical Specification for ac 3 Phase 4 Wire CT PT operated Lag plus Lead only
fully static AMR compatible Tri-Vector Energy Meter for 33 kV Feeders
1.0 SCOPE : Design, manufacturing, testing, supply and delivery of AC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, CT PT
operated lag plus lead only fully static and AMR compatible Tri-Vector Energy Meters for
measurement of different electrical parameters listed elsewhere in the document including
Active Energy (MWh), Reactive Energy (MVARh), Apparent Energy (MVAh) etc.

2.0 APPLICATION: On 33 KV HT Feeder as Category “B” Feeder Meter

3.0 STANDARDS TO WHICH METERS SHALL COMPLY :

▪ IS-14697:1999(2004) Specification for AC Static Transformer operated Watt-Hour & VAR-
Hour meters (class 0.5S)
▪ IS-15959:2011 Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading Tariff & Load Control -
Companion Specification
▪ CBIP - 325 Manual on Standardization of AC Static Electrical Energy Meter
▪ IEC 62052-11 Electricity metering equipment (AC) -General requirements, tests and test
conditions -Part 11: Metering equipment
▪ IEC 62053-22 Electricity metering equipment (AC) -Particular requirements - Part-22:
Static Meters for Active Energy (Class 0.5S)
▪ IEC 62053-23 Electricity metering equipment (AC) -Particular requirements - Part-23:
Static Meters for Reactive Energy
▪ IS 15707 Specification for Testing, evaluation, installation & maintenance of AC Electricity
Meters Code of Practice
▪ Guidelines on ―Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control -
Companion Specification
▪ IEC 62056-21 Electricity metering: Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control-
Part 21: Direct local data exchange
▪ IEC 62056-31 Electricity metering: Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control -
Part 31: Local Area Network data exchange
▪ IEC 62056-61 Electricity metering: Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control-
Part 61: Object identification system (OBIS)

The equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure equal or
better quality than the standard mentioned above , shall also be considered; in case of conflict the
guidelines on ―Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control - Companion
Specification enclosed with this document as annexure shall prevail upon.

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :

1 AMR Compatible Static, 3 Phase 4 Wire 33 kV Tri-Vector
TYPE
Energy Meter for HT Feeder
2 FREQUENCY 50 Hz ± 5%
3 ACCURACY CLASS 0.5S
4 VOLTAGE RATIO (33/√3)kV/(110/√3)V
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
5 Suitable for operation for (3P, 4W) 63.5V Ph - N
RATING
5 VOLTAGE VARIATION (-) 30% to (+) 20%
BASIC CURRENT (Ib) &
6 MAXIMUM CURRENT Ib- 1A, Imax - 2A
RATING(Imax )
7 CURRENT RATIO 400/1A
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
8 As per IS 14697:1999(2004)
CURRENT
9 STARTING CURRENT 0.1% of Ib at UPF
10 POWER CONSUMPTION The active and apparent power consumption, in each voltage

Page 1
WBSEDECL
 circuit, at reference voltage, reference temperature and
reference frequency shall not exceed 1. 5 W and 8 VA.

The apparent power taken by each current circuit, at basic

current, reference frequency and reference temperature shall
not exceed 1.0 VA.
11 POWER FACTOR 4 QUADRANT
Meter shall be designed with application specific integrated
circuit (ASIC) or micro controller; shall have no moving
part; electronic components shall be assembled on printed
circuit board using surface mounting technology; factory
12 DESIGN
calibration using high accuracy (0.05 class) software based
test bench.
Assembly of electronic components shall be as per ANSI
/IPC-A-610 standard.
Manufacturer must have test certificate for conformance to
13 DLMS TEST CERTIFICATE
DLMS from CPRI of Category - B.

5.0 TEMPERATURE RISE :

Under normal condition of use, winding and insulation shall not reach a temperature, which might
adversely affect the operation of the meters. IS14697:1999(2004) shall be followed.

6.0 CLIMATIC CONDITION :

Temperature : -10 C to 55 C (in shade)
Humidity : up to 95% RH non-condensing
Average annual rainfall : 150 cm.
Max Wind Pressure : 150 kg/sqm
Max. Altitude above MSL: 3000 m.

7.0 TROPICAL TREATMENT :

The meters shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under hot &
hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts & surface, which
are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective
finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.

8.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENT/ METER COVER & SEALING ARRANGEMENT :

Wherever poly carbonate cover is specified, it shall conform to IS 11731 (FH-1category) besides meeting
the test requirement of heat deflection test as per ISO 75, glow wire test as per the IS:11000 (part
2/SEC-1) 1984 OR IEC PUB,60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC-- 60695-10-2 and
Flammability Test As per UL 94 or As per IS 11731(Part-2) 1986.

9.0 CONSTRUCTION:
The case, winding, voltage circuit, sealing arrangements, registers, terminal block, terminal cover & name
plate etc. shall be in accordance with the relevant standards. The meter shall be compact & reliable in
design, easy to transport & immune to vibration & shock involved in the transportation & handling. The
construction of the meter shall ensure consistence performance under all conditions especially during
heavy rains / very hot weathers. The insulating materials used in the meter shall be non-hygroscopic,
non-ageing & have tested quality.

The meter shall comply latest technology such as Microcontroller or Application Specific Integrated
Circuit (ASIC) to ensure reliable performance. The mounting of the components on the PCB shall
compulsorily be Surface Mounted Technology (SMT) type. Power supply component may be of PTH
type. The electronic components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in
the accuracy of the meter for at least ten years. The circuitry of the meter shall be compatible with 16 Bit

Page 2
WBSEDECL
(or better) ASIC with compatible processor and meter shall be based on Digital measuring and sampling
technique.

The meter shall be housed in a safe, high grade, unbreakable, fire resistant, UV stabilized, virgin
Polycarbonate/ High grade engineering plastic/Thermosetting Plastic casing of projection mounting type.
The meter cover shall be transparent, for easy reading of displayed parameters, and observation of
operation indicators. The meter base may or may not be transparent, but it shall not be black in
colour. The meter casing shall not change shape, size, and dimensions when subjected to 200 hrs on UV
test as per ASTMD 53. It shall withstand 650 deg. C. glow wire test and heat deflection test as per ISO
75.

Meters must be supplied with 2 (two) no. of manufacturer’s seals between meter base and meter cover at
both the sides.

Both the communication ports (Optical and RS 485 port) shall have proper sealing arrangement.

The bidder shall submit relevant documents (collected form Meter Manufacturer) regarding the
procurement of polycarbonate material. The polycarbonate material of only the following manufacturers
shall be used.

a) G.E. Plastics/SABIC: LEXAN 943A or LEXAN 143 or equivalent for Meter &
Terminal cover, and LEXAN 503R or 500R or equivalent for
base.
b) BAYER/SABIC: Grade corresponding to above
c) DOW Chemicals: -Do-
d) MITSUBISHI: -Do-
e) TEJIN: -Do-
f) DUPONT: -Do-

10.0 METER CASE AND COVER:

The meter shall be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter becomes inaccessible and
attempts to open the meter shall result in viable damage to the meter cover. This is to be achieved by
using continuous Ultrasonic welding on the Meter body, fully flushed between case and cover. In case,
ultrasonic welding using plate/strip is used the material of plate/strip shall be same as that of cover and
base and the strip shall flush with meter body. The manufacturer‘s logo shall be embossed on the strip /
plate.

The meter cover shall be fixed to the meter base (case) with Unidirectional Screws, so that the same
cannot be opened by use of screwdrivers. The meter shall withstand external magnetic influence as per
latest amendments of CBIP Technical Report No. 304.

11.0 TERMINAL BLOCK AND COVER:

The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical
strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material
(capable of passing the flammability tests) with nickel plated brass inserts / alloy inserts for connecting
terminals.

The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor
with the help of screw adjustable metal plates to increase the surface of contact and reduce the contact
resistance. The screws shall have thread size not less than M 4 and head having 4-6mm. diameters. The
screws shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws shall be of
tinned/nickel plated brass material.

Page 3
WBSEDECL
 The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be minimum 5.5 mm. The holes in the insulating material
shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also.
The terminal cover shall be transparent High grade Engineering Plastic/Polycarbonate/ Thermosetting
Plastic with minimum thickness 2.0 mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely
covering the terminal block and fixing holes. The space inside the terminal cover shall be sufficient to
accommodate adequate length of external cables.

12.0 WORKING ENVIRONMENT:

As per IS 14697:1999(2004). Meter to perform satisfactorily under Non-Air Conditioned environment
(within stipulations of IS) IP51 housing for indoors.

The meter shall be suitable designed for satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical
climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject
to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective finish, which
provided suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.

13.0 MANUFACTURING PROCESS, ASSEMBLY AND TESTING:

Meters shall be manufactured using latest and state-of-the-art technology and methods prevalent in
electronics industry. The meter shall be made from high accuracy and reliable surface mount technology
(SMT) components. All inward flow of major components and sub assembly parts (CT, PT, RTCs /
Crystal, LCDs, LEDs, power circuit electronic components etc.) shall have batch and source
identification. Multilayer PCB assembly with PTH using surface mounted component shall have
adequate track clearance for power circuits. SMT component shall be assembled using automatic
pick-and-place machines, Reflow Soldering oven, for stabilized setting of the components on PCB. For
soldered PCBs, cleaning and washing of cards, after wave soldering process is to be carried out as a
standard practice. Assembly line of the manufacturing system shall have provision for testing of sub-
assembled cards. Manual placing of components and soldering, to be minimized to items, which cannot
be handled by automatic machine. Handling of PCB with ICs / CMOS components, to be restricted to
bare minimum and precautions to prevent ESD failure. Complete assembled and soldered PCB shall
undergo functional testing using Computerized Automatic Test Equipment.

Fully assembled and finished meter shall undergo burn-in test process for 24 Hours at 55 degree Celsius
(Max. temperature to not exceed 60 degree Celsius) under base current (Ib) load condition.

Test points shall be provided to check the performance of each block/stage of the meter circuitry.

RTC shall be synchronized with NPL time at the time of manufacture. Meters testing at intermediate and
final stage shall be carried out with testing instruments, duly calibrated with reference standard, with
traceability of source and date.

14.0 DISPLAY MEASURED VALUES:

The meter display shall have 7 digits(complete) for energy counter with alphanumeric digits for
parameter identifier and tamper indication with backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of minimum 10 mm
height, wide viewing angle suitable for temperature withstand of 70° C. LCD to be of STN (super twisted
numeric) type construction.

The data stored in the meters shall not be lost in the event of power failure. The meter shall have Non
Volatile Memory (NVM), which does not need any battery backup. The NVM shall have a minimum
retention period of 10 years.

Meter shall have Scroll Lock facility to display any one desired parameter continuously from display
parameters.

Auto display cycling of each parameter shall be 10-12 Seconds. The time between two auto display cycles
shall be 30 sec. OBIS code in display is not required.

Page 4
WBSEDECL
It shall be possible to easily identify the single or multiple displayed parameters through symbols/legend
on the meter display itself or through display annunciation.

AUTO MODE:
i. LCD Test
ii. Meter Serial Number
iii. Real Time & Date (DD/MM/YYYY)
iv. Rising Apparent Demand with elapsed time
v. Cumulative Power Off Hours
vi. Number of Power Failures
vii. Cumulative Active Energy(Import) (Cumulative sign/legend must be given)
viii. Cumulative Active Energy(Export)
ix. Cumulative Reactive Energy –Quadrant-I
x. Cumulative Reactive Energy –Quadrant-II

xi. Cumulative Reactive Energy –Quadrant-I

xii. Cumulative Reactive Energy –Quadrant-II
xiii. Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (Active Import) (6+1 in MWh)
xiv. Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (Active Export)
xv. Apparent Forward Maximum Demand (Import) (upto 3 decimal in MVA)
xvi. Apparent Forward Maximum Demand (Export)
xvii. Instantaneous Secondary Voltages – Phase-wise ( P-N)
xviii. Instantaneous Secondary Currents – Phase-wise
xix. Signed Instantaneous Power Factor – Phase-wise
xx. Instantaneous Net Power Factor
xxi. Instantaneous Apparent Power
xxii. Signed Active Power (kW)
xxiii. Signed Reactive Power(kVAr)
xxiv. Frequency
xxv. Cumulative Billing Count
xxvi. Cumulative Tamper Count
xxvii. Cumulative Programming Count
xxviii. Phase Sequence & phase correspondences of Voltage & Current
xxix. Connection Check
xxx. Self Diagnosis

PUSH BUTTON MODE: Parameters (i) to (xxxi) of Auto Display Mode and then ,
i. History 1 Cumulative Active Forward Energy (Import)
ii. History 1 Cumulative Active Forward Energy (Export)
iii. History 1 Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (Import)
iv. History 1 Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (Export)
v. Cumulative Apparent Maximum Demand ( Import)
vi. Cumulative Apparent Maximum Demand ( Export)
vii. Last Billing Date and Time
viii. History 1 Average Power Factor
ix. Battery Status
x. Present Tamper Status (PT/CT/Other)
xi. First Tamper Occurrence with Date & Time
xii. Last Tamper Occurrence with Date & Time
xiii. Last Tamper Restoration with Date & Time
xiv. Front Cover Open with Date & Time
xv. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Active Energy (Import) ( Minimum 2+6 in MWh)
xvi. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Active Energy (Export)
xvii. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Reactive Energy – Quadrant-I

Page 5
WBSEDECL
xviii. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Reactive Energy – Quadrant-II
xix. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Reactive Energy – Quadrant-III
xx. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Reactive Energy – Quadrant-IV
xxi. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Apparent Energy (Import)
xxii. High Resolution Cumulative Forward Apparent Energy (Export)

POWER OFF MODE

i. Meter Serial No
ii. Date and Time
iii. Cumulative Active Forward Energy (Import)
iv. Cumulative Active Forward Energy (Export)
v. History 1 Cumulative Active Forward Energy (Import)
vi. History 1 Cumulative Active Forward Energy (Export)
vii. Cumulative Billing Count
viii. Cumulative Tamper Count

The register shall be able to record and display starting from zero, for a minimum of 2500 hours, the
energy corresponding to rated maximum current at reference voltage and unity power factor. The register
shall not roll over in between this duration.

High resolution registers shall display energy & demand readings with at least 6 digits after decimal and
the formats shall be as given below:
i) Demand in MVA [ **.****** ]
ii) Energy in MWh [ **.****** ]

Push button mechanism shall be of high quality and shall provide trouble free service for a long span of
time. Up and Down scrolling facility shall be there for Push Button Mode. If there is separate button for
MD reset, it shall also have scrolling facility.

15.0 MAXIMUM DEMAND:

The meter shall be capable of recording the Apparent/Active MD with integration period of 15 minutes.

MD RESET OPTION
a. Billing Date at 00:00 Hrs of 1st day of the Month (Programmable)
b. Push button
c. By Authenticated Command from BCS through HHU or directly from PC/Remote

MD reset button shall have proper sealing arrangement. Specific operation shall be available in
downloading data.

16.0 PERFORMANCE UNDER INFLUENCE QUANTITIES:

The meters performance under influence quantities shall be governed by IS 14697:1999 (2004). The
accuracy of meter shall not exceed the permissible limits of accuracy as per standard IS
14697:1999(2004).

17.0 OUTPUT DEVICE:

Energy Meter shall have test output, accessible from the front, and be capable of being monitored with
suitable testing equipment while in operation at site. The operation indicator must be visible from the
front and test output device shall be provided in the form of LED. Resolution of the test output device
shall be sufficient to enable the starting current test in less than 10 minutes. Minimum gap shall be
maintained between Active & Reactive Test LED.

Page 6
WBSEDECL
18.0 REAL TIME INTERNAL CLOCK(RTC):
RTC shall be pre-programmed for 30 Years Day/date without any necessity for correction. The maximum
drift shall not exceed ± 300 Seconds per year.

The clock day/date setting and synchronization shall only be possible through password/Key code
command from one of the following:

a. Hand Held Unit (HHU) or directly through BCS with authentication from BCS for
individual meter
b. From remote server through suitable communication network with authentication from
BCS

19.0 TIME OF DAY FACILITIES:

The meter shall have facilities to record Active, Apparent Energies and MD with a facility of 8 time
zones. The time zones shall be user programmable through authenticated command from BCS with the
help of HHU. At present only 3 (Three) TOD zones to be activated in following manners;

TOD - 1 06:00 Hrs to 17:00 Hrs

TOD - 2 17:00 Hrs to 23:00 Hrs
TOD - 3 23:00 Hrs to 06:00 Hrs

20.0 METER READING DURING POWE R OFF:

It shall be possible to read the meter-display visually and with MRI and in absence of input voltages with
the help of internal battery for display in power off condition or with external battery pack/PPU. The
interface shall be inductive coupling.

21.0 SELF DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES:

The meter shall be capable of performing complete self-diagnostic check to monitor the circuits for any
malfunctioning to ensure integrity of data memory location all the time. If possible, the details of
malfunctioning shall be recorded in the meter memory. The bidder shall furnish the details of self-
diagnostic capability feature, viz. (i) Memory status, (ii)Battery status (iii) NVM Status & (iv) RTC
Status in BCS as well as it shall be in display.

22.0 BASE COMPUTER SOFTWARE (BCS):

The BCS shall be user friendly.
The BCS shall be compatible with Windows 7, 8 and 10.
The data transfer shall be reliable and fraud proof. BCS shall give all details pertaining to billing and load
survey data. The meter condition details shall also be transferred into the BCS including
abnormalities/anomalies of voltage current conditions or tamper conditions which can occur due to
mistake in connections or intentionally done for the purpose of tamper.

The software shall show electrical conditions existing at the time of reading the meter in tabular forms as
well as in graphical format (Phase diagram) i.e. Phase diagram is required for voltage, current & PF only.

All the information about energy, maximum demand and their respective TOD register readings, billing
register readings and billing history readings shall be shown in a manner which user can understand
quickly, preferably in tabular format.

All the load survey data shall be available in numerical as well as graphical format. It shall also be
possible to view this data in daily, weekly and monthly formats. The load survey graph shall show the
respective values.

All the information about tamper events shall be accompanied with date and time stamping along with the
SNAPSHOT (details) of the respective electrical conditions. This information shall be displayed in the

Page 7
WBSEDECL
sequence in which it happened, in cumulative format as well as in summary format. The cumulative
format shall segregate a particular tamper information and summary report shall show count of tamper
occurrence, restoration and the duration for which meter has remained under tamper condition.

In BCS, tamper events must be followed as per Table 32-38 as per IS 15959. However, final tamper logic
will be given at the time of sample testing. Before issuing the purchase order bidder has to confirm with
letter to comply the said tamper logic. In display, first tamper occurrence & last tamper occurrence &
restoration with date & time and total tamper count must be available.

Facility to view data incorporating External multiplying factor due to Installed CTs & PT shall be
provided.
The software shall be capable of preparing CMRI to read the meter information or to reconfigure the
meter for change the setting of the meter as per IS 15959:2011.

The BCS shall have the facility for ASCII conversion of all recorded meter data. There shall be user
friendly approach for viewing meter data for the reading collected now or for the reading collected in the
past. All information about a particular meter shall be segregated and available at one place so that
locating any past data is easy. It shall be possible to locate/retrieve data on the basis of one of the
following particulars:

a) Meter Serial No.

b) Date of meter reading
c) Location

The BCS shall have multi level password for data protection and security. The first level shall allow the
user to enter the system. The different software features shall be protected by different passwords. The
configuration of passwords shall be user definable. The software installed on one PC shall not be copy-
able on to another PC.
It is very important that the BCS has the feature to export available data to ASCII format for integrating
with the WBSEDCL billing system. Here again a wizard shall be available whereby user can select file
format (for ASCII), what data to export, the field width selection (whether 8 characters or 10 characters,
to include decimal point or not, number of digits after decimal point etc).

Help shall be available with the software so that user can use all the features of the software by just
reading the Help contents.

Following parameters shall be made available at downloaded data:

i. TOD wise Cumulative Active Froward Energy ( Import ) (Total & Fundamental )
ii. TOD wise Cumulative Active Froward Energy ( Export ) (Total & Fundamental )
iii. TOD wise Cumulative Apparent Froward Energy ( Import ) (Total & Fundamental )
iv. TOD wise Cumulative Apparent Froward Energy ( Export ) (Total & Fundamental )
v. History 1 TOD wise Cumulative Active Froward Energy ( Import )
vi. History 1 TOD wise Cumulative Active Froward Energy ( Export )
vii. History 1 TOD wise Cumulative Apparent Froward Energy ( Import )
viii. History 1 TOD wise Cumulative Apparent Froward Energy ( Export )
ix. TOD wise Apparent Maximum Demand ( Import)
x. TOD wise Apparent Maximum Demand ( Export)

Instantaneous, Block Load Survey and Daily Profile Parameters as per IS 15959:2011, Annexure
D(Table No. 24, 25 and 26) must be available at BCS end data.

23.0 LOAD SURVEY:

The meter shall be capable of recording load survey data both in graphical as well as tabular format
having at lease the following parameters for a period of minimum 45 days for 15-minute integration
period:

Page 8
WBSEDECL
 i. Phase wise Voltage
ii. Phase wise Current
iii. Average Power Factor
iv. Active Energy
v. Reactive Energy
vi. Apparent Energy

Real time & date shall be shown in all the load survey graphs and table.

24.0 MEASUREMENT OF ENERGY:

The meter shall be capable of measuring Fundamental Energy as well Total Energy i.e. Fundamental plus
Harmonics Energy. Total Energy shall be made available on meter display. Both Total & Fundamental
Energy shall be provided in BCS end data.

25.0 MARKING OF METERS:

Every meter shall have a nameplate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with
the relevant Standard mentioning ―Category - All.

The following information shall appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover:
i. Manufacturers name or trademark and place of manufacture
ii. Designation of type
iii. Number of phases and wires
iv. Serial number of meter
v. Month and year of manufacture
vi. Principal unit of measurement
vii. P.T. Ratio
viii. Basic current and rated maximum current
ix. C.T. Ratio
x. Reference frequency in Hz
xi. Meter constant (impulse/unit)
xii. Class index of meter
xiii. Reference temperature
xiv. “Property of WBSEDCL”
xv. Purchaser‘s Order No. & Date
xvi. Guarantee for 5 & ½ years from the date of supply
xvii. Sign of insulation
xviii. Bar coded serial number, month & year of manufacture

The meter shall also store name plate details as given in the Table - 30 of IS 15959:2011

26.0 COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY:

The meter shall be provided with two ports for communication of the measured/collected data. The
hardware port (with sealing facility) compatible with RS 485 specifications which shall be used for
remote access through suitable Modem and an Optical port complying with hardware specifications
detailed in IEC-62056-21. This shall be used for local data downloading through a DLMS compliant
HHU or direct through BCS.

Both ports shall support the default and minimum baud rate of 9600 bps.

Optical Cord (for connecting Optical Port of Meter to PC) must be having USB connector.

Data downloading time from meter to HHU/PC shall be within 2 minutes for meter data (without load
survey) and within 6 minutes for meter data (with load survey).

Page 9
WBSEDECL
27.0 HAND HELD UNIT(HHU):
To enable local reading of meter data a DLMS compliant HHU (DOS based) shall be used. The HHU
shall be as per IS 15959:2011. It shall be compatible to the DLMS compliant energy meters that are to be
procured/supplied on the basis of the specification having at least one USB communication port.

28.0 TAMPER & FRAUD MONITORING FEATURES:

The meter shall work satisfactorily even under presence of various influencing factors, like, external
magnetic field, electromagnetic field, radio frequency interference, vibrations, harmonic distortion,
voltage/frequency fluctuations, and electromagnetic high frequency field etc.

The meter shall be immune to abnormal voltage/frequency generating devices and shall record the
occurrence and restoration of all tamper events and related snapshots as per Annexure-G of IS
15959:2011.

The meters shall work even in the presence of any two potential wires.

Meter shall work correctly irrespective of phase sequence.

Tamper details shall be stored in internal memory for retrieval by authorized personnel through either of
the following:
a) DLMS compliant HHU
b) Remote access through suitable communication network
c) Directly connected PC
Meter shall have a continuous and clear indication / annunciation in its display if top cover is
removed/opened and even if re-fixed (non roll over) and only cover open must be logged in BCS without
any restoration. Auto scroll display may be sacrificed for that COVER OPEN.

Minimum 400 no. of events shall be available in the meter memory (preferably compartment wise, i.e.
200 no. of events for occurrences & 200 no. of events for restoration) with date & time stamp and
snapshot.

Default occurrence and restoration time shall be 5 minutes for all tamper events except for Magnetic
Tamper, Neutral Disturbance & Cover Open events.

Final tamper logic and threshold values as per requirement of WBSEDCL will be supplied at the time of
Sample Testing. Before issue of the purchase order, bidder has to provide in writing his consent on
compliance of the tamper logic within stipulated period.

All the tamper information logged by the meter shall be available in BCS with snapshot, date & time
stamp as per Table 32 to 39 of IS 15959:2011 with every occurrence and restoration of event.

Properly designed meter tamper logic with threshold value, shall be provided and clearly explained in the
bid.

The tamper logic shall be capable of discriminating the system abnormalities from source side and load
side and it shall not log / record tamper due to source side abnormalities. The meter shall be able to
distinguish between HT PT fuse blowing and single phasing, and, record the former.

29.0 TYPE TESTS:

Meters shall be fully type tested as per relevant Standard (IS 15959) (latest version). The type test
certificates shall be submitted as per IS 15959 along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall
be liable for rejection. The type test certificate shall not be more than five years old from the Due date of
submission of Tender.

Page 10
WBSEDECL
30.0 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TESTS:
All acceptance tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out at Meter Manufacturer‘s Works in the
presence of WBSEDCL representatives.

Further Purchaser shall reserve the right to pick up energy meters at random from the lots offered and get
the meter tested from NABL accredited lab. The supplier has no right to contest the test results of NABL
accredited lab or for additional test and has to replace/take corrective action at the cost of the supplier.

31.0 INSPECTION:
The inspection shall be carried out at any stage of manufacture, by the WBSEDCL authorized
representatives, with prior intimation to the supplier. The manufacturer shall grant all reasonable facilities
for testing free of charge for inspection and testing to satisfy the purchaser that the materials to be
supplied are in accordance with their specification.

The supplier shall keep the WBSEDCL informed in advance, about the manufacturing program so that
the arrangement can be made for inspection.

The representative / Engineer of the WBSEDCL attending the above testing shall carry out testing as per
relevant standards and issue test certificate approval to the manufacturer and give clearance for dispatch.

32.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

The meter manufacturer shall have a comprehensive quality assurance program at all stages of
manufacture for ensuring products giving reliable, trouble free performance. Details of the
Manufacturer‘s quality assurance and test set up shall be furnished with the bid. A detailed quality
assurance program shall be finalized with the successful bidder during the award stage.
Bidder shall furnish following information along with his bid:

a. Organization structure of the manufacturer and his main sub-suppliers (PCBs, SMT cards,
CT/PT) with details of “QA” setup, overall workflow
b. Copy of system manual showing “QAP” (Quality Assurance Plan) as actually practiced during
manufacturing and final testing
c. List of raw materials and critical components (ASIC chip, crystal clock, memory register Chip,
transformers, optical ports etc.) with their suppliers and procurement details
d. Stage inspection of product before final testing
e. Procedure adopted for In-situ testing of PCBs, after placement of surface mounted component,
for quantitative parametric variation of tolerance by self or sub-contractor.
f. Testing and calibration facility, date of calibration of test bench, manpower data of bench
operators
g. Sample copies of test certificate of bought out components

33.0 TESTING FACILITIES:

Meter Manufacturer shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration:
a. Insulation resistance measurement
b. Running at no load
c. Starting current test
d. Limits of error
e. Dial Test
f. Power loss in voltage and current circuit
g. Repeatability of error
h. Transportation test
i. Tamper Test
j. Ageing Test

The meter manufacturer shall give a detailed list of bought out items with name of the manufacturer and
details about quality control.

Page 11
WBSEDECL
34.0 GUARANTEE:
Equipment (Meter & CMRI) supplied shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 & ½ years from the date of
supply.

Bidders shall guarantee to replace the meters, which are found to be defective/inoperative at the time of
installation, or become inoperative/ defective during guarantee period. Replacements shall be effected
within 1 month from the date of intimation.

35.0 FIXING & SEALING ARRANGEMENT:

Every meter shall have three fixing holes, i.e, one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be
provided with a special clip at the back of the meter so that holding screw is not accessed by the
consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed
terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.

Necessary provision may be kept for fixing the utility seal also.

The manufacturer’s seal provided with the meter shall be of high quality with tamper proof features.

36.0 SUPPLY OF POWER PACK, HHU, COMMUNICATION CORD (HHU to PC & METER to
PC):
For every 50 no. of meters and part thereof one power pack (if internal battery is not provided) and one
HHU (DOS based) & 50 no. of communication cord for each type ( Meter to CMRI and Meter to PC;
USB type) shall be supplied free of cost.
The guarantee period of HHU and Power Pack will be of 66 months from the date of last dispatch.

37.0 SUBMISSION OF SAMPLE ENERGY METER & DOCUMENTS:

Bidder has to submit sample Meters, as per date mentioned in NIT, to the office of [Link],
WBSEDCL, for sample testing as part of technical evaluation of the NIT.

38.0 SCHEDULES:

The meter manufacturer shall submit the following schedules (as per Standard Format), which is part and
parcel of the Specification.
Schedule A: Guaranteed Technical Particulars
Schedule B: List of Raw Material (as per enclosed format)
Schedule C: Pre Qualification Condition
Schedule D: List of Documents to be submitted during sample submission

Normally the offer shall be as per Technical Specification without any deviation.

Page 12
WBSEDECL
But any deviation from Specified Standards, Specified Test Requirement, Technical Specification felt
necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of equipment must be mentioned in the
‘Deviation Schedule’ with reasons of such deviation. Such deviation suggested may or may not be
accepted by WBSEDCL. Deviations not mentioned in Deviation Schedule will never be considered.

Schedule - A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33 KV STATIC TRIVECTOR METER

Sl. Description Required Specification Manufacturer’s

No. particulars
1 Maker’s name and country To be mentioned
2 Type of meter/model To be mentioned
3 Accuracy class 0.5S
4 Parameters displayed To be mentioned
5 P.F. Range 4 Quadrant
6 Basic Current (Ib) 1A
7 Maximum Current 200 % of Ib
8 Minimum starting current 0.1% of Ib
9 Rated Voltage Ph-N;63.5V
Variation of voltage at which meter functions -30% to + 20% of Vref
10
normally
11 Rated Frequency 50Hz
Power Loss in Voltage & Current circuits Voltage Circuit Less than
1.5W/8VA, Current Circuit
12
Less than 1VA. (Less VA/
Watt getting the preference)
13 Dynamic range To be mentioned
MD reset Provisions a) Through authenticated
CMRI or Remote
14 Communication Command
b) Automatic resetting at
preset date & time
No. of digits of display and height of character Seven segment, minm. 7
digit Liquid Crystal Display
15 (LCD) with backlit or LED,
having minimum character
height of 10 mm.
16 Size of Non volatile memory To be mentioned
17 Principle of operation To be mentioned
18 MD Integration period 15 Minutes
19 Weight of meter To be mentioned
20 Dimensions To be mentioned
Warranty 5 & ½ years from date of
21
supply
22 Outline drawings & Leaflets To be furnished
a) Remote meter-readout facility To be mentioned
b) Communication protocol used. To be mentioned
c) Sealing provision for meter & optical port. To be mentioned
d) Baud rate of data transmission
23 e) Required software to be resident in CMRI To be mentioned
and BCS. To be mentioned
f) Ultrasonic welding of body
g) Manufacturer’s Seal provided To be mentioned
To be mentioned

Page 13
WBSEDECL
 Base Computer Software Compatible with Windows
24
7,8 and 10
25 Type Test Certificates To be furnished
26 Time of Day Zones (Selectable) To be mentioned
27 Whether meter measures both fundamental & Both required
Harmonic Energy
28 Real Time Clock Accuracy Max. drift per annum ±300
sec for Class 0.5S.
29 Anti Tamper Features To be mentioned in details.
30 Data retention by NVM without battery back 10 years
up and un-powered condition.
31 Guarantee period of meter 66 months from the date of
supply. Guarantee period
shall be printed on the
nameplate.
32 BIS license To be mentioned
32.1 BIS license No. & dt. with its validity for ISI To be mentioned
certification mark on offered meter.
32.2 Details of meter design for which above BIS To be mentioned
certification has been obtained: -
(i) Ratio of Ib to Imax
(ii) Material of meter body
(iii) Grade of printed circuit Board material
(iv) Type of assembly of component used (SMT)
(v) Meter constant (IMP / MWh)
(vi) Auxiliary power circuit (with PT or PT less)
(vii) Accuracy class
33 ISO accreditation no. & date with its validity Conform to specification of
IS- 14697 / 1999 & CBIP
technical report No.88 (with
its latest amendment)
34 Other parameters / features not covered in the Copies of order executed in
above GTP last three years along with
GTP of the supplied meters
to be enclosed.
35 Past Experience Past experience to be
considered for manufacturing
meter as per IS: 14697 &
CBIP- 88/304

Page 14
WBSEDECL
 Schedule - B

Component Make / Origin

Sl. No.
Function / Feature
1 Current Element
2 Measurement /Computing chips
3 Memory chips
4 Display modules
5 Communication modules
6 Optical port
7 Power Supply
8 Electronic components
9 Mechanical parts
10 Battery
11 RTC / Micro controller

Schedule-C
Pre-Qualification Conditions for HT Static Meters

Sl. No. Particulars Remarks

Meter Manufacturer must have valid BIS certification for Yes / No
1 the offered meter. If it has started to issue by appropriate
authority.
Meter Manufacturer preferably possesses ISO 9001 Yes / No
2
certification
Meter Manufacturer shall be manufacturers of static Yes / No
meters having supplied Static LT, 11/33 KV H.T. Meters
3
with memory and LCD display as per IS 14697 & CBIP
325 to Electricity Boards / Utilities in the past 3 years.
Meter Manufacturer shall have dust free, static protected Yes / No
4
environment for manufacture, assembly and Testing.
Meter Manufacturer shall have automatic computerized Yes / No
5
test bench for lot testing of meters.
6 Meter Manufacturer has facilities of Oven for ageing test. Yes / No

Schedule – D

Sl. LIST OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED

No. DURING SAMPLE SUBMISSION
1 Attested copy of type test reports from NABL
accredited laboratory as per new IS(If Published)
2 Attested copy of BIS certificates of the same type of
meter submitted as sample
3 Attested certificates as regards material used for meter
case, cover & terminal block.
4 Annexure - II as per tender documents
5 Annexure - III as per tender documents
6 Operating manual & Tamper logic of the meter
submitted

Page 15
WBSEDECL
 ANNEXURE - V
Component Specifications:

The meters shall be designed and manufactured using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) components,
except for power supply components, LCD etc., which are PTH type. All the material and electronic
power components used in the manufacture of the meter shall be of highest quality and reputed makes
so as to ensure higher reliability, longer life and sustained accuracy.

Component
Sl No. Requirement Make / origin
Function / Feature
Current Transformer Any make or origin
1 Current Element
conforming to IS-2705
The Measurement / computing USA:Analog Devices,
chips used in the meter shall be AMS, Cyrus Logic,
with the Surface mount type. Atmel, SAMES, Texas
Measurement / computing
2 Instruments,Teridian,
chips
Japan: NEC,Freescale,
Renesas, Holland:
Phillps
The memory computing chips USA: National Semi
shall not be affected by the Conductor, Atmel,
external parameters like SAMES, Texas
sparking, high voltage spikes or Instruments,Teridian,
3 Memory chips
electrostatic discharges. ST Japan: Hitachi,
OKI, Freescale,
Renesas, Holland /
Korea: Phillps
The display modules shall be Singapore: Bonafied
well protected from the external Technologies, Korea:
UV radiations. The display Advantek, Japan :
shall be clearly visible over an Hitachi, SONY,
angle of at least a cone of Hijing,Truly
[Link] construction of the Semiconductor.
4 Display modules
modules shall be such that the
displayed quantity shall not
disturbed with the life of
display. The display shall be
TN type industrial grade with
extended temperature range.
Communication modules shall USA: National
be compatible for the RS 232 Semiconductors, HP,
ports. ST, Texas Instruments,
Agilent, USA / Korea:
Communication
5 Fairchild Holland/
modules
Korea: Philips, Japan:
Ligitek, Hitachi,
Germany: Siemens,
Tiwan: Everlight,
Optical port shall be used to USA: National
transfer the meter data to meter Semiconductors, Texas
reading instrument. The Instruments, HP,
6 Optical port mechanical construction of the Agilent, Japan: Hitachi,
port shall be such to facilitate , Germany:Siemens,
the data transfer easily. Holland / Korea:Philips,
Tiwan:Everlight,

Page 16
WBSEDECL
 The power supply shall be with SMPS Type
the capabilities as per the
relevant standards. The power
supply unit of the meter shall
7 Power Supply not be affected in case the
maximum voltage of the system
appears to the terminals due to
faults or due to wrong
connections.
The active & passive Philips, Toshiba,
components shall be of the Fairchild, Murata,
surface mount type & are to be Rohm, Siemens.
handled & soldered by the state National
8 Electronic components
of art assembly processes. Semiconductors,
ATMEL, Texas
Instruments, Hitachi.
Ligitec, OKI, EPCOS
The internal electrical
components shall be of
electrolytic copper & shall be
protected from corrosion, rust
9 Mechanical parts etc. The other mechanical
components shall be protected
from rust, corrosion etc. by
suitable plating / painting
methods.
Lithium / Lithium-ion /NiMh Renata, Panasonic,
with guaranteed life of 10 years Varta, Tadiran, Sanyo,
National, Tekcell,
10 Battery
Duracell, Maxell,
Elegance, Mitshubishi

The accuracy of RTC shall be USA: Dallas, Atmel,

as per controller relevant IEC / Motorola, NEC,
IS standards Renesas, Texas
Instruments, ST, Micro
11 RTC / Micro
chips, Teridian Holland
/ Korea: Philips, Japan:
NEC, OKI,Hitachi,
Mitsubishi, Freescale

Page 17
WBSEDECL
 SCHEDULE - II
Undertaking from Meter manufacturer

We hereby confirm that the meter(s) type _____________________

i)
ii)
iii)
offered by us against your tender No._____________________ through
M/s._______________________ are in our range of production.

We also confirm that these meters will not be phased out by us in the next 10 years from the date of
supply. Necessary repairs/replacements if necessary during this period will be made available by us.

Name & Designation:

Company Seal :

Page 18
WBSEDECL
 STANDARD
TECHNICAL SPECIFCATION

FOR

3Ph 4 WIRE HT CT/PT OPERATED FULLY STATIC

AMR COMPATIBLE DLMS COMPLIANT – CATEGORY ‘A’

TRI-VECTOR ENERGY METER

FOR

11 KV FEEDER
TECHNICAL SPECIFCATION FOR 3PHASE 4 WIRE CT, PT OPERATED 3PHASE LAG PLUS
LEAD ONLY FULLY STATIC AMR COMPATIBLE TRI-VECTOR ENERGY METER FOR 11
KV FEEDER

1.0 SCOPE
Design, manufacturing, testing, supply and delivery of AC, 3 Phase, 4 Wire CT,PT operated lag plus lead
only fully Static and AMR compatible Tri-Vector Energy Meters for measurement of different electrical
parameters listed elsewhere in the document including Active Energy (kWh), Reactive Energy (kVArh),
Apparent Energy (kVAh) etc.

2.0 APPLICATION
FEEDER METER – Category “A”

3.0 STANDARDS TO WHICH METERS SHALL COMPLY

IS-14697:1999(2004) Specification for AC Static Transformer operated Watt Hour & VAR-Hour meters
(class 0.5S);

IS-15959:2011 Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading Tariff & Load Control – Companion
Specification

CBIP – 304 & 325 Manual on Standardization of AC Static Electrical Energy Meter

IEC 62052-11 Electricity metering equipment (AC) –General requirements, tests and test conditions -Part
11: Metering equipment;

IEC 62053-22 Electricity metering equipment (AC) –Particular requirements - Part-22: Static Meters for
Active Energy (Class 0.5S);

IEC 62053-23 Electricity metering equipment (AC) –Particular requirements - Part-23: Static Meters for
Reactive Energy;

IS 15707 Specification for Testing, evaluation, installation & maintenance of AC Electricity Meters-Code
of Practice.

Guidelines on “Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control – Companion
Specification”

IEC 62056-21 Electricity metering: Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control- Part 21:
Direct local data exchange

IEC 62056-31 Electricity metering: Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control -Part 31: Local
Area Network data exchange

IEC 62056-61 Electricity metering: Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control- Part 61:
Object identification system (OBIS)

The equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure equal or better
quality than the standard mentioned above, also shall be considered; in case of conflict the Guidelines on
“Data Exchange for Electricity Meter Reading, Tariff and Load Control – Companion Specification” shall
prevail upon.
4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
AMR Compatible Static, 3Ph, 4Wire 11KV Tri-Vector Energy Meter
1 TYPE
for Feeder.
2 FREQUENCY 50 Hz ± 5%
3 ACCURACY CLASS 0.5S
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
4 110V Ph-Ph, (3P, 4W) 63.5V Ph - N
RATING
5 VOLTAGE VARIATION (-) 30% to (+) 20%

BASIC CURRENT (Ib) & Ib- 1A, Imax – 2A, CT Ratio : -/1 A
6
CURRENT RATING
MAXIMUM
7 CONTINUOUS As per IS 14697:1999(2004)
CURRENT

8 STARTING CURRENT 0.1% of Ib at UPF

The active and apparent power consumption, in each voltage circuit, at

reference voltage, reference temperature and reference frequency shall
not exceed 1. 5 W and 8 VA.
9 POWER CONSUMPTION
The apparent power taken by each current circuit, at basic current,
reference frequency and reference temperature shall not exceed 1.0
VA.

10 POWER FACTOR 0 Lag – Unity – 0 Lead

Meter shall be designed with application specific integrated circuit

(ASIC) or micro controller; shall have no moving part; electronic
components shall be assembled on printed circuit board using surface
11 DESIGN mounting technology; factory calibration using high accuracy (0.05
class) software based test bench.

Assembly of electronic components shall be as per ANSI /IPC-A-

610 standard.
DLMS TEST Manufacturer must have test certificate for Category - Ameter for
12
CERTIFICATE conformance to DLMS from CPRI

5.0 TEMPARATURE RISE

Under normal condition of use, winding and insulation shall not reach a temperature, which might
adversely affect the operation of the meters. IS14697:1999(2004) to be followed.

6.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

Temperature : -10 C to 55 C (in shade)
Humidity : up to 95% RH non-condensing
Average annual rainfall : 150 cm
Max Wind Pressure : 150 kg/sqm
Max. Altitude above MSL : 3000 m

7.0 TROPICAL TREATMENT

The meters shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under hot &
hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts & surface, which
are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective
finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.

8.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENT/ METER COVER & SEALING

ARRANGEMENT
Wherever poly carbonate cover is specified, it shall conform to IS 11731 (FH-1category) besides meeting
the test requirement of heat deflection test as per ISO 75, glow wire test as per the IS:11000 (part 2/SEC-1)
1984 OR IEC PUB,60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC--60695-10-2 and Flammability Test As per
UL 94 or As per IS 11731(Part-2) 1986.

9.0 CONSTRUCTION
The case, winding, voltage circuit, sealing arrangements, registers, terminal block, terminal cover & name
plate etc. shall be in accordance with the relevant standards. The meter shall be compact & reliable in
design, easy to transport & immune to vibration & shock involved in the transportation & handling. The
construction of the meter shall ensure consistence performance under all conditions especially during
heavy rains / very hot weathers. The insulating materials used in the meter shall be non-hygroscopic, non-
ageing & have tested quality.

The meter shall comply latest technology such as Microcontroller or Application Specific Integrated
Circuit (ASIC) to ensure reliable performance. The mounting of the components on the PCB shall
compulsorily be Surface Mounted Technology (SMT) type. Power supply component may be of PTH
type. The electronic components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the
accuracy of the meter for at least ten years. The circuitry of the meter shall be compatible with 16 Bit (or
better) ASIC with compatible processor and meter shall be based on Digital measuring and sampling
technique.

The meter shall be housed in a safe, high grade, unbreakable, fire resistant, UV stabilized, virgin
Polycarbonate/ High grade engineering plastic/Thermosetting Plastic casing of projection mounting type.
The meter cover shall be transparent, for easy viewing of displayed parameters and observation of
operation indicators. The meter base may or may not be transparent, but it shall not be black in colour.
The meter casing shall not change shape, size, and dimensions when subjected to 200 Hrs. on UV test as
per ASTMD 53. It shall withstand 650°C. glow wire test and heat deflection test as per ISO 75.

Meters must be supplied with 2 (two) nos. manufacturers’ seals between meter base and meter cover at
both the sides.

Both the communication ports (Optical and RS 485 port) shall have proper sealing arrangement.

The bidder shall submit relevant documents (collected form Meter Manufacturer) regarding the
procurement of polycarbonate material. The polycarbonate material of only the following manufacturers
shall be used.
 a) G.E. Plastics/Sabic: LEXAN 943A or LEXAN 143 or LEXAN 123R or equivalent for Meter &
Terminal cover, and LEXAN 503R or 500R or equivalent for base.
b) BAYER/SABIC: Grade corresponding to above
c) DOW Chemicals: -Do-
d) MITSUBISHI: -Do-
e) TEJIN: -Do-
f) DUPONT: -Do-

10.0 METER CASE AND COVER

The meter shall be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter becomes inaccessible and
attempts to open the meter shall result in viable damage to the meter cover. This is to be achieved by
using continuous Ultrasonic welding on the Meter body, fully flushed between case and cover. In
case, ultrasonic welding using plate/strip is used the material of plate/strip shall be same as that of cover
and base and the strip shallflush with meter body. The manufacturer’s logo shall be embossed on the
strip / plate.

The meter cover shall be fixed to the meter base (case) with Unidirectional Screws, so that the same cannot
be opened by use of screwdrivers. The meter shall withstand external magnetic influence as per latest
amendments of CBIP Technical Report No. 304.

11.0 TERMINAL BLOCK AND COVER

The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical
strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material
(capable of passing the flammability tests) with nickel plated brass inserts / alloy inserts for connecting
terminals.

The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor
with the help of screw adjustable metal plates to increase the surface of contact and reduce the contact
resistance. The screws shall have thread size not less than M 4 and head having 4-6mm. diameters. The
screws shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws shall be of
tinned/nickel plated brass material.

The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be minimum 5.5 mm. The holes in the insulating material shall
be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also.

The terminal cover shall be transparent High grade Engineering Plastic/Polycarbonate/ Thermosetting
Plastic with minimum thickness 2.0 mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely
covering the terminal block and fixing holes. The space inside the terminal cover shall be sufficient to
accommodate adequate length of external cables.

12.0 WORKING ENVIRONMENT

As per IS 14697:1999(2004). Meter to perform satisfactorily under Non-Air Conditioned environment
(within stipulations of IS) IP51 housing for indoors.

The meter shall be suitable designed for satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate
conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion,
shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective finish, which provided
suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.
13.0 MANUFACTURING PROCESS, ASSEMBLY AND TESTING
Meters shall be manufactured using latest and ‘state of the art’ technology and methods prevalent in
electronics industry. The meter shall be made from high accuracy and reliable surface mount technology
(SMT) components. All inward flow of major components and sub assembly parts (CT, PT, RTCs /
Crystal, LCDs, LEDs, power circuit electronic components etc.) shall have batch and source identification.
Multilayer ‘PCB’ assembly with ‘PTH’ using surface mounted component shall have adequate track
clearance for power circuits. SMT component shall be assembled using automatic ‘pick-and-place’
machines, Reflow Soldering oven, for stabilized setting of the components on ‘PCB’. For soldered PCBs,
cleaning and washing of cards, after wave soldering process is to be carried out as a standard practice.
Assembly line of the manufacturing system shall have provision for testing of sub-assembled cards.
Manual placing of components and soldering, to be minimized to items, which cannot be handled by
automatic machine. Handling of ‘PCB’ with ICs / C-MOS components, to be restricted to bare minimum
and precautions to prevent ‘ESD’ failure. Complete assembled and soldered PCB shall undergo functional
testing using Computerized Automatic Test Equipment.

Fully assembled and finished meter shall under go ‘burn-in’ test process for 24 Hours at 55°C
([Link] not to exceed 60°C) under base current (Ib) load condition.

Test points shall be provided to check the performance of each block/stage of the meter circuitry.

RTC shall be synchronized with NPL time at the time of manufacture. Meters testing at intermediate and
final stage shall be carried out with testing instruments, duly calibrated with reference standard, with
traceability of source and date.

14.0 DISPLAY OF MEASURED VALUES

The meter display shall have 7 digits(complete) for energy counter with alphanumeric digits for parameter
identifier and tamper indication with backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of minimum 10 mm height,
wide viewing angle suitable for temperature withstand of 70° C. LCD to be of ‘STN’ (super twisted
nematic) type construction.

The data stored in the meters shall not be lost in the event of power failure. The meter shall have Non
Volatile Memory (NVM), which does not need any battery backup. The NVM shall have a minimum
retention period of 10 years.

Mr shall have facility to display any one desired parameter that can be kept on display for minimum 10
Meter shall have Scroll Lock facility to display any one desired parameter from display parameters
continuously.

Auto display cycling of each parameter shall be 10-12 Seconds. The time between two auto display cycles
shall be 20 sec. OBIS code in display is not required.

It shall be possible to easily identify the single or multiple displayed parameters through symbols/legend
on the meter display itself or through display annunciation.

All active Energy parameters shall be displayed in kWh.

Display in AUTO Mode:

 i) LCD Test
ii) Meter Serial Number
iii) Real Time & Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
iv) Rising Apparent Demand with elapsed time
v) Power Failure Event Duration in current month (hh:mm:ss)
vi) Power Failure Event Count in current month
vii) Cumulative Power Failure Event Duration (dddd:hh:mm)
viii) Cumulative Power Failure Count
ix) Cumulative Active Energy (Cumulative sign/legend must be given)
x) Cumulative Reactive Energy Lag (do)
xi) Cumulative Reactive Energy Lead (do)
xii) Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy
xiii) Present Month Apparent Forward Max. Demand (0-24 hrs) (with minimum 2 decimal)
xiv) TOD Wise Total Active Forward Energy
xv) TOD Wise Apparent Energy
xvi) TOD Wise Apparent Max. Demand (with 2 decimal)
xvii) Cumulative Apparent Maximum Demand (Cumulative sign/legend must be given)
xviii) Cumulative Billing Count
xix) Cumulative Tamper Count
xx) Phase sequence & phase correspondences of Voltage & Current
xxi) Connection Check
xxii) Self-Diagnosis

Display in PUSH BUTTON Mode:

All the Auto Display Mode Parameters under serial no. I to xvii and then,

xxiii) Cumulative Active Forward Energy (History 1)

xxiv) TOD wise Cumulative Active Forward Energy (History 1)
xxv) Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (History 1)
xxvi) TOD wise Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (History 1)
xxvii) History 1 Apparent Forward MD (0-24hrs) with Date & Time
xxviii) History 1 TOD Apparent Forward MD with Date & Time
xxix) Last Billing Date and Time
xxx) Power Failure Event Duration (History 1)
xxxi) Power Failure Event Count ( History 1)
xxxii) Phase Sequence & phase correspondences of Voltage & Current
xxxiii) Connection Check
xxxiv) Self-Diagnosis
xxxv) Battery Status
xxxvi) Cumulative Programming Count
xxxvii) Present/ Last MD Reset Time and Date
xxxviii) Instantaneous Secondary Voltages –Phase wise (P-N)
xxxix) Instantaneous Secondary Currents – Phase wise
xl) Signed Instantaneous Power Factor – Phase wise
xli) Instantaneous Net Power Factor
xlii) Billed Average Power Factor (History 1)
xliii) Signed Instantaneous Active Power
 xliv) Instantaneous Apparent Power
xlv) Instantaneous Frequency
xlvi) Present Tamper Status
xlvii) First Tamper EventOccurrence with Date & Time
xlviii) Last Tamper EventOccurrence with Date & Time
xlix) Last Tamper EventRestoration with Date & Time
l) Front Cover Open with Date and Time
li) High Resolution Cumulative Forward Active Energy
lii) High Resolution Cumulative Forward Reactive Energy (Lag)
liii) High Resolution Cumulative Forward Active Energy (Lead)
liv) High Resolution Cumulative Forward Apparent Energy

Display in Power OFF Mode

i) Meter Serial Number

ii) Real Time & Date (dd/mm/yyyy)
iii) Cumulative Active Forward Energy
iv) Cumulative Reactive Energy(Lag)
v) Cumulative Reactive Energy(Lead)
vi) Cumulative Apparent Energy
vii) Current Apparent Forward MD with Date & Time
viii) Cumulative Active Forward Energy (History 1)
ix) Cumulative Apparent Forward Energy (History 1)
x) Apparent Forward MD (History 1)
xi) Power Failure Event Count (History 1)
xii) Power Failure Event Duration (History 1)

The register shall be able to record and display starting from zero, for a minimum of 2500 hours, the
energy corresponding to rated maximum current at reference voltage and unity power factor. The
register shall not roll over in between this duration.

High resolution registers shall display minimum 4 digits after decimal in case of Energy.

No decimal is required for main kWh, kVAh, kVArh (lag & lead) display.

Push button mechanism shall be of high quality and shall provide trouble free service for a long span
of time. Up and Down scrolling facility shall be there for Push Button Mode. If there is separate button
for MD reset, it shall also have scrolling facility.

15.0 MAXIMUM DEMAND

The meter shall be capable of recording the Apparent/Active MD with integration period of 15 minutes.

MD RESET OPTION
i. Automatic resetting at 00:00 Hrs. of 1st day of everyMonth (Programmable)
ii. Push Button resetting
iii. By issuing authenticated command from BCS through HHU or directly from
PC/REMOTE

MD reset button shall have proper sealing arrangement.

Specific MD Reset operation data for Present Month and History Wise (Auto/Push Button/Authenticated
Command) shall be made available for/ in downloaded data

16.0 PERFORMANCE UNDER INFLUENCE QUANTITIES

Performance of the meters under influence quantities shall be governed by IS 14697:1999 (2004). The
meter shall not exceed the permissible limits of accuracy as per standard IS 14697:1999(2004).

17.0 OUTPUT DEVICE

Energy Meter shall have test output, accessible from the front, and be capable of being monitored with
suitable testing equipment while in operation at site. The operation indicator must be visible from the front
and test output device shall be provided in the form of LED. Resolution of the test output device shall be
sufficient to enable the starting current test in less than 10 minutes. Minimum gap shall be maintained
between Active & Reactive Test LED.

18.0 REAL TIME INTERNAL CLOCK (RTC)

RTC shall be pre-programmed for 30 years day/date without any necessity for correction. The maximum
drift shall not exceed ± 300 Sec. per year.

The clock day/date setting and synchronization shall only be possible through password/Key code
command from one of the following:

a) Hand Held Unit (HHU) or directly through BCS and this shall have authentication from BCS
for individual meter
b) From remote server through suitable communication network with authentication from BCS.

19.0 TIME OF DAY FACILITIES

The meter shall have facilities to record Active, Apparent Energies and MD with a facility of 8 time zones.
The time zones shall be user programmable through authenticated command from BCS with the help of
HHU. At present only 3 (Three) TOD zones to be activated in following manners;

TOD – 1 06:00 Hrs to 17:00 Hrs

TOD – 2 17:00 Hrs to 23:00 Hrs
TOD – 3 23:00 Hrs to 06:00 Hrs

20.0 METER READING DURING POWER OFF

It shall be possible to read the meter-display visually and with MRI and in absence of input voltages with
the help of internal battery for display in power off condition or external battery pack/PPU. The interface
shall be inductive coupling.

21.0 SELF DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES

The meter shall be capable of performing complete self-diagnostic check to monitor the circuits for any
malfunctioning to ensure integrity of data memory location all the time. If possible, the details of
malfunctioning shall be recorded in the meter memory. The bidder shall furnish the details of self-
diagnostic capability feature, viz (i) Memory status, (ii)Battery status (iii) NVM & (iv) RTC Status in BCS
as well as it shall be available in display.

22.0 BASE COMPUTER SOFTWARE (BCS):

The BCS shall be compatible with Windows 10, 8.0 & 7.0 OS (or its higher version) based and user
friendly.

The data stored in the meter memory including defrauded energy shall be available on the BCS.

The data transfer shall be reliable and fraud proof.

BCS shall give all details pertaining to billing and load survey data. The meter condition details shall also
be transferred into the BCS including abnormalities/anomalies of voltage current conditions or tamper
conditions which can occur due to mistake in connections or intentionally done for the purpose of tamper.

The software shall show electrical conditions existing at the time of reading the meter in tabular forms as
well as in graphical format (Phase diagram) i.e. Phase diagram is required for voltage, current & PF only.

In BCS, data, like, total & TOD wise energy and maximum demand ( i.e, kWh, kVAh, MD in kW & kVA),
average power factor, average load factor, month wise power failure count & duration shall be available
atleast for twelve months.

All the information about energy, maximum demand and their respective TOD register readings, billing
register readings and billing history readings shall be shown in a manner which user can understand
quickly, preferably in tabular format.

All the load survey data shall be available in numerical as well as graphical format. It shall also be possible
to view this data in daily, weekly and monthly formats. The load survey graph shall show the respective
values.

All the information about tamper events shall be accompanied with date and time stamping along with the
‘SNAPSHOT’ (details) of the respective electrical conditions. This information shall be displayed in the
sequence in which it happened, in cumulative format as well as in summary format. The cumulative
format shall segregate a particular tamper information and summary report shall show count of tamper
occurrence, restoration and the duration for which meter has remained under tamper condition.

Besides other details, the following parameters shall be available in BCS through downloaded data:

i) Month wise Power Failure Event Count (History 1 – History 12)

ii) Month wise Power Failure Event Duration (hh:mm:ss) (History 1 – History 12)
iii) Power failure event count for current month
iv) Power failure duration (hh:mm:ss) for current month

In BCS, tamper events must be followed as per Table 32-38 as per IS 15959. However, final tamper logic
will be given at the time of sample testing. Before issuing the purchase order bidder has to confirm with
letter to comply the said tamper logic. In display, first tamper occurrence & last tamper occurrence &
restoration with date & time and total tamper count must be available.

Facility to view data incorporating External multiplying factor due to Installed CTs & PT shall be
provided.

The software shall be capable of preparing CMRI to read the meter information or to reconfigure the meter
for change the setting of the meter as per IS 15959:2011.

The BCS shall have the facility for ASCII conversion of all recorded meter data. There shall be user
friendly approach for viewing meter data for the reading collected now or for the reading collected in the
past. All information about a particular consumer shall be segregated and available at one place so that
locating any consumer's past data is easy. It shall be possible to locate/retrieve data on the basis of one of
the following particulars:
a) Consumer ID/Number.
b) Meter Sr. No.
c) Date of meter reading.
d) Location

The BCS shall have multilevel password for data protection and security. The first level shall allow the
user to enter the system. The different software features shall be protected by different passwords. The
configuration of passwords shall be user definable. The software installed on one PC shall not be copy-able
on to another PC.
It is very important that the BCS has the feature to export available data to ASCII format for
integrating with the WBSEDCL billing system. Here again a wizard shall be available whereby user
can select file format (for ASCII), what data to export, the field width selection (whether 8
characters or 10 characters, to include decimal point or not, number of digits after decimal point
etc).

Help shall be available with the software so that user can use all the features of the software by just reading
the Help contents.

23.0 LOAD SURVEY

The meter shall be capable of recording load survey data of Phase wise Average Voltage, Phase wise
Average current, Average Power Factor, Active Energy and Apparent Energy, Active and Apparent
Demand for a period of minimum 45 days for 15-minute integration period. Real time & date shall be
shown in all the load survey graphs and tables.

24.0 MEASUREMENT OF ENERGY

The meter shall be capable of measuring Fundamental Energy as well Total Energy i.e. Fundamental plus
Harmonics energy. Total Energy shall be made available on meter-display and the same only shall be used
for billing purpose. Fundamental Energy shall be provided in display / BCS.

The Fundamental Energy shall be logged in the meter memory and be capable of downloading to the BCS
through the HHU and be available for viewing at the BCS end.

25.0 MARKING OF METERS

Every meter shall have a nameplate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with
the relevant Standard mentioning “Category – A”. The following information shall appear on an external
plate attached to the meter cover.

i) Manufacturers’name or trademark and place of manufacture

ii) Designation of type
iii) Number of phases and wires
iv) Serial number of meter
v) Month and year of manufacture
vi) Principal unit of measurement
vii) PT Ratio
viii) CT Ratio
ix) Basic current and rated maximum current
x) Reference frequency in Hz
 xi) Meter constant (impulse/unit) i.e. impulse/kWh
xii) Class index of meter
xiii) Reference temperature
xiv) “Property of WBSEDCL”
xv) Purchase Order No. & Date
xvi) Guarantee for 5&1/2 years from the date of last supply
xvii) Sign of insulation
xviii) Barcoded Serial number of meter, month & year of manufacture

The meter shall also store name plate details as given in the Table - 30 of IS 15959:2011

26.0 COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY

The meter shall be provided with two ports for communication of the measured/collected data. The
hardware port (with sealing facility) compatible with RS 485 specifications which shall be used for remote
access through suitable Modem and an Optical port complying with hardware specifications detailed in
IEC-62056-21. This shall be used for local data downloading through a DLMS compliant HHU or direct
through BCS.

Both ports shall support the default and minimum baud rate of 9600 bps.

Optical Cord (i.e. OpticalPort of Meter to PC) must be USB type.

Data downloading time from meter to HHU/PC shall be within 2 min for meter data (without load
survey) and within 6 min for meter data with load survey.

27.0 HAND HELD UNIT (HHU)

To enable local reading of meters data a DLMS compliant HHU (DOS Based) shall be used. The HHU
shall be as per IS 15959:2011. It shall be compatible to the DLMS compliant energy meters that
areprocured/supplied on the basis of the specification having at least one USB communication port.

28.0 TAMPER & FRAUD MONITORING FEATURES

The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influencing conditions like External
Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, Harmonic Distortion,
Voltage/Frequency Fluctuations, and Electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter shall be
immune to abnormal voltage/frequency generating devices and shall record the occurrence and restoration
of all tampers and related snapshots as per Annexure – G of IS 15959:2011

The meters shall work even in the presence of any two Potential wires.

Meter shall work correctly irrespective of phase sequence.

Tamper details shall be stored in internal memory for retrieval by authorized personnel through either of
the following:

a) DLMS compliant HHU.

b) Remote access through suitable communication network.
c) Direct by PC
Meter shall have a continuous and clear indication / annunciation in its display if top cover is
removed/open and even refixed (nonrollover)and only cover open must be logged in BCS without any
restoration. Auto scroll display may be sacrificed for that COVER OPEN.

Minimum 400 no. of events (compartment wise) i.e. 200 no. of events for occurrences & 200 no. of events
for restoration with date & time and snapshot shall be available in the meter memory. Out of 400 no. of
events 300 (150 each for occurrence & restoration) shall be for Power Failure events only.

Default occurrence and restoration time shall be 5 minutes. But it shall have to be programmable.
Final tamper Logic and threshold values as per our requirement is enclosed (Annexure-VI).

All the tamper information logged by the meter shall be available in BCS with snapshot, Date & Time as
per Table 39 of IS 15959:2011 with occurrence and restoration.

Properly designed meter tamper logic with threshold value, shall be provided and clearly explained in the
bid. The tamper logic shall be capable of discriminating the system abnormalities from source side and
load side and it shall not log / record tamper due to source side abnormalities. The meter shall be able to
distinguish between HT PT fuse blowing and Single Phasing and record the former.

29.0 TYPE TESTS

Meters shall be fully type tested as per relevant Standard (IS 15959) (latest version). The type test
certificates shall be submitted as per IS 15959 along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall
be liable for rejection. The type test certificate shall not be more than five years old from the Due date of
submission of Tender.

30.0 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TESTS

All acceptance tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out at Meter Manufacturer’s Works in the
presence of WBSEDCL representatives.

Further Purchaser shall reserve the right to pick up energy meters at random from the lots offered and get
the meter tested from NABL accredited lab. The supplier has no right to contest the test results NABL
accredited lab or for additional test and has to replace/take corrective action at the cost of the supplier.

31.0 INSPECTION
The inspection shall be carried out at any stage of manufacture, by the WBSEDCL authorized
representatives, with prior intimation to the supplier. The manufacturer shall grant all reasonable facilities
for testing free of charge for inspection and testing to satisfy the purchaser that the materials to be supplied
are in accordance with their specification.

The supplier shall keep the WBSEDCL informed in advance, about the manufacturing program so
that the arrangement can be made for inspection.

The representative / Engineer of the WBSEDCL attending the above testing shall carry out testing as per
relevant standards and issue test certificate approval to the manufacturer and give clearance for dispatch.

32.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The meter manufacturer shall have a comprehensive quality assurance program at all stages of manufacture
for ensuring products giving reliable, trouble free performance. Details of the Manufacturer’s quality
assurance and test set up shall be furnished with the bid. A detailed quality assurance program shall be
finalized with the successful bidder during the award stage.
Bidder (collected from Meter Manufacturer) shall furnish following information along with his bid:

a) Organization structure of the manufacturer and his main sub-suppliers (PCBs, SMT cards, CT/PT) with
details of ‘QA’ setup, overall workflow.

b) Copy of system manual showing ‘QAP’ (Quality Assurance Plan) as actually practiced during
manufacturing and final testing.

c) List of raw materials and critical components (ASIC chip, crystal clock, memory register Chip,
transformers, optical ports etc.) with their suppliers and procurement details.

d) Stage inspection of product before final testing.

e) Procedure adopted for ‘In-situ’ testing of PCBs, after placement of surface mounted component, for
quantitative parametric variation of tolerance by self or sub-contractor.

f) Testing and calibration facility, date of calibration of test bench, manpower data of bench operators;

g) Sample copies of test certificate of bought out components.

33.0 TESTING FACILITIES

The Bidder (Meter Manufacturer) shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate
calibration:
a) Insulation resistance measurement
b) Running at no load
c) Starting current test
d) Limits of error
e) Dial Test
f) Power loss in voltage and current circuit
g) Repeatability of error
h) Transportation test
i) Tamper Test
j) Ageing Test

The Bidder (Meter Manufacturer) shall give a detailed list of bought out items with name of
themanufacturer and details about quality control.

34.0 GUARANTEE
Equipment (Meter & CMRI) supplied shall be guaranteed for a period of 5 & ½ years from the date of last
despatch. Bidders shall guarantee to replace the meters, which are found to be defective/inoperative at the
time of installation, or become inoperative/ defective during guarantee period. Replacements shall be
effected within 1 month from the date of intimation.

35.0 FIXING & SEALING ARRANGEMENT

Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be
provided with a special clip at the back of the meter so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer
after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover.
The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.

Necessary provision may be kept for fixing the utility seal also.
The manufacturers seal provided with the meter shall be of high quality with tamper proof features.

36.0 SUBMISSION OF SAMPLE ENERGY METER & DOCUMENTS

Bidder has to submit sample Meters, as per date mentioned in NIT, to the office ofthe
CE,DTD,WBSEDCL, for sample testing as part of technical evaluation of the NIT.

37.0 SCHEDULES
The Bidder shall submit the following schedules (as per Standard Format), which is part and parcel of the
Specification.

Schedule A Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Schedule B List of Raw Materials (as per enclosed format)
Schedule C Pre Qualification Condition
Schedule D List of Documents to be submitted during sample submission

Normally the offer shall be as per Technical Specification without any deviation.
But any deviation from Specified Standards, Specified Test Requirement, Technical Specification
felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of equipment must be mentioned in
the ‘Deviation Schedule’ with reasons of such deviation. Such deviation suggested may or may
not be accepted. Deviations not mentioned in Deviation Schedule will never be considered.

P K Banerjee A Banerjee S K Ghosh S Chakraborty A Bir D K Pal

CE: P&E-Dist Advisor(Engg) CE: P&CD CE:DTD CE: CCD CE: REM

S K Ghatak A Mitra S Das P K Nayek M M De D K P al

ACE: REM ACE:DTD ACE: P&CD ACE: Project-III ACE: Dist ACE: Comn

S K Guha S N Mukherjee A K Biswas

ACE: P&E SE(E): P&E DE(E): DTD
 Schedule - A

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV STATIC

TRIVECTOR METERS
Manufacturer’s
[Link]. Description Required Specification
particulars

1 Maker’s name and country To be mentioned

2 Type of meter/model To be mentioned
3 Accuracy class 0.5s
4 Parameters displayed To be mentioned
5 P.F. Range 0 Lag – Unity - 0 Lead
6 Basic Current (Ib) 1A CT Ratio: -/1A
7 Maximum Current 200 % of Ib
8 Minimum starting current 0.1% of Ib
9 Rated Voltage Ph-Ph : 110V, Ph–N;63.5V
10 Variation of voltage at which meter -30% to + 20% of Vref
functions normally
11 Rated Frequency 50Hz
12 Power Loss in Voltage & Current Voltage Circuit Less than
circuits 1.5W/8VA, Current Circuit
Less than 1VA.
(Less VA/ Watt getting the
preference)
13 Dynamic range To be mentioned
14 MD reset Provisions a) Through authenticated
CMRI or Remote
Communication Command.
b) Automatic resetting at
preset date & time.
15 No. of digits of display and height Seven segment, minm. 7 digit
of character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
with backlit or LED, having
minimum character height of 10
mm.
16 Size of Non volatile memory To be mentioned
17 Principle of operation To be mentioned
18 MD Integration period 15 Minutes
19 Weight of meter To be mentioned
20 Dimensions To be mentioned
21 Warranty 5 & ½ years from date of last
dispatch.
22 Outline drawings & Leaflets To be furnished
23 a) Remote meter-readout facility To be mentioned
b) Communication protocol used. To be mentioned
c) Sealing provision for meter & To be mentioned
optical port.
d) Baud rate of data transmission To be mentioned
 e) Required software to be resident To be mentioned
in CMRI and BCS.
f) Ultrasonic welding of body To be mentioned
g) Manufacturer’s Seal provided To be mentioned
24 Base Computer Software Windows 8/7 based
25 Type Test Certificates To be furnished
26 Time of Day Zones (Selectable) To be mentioned
27 Whether meter measures both Both required
fundamental & Harmonic Energy
28 Real Time Clock Accuracy Max. drift per annum
±300 sec for Class 0.5S.
29 Anti Tamper Features To be mentioned in details.
30 Data retention by NVM without 10 years
battery back up and un-powered
condition.
31 Guarantee period of meter 66 months from the date of last
despatch. Guarantee period
shall be printed on the
nameplate.
32 BIS license To be mentioned
32.1 BIS license No. & dt. with its To be mentioned
validity for ISI certification mark
on offered meter.
32.2 Details of meter design for which To be mentioned
above BIS certification has been
obtained: -
(i) Ratio of Ib to Imax
(ii) Material of meter body
(iii) Grade of printed circuit Board
material
(iv)` Type of assembly of component
used (SMT)
(v) Meter constant (IMP / KWh)
(vi) Auxiliary power circuit (with PT or
PT less)
(vii) Accuracy class
33 ISO accreditation no. & dt. with its
validity
34 Other parameters / features not Conform to specification of IS-
covered in the above GTP 14697 / 1999 & CBIP technical
report No.88 (with its latest
amendment).
35 Past Experience Copies of order executed in last
three years along with GTP of
the supplied meters to be
enclosed. Past experience to be
considered for manufacturing
meter as per IS: 14697 & CBIP-
88/304
 SHEDULE-B
Sl. Component Make / Origin
No. Function / Feature
1 Current Element
2 Measurement /Computing chips
3 Memory chips
4 Display modules
5 Communication modules
6 Optical port
7 Power Supply
8 Electronic components
9 Mechanical parts
10 Battery
11 RTC / Micro controller

SCHEDULE-C

Pre-Qualification Conditions for HT Static Meters

Sl. No. Particulars Remarks

1 Bidders (Meter Manufacturer) must have valid BIS certification for
the offered meter. If it has started to issue by appropriate authority. Yes / No

2 Bidder (Meter Manufacturer) preferably posses ISO 9001

Yes / No
certification
3 Bidder (Meter Manufacturer) shall be manufacturers of static Yes / No
meters having supplied Static LT, 11/33 KV H.T. Meters with
memory and LCD display as per IS 14697 & CBIP 304 to
Electricity Boards / Utilities in the past 3 years.
4 Bidders(Meter Manufacturer) shall have dust free, static protected Yes / No
environment for manufacture, assembly and Testing.
5 Bidder(Meter Manufacturer) shall have automatic computerized test Yes / No
bench for lot testing of meters.
6 Bidder (Meter Manufacturer) has facilities of Oven for ageing test. Yes / No
 SCHEDULE - D
Sl. LIST OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
No. DURING SAMPLE SUBMISSION

1 Attested copy of type test reports from NABL

accredited laboratory as per new IS(If Published)

2 Attested copy of BIS certificates of the same type of

meter submitted as sample

3 Attested certificates as regards material used for

meter case, cover & terminal block.

4 Annexure – II as per tender documents

5 Annexure – III as per tender documents

6 Operating manual & Tamper logic of the meter

submitted
 ANNEXURE - V
Component Specifications:
The meters shall be designed and manufactured using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) components,
except for power supply components, LCD etc., which are PTH type.
All the material and electronic power components used in the manufacture of the meter shall be of
highest quality and reputed makes so as to ensure higher reliability, longer life and sustained accuracy.

Sl. Component
Requirement Make / origin
no. Function / Feature
1. Current Element Current Transformer Any make or origin
conforming to
IS-2705
2. Measurement / The Measurement / computing chips USA:Analog Devices,
computing chips used in the meter shall be with the AMS, Cyrus Logic, Atmel,
Surface mount type. SAMES, Texas
Instruments,Teridian,
Japan: NEC,Freescale,
Renesas,
Holland: Phillps
3. Memory chips The memory computing chips shall USA: National Semi
not be affected by the external Conductor, Atmel, SAMES,
parameters like sparking, high voltage Texas Instruments,Teridian,
spikes or electrostatic discharges. ST Japan: Hitachi, OKI,
Freescale, Renesas,
Holland / Korea: Phillps

4. Display modules The display modules shall be well Singapore: Bonafied

protected from the external UV Technologies,
radiations. The display shall be clearly Korea: Advantek,
visible over an angle of at least a cone of Japan : Hitachi, SONY,
[Link] construction of the modules Hijing,Truly
shall be such that the displayed quantity Semiconductor.
shall not disturbed with the life of
display. The display shall be TN type
industrial grade with extended
temperature range.

5. Communication Communication modules shall be USA: National

modules compatible for the RS 232 ports. Semiconductors, HP, ST,
Texas Instruments, Agilent,
USA / Korea: Fairchild
Holland/ Korea: Philips,
Japan: Ligitek, Hitachi,
Germany: Siemens, Tiwan:
Everlight,
 6. Optical port Optical port shall be used to USA: National
transfer the meter data to meter reading Semiconductors, Texas
instrument. The mechanical construction Instruments, HP, Agilent,
of the port shall be such to facilitate the Japan: Hitachi, ,
data transfer easily. Germany:Siemens,
Holland / Korea:Philips,
Tiwan:Everlight
7. Power Supply The power supply shall be with the SMPS Type
capabilities as per the relevant standards.
The power supply unit of the meter shall
not be affected in case the maximum
voltage of the system appears to the
terminals due to faults or due to wrong
connections.

8. Electronic The active & passive components Philips, Toshiba, Fairchild,

components shall be of the surface mount type & are Murata, Rohm, Siemens.
to be handled & soldered by the state of National Semiconductors,
art assembly processes. ATMEL, Texas
Instruments, Hitachi.
Ligitec, OKI, EPCOS

9. Mechanical parts The internal electrical components

shall be of electrolytic copper &shall be
protected from corrosion, rust etc.
The other mechanical components shall
be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by
suitable plating / painting methods.
10. Battery Lithium / Lithium-ion /NiMh with Renata, Panasonic, Varta,
guaranteed life of 10 years Tadiran, Sanyo, National,
Tekcell, Duracell, Maxell,
Elegance, Mitshubishi,

11. RTC / Micro The accuracy of RTC shall be as per USA: Dallas, Atmel,
controller relevant IEC / IS standards Motorola, NEC, Renesas,
Texas Instruments, ST,
Micro chips, Teridian
Holland / Korea: Philips,
Japan: NEC, OKI,Hitachi,
Mitsubishi, Freescale,

Components used in accepted sample meters shall be maintained in offered meters. If any change is
essential during offer of the meters, prior approval is to be taken from the Ordering Authority.
 ANNEXURE-VI
Tamper Logic:
Feeder Meter CAT A

REST. OCC REST.

TAMPERS Occ Condition CONDITIONS TIME(MIN) TIME(MIN)
1 Missing Vx<15% Vref Vx> 40% Vref
potential
Any other phase voltage > 70% of Any other phase
Vref voltage > 70% of Vref 5
I3x> 10 % of Ib I3x> 10 % of Ib
Missing potential tamper detection
will be phase wise
2 Voltage
Unbalance V3x> 70% Vref V3x> 70% Vref
Vmax-Vmin<10% 5
Vmax-Vmin>10% Vref Vref
Current Ignored Current Ignored
3 Low Voltage Vx< 60% Vref V3x>60% Vref
5
Current Ignored Current Ignored
4 High Voltage Vx>120% Vref V3x< 120% Vref
5
Current Ignored Current Ignored
Voltage Unbalance shall not occur
with high voltage event.
5 Power Failure
If power goes off for more than the
persistence time or all phase voltage 5 Immediate
goes less than 30% of Vref
6 Current Open Residual Current >20% Ib Residual Current<20%
Ib
Ix< 2% Ib Ix Ignored
5
Average line Current :Ignored Average Current >
10% of Ib
V3x>60% Vref V3x> 60% Vref
7 Current Residual Current >20% Ib Residual Current
Bypass <20% Ib
Ix>5% Ib Ix Ignored
5
Average line Current :Ignored Average Current >
10% Ib
V3x>60% Vref V3x>60% Vref
8 Current Residual Current < 20% Ib Residual Current <
Unbalance 20% Ib
Imax- Imin> 30% 0f Imax for that Imax- Imin<29% 0f
period Imax for that period 5
Average Line Current> 10% Ib Average Line
Current> 10% Ib
In> 5% of Ib In> 5% of Ib
 V3x>60 % Vref V3x>60 % Vref
Current Unbalance tamper shall occur only on activation of Neutral CT
9 Current Ix> 10 % Ib Ix> 10 % Ib
Reversal Direction : Negative Direction: positive
Net Power Factor> 0.3 Net Power Factor> 0.3 5

Current Reversal detection will be phase wise

10 Over Current Ix> 120 % Ib I3x< 120 % Ib

5
No Current Unbalance tamper further log with Over Current

11 V3x> 60% Vref V3x> 60% Vref

Ix> 10% Ib Ix> 10% Ib 5
Low PF P.F.< 0.3 P.F.> 0.3

12 Cover Open On removal of meter cover the meter will log cover open event Immediate. No Restoration
along with date and time.
In case of Low and High Voltage Tamper, no current related tamper will be logged except CT Reverse
Tamper
V3x= Voltage in All Phases
Vx= Voltage In Any Phase
I3X= Current in All Phases
IX= Current in any phase
 SCHEDULE - II
Undertaking from Meter manufacturer

We hereby confirm that the Meter(s) type _____________________

i)
ii)
iii)

offered by us against your tender No._____________________ through

M/s._______________________ are in our range of production.

We also confirm that these meters will not be phased out by us in the
next 10 years from the date of supply. Necessary repairs/replacements if
necessary during this period will be made available by us.

Name & Designation :

Company Seal :

We have offered our meter(s) type _______________________________

i)
ii)
iii)

to M/s. ________________________ against WBSEDCL's tender

no.________________________. In this connection we hereby confirm that we
would be extending all the required technical support and back-up
guarantee to M/s.____________________ for the above mentioned meter(s).

Name & Designation :

Company Seal :

------------------------------
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 110V, 45A AUTO
FLOAT-CUM-BOOST BATTERY CHARGER,110V, 150
AH BATTERY & DCDB

SCOPE :
This specification covers Design, Engineering, Manufacture,
Assembly, Painting, Inspection, Testing at manufacturer’s works, Delivery
to site inclusive of packing & transportation, Testing and Commissioning
assistance of Battery, Battery Charger & DCDB complete with all
accessories.
1 set of three phase Battery charger for 110V, 150 AH Battery & DCDB
in accordance with this specification, standards stated herein and Appendices
enclosed herewith, shall comprise of the following:
a) Battery (Plante) complete with racks & accessories.
b) Dual Automatic Float cum Boost charger.
c) DCDB

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BATTERY CHARGER

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

The system requires a reliable and uninterrupted D.C. supply for

supplying D.C. Power to emergency lights, closing and tripping coils of
circuit breakers, relays etc. This will comply with all statues,
regulations and safety codes.

2. APPLICATION STANDARD
Unless other wise specified, the equipment shall conform to latest applicable
Indian standard of equivalent IS particular to the following standard
IS:3895/1966 Specification for the rectifier equipment
IS:2208 Specification for HRC fuses.
IS:1248 Indicating instrument.
IS:375/1963 Specification for wiring
IS:4540/1968 Mono crystalline semiconductor rectifier assemblies
IS:2026 Transformers
IS:13947/1993 Air Break Switch/Contactor
IS:5/1978 Colour for ready mix paint
IS:5421/1981 Printed circuit board
IS:8828/1993 Miniature circuit breaker
IS:2147 Degree of protection for cubicle
IS:6619 Safety code for semiconductor rectifier equipment

IS 2959 AC contactors for voltage not exceeding 1000 volt.

IS 6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron & Steel

IS 5921 Printed Circuit Board

3. REQUIRED ELECTRICAL PARAMETERS :

3.1 AC input:
415 volts +10 % & -15%, 50 HZ +/- 3%, three phase four wire supply
Input Power factor 0.8 minimum at rated load.

3.2 Charger system operation :

3.2.1. The Battery Charging Equipment shall be automatic dual float-cum-Boost
type with facility to supply the DC continuous load of 30 Amp. During normal
operation, the Battery is floated across the Battery charger at 118-126V (2.16
V / 2.3 V per cell) and should be compatible for battery as per specification and
also supplies the Battery current 15 Amps. into batteries for higher voltage
upto 130-152V (2.35 V / 2.75 V per cell). The charger shall provide extra
voltage for Boost charging.

3.2.2 During boost charging, voltage across the battery terminal will go higher at
the order of about 130-152 volts for which suitable automatic solid state
transistorized dropping device shall be provided (maintain 110 V ± 10% across
the terminal.

3.2.3 Battery Charging Equipment shall be fully automatic for Float and Boost
charging facility with suitable indication on front of the panel by means of LED
indication. For this, automatic solid state change over relay shall be provided.
During AC mains fail, Battery supplies the load and gets discharged. The extent
of discharge depends on the duration of power failure and the current drawn by
load. When the mains are restored after power failure, Battery shall put on
automatically on boost mode. During this time, load voltage shall be maintained
by load regulator 110 V ± 10%. It should automatically switch over to trickle
mode & when Battery voltage falls below 110 volts, the charger should
automatically switchover to Boost mode. Soft start feature shall be provided in
the system.

3.2.4 The battery charger shall have one Auto Bridge circuit. The Auto mode
shall be so connected to the module that if necessary, it can be taken out
for repair by simply disconnecting few links. Each arm of the bridge shall be
provided with filter circuit as well as fuse protection in order to rectify the
fault if any, at the earliest opportunity.

3.2.5 Automatic changeover of DC load requirement of substation to Battery in

the event of Mains power failure should be without any break. i.e should be
made without incorporating any relay in the output DC supply.

3.2.6 Automatic changeover of output to charger supply with restoration of

incoming power supply and after meeting short time current requirement from
battery.

3.2.7 Rating : 110 V DC output, 45 amp dual automatic float cum boost Battery
charger.
a. Type : Thyristor controlled.
b. At Load terminal : During float charging or Boost charging, the load
voltage shall be maintained 110 V ± 10%. For AC input voltage
 variation of +10 & -15 % and load variation of 0 to 100 %. Also
system shall provide 30 Amps continuous current and also
momentary current of 100 Amps for one second.
c. At Battery terminal : Trickle charge voltage 118-126 volts (2.16 /
2.25 V per cell) at 400 mA maximum. Boost charge voltage
130-152 volts (2.23 V / 2.75 V per cell) at 15 Amps.
d. Ripple : The ripple content in the DC output of DC output of
Battery Chrger shall be limited to 2% RMS.
e. Regulation – ± 2%
f. Efficiency : More than 70%
g. Method of cooling : Natural air with proper ventilating arrangement.

4.0 DESCRIPTION :

4.1 The charging equipment shall be housed in a free standing, floor mounted
compartmentalized panels having separate compartments for float and float cum
boost charging equipment, battery connection to DC bus, DC distribution
equipment, including incoming feeders and outgoing feeders in different
compartments. Panels shall have provision for bottom entry of cables with
removable cable gland plate. (i.e. separate compartmentalized panels for each
float charger, float cum boost charger and DC distribution).
4.2 The panel shall be of CRCA sheet steel construction and provided with
concealed hinges. Adequate ventilating grills or louvers with fine brass wire mesh
shall be provided. Thickness of sheet steel shall be at least 3.0 mm for load
bearing members and 2.0 mm for other sides. Degree of protection provided
by the enclosure to the internals of charger shall be IP-42 as specified in IS :
2147.
4.3 The instruments, switches and indicating lamps shall be flush mounted on the
front panel.
4.4 Suitable neoprene rubber gaskets shall be provided all around doors and cover
plates, between two shipping sections, two charger sections, two panel sections,
for making charger construction dust and vermin proof.
4.5 All PCBs used in the charger shall be made of glass epoxy material. Electronic
cards shall be plug in type and shall be mounted on standard racks. Rack shall
have PCB guides which shall allow the insertion of PCBs smoothly without
requiring force. Racks shall be mounted on hinged pivot to enable the rack to be
turned for access to back side terminals. PCBs shall include status indicating LED
lights and test connections in the front to facilitate fault diagnosis. PCBs shall be
identified with proper permanent labels as per approved drawings.
4.6 Dimensions of the Charger : 1400 mm (W) X 700 mm (D) X 1800 mm (H)
4.7 Paint shade : Both exterior and Interior – RAL 7032
4.8 The panel must be naturally air cooled type designed for continuous
operation in a ambient temp. 50°C. This shall be dust and vermin proof.
5.0 COMPONENTS:

5.1 The Battery charger shall comprise of following components but not limited to the
same:
a) Double pole AC circuit breaker for AC incoming of the battery charger(MCB)
with auxiliary potential free contact for indication to SCADA MCB ratings shall
be for 3 KA rupturing capacity at 110 V DC..
b) Three phase, full wave half controlled SCR bridge of 100 A rating (Silicon
controlled Rectifier) together with suitable heat sinks and RC suppression
network to take care of momentary high load of 100 Amp. The bidder shall
supply the characteristics of the rectifier used in the construction of the
charger indicating the capacity of the rectifier to suit the temperature
conditions. All the electronic components shall be of high MTBF or heavy duty
type and liberally rated.
c. Automatic solid stage voltage / current controller for automatic control of
voltage and current during float / boost charging the batteries complete with
automatic control facility.
d. Auto mode selector switch (25 A rating) with Indication lamp/LED for
respective position.
e. Float/Boost indicator lamps/LED.
f. Potentiometers to adjust DC output voltage and current in respective modes.
g. Battery charging current and voltage requirements are to be regulated by using
voltage current feedback loops.
h. Smoothing (filter) circuit comprising of smoothing choke and filter condenser to
reduce ripple content in the DC output of the Battery charger to 2% RMS.
i. DC moving coil Voltmeter of 0-110+0 V rating and 72 sqmm with selection switch
and HRC fuse to measure voltage of charger / Battery and Load.
j. Solid state automatic load voltage regulator to maintain the load voltage of 110 V
± 10% (rating of the regulator shall be 30 A continuous and 100A for one
second) during Float charging or Boost charging of the Batteries.
k. Double pole DC circuit breaker for Battery protection (MCB) with auxiliary
potential free contact for indication to SCADA.
l. DC contactor to by-pass automatic load voltage regulator in the event of AC
mains fails to allow the full battery across the load. There should not be any
discontinuity of DC supply to the busbar during any transition period and
battery power should be available for tripping circuit, if necessary, even during
boost charging.
m. AC analog voltmeter 96x96 sqmm of rating 0 to 500 V.
n. Fuse fail indication lamp / LED for load and Battery fuses.
o. The indicating instruments shall be class 0.5 accuracy.
p. The following provisions conforming to relevant IS shall be made on the front
panel:-
(i) Voltmeter to indicate battery/charger DC voltage (0-500V)
(ii) Voltmeter for Input AC supply voltage.
(iii) Ammeter to indicate Charge/Discharge current of battery (100-0-50 A)
(iv) Ammeter to indicate load DC current.
(v) Ammeter for earth leakage current of the charger & outgoing ckt. (load
side) – ( 100 – 0 – 100 mA)
5.2 The Charger shall be provided with following LED of reputed make
Indication:

(i) Supply of power--Green

(ii) Charger on --Green
(iii) Battery reverse polarity
(iv) Input power supply fail–Red
(vi) Output over/under voltage
(vii) Earth fault

5.3 Audio/Visual alarm to indicate:-

(i)AC input Power failure.
(ii) Charger Output failure.
(iii) Battery disconnection/failure.
(iv) DC under/Overvoltage.
(v) Condenser Fuse failure.
(vi) In case of failure of charger on fault, it should give buzzer as well
as LED indication. However, the buzzer alarm should be provided for
battery fuse fail, load fuse fail and charger trip due to over load
indication with an accept and reset switch. The charger shall have
provision for an alarm relay contact for remote Indication. Suitable
terminals with identification label shall have to be provided.
5.4 Controlling arrangement for following functions shall be
provided:-
a) Auto/Manual Selector Switch
b) Manual operation controlling device
c) Accept/Reset pushbutton
d) Voltmeter selector switch

5.5 Wiring: Charger cubicle shall be supplied completely wired upto terminal block
for purchasers external connection using solder less crimping type copper lugs.
All wiring shall be carried out with 1.1 KV grades PVC insulated multi-strand
copper conductor of 2.5 Sqmm and shall be flame/vermin proof. All wiring shall
be neatly bunched without affecting access to equipment/ components mounted
within the cabinet. The Charger DC output circuit for Battery and load connection
separately shall be wired with [Link] PVC insulated cable.
Suitable two earthing terminal and outgoing terminal shall be supplied to
connect the external supply cables.
Suitable two earthing terminal and outgoing terminal shall be supplied to
connect the external supply cables.

Control/Indication/Annunciation circuit shall be wired with suitable size of

PVC insulated cable as per scheme requirement. Colour coded wires should
be used to facilitate easy tracing, as under:-
. i. Single Phase A.C. Circuit:-
(a) Yellow for Phase
(b) Green for Earthing
(c) Blue for Neutral
 ii. D.C. Circuit:-
(a) Red for Positive
(b) Black for Negative

iii. Control Wiring:-

(a) Gray for annunciation and other control circuits.
(b) Ferrules: Embossed/Engraved core identification ferrules,
marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be
fitted at both ends of each wire.
(c) Termination:
 The input, battery and load terminals shall be located in
easy accessible positions. The terminals shall be
properly labeled for easy identification of Input (Phase
& Neutral), Battery (positive & negative), Load
(Positive &negative) and Emergency Lamp (Positive &
negative).
 The terminals shall be rated at 25 Amps or more
depending on scheme requirement.
 The Input terminals shall be connected to a 3 core
PVC insulated multi-stranded copper conductor cable
(minimum 2mtr. length) with a 16 Amp 3 pin plug socket
at the other end. The earth conductor of the cable
shall be provided on the charger body.
 The charger shall incorporate terminals and fuse of 4
Amp rating for connecting wires from outside to bring
emergency light in to battery circuit in the event of
mains failure.
 All control cables should run through the bottom side of
the Charger cubicle with proper gland arrangement.

6. SPECIAL FEATURE :

6.1 All printed circuits boards used in the battery charger shall be solder marked, glass,
epoxy, FR 4 grade copper clad material having edge type gold plugging connectors
conforming to latest IS / IEC specifications. All assembled PCB conforming coating
on component side & epoxy varnish on the other side with suitable protective
coating for protection against humidity and corrosion.
6.2 Transformer shall be with class B insulation having a continuous rating at least 125%
of the rating of the charger. Reactance of the transformer shall be suitable to take
care of regulation and surges. The power transformer rectifier unit of the battery
charger shall be designed for adequate VA rating but in any case it should not be
less than 800 VA and should be rated for 500 V at factor safety of 3. The heat
dissipation and power control system should be designed with a factor of safety of
8. Rating of silicon diode should not be less than 100 A.
Please note that necessary documentary evidence, showing transformer rating of
700 VA along with test certificate from manufacturer. It bought out , shall be
enclosed, for approval of the purchaser.
6.3 Following make of components shall be used in the Battery charging equipment or
equivalent approved by WBSEDCL.
i) Switches Kaycee/Recom
0
ii) Meters AEL/IMP/USHA
0
iii) Contacts/Relay L&T/Siemens/ABB/C&S
0
iv) MCB MOS/ABB/Siemens/L&T
0
v) HRC fuses S&S/Bussman/Siemens/L&T
0i
vi) SCR USHA/HIRECT/IR
I
vii) Diode USHA/KELTRON/IR
0i
viii) Lamps/LED Essen/vaishna/Siemens/L&T/Emco
)
ix) Filter condenser Rescon/Elcon/Kendil
x) Potentiometer Pankaj
xi) Voltmeter A.C. IMP/AE/Rishav/Meco

6.4 The charger cubicle will be indoor type with all associated and auxiliary equipments
mounted therein.

6.5 All fuses shall be HRC cartridge types conforming to IS : 2208 mounted on plug
type fuse bases.
6.6 Electrical indicating instruments shall be flush mounted on panel with only flanges
projecting. Dial shall be white with black number and lettering.
6.7 Control & instrument switches shall be of rotary type.
6.8 Indicating lamps shall be LED type with low watt consumption. The LEDs shall be
provided with series resisters.
6.9 Strip type space heaters of adequate capacity shall be provided inside cabinet to
prevent moisture condensation.
6.10 All door mounted equipments as well as equipment mounted inside the cabinet shall
be provided with individual labels with equipment designation engraved on aluminium
/ plastic plate (stickers are not acceptable).
6.11 POLARITYMARKING:-
The polarity marking of the terminals shall be marked for identification. The
positive terminal may be identified by “P” or (+)sign and Red colour mark and the
negative terminal may be identified by “N” or (-) and Blue colour. Terminal
marking shall be permanent and non-deteriorating.
6.12 Terminals – Battery charger cabinet shall be provided with two separate suitable
earthing terminals. Separate terminals shall be provided for
connecting load & battery leads to the charger. All terminals shall be
M12 size. Suitable copper lugs shall be provided by the bidder for
use of the purchaser for connecting the load wiring. It would be the
bidder’s responsibility to prove the adequacy of the design by
submitting all technical particulars and relevant graphs to show
suitability of charger for supplying load on continuous basis.
6.13 The supplier of battery charger shall be fully coordinate with the supplier of
battery in the event of the purchaser deciding not to place order for both
equipments on the same supplier.

6.14 Method of cooling of the charger equipment shall be specified by the bidder.

6.15 Two earthing studs of MS 50 mm long & 12 mm dia shall be provided for external
earth connections. These should be complete with plain washer, spring washer,
 nuts etc. Earthing Bolts must be welded to prevent removal of the same from the
box.

6.16 SCADA Compatibility

The Battery Charger shall be fully SCADA compatible. It shall have
sufficient Nos. of potential free contacts & transducers (4-20mA
output) for digital and analogue signals respectively. It shall also be possible
to control various functionality of Battery Charger from SCADA system
through hard wire connection.
Typical I/O requirement is tabulated here under.
PARAMETERS DIGITAL CONTROL ANALOGUE
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS
(4-20mA)

AC mains fail √
Load Bus Over Voltage √
Load Bus Under Voltage √
Float Charger fail √
Earth Leakage √
Float Charger On √ √
Float Charger Off √ √
Float Charger on Auto mode √
Float Charger on Manual √
mode Charger On
Boost √ √
Boost Charger Off √ √
Boost Charger On CV mode √ √
Boost Charger On CC mode √ √
Charger on local mode √
Charger on Remote mode √
Battery Voltage √
Boost Voltage √
Float Voltage √
Load Voltage √
Battery Current √
Boost Current √
Float Current √
Load Current √
Battery Room Temperature √

6.17 PROTECTION AND ANNUNCIATION:

Following protection with alarm indicating lamps and alarm accept push button and
lamp test push button shall be included in the scope of supply.
i) Load under voltage relay
ii) DC Earth leakage relay.
iii) Float charger failure
iv) AC mains failure
iv) DC over voltage relay for battery protection.
 v) Boost charger failure.
vii) HV phase fail/phase sequence reversal protection.
viii) Semiconductor Fuse fail - Float
ix) Semiconductor Fuse fail - Boost

7.0 TESTS

7.1 Type Tests:-The bidder shall have to submit along with their Tender
documents, as pre requisites, the complete Test reports of all
tests including Type tests as stipulated in the relevant IS /
IEC, carried out within 5 years from the date of tender, from
CPRI / NABL accrediated / Govt. recognized Test house or
Laboratory on the offered item, failing which their offer may
not be technically accepted.
7.1.1 If the bidder fails to produce the said documents on the
offered item during submission of tender, he/she will have to
submit the said type test report after placement of order
but before inspection of 1st lot of material at his own cost.
7.1.2 The following tests shall constitute the type tests as per IS:
3136-1965, IS:4540-1968 (latest amended) and IS 2026
(for short circuit test) :
a) DC voltage current test.
b) Automatic voltage regulator operation.
c) Efficiency test.
d) Ripple Voltage test.
e) High Voltage test.
f) Temperature rise test.
g) Degree of Protection test.
i) Short circuit test at No Load and full Load at rated
voltage for sustained short circuit.

7.2 List of Routine Tests as follows:-

Physical checking of charger as per
approved drawing.
 Insulation resistance test.
 High voltage test.
 Line regulation test at No Load and full load in test at
load in Float/ boost mode.
 Full load ripple content measurement test at load terminals
in float and boost mode
 Voltage regulation test at load terminal and Battery
terminals in float and boost mode.
 DC short circuit test without blowing HRC fuses
and without tripping MCBs at load terminal and also
at Battery charger output terminals with observation
of total current limit.
  Efficiency measurement test.
 Checking of automatic operation Float to Boost, Boost
to float mode as per Battery condition.
 Checking of Battery voltage, load voltage and Load
current Boost Mode at different charging current.
 Temperature rise test of complete charger at full
load
 Checking of battery &Load Terminal voltage in
manual Mode operation at different position of
Manual Mode Selector Switch.
 Checking of automatic connection of Battery to load in
case of “Mains Failure‟ or Charger Trip‟ conditions.
Checking of Float voltage setting range and Boost current
setting Range in Automatic Mode. Any other routine test
shall be carried as per IS: 4540 on the complete battery
Charging equipment.

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 110V, 45 A (30A+15A) BATTERY

CHARGER SUITABLE FOR 110 V 150 AH LEAD ACID BATTERY

Sl. No. Description Particulars

1 Name of manufacturer

2 Type of charger
3 Indicate specification to which the offered charger
conforms
4 Rated Input supply voltage
5 Rated Input current
Input Power Factor
6 Output voltage with range of variation
7 Output current range
8 Output current
a)Max. Battery charging current
b) Max. continuous DC external load current
c)Max. continuous output current
9 Output voltage Regulation
a)No load
b)Full load
10 Ripple factor
11 Efficiency
12 Method of Cooling
13 Painting details
14. Whether separate terminals of M-12 size for connecting
load and charger leads to the battery terminals has been
provided.
15 Provision of LEDs for indication purpose
16 Provision of Audio/Visual alarm
17 Provision of labels for individual components
18 Provision of ferrules
19 Provision of separate terminals for connecting
battery and load
20 Provision of two separate Earthing terminals
21 Weight of the complete charger
22 Overall dimensions of battery charger
23 Thickness of the sheet enclosure
24 Make and rating of Miniature Circuit
Breaker for AC Input supply
25 Make & rating of main transformer
26 Make and type of rectifiers CR
27 Rating of rectifier SCR in Amps
28 PIV value of rectifier diode
29 Output in Amps of complete rectifier stack
30 Make, Type & range of Voltmeter
31 Expected service life of Charger
32 Commitment for availability of spares during service
life

33 Applicable Standards
34 List of accessories to be provided with the
Charger
35 Recommended particulars of matching Battery

36 Technical particulars of different components

including make, type and rating
37 Description of operating principle of Auto/Manual float
cum boost charger with functions of different
components supported by drawing and block diagram
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 110V, 150 AH LEAD ACID BATTERIES

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

The system requires a reliable and uninterrupted D.C. supply for supplying
D.C. Power to emergency lights, closing and tripping coils of circuit breakers, relays
etc.
The chargeable batteries shall be Plante type. The end cell voltage after
discharge shall be limited to 2.0 volts/cell. Batteries shall not require any water
topping up and shall emit no corrosive fumes or gases under normal operating
conditions.
The batteries shall be supplied along with the necessary mounting racks or
sheet steel enclosure complete with the provision for clamping the cables. Battery
racks shall be of steel frame with epoxy painted/ PVC lined.

2. REQUIRED PARAMETERS :

2.1 The terminals of the battery shall be suitable for receiving cable lugs.
2.2 The device shall be installed in indoor location to provide auxiliary DC Power
Supply for following applications:
a) Emergency lighting
b) Circuit breaker/switchgear/protective relay operations
c) Equipment supervision indication
d) Audio visual annunciation
Under normal conditions, auxiliary DC Power Supply for continuous load will be
met from Battery Charger and storage batteries should be kept under float or
boost charging condition. But in case of Circuit Breaker/Switchgear/Protective
Relay operation and/or in the event of failure of incoming power supply to
Battery Charger, required auxiliary DC Power supply shall be met from Storage
Batteries.
2.3 The standard ratings of batteries shall be 110 Volts DC, 150 AH
mentioned.
2.4 The nominal voltage of a single cell shall not be less than 2 volts at the
beginning of Charging. The FLOAT charging voltage per cell shall be within
2.15 volts to 2.3 volts. The BOOST charging voltage per cell shall be 2.35 V
to 2.75 V. At the end of the charging, cell shall be floated easily around 2.25
volts without causing adverse corrosion or loss of water.
2.5 Range of charging current and final cell voltage
 Range of Float charging : 100 mA to 500 mA
 Starting current – 21 Amp,
 After discharging, final voltage shall not be less than 1.85 volts.
 Dimensions of each cell : 310 mm (L) X 195 mm (W) X 450 mm (H)
 Approx. weight of each cell (Dry Battery) : 41 KG.

3. DESCRIPTION :

3.1 The Electrolyte shall be of battery grade sulphuric acid.

3.2 Main Components of each cell
3.2.1 Positive & Negative Plates -
The positive plates of cell shall be constructed by heavy duty lead
alloy grids type, the plates shall be corrosion resistant & shall have low
self discharge properties
 3.2.2 Plate Connections -
The plug of the plates of like polarity shall be connected to terminal
post for external connections. Suitable plastic buffer, moulded
bottom plate support shall be used for holding plates in proper
position.
3.2.3 Separator -
The separators shall be constructed from highly micro-porous and
rigid material of appropriate shape. Separators shall be inert
chemically and shall prevent internal short circuit and shall ensure
minimum internal resistance.
3.2.4 Terminal Posts -
The positive and negative terminal posts shall be clearly and indelibly
marked for easy identification. The terminal posts shall be sealed
properly with the lid by rubber grommets or other suitable device. The
terminal posts shall have provision for inter- cell/outgoing cable
connections.
3.2.5 Container -
Each cell shall be assembled in high grade, flame retardant
polymer or moulded hard rubber container. The container shall be
leak proof, non-absorbent, shock absorbing not liable to
deformation within the range of working temperature and not affected
by the acid. Electrolyte high-level and low-level lines shall be marked
on at least two of the four sides of a cell and visible from the
front of the completed assembly. A permanent airtight seal shall
be provided between the cover & container to stop electrolyte &air
leakage. The container shall be designed to withstand the pressure
caused by charging & discharging characteristics of the battery.

3.2.6 Cell Lid -

Cell lid for covering cell container shall be made from high quality non-
corrosive plastic, glass or ebonite complete with either suitable
rubber gasket for closed type or bituminous sealing compound for
sealed type of containers.
3.2.7 Vent Plug -
A vent plug of suitable design shall be provided on each cell lid. The
vent plug shall have a micro-porous plastic alloy/ceramic filter which
will prevent escape of acid fume/spreading of acid fume but will allow
free exit of oxygen and hydrogen generated in the process of
charging.

3.3 Other components of Battery

3.3.1 Cell pillars and connectors :

Cell Pillars and connectors shall be made from highly conductive
material of lead allow having generous cross section ideally suited
for high current duties. Bolts, nuts, washers etc. for connecting the cells
and connectors shall be coated with anti-corrosive highly conductive
material.
3.3.2 Battery Stand
The stand for supporting battery cells shall be provided. The stand for
battery cell shall be of Mild Steel finished with at least three coats of
anti-sulphuric paints of approved shade. The racks shall be free
standing type. Suitable porcelain/plastic insulators shall be provided
 between the stand and the battery room floor. Number plate to
designate each cell of battery shall be provided and shall be attached
on the rack. Provision shall be made for clamping outgoing cable
on the rack. The cell shall be supported on the rack in suitable row
and tier formation with adequate clearance between adjacent cells.
3.3.3 Polarity Marking
The polarity marking of the terminals shall be marked for
identification. The positive terminal may be identified by “P” or (+)
sign and red colour mark and the negative terminal may be identified by
“N” or (-) and blue colour. Terminal marking shall be permanent and
non-deteriorating.

4. TEST :

All tests shall be carried as per the relevant standard. Test shall comprise
of Routine tests and Acceptance Tests.

4.1 Routine Test :

These are to be performed at manufacture’s works and shall include
the following test:-
 Verification of constructional requirement.
 Verification of marking.
 Verification of dimensions.
 Test for capacity.
 Test for voltage during discharge.
 Ampere hour and watt – hour efficiency test.
 Test for loss of capacity on storage.
 Endurance test.

4.2 Acceptance Test:

These tests shall be performed in presence of purchaser
representative from the sample selected from the lot offered
for supply.
 Verification of constructional requirement.
 Verification of marking.
 Verification of dimensions.
 Test for capacity.
 Test for voltage during discharge.
 Ampere hour and watt – hour efficiency test.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 110V, 150 AH LEAD ACID CELL BATTERY

Sl Particulars Details
No.

1. Name and Address of the Manufacturer

2. Application standards

3. Type & Designation as per standards

4. Manufacturer’s type and designation

5. Capacity and voltage at 27◦C AH WH FINAL

a)At 10hrs. rate of discharge VOLTAGE
b)At 5hrs. rate of discharge
c)At 3hrs. rate of discharge
d)At 1hrs. rate of discharge
e)At 1minute rate of discharge
6. Cell details

a) No. of cells per battery

b)No. of positive plates per cell
c)Total no. of plates per cell:
d)Type of positive plate:
e)Type of negative plate:
f)Surface area of plate in [Link]:
g)Construction details and dimensions of
i) Positive plate
ii) Negative plate
 h) Rated current of each positive plate:
i) Construction details of separators including
thickness, type and material
j) Container details:
i) Material of container
ii) Overall dimensions of container in mm
: Length
: Width
: Height
k)Overall dimension of cell in mm
(including Cell height)
l) Weight of each of cell in kg.
a) Without Acid
b)With acid
m)Clearance in mm between:
i) Top of plates and top of container
ii)Bottom of plates & bottom of container
iii) Edges of plates & inner surfaces
of container
n)Cell Lid details:
i)Material
ii)Type
iii)Feature

7. Electrolyte details:
i) Applicable standard of
electrolyte
ii) Quantity of Electrolyte & Specific gravity at
27°C for first filling in each cell
iii) Quantity of Electrolyte required for 55 nos.
Plante type lead acid cell plus 10% extra
iv) Specific gravity of electrolyte at
27°C with all cells fully charged
v)Specific gravity of electrolyte at the end of
10 hour of discharge rate

8. Cell Pillars & Connectors:

i) Material
ii) Type
iii) Dimension details in mm
iv) Details of inter row inter tier
connectors including bolts, nuts and
washers.
9. Battery Stand:
1) No. of racks per battery
2) No. of cells per rack
3)Formation of row and tier details
4)Material of stand
5) Particulars of anti-sulphuric paint to be
provided
6) Type and no. of stand insulator to be
provided

10. Nominal cell voltage in volts:

11. Recommended rate of first Start Finish

Charging battery cells
1)Current in amps
2)Voltage in volts

3) Total minimum input during

Initial charging in AH
12. Recommended float charge rate

13. Recommended float charge voltage Across the

battery terminals

14. Recommended boost charge

voltage across the battery terminals
15. Guaranteed AH efficiency at 10hr. rate of
discharge

16. Guaranteed WH efficiency at 10hr. rate of

discharge

17. Internal Resistance of charged cell in milli ohm

18. Resistance of the charged battery

Including inter connect or between the cell in
ohms
19. Short Circuit Current for dead
short circuit across the battery terminals when
1)Battery in floating mode
2)Battery in boost charge mode
20. Cell voltage characteristics curves during
charging at 0.5, 1.0 and 1.5 times normal rate

21. Battery layout arrangement

22. List of accessories to be provided

With battery
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1.0 STANDARDS:
Components mounted on the DCDB shall confirm to the latest revisions of the
following standards:

A IS:13947 Degree of protection provided for enclosure for

low voltage control gear and switchgear & MCCB

B IS:13947/1993 Part-III Switch ,Fuse, Disconnector unit

Amended upto date

C IS2705amendedupto date CTs

D IS MCB
8828/1996amended
uptodate
E IS 1248 Indicating instruments
F IS375 Wiring
G IS:13703/1993 Part-I&II HRC Fuses

2.0GENERALTECHNICALPARTICULARS:

2.1 Rated Voltage:

Rated voltage for the Distribution Board and its constituent items like
Switch, Fuse, Disconnector unit ,MCBs, busways etc. shall be single phase 2
wire D.C. 110 volts. The supply voltage may vary by ±10% of rated voltage.
All the equipments used in the Board shall operates satisfactorily at this
voltage variation.

2.2 General Requirements:

2.2.1 Each Distribution Board shall be free standing floor mounted

having compact design. The Board shall be closed, dust protected, weather
proof and shall be made vermin proof with a special type lining e.g.
Neoprene gasket, around the edges of the doors. The distribution board
shall comply degree of protection IP43. MCBs shall be operating vertically
upward for ON/OFF operation. The entire distribution board shall have
uniform finish and shall be sturdy. The distribution boards shall be of
modular construction with provision for complete compartmentalisation of
all feeders. It shall be free-standing, dead front type comprising dust-
tight and vermin proof sheet steel cabinets suitable for indoor installation.
The doors of cabinets shall be lockable. Handle shall be made o reputed
make. The DB shall be provided with double door in front having 2 nos.
hinges which should be suitable for movement of 120degree and 2no. knobs
to be provided on the door corners. All instruments and control devices
shall be mounted on the front of cabinets and fully wired to the terminal
blocks. All switches provided on the distribution board shall be on front
side of the cabinets, operable from outside.

2.2.2 Distribution Board hall be made out of at least 2.0 mm thick cold
rolled steel sheet, suitably reinforced to provide flat level surface. Size
1200(H)x1000(W)x450(D)mm. Gland plate shall be 3.0mm thick. No welds,
rivets, hinges or bolts shall be visible from outside. The doors shall be
fitted with double leaf neoprene rubber gaskets.

2.2.3 All cables shall enter and leave from bottom. Suitable cable
terminal blocks with cable lugs shall be provided inside each cabinet for
the incoming and outgoing cables. The terminals shall be serially numbered
to facilitate installation and maintenance. Main busbars shall be
accommodated in busbar chambers and cable alleys arranged by the inside.
Compression type cable glands shall be provided to hold the cables to avoid
any pressure or tension on the terminal block connections. The terminal
blocks shall be easily accessible for inspection and checking. Panels hall
have cable supports and metallic clips for supporting power and control
cables for internal wiring of the panels.

2.2.4 DCDB should have 2 sets of Bus Bars in Two separate

compartments to facilitate termination of Incomers from Battery and
Chargers. One Change over switch should be provided to facilitate DC
supply to outgoing load circuit in the event of failure of anyone of
the battery/ Charger. The change over switch should be 2 way 2
position for changing over of both incomer individually.
Each Busbar shall consist of tinned electrolytic copper of cross-sectional
area of a minimum of 25mmx3mm, suitable for carrying rated continuous
current without temperature exceeding 85°C. The busbars shall be
continuous throughout each section. The busbars shall have current rating
to suit the requirements corresponding to the loads incident there on
under the various operating conditions and shall withstand the applicable
voltage and maximum short circuit stress. The busbars shall be insulated
from supporting structure by means of durable non-hygroscopic, non-
combustible and non-tracking polyester fibre glass material or porcelain.
Busbars shall be encased separately in heat- shrunk sleeves of insulating
material which shall be suitable for the operating temperature of busbar
during normal service. The busbars joints shall be provided with removable
thermosetting plastic shrouds.
The busbars shall be housed in totally separated enclosed busbar
chambers. The incoming connections from the busbars to the various
feeders shall be so designed as not to disturb cable connections and to
ensure safety to the operating and maintenance personnel and to facilitate
working outside any outgoing module without the need for switching off in-
feed to the adjacent modules, as far as possible. The busbars shall be of
high conductivity, adequate uniform cross-section and current density shall
be there.
A cable alley preferably 230mm wide shall be provided in each vertical
section for taking cables into the compartments.

2.2.5 All doors shall be provided with mechanical interlocking

arrangements along with keys. The distribution board shall have no door on
rear side.
 2.2.6 Danger board (Caution Plate) shall be fitted suitably on inner door
of the DB. Danger board shall be of 100x100mm size with details
as per WBSEDCL standard format.

2.2.7 The DC boards shall be provided with the following equipments

wherever applicable:
i. Single bus arrangement with provision for one set of +ve and –ve
connected to Charger. Busbar shall consist of tinned electrolytic
copper.
ii. Terminal arrangement with necessary equipment for connecting
the incoming supply.
iii. Voltage and current measurement in the incomer feeder.
iv. Outgoing modules with switch/MCB units of adequate capacity
for the outgoing feeders and 20% spare feeder units of each
rating.
v. Necessary cable glands and terminal blocks.
vi. Adequate number of spare terminals on terminal blocks for
receiving connections for external connections.
vii. The number of outgoing feeders from DC boards shall be such
that each substation equipment is fed by separate feeder with
20% as spare.
2.2.8 The ventilating louvers should be covered from inside by a
perforated sheet.
2.2.9 All sheet metal used for DB shall under goes even tank mechanical/
chemical cleaning process & painting shall be done using powder
coating process. Colour of the Paint shall be RAL 7032 type.

3.0 MAJOR COMPONENTS:

3.1 Incoming cables for DCDB shall be terminated on terminal connectors provided at
the bottom. Connection between incomer terminals and MCBs shall be with 50 sq.
mm copper cable. Outgoing shall be connected with 35 [Link] copper cable.
All MCBs, cable used in the DB shall be of reputed make and ISI marked.
DCDB should have 1 set of BusBar in a compartments to facilitate termination of
Incomers from of Battery and Charger.
3.2 Incoming circuit:
Two double pole MCBs of 63 Amps capacity shall act as Incoming breaker of load
bus. Changeover switchof63 Amps DP is to be provided.

3.3 Outgoing Circuits:

Sr. Feeder Cable size Source-1 Source-2
No. Rating

1. Double pole 2core 16 sq. mm 04 nos. 04 nos.

DC MCB LT PVC cable
32A,
2. DP 16 A 2core 10 sq. mm 08 nos. 08 nos.
MCBs, LT PVC cable
3.3.1 Total 24 Nos. outgoing circuits shall be provided.
MCBs shall comply following specifications as per IS8828/1996.
a)Rated current shall be 32A/16A as mentioned above.
b)Rated short circuit capacity shall be min.6KA at 0.8p.f. lag
c)Service short circuit capacity shall be 6KA as per table 15 of IS:8828/1996.
d)MCBs shall have fixed un adjustable time/current characteristics.
e) Under voltage release and shunt-trip release coils are not required. Only over load
release and short circuit release shall be provided.
f)Tripping time shall be as per (clauseNo.8.6.1) table 6 of IS: 8828/[Link]
mechanism thermal magnetic type.
g) MCBs having precision moulded case and cover of flame retardant high strength
thermo plastic material with high melting point, low water absorption, high
dielectric strength and temperature with stand capacity shall be capable of
carrying out given no. of operation cycles as per clause No. 9.11 of IS:8828/1996.
h) Limits of temperature rise shall be as per (clauseNo.9.8) table 5 of IS:8828/1996.
i) Standard range of instantaneous tripping shall be type 'B' as per (clauseNo.5.3.5)
table 2of IS:8828/1996.

3.3.2 All MCB outgoing terminals shall be terminated on terminal connectors of 10 mm.
stud type provided at the bottom.
3.3.3 The enclosure shall be provided with proper earthing
3.3.4 PVC cable glands of adequate size shall be provided for all incoming and
outgoing cables.
3.3.5 The moving contacts of all poles of multi-pole circuit breaker shall be so
mechanically coupled that all poles, except the switched neutral, if any, make
and break substantially together. Whether operated manually or
automatically even if an overload occurs on one protected pole only.
Both side terminal should be suitable for direct cabling as well as bus bar
connection and should take wire upto cross-section area of 25 [Link].

Detailed specification is tabulated below:-

Standard IS:8828:96 & IEC:60898:2002
Type/Series B&C
Rated Current (DC) 20A for SPN, 36A for DP
Rated Voltage (DC)Volt 110
Rated short circuit breaking capacity kA 10

Ambient temperature (degC) -5 to+55

Protection class IP-20

3.3.6 Alarm Relays-

i. One Mains failure Alarm relay.
ii. One Earth Fault alarm relay
iii. One 110 Volt DC Bell to be operated by the Mains failure alarm relay.
iv. One 110 volt DC Buzzer to be operated by the earth fault alarm relay.

3.3.7 AC/DC Change Over Contacts

Emergency lighting circuit shall be provided such that the lights normally burn
on AC 240Volts, 50 Hz but in case of failure of AC supply, these come upon DC
 supply with the help of automatic changeover contactors and again changeover to AC
supply with the restoration of AC supply. There shall be two number double pole
ON/OFF switches with HRC fuses one each for AC and DC supply.

3.4 Indicating Instruments:

Principal requirements of indicating instruments are as follows:
3.4.1 D.C Ammeter:
Ammeter shall comply the following requirements

Class of accuracy 1.0

Range 0-75 Amps
Mounting Flush type
Size 96 x96mm
Type Analog

3.4.2 D.C Volt Meter:

Voltmeter shall comply the following requirements
Class of accuracy 1.0
Mounting Flush type
Size 96x 96 mm
Range 0-130volts
Type DC moving coil

3.4.3 Indicating Lamps:

Indicating lamps shall be panel mounting type 23 mm with rear
terminal connections having low wattage LEDs cluster type. Lamps shall
have translucent lamp covers to diffuse lights, coloured red for ‘DCON’
condition. The lamp cover shall be preferably of screw-on type,
unbreakable and moulded from heat resisting fast coloured material.
Conventional bulbs are not acceptable.
Necessary wiring shall be provided accordingly.

3.4.4 MARKING
Each compartment shall be provided with legible and indelibly
marked/engraved nameplate. Nameplates shall be white with black engraved
letters. On top of each module, nameplates with bold letters shall be provided
for feeder designation. Each device shall also suitably marked for identification
inside the panels. Name- plates with full and clear inscriptions shall be provided
inside the panels for all isolating switches, links, fuse blocks, test blocks and
cable terminals. Every switch shall be provided with a nameplate giving its
function clearly. Switches shall also have clear inscriptions for each position
indication e.g. ‘ON’‘OFF’ etc.

3.4.5 Earthing Arrangements:

Two nos. Earthing studs of galvanized M.S. 25X6mm shall be provided for
external earth connections at the bottom. These should be complete with plain
 washer, spring washer, nuts etc. Earthing Bolts must be welded to prevent
removal of the same from the cabinet.
Flexible stranded copper connector (braided conductor) should be
connected of copper equivalent 10 sq. mm. size between door and box
enclosure. This flexible braided cable should be terminated using gland and
proper size nut/bolts at both ends.

3.4.6 Mounting Clamps:

The DCDB box are to manufacture with suitable mounting arrangement on
wall/steel support by means of 4nos.25X6mm size clamps having hole
dia.14mm,fixed over the body.

3.4.7 Gland Plate:

The removable gland plate should be provided in the lower portion of the box
to accommodate all brass glands (according to requirement) for incoming and
outgoing cables.

3.4.8 Name Plate:

Aluminium sheet 2mm engraved with details should be provided duly refitted over
front door.
a. DC Distribution Box
b. P.O No.
c. ‘Property of WBSEDCL’

4.0 CONTROL WIRING

DCDB shall be furnished completely factory wired up to terminal blocks

ready for external connections.
All wires shall consist of 1100V grade PVC insulated flexible trended
copper wires with a cross-section of 2.5 sq. Mm suitable for switchboard wiring
and complying with the requirement of relevant IS. Each wire shall be a ran
identifying ferrule or tag at each end or connecting point.
Control cables for external connections shall consist of stranded copper
wire with 4.0sq. Mm or higher cross-sectional areas and shall enter the bottom.
All inter connecting/outgoing control wiring shall terminate on stud type
terminals on terminal blocks. The terminals shall be marked with identification
numbers to facilitate connections.
The terminal blocks shall be made of moulded, non-inflammable, plastic
material and arranged to provided maximum accessibility for inspection and
maintenance. All terminal block shall have transparent plastic cover.
The terminals shall be made of hard brass and diameter of not less than
[Link] studs shall be securely locked within the mounting base to prevent turning.
The terminal blocks shall be provided with twenty(20) percent spare terminals. The
terminals shall be suitable for connections through tinned copper crimped lugs.
Wiring shall be complete in all respect to ensure proper functioning of
the control, protection and monitoring scheme.
Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers
bearing wire numbers as per wiring diagram.
5.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:

MCBs & other components used in DCDB shall be fully type tested as
per relevant IS and this specification.
All the Type Tests shall be carried out from laboratories which are
accredited by the National Board of Testing and Calibration Laboratories (NABL)
of Government of India such as CPRI Bangalore/Bhopal, ERDA Baroda, to prove
that the MCBs & other components used in DCDB meet requirements of the
specification.

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF DCDB

Sr. No. Parameter Name

1. Enclosure fabricated from M.S sheet of2.0 mm thickness Y/N

2. All sheet metal work has undergone & tank chemical processing Y/N
and powder coating

3. Colour of enclosure from inside is white Y/N

4. Colour of enclosure from outside is as per RAL 7032 Y/N

5. Busbar is of electrolytic tinned copper of size 1.6 A/sq. mm Y/N

with 200A rating and without joints.
6. Make and type of switch Fuse Disconnector Unit Y/N

7. No. of 1ph 36 ADP MCBs provided Y/N

8. Make and type of 1Ph36 ADP MCBs Y/N
9. [Link] 1ph 16 ADPMCBs provided Y/N

10 Make and type of 1Ph16 ADPMCBs Y/N

11 All MCBs are type tested and having short circuit rating of Y/N
Min. 6KAat0.7 pf lag
12 Ammeter is having range of 0-75A And accuracy class 1.0 Y/N
13 Make and type of Ammeter Y/N
14 Voltmeter is having range of 0-130V And accuracy class 1.0 Y/N
15 Make and type of voltmeter Y/N
16 Indicating lamps are of LED type with 22.5 mm dia. Y/N
17 Wiring between MCBs and terminal connectors is with Y/N
specified stranded copper wire as per specification
18 Terminal connectors are of bolted type provided as per Y/N
specification

19 Detachable gland plate is provided with knock out type Y/N

arrangement for providing cable glands at the bottom

20 Cable glands as per requirements provided separately Y/N

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3-Way Ring Main Unit
__________________________________________________________________________________

Technical Specification for Supply & Delivery

of
SCADA compatible 11kV Non extensible 3-Way Ring
Main Unit

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Rev 1 Page 1 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This specification covers Design, Engineering, Manufacture, Assembly, testing, Inspection,
packing, delivery and unloading at site of new “SCADA-Ready” Ring Main Units capable of being
monitored and controlled by the Central SCADA. The RMU to be supplied against this specification
are required for vital installations where continuity of service is very important. The design, materials
and manufacture of the equipment shall, therefore, be of the highest order to ensure continuous and
trouble-free service over the years.

The RMU offered shall be compact, maintenance free, easy to install, reliable, safe and easy to
operate and complete with all parts necessary for their effective and trouble-free operation.
Such parts will be deemed to be within the scope of the supply irrespective of whether they
are specifically indicated in the commercial order or not.

It is not the intent to specify herein complete details of design and construction. The offered
equipment shall conform to the relevant standards and be of high quality, sturdy, robust and
of good design and workmanship complete in all respects and capable to perform continuous
and satisfactory operations in the actual service conditions at site and shall have sufficiently
long life in service as per statutory requirements. In actual practice, not withstanding any
anomalies, discrepancies, omissions, in-completeness, etc. in these specifications, the design
and constructional aspects, including materials and dimensions, will be subject to good
engineering practice in conformity with the required quality of the product, and to such
tolerances, allowances and requirements for clearances etc. as are necessary by virtue of
various stipulations in that respect in the relevant Indian Standards, IEC standards, I.E.
Rules, I.E. Act and other statutory provisions.

The Tenderer/supplier shall bind himself to abide by these considerations to the entire
satisfaction of the purchaser and will be required to adjust such details at no extra cost to
the purchaser over and above the tendered rates and prices.

It shall also encompass all necessary project management, data engineering, acceptance
testing, documentation, guarantee services.

Each RMU shall include its own power supply unit (including auxiliary power transformer,
batteries, and battery charger), which shall provide a stable power source for the RMU.

1.1.1 Scope of Work

 Supply of SCADA Ready 3 way RMU.

 Supply of battery charger and battery.

 Supply of right angle boots for covering the bare cable lug.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 2 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.2 Tolerances: Tolerances on all the dimensions shall be in accordance with provisions made in
the relevant Indian/IEC standards amended upto date and in this specification. Otherwise
the same will be governed by good engineering practice in conformity with required quality of
the product.

1.3 Key RMU Components

Key RMU components are listed as follows:

 Two (2) Isolators with earthing switches, connecting the RMU to incoming and outgoing
main loop, 11 kV, 630 Amp XLPE cables of size 400/300 mm2 cross section aluminium
conductor.

 One (1) circuit breaker (CB) with earthing switches, connecting the RMU to distribution
transformers loop, 11 kV, 200 Amp XLPE cables of size 185 mm 2 cross section aluminium
conductors.

 One numerical relays having non-directional O/C and E/F protection for each outgoing
feeder. In case of 630kVA and above wet type transformer, auxiliary relay for transformer
supervision shall be provided. Both the Incomers/Outgoing main Loop shall have FPI with
electrical reset facility. The relay shall be of make as noted in Annexure-A.

 All necessary current sensors for metering and protection.

 All necessary potential-free contacts for indications relevant to RMU monitoring and
control.

 A power supply unit, including auxiliary power transformer and battery backup, to
provide stable 24 V DC sources of power for the RMU’s spring-charge motors, relays etc.
The power supply shall also provide for RMU enclosure lighting fixtures and power-plug
receptacles for maintenance/test equipment.

 Capacitor voltage dividers serving live-line cable indicators.

A typical three-way RMU configuration is illustrated in

Figure-1. In this case, the RMU has four enclosures, one for each of the two Isolators and
one circuit breaker and one for the RMU’s auxiliary power supply unit and the necessary
SCADA monitoring and control equipment. The SCADA monitoring and control
equipment includes the RTU and modem to be supplied by others.

Figure-1: Typical RMU Configuration

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 3 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.4 Applicable Standards

The RMUs shall be manufactured to the highest quality consistent with best practice and
workmanship and in full accord with the Contractor’s quality assurance plan. The RMUs
and the work associated with their installation shall also conform to the Indian and
equivalent international standards that are applicable.

The bidder shall provide an English language copy of the applicable Indian and equivalent
international standards met by the proposed RMU.

Rating, characteristics, tests and test procedures etc. for the RMU , protection Relays,
monitoring and control devices and accessories including current transformer shall comply
with the provisions and requirements of the standards of the IEC and IS where specified.
The latest revision or edition in effect at the time of bid invitation shall apply. Where
references are given to numbers in the old numbering scheme from IEC it shall be taken to
be the equivalent number in the new five-digit number scheme. The bidder shall specifically
state the precise standard, complete with identification number, to which the various
equipments and materials are manufactured and tested. The bid document may not contain a
full list of standards to be used, as they only are referred to where useful for clarification of
the text.

Table 1-1: Applicable Standards

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 4 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

Standard Description

IEC 60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by

enclosures of electrical equipment
IEC 60298 A.C metal-enclosed switchgear and control gear for
rated voltages above 1KV and up to and including
72KV
IEC 1330 High voltage/Low voltage prefabricated substations

IEC 60694 Common specification for HV switchgear standards

IEC 60265 High-voltage switches-Part 1: Switches for rated

voltages above 1kV and less
than 52 kV
IEC 60801 Monitoring and control

IEC 60185 Current Transformers

IEC 60186 Voltage transformers

BS 159 Busbar

IEC 60137 Bushings

CP 1013(British Code of Earthing

Practice)
IEC 60255 Specification for Static Protective Relays

BS 6231 Wires and wiring

IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility

IEC 60129 Alternating current Disconnector (isolators) and

earthing switches
IEC 62271-200 Metal enclosed BS 5311 switchgear

IEC 62271-100 MV AC circuit breaker

IEC 60060-1 High Voltage test technique

BS 923
IEC 60034-1 Motors

IEC 60947-4-1 Control Gears

IEC 60623 Open Ni-Cd prismatic rechargeable cell

IEC 376 Filling of SF6 gas in RMU

1.5 Environmental Conditions

All materials supplied and installed shall be capable of operating without fault in a tropical
climate, which exhibits a high level of ultra-violet radiation and severe thunderstorms.
Relevant environmental conditions are listed as follows:

 Maximum ambiant air température: 40 ºC

 Minimum ambiant air température: 10 ºC
 Maximum relative humidity: 95 %
 Average thunder storm days per annum: 50

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 5 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

 Average rainfall per annum: 1450 mm

 Maximum wind pressure: 150 km/sq. m
 Altitude above mean sea level: Max. 1000 m

1.6 Distribution Network Electrical Parameters

The main parameters of the WBSEDCL distribution network are as follows:

 Nominal system voltage: 11 kV (rms)

 Highest system voltage: 12 kV (rms)
 Number of phases: 3 ph/3 wire
 Frequency: 50 Hz
 Type of earthing: Solid
 Rated normal current: 630 Amp (Ring Switch)
200 Amps (Transformer Feeder Breaker)
 Power frequency withstand voltage 28 kV for 1 min
 Number of electrical operations 100 O/C
at full load current
 Rated cable charging interrupting
Current for Line Switch 25A
 Rated magnetizing interrupting
current for Line Switch 16A
 Minimum number of operations at rated 10 breaking operations
short circuit current on circuit breaker
 Number of operations at rated 5 closing operations
short circuit current on line switches,
earthing switches and CB
 Basic impulse withstand voltage
Ph to ph & ph to earth : 75 kV peak
 Fault level (minimum) : 18.4 kA for 3 sec for 12kV
 Rated short circuit making capacity : 46kA peak at rated voltage
of line switches and earthing switches
and CB
 Climatic Condition : Moderately hot and humid tropical
climate conducive to rust and fungus
growth.
 Visible or audible corona with switchgear energized at 12 kV phase to earth at 50 Hz
: None
 Circuit Breaker : In addition to the ratings mentioned in this specification, the circuit
breaker shall have following:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 6 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

Cable charging breaking

25A
current
Small inductive
16A
breaking current

General data, enclosure and dimension:-

Sl.
Description WBSEDCL Requirement
No
1. Standard to which Switchgear complies IEC
2. Type of Ring Main Unit Metal enclosed panel type, Compact
module
3. Number of phases 3
4. Whether RMU is Type tested Yes
5. Whether facility is provided with Yes
pressure relief
6. Insulating gas 1.3 bar at 20o C

7. Gas leakage rate 0.1% per year(maximum)

8. Expected operating lifetime 30 Yrs.
9. Whether facility is provided for gas Yes, temperature compensated
monitoring manometer can be delivered.
10. Material used in tank construction Stainless steel

Operations, degree of protection and colors

1. Means of switch operation Separate handle
2. Means circuit breaker operation Separate handle and push buttons
3. Rated operating sequence of Circuit O-3min-CO-3min-CO
Breaker
4. Opening time of circuit breaker Approx. 60-80 ms.
5. Closing time of Circuit Breaker Approx. 40-60 ms.
6. Mechanical operations of Disconnector 1000
switch
7. Mechanical operation of earthing 1000
switch
8. Mechanical operations of circuit 2000
breaker
9. Disconnector switch/earth switch 3 position combined switch/earth
switch

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 7 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

Degree of Protection
1. High voltage live parts, SF6, VCB IP67
2. Front cover mechanism IP2X

3. Cable cover IP 2X
4. Outdoor Enclosure IP54

1.7 Testing

The specified RMUs shall be subject to type tests, routine tests, and acceptance tests. Where
applicable, these tests shall be carried out as per the standards stated above. Prior to testing, the
Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed test plan for review and approval by the Employer.

1.8 RMU Design Features

All design features of the proposed RMU, as described in the supplier’s bid and in the bid’s reference
materials, shall be fully supported by the equipment actually delivered. The key design features
include those that relate to:

 Availability, maintainability and life span

 Ability to operate in severe outdoor environmental conditions
 Immunity to electrical stress and disturbance
 Acceptable insulation properties
 Termination to SCADA Terminal Box for convenient RTU interconnection features

In these and all other specified respects, the RMU shall meet or exceed the cited standards or where
appropriate, other equivalent industry standards.

1.9 Availability, Maintainability and Life Span

1.9.1 Availability

The RMU shall be designed to have a fully enclosed metal housing combined with the single-phase
insulation of all primary live parts to reduce the risk of internal faults to an absolute minimum and
to provide a high degree of safety as well as availability. Nevertheless, manufacturer standard
designs shall be used to the fullest extent possible.

Each RMU shall exhibit an availability of greater than 99.5%. To ensure this high degree of
availability, the RMUs shall be fabricated, assembled, and finished with workmanship of the highest
production quality and shall conform to all applicable quality control standards. All materials
comprising the RMU shall be new, unused, and of the best industrial grade, and the RMU shall
incorporate all recent improvements in both design and materials. All components shall be of current
production from reliable component manufacturers.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 8 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.9.2 Maintainability

The Employer prefers RMU designs that do not require periodic preventive maintenance and
inspections. If periodic maintenance is required, it shall be possible to perform all such work in the
field without requiring the associated distribution network circuits to be de-energized.

1.10 Outdoor Features

1.10.1 General

The RMUs shall be designed specifically for outdoor installation and, in this respect, shall be suitable
for continuous operation in a tropical climate that includes exposure to severe frequently occurring
thunderstorms. They shall also be suitable for conditions in which they will be exposed to heavy
industrial pollution, salt-spray, and high levels of airborne dust.

The equipment in the proposed outdoor RMU shall be conformably coated to meet these climatic
conditions. In this respect, standards such as IEC 60870-2-2 covering equipment, systems,
operating conditions, and environmental conditions shall apply along with IEC 60721, which covers
the classification of such conditions. In particular, the RMU equipment shall have been type tested
for continuous operation under the environmental conditions identified in Clause 1.5.

In addition to the above, materials promoting the growth of fungus or susceptibility to corrosion and
heat degradation shall not be used, and steps shall be taken to provide rodent proof installations.

All live parts, high voltage components, excluding the HV cable termination of the switchgear shall be
insulated/ protected in SF6 to provide complete proofing against dangers of flashover between phase
and earth and between phases. In particular, the equipment shall be climate free in that no high
voltage connection will be exposed to the environment.

1.10.2 Corrosion Protection

The fabricated parts are pretreated using 7 tank process and then coated by layer of zinc phosphate.
A finish coat with high scratch resistance or epoxy powder finish paint shall be applied over the
primer. The coat thickness shall be of the order of 40 to 60 micrometers. The Employer shall approve
the finish-coat color. The RAL-7032/RAL7035/IEC 632 code will be agreed upon with the Bidder
during the early design phases of project implementation.

1.10.3 Material

Except for main tank and external hardware which made of stainless steel, all structural steel and
outer enclosure as well as nuts and bolts etc. shall be of CRCA steel with epoxy powder finish paint.

1.11 Immunity to Electrical Stress and Disturbance

The electrical and electronic components of the RMU shall conform to relevant standards concerning
insulation, isolation, and immunity from electromagnetic interference, radiated disturbance, and
electrostatic discharge. The ability to meet these requirements shall be verified by type tests carried
out by accredited test laboratories that are independent of the bidder and/or the manufacturer of the
RMU components. Certified copies of all available type test certificates and test results shall be

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 9 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

included as part of the bidder’s proposal. Failure to conform to this requirement shall constitute
grounds for rejection of the proposal.

1.12 Minimum Insulation of Equipment

The RMUs shall have SF6 gas-insulated type stainless steel tank with joints inside tank. All live parts
shall be fully insulated throughout their joints.

1.13 Nameplate Information

RMU nameplate information shall be determined in agreement with the Employer. This information
may include for example:

 Name of manufacturer and country

 Type, design, and serial number
 Rated voltage and current
 Rated frequency
 Rated symmetrical breaking capacity
 Rated making capacity
 Rated short time current and its duration
 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
 Purchase Order number and date
 Month and year of supply
 Property label: Property of WBSEDCL
 Guarantee period : 5 years

1.14 Danger Board:

The Danger Board plate as per relevant IS shall be riveted on the front plate of the RMU.

1.15 Interconnecting Cables, Wiring, Connectors, and Terminal Blocks

The Manufacturer shall provide all interconnecting wires, cables, connectors, terminations and other
wiring accessories such as terminal blocks required by the RMU.

1.15.1 Cables

All metallic cables and wiring shall be of required cross-section multiple strands of round copper
conductors and have flame retardant insulation. All wiring shall be neatly laced and clamped.

All wire and cable connectors and terminators shall be permanently labeled for identification. All
connection points for external cables and wires shall be easily accessible for connection and
disconnection and shall be permanently labeled. Conductors in multi-conductor cables shall be
individually color-coded.

The DC cables from the battery unit to RMU and to pilot marshalling box shall be atleast 4mm2. CT
& OT Control cable will be 2.5 Sq. mm and all other control cable shall be 1.5 mm2 Cu multi-
conductor and shall be screened with half-lapped copper tape. All wiring and termination of

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 10 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

connecting cables shall be carried out by the Bidder. Conductor used for AC and DC circuits shall
not be mixed in the same multi-conductor cable.

All wires shall be neatly run in groups and shall be securely fixed by cleats which are made of
insulating material. Suitable crimped connectors shall be used for the termination of the wire to the
terminal blocks.

All wires, including the spare cores of a multi-core cable, shall be properly numbered by an approved
type of interlocking ferrule. All spare relay contacts shall also be wired out to spare terminal block
inside the panels. The marking on the ferrules shall not be erased easily. The colour of DC supply
circuits shall be grey to differentiate from AC supply for easy identification.

All wiring colour classification, wire terminal sleeve colour and wire numbering system shall be
subjected to WBSEDCL’s approval.

All AC and DC wiring terminals that are easily accessible by operating personnel shall be adequately
shielded by suitable means.

1.15.2 Connectors

Plug-type connectors with captive fasteners shall be used for all interconnections. The connectors
shall be polarized to prevent improper assembly.

1.15.3 Terminal Blocks

Suitable Disconnector type terminal blocks shall be provided for CT circuits with necessary spares
with 5 mm minimum machine screws shall be provided by the Bidder for other necessary metallic
cable terminations. In using a terminal block, no more than two cables or wires shall be connected to
any of its individual terminals.

Self-extinguishing fireproof vinyl marking strips shall be used to identify all external connection
blocks. Marking tags shall be read horizontally. All terminals to which battery or other high voltages
are connected shall be provided with fireproof covers.

All individual status input, AC voltage input, and control output points shall be isolatable without
the need to remove wiring by means of individual terminal blocks of the removable link type. In order
to avoid open circuits on the secondary side of CTs, termination blocks with by-pass bridges shall be
provided for all AC current inputs.

Terminal blocks shall comply with IEC 60947-7-1 (2009): Low-voltage Switchgear and Control Gear,
Part 7-1: Ancillary Equipment, Terminal Blocks for Copper Conductors.

TBs shall be mounted onto suitable insulation materials via channels. TBs shall be able to withstand
5KV AC rms voltage continuously for 1 minute between terminal and terminal to earth.

One TB shall be used for one feeder panel. Translucent cover shall be provided for all cable
termination blocks. TBs shall be suitably spaced and labeled to enable easy and neat termination.
Each terminal shall be labeled according to the panel number. The use of embossing tape for such
purpose is not acceptable.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 11 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.16 General Requirements

Each RMU shall include its own power supply, including battery and battery charger. In addition,
space must be provided for the RMU’s auxiliary power transformer.

Within this context, the general requirements of the RMU shall include, but shall not be limited to
provision of the following local and remote monitoring and control features through SCADA:

 Positions of local/remote switches as used to control local and remote access to circuit
breakers.
 Power supply indications including battery failure and voltage alarms.
 Open/closed position of circuit breakers, and earthing switches.
 Enclosure door-open indications.
 SF6 gas-pressure low alarm and Lockout.
 Isolator/Circuit breaker spring charge indications.
 Circuit breaker relay protection indications.
 Circuit breaker open/close control.
 Protection device failures through built-in Watch dog contact i.e ‘self monitoring’ feature
of relay. This indication can be wired to RTU for integration in SCADA.
 FPI indication

SCADA wire termination at Marshalling Box shall have to be standardized. Hence, sequence of
termination shall be subject to WBSEDCL’s Drawing approval.

1.16.1 Design Details

 The RMU shall be designed to operate at the rated voltage of 12 kV. It shall consist of two
(2) numbers of 630 Amps SF6 insulated Isolators (incomers) and up to one (1) number of
200 Amp SF6 insulated Circuit Breakers for load.

 It shall include, within the same metal enclosure, earthing switches for each Isolators and
Circuit Breaker.

 Suitable fool-proof interlocks shall be provided to the earthing switches to prevent

inadvertent or accidental closing when the circuit is live and the concerned Circuit
Breaker/Isolator is in its closed position.

 Enclosures filled with gas at suitable pressure to ensure adequate insulation and safe
operation shall be used. The assembly shall not require further gas processing during its
expected operational life.

 The degree of protection required against prevailing environmental conditions, including

splashing water and dust, shall be not less than IP 54.

 The active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance free. Rest parts shall be of low-
maintenance type.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 12 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

 The tank shall be made of an adequate thickness of stainless steel and internally arc
tested.

 The RMU shall be suitable for mounting on its connecting cable trench.

 For each RMU enclosure, a suitably sized nameplate clearly identifying the enclosure and
the electrical characteristics of the enclosed devices shall be provided.

 The positions of the different devices shall be clearly visible to an operator when standing
in front of each enclosure with its door open. Device operations shall be clearly visible.

 The RMU design shall be such that access to live parts shall not be possible without the
use of OEM-supplied tools.

 The design shall incorporate features that prevent any accidental opening of the earth
switch when it is in the closed position. Similarly, accidental closing of a Circuit Breaker
shall be prevented when the same is in an open position. This includes protection against
accidental closing resulting from the release of any latch or spring in tension due to
vibrations caused externally or internally.

 Circuit breakers shall be enclosed in the main tank using SF6 gas as insulating and
vacuum as arc quenching medium. The main tank shall be non-magnetic, non-ferrite
stainless steel sheet of adequate thickness to ensure leak rate below 0.1% per year and
preferably robotically/TIG welded with a pressure relief arrangement. The minimum
thickness of main tank of RMU shall not be less than 2.00 mm.

 The main tank (Inner enclosure of Circuit Breaker) and all Switchboard assembly shall be
housed in a single compact metal clad suitable for both indoor/outdoor applications. The
design of enclosure for Switchgear, RMU & Switchboard housing shall be in accordance
with IEC 298.

 An absorption material such as activated alumina in the tank shall be provided to absorb
the moisture from the SF6 gas. A temperature compensating gas pressure indicator
offering a simple indication shall constantly monitor the SF6 insulating medium.

 The unit shall be internal arc proof and tested and totally safe for human beings. The
release of gas to be from the top or bottom of the unit, so that, even if the person is
operating the unit, opening the cover, the release will be at the top or bottom. The release
in no case should be from any side of the unit, as the same is unsafe for the operating
personnel/pedestrian or general public.

 The clearances of all live parts to earth and between phases shall be to approval and
shall be in no way less than clearances specified in the relevant standards of this
technical specification. All equipment shall be designed so as to minimize corona or any
other electrical discharges under all atmospheric conditions.

 RMU needs to be pedestal mounted for easy bending of cables for termination with the
unit, safe for temporary water logging and ease in installation at any urban location
without wasting much time to make the cable trench etc.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 13 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

 The maximum allowable Dimension of 3 way SCADA compatible Non – Extendable RMU
will be – Length – 1800mm, Breadth – 1000mm & Height – 2300 mm.

1.16.2 Sulphur Hexa Fluoride Gas (SF6 GAS):

The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 376,376A and 376B and shall be suitable in all respects
for use in RMUs under the stipulated service conditions. The SF6 shall be tested for purity,
dew point air hydrolysable fluorides and water content as per IEC 376,376A and 376B and
test certificate shall be furnished to the owner indicating all the tests as per IEC 376 for each
lot of SF6 Gas.

1.17 ENCLOSURE:

All Bidder-supplied enclosures shall be sized to provide convenient access to all enclosed
components. It shall not be necessary to remove any component to gain access to another
component for maintenance purposes or any other reason.

The enclosures shall also be designed to ensure that the enclosure remains rigid and retain
its structural integrity under all operating and service conditions with and without the
enclosure door closed.

1.17.1 Outer Enclosure:

The RMU enclosure (Outer) shall be made up of CRCA steel of minimum 1.6 mm thickness.
The rating of enclosure shall be suitable for operation on three phase, three wire, 12 kV, 50
cycles, A.C. System with short-time current rating of 18.4KA for 3 seconds for 12 kV supply
with Panels. The complete RMU enclosure shall be of degree of protection IP 54. The
enclosure shall provide full insulation, making the Switchgear insensitive to the environment
like temporary flooding, high humidity etc. The active parts of the Switchgear shall be
maintenance-free and the unit shall be of minimum maintenance.
The complete RMU unit shall be powder coating of RAL 7032 /RAL7035 Grey to DIN
Standard 43656/IEC 632.
Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly indicates
the functional units and their electrical characteristics.
The Switchgear and Switchboards shall be designed such that the position of the different
devices is visible to the operator on the front of the Switchboard and operations are visible.
In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards shall be designed so as to
prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.

1.17.2 Inner enclosure (Main tank)

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 14 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

The tank shall be preferably made of time tested welded stainless steel sheet of adequate
thickness to ensure leak rate less tank 0.1% per year. The tank shall be sealed and no
handling of gas is required throughout the service life. However, the SF6 gas pressure inside
the tank shall be at 1.3 bar relative minimum to ensure the insulation and breaking
functions and constantly monitored by a temperature compensating gas pressure indicator
offering a simple go, no-go indication. The gas pressure indicator shall be provided with green
pressure and red pressure zones. There shall be one Non – return valve to fill up the gas. The
manufacturer shall give guarantee for maximum leakage rate of SF6 gas will be lower than
0.1 % / year. There shall be no requirement to ‘top up’ the SF6 gas. An absorption material
such as activated alumina in the tank shall be provided to absorb the moisture from the SF6
gas to regenerate the SF6 gas following arc interruption. The degree of protection of the inner
enclosure shall be IP 67.
Oil or Air filled Switchgear will not be considered. The temperature rise test shall be carried
out on complete RMU unit and test reports shall be submitted with the offer.
The compact RMU Unit shall be provided with a pedestal made up of M.S. Angle to mount the
unit on plain surface. The height of the bottom of cable box shall be 310 mm to provide the
turning radius for the HT cable termination. Means of enabling the SCADA to monitor the
open/closed status of the enclosure door shall be provided.

1.18 Earthing

 There shall be continuity between metallic parts of the RMUs and cables so that there is
no dangerous electric field in the surrounding air and the safety of personnel is ensured.

 The RMU frames shall be connected to the main earth bars, and the cables shall be
earthed by an Earthing Switch having the specified short circuit making capacity.

 The Earthing Switch shall be operable only when the main switch is open. In this respect,
a suitable mechanical fail-proof interlock shall be provided.

 The Earthing Switch shall be provided with a reliable earthing terminal for connection to
an earthing conductor having a clamping screw suitable for the specified earth fault
conditions. The connection point shall be marked with the earth symbol.

 The Earthing Switch shall be fitted with its own operating mechanism. In this respect,
manual closing shall be driven by a fast acting mechanism independent of the operator's
action.

 All parts of the switchgear metal enclosure, metal relay and instrument cases, cable
glands, earthing terminals and other metal work on switchgear shall be connected to
earth by means of main and subsidiary earth bus bars.

 The switchgear earth bar and earth conductors shall be of high conductivity copper and
their sizes shall be selected in accordance with BS CP 1013 taking into consideration the
rated short circuit currents of the switchgear.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 15 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

 All metal parts of the switchgear which do not belong to main circuit and which can
collect electric charges causing dangerous effect shall be connected to the earthing
conductor made of copper having cross section area of minimum 90 [Link]. Each end of
conductor shall be terminated by M12/equivalent quality and type of terminal for
connection to earth system installation. Earth conductor location shall not obstruct
access to cable terminations.

 The following items are to be connected to the main earth conductor by rigid or copper
conductors having a minimum cross section of 75 sq. mm (a) earthing switches (b) Cable
sheath or screen (c) capacitors used in voltage control devices, if any.

 The metallic cases of the relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment’s shall
be connected to the earth bus. The colour code of earthing wire shall be green. Earthing
wires shall be connected on the terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering
shall not be permitted.

1.19 Circuit Breakers

The Circuit Breakers shall be maintenance free and, when standing in front of the RMU with
enclosure doors open, their positions shall be clearly visible. The position indicator shall
provide positive contact indication in accordance with IS 9920. In addition, the manufacturer
shall prove the reliability of indication in accordance with IS 9921.

The breakers shall have three positions (or states), i.e., Open, Closed, and Earthed, and shall
be constructed in such a way that natural interlocking prevents unauthorized operations.
They shall be fully assembled, tested, and inspected in the factory.

An operating mechanism shall be used to manually close the Circuit Breaker and charge the
mechanism in a single movement. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping.
There shall be no automatic reclosing. The Circuit Breaker shall be capable of closing fully
and latching against the rated making current. Mechanical indication of the OPEN, CLOSED,
and EARTHED positions of the Circuit Breaker shall be provided.

The circuit breaker shall be fitted with a mechanical flag, which shall operate in the event of
fault occurrences. The breaker indications ON and OFF positions shall be indicated by
suitable flag. For ON position indication by Red flag and OFF position indication by Green
flag shall be provided.
The circuit breaker shall be operated by the same unidirectional handle or switch. The rated
operating sequence shall be O-3min-CO-3 min-CO.

The Circuit Breaker shall operate in conjunction with a suitable protection relay under
lateral circuit phase and earth fault conditions. In addition, the Circuit Breaker shall be
provided with a motorized operating mechanism that can be remotely monitored and
controlled from the SCADA.

1.20 RING SWITCHES (Isolator):

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 16 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

They shall consist of 630 amp fault making/load breaking spring assisted ring switches, each
with integral fault making/load breaking earth switches. The switch shall be naturally
interlocked to prevent the main and earth switch being switched ‘ON’ at the same time. The
selection of the main and earth switch is made by a lever on the fascia which is allowed to
move only if the main or earth switch is in ‘OFF’ position. The Ring switches shall be
capable for remote SCADA operation.

1.21 BUSBARS:

The Three nos. of continuous Busbars made up of copper of rating 630A shall be provided.
The Short time rating current shall be 18.4kA for 3 seconds for 12 kV. All joints and
connectors shall be SF6 insulated in accordance to this specification. Any component directly
connected to the power cables shall also be capable of withstanding the DC test voltage
applied to the cables. Cross section of the Busbar shall not be less than that stated in GTP.

1.22 BUSHINGS
All the bushings shall be of same height, parallel, on the equal distances from the ground and
protected by a cable cover. It is preferable to have bushings accessible from the rear side of
the RMU.

1.23 CABLE BOXES

All cable boxes shall be air insulated suitable for dry type cable terminations. The cable boxes
of the circuit breaker shall be suitable up to 12 kV 3C x 400/300 [Link] XLPE types
vertically ascending cable preferably for front type connection. Necessary Right angle Boot
should be supplied for cable terminations. Compound filled cable boxes are not acceptable.
The cable box shall be arc resistant as per IEC 62271-200 amended upto date. The internal
arc fault test on cable box shall be carried out for 12 kV systems for 18.4 kA for 1 second.
The clearance between phase to phase and phase to earth shall be as per IEC 61243 – 5
amended upto date. The cable box provided shall be of adequate dimension to house an air-
insulated cable termination. It shall be able to accommodate crossing of phase cores, if
necessary. The cable box shall be rated in accordance with the rated insulation level of the
switchgear.

Phases of all primary terminals shall be positively marked on the main structure and not on
the removable covers.

An approved type of cable gland suitable for the above mentioned cable shall be provided with
each box. Heat shrinkage sleeve shall be provided if wiping cable gland is used.

1.24 VOLTAGE INDICATOR LAMPS AND PHASE COMPARATORS

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 17 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

The RMU shall be equipped with a voltage indication. There should be a facility to check the
synchronization of phases with the use of external device. Three outlets can be used to check
the synchronization of phases with the use of an external device. It shall be possible for each
of the bay of the RMU to be equipped with a permanent voltage indication as per IEC 601958
to indicate whether or not there is voltage on the cables. The capacitive dividers will supply
low voltage power to sockets at the front of the unit, an external push button type neon lamp
must be used to indicate live cables. The neon shall be of adequate dimensions to provide
clear indication under all conditions.

1.25 Operating lever

An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to re-open
immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch. All manual operations shall be
carried out on the front of the switchboard. The effort exerted on the lever by the operator
should not be more than 250 N for the switch and circuit breaker. The overall dimensions of
the RMU shall not be increased due to the use of the operating handle. The operating handle
should have two workable positions 180° apart.
1.26 Safety of Equipment

With respect to the RMU’s SF6-filled equipment, any accidental overpressure inside the sealed
chamber shall be limited by the opening of a pressure-limiting device in the enclosure so that
the gas will be released away from the operator without endangering the operator or anyone
else in the vicinity of the RMU.
All manual operations shall be carried out from the front of the RMU. The effort required to be
exerted on the lever as used by the operator shall not exceed 250 N.

1.27 Front Plate

The front plate shall include a clear mimic diagram indicating RMU functionality. The
position indicators shall correctly depict the position of the main contacts and shall be clearly
visible to the operator. The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated.

1.28 Current Transformers/Sensors

A panel shall be provided in each circuit breaker enclosure to mount single-core, CT for
protection purposes. CT access for maintenance or any other purpose shall be from the front,
back, or top of these panels.

The CTs shall conform to IS 2705. The design and construction shall be sufficiently robust to
withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs
shall be brought out suitably to a terminal block, which will be easily accessible for testing
and terminal connections.

Further characteristics and features for CTs used for protection are listed as follows:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 18 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

CBCT/Current Sensors for FPI Protection (for Ring) :

 Material: Epoxy resin cast

 Ratio and burden suitable as per FPI manufacturer’s recommendation.
CTs for Protection (for Outgoing) :

 Material: Epoxy resin cast

 Burden: 2.5VA
 Ratio: 100-50/1 A
 Accuracy Class: 5 P 5
 If current measurement & communication of measured data through MODBUS protocol is
done by the relay, no need for metering core.

1.29 Protection Relay

The RMU shall be equipped with self powered numerical relays as used to trip the RMU
circuit breakers.

1.29.1 General

The Circuit Breaker enclosures in the RMU shall be outfitted with a communicable-type
numerical (feeder protection) relay, i.e., one for each circuit breaker. The protection relay’s
auxiliary contacts shall be hardwired to the SCADA Terminal Block. The relay shall also
interface with the RTU via an RS 485 port in order to send, as a minimum, real-time phase
current , readings using the MODBUS protocol.

The numerical relay shall be self powered and be provided with Inverse Definite Minimum
Time (IDMT) and Instantaneous protection characteristics. On this basis, the relay as a
minimum shall provide:

 Phase Over current Protection: Non-directional (50/51)

 Earth Fault Protection : Non-Directional (50N/51N)
 Transformer supervision- Bucholtz alarm/trip (applicable for oil cooled DTR), temperature
alarm etc. for 630kVA and above.

Tripping and closing of RMU shall be done through suitable tripping and closing Relay which
will be interfaced with the tripping and closing coil of the RMU. A flag indicator shall be
installed for signaling the occurrence of trip conditions.

1.29.2 Features and Characteristics

The numerical relay shall have the following minimal features and characteristics noting that
variations may be acceptable as long as they provide similar or better functionality and/or
flexibility.

The make of the Numerical relay shall be as per Annexure-A.

The bidders will have to send the numerical relay of same make, model, Firmware & type as
offered in the bid documents along with Engineers to Distribution Testing Department on the

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 19 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

prescheduled date & time for testing of the relay in respect of relevant features as per
specification and Communications via a MODBUS RS232/RS485 port to provide the RTU
(and hence the SCADA) with phase current measurements and tripping indications. The
bidder will have to provide the necessary software for testing of the communication part. This
is a part of Techno-commercial evaluation and it is the responsibility of the bidder to show all
the features of the relay, failing which they will not be considered as Techno-commercially
acceptable. The date & time of such tests at Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL, will
be intimated to the bidder at least 10 (Ten) days prior to the date of testing. The particular
relay thus tested will have to be supplied during execution of the Order if placed upon them.

 It shall be housed in a flush mounting case and if required, will be powered by the RMU
power supply unit.
 It shall have three phase over current elements and one earth fault element.
 IDMT trip current settings shall be 20-200% in steps of 1% for phase over current and
10-80% in steps of 1% for earth fault.

 Instantaneous trip current settings shall be 100-3000% in steps of 100% for phase over
current and 100-1200% in steps of 100% for earth fault.

 Selectable IDMT curves shall be provided to include, for example, Normal Inverse, Very
Inverse, Extreme Inverse, Long Time Inverse, and Definite Time. Separate curve settings
for phase over current and earth fault shall be supported.

 For IDMT delay multiplication, the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) shall be adjustable from
.01 to 0.1 in 0.1 steps.

 The relay shall have local independent LED indications for Healthy, Trip, I>, I>>, IN>, and
IN>> conditions.

 The relay shall also be provided with:

- Alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for measurement and relay setting.
- Communications via a MODBUS RS232/RS485 port to provide the RTU (and hence
the SCADA) with phase current measurements. It is also desirable that this same
means of communication can be used by the RTU to send setting.
- Front USB port for local communications with a laptop PC.
- Parameter change capability that is password protected.
- Capability to record up to 5 of the latest fault records duly time stamped and stored
in non-volatile memory for subsequent reading via the above referenced USB port.

1.30 Power Supply

Each RMU shall be outfitted with a power supply, including batteries and battery charger,
suitable for operation of a 4-way RMU even if the RMU is only 3-way. The following
operational specifications shall apply:
 The power supply unit shall conform to the following requirements:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 20 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

- Input: 230 V AC nominal from the RMU’s auxiliary power transformer allowing for
possible variations from 190 to 300 V AC
- Output: Stable 24 V DC
- Batteries: 24 V DC
- Receptacles: 2 x 230 V AC (for test equipment)
- Lighting Fixtures: One for each enclosure
 The auxiliary power transformer’s inputs shall be equipped with surge protection devices
in accordance with IEC 62305.
 The 24 V DC batteries shall have sufficient capacity to supply power to the following
devices with a nominal backup of 8 hours:
- To restore a depleted battery to 80% of full capacity in less than 8 hours.
- To deliver the load of RMU’s trip coils, close coils, multifunction meters, and relays,
spring charge motor.
 The batteries shall be of sealed lead acid or Ni-Cad type, comply with IEC 60623 and shall
have a minimum life of five (5) years at 25 oC. The nominal capacity in ampere-hours shall
be the capacity for five hour discharge (C5). The cell shall be of a suitable type for high
rate/medium rate discharge (3C5 to 7C5). A cell of low rate of discharge is not acceptable.
Each battery cell (For Lead Acid Cell) shall come with a transparent housing for the ease
of checking of the battery water level. The battery shall have the capability to close and
open the switches for at least 10 close-open cycles (this must be verified by calculation).
When sizing the AH capacity of the battery, the effect of aging shall be taken into
consideration. The AH rating of the battery shall be greater than calculated AH but not
less than 20AH.
 The battery charger shall be fully temperature compensated.
 To prevent deep discharge of the batteries on loss of AC power source, the battery charger
shall automatically disconnect all circuitry fed by the batteries following a user-adjustable
time period or when the battery voltage falls below a preset value.
 The battery charger shall be provided with an alarm displayed at the local control panel
and remotely at the SCADA to account for any of the following conditions:
- Low battery voltage
- High battery voltage
- Battery failed
- Battery charger overvoltage
- Grounded battery/battery-charger
- Low electrolyte alarm
- Input MCB off
- Station AC supply fail
- Battery Charger fail
- Others according to manufacturer’s design

 The capacity of battery and charger and the basis of calculation shall be declared in
the GTP.
1.30.1 Battery Charger

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 21 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

The charger shall be designed to provide a well regulated DC supply to the load while float
charging or quick charging the battery. The charger shall be the constant potential, current
limiting fully automatic type. The charger shall automatically switch to float charge after the
battery is restored to 80% of its nominal capacity under BOOST charge. The BOOST charge
shall be automatically ON after an emergency discharge and the duration of BOOST charge
shall be less than 8 hours.
The float charge voltage shall not vary by more than +/- 2% of the set value irrespective of AC
input voltage variation of +/- 10 % and of load variation from 0% to 100%. The r.m.s ripple
voltage across the battery shall not exceed 1% of the nominal output voltage.
The charger shall be protected against low battery voltage and short circuit at the output by
employing current limiting feature. It shall also be protected against reversed battery voltage.
Suitable protection shall be incorporated for DC output, transformer secondary, rectifier etc.

The charger shall be designed to operate continuously at a temperature of 55°C. To ensure

long service life for the charger, all semiconductor devices shall be of industrial grade.
The following instrument and control shall be provided on the charger:-
 Mains ON/OFF input circuit breaker with Mains ON neon or LED indicator, DC output MCBs
with spare. All MCBs shall be of double pole design with auxiliary voltage free contact.
 BOOST selector switch, Voltmeter and Ammeter to measure charger/battery voltage and
current.
 All visual alarm indication shall be of LED type with its function clearly mentioned.

1.31 Distribution Automation System Interface

The RMU shall be equipped so that it can be monitored and controlled via the SCADA. In this
respect, it shall interoperate with the RTU that will be housed in the RMU Control Cabinet.
The RTU in turn will interoperate with the SCADA through public network of GPRS/CDMA.
The RMU shall have provisions for opening and closing its switches, breakers using output
from the RTU. The RMU shall also supply analog and status signals to the RTU for monitoring
the condition of the RMU’s distribution network circuits as well as the components of the
RMU. A list of input/output points required for 3-way is presented in Table 1-2 below. Digital
Input points and control Output points shall be connected via auxiliary relay to be provided
by SCADA Vendor and analog value and protection alarms shall be provided via IED/Relay
through MODBUS through RS-485 ports.

Table 1-2: Data Points per RMU Configuration

3-Way RMU

DIGITAL CONTROL Numerical Relay

INPUT OUTPUT
Isolator1 Isolator 1 Communication on
 closed  Close and Open MODBUS through RS-485

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 22 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

DIGITAL CONTROL Numerical Relay

INPUT OUTPUT
 open ports
 Spring 1: charged Isolator 2 Measurement Points:
 Earth switch 1: closed  Open and Close  Current
 Earth switch 1: open  Over Current
 local/remote status CB 1  Earth Fault
 Door: open  Open and Close
 FPI O/C, E/F indication

Isolator2
 closed
 open
 Spring 1: charged
 Earth switch 1: closed
 Earth switch 1: open
 local/remote status
 Door: open
 FPI O/C, E/F indication

CB(Tee off) 1
 closed
 open
 Spring 1: charged
 Earth switch 1: closed
 Earth switch 1: open
 local/remote status
 Door: open

Miscellaneus
 SF6 Pressure: Low
 Charger AC: Fail
 Voltage DC: Low
Battery alarms: Battery-
failed, etc.

1.31.1 Numerical Relay Interface with RTU

The Bidder is required to furnish the numerical relay information that pertains to interfacing
the relay with the RTU through an RS 485 serial communications link. The protocol details
along with the MODBUS mapping data as implemented in each relay shall be provided. In this
respect, the RMU Manufacturer in cooperation and coordination with the RTU
Manufacturer/contractor shall share the responsibility of ensuring effective communications is
attained between the relay and RTU, i.e., all parameters read by the relay shall also be
immediately available to the RTU.

1.32 Construction

The RMU shall be sufficiently sturdy to withstand handling during shipment, installation, and
start-up without damage. The configuration for shipment shall adequately protect the RMU
equipment from scraping, banging, or any other damage. The Bidder shall assume
responsibility for correction of all such damage prior to final acceptance of the equipment.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 23 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.33 Control Cabinet

The RMU shall be outfitted with a separate enclosure, referred to herein as the Control
Cabinet, to house the following equipment as a minimum:

 Auxiliary transformer for RMU AC Aux. Power Supply will be required.

 SCADA terminal blocks
 RMU Power Supply Unit including Charger and Batteries
 Other equipment according to manufacturer’s design

The Control Cabinet shall be similar in style and finish as the other RMU enclosures. This
shall include having a minimum protection class of IP 54. It shall be tested in accordance
with the latest IEC 60529 standard.

The cabinet shall have a hinged front access door with a three-point latch locking system and
a latch operating lockable handle. The door shall be fitted with a perimeter flange and gasket
(rubber or neoprene) to prevent the entrance of water. In addition, a means of monitoring
and indicating that the door is open shall be provided.

A metal screen with holes shall be provided on the top and bottom of the control cabinet to
provide ventilation aimed at avoiding condensation inside. Venting however shall in no way
reduce the effectiveness of the control cabinet’s water-tight, dust-tight, and corrosion-
resistant characteristics. To augment the cabinet’s effectiveness in preventing the ingress of
dust, insects, vermin, and small objects, all electronic parts within the control cabinet shall
be enclosed in modules. Such parts and modules shall be separated from the power supply
modules as also installed in the cabinet.

The thickness of all enclosure panels shall be at least 1.6 mm. The control cabinet shall also
be provided with:

 Weatherproof fittings for control cables.

 Provision for handle and padlock.

 Grounding terminal, with solder less clamp type connector suitable for steel stranded
conductor of suitable diameter and complete with lock washer of stainless steel or better.

 Provision for separately grounding the RMU’s electronic items.

 Means of protection against rain water, corrosive salt formations, and high levels of
airborne dust (IP-54).

 Circuit diagram of control unit for maintenance purpose affixed permanently.

 Others according to manufacturer’s design.

1.34 Auxiliary Transformer

The RMU shall be outfitted with a single-phase auxiliary power transformer with a turns ratio
of 11000/sq rt (3) to 230, i.e., it shall be connected line-to-neutral to the RMU 11 kV bus and
used to provide the required 230 VAC input to the RMU’s power supply. The auxiliary power

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 24 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

transformer shall have a capacity of at least 1.0 KVA. During supply, however, the supplier
shall assess this requirement by taking into account the actual load corresponding to the
RTU and Modem (supplied by others) as well as the load represented by the RMU motors, etc.
In this respect, with a suitable margin approved by the Employer, the auxiliary transformer
must be capable of supporting the power supply requirements that correspond to a 4-way
RMU. HRC fuses shall be provided on both the HV and LV sides of the transformer.

1.35 Motors

The RMU shall be factory fitted with Closing motors of insulation Class E or better in
accordance to IEC 60085 and allowing the circuit breakers to be operated without manual
intervention. Motor speed shall ensure closing in 40-60 ms. Independently of SCADA control,
the mechanism shall ensure that the motors start up immediately once the spring becomes
discharged, so that the breaker becomes ready for the next operation.

In addition to allowing circuit breaker tripping by the RMU’s protection relays, the
motorized operating mechanism shall be suitable for remote control by the SCADA.

The motors along with a Contractor supplied control panel shall allow Employer personnel
to electrically operate the circuit breakers at site without any modification of the operating
mechanism and without de-energizing the RMU.

The motors shall be of a reputable make in the form of a 24 V DC, single phase type. They
shall be enclosed and completely dust proof and sized with a suitable margin to meet the
torque requirement of the spring charge mechanism. The motors shall comply with IEC
60034-1 and continuously rated. An ‘ON-OFF’ switch shall be installed on the RMU for
isolation of the motor from the supply and a thermal device or other approved means shall
be provided for protection of the motor.

The DC motor shall be able to withstand ‘BOOST’ voltage of the battery charger.

1.36 Operating Mechanism:

1.36.1 Manual Operation:

The Circuit Breaker shall be provided with an independent manual closing and opening
mechanisms complete with operating handles. An approved visual indicating device coupled
to the operating mechanism shall be provided to show whether the breaker is open or close.
The operating mechanism shall be of robust construction and shall be designed to operate
with minimum mechanical shock and to prevent inadvertent operation due to vibration or
other causes. The circuit breaker shall be operated from the front of the equipment.

1.36.2 Motorised Operation:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 25 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

The circuit breaker/Isolators shall in addition be provided with motor actuator to enable
them to be remotely operated. If the actuator mechanism is to be detached before manual
operation is possible, simple means of detaching the mechanism shall be provided.
Padlockable cover shall be provided over the actuator and its linkages.

1.37 Fault Passage Indicator (FPI)

This shall facilitate quick detection of faulty cable. The fault indication may be on the basis of
monitoring fault current through the device. The unit shall be self contained requiring no
auxiliary supply. FPI shall be integral part of each Isolator and shall be capable of displaying
fault. It shall have LCD/LED display and electrical reset facility. It shall sense short circuit
and earth fault current separately. It shall have multiple ampere and time setting both for
short circuit and earth fault. The FPI should be put through current sensor with site
selectable setting/CBCT in all the three phases of the Ring of the RMUs. FPI should have
suitable connectivity with the FRTUs for the SCADA purpose for remote reset.
1.38 Integral Cable Earthing Switch

Each circuit breaker/Isolator shall be provided with an integral cable earthing switch. A
visual indication device coupled to the earthing switch mechanism shall be provided to show
clearly whether the cable earthing switch is in the ‘cable earthed’ or ‘cable unearthed’
position. Each earthing switch shall be Padlockable.

1.39 Cable Testing and Test Plug

Provision shall be made for the high voltage testing of cables connected to the switchgear.
All parts of the switchgear directly connected to a cable including any necessary test plugs
shall be capable of withstanding at any time the high voltages that may be applied during
the testing of the connected cable. The insulation between poles and to earth of the test plug
should be at least 10,000 meg-ohms when tested with a 5000 volts insulation resistance
tester.

1.40 Indicators

The front of the equipment shall provide clear, unambiguous indication of the position and
state of the circuit breaker.
A single line diagram and mimic system of the RMUs, indicating the layout and connection
of the Circuit Breakers and bus-bars shall be provided at the front of the equipment.
Positively driven mechanical indication of the operating positions of a switching device shall
be provided. Separate labels shall indicate ON, OFF and EARTH ON for the Circuit breakers.
Separate labels shall indicate MAIN SWITCH and EARTH SWITCH for breakers and earth
switch mechanism.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 26 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

1.41 Interlocks

Each switch panel shall be provided with a comprehensive interlocking system to prevent
dangerous or undesirable operations.

The interlocks shall be by mechanical means only.

The following minimum interlocks to prevent:-

i. Inadvertent operation of the Circuit breaker from ON to EARTH position.

ii. Opening of test access cover to access test terminals until the switch is in CABLE
EARTHED position. Switch can’t be closed until the test access cover has been replaced.

iii. Earthing of cable when Circuit Breaker is in ON position.

iv. Inserting/ removal of a cable test plug in/from switch until the switch is in ‘Cable Earth’
position. After the cable test plug has been inserted, the earthing switch may be moved to
the ‘Unearthed’ position for cable testing purpose but interlock must be provided to ensure
that the switch cannot be closed.

v. Operation of switch from ON to OFF and Earth switch from Earth ON to OFF for a minimum
period of three seconds subsequent to the achievement of the ON or EARTH ON positions
respectively.

1.42 SF6 Gas Pressure Gauge

Pressure gauge with a safety level bar marking shall be provided for monitoring SF6 gas
pressure. A pair of voltage free contact shall be provided for remote monitoring of low
pressure alarm. The supply and installation of the control cable to connect the contact to
the SCADA terminal block shall be included in the Bidder’s scope of work.

1.43 Padlocks

Padlocks or other approved locking devices shall be provided for locking each panel in the
ON, OFF, Cable Earth or Unearthed positions.

1.44 Provision of Supervisory Control

1.44.1 Control Circuits of RMU
The interposing relays for remote opening and closing of the RMU shall be provided by
SCADA vendor. Necessary wiring shall be provided by the Bidder upto the terminal
blocks assigned for SCADA. Circuits from the motors as well as the power supply for the
operation must be wired up to the TB in such a way that remote operation on the RMU are
possible through the contact of the corresponding interposing relay in the supervisory
control equipment.
1.44.2 Position indication of Circuit breaker

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 27 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

Voltage free auxiliary contacts must be wired upto the terminal blocks assigned for SCADA
interface for each circuit breaker for both ON/OFF indications.
A Remote/Local switch shall be provided to control motorized Circuit breakers.
The Remote/local indication shall be connected and wired up to a separate terminal block
assigned for SCADA interface.
Voltage free contact must be wired for other alarms as detailed in Table-1-2.

1.45 TYPE and ROUTINE TEST:

1.45.1 Type tests:

The equipment offered in the tender should have been successfully type tested at NABL
laboratories in India or equivalent international laboratories in line with the relevant
standard and technical specification, within the last 5 (five) years from the date of offer. The
bidder shall be required to submit complete set of the type test reports along with the offer.

The list of type tests is as follows:

I. Short time current withstand test and peak current withstand test.

II. Lightning Impulse voltage with-stand test.

III. Temperature rise test.

IV. Short Circuit current making and breaking tests.

V. Power frequency voltage withstand test (dry).

VI. Capacitive current switching test conforming to IEC.

VII. Mechanical operation test.

VIII. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit.

IX. Degree of protection of main tank and outer enclosure.

X. Circuit breaker, earthing switch making capacity.

XI. Switch, circuit breaker breaking capacity.

XII. Internal arc withstand.

The details of type test certificate according to the composition of the Switchboard shall be
submitted with the offer. In addition, for switches, test reports on rated breaking and
making capacity shall be supplied. For earthing switches, test reports on making capacity,
short-time withstand current and peak short-circuit current shall be supplied.

1.45.2 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TESTS:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 28 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

All acceptance as stipulated in the respective applicable standards amended up-to-date for all
the equipment shall be carried out by the supplier in the presence of purchaser's
representative without any extra cost to the purchaser before despatch.
The tenderer shall have full facilities to carry out all the acceptance and routine test as per
the applicable standards.
After finalization of the program of acceptance testing, the supplier shall give 15 days
advance intimation to the purchaser, to enable him to depute his representatives for
witnessing the tests.
The routine tests carried out by the manufacturer at his works as per IEC 62271-200 on the
RMU.
The routine tests are as follows:

1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,

2. Measurement of closing and opening speeds,
3. Measurement of operating torque,
4. Checking of filling pressure,
5. Checking of gas-tightness,
6. Dielectric testing and main circuit resistance measurement.
7. Power frequency voltage
8. Resistance test for the circuit
9. Mechanical operation tests.
10. Checking of Partial Discharge on complete unit.
All major type tests shall have been certified at an independent authority with the tests
carried outside country of manufacture shall be translated in English and submitted in hard
copy.
The supplier in the presence of WBSEDCL’s representative shall carry out all above
acceptance. The supplier shall give at least 15 days advance intimation to the WBSEDCL to
enable them to depute their representative for witnessing the tests.
The WBSEDCL reserves the right for carrying out any other tests of a reasonable nature at
the works of the supplier/laboratory or at any other recognized laboratory/research institute
in addition to the above mentioned type, acceptance and routine tests at the cost of the
WBSEDCL to satisfy that the material complies with the intent of this specification.

1.46 INSPECTION:

The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The
successful tenderer shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative/s at a
reasonable notice when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment
under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of
furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 29 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed, in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for stage inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
bought out items. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed, in advance, about such
testing program.

1.47 MANUFACTURING FACILITIES:

As RMU are having sealed pressure system in compliance with IEC 298, manufacturer shall
have complete facility with state of the art equipments for ensuring the quality of product
delivered strictly adhering to IEC 298 GUIDELINES. Following are the work station
requirement at manufacturer place to ensure the adherence: -

1. Robotic/TIG welding station for stainless steel main tank ensuring the leak rate less than
0.1% per annum
2. Work stations with adjustable work benches and torque wrenches, giving flexibility to
workmen for proper tightness of internal components of sealed tank.
3. State of the Gas leak testing system ensuring the quality of sealing and have precision to
measure leak rate less than 0.1% per annum.
4. High voltage testing station to have high voltage power frequency test and partial discharge
measurement.
5. Computerized system to measure time travel characteristic of breaker before sealing the tank.
6. Computerized SF6 filling and testing facility.
7. Partial Discharge Lab for conducting the partial discharge test.
It is mandatory to have the complete assembled tank tested for partial discharge to ensure a
high life and reliability of the product.

1.48 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The raw materials/components are to be procured only from reputed manufacturers.

After placement of Purchase Order, the bidder is required to produce on demand the
source of each material/component along with their test certificate.

1.49 DRAWINGS:

All drawings shall conform to relevant IEC Standards Specification. All drawings shall be in
ink. The Tenderer shall submit along with his tender dimensional general arrangement
drawings of the equipments, illustrative and descriptive literature in triplicate for various
items in the RMUs, which are all essentially required for future automation.

1. Schematic diagram of the RMU panel

2. Instruction manuals

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 30 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

3. Catalogues of spares recommended with drawing to indicate each items of spares

4. List of spares and special tools recommended by the supplier.
5. Drawings of equipments, relays, control wiring circuit, etc.
6. Foundation drawings of RMU.
7. Dimensional drawings of each material used for item Vii.
8. Actual single line diagram of RMU/RMUs with or without extra combinations shall be
made displayed on the front portion of the RMU so as to carry out the operations
easily.
5 sets of the manuals as above shall be supplied to the Chief Engineer, Distribution. Six nos
soft copy of the all Technical documents and Drawings furnished in a CD. All drawings shall
be prepared in Auto Cad and documents, literature etc in MS OFFICE format for submission.

1.50 PACKING & FORWARDING:

The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case
may be and the packing shall be suitable to withstand handling during the transport and
outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable
materials shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols.
Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the supplier
without any extra cost.
Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information:
a. Name of the consignee.
b. Details of consignment.
c. Destination.
d. Total weight of consignment.
e. Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f. Handling and unpacking instructions.
g. Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

All the equipment covered in this specification shall be delivered to the various stores of the
WBSEDCL as will be intimated to the successful Tenderer. The equipment shall be delivered
to these stores only by road transport and shall be suitably packed to avoid damages during
transit in the case of indigenous supplies.

1.51 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 31 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

In the event of any defect in the equipment arising out of faulty design, materials,
workmanship within a period of 5 (five) years from the date of last despatch of any integral
part of the equipment, the supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the
satisfaction of the purchaser.

1.52 DOCUMENTATION:

After issue of letter of acceptance, the successful Tenderers shall submit 3 identical sets of
complete drawings along with detailed bill of materials for approval, to the Chief Engineer,
Planning & Engineering, Distribution. If any modifications are required on these, the same
will be conveyed to the supplier who shall modify the drawings accordingly and furnish final
drawings for approval. In no case delivery extension will be granted for any delay in drawing
approved.
The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation will be permitted without the written approval of the Distribution
department. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior
to the approval of the drawings shall be at the supplier's risk.
After approval of the drawings and bills of materials, the suppliers shall submit detailed
packing lists for approval. After approval, copies of these packing lists shall be forwarded to
the respective consignees. Copies of packing lists shall also be submitted to the respective
site stores.
Before dispatch of equipment to various consignees, the suppliers shall furnish sets of final
drawings, including bills of materials and wiring schedules and also sets of technical
literature and commissioning manuals. These shall be in Five sets and shall be furnished to
the Distribution Procurement department, positively before the dispatch of equipment. All
drawings shall preferably be of A3 size. No drawing of width more than 35 cm will be
acceptable. One set each of the final drawings, bill of materials, wiring schedules and
commissioning manuals shall invariably be forwarded to the consignee along with the each
switchgear consignment and shall be listed out in the packing list, when submitted for
approval.
In case the supplier fails to furnish contractual drawings and manuals even at the time of
supply of equipment, the date of furnishing of drawings/manuals will be considered as the
date of supply of equipment for the purpose of computing penalties for late delivery.

1.53 SCHEDULES:

The tenderer shall fill-in the following schedules which is part and parcel of the tender
specification and offer. If the schedules are not submitted duly filled-in with the offer, the
offer shall be liable for rejection.
Schedule 'A' ... Guaranteed technical particulars.
Schedule 'B' ... Schedule of Tenderer's experience.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 32 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

Any additional information may be furnished separately by the tenderer, if felt necessary by
him.

1.54 ACCESSORIES & SPARES:

The following spares and accessories shall be supplied along with the main equipments at
free of costs. This shall not be included in the price schedule.
1. Charging lever for operating load break isolators & circuit breaker of each RMU.

Provision shall be made for padlocking the load break switches/ Circuit breaker, and the
earthing switches in either open or closed position with lock & master key.

---------------- o -----------------

Schedule-A

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR OUTDOOR RMU

PART 1
01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s Design/Type/Model

03. Material used for making the body of the RMU

04. Standards of manufacturing

05. Whether painting for RMU is done as per standards

06. Whether the enclosure is anti-corrosive

07. Whether RMU metal clad has sufficient space for integration of:
 1 number of Vacuum Circuit breaker
 Sufficient space for inspection, testing, etc.
 Earthing arrangements
 Terminal output points for automation
 Sufficient arrangement for future extension with Circuit
Breakers
08. Maximum withstanding ambient temperatures

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 33 of 41

Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

09. Spacing between live parts to earth

10. Whether RMU are designed to withstand all weather conditions

including chemical industry and polluted areas

11. Period of guarantee of the RMU

12. Over all dimensions of the RMU (L x W x H). Maximum allowable

– L – 1800mm, W – 1000mm & H – 2300mm
13. Material & Gauge of material used for fabrication of the RMU

14. Whether RMU is manufactured as per IEC/IS standards to hold SF6

gas without leakage
15. Whether RMU has provision for sensors for temperature
compensated pressure measurement in the relevant gas
compartment to monitor the pressure of SF6 gas
16. Whether RMU is sealed pressure system

17. Weight of RMU complete with operating mechanism

18. RMU is provided with necessary take off terminals for automation

19. Whether gas chamber is made of stainless steel

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 34 of 41

Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR BREAKER

PART 2

01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s Design / Type ref/ Model.

03. Material used for making the body of the breaker

04. Standards of manufacturing

05. Whether the breaker is manufactured as per IEC/IS

standards
Please give Standards no.
06. Maximum temperature withstand of the breakers

07. 1) Spacing between live part to Earth inside the breaker

2) Spacing between poles
08. Period of guarantee of the breaker
09. Rated frequency

10. Rated voltage

11. Highest system voltage

12. Rated current

13. Short time current rating with duration

14. Certificate or report of short circuit type test

15. Rated operating duty cycle

16. Short circuit breaking current
(a) Symmetrical
(b) Symmetrical at rated voltage
(c) Asymmetrical at rated voltage
(i) Per Phase
(ii) Average
(d) DC Component
17. Arcing time (At rated breaking current) in ms.

18. Opening time

19. Total break time in mili sec.

(a) At 10% rated interrupting capacity
(b) At rated interrupting capacity
20. Breaking Current
(a) Rated out of phase current
(b) Rated cable charging current
(c ) Rated fault level MVA
(d) Rated capacitor breaking current
21. Make time in ms.

22. Maximum temperature rise over ambient

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 35 of 41

Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

(a)Main contacts Terminals

23. Rated restriping voltage at 100% and 50% rated
capacity.
(a)Amplitude factor
(b)Phase factor
(c)Natural frequency
(d)R.R.R.V. (Volts/micro sec.)

24. Dry 1 minute power frequency withstand test voltage

(a)Between line terminal and earth KV RMS
(b)Between terminals with breaker contacts open KV
RMS.
25. 1.2/50 full wave impulse withstand test voltage
(a)Between line terminal and earth KVp.
(b)Between terminals with breaker contacts open KVp.
26. VCB interrupter make

27. Contact separation distance

28. Type of main contacts

29. Contact pressure

30. Contact resistance
31. Life of the interrupter (in number of operations)
(i)Tripping at rated current
(ii)Tripping at maximum fault current.
(Allowable maximum erosion 3 mm)
(iii)Mechanical operations.
32. Details of main contacts making contact with the
breaker truck with the panel
33. Control circuit voltage AC/DC.
34. Whether trip free or not

35. Whether all the interlocks provided

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 36 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR EARTHING SWITCHERS

PART 3
Sl. No. Description Load Break Isolator
Switch (Earthing Switch)
01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s Design / Type ref/ Model.

03. Material used for making the body of the isolators.

04. Standards of manufacturing

05. Whether the isolators & earth positions are

manufactured as per IEC/IS standards
06. Maximum temperature withstand of the isolators &
earth switches
07. 1) Spacing between live part to Earth
2) Spacing between fixed and moving contacts
in the open position.
08. Period of guarantee of the Earthing switches
09. Rated frequency

10. Rated voltage

11. Highest system voltage
12. Rated current

13. Short time current rating with duration

14. Certificate or report of short circuit type test

15. Rated operating duty cycle

16. Short circuit breaking current

17. Arcing time (At rated breaking current) in ms.

18. Opening time

19 Whether all the interlocks provided

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 37 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

PART 4

01. Manufacturer’s Name and country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s design ref / model

03. Applicable Standards

04. 1)Type of CT
2)Ratio
05. Rated Primary current

06. Rated secondary current

07. Rated frequency

08. Transformation ratio

09. Number of cores

10. Rated output

(a) For Core-I
11. Class of insulation

12. Class of accuracy for Protection

13. Short time current rating and its duration
14. Secondary resistance at 70 Deg C
15. Continuous over load (percentage)
16. One minute power frequency dry withstand voltage

17. 1.2/50 micro sec. impulse withstand test voltage

18. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage on secondary

19. Instrument safety factor

20. Type of primary winding

21. Literature/leaflets pamphlets about the current transformer

offered
22. Period of guarantee

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 38 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

SHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SELF POWERED MICRO-

PROCESSOR BASED NUMERICAL RELAYS
PART 5

01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s design / Ref. Type

03. Applicable Standards

04. Current Setting range for

(a) Over current relay IDMT

(b) Earth fault Element

Definite Time

05. Whether the relay has the in-built facilities of IDMT, OL, EL
06. Details of IDMT Characteristics
07. Accuracy for different settings and limits of errors

08. Whether Alpha numeric / LED display

09. Whether compatible for 1 A CT Secondary

10. Whether draw out type

11. Type of case

12. Reset time

13. Burden of relay

14. Maximum and Minimum, operating ambient air temp.

15. Whether technical literature pamphlets about the relay offered.

16. Period of guarantee.

17. Certificate of Proof for Electro Magnetic Interference.

18 Communications port – RS 232 / RS 485

19 Communication Protocol – MODBUS

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 39 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE ‘B’

SCHEDULE OF TENDERER's EXPERIENCE

The tenderer shall furnish here the list of the similar orders
executed/under execution by him to whom a reference may be made by
the purchaser in case he considers such reference necessary.

Value of Period of
Sr. No. Name of the order supply Name and

client & & address to

description whom ref
of commissioning can
the order be made

NAME OF THE FIRM-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---

NAME & SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER-----------------------------------------------------

--

DESIGNATION--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--

DATE---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-

------------------------------

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 40 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 3 -Way Ring Main Unit

Annexure-A

Standard Make of Relay and fitment

1. Relays ABB/Siemens/Schneider Electric/

C&S /CGL or OEM make

2. Breaker Control Switch Kaycee/Alstom/Recom

3. Ammeter/Voltmeter Selector switch Kaycee/ Recom

4. Static Ammeter/ Voltmeter AE/IMP/MECO

5. Push Buttons Alstom/Kaycee/Vaishno

6. Indicating Lamps with lenses Alstom/Kaycee/Vaishno

7. Panel Wiring ECKO/PHOENIX

8. Vacuum Interrupter CGL / BEL / SCHNEIDER /

SIEMENS / ABB or OEM make

9. FPI Preferably OEM make

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 41 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit
__________________________________________________________________________________

Technical Specification for

SCADA compatible 11kV Non extensible 4-Way Ring
Main Unit

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Rev 1 Page 1 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.0 SCOPE

1.1 This specification covers Design, Engineering, Manufacture, Assembly, testing, Inspection,
packing, delivery and unloading at site of new “SCADA-Ready” Ring Main Units capable of being
monitored and controlled by the Central SCADA. The RMU to be supplied against this specification
are required for vital installations where continuity of service is very important. The design, materials
and manufacture of the equipment shall, therefore, be of the highest order to ensure continuous and
trouble-free service over the years.

The RMU offered shall be compact, maintenance free, easy to install, reliable, safe and easy to
operate and complete with all parts necessary for their effective and trouble-free operation.
Such parts will be deemed to be within the scope of the supply irrespective of whether they
are specifically indicated in the commercial order or not.

It is not the intent to specify herein complete details of design and construction. The offered
equipment shall conform to the relevant standards and be of high quality, sturdy, robust and
of good design and workmanship complete in all respects and capable to perform continuous
and satisfactory operations in the actual service conditions at site and shall have sufficiently
long life in service as per statutory requirements. In actual practice, not withstanding any
anomalies, discrepancies, omissions, in-completeness, etc. in these specifications, the design
and constructional aspects, including materials and dimensions, will be subject to good
engineering practice in conformity with the required quality of the product, and to such
tolerances, allowances and requirements for clearances etc. as are necessary by virtue of
various stipulations in that respect in the relevant Indian Standards, IEC standards, I.E.
Rules, I.E. Act and other statutory provisions.

The Tenderer/supplier shall bind himself to abide by these considerations to the entire
satisfaction of the purchaser and will be required to adjust such details at no extra cost to
the purchaser over and above the tendered rates and prices.

It shall also encompass all necessary project management, data engineering, acceptance
testing, documentation, warranty services.

Each RMU shall include its own power supply unit (including auxiliary power transformer,
batteries, and battery charger), which shall provide a stable power source for the RMU.

1.1.1 Scope of Work

 Supply of SCADA Ready 4 way RMU.

 Supply of battery charger and battery.

 Supply of right angle boots for covering the bare cable lug.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 2 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.2 Tolerances: Tolerances on all the dimensions shall be in accordance with provisions made in
the relevant Indian/IEC standards amended upto date and in this specification. Otherwise
the same will be governed by good engineering practice in conformity with required quality of
the product.

1.3 Key RMU Components

Key RMU components are listed as follows:

 Two (2) Isolators with earthing switches, connecting the RMU to incoming and outgoing
main loop, 11 kV, 630 Amp XLPE cables of size 400/300 mm2 cross section aluminium
conductor.

 Two (2) circuit breakers (CB) with earthing switches, connecting the RMU to distribution
transformers loop, 11 kV, 200 Amp XLPE cables of size 185 mm2 cross section aluminium
conductors.

 One numerical relays having non-directional O/C and E/F protection for each outgoing
feeder. In case of 630 KVA and above wet type transformer, auxiliary relay for transformer
supervision shall be provided. Both the Incomers shall have FPI with electrical reset
facility.

 All necessary current sensors for metering and protection.

 All necessary potential-free contacts for indications relevant to RMU monitoring and
control.

 A power supply unit, including auxiliary power transformer and battery backup, to
provide stable 24 V DC sources of power for the RMU’s spring-charge motors, relays etc.
The power supply shall also provide for RMU enclosure lighting fixtures and power-plug
receptacles for maintenance/test equipment.

 Capacitor voltage dividers serving live-line cable indicators.

A typical four-way RMU configuration is illustrated in

Figure-1. In this case, the RMU has five enclosures, one for each of the two Isolators and
two circuit breakers and one for the RMU’s auxiliary power supply unit and the necessary
SCADA monitoring and control equipment. The SCADA monitoring and control equipment
includes the RTU and modem to be supplied by others.

Figure-1: Typical RMU Configuration

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 3 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.4 Applicable Standards

The RMUs shall be manufactured to the highest quality consistent with best practice and
workmanship and in full accord with the Contractor’s quality assurance plan. The RMUs
and the work associated with their installation shall also conform to the Indian and
equivalent international standards that are applicable.

The Contractor shall provide an English language copy of the applicable Indian and
equivalent international standards met by the proposed RMU.

Rating, characteristics, tests and test procedures etc. for the RMU , protection Relays,
monitoring and control devices and accessories including current transformer shall comply
with the provisions and requirements of the standards of the IEC and IS where specified.
The latest revision or edition in effect at the time of bid invitation shall apply. Where
references are given to numbers in the old numbering scheme from IEC it shall be taken to
be the equivalent number in the new five-digit number scheme. The bidder shall specifically
state the precise standard, complete with identification number, to which the various
equipments and materials are manufactured and tested. The bid document may not contain a
full list of standards to be used, as they only are referred to where useful for clarification of
the text.

Table 1-1: Applicable Standards

Standard Description

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 4 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

Standard Description

IEC 60529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by

enclosures of electrical equipment
IEC 60298 A.C metal-enclosed switchgear and control gear for
rated voltages above 1KV and up to and including
72KV
IEC 1330 High voltage/Low voltage prefabricated substations

IEC 60694 Common specification for HV switchgear standards

IEC 60265 High-voltage switches-Part 1: Switches for rated

voltages above 1kV and less
than 52 kV
IEC 60801 Monitoring and control

IEC 60185 Current Transformers

IEC 60186 Voltage transformers

BS 159 Busbar

IEC 60137 Bushings

CP 1013(British Code of Earthing

Practice)
IEC 60255 Specification for Static Protective Relays

BS 6231 Wires and wiring

IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility

IEC 60129 Alternating current Disconnector (isolators) and

earthing switches
IEC 62271-200 Metal enclosed BS 5311 switchgear

IEC 62271-100 MV AC circuit breaker

IEC 60060-1 High Voltage test technique

BS 923
IEC 60034-1 Motors

IEC 60947-4-1 Control Gears

IEC 60623 Open Ni-Cd prismatic rechargeable cell

IEC 376 Filling of SF6 gas in RMU

1.5 Environmental Conditions

All materials supplied and installed shall be capable of operating without fault in a tropical
climate, which exhibits a high level of ultra-violet radiation and severe thunderstorms.
Relevant environmental conditions are listed as follows:

 Maximum ambiant air température: 40 ºC

 Minimum ambiant air température: 10 ºC
 Maximum relative humidity: 95 %

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 5 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

 Average thunder storm days per annum: 50

 Average rainfall per annum: 1450 mm
 Maximum wind pressure: 150 km/sq. m
 Altitude above mean sea level: Max. 1000 m

1.6 Distribution Network Electrical Parameters

The main parameters of the WBSEDCL distribution network are as follows:

 Nominal system voltage: 11 kV (rms)

 Highest system voltage: 12 kV (rms)
 Number of phases: 3 ph/3 wire
 Frequency: 50 Hz
 Type of earthing: Solid
 Rated normal current: 630 Amp (Ring Switch)
200 Amps (Transformer Feeder)
 Power frequency withstand voltage 28 kV for 1 min
 Number of electrical operations 100 O/C
at full load current
 Rated cable charging interrupting
Current for Line Switch 25A
 Rated magnetizing interrupting
current for Line Switch 16A
 Minimum number of operations at rated 10 breaking operations
short circuit current on circuit breaker
 Number of operations at rated 5 closing operations
short circuit current on line switches,
earthing switches and CB
 Basic impulse withstand voltage
Ph to ph & ph to earth : 75 kV peak
 Fault level (minimum) : 18.4 kA for 3 sec for 12kV
 Rated short circuit making capacity : 46kA peak at rated voltage
of line switches and earthing switches
and CB
 Climatic Condition : Moderately hot and humid tropical
climate conducive to rust and fungus
growth.
 Visible or audible corona with switchgear energized at 12 kV phase to earth at 50 Hz
: None
 Circuit Breaker : In addition to the ratings mentioned in this specification, the circuit
breaker shall have following:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 6 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

Cable charging breaking

25A
current
Small inductive
16A
breaking current

General data, enclosure and dimension:-

Sl. No Description WBSEDCL Requirement

1. Standard to which Switchgear complies IEC
2. Type of Ring Main Unit Metal enclosed panel type,
Compact module
3. Number of phases 3
4. Whether RMU is Type tested Yes
5. Whether facility is provided with Yes
pressure relief
6. Insulating gas 1.3 bar at 20o C

7. Gas leakage rate 0.1% per year

8. Expected operating lifetime 30 Yrs.
9. Whether facility is provided for gas Yes, temperature compensated
monitoring manometer can be delivered.
10. Material used in tank construction Stainless steel

Operations, degree of protection and colors

1. Means of switch operation Separate handle
2. Means circuit breaker operation Separate handle and push
buttons
3. Rated operating sequence of Circuit O-3min-CO-3min-CO
Breaker
4. Opening time of circuit breaker Approx. 60-80 ms.
5. Closing time of Circuit Breaker Approx. 40-60 ms.
6. Mechanical operations of Disconnector 1000
switch
7. Mechanical operation of earthing 1000
switch
8. Mechanical operations of circuit 2000
breaker
9. Disconnector switch/earth switch 3 position combined switch/earth
switch

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 7 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

Degree of Protection
1. High voltage live parts, SF6, VCB IP67
2. Front cover mechanism IP2X

3. Cable cover IP 2X
4. Outdoor Enclosure IP54

1.7 Testing

The specified RMUs shall be subject to type tests, routine tests, and acceptance tests. Where
applicable, these tests shall be carried out as per the standards stated above. Prior to testing, the
Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed test plan for review and approval by the Employer.

1.8 RMU Design Features

All design features of the proposed RMU, as described in the Contractor’s bid and in the bid’s
reference materials, shall be fully supported by the equipment actually delivered. The key design
features include those that relate to:

 Availability, maintainability and life span

 Ability to operate in severe outdoor environmental conditions
 Immunity to electrical stress and disturbance
 Acceptable insulation properties
 Termination to SCADA Terminal Box for convenient RTU interconnection features

In these and all other specified respects, the RMU shall meet or exceed the cited standards or where
appropriate, other equivalent industry standards.

1.9 Availability, Maintainability and Life Span

1.9.1 Availability

The RMU shall be designed to have a fully enclosed metal housing combined with the single-phase
insulation of all primary live parts to reduce the risk of internal faults to an absolute minimum and
to provide a high degree of safety as well as availability. Nevertheless, manufacturer standard
designs shall be used to the fullest extent possible.

Each RMU shall exhibit an availability of greater than 99.5%. To ensure this high degree of
availability, the RMUs shall be fabricated, assembled, and finished with workmanship of the highest
production quality and shall conform to all applicable quality control standards. All materials
comprising the RMU shall be new, unused, and of the best industrial grade, and the RMU shall
incorporate all recent improvements in both design and materials. All components shall be of current
production from reliable component manufacturers.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 8 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.9.2 Maintainability

The Employer prefers RMU designs that do not require periodic preventive maintenance and
inspections. If periodic maintenance is required, it shall be possible to perform all such work in the
field without requiring the associated distribution network circuits to be de-energized.

1.10 Outdoor Features

1.10.1 General

The RMUs shall be designed specifically for outdoor installation and, in this respect, shall be suitable
for continuous operation in a tropical climate that includes exposure to severe frequently occurring
thunderstorms. They shall also be suitable for conditions in which they will be exposed to heavy
industrial pollution, salt-spray, and high levels of airborne dust.

The equipment in the proposed outdoor RMU shall be conformably coated to meet these climatic
conditions. In this respect, standards such as IEC 60870-2-2 covering equipment, systems,
operating conditions, and environmental conditions shall apply along with IEC 60721, which covers
the classification of such conditions. In particular, the RMU equipment shall have been type tested
for continuous operation under the environmental conditions identified in Clause 1.5.

In addition to the above, materials promoting the growth of fungus or susceptibility to corrosion and
heat degradation shall not be used, and steps shall be taken to provide rodent proof installations.

All live parts, high voltage components, excluding the HV cable termination of the switchgear shall be
insulated/ protected in SF6 to provide complete proofing against dangers of flashover between phase
and earth and between phases. In particular, the equipment shall be climate free in that no high
voltage connection will be exposed to the environment.

1.10.2 Corrosion Protection

The fabricated parts are pretreated using 7 tank process and then coated by layer of zinc phosphate.
A finish coat with high scratch resistance or epoxy powder finish paint shall be applied over the
primer. The coat thickness shall be of the order of 40 to 60 micrometers. The Employer shall approve
the finish-coat color. The RAL-7032/RAL-7035/IEC 632 code will be agreed upon with the Bidder
during the early design phases of project implementation.

1.10.3 Material

Except for main tank and external hardware which made of stainless steel, all structural steel and
outer enclosure as well as nuts and bolts etc. shall be of CRCA steel with epoxy powder finish paint..

1.11 Immunity to Electrical Stress and Disturbance

The electrical and electronic components of the RMU shall conform to relevant standards concerning
insulation, isolation, and immunity from electromagnetic interference, radiated disturbance, and
electrostatic discharge. The ability to meet these requirements shall be verified by type tests carried
out by accredited test laboratories that are independent of the bidder and/or the manufacturer of the
RMU components. Certified copies of all available type test certificates and test results shall be

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 9 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

included as part of the bidder’s proposal. Failure to conform to this requirement shall constitute
grounds for rejection of the proposal.

1.12 Minimum Insulation of Equipment

The RMUs shall have SF6 gas-insulated type stainless steel tank with joints inside tank. All live parts
shall be fully insulated throughout their joints.

1.13 Nameplate Information

RMU nameplate information shall be determined in agreement with the Employer. This information
may include for example:

 Name of manufacturer and country

 Type, design, and serial number
 Rated voltage and current
 Rated frequency
 Rated symmetrical breaking capacity
 Rated making capacity
 Rated short time current and its duration
 Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
 Purchase Order number and date
 Month and year of supply
 Property label: Property of WBSEDCL
 Guarantee period : 5 years

1.14 Danger Board:

The Danger Board plate as per relevant IS shall be riveted on the front plate of the RMU.

1.15 Interconnecting Cables, Wiring, Connectors, and Terminal Blocks

The Manufacturer shall provide all interconnecting wires, cables, connectors, terminations and other
wiring accessories such as terminal blocks required by the RMU.

1.15.1 Cables

All metallic cables and wiring shall be of required cross-section multiple strands of round copper
conductors and have flame retardant insulation. All wiring shall be neatly laced and clamped.

All wire and cable connectors and terminators shall be permanently labeled for identification. All
connection points for external cables and wires shall be easily accessible for connection and
disconnection and shall be permanently labeled. Conductors in multi-conductor cables shall be
individually color-coded.

The DC cables from the battery unit to RMU and to pilot marshalling box shall be atleast 4mm 2. CT
& OT Control cable will be 2.5 Sq. mm and all other control cable shall be 1.5 mm2 Cu multi-
conductor and shall be screened with half-lapped copper tape. All wiring and termination of

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 10 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

connecting cables shall be carried out by the Contractor. Conductor used for AC and DC circuits
shall not be mixed in the same multi-conductor cable.

All wires shall be neatly run in groups and shall be securely fixed by cleats which are made of
insulating material. Suitable crimped connectors shall be used for the termination of the wire to the
terminal blocks.

All wires, including the spare cores of a multi-core cable, shall be properly numbered by an approved
type of interlocking ferrule. All spare relay contacts shall also be wired out to spare terminal block
inside the panels. The marking on the ferrules shall not be erased easily. The colour of DC supply
circuits shall be grey to differentiate from AC supply for easy identification.

All wiring colour classification, wire terminal sleeve colour and wire numbering system shall be
subjected to WBSEDCL’s approval.

All AC and DC wiring terminals that are easily accessible by operating personnel shall be adequately
shielded by suitable means.

1.15.2 Connectors

Plug-type connectors with captive fasteners shall be used for all interconnections. The connectors
shall be polarized to prevent improper assembly.

1.15.3 Terminal Blocks

Suitable Disconnector type terminal blocks shall be provided for CT circuits with necessary spares
with 5 mm minimum machine screws shall be provided by the Contractor for other necessary
metallic cable terminations. In using a terminal block, no more than two cables or wires shall be
connected to any of its individual terminals.

Self-extinguishing fireproof vinyl marking strips shall be used to identify all external connection
blocks. Marking tags shall be read horizontally. All terminals to which battery or other high voltages
are connected shall be provided with fireproof covers.

All individual status input, AC voltage input, and control output points shall be isolatable without
the need to remove wiring by means of individual terminal blocks of the removable link type. In order
to avoid open circuits on the secondary side of CTs, termination blocks with by-pass bridges shall be
provided for all AC current inputs.

Terminal blocks shall comply with IEC 60947-7-1 (2009): Low-voltage Switchgear and Control Gear,
Part 7-1: Ancillary Equipment, Terminal Blocks for Copper Conductors.

TBs shall be mounted onto suitable insulation materials via channels. TBs shall be able to withstand
5kV AC rms voltage continuously for 1 minute between terminal and terminal to earth.

One TB shall be used for one feeder panel. Translucent cover shall be provided for all cable
termination blocks. TBs shall be suitably spaced and labeled to enable easy and neat termination.
Each terminal shall be labeled according to the panel number. The use of embossing tape for such
purpose is not acceptable.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 11 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.16 General Requirements

Each RMU shall include its own power supply, including battery and battery charger. In addition,
space must be provided for the RMU’s auxiliary power transformer.

Within this context, the general requirements of the RMU shall include, but shall not be limited to
provision of the following local and remote monitoring and control features through SCADA:

 Positions of local/remote switches as used to control local and remote access to circuit
breakers.
 Power supply indications including battery failure and voltage alarms.
 Open/closed position of circuit breakers, and earthing switches.
 Enclosure door-open indications.
 SF6 gas-pressure low alarm and Lockout.
 Isolator/Circuit breaker spring charge indications.
 Circuit breaker relay protection indications.
 Circuit breaker open/close control.
 Protection device failures through built-in Watch dog contact i.e ‘self monitoring’ feature
of relay. This indication can be wired to RTU for integration in SCADA.
 FPI indication

SCADA wire termination at Marshalling Box shall have to be standardized. Hence, sequence of
termination shall be subject to WBSEDCL’s Drawing approval.

1.16.1 Design Details

 The RMU shall be designed to operate at the rated voltage of 12 kV. It shall consist of two
(2) numbers of 630 Amp SF6 insulated Isolators (incomers) and up to two (2) number of
200 Amp SF6 insulated Circuit Breakers for load.

 It shall include, within the same metal enclosure, earthing switches for each Isolators and
Circuit Breaker.

 Suitable fool-proof interlocks shall be provided to the earthing switches to prevent

inadvertent or accidental closing when the circuit is live and the concerned Circuit
Breaker/Isolator is in its closed position.

 Enclosures filled with gas at suitable pressure to ensure adequate insulation and safe
operation shall be used. The assembly shall not require further gas processing during its
expected operational life.

 The degree of protection required against prevailing environmental conditions, including

splashing water and dust, shall be not less than IP 54.

 The active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance free. Rest parts shall be of low-
maintenance type.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 12 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

 The tank shall be made of an adequate thickness of stainless steel and internally arc
tested.

 The RMU shall be suitable for mounting on its connecting cable trench.

 For each RMU enclosure, a suitably sized nameplate clearly identifying the enclosure and
the electrical characteristics of the enclosed devices shall be provided.

 The positions of the different devices shall be clearly visible to an operator when standing
in front of each enclosure with its door open. Device operations shall be clearly visible.

 The RMU design shall be such that access to live parts shall not be possible without the
use of OEM-supplied tools.

 The design shall incorporate features that prevent any accidental opening of the earth
switch when it is in the closed position. Similarly, accidental closing of a Circuit Breaker
shall be prevented when the same is in an open position. This includes protection against
accidental closing resulting from the release of any latch or spring in tension due to
vibrations caused externally or internally.

 Circuit breakers shall be enclosed in the main tank using SF6 gas as insulating and
vacuum as arc quenching medium. The main tank shall be non-magnetic, non-ferrite
stainless steel sheet of adequate thickness to ensure leak rate below 0.1% per year and
preferably robotically/TIG welded with a pressure relief arrangement. The minimum
thickness of main tank of RMU shall not be less than 2.00 mm.

 The main tank (Inner enclosure of Circuit Breaker) and all Switchboard assembly shall be
housed in a single compact metal clad suitable for both indoor/outdoor applications. The
design of enclosure for Switchgear, RMU & Switchboard housing shall be in accordance
with IEC 298.

 An absorption material such as activated alumina in the tank shall be provided to absorb
the moisture from the SF6 gas. A temperature compensating gas pressure indicator
offering a simple indication shall constantly monitor the SF6 insulating medium.

 The unit shall be internal arc proof and tested and totally safe for human beings. The
release of gas to be from the top or bottom of the unit, so that, even if the person is
operating the unit, opening the cover, the release will be at the top or bottom. The release
in no case should be from any side of the unit, as the same is unsafe for the operating
personnel/pedestrian or general public.

 The clearances of all live parts to earth and between phases shall be to approval and
shall be in no way less than clearances specified in the relevant standards of this
technical specification. All equipment shall be designed so as to minimize corona or any
other electrical discharges under all atmospheric conditions.

 RMU needs to be pedestal mounted for easy bending of cables for termination with the
unit, safe for temporary water logging and ease in installation at any urban location
without wasting much time to make the cable trench etc.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 13 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

 The maximum allowable Dimension of 4 way SCADA compatible Non – Extendable RMU
will be – Length – 2100mm, Breadth – 1000mm & Height – 2300 mm.

1.16.2 Sulphur Hexa Fluoride Gas (SF6 GAS):

The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 376,376A and 376B and shall be suitable in all respects
for use in RMUs under the stipulated service conditions. The SF6 shall be tested for purity,
dew point air hydrolysable fluorides and water content as per IEC 376,376A and 376B and
test certificate shall be furnished to the owner indicating all the tests as per IEC 376 for each
lot of SF6 Gas.

1.17 ENCLOSURE:

All Contractor-supplied enclosures shall be sized to provide convenient access to all enclosed
components. It shall not be necessary to remove any component to gain access to another
component for maintenance purposes or any other reason.

The enclosures shall also be designed to ensure that the enclosure remains rigid and retain
its structural integrity under all operating and service conditions with and without the
enclosure door closed.

1.17.1 Outer Enclosure:

The RMU enclosure (Outer) shall be made up of CRCA steel of minimum 1.6 mm thickness.
The rating of enclosure shall be suitable for operation on three phase, three wire, 12 kV, 50
cycles, A.C. System with short-time current rating of 18.4 KA for 3 seconds for 12 kV supply
with Panels. The complete RMU enclosure shall be of degree of protection IP 54. The
enclosure shall provide full insulation, making the Switchgear insensitive to the environment
like temporary flooding, high humidity etc. The active parts of the Switchgear shall be
maintenance-free and the unit shall be of minimum maintenance.
The complete RMU unit shall be powder coating of RAL 7032/RAL 7035 Grey to DIN
Standard 43656/IEC 632.
Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly indicates
the functional units and their electrical characteristics.
The Switchgear and Switchboards shall be designed such that the position of the different
devices is visible to the operator on the front of the Switchboard and operations are visible.
In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards shall be designed so as to
prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.

1.17.2 Inner enclosure (Main tank)

The tank shall be preferably made of time tested welded stainless steel sheet of adequate
thickness to ensure leak rate less tank 0.1% per year. The tank shall be sealed and no

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 14 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

handling of gas is required throughout the service life. However, the SF6 gas pressure inside
the tank shall be at 1.3 bar relative minimum to ensure the insulation and breaking
functions and constantly monitored by a temperature compensating gas pressure indicator
offering a simple go, no-go indication. The gas pressure indicator shall be provided with green
pressure and red pressure zones. There shall be one Non – return valve to fill up the gas. The
manufacturer shall give guarantee for maximum leakage rate of SF6 gas will be lower than
0.1 % / year. There shall be no requirement to ‘top up’ the SF6 gas. An absorption material
such as activated alumina in the tank shall be provided to absorb the moisture from the SF6
gas to regenerate the SF6 gas following arc interruption. The degree of protection of the inner
enclosure shall be IP 67.
Oil or Air filled Switchgear will not be considered. The temperature rise test shall be carried
out on complete RMU unit and test reports shall be submitted with the offer.
The compact RMU Unit shall be provided with a pedestal made up of M.S. Angle to mount the
unit on plain surface. The height of the bottom of cable box shall be 310 mm to provide the
turning radius for the HT cable termination. Means of enabling the SCADA to monitor the
open/closed status of the enclosure door shall be provided.

1.18 Earthing

 There shall be continuity between metallic parts of the RMUs and cables so that there is
no dangerous electric field in the surrounding air and the safety of personnel is ensured.

 The RMU frames shall be connected to the main earth bars, and the cables shall be
earthed by an Earthing Switch having the specified short circuit making capacity.

 The Earthing Switch shall be operable only when the main switch is open. In this respect,
a suitable mechanical fail-proof interlock shall be provided.

 The Earthing Switch shall be provided with a reliable earthing terminal for connection to
an earthing conductor having a clamping screw suitable for the specified earth fault
conditions. The connection point shall be marked with the earth symbol.

 The Earthing Switch shall be fitted with its own operating mechanism. In this respect,
manual closing shall be driven by a fast acting mechanism independent of the operator's
action.

 All parts of the switchgear metal enclosure, metal relay and instrument cases, cable
glands, earthing terminals and other metal work on switchgear shall be connected to
earth by means of main and subsidiary earth bus bars.

 The switchgear earth bar and earth conductors shall be of high conductivity copper and
their sizes shall be selected in accordance with BS CP 1013 taking into consideration the
rated short circuit currents of the switchgear.

 All metal parts of the switchgear which do not belong to main circuit and which can
collect electric charges causing dangerous effect shall be connected to the earthing

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 15 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

conductor made of copper having cross section area of minimum 90 [Link]. Each end of
conductor shall be terminated by M12/equivalent quality and type of terminal for
connection to earth system installation. Earth conductor location shall not obstruct
access to cable terminations.

 The following items are to be connected to the main earth conductor by rigid or copper
conductors having a minimum cross section of 75 sq. mm (a) earthing switches (b) Cable
sheath or screen (c) capacitors used in voltage control devices, if any.

 The metallic cases of the relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment’s shall
be connected to the earth bus. The colour code of earthing wire shall be green. Earthing
wires shall be connected on the terminals with suitable clamp connectors and soldering
shall not be permitted.

1.19 Circuit Breakers

The Circuit Breakers shall be maintenance free and, when standing in front of the RMU with
enclosure doors open, their positions shall be clearly visible. The position indicator shall
provide positive contact indication in accordance with IS 9920. In addition, the manufacturer
shall prove the reliability of indication in accordance with IS 9921.

The breakers shall have three positions (or states), i.e., Open, Closed, and Earthed, and shall
be constructed in such a way that natural interlocking prevents unauthorized operations.
They shall be fully assembled, tested, and inspected in the factory.

An operating mechanism shall be used to manually close the Circuit Breaker and charge the
mechanism in a single movement. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping.
There shall be no automatic reclosing. The Circuit Breaker shall be capable of closing fully
and latching against the rated making current. Mechanical indication of the OPEN, CLOSED,
and EARTHED positions of the Circuit Breaker shall be provided.

The circuit breaker shall be fitted with a mechanical flag, which shall operate in the event of
fault occurrences. The breaker indications ON and OFF positions shall be indicated by
suitable flag. For ON position indication by Red flag and OFF position indication by Green
flag shall be provided.
The circuit breaker shall be operated by the same unidirectional handle or switch. The rated
operating sequence shall be O-3min-CO-3 min-CO.

Each Circuit Breaker shall operate in conjunction with a suitable protection relay under
lateral circuit phase and earth fault conditions. In addition, the Circuit Breaker shall be
provided with a motorized operating mechanism that can be remotely monitored and
controlled from the SCADA.

1.20 RING SWITCHES (Isolator):

They shall consist of 630 amp fault making/load breaking spring assisted ring switches, each
with integral fault making/load breaking earth switches. The switch shall be naturally
interlocked to prevent the main and earth switch being switched ‘ON’ at the same time. The

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 16 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

selection of the main and earth switch is made by a lever on the fascia which is allowed to
move only if the main or earth switch is in ‘OFF’ position. The Ring switches shall be
capable for remote SCADA operation.

1.21 BUSBARS:

The Three nos. of continuous Busbars made up of copper of rating 630A shall be provided.
The Short time rating current shall be 18.4 kA for 3 seconds for 12 kV. All joints and
connectors shall be SF6 insulated in accordance to this specification. Any component directly
connected to the power cables shall also be capable of withstanding the DC test voltage
applied to the cables. Cross section of the Busbar shall not be less than that stated in GTP.

1.22 BUSHINGS
All the bushings shall be of same height, parallel, on the equal distances from the ground and
protected by a cable cover. It is preferable to have bushings accessible from the rear side of
the RMU.

1.23 CABLE BOXES

All cable boxes shall be air insulated suitable for dry type cable terminations. The cable boxes
of the circuit breaker shall be suitable up to 12 kV 3Core 400/300 [Link] XLPE types
vertically ascending cable preferably for front type connection. Necessary Right angle Boot
should be supplied for cable terminations. Compound filled cable boxes are not acceptable.
The cable box shall be arc resistant as per IEC 62271-200 amended upto date. The internal
arc fault test on cable box shall be carried out for12 kV systems for 18.4 kA for 1 second. The
clearance between phase to phase and phase to earth shall be as per IEC 61243–5 amended
upto date. The cable box provided shall be of adequate dimension to house an air-insulated
cable termination. It shall be able to accommodate crossing of phase cores, if necessary. The
cable box shall be rated in accordance with the rated insulation level of the switchgear.

Phases of all primary terminals shall be positively marked on the main structure and not on
the removable covers.

An approved type of cable gland suitable for the above mentioned cable shall be provided with
each box. Heat shrinkage sleeve shall be provided if wiping cable gland is used.

1.24 VOLTAGE INDICATOR LAMPS AND PHASE COMPARATORS

The RMU shall be equipped with a voltage indication. There should be a facility to check the
synchronization of phases with the use of external device. Three outlets can be used to check
the synchronization of phases with the use of an external device. It shall be possible for each
of the bay of the RMU to be equipped with a permanent voltage indication as per IEC 601958
to indicate whether or not there is voltage on the cables. The capacitive dividers will supply
low voltage power to sockets at the front of the unit, an external push button type neon lamp

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 17 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

must be used to indicate live cables. The neon shall be of adequate dimensions to provide
clear indication under all conditions.

1.25 Operating lever

An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to re-open
immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch. All manual operations shall be
carried out on the front of the switchboard. The effort exerted on the lever by the operator
should not be more than 250 N for the switch and circuit breaker. The overall dimensions of
the RMU shall not be increased due to the use of the operating handle. The operating handle
should have two workable positions 180° apart.
1.26 Safety of Equipment

With respect to the RMU’s SF6-filled equipment, any accidental overpressure inside the sealed
chamber shall be limited by the opening of a pressure-limiting device in the enclosure so that
the gas will be released away from the operator without endangering the operator or anyone
else in the vicinity of the RMU.

All manual operations shall be carried out from the front of the RMU. The effort required to be
exerted on the lever as used by the operator shall not exceed 250 N.

1.27 Front Plate

The front plate shall include a clear mimic diagram indicating RMU functionality. The
position indicators shall correctly depict the position of the main contacts and shall be clearly
visible to the operator. The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated.

1.28 Current Transformers/Sensors

A panel shall be provided in each circuit breaker enclosure to mount single-core, CT for
protection purposes. CT access for maintenance or any other purpose shall be from the front,
back, or top of these panels.

The CTs shall conform to IS 2705. The design and construction shall be sufficiently robust to
withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short circuits. Secondary terminals of CTs
shall be brought out suitably to a terminal block, which will be easily accessible for testing
and terminal connections.

Further characteristics and features for CTs used for protection are listed as follows:

CBCT/Current Sensors for FPI Protection (for Ring) :

 Material: Epoxy resin cast

 Ratio and burden suitable as per FPI manufacturer’s recommendation.
CTs for Protection (for Outgoing) :

 Material: Epoxy resin cast

 Burden: 2.5VA

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 18 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

 Ratio: 100-50/1 A
 Accuracy Class: 5 P 5
 If current measurement & communication of Measured data through MODBUS protocol is
done by the relay, no need for metering core.

1.29 Protection Relay

The RMU shall be equipped with self powered numerical relays as used to trip the RMU
circuit breakers.

1.29.1 General

The Circuit Breaker enclosures in the RMU shall be outfitted with a communicable-type
numerical (feeder protection) relay, i.e., one for each circuit breaker. The protection relay’s
auxiliary contacts shall be hardwired to the SCADA Terminal Block. The relay shall also
interface with the RTU via an RS 485 port in order to send, as a minimum, real-time phase
current , readings using the MODBUS protocol.

The numerical relay shall be self powered and be provided with Inverse Definite Minimum
Time (IDMT) and Instantaneous protection characteristics. On this basis, the relay as a
minimum shall provide:

 Phase Over current Protection: Non-directional (50/51)

 Earth Fault Protection : Non-Directional (50N/51N)
 Transformer supervision- Buchholtz alarm/trip, temperature alarm etc. for 630 KVA and
above.

Tripping and closing of RMU shall be done through suitable tripping and closing Relay which
will be interfaced with the tripping and closing coil of the RMU. A flag indicator shall be
installed for signaling the occurrence of trip conditions.

1.29.2 Features and Characteristics

The numerical relay shall have the following minimal features and characteristics noting that
variations may be acceptable as long as they provide similar or better functionality and/or
flexibility.

The make of the Numerical relay shall be as per Annexure-A.

The bidders will have to send the numerical relay of same make, model, Firmware & type as
offered in the bid documents along with Engineers to Distribution Testing Department on the
prescheduled date & time for testing of the relay in respect of relevant features as per
specification and Communications via a MODBUS RS232/RS485 port to provide the RTU
(and hence the SCADA) with phase current measurements and tripping indications. The
bidder will have to provide the necessary software for testing of the communication part. This
is a part of Techno-commercial evaluation and it is the responsibility of the bidder to show all
the features of the relay, failing which they will not be considered as Techno-commercially
acceptable. The date & time of such tests at Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL, will

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 19 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

be intimated to the bidder at least 10 (Ten) days prior to the date of testing. The particular
relay thus tested will have to be supplied during execution of the Order if placed upon them.

 It shall be housed in a flush mounting case and if required, will be powered by the RMU
power supply unit.
 It shall have three phase over current elements and one earth fault element.
 IDMT trip current settings shall be 20-200% in steps of 1% for phase over current and
10-80% in steps of 1% for earth fault.

 Iinstantaneous trip current settings shall be 100-3000% in steps of 100% for phase over
current and 100-1200% in steps of 100% for earth fault.

 Selectable IDMT curves shall be provided to include, for example, Normal Inverse, Very
Inverse, Extreme Inverse, Long Time Inverse, and Definite Time. Separate curve settings
for phase over current and earth fault shall be supported.

 For IDMT delay multiplication, the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) shall be adjustable from
.01 to 0.1 in 0.1 steps.

 The relay shall have local independent LED indications for Healthy, Trip, I>, I>>, IN>, and
IN>> conditions.

 The relay shall also be provided with:

- Alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for measurement and relay setting.
- Communications via a MODBUS RS232/RS485 port to provide the RTU (and hence
the SCADA) with phase current measurements. It is also desirable that this same
means of communication can be used by the RTU to send setting.
- Front USB port for local communications with a laptop PC.
- Parameter change capability that is password protected.
- Capability to record up to 5 of the latest fault records duly time stamped and stored
in non-volatile memory for subsequent reading via the above referenced USB port.

1.30 Power Supply

Each RMU shall be outfitted with a power supply, including batteries and battery charger,
suitable for operation of a 5-way RMU even if the RMU is only 4-way. The following
operational specifications shall apply:
 The power supply unit shall conform to the following requirements:
- Input: 230 V AC nominal from the RMU’s auxiliary power transformer allowing for
possible variations from 190 to 300 V AC
- Output: Stable 24 V DC
- Batteries: 24 V DC
- Receptacles: 2 x 230 V AC (for test equipment)
- Lighting Fixtures: One for each enclosure

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 20 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

 The auxiliary power transformer’s inputs shall be equipped with surge protection devices
in accordance with IEC 62305.
 The 24 V DC batteries shall have sufficient capacity to supply power to the following
devices with a nominal backup of 8 hours:
- To restore a depleted battery to 80% of full capacity in less than 8 hours.
- To deliver the load of RMU’s trip coils, close coils, multifunction meters, and relays,
spring charge motor.
 The batteries shall be of sealed lead acid or Ni-Cad type, comply with IEC 60623 and shall
have a minimum life of five (5) years at 25oC. The nominal capacity in ampere-hours shall
be the capacity for five hour discharge (C5). The cell shall be of a suitable type for high
rate/medium rate discharge (3C5 to 7C5). A cell of low rate of discharge is not acceptable.
Each battery cell 9 For Lead Acid Cell) shall come with a transparent housing for the ease
of checking of the battery water level. The battery shall have the capability to close and
open the switches for at least 10 close-open cycles (this must be verified by calculation).
When sizing the AH capacity of the battery, the effect of aging shall be taken into
consideration. The AH rating of the battery shall be greater than calculated AH but not
less than 20AH.
 The battery charger shall be fully temperature compensated.
 To prevent deep discharge of the batteries on loss of AC power source, the battery charger
shall automatically disconnect all circuitry fed by the batteries following a user-adjustable
time period or when the battery voltage falls below a preset value.
 The battery charger shall be provided with an alarm displayed at the local control panel
and remotely at the SCADA to account for any of the following conditions:
- Low battery voltage
- High battery voltage
- Battery failed
- Battery charger overvoltage
- Grounded battery/battery-charger
- Low electrolyte alarm
- Input MCB off
- Station AC supply fail
- Battery Charger fail
- Others according to manufacturer’s design

 The capacity of battery and charger and the basis of calculation shall be declared in
the GTP.

1.30.1 Battery Charger

The charger shall be designed to provide a well regulated DC supply to the load while float
charging or quick charging the battery. The charger shall be the constant potential, current
limiting fully automatic type. The charger shall automatically switch to float charge after the
battery is restored to 80% of its nominal capacity under BOOST charge. The BOOST charge

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 21 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

shall be automatically ON after an emergency discharge and the duration of BOOST charge
shall be less than 8 hours.
The float charge voltage shall not vary by more than +/- 2% of the set value irrespective of AC
input voltage variation of +/- 10 % and of load variation from 0% to 100%. The r.m.s ripple
voltage across the battery shall not exceed 1% of the nominal output voltage.
The charger shall be protected against low battery voltage and short circuit at the output by
employing current limiting feature. It shall also be protected against reversed battery voltage.
Suitable protection shall be incorporated for DC output, transformer secondary, rectifier etc.
The charger shall be designed to operate continuously at a temperature of 55 o C. To ensure
long service life for the charger, all semiconductor devices shall be of industrial grade.
The following instrument and control shall be provided on the charger:-
 Mains ON/OFF input circuit breaker with Mains ON neon or LED indicator, DC output MCBs
with spare. All MCBs shall be of double pole design with auxiliary voltage free contact.
 BOOST selector switch, Voltmeter and Ammeter to measure charger/battery voltage and
current.
 All visual alarm indication shall be of LED type with its function clearly mentioned.

1.31 Distribution Automation System Interface

The RMU shall be equipped so that it can be monitored and controlled via the SCADA. In this
respect, it shall interoperate with the RTU that will be housed in the RMU Control Cabinet. The
RTU in turn will interoperate with the SCADA through public network of GPRS/CDMA.

The RMU shall have provisions for opening and closing its switches, breakers using output from
the RTU. The RMU shall also supply analog and status signals to the RTU for monitoring the
condition of the RMU’s distribution network circuits as well as the components of the RMU. A
list of input/output points required for 4-way is presented in Table 1-2 below. Digital Input
points and control Output points shall be connected via auxiliary relay to be provided by SCADA
Vendor and analog value and protection alarms shall be provided via IED/Relay through
MODBUS through RS-485 ports.

Table 1-2: Data Points per RMU Configuration

4-Way RMU

DIGITAL CONTROL Numerical Relay

INPUT OUTPUT
Isolator1 Isolator 1 Communication on
 closed  Close and Open MODBUS through RS-485
 open ports
 Spring 1: charged Isolator 2 Measurement Points:
 Earth switch 1: closed  Open and Close  Current
 Earth switch 1: open  Over Current
 local/remote status CB 1&2  Earth Fault
 Door: open  Open and Close
 FPI O/C, E/F indication

Isolator2

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 22 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

DIGITAL CONTROL Numerical Relay

INPUT OUTPUT
 closed
 open
 Spring 1: charged
 Earth switch 1: closed
 Earth switch 1: open
 local/remote status
 Door: open
 FPI O/C, E/F indication

CB(Tee off) 1&2

 closed
 open
 Spring 1: charged
 Earth switch 1: closed
 Earth switch 1: open
 local/remote status
 Door: open

Miscellaneus
 SF6 Pressure: Low
 Charger AC: Fail
 Voltage DC: Low
Battery alarms: Battery-
failed, etc.

1.31.1 Numerical Relay Interface with RTU

The Bidder is required to furnish the numerical relay information that pertains to interfacing
the relay with the RTU through an RS 485 serial communications link. The protocol details
along with the MODBUS mapping data as implemented in each relay shall be provided. In this
respect, the RMU Manufacturer in cooperation and coordination with the RTU
Manufacturer/contractor shall share the responsibility of ensuring effective communications is
attained between the relay and RTU, i.e., all parameters read by the relay shall also be
immediately available to the RTU.

1.32 Construction

The RMU shall be sufficiently sturdy to withstand handling during shipment, installation, and
start-up without damage. The configuration for shipment shall adequately protect the RMU
equipment from scraping, banging, or any other damage. The Bidder shall assume
responsibility for correction of all such damage prior to final acceptance of the equipment.

1.33 Control Cabinet

The RMU shall be outfitted with a separate enclosure, referred to herein as the Control
Cabinet, to house the following equipment as a minimum:

 Auxiliary transformer for RMU AC Aux. Power Supply will be required.

 SCADA terminal blocks
 RMU Power Supply Unit including Charger and Batteries

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 23 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

 Other equipment according to manufacturer’s design

The Control Cabinet shall be similar in style and finish as the other RMU enclosures. This
shall include having a minimum protection class of IP 54. It shall be tested in accordance
with the latest IEC 60529 standard.

The cabinet shall have a hinged front access door with a three-point latch locking system and
a latch operating lockable handle. The door shall be fitted with a perimeter flange and gasket
(rubber or neoprene) to prevent the entrance of water. In addition, a means of monitoring
and indicating that the door is open shall be provided.

A metal screen with holes shall be provided on the top and bottom of the control cabinet to
provide ventilation aimed at avoiding condensation inside. Venting however shall in no way
reduce the effectiveness of the control cabinet’s water-tight, dust-tight, and corrosion-
resistant characteristics. To augment the cabinet’s effectiveness in preventing the ingress of
dust, insects, vermin, and small objects, all electronic parts within the control cabinet shall
be enclosed in modules. Such parts and modules shall be separated from the power supply
modules as also installed in the cabinet.

The thickness of all enclosure panels shall be at least 1.6 mm. The control cabinet shall also
be provided with:

 Weatherproof fittings for control cables.

 Provision for handle and padlock.

 Grounding terminal, with solder less clamp type connector suitable for steel stranded
conductor of suitable diameter and complete with lock washer of stainless steel or better.

 Provision for separately grounding the RMU’s electronic items.

 Means of protection against rain water, corrosive salt formations, and high levels of
airborne dust (IP-54).

 Circuit diagram of control unit for maintenance purpose affixed permanently.

 Others according to manufacturer’s design.

1.34 Auxiliary Transformer

The RMU shall be outfitted with a single-phase auxiliary power transformer with a turns ratio
of 11000/sq rt (3) to 230, i.e., it shall be connected line-to-neutral to the RMU 11 kV bus and
used to provide the required 230 VAC input to the RMU’s power supply. The auxiliary power
transformer shall have a capacity of at least 1.0 KVA. During supply, however, the bidder
shall assess this requirement by taking into account the actual load corresponding to the
RTU and Modem (supplied by others) as well as the load represented by the RMU motors, etc.
In this respect, with a suitable margin approved by the Employer, the auxiliary transformer
must be capable of supporting the power supply requirements that correspond to a 5-way
RMU. HRC fuses shall be provided on both the HV and LV sides of the transformer.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 24 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.35 Motors

The RMU shall be factory fitted with Closing motors of insulation Class E or better in
accordance to IEC 60085 and allowing the circuit breakers to be operated without manual
intervention. Motor speed shall ensure closing in 40-60 ms. Independently of SCADA
control, the mechanism shall ensure that the motors start up immediately once the
spring becomes discharged, so that the breaker becomes ready for the next operation.

In addition to allowing circuit breaker tripping by the RMU’s protection relays, the
motorized operating mechanism shall be suitable for remote control by the SCADA.

The motors along with a Contractor supplied control panel shall allow Employer personnel
to electrically operate the circuit breakers at site without any modification of the operating
mechanism and without de-energizing the RMU.

The motors shall be of a reputable make in the form of a 24 VDC, single phase type. They
shall be enclosed and completely dust proof and sized with a suitable margin to meet the
torque requirement of the spring charge mechanism. The motors shall comply with IEC
60034-1 and continuously rated. An ‘ON-OFF’ switch shall be installed on the RMU for
isolation of the motor from the supply and a thermal device or other approved means shall
be provided for protection of the motor.

The DC motor shall be able to withstand ‘BOOST’ voltage of the battery charger.

1.36 Operating Mechanism:

1.36.1 Manual Operation:

Each of the Circuit Breaker shall be provided with an independent manual closing and
opening mechanisms complete with operating handles. An approved visual indicating device
coupled to the operating mechanism shall be provided to show whether the breaker is open
or close.
The operating mechanism shall be of robust construction and shall be designed to operate
with minimum mechanical shock and to prevent inadvertent operation due to vibration or
other causes. The circuit breaker shall be operated from the front of the equipment.

1.36.2 Motorised Operation:

The circuit breakers/Isolators shall in addition be provided with motor actuator to enable
them to be remotely operated. If the actuator mechanism is to be detached before manual
operation is possible, simple means of detaching the mechanism shall be provided.
Padlockable cover shall be provided over the actuator and its linkages.

1.37 Fault Passage Indicator (FPI)

This shall facilitate quick detection of faulty cable. The fault indication may be on the basis of
monitoring fault current through the device. The unit shall be self contained requiring no

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 25 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

auxiliary supply. FPI shall be integral part of each Isolator and shall be capable of displaying
fault. It shall have LCD/LED display and electrical reset facility. It shall sense short circuit
and earth fault current separately. It shall have multiple ampere and time setting both for
short circuit and earth fault. The FPI should be put through current sensor with site
selectable setting/CBCT in all the three phases of the Ring of the RMUs. FPI should have
suitable connectivity with the FRTUs for the SCADA purpose.
1.38 Integral Cable Earthing Switch

Each circuit breaker/Isolator shall be provided with an integral cable earthing switch. A
visual indication device coupled to the earthing switch mechanism shall be provided to
show clearly whether the cable earthing switch is in the ‘cable earthed’ or ‘cable
unearthed’ position. Each earthing switch shall be Padlockable.

1.39 Cable Testing and Test Plug

Provision shall be made for the high voltage testing of cables connected to the switchgear.
All parts of the switchgear directly connected to a cable including any necessary test plugs
shall be capable of withstanding at any time the high voltages that may be applied during
the testing of the connected cable. The insulation between poles and to earth of the test plug
should be at least 10,000 meg-ohm when tested with a 5000 volts insulation resistance
tester.

1.40 Indicators

The front of the equipment shall provide clear, unambiguous indication of the position and
state of the circuit breaker.
A single line diagram and mimic system of the RMUs, indicating the layout and connection
of the Circuit Breakers and busbars shall be provided at the front of the equipment.
Positively driven mechanical indication of the operating positions of a switching device shall
be provided. Separate labels shall indicate ON, OFF and EARTH ON for the Circuit breakers.
Separate labels shall indicate MAIN SWITCH and EARTH SWITCH for breakers and earth
switch mechanism.

1.41 Interlocks

Each switch panel shall be provided with a comprehensive interlocking system to prevent
dangerous or undesirable operations.

The interlocks shall be by mechanical means only.

The following minimum interlocks to prevent:-

i. Inadvertent operation of the Circuit breaker from ON to EARTH position.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 26 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

ii. Opening of test access cover to access test terminals until the switch is in CABLE
EARTHED position. Switch can’t be closed until the test access cover has been replaced.

iii. Earthing of cable when Circuit Breaker is in ON position.

iv. Inserting/ removal of a cable test plug in/from switch until the switch is in ‘Cable Earth’
position. After the cable test plug has been inserted, the earthing switch may be moved to
the ‘Unearthed’ position for cable testing purpose but interlock must be provided to ensure
that the switch cannot be closed.

v. Operation of switch from ON to OFF and Earth switch from Earth ON to OFF for a minimum
period of three seconds subsequent to the achievement of the ON or EARTH ON positions
respectively.

1.42 SF6 Gas Pressure Gauge

Pressure gauge with s safety level bar marking shall be provided for monitoring SF6 gas
pressure. A pair of voltage free contact shall be provided for remote monitoring of low
pressure alarm. The supply and installation of the control cable to connect the contact to
the SCADA terminal block shall be included in the Contractor’s scope of work.

1.43 Padlocks

Padlocks or other approved locking devices shall be provided for locking each panel in the
ON, OFF, Cable Earth or Unearthed positions.

1.44 Provision of Supervisory Control

1.44.1 Control Circuits of RMU
The interposing relays for remote opening and closing of the RMU shall be provided by
SCADA vendor. Necessary wiring shall be provided by the Contractor upto the terminal
blocks assigned for SCADA. Circuits from the motors as well as the power supply for the
operation must be wired up to the TB in such a way that remote operation on the RMU are
possible through the contact of the corresponding interposing relay in the supervisory
control equipment.
1.44.2 Position indication of Circuit breakers
Voltage free auxiliary contacts must be wired upto the terminal blocks assigned for SCADA
interface for each circuit breaker for both ON/OFF indications.
A Remote/Local switch shall be provided to control motorized Circuit breakers.
The Remote/local indication shall be connected and wired up to a separate terminal block
assigned for SCADA interface.
Voltage free contact must be wired for other alarms as detailed in Table-1-2.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 27 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1.45 TYPE and ROUTINE TEST:

1.45.1 Type tests:

The equipment offered in the tender should have been successfully type tested at NABL
laboratories in India or equivalent international laboratories in line with the relevant
standard and technical specification, within the last 5 (five) years from the date of offer. The
bidder shall be required to submit complete set of the type test reports along with the offer.

The list of type tests is as follows:

I. Short time current withstand test and peak current withstand test.

II. Lightning Impulse voltage with-stand test.

III. Temperature rise test.

IV. Short Circuit current making and breaking tests.

V. Power frequency voltage withstand test (dry).

VI. Capacitive current switching test conforming to IEC.

VII. Mechanical operation test.

VIII. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit.

IX. Degree of protection of main tank and outer enclosure.

X. Circuit breaker, earthing switch making capacity.

XI. Switch, circuit breaker breaking capacity.

XII. Internal arc withstand.

The details of type test certificate according to the composition of the Switchboard shall be
submitted with the offer. In addition, for switches, test reports on rated breaking and
making capacity shall be supplied. For earthing switches, test reports on making capacity,
short-time withstand current and peak short-circuit current shall be supplied.

1.45.2 ACCEPTANCE & ROUTINE TESTS:

All acceptance as stipulated in the respective applicable standards amended up-to-date for all
the equipment shall be carried out by the supplier in the presence of purchaser's
representative without any extra cost to the purchaser before despatch.
The tenderer shall have full facilities to carry out all the acceptance and routine test as per
the applicable standards.
After finalization of the program of acceptance testing, the supplier shall give 15 days
advance intimation to the purchaser, to enable him to depute his representatives for
witnessing the tests.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 28 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

The routine tests carried out by the manufacturer at his works as per IEC 62271-200 on the
RMU.
The routine tests are as follows:

1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,

2. Measurement of closing and opening speeds,
3. Measurement of operating torque,
4. Checking of filling pressure,
5. Checking of gas-tightness,
6. Dielectric testing and main circuit resistance measurement.
7. Power frequency voltage
8. Resistance test for the circuit
9. Mechanical operation tests.
10. Checking of Partial Discharge on complete unit.
All major type tests shall have been certified at an independent authority with the tests
carried outside country of manufacture shall be translated in English and submitted in hard
copy.
The supplier in the presence of WBSEDCL’s representative shall carry out all above
acceptance. The supplier shall give at least 15 days advance intimation to the WBSEDCL to
enable them to depute their representative for witnessing the tests.
The WBSEDCL reserves the right for carrying out any other tests of a reasonable nature at
the works of the supplier/laboratory or at any other recognized laboratory/research institute
in addition to the above mentioned type, acceptance and routine tests at the cost of the
WBSEDCL to satisfy that the material complies with the intent of this specification.
1.46 INSPECTION:

The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The
successful tenderer shall grant free access to the purchaser's representative/s at a
reasonable notice when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment
under this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of
furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed, in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for stage inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
bought out items. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed, in advance, about such
testing program.

1.47 MANUFACTURING FACILITIES:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 29 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

As RMU are having sealed pressure system in compliance with IEC 298, manufacturer shall
have complete facility with state of the art equipments for ensuring the quality of product
delivered strictly adhering to IEC 298 GUIDELINES. Following are the work station
requirement at manufacturer place to ensure the adherence: -

1. Robotic/TIG welding station for stainless steel main tank ensuring the leak rate less than
0.1% per annum
2. Work stations with adjustable work benches and torque wrenches, giving flexibility to
workmen for proper tightness of internal components of sealed tank.
3. State of the Gas leak testing system ensuring the quality of sealing and have precision to
measure leak rate less than o.1% per annum.
4. High voltage testing station to have high voltage power frequency test and partial discharge
measurement.
5. Computerized system to measure time travel characteristic of breaker before sealing the tank.
6. Computerized SF6 filling and testing facility.
7. Partial Discharge Lab for conducting the partial discharge test.
It is mandatory to have the complete assembled tank tested for partial discharge to ensure a
high life and reliability of the product.

1.48 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:

The raw materials/components are to be procured only from reputed manufacturers.

After placement of Purchase Order, the bidder is required to produce on demand the
source of each material/component along with their test certificate.

1.49 DRAWINGS:

All drawings shall conform to relevant IEC Standards Specification. All drawings shall be in
ink. The Tenderer shall submit along with his tender dimensional general arrangement
drawings of the equipments, illustrative and descriptive literature in triplicate for various
items in the RMUs, which are all essentially required for future automation.

1. Schematic diagram of the RMU panel

2. Instruction manuals
3. Catalogues of spares recommended with drawing to indicate each items of spares
4. List of spares and special tools recommended by the supplier.
5. Drawings of equipments, relays, control wiring circuit, etc.
6. Foundation drawings of RMU.
7. Dimensional drawings of each material used for item Vii.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 30 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

8. Actual single line diagram of RMU/RMUs with or without extra combinations shall be
made displayed on the front portion of the RMU so as to carry out the operations
easily.
5 sets of the manuals as above shall be supplied to the Chief Engineer/Distribution. Six nos.
soft copy of the all Technical documents and Drawings furnished in a CD. All drawings shall
be prepared in Auto Cad and documents, literature etc. in MS OFFICE format for submission.

1.50 PACKING & FORWARDING:

The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case
may be and the packing shall be suitable to withstand handling during the transport and
outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable
materials shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols.
Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by the supplier
without any extra cost.
Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information:
a. Name of the consignee.
b. Details of consignment.
c. Destination.
d. Total weight of consignment.
e. Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f. Handling and unpacking instructions.
g. Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

All the equipment covered in this specification shall be delivered to the various stores of the
WBSEDCL as will be intimated to the successful tenderers. The equipment shall be
delivered to these stores only by road transport and shall be suitably packed to avoid
damages during transit in the case of indigenous supplies.

1.51 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE:

In the event of any defect in the equipment arising out of faulty design, materials,
workmanship within a period of 5 (five) years from the date of last dispatch of any integral
part of the equipment, the supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the
satisfaction of the purchaser.

1.52 DOCUMENTATION:

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 31 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

After issue of letter of acceptance, the successful Tenderers shall submit 3 identical sets of
complete drawings along with detailed bill of materials for approval, to the Chief Engineer,
Planning & Engineering, Distribution. If any modifications are required on these, the same
will be conveyed to the supplier who shall modify the drawings accordingly and furnish final
drawings for approval. In no case delivery extension will be granted for any delay in drawing
approved.
The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation will be permitted without the written approval of the Distribution
department. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior
to the approval of the drawings shall be at the supplier's risk.
After approval of the drawings and bills of materials, the suppliers shall submit detailed
packing lists for approval. After approval, copies of these packing lists shall be forwarded to
the respective consignees. Copies of packing lists shall also be submitted to the respective
site stores.
Before dispatch of equipment to various consignees, the suppliers shall furnish sets of final
drawings, including bills of materials and wiring schedules and also sets of technical
literature and commissioning manuals. These shall be in Five sets and shall be furnished to
the Distribution Procurement department, positively before the dispatch of equipment. All
drawings shall preferably be of A3 size. No drawing of width more than 35 cm will be
acceptable. One set each of the final drawings, bill of materials, wiring schedules and
commissioning manuals shall invariably be forwarded to the consignee along with the each
switchgear consignment and shall be listed out in the packing list, when submitted for
approval.
In case the supplier fails to furnish contractual drawings and manuals even at the time of
supply of equipment, the date of furnishing of drawings/manuals will be considered as the
date of supply of equipment for the purpose of computing penalties for late delivery.

1.53 SCHEDULES:

The tenderer shall fill-in the following schedules which is part and parcel of the tender
specification and offer. If the schedules are not submitted duly filled-in with the offer, the
offer shall be liable for rejection.
Schedule 'A' ... Guaranteed technical particulars.
Schedule 'B' ... Schedule of Tenderer's experience.

Any additional information may be furnished separately by the tenderer, if felt necessary by
him.

1.54 ACCESSORIES & SPARES:

The following spares and accessories shall be supplied along with the main equipments at
free of costs. This shall not be included in the price schedule.

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 32 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

1. Charging lever for operating load break isolators & circuit breaker of each RMU.

Provision shall be made for padlocking the load break switches/ Circuit breaker, and the
earthing switches in either open or closed position with lock & master key.

---------------- o -----------------

Schedule-A

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR OUTDOOR RMU

PART 1
01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s Design/Type/Model

03. Material used for making the body of the RMU

04. Standards of manufacturing

05. Whether painting for RMU is done as per standards

06. Whether the enclosure is anti-corrosive

07. Whether RMU metal clad has sufficient space for integration of:
 2 numbers of Vacuum Circuit breaker
 Sufficient space for inspection, testing, etc.
 Earthing arrangements
 Terminal output points for automation
 Sufficient arrangement for future extension with Circuit
Breakers
08. Maximum withstanding ambient temperature s
09. Spacing between live parts to earth

10. Whether RMU are designed to withstand all weather conditions

including chemical industry and polluted areas

11. Period of guarantee of the RMU

12. Over all dimensions of the RMU (L x W x H). Maximum allowable

– L – 2100mm, W – 1000mm & H – 2300mm
13. Material & Gauge of material used for fabrication of the RMU
14. Whether RMU is manufactured as per IEC/IS standards to hold SF6
gas without leakage

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 33 of 41

Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

15. Whether RMU has provision for sensors for temperature

compensated pressure measurement in the relevant gas
compartment to monitor the pressure of SF6 gas
16. Whether RMU is sealed pressure system

17. Weight of RMU complete with operating mechanism

18. RMU is provided with necessary take off terminals for automation

19. Whether gas chamber is made of stainless steel

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 34 of 41

Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR BREAKER

PART 2

01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s Design / Type ref/Model.

03. Material used for making the body of the breaker

04. Standards of manufacturing

05. Whether the breakers are manufactured as per IEC/IS

standards
Please give Standards no.
06. Maximum temperature withstand of the breakers

07. 1)Spacing between live part to Earth inside the breaker

2)Spacing between poles
08. Period of guarantee of the breaker
09. Rated frequency

10. Rated voltage

11. Highest system voltage

12. Rated current

13. Short time current rating with duration

14. Certificate or report of short circuit type test

15. Rated operating duty cycle

16. Short circuit breaking current
(a)Symmetrical
(b)Symmetrical at rated voltage
(c)Asymmetrical at rated voltage
(i)Per Phase
(ii)Average
(d)DC Component
17. Arcing time (At rated breaking current) in ms.

18. Opening time

19. Total break time in mili sec.

(a)At 10% rated interrupting capacity
(b)At rated interrupting capacity
20. Breaking Current
(a)Rated out of phase current
(b)Rated cable charging current
(c )Rated fault level MVA
(d)Rated capacitor breaking current
21. Make time in ms.

22. Maximum temperature rise over ambient

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 35 of 41

Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

(a)Main contacts Terminals

23. Rated restriping voltage at 100% and 50% rated
capacity.
(a)Amplitude factor
(b)Phase factor
(c)Natural frequency
(d)R.R.R.V.(Volts/micro sec.)

24. Dry 1 minute power frequency withstand test voltage

(a)Between line terminal and earth KV RMS
(b)Between terminals with breaker contacts open KV
RMS.
25. 1.2/50 full wave impulse withstand test voltage
(a)Between line terminal and earth KVp.
(b)Between terminals with breaker contacts open KVp.
26. VCB interrupter make

27. Contact separation distance

28. Type of main contacts

29. Contact pressure

30. Contact resistance
31. Life of the interrupter (in number of operations)
(i)Tripping at rated current
(ii)Tripping at maximum fault current.
(Allowable maximum erosion 3 mm)
(iii)Mechanical operations.
32. Details of main contacts making contact with the
breaker truck with the panel
33. Control circuit voltage AC/DC.
34. Whether trip free or not

35. Whether all the interlocks provided

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 36 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR EARTHING SWITCHERS

PART 3
Sl. No. Description Load Break Isolator
Switch (Earthing Switch)
01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s Design / Type ref/Model.

03. Material used for making the body of the isolators.

04. Standards of manufacturing

05. Whether the isolators & earth positions are

manufactured as per IEC/IS standards
06. Maximum temperature withstand of the isolators &
earth switches
07. 1)Spacing between live part to Earth
2) Spacing between fixed and moving contacts
in the open position.
08. Period of guarantee of the Earthing switches
09. Rated frequency

10. Rated voltage

11. Highest system voltage
12. Rated current

13. Short time current rating with duration

14. Certificate or report of short circuit type test

15. Rated operating duty cycle

16. Short circuit breaking current

17. Arcing time (At rated breaking current) in ms.

18. Opening time

19 Whether all the interlocks provided

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 37 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

PART 4

01. Manufacturer’s Name and country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s design ref / model

03. Applicable Standards

04. 1)Type of CT
2)Ratio
05. Rated Primary current

06. Rated secondary current

07. Rated frequency

08. Transformation ratio

09. Number of cores

10. Rated output

(a) For Core-I
11. Class of insulation

12. Class of accuracy For Protection

13. Short time current rating and its duration
14. Secondary resistance at 70 Deg C
15. Continuous over load (percentage)
16. One minute power frequency dry withstand voltage

17. 1.2/50 micro sec. impulse withstand test voltage

18. One minute power frequency withstand test voltage on secondary

19. Instrument safety factor

20. Type of primary winding

21. Literature/leaflets pamphlets about the current transformer

offered
22. Period of guarantee

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 38 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

SHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SELF POWERED MICRO-

PROCESSOR BASED NUMERICAL RELAYS
PART 5

01. Manufacturer’s Name and Country of origin

02. Manufacturer’s design / Ref. Type

03. Applicable Standards

04. Current Setting range for

(a) Over current relay IDMT

(b) Earth fault Element

Definite Time

05. Whether the relay has the in-built facilities of IDMT, OL, EL
06. Details of IDMT Characteristics
07. Accuracy for different settings and limits of errors

08. Whether Alpha numeric / LED display

09. Whether compatible for 1 A CT Secondary

10. Whether draw out type

11. Type of case

12. Reset time

13. Burden of relay

14. Maximum and Minimum, operating ambient air temp.

15. Whether technical literature pamphlets about the relay offered.

16. Period of guarantee.

17. Certificate of Proof for Electro Magnetic Interference.

18 Communications port – RS 232 / RS 485

19 Communication Protocol – MODBUS

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 39 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

SCHEDULE ‘B’

SCHEDULE OF TENDERER's EXPERIENCE

The tenderer shall furnish here the list of the similar orders
executed/under execution by him to whom a reference may be made by
the purchaser in case he considers such reference necessary.

Value of Period of
Sr. No. Name of the order supply Name and

client & & address to

description whom ref
of commissioning can
the order be made

NAME OF THE FIRM-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

---

NAME & SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER-----------------------------------------------------

--

DESIGNATION--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--

DATE---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-

------------------------------

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 40 of 41

 Technical Specification for 11kV SCADA compatible Non extensible 4-Way Ring Main Unit

Annexure-A

Standard Make of Relay and fitment

1. Relays ABB/Siemens/Schneider Electric/ C&S

/CGL or OEM make

2. Breaker Control Switch Kaycee/Alstom/Recom

3. Ammeter/Voltmeter Selector switch Kaycee/ Recom

4. Static Ammeter/ Voltmeter AE/IMP/MECO

5. Push Buttons Alstom/Kaycee/Vaishno

6. Indicating Lamps with lenses Alstom/Kaycee/Vaishno

7. Panel Wiring ECKO/PHOENIX

8. Vacuum Interrupter CGL / BEL / SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS

/ ABB or OEM make

9. FPI Preferably OEM make

West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited Page 41 of 41

 West Bengal State Electricity Distribution Company Limited.
Office of the Chief Engineer, Procurement & Contracts Department,
Bidyut Bhavan (4th floor), Bidhannagar,Kolkata-700 091.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR , 11 KV , 400 AMPS ROCKING TYPE TPGO , ISOLATOR

PART -A : Metallic Part
1. SCOPE :
This specification covers Design, Manufacture, Testing, and Supply of Three Post Rocking Type, Single
Air Break 11 KV, 3 Phase, 400 Amps Gang Operated, Off-Load Isolator suitable for outdoor installation on
DP / Sub-Stn Structures with either Horizontal or Vertical mounting.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARD:
The Isolator shall conform to prevailing specification IS-9921 ( P a r t - I t o I V ) [1981 - 85] with
l a t e s t a m e n d m e n t i n general and to our specification in particular.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITION:
The atmosphere in the area is laden with industrial gases and smokes with dust in suspension during dry
months and subject to long colder months. The temperature variation "between the daily average and
maximum is large. Humidity occasionally rises up to 100% Heavy lightning is usual in this area
during the month of May to November. The area is also subject to heavy monsoon rains. 80% to 90% of
the annual precipitation being in the month of June to October.
DETAILED ATMOSPHERIC CONDITION IS STATED BELOW:
a) Max. Tem. of air in sheds 50 deg C
b) Min. Tem. of air in sheds 4 deg C
c) Max. Temp. of air in Sun 60 deg C
d) Max. daily average ambient temp 45 deg C
e) Max. yearly average ambient temp. 30 deg C
f) Max. relative humidity 100%
g) Nos. thunderstorm days per annum. 100
h) Average Nos. of dust storm days per annum 5
i) Average No. of rainy days per annum 80
j) Average no. of stormy rain fall days per 10
annum(exceeding 4" in 24 hours)
k) Average rainfall per annum 200 Cm
l) Max. wind pressure 100 Kg /m2
m) Average wind pressure 71.3 Kg /m2
4 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT & CONSTRUCTION :
4.1 The Isolator shall be of Outdoor & Channel-mounted type for Single Break Operation with Two Fixed
Posts and one Rocking Post per Phase.
4.2 The Isolator shall be provided with Connectors at both ends.
4.3 Operating Mechanism with Padlocking Arrangement at 'OFF ’ and 'ON ' Position :
The Operating Mechanism shall be fabricated from M. S. Plate 38mm x 8mm x 305 mm in length. The
hinged socket which will take the vertical pipe should be made from 25 x 25 mm square and the Hinge
arrangement should be perfect, so that the vertical up and down operation takes place without any obstruction.

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 1 of 17

 The clamp of crank lever (Lever Angle) should also be made from 25 x 5 mm M.S. Flat with sufficient room to
take the square shaft. The G.I. bolts should not be less than 10 mm dia for clamping the square bolt. Eye
type intermediate guide should be of 12 mm dia 306 mm long or as necessary in length provided with nut, lock
nut and 2 nos. flat washers.
Single piece 25 mm square M.S. Galvanized Phase coupling shaft shall be of length 2000 mm.
i) Vertical operating G.I. pipe 25 mm nominal bore with 12 SWG (2.65 mm) wall
thickness 6 mtr in length in not more than two equal lengths with
coupler shall have to be supplied .
ii) The handle for 'operating pipe' should be suitable for gripping by two hands of the
operator and the same should be covered with corrogated polythene / rubber sleeve.
'ON' and 'OFF' indications shall be indelibly marked on weather proof and corrosion
proof plates riveted to the body of the Isolator operating handle.
4.4. Fixed Contacts :
i) The fixed contact shall be made from Electrolytic copper strip 50 mm x 3
mm jaw type to be electro-silver plate with 8 micron deposit.
ii) The fixed Contact Guards shall also to be made from M.S. Strip 50 mm x 1.5 mm (16
SWG) Shaped properly and galvanized.
iii) Two nos. Stainless steel springs made from 16 SWG wire shall be used at both side
of the Fixed contact through 6 mm dia. 90 mm long stainless steel stud threaded at
both ends and provided with stainless steel nuts check nuts and flat washer. The
contact pressure of not less than 50 kg has to be achieved. The Spring Mechanism shall
have to be provided so as to ensure that the speed of opening of contacts is
independent of the speed of manual operation.
4.5 MOVING CONTACT :
The Moving contacts shall be made from 20 mm dia Hard-Drawn Electrolytic Copper Rod. One end of
the Rod shall be flattened upto 175 mm in length by Drop Forging arrangement and provided with hole
so that the save is looked on the moving insulator. The other end is to be bent suitably for making contact into
the Fixed Contact Jaw (forming Line-Contact). The palmed portion of the copper rod should have minimum
28/30 mm width x 8 mm thickness. The bolt used for fixing the Moving Contact with the Insulator Cap shall
be of stainless steel. The round portion of the moving contact shall be silver electroplated with 8 micron deposit.
4.6 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT :
Terminal plate shall be made from Hard Drawn Electrolytic copper flat 38mm x 8 mm x 156 mm
length so that the Arcing horn and the Connector may be clamped. Terminal pad at the ongoing side
(back plate) shall also be made from electrolytic copper 38 mm x 8 mm x 140 mm. A Pantograph holder
made of Galvd. 38 mm x 8 mm having an eye at the centre to take one end of the pentograph assembly
shall be fitted with the terminal pad on the insulator top.
4.7 FLEXIBLE BREADED TAPE :
A flexible link made from fine tinned copper breaded tape of minimum size 40 mm (width ) x 6 mm thickness
having minimum weight of 0.900 kg / meter length shall connect the Moving contact with the Terminal
pad through the Pantograph. The flexible tape will be treated as a part of the isolator and the temperature rise
should be within the allowable limit as per ISS when full load current is passed through the isolator. The length
of the breaded tape will be 1000 mm in each phase both ends of the tape shall be suitably terminated by
Tinned Copper sockets securely fixed to the Terminal pad of the Rocking Insulator with nuts, bolts and washers
etc, at one end and the other end at the other end at the outgoing Terminal I-pad. The connectors shall be
such as to facilitate easy replacement during future maintenance.
4.8 PANTOGRAPH ASSEMBLY :
The Pantograph shall be fabricated from 30 x 3 mm M.S. Flat duly galvanized and fitted with hinge for
folding and unfolding the Pantograph during 'Back and Forth' movement of the insulator assembly. It shall have
efficient width to accommodate the flexible tape Twisted M.S. Flat 25 x 3 mm pieces shall be used to hinge the
Pantograph ends with Rocking & Fixed Insulators.

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 2 of 17

4.9 FIXED AND MOVING ARCING HORN:
Phosphor Bronze Arcing Horn are to be made from 8mm dia and smooth and even surface. The two
parallel limbs of the Fixed Arching Horn 'shall be spaced strictly as per drawing so that, the spring action
remains unaltered and permanent. The Moving Arcing Horn' will have 'Eye' at one end for bolting with the
Moving Contact at its flat space and in addition, a clamp made of non-ferrous strip 16mm wide, 20 SWG
thick to be provided for tightening the Arcing Horn with the Moving Contact at round portion. Feature of the
Arcing Horns should be to Make Before & Break After main contacts so that they can break the
magnetizing/ changing current to avoid any damage to the contacts.
4.10 CONNECTORS :
Single grooved bolted type connector to take the ACSR 'DOG' conductor shall be fitted with copper -
Aluminium Bi-metal of size 50 x 38 x 10 mm at the incoming (Fixed Copper) side and other Connector
shall be fitted at the outgoing end of the 'Flexible Jumper' The palm of the Connector should be of
size 50 x 38 x 10 mm tapered 50 mm in length. The composition of Aluminium alloy shall
conform to the following composition:-
a) Aluminium 80% minimum
b) Iron Less than 1%
c) Silicon Less than 15%
d) Cu-Mg. Z n Pb Less than 0.25%
e) Manganese Less than 1 . 0 %

a. ROCKING BASE :
The Moving Post Insulator shall have to fitted on a Rocket to 'Back' and 'Forth' movement. M. S. fabricated
Roller Body shall be supported on M . S . Fulcrums fitted at both side of the Base Channel with bolts &
nuts. The side supports shall have Brass Bush / Glass-Nylon bush bearing for easy swivel movement of the
Roller Body upon which the Insulator column is fitted. The design of the roller body (swival) shall be
such as to make it capable of withstanding mechanical endurance test as per relevant IS.
b. BASE CHANNEL :
The Base Channel shall be of size 75 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm of suitable length without
any sharp edge. The channel should be hot rolled quality.
4.11 EARTHING :
i) The 11KV system is effectively earthed. The Isolator shall be provided with Earthing
Terminals, fixed with bolts and nuts, the diameter of the bolts being 12 mm in at least one of
the three Base Channels provided in each set of Isolator.
ii) Each Operating Handle shall be provided with Earthing terminal along with Bolt and Nut of
above mentioned sizes.
iii) All the Earthing Terminals shall be marked invariably with Earthing symbol.
4.12 PROTECTIVE COATING :
All ferrous parts must be Hot Dip Galvanized as per IS-2633 1972 or latest amendments thereof and must
successfully withstand four successive one minute dip in CuSo4 solution of specific gravity 1.186 as
prescribed in relevant ISS.
4. MARKING :
Name Plate shall have to be provided in each channel of Isolator with the information as specified in
clause no. 10.1 of 15:1818-1972. The Name Plate - should be weather proof & corrosion proof.
Manufacturer’s serial number and customer's order reference shall be indicated in the 'Name Plate'
5 TOLERANCE:
+/- 5% Allowance shall be allowed in the measurement of dimensions for our acceptance

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 3 of 17

6 PACKING :
Materials Shall be packed by wooden crates of suitable thickness to protect against damage in transit and
in way that individual unit can be dispatched at a time complete in all respects so that erection is not held
up for want of any components.
7 DRAWING :
The complete isolator shall be manufactured and supplied against this specification strictly in accordance with
the following drawings enclosed with the Specification.
DRAWING NOS:-
1. S&P/MC/II KV/I/1 2. S& P/MC/II KV/I/2 3. S& P/MC/II KV/I/3
4. S& P/MC/II KV/I/4 5. S& P/MC/II KV/I/5 6. S& P/MC/II KV/I/6
However, GA drawings of Isolators including different components shall have to be submitted by the Tenderer
with the Bid.
After placement of order, drawings are to be submitted & approved before making offer for inspection & testing.
8 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL CHARECTERIST1CS:
i) Nominal system voltage 11 KV RMS
ii) Highest system voltage 12 KV RMS
iii) System frequency 50 Hz ( 3%)
iv) Maximum continuous current rating 400 Amps.
v) Rated short time current rating for 1 Sec. 18.4 KA
vi) No. of poles 3
vii) Phase center for Isolators 750 mm
viii) Min. clearance between fixed and moving contacts 310 mm
ix) Height of the post Isolators to be used in the Isolator. 254 mm
x) Centre to Centre distance of mounting holes at the base Channel 480 mm
In 'Closed' Position, the Isolating switch must withstand the mechanical and thermal effects of Short
Circuit Current for 1 Sec.
9. COMPLETENESS OF SUPPLY
Any fittings, Accessories or Apparatus which may have not been mentioned in this specification but
which are necessary for Isolators' efficient operation, performance and satisfactory maintenance shall be
deemed to be included in the Contract and shall be supplied by the Contractor without any extra charges.
All Insulators shall be complete in all respects whether the devils are mentioned in the specification or not.
Nuts which may work loose in operation must be provided with spring washers / split pins.
NOTE
The Technical specification contained in this section are for guidance of the Tenderer. Deviation if any,
from the Purchaser's specification proposed by the Tenderer may be considered provided those are
necessary either to improve the Utility, performance and Efficiency of the Equipment to secure overall
economy. GA Drawings of Isolators including different components shall have to be submitted by the
Tenderer with the Bid showing details of equipment.
The complete isolator shall be manufactured and Supplied against this specification except that for
supporting which are excluded from the scope of this specification.
The supporting structure for the isolators are excluded from the scope of this specification.
Drawings for the details of structure for mounting of the isolators shall be furnished by the Purchaser to
facilitate design to mounting arrangement etc., to the concerned controlling officer prior to actual
execution.

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 4 of 17

 Pedestal Insulators shall be supplied as per specific requirements laid down in Part-B of this Technical
specification.
Test certificates for the offered Isolators including Insulators shall be furnished as per Guide lines laid down
in Part-C of this Technical Specification.
G.T.P. and other informations of the offered Isolators shall be furnished as per proforma given in Part-D of
this Technical specification.
Technical particulars of offered Insulators shall be furnished as per proforma given in Part-E of this
Technical specification.
Tenderer shall furnish document including Test certificates and Performance certificates in support of
supply & delivery of similar equipment indicating thereon the names of the organization, quantity ordered,
quantity supplied along with the tender.
Manuals for installation operation and maintenance procedures shall have to be submitted (in six copies)
along with the design drawings.
The price (quoted price) should include the price of equipment including all accessories as per schedule of
requirement.
While quoting, the supplier shall furnish the recommended list of spares required for a period of three years
of operation, item wise prices for the spares shall be furnished separately.
Bill of materials shall be noted in the G.A. drawing as per following Format.

MARK DESCRIPTION QUANTITY MATERIAL [Link].

PART-B
(A) SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT OF PEDESTAL INSULATOR (FOR 11KV 400 A TYPE)

1. Each set of 11 KV. TPGO Isolator shall be provided with 9 Nos. of 11KV Pedestal insulator duly fitted .
2 The Post Insulator shall in general conform to the latest issue of IS: 2544/1973 with all amendments thereof.
3 The porcelain shall be sound , free from defects , thoroughly verified and smoothly glazed . The Post insulator
shall be Brown in colour as per general practice. The glaze shall cover all the porcelain parts of the insulator
except those areas which serve as support during firing or left unglazed, or the purpose of assembly.
a. Cement used in the construction of insulators shall not cause fracture by expansion or loosening by
contraction and proper care must be taken in ‘curing’ cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with
the metal fittings and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible.
b. The design of the insulators shall be such that stress due to expansion or contraction of any part of
insulators shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal.
c. The post insulators should be cemented by manufacturer of insulator. Suitability of cementing
shall be ensured by required tests specified in the relevant Indian Standards.

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 5 of 17

 (B) SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT OF POST 1NSULATOR (FOR 11 KV,400A TYPE)
1. The post insulators shall be cemented only by the manufacturer of insulator. Suitability of cementing shall be
ensured by required tests specified in the relevant IS :
2. At the time of inspection, one or more insulator(s) may be dismantled by the Purchaser’s Representative
from the isolators offered for inspection and the contractor shall arrange at his own cost for both
Mechanical and Electrical Tests at the insulator manufacturer’s laboratory within reasonable time as per
latest ISS failing which entire lot may be rejected.
3 The isolator supplier shall collect a certificate from the manufacturer of insulators that cementing has been
done by them.

4. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 11KV POST INSULATORS :

Sl. No. Description 11 KV Post Insulator
1 Nominal system voltage/Working voltage : 11 KV
2 Highest system voltage : 12 KV
3 No. of units per Stack : 1
4 Minimum specific Creepage distance : 25 mm per KV
5 P.F Visible Discharge Voltage : 9 KV rms
6 P.F. Withstand Voltage
a) Dry : 60 KV rms
b) Wet : 35 KV rms
7 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 micro
second wave :
a) Positive : 75 KVp
b) Negative : 80 KVp
8 P.F. Minimum flash over voltage
a) Dry : 70 KV rms
b) Wet : 45 KV rms
9 Impulse flashover voltage
1.2/50 micro second wave :
a) Positive : 95 KVp
b) Negative : 120 KVp
10 Power Frequency puncture withstand voltage : 105 KV rms
on single unit

11 Cantilever strength on single unit

a) Upright : 5 KN
b) Inverted : 3 KN
12 Tensile Strength : 15 KN
13 Torsional Strength : 200 Nm
14 Compression Strength : 30 KN
15 Height : 254 mm

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 6 of 17

 Sl. No. Description 11 KV Post Insulator
16 Insulation Part Diameter : 152 mm
17 Pitch Circle Diameter
a) Top : 57 mm
b) Bottom : 57 mm
18 Conforming standard : As per IS

PART C :
TEST CERTIFICATES / INSPECTION AND TESTING

TESTCERTIFICATES/INSPECTIONANDTESTING

1. ISOLATOR:
The bidder shall submit following copies of complete type test certificates of similar Isolator of
identical rating & design as well as on 11 KV Post insulators already conducted in CPRI/NABL
accredited/Govt. approved test house or laboratory containing NABL logo. Type test report shall
be carried out within five years from the due date of submission of tender. The bidder shall have
to submit the type test report along with the tender, otherwise the offer will be rejected.

Following type test report shall have to be submitted:

a) Short Time Withstand & Peak Withstand Current Test.
b) Lightning Impulse Voltage Withstand Test.
c) PF Withstand Voltage Test (Dry & Wet)
d) Mechanical Endurance Test
e) Temperature Rise Test

In addition to that, the bidder have to submit Type Test Report on 11 KV Post Insulator as per
relevant IS/IEC and technical specification of the Tender along with the Tender document.

The dimensions of the Fixed & Moving Contacts of the sample Isolators, tested successfully for Type Tests in
an approved Laboratory, should at least conform to the dimensions as specified in Part – A of this
specification. The type of Fixed Contact should be of Reverse Loop Type.
Following Acceptance Tests shall be carried out at the works of the Manufacturer as per relevant ISS before
delivery of each lot in presence of our Engineers. The contractors shall furnish ‘Routine Test’ reports of each
unit comprising ‘Millivolt Drop Test , ‘Operation Test’ and ‘ One Minute Power Frequency Voltage Withstand
Test ‘ in six copies along with each lot offered :-
a) Temperature Rise Test
b) Millivolt Drop Test
c) One minute power frequency voltage withstand test
d) Operation Test : The tenderer shall make arrangement for operation test for the total height of the
Isolators on selected samples.
e) Uniformity of silver coating on the copper contacts
f) Dimensional Check-up as per drawing and specification on selected samples.
g) Mechanical Test for Insulator as per IS-2544
f) Uniformity of zinc coating on ferrous parts ( galvanization test )

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 7 of 17

 This test shall be carried out at the Laboratories undertaking tests for Govt. Deptts. And in such case, reports
incorporating Test Results from the respective Laboratories should be submitted in support of the
contractor’s Test Certificates .
Samples at random will be selected from the lot offered for above testing and if any one of the test piece
fails, the lot will be rejected.
Contact pressure, Material Quality, Dimensions of the Isolator Contacts and other components shall also be
verified /measured (with the approved Drawing). Quoted price should include charges for above stated
Acceptance Tests and Type Tests.
Testing of materials: The purchaser reserves the right to get the metal/raw materials/silver
coating/galvanizing of any component, tested at any approved laboratory at the cost of manufacturer, in case
of any doubt over their quality of such metal / raw material especially for Copper and Aluminium components.

PEDESTAL INSULATOR :
1. The Pedestal Insulator to be fixed and supplied along with the Isolators will be tested both for
Mechanical and Electrical characteristics of the complete insulator as per late issue of ISS - 2544 /
[Link] Type Test Certificates from the Manufacturer shall also to be furnished, for both Electrical
and Mechanical Tests.
2. One or more Insulator (s) may be dismantled by the Purchaser's Representative, from Isolators
offered for inspection and the Contractor shall arrange at his own cost for both Mechanical and
Electrical Tests at the insulator manufacturer's Laboratory within reasonable time as per latest ISS.

3. The Test values in respect of ' Impulse Voltage Test ' and ' Power Frequency Voltage Withstand
Test' on the complete isolators without grounding connectors, should not be less than those specified
in ISS and as detailed below :

System Impulse Withstand Voltage One Minute Power Frequency Withstand

Voltage Positive & Negative Polarity Voltage (RMS)

Across Isolating To Earth and Across Isolating To Earth &

Distance Between Poles Distance Between Poles
11 KV 85 KV 75 KV 32 KV 28 KV

Rated short time current rating is 18.4 KA (rms) for 1 Sec.

3. The equipment shall be subjected to routine & acceptance tests in accordance with provisions of relevant
standards.

Routine & Acceptance tests shall have to be performed in presence of purchaser without any extra
cost. The supplier/ manufacturer shall give at least 15(Fifteen) days‟ advance notice for conducting
such tests.
Purchaser shall have the right to select any number on random sampling basis for testing from the
equipment ordered for inspection and in the event of failure in such test, the purchaser shall have the right
to reject the whole lot.
Six (6) copies of routine & acceptance reports shall have to be furnished to the purchaser for approval
before dispatch of the offered equipment.

4. TYPE TESTS AFTER ISSUANCE OF ORDER:

Besides submission of Type Test Report, carried out within five years as per Tender Specification, Type Test
at the discretion of Ordering authority, shall have to be arranged by the successful contractor or WBSEDCL on
his own may conduct the same from any lot offered for inspection, with sample chosen at random after
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 8 of 17
 successful routine test by our Inspection team, as per the relevant ISS from any NABL accredited/
Government recognized Test House or Laboratory in presence of WBSEDCL’S representative. In case of failure
of the materials after type test, WBSEDCL will have the right to reject the total supplied lot of the said
materials and the party have to replace the complete lot of materials at his own cost including transportation
of materials at site.
However, the necessary cost of the type test charges will be reimbursed to the party on production of
necessary supporting documents.
GUARANTEE:

In the event of any defect in the equipment arising out of faulty design, materials, workmanship within a
period of 5 (five) years from the date of last despatch of any integral part of the equipment/cable, the
supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair the same to the satisfaction of the purchaser.

If the supplier fails to do so within one month of receipt of intimation, WBSEDCL reserves the
right to effect repair or replacement by any other agency and recover charges for repair or
replacement from the supplier.

4. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED AT THE TIME OF PHYSICAL DELIVERY TO THE CONSIGNEE

STORES
The following documents to be submitted by the Vendors to the Consignee Stores at the time of physical delivery :-
a) Copy of Purchase Order.
b) Copy of Despatch Instruction.
c) Inspection Test Certificate.
d) Guarantee Certificate.
e) Proforma Invoice.
f) Seal list and packing list.
g) Challan in triplicate.
h) Way bill, if applicable.
ENCLO: ANNEXURE D & E

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 9 of 17

 ANNEXURE D
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV 400A ROCKING TYPE TRIPLE POLE
GANG OPERATED AIR BREAK ISOLATING SWITCHES
(TO BE FILLED BY TENDERERS)
1. Name of manufacturer of Isolating Switches
2. Particulars of Isolating Switches:
a) Number of Poles
b) Voltage rating
c) Current rating in Amps :-
i. Normal(Continuous rating)
ii. Maximum & Short time current rating for 1 Sec.
d) Type, Material and contact pressure (in kg.) of [Link] and
stainless steel spring :-
i. Moving Contact
ii. Fixed Contact
[Link] Spring
e) Whether contacts are silver faced or tin
plated(the thickness may be indicated)
f) Temperature rise obtained during type test as per clause No.11.1.7 of
IS:1818 of the following at the full rated current in degree centigrade
over an ambient temperature of 50 OC
i. Contacts
ii. Terminals
iii. Compression Springs
g) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits(in milli volt drop)
which was obtained during type test as specified in relevant Clause of
IS :1818 and IS 9921
i. Contacts(fixed and Moving)
ii. Terminals
h) Frequency
i) Type and material of the terminal connector provided
j) Diameter, wall thickness and length of [Link] pipe
k) Size and length of base mounting M.S. Galvanised channel provided for
the three phase :
l) Minimum clearance between phases in mm. and the centre distance
between the Insulators of the adjacent phases in mm. in the
assembled position of the switch :

m) Mounting /Fixing Hole Centre Distance in the Base Channel and Sizes
-------------------------
Signature

Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 10 of

17
 ANNEXURE E
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV 400 A PEDESTAL INSULATORS
(TO BE FILLED BY TENDERERS)
[Link]. ITEM
1. Particulars of Insulators:
a) Type of Insulators
b) Name of Manufacturer of Insulators.
c) Height of the Insulators
d)Diameter of the largest Shed
e)No of units per stack
2 ELECTRICAL CHARECTERISTICS (FOR ONE INSULATORS)
2.1 FLASH OVER VOLTAGE
i) Dry Power frequency
ii) Wet Power frequency
iii) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(+ve)
iv) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(-ve) :
2.2 WITHSTAND VOLTAGE

i) Dry voltage
ii) Wet voltage
iii) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micre sec.(+ve)
iv) Impulse voltage of 1.2/50 micro sec.(-ve)
2.3 VISIBLE DISCHARGE VOLTAGE(KVrms)
2.4 POWER FREQUENCY PUNCTURE WITH STAND VOLTAGE OF UNIT
2.5 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTIC
a) Cantilever strength upright
b) Cantilever strength under hung
c) Torsional strength
d) Tensile strength
e) Compression strength
2.6 GENERAL CHARACTERISTIC
a) Minimum Creepage distance
b) Weight of complete unit
c) Weight of non ferrous Parts(total)
d) Weight of ferrous Parts(total)
2.7 STANDARD TO WHICH INSULATOR CONFORMS
-------------------------
Signature
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 11 of
17
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 12 of
17
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 13 of
17
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 14 of
17
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 15 of
17
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 16 of
17
Spec. 11 KV 400 A TPGO Isolator Page 17 of
17
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV AND 11KV OUTDOOR VACUUM CIRCUIT
BREAKERS
SPECIFICATION NO. APDCL/PP&D/T&C/STS/ VCB/2020/1

1. SCOPE
1.1. This specification covers design, manufacturing, assembly, testing at manufactures
works, supply of 11KV and 33 KV Vacuum Circuit Breakers complete with all accessories
required for their satisfactory operation for the sub-transmission system. The Breakers
shall be used for Transformer protection or Feeder Control in the system. The Vacuum
Circuit Breakers shall be complete with all the accessories and auxiliary equipments
required for their satisfactory operation in various sub-stations of APDCL.
1.2. The breaker shall conform, in all respects to highest standards of engineering, design and
workmanship as per recent Indian or International standards. It shall be capable of
performing in continuous commercial operation up to the supplier's guaranteed life in a
manner acceptable to the purchaser
1.3. The equipment offered shall be complete with all parts necessary for their effective and
trouble-free operation. Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of the supply
irrespective of whether they are specifically indicated in this bid document/work order
or not.
1.4. The Bidder/supplier shall bind himself to abide by the considerations of the technical
specifications to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser and shall be required to adjust such
details at no extra cost to the purchaser over and above the tendered rates and prices.

2. SYSTEM CONDITIONS
The Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be designed for the power system having the
following parameters.
a) Nominal system voltage: 11KV/33KV
b) Highest system voltage: 12KV/ 36KV
c) Number of phases: 3
d) Frequency: 50 Hz + 3%.
e) System earthing: Solidly earthed neutral
f) Short Current Rating: 26.3kA for 3 sec for 33kV/ 25kA for 3 sec for 33kV. (Minimum)

3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:
Maximum altitude above sea level 100m
Minimum ambient air temperature 45°C
Maximum daily average ambient air temperature 40° C
Minimum ambient air temperature 2° C
Maximum temperature attainable by an object exposed to the sun 60° C
 Maximum yearly weighted average ambient temperature 32° C
Maximum relative humidity 98%
Average number of thunderstorm days per annum (isokeraunic level) 4550(MV)
Average number of rainy days per annum 120
Average annual rainfall 2200 mm
Maximum annual rainfall 3500 mm
Maximum wind pressure 260Kg/m²
Seismic level(Horizontal acceleration) 0.24g to 0.48g
Climatic condition Moderately hot and humid tropical climate
conducive to rust and fungus growth.

4. STANDARDS
4.1. The design, manufacture and performance of the Vacuum circuit breaker shall comply
with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes.
4.2. Equipment, meeting any other authoritative standard, which ensures equal or better
quality then the standard mentioned above, would also be acceptable. The bidders shall
clearly indicate the applicable standards to which their equipment complies-with. A copy
of such standard may also be enclosed.
# Standard Item
IS 13118/ IEC 62271 -100 High-voltage alternating-current circuit-
1
amended upto date breakers.
2 IEC 694 Common clauses for switchgear
IS 2099/IEC:815
3 Porcelain Bushings
IS 5621:1980
4 IS 2544 Porcelain Post Insulators
5 IE C-2331 High Voltage porcelain bushings.
6 IS 325 - Specification for 1phase induction motor
IS 12063/ 1987 Degree of protection provided by enclosures of
7
IEC: 529 electrical equipment.
8 IS 5 Colour for ready mixed paints and enamels.
9 IEC - 60 - High voltage test techniques
Marking and arrangements for switchgears,
10 IS 5578 & IS:11353
busbars, main connections and auxiliary wiring.
11 IS 4794 Push button switches.
Insulation co-ordination, Terms, definitions,
12 IEC - 71 Part-I & II -
principles and rules
13 IEC 270- Partial discharge measurements.
Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of
14 IS 2629 -
iron and steel.
Indian Electricity Rules
15
2005
5. KEY TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
5.1. The circuit breakers shall be suitable for outdoor operation under the climatic
conditions, as specified under ‘Service Conditions’ for power transformers, without any
protection from sun and rain.
5.2. The circuit breakers shall have the following rating :
[Link]. Particulars 33 KV 11 KV
i) Number of Poles 3 Nos. 3 Nos.
ii) Frequency 50 Cycles 50 Cycles
iii) Nominal System Voltage 33 KV 11 KV
iv) Highest System Voltage 36 KV 12 KV
Interrupting Capacity at nominal system
v) 1800 MVA 500 MVA
voltage
vi) Rated Continuous Current 1250 Amps 1250 Amps
vii) Short-time Current Rating for 3 Secs. 26.3 KA 25 KA
viii) Basic Insulation Level 170 KV 75 KV
Power Frequency Withstand Voltage for
ix) 70 KV 28 KV
one Minute
Total Break-time for any Current up to
x) 3 cycles (max.) 3 cycles (max.)
the rated breaking current
xi) Control Circuit Voltage 110 Volt D.C. 110 Volt D.C.
O – 0.3 Sec – CO O – 0.3 Sec – CO
xii) Operating duty for gang operation
– 3 Min – CO – 3 Min – CO
xiii) Mechanical Endurance M2 class M2 class
xiv) Electrical Endurance E2 class E2 class
xv) Capacitor Switching Duty C2 class C2 class
The VCBs shall be suitable for one reclosing followed by one delayed reclosing
xvi)
and lock out
xvii) Minimum clearances
a) Between Phases 430 mm 280 mm
b) Between Live Parts & Ground 4000 mm 3700 mm
c) Creepage Distance 900 mm 300 mm
The above are minimum requirements. The manufacturers may offer their standard
design, keeping in view our minimum requirements.

6. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

6.1. The circuit breaker shall be of porcelain clad, arc interruption in vacuum type. The
breaker, complete in all respect, shall be supplied with all accessories in-place and all
internal wiring installed and terminated in the mechanism housing and the equipment
shall be complete in all respects.
6.2. The circuit breakers shall provide rapid and smooth interruption of current under all
conditions, completely suppressing all undesirable phenomena, even under the most
 severe and persistent short-circuit conditions or when interrupting small currents or
leading / lagging reactive currents. The details of any device incorporated to limit or
control the rate of rise of re-striking voltage (R.R.R.V.) across the circuit breaker contacts
shall be stated. The over voltage caused by the circuit breaker switching on inductive or
capacitive load shall not exceed 3.2 times the normal phase to neutral voltage. The total
break-time for the circuit breaker, throughout the range of breaker operating duty, shall
be stated in the tender and shall be guaranteed. The breaker shall be fit for capacitor
switching for 5 MVAr Bank.
6.3. The breakers shall be provided with ‘trip free’ mechanism.
6.4. The circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The cost of
necessary frames for mounting the circuit breakers shall be included in the offered
prices. Strongly supported bracket or frame, for mounting associated 3 nos. 11 KV /
33 KV CTs, shall also be provided. All the structures shall be hot dip galvanized with 3
dips. Please note that cantilever type supports for mechanism box are not acceptable.
The mechanism box shall have firm supports from bottom. This is necessary to minimize
vibration of mechanism box, which in turn may disturb various settings. The agency shall
indicate clearly the vibration level and dynamic load of the breaker during fault / normal
ON OFF operations in all three directions.
6.5. The circuit breakers shall consist of three identical phase units with a common operating
mechanism. While offering the circuit breaker, the following details should be confirmed
and furnished with the tender:
a) Complete construction details of the equipment offered. It should be noted that the
breakers should be suitable for out-door duty. Indoor breakers accommodated in
out-door kiosks are not acceptable.
b) Type, make & source of vacuum interrupters with relevant details shall be indicated
in the offer, clearly.
c) The capacity of breaker to interrupt inductive and capacitive currents shall be
indicated in the offer (rating of capacitor bank should be stated and type test report
shall be furnished).
d) Spare availability of vacuum interrupter should be confirmed by the bidder for the
designed expected life of the breakers being offered.
e) Items inside the cabinet made of organic material shall be coated with a fungus
resistant varnish.

6.6 VACUUM INTERRUPTER

a) Interrupters shall be rated for minimum 30,000 mechanical or load operations
b) The design of the vacuum interrupter shall be such that it gives trouble free
operation under normal load and fault conditions throughout the life of the
equipment. As the efficiency of the breaker depends on the degree of vacuum inside
 the interrupter, manufacturer shall ensure that the same is maintained consistently
during service. To know the residual life of vacuum interrupter, an indicator to
indicate the status of contact erosion shall be provided.
c) The insulating ceramic body of the interrupter should have high mechanical
strength and it should be capable of withstanding high temperature without any
significant deterioration in its mechanical and electrical properties.
d) The metal / alloy used for the fixed and moving contacts shall have very low
resistivity and low gas content. They should be resistant to arc erosion and the
contact should have no tendency to get cold-welded under the high vacuum in the
interrupter. Silicone encapsulated Interrupters to avoid tracking due to
condensation
e) The interrupter design should ensure rapid de-ionization of the gap so that normal
electrical strength of the gap is restored instantaneously.
f) The metallic bellow or any other similar vacuum sealing arrangement should be
provided at the moving contact and should have a long fatigue life.
g) Manufacturer’s catalogue on vacuum interrupter, indicating all the details shall
essentially be submitted with the tender.

6.7 MOUNTING OF 11 KV / 33 KV CTs

The offered steel structures for breakers to be supplied by the bidders should have
provision and adequate strength to accommodate 3 nos. 11 KV / 33 KV CTs on it after
provision of suitable supports from ground.

6.8 TEMPERATURE RISE

The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment, when in service at
site, under continuous full load conditions, exposed to the direct rays of the sun, shall not
exceed 45° Centigrade, above maximum daily average ambient temperature. The limits
of temperature rise shall be as per relevant standards. The corrections proposed shall be
stated in the tender and shall be subject to approval of the owner.

6.9 INSULATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER

The insulation to ground, the insulation between open contacts and the insulation
between phases of the completely assembled circuit breaker shall be capable of
withstanding satisfactorily di-electric test voltage corresponding to specified basic
insulation level in the standard.

6.10 INSULATORS
a) The basic insulation level of the Insulator and insulating porcelains shall be as
specified and porcelain shall be homogenous and free from cavities and other flaws.
 They shall be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity
for satisfactory operation under conditions specified above. All insulators of
identical ratings shall be inter-changeable. The puncture strength of the insulators
shall be greater than the flash over value. The insulators shall be type tested from
independent Govt. Laboratory as per relevant standards or at any recognized and
reputed international laboratory or testing institutions.
b) The porcelain housing for the interrupter shall be of a single piece construction without
any joint. It shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and
dielectric strength. Glazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour
with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles
(fog).

6.11 OPERATING MECHANISM

a) The circuit breakers shall be designed for remote control from the control room and
in addition there shall be provision for manual operation of circuit breakers during
maintenance and for local tripping and closing by the normal means.
b) The circuit breakers shall have operation control and mechanical “open” “close”
indicator, in addition to facilities for remote electrical indication.
c) All metal parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material. All
bearings which require greasing shall be equipped with pressure grease fittings.
d) The design of the operating mechanism shall be such that it shall be practically
maintenance free. The guaranteed number of years in maintenance free operation,
the number of possible full load and full rated short circuit current breaking
operations without requiring any maintenance or overhauling shall be clearly stated
in the tender bid. As far as possible, the need for lubricating the operating
mechanism shall be kept to the minimum and eliminated altogether, if possible.
e) The operating mechanism shall be of the spring charging type, by electric control
under normal operation. The mechanism shall be trip free and operable electrically
and mechanically. The mechanism shall be capable of performing satisfactorily, the
reclosing duty cycles indicated above, within the time specified. All working parts in
the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material and all bearings, which
require greasing, shall be equipped with pressured grease fittings. The mechanism
shall be strong positive quick in action and shall be removable without disturbing
the other parts of the circuit breaker. The mechanism and breaker shall be such that
the failure of any spring will not prevent tripping and at the same time will not cause
any false tripping or closing. The operating Mechanism should be motor operated
spring charged type preferably without chain drive. The motor for spring charging
shall be suitable to perform satisfactorily for input supply voltage of 230 Volt A.C 50
Hz/D.C with a variation of plus / minus 20 per cent. The A.C. Motor should have
 overload protection. Provision should also be made for mounting of mechanism box
at an adequate height and gear ratios shall be so chosen that one man should be able
to charge the spring, without any additional efforts. Provision shall be available for
charging the springs manually as well, and to close CB mechanically.
f) The time taken for charging of closing spring shall not exceed 30 seconds. The spring
charging shall take place automatically preferably after a closing operation. Breaker
operation shall be independent of the spring charging motor which shall only charge
the closing spring. Opening spring shall get charged automatically during closing
operation. As long as power supply is available to the charging motor, a continuous
sequence of closing and opening operations (CO) shall be possible.
g) In each circuit breaker, one potential free contact of the limit switch of spring
charging motor shall be provided for remote indication of spring charged. This
contact shall be wired up and brought to the terminal block.
h) Electrical anti-pumping device shall be provided for breaker.

6.12 CONTROL CUBICLE

a) A common control cubicle shall be provided to house electrical, controls, monitoring
devices and all other accessories, except those which must be located on individual
poles. The cubicle shall be gasketed and shall have weather-proof construction,
fabricated from sheet steel of minimum 3 mm thickness. The type test report on
degree of protection test (IP-55) shall also be furnished.
b) There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to
vibrations and rigidity during transportation and installation. Control cubicles shall
be provided with double hinged door and padlocking arrangement. The door hinges
shall be of union joint type to facilitate easy removal and the distance between
hinges shall not exceed 350 mm. Door shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling.
c) It shall have backwards slanting rain hood of 2 mm thick (14 SWG) sheet for
protection against rain water.
d) The cubicle shall have front access door with lock and keys, space heater, internal
illumination lamp, 3 pins 5 Amp socket with individual ON-OFF switches shall be
provided in the cubicle.
e) For local operation following shall be provided :
i) LOCAL / REMOTE selector switch
ii) TRIP / NORMAL / CLOSE control switches with pistol grip handle
f) The control circuits shall be designed to operate on 110 Volt DC, as indicated in the
schedule and it shall be possible to adopt to work on other voltages by simply
changing the operating coils. The shunt tripping coils shall be designed to operate
satisfactorily within 110% and 70% of the rated DC supply voltage and the shunt
closing coils should operate up to 85% of the rated DC voltage. These checks shall be
 repeated during pre-commissioning checks at site before putting the breakers in
service.
g) AC Power supply for auxiliaries will be available at 230 Volt (+/- 10% variation)
single phases 50 C/s at substation. The agency shall be required to extend this
supply, using proper protection, to desired location through cable.
h) Necessary double compression type cable glands for the cables of the operating
mechanism shall be provided. The cables used for operation are all un-armoured 2.5
sq. mm copper control cables of 1100 V grade. The cable glands shall be suitable for
1 no. 8 core and 2 nos. 4 core cables and cables as per site requirements. The gland
plate should be made of non-magnetic materials and suitably drilled at site to suit
the cable entry.
i) The Circuit breaker shall be provided with trip free Mechanism so that tripping
instructions could over-ride the closing instructions. An additional tripping coil shall
also be provided in the trip circuit. The second coil shall have separate tripping lever
arrangements in the mechanism, so as to avail full advantage of second trip coil. Also
the two trip coils shall have separate fuses in the DC circuit, so that in the event of
any short circuit/damage in any one of the trip coils, the supply is available to the
other one.
j) The circuit diagram of Control circuit of VCB along with operating instructions
(DOS/ DON’T) shall be embossed on metallic plate duly laminated and the same
shall be fixed on the rear door of the control cubicle from inside.

6.13 WIRING
a) Wiring shall be completed in all respects to ensure proper functioning of the control,
protection, monitoring and interlocking schemes.
b) All the wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, PVC insulated stranded copper
conductor of 2.5 sq. mm as per IS: 1554.
c) Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing wire
numbers as per wiring diagram.
d) Wire termination shall be done with crimping type connectors with insulating
sleeves. Wires shall not be spliced between terminals.
e) All spare contacts of auxiliary switches etc. shall be wired up to terminal blocks in
the control cubicle.

6.14 TERMINAL BLOCKS

a) Terminal blocks shall be of 1100 V grade, box clamp type ELMEX 10 sq. mm or
approved equivalent. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal.
Spare terminals, equal in number to 20% of active terminals, shall be provided.
 b) Terminal block shall be such located to allow easy access. Wiring shall be so
arranged that individual wires of an external cable can be connected to consecutive
terminals.

6.15 TERMINAL CONNECTORS

6 Nos. Terminal bi-metallic connector suitable for Dog conductors shall be supplied with
each breaker. For ensuring quality and uniformity, the owner may decide to specify the
design of terminal connector, the material of terminal connector and thickness of clamps.
Further compliance of which will have to be done by the agency without any extra cost.
Suitable earth connector for earthing connections shall also be supplied. The connector
drawing shall be got approved from the owner.

6.16 AUXILIARY CONTACTS

a) Eight numbers each of auxiliary contacts both of the normally open and normally
closed types shall be provided in each circuit breaker for use in the remote
indication and control scheme of the circuit breaker and for providing safety
interlocking. Special contacts for use with trip coils, which permit for relative
adjustment with respect to the travel of the circuit breaker contact, shall also be
provided, wherever required. There shall be provision to add more auxiliary
contacts at a later date, if required.
b) The normally open and normally closed contacts for the control and operation of the
equipment shall have continuous current rating of 10 Amp. The Breaking capacity of
the contacts shall be minimum 2 Amp with circuit time constant less than 20 milli
seconds at the rated D.C. voltage.
c) Insulation level of auxiliary contacts shall be 1100 volts, 2.5 kV for 1 min.

6.17 ACCESSORIES
The vacuum circuit breaker shall be supplied as a complete unit with internal wiring
installed and terminated in mechanism box and equipped with the following accessories:
1 Motor operated spring charged mechanism 1 No.
(nominal motor voltage – 230 V AC)
2 Trip coil suitable for 110 V DC 2 Nos.
3 Closing Coil suitable for 110 V DC 1 No.
4 Pistol grip C.B. Control switch having Trip/ Normal/ Close 1 No.
5 Local / Remote selector switch 1 No.
6 Spring Charged indicator 1 No.
7 Manual operating handle for maintenance 1 No.
8 Facility for manual charging of spring 1 No.
9 Operation counter 1 No.
10 Auxiliary contacts (8 N/O + 8 N/C) 1 Set
 11 Anti-pumping device suitable for 110 V DC 1 No.
12 Terminal connectors suitable for connecting Dog Conductor 6 Nos.
13 Cubicle illuminating lamp with cage and switch 1 No.
14 Spare terminals connectors 20% of Total
Terminals
15 Mechanical ON/OFF Indicator 1 No.
16 MCB for both AC and DC supply 1 No. each
17 Space heater and ON-OFF switch in the mechanism box 1 No.
18 Power Type 3 Pin Socket with ON-OFF switch 1 Set
19 Earthing Terminals 2 Nos.
20 LED indicating lamps Complete set

6.18 INDICATING LAMPS

The indicating LED lamps should have in-built low voltage protection Circuit
(LVGP) and surge suppressor circuit. Lamp assembly should be of fire – retardant
glass epoxy PCB, industrial heat resistant, fire resistant, non- Hygroscopic DMC material ,
chrome – plated corrosion resistant solid brass bezel , polycarbonate lens in desired
colour shades of Red , Green, Amber, Yellow etc. the intensity of light should be
minimum 100 mcd at 20 mA . Indication lamp should be suitable to operate on 110 V
Direct Current supply source.

6.19 SURFACE FINISH

All metal sheet surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of zinc
phosphate and two coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner. All metal parts not
accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resisting material. All machine finished
or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable preventive compound and suitably
wrapped or otherwise protected. All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand
tropical heat and extremes of weather within the limits specified. The paints shall be
light admiral grey shade No.627 of IS 5. The paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be
removed by abrasion due to normal handling.

6.20 GALVANIZING
All ferrous parts including nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers of size M 10 and above,
support channels, structures, etc. shall be hot dip-galvanized to conform to latest version
of IS 2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. All other fixing nuts, bolts,
washers of size below M 10 shall be made out of stainless steel.

6.21 EARTHING
The operating mechanism housing, support structures etc. shall be provided with two
separate earthing terminals for bolted connection to 50 x 8 mm MS flat to be provided by
 the purchaser for connection to station earth mat. The connecting point shall be marked
with "earth" symbol No.86 of IEC publication 117-1 part 1

6.22 MOUNTING
a) The design and supply of support structure, required for mounting the Circuit
Breaker in Purchaser's switch yard, shall be in the bidder's scope. The bidder's
scope shall also include foundation bolts, nuts, plain washers, spring washers etc
necessary for the support structure. The support structure can be lattice type or
tubular type and shall be made out of hot dip galvanized steel. Wheel mounted type
support shall not be accepted. The support structure shall be installed on a concrete
plinth of 300 mm height to be arranged by the Purchaser. The height of the support
structure shall meet the following requirements.
i) Vertical clearance of lowest live part as specified in clause 6.
ii) Minimum height of 2950 mm above the top of concrete plinth (This is a Statutory
Regulation).
b) The Circuit Breaker shall be connected to adjacent equipment in the switch yard
through ACSR conductor.
c) The loading data to be considered by the bidder for design of support structure shall
include the following.
i) Dead weight of the Circuit Breaker, Structure, Bus Bars
ii) Operational steady state and impact loading
iii) Wind load on a Circuit Breaker, Structure, Bus Bars
iv) Short circuit forces

d) The support structure shall be designed on the basis of applicable Indian/

International Standards and codes of practice.

7 TYPE TESTS
7.1 Type test certificates on VCB for the following tests, strictly as per IS 13118, with latest
amendment thereof, from any of the independent Govt. Laboratory, or at any recognized
and reputed international laboratory or testing institution, shall invariably furnished:
a) Short Circuit Duty Tests
b) Out of phase making and breaking tests.
c) Short Time Current Rating Tests
d) Mechanical Endurance Test & Electrical operation Test.
e) Temperature Rise Test
f) Lightning Impulse Voltage withstand Test
g) Capacitor Switching Duty Test for Single Bank of 5 MVAR capacity
h) Power Frequency withstand Voltage Test dry & wet
i) Degree of protection IP-55 for control cubicle
7.2 The above type test certificates must accompany drawing of type tested equipment, duly
signed by type testing authority.
7.3 The above tests must not have been conducted on the equipment earlier than 5 years
from the date of opening of bids.
7.4 In case of any change in design/type of Breaker already type tested and the one offered
against this specification, the owner reserves the right to demand repetition of type tests,
without any extra cost.

7.5 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS

All acceptance and routine tests, as stipulated in relevant standards, shall be carried out
by the manufacturer, in presence of owner’s representative. Immediately after
finalization of the programme of testing, the manufacturers/supplier shall give, fifteen
days advance intimation to the owner, to enable him depute his representative for
witnessing the tests.

8 INSPECTION
The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser or his representative at any stage of
manufacture. The successful Bidder/manufacturer shall grant free access to the
purchaser's representative/s at a reasonable notice when the work is in progress.
Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser,
shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance
with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is
found to be defective.

9 RATING PLATES
The detailed rating plate shall be as per IS and in addition, shall indicate the following:
a) Circuit Breaker and its operating device shall be provided with rating plate/s made
out of corrosion proof metal, marked with the following data. The data shall be
either punched or engraved on the plate/s.
b) Manufacturer's name or trade mark by which he may be readily identified.
c) Serial number and type designation of CB & Operating mechanism
d) Year of manufacture
e) Voltage
f) Lightning impulse withstand voltage
g) Normal current
h) Short circuit breaking current
i) Duration of short circuit
j) Mass of circuit breaker with support structure.
k) Auxiliary D.C. supply voltage of closing and opening devices
l) Out of phase making & breaking current
m) A.C. supply voltage of auxiliary circuits.
 n) Insulation level
o) Frequency
p) Purchase order reference
q) Operating sequence.

The rating plates shall be installed in such positions that the same shall be clearly visible
to a man standing on ground. i.e. at the level of eye site.

10 EXPERIENCE
Minimum 3 years’ experience in the field of design and manufacture of the equipment
offered is essential for the bidder. Details in this regards shall be clearly stipulated in the
offer.

11 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The Vacuum Circuit Breakers offered shall be guaranteed for satisfactory performance
for a period of 66 months from the date of receipt of complete Vacuum Circuit Breakers
at destination store/site in good condition or 60 months from the date of satisfactory
commissioning of Vacuum Circuit Breakers whichever is earlier. The equipments found
defective/failed within the above guarantee period shall be replaced /repaired by the
supplier free of cost within one month of receipt of intimation. If the defective/failed
Vacuum Circuit Breakers are not replaced /repaired as per the above guarantee clause,
the purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount as deemed fit from any of the
supplier's bills.

12 DOCUMENTATION
12.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organization (ISO) 'A' series of
drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS 656. All drawings shall be in ink and
suitable for micro filming. All dimensions and data shall be in System International Units.
12.2 DRAWINGS: The bidder shall furnish four sets of relevant descriptive and illustrative
published literature/pamphlets and the following drawings for preliminary study:
i) General outline drawings showing outside dimensions, shipping dimensions,
weights, quantity of insulating media air receiver capacity and such other prominent
details.
ii) Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit breaker
including operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts, with lifting dimensions
for maintenance.
iii) Schematic diagrams of the scheme for control, supervision and reclosing.
iv) Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support structures.
v) Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation design.
vi) Bill of Materials.
vii) Type test reports of circuit breakers along with a separate list showing all the tests
carried out with date & place of test.
viii) Test reports, literatures and pamphlets of bought out items and raw materials.
12.3 The successful bidder shall submit THREE sets of final versions of all the above said
drawings in A-3 size, bill of material, packing list & all type test reports for purchaser's
approval to the office of CGM(PP&D). The purchaser shall communicate his
comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within reasonable period.
12.4 The successful bidder shall furnish in the form of nicely bound volumes, the manuals
covering erection, commissioning, operation and maintenance instructions and all
relevant information and drawings pertaining to the Vacuum Circuit Breakers as well as
auxiliary devices. Each manual shall also contain one set of all the approved drawings
type test reports as well as acceptance test reports to corresponding consignment
dispatched. The total quantity of the operating manuals/approved drawings sets to be
supplied by the supplier shall be equal to the number of three phase breakers of rating,
ordered.
12.5 The manufacturing of the Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be strictly in accordance with
the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval
of the purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the Vacuum
Circuit Breakers prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the supplier's risk.
12.6 Approval of drawings/work by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of any of his
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the
drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revisions of applicable standards,
rules and codes of practices.

13 PACKING AND FORWARDING

13.1 The Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be packed in suitable crates so as to withstand
handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be
responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit, due to improper and
inadequate packing. The easily damageable materials shall be carefully packed and
marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary, proper lifting
arrangement such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside
the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
13.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information:
i) Name of the consignee.
ii) Details of consignment.
iii) Destination.
iv) Total weight of consignment.
v) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
vi) Handling and unpacking instructions.
vii) Bill of materials indicating contents of each package and spare materials

13.3 The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of materials are approved by the
purchaser before dispatch.
 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
FOR 33kV, 1250A, 26.3 kA for 3 sec/ 11KV, 1250A, 25kA VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Bidder's Confirmation
[Link]. Description
For 33KV For 11KV
1 Name of Manufacturer
2 Type of Outdoor switchgear
3 Designation of outdoor circuit breaker
VCB conforms to IEC 62271- 100 amended upto date / IS:
4
13118:1991 : Yes/No
Whether offered outdoor circuit breaker is porcelain clad type
5
(yes/no)
Shall outdoor circuit breaker provided 3 number of poles
6
(yes/no)
7 Rated voltage of outdoor circuit breaker in kV.
Is offered out door circuit breaker suitable for 50 Hz rated
8
frequency.(Yes/No)
Type of operation - Mechanically coupled gang operated :
9
Yes/No
Operating mechanism, A. C. Control & Protective devices,
lighting fixtures, space heaters and motor operating on supply
10
single phase, 250 Volts ± 10% A.C., 50 Hz , two pole with one
pole grounded : Yes/No

11 Maximum continuous voltage of outdoor circuit breaker in kV

12 Rated continuous current of outdoor circuit breaker in amps.

13 Offered VCB shall be suitable for solid neutral earthing : Yes/No

Rated symmetrical short circuit breaking current (for 3

14
seconds) of outdoor circuit breaker in ka (rms) 25 kA
Rated operating sequence of outdoor circuit breaker shall be o-
15
0.3 sec-co-3 min - co
Amplitude factor of outdoor circuit breaker on restriking
16
voltage at 100% rated breaking capacity shall be 1.4

First pole to clear factor of outdoor circuit breaker on restriking

17
voltage at 100% rated breaking capacity shall be 1.5

Rate of rise of restriking voltage of outdoor circuit breaker on

18 restriking voltage at 100% rated breaking capacity in
kv/microsecs) 50/70
Dry-1 minute power frequency withstand voltage of outdoor
19 circuit breaker between line terminal and earth in kvrms shall
be 50/70kV
 Dry-1 minute power frequency withstand test voltage for
20 outdoor circuit breaker between terminal with breaker
contacts open in kvrms

1.2 / 50 micro second impulse with-stand voltage for outdoor

21
circuit breaker between line terminal and earth in kvp

1.2 / 50 micro second impulse with-stand voltage for outdoor

22 circuit breaker between terminals with breaker contacts open
in kvp
23 Material of main contacts of outdoor circuit breaker
Material of terminal pad of outdoor circuit breaker
24
(copper/Aluminium)
If Terminal Pads are made of metal other than aluminum,
25 thickness of silver plating on terminal pads shall be at least 25
microns.
The current density for copper terminal pad shall not be more
26
than 1.6 A/sq. mm.
The current density for other than copper terminal pad shall
27
not be more than 1 A/sq. mm.
Net cross section of terminal pad of outdoor circuit breaker in
28
sq mm
29 Material of make –break contacts in Vacuum Interrupter
30 Material of tips of Main contacts of circuit breaker
Whether electrical anti pumping device provided for outdoor
31
circuit breaker (yes/no)

32 Size of auxiliary contacts of outdoor circuit breaker in sq. Mm.

33 Material of auxiliary contacts of outdoor circuit breaker

Continuous current capacity of auxiliary contacts of outdoor
34
circuit breaker in amps.
Breaking current capacity of auxiliary contacts of outdoor
35
circuit breaker in amps.
Insulation level of auxiliary contacts of outdoor circuit breaker
36
in volts.
1 minute p. F. Withstand voltage of auxiliary contacts of
37
outdoor circuit breaker in kvrms.
Whether any contact multiplier are used for outdoor circuit
38
breaker (yes/no) (if *yes* then fill 39 to 42)
39 Make of contact multiplier used for circuit breaker
Making and breaking capacity of contact multiplier used for
40
outdoor circuit breaker in ka
Voltage rating of contact multiplier used for outdoor circuit
41
breaker in kv
Capacity of coil of contact multiplier used for outdoor circuit
42
breaker in watts
 No. Of normally open auxiliary contacts provided for outdoor
43
circuit breaker available for use in remote C&R panels

No. Of normally close auxiliary contacts provided for outdoor

44
circuit breaker available for use in remote C&R panels

Whether potential free contact available for remote indication

45
of spring charged" of outdoor circuit breaker (yes/no)

46 Voltage rating of bushing used for outdoor circuit breaker in kv.

Dry-1 minute power frequency withstand voltage of bushing

47
used for outdoor circuit breaker in kvrms
Dry flashover voltage of bushing used for outdoor circuit
48
breaker in kvrms
Wet flashover voltage of bushing used for outdoor circuit
49
breaker in kvrms

1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand voltage of bushing

50
used for outdoor circuit breaker shall be 125/170 kvp

Total creepage distance of bushing used for outdoor circuit

51
breaker shall be 300 mm.
Center to center minimum clearances in air between phases of
52
outdoor circuit breaker in mm
Minimum Clearances provided in air between two Phases : in
53
mm
Minimum clearances in air between live part to live part of
54
phases of outdoor circuit breaker shall be 430 mm.
Minimum clearances in air between live part to earth of
55
outdoor circuit breaker shall be 450mm
Minimum clearances in air between live part of outdoor circuit
56
breaker to ground level shall be 3700 mm
Height of the lowest part of the support insulator from ground
57
level
58 Class of Insulating Material
59 Max. closing time in ms (Max.150 ms)
Max. total break time at 100 % rated interrupting breaking
60
capacity : 100 ms
Type of closing mechanism of outdoor circuit breaker shall be
61
motor assisted spring charged mechanism.

Type of tripping mechanism of outdoor circuit breaker shall be

62
motor assisted spring charged mechanism with shunt trip coil.

Burden of trip coil of outdoor circuit breaker at 110 V (DC) in

63
watts
 Burden of closing coil of outdoor circuit breaker at 110 V (DC)
64
in watts

Whether mechanical on/off and "spring charged" indications

65
for outdoor circuit breaker provided (yes/no)

Whether manual trip/close of outdoor circuit breaker possible

66
(yes/no)
Whether mechanical spring charging for outdoor circuit
67
breaker possible (yes/no)
Voltage rating of spring charging motor of outdoor circuit
68
breaker in volts
Burden of spring charging motor of outdoor circuit breaker in
69
VAmp
Control circuit voltage of outdoor circuit breaker shall be 30
70
volts d. C. (yes/no)
The surface finish paints of non galvanized metallic part of VCB
71
shall be battleship gray shade No.632 of IS 5.
72 Process of painting of parts of outdoor circuit breaker
Type of primer used for painting of parts of outdoor circuit
73
breaker
Type of finish paint used for painting of parts of outdoor circuit
74
breaker
Degree of protection of Operating Mechanism enclosure is IP 55
75
as per IEC529/ IS 2147
Mounting of CB On hot dip galvanized steel support structure or
76 on the operating mechanism box, as the case may be, to be
supplied by the tenderer
Whether all type tests are carried out on outdoor circuit
77 breaker at nabl laboratories within five years from date of
opening of tender(yes/No)
Whether type tested on offered design of outdoor circuit
78
breaker (yes / no).
A list of recommended spares with unit rates for each circuit
breaker that may be necessary for satisfactory operation and
79
maintenance of the circuit breaker for a period of 5 years shall
be submitted.
A list and unit rates of all the special tools, equipments and
80 instruments required for erection, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of the breaker shall be submitted
The list of necessary tools/equipments which will be supplied
81
free of cost with each CB furnished separately.
Are following Type test reports submitted with offer for offered
82
equipment
a. Lightening impulse withstand voltage test. :Yes/No
 b. Power Frequency Voltage withstand test (dry & wet).
:Yes/No
c. Temperature rise test. :Yes/No
d. Measurement of resistance of Circuit: Yes/No
e. Short time and peak withstand current tests. :Yes/No
f. Mechanical operation test. :Yes/No
g. Degree of protection (IP55) for all cabinets. :Yes/No
h. Out of phase making and breaking tests. :Yes/No
i. Short Circuit Making and Breaking current Tests
a) No load operation before and after test
b) Basic test duties no. 1 to 5
c) Single Phase Short circuit test
d) Condition of breaker after short circuit tes
83 Are the following drawing submitted

a. General outline drawings showing outside dimensions,

shipping dimensions, weights, quantity of insulating media air
receiver capacity and such other prominent details. :Yes/No

b. Sectional views showing the general constructional features

of the circuit breaker including operating mechanism, arcing
chambers, contacts, with lifting dimensions for maintenance.
:Yes/No
c. Schematic diagrams of the scheme for control, supervision
and reclosing :Yes/No
d. Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for
support structures. :Yes/No
e. Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation
design. :Yes/No
f. Type test reports of circuit breakers along with a separate list
showing all the tests carried out with date & place of test.
:Yes/No
g. Test reports, literatures and pamphlets of bought out items
and raw materials. :Yes/No

Whether bidder adequate in-house testing facilities for

84
conducting acceptance tests in accordance with relevant IS.

Type of operation shall be suitable for 3 phase reclosing :

85
Yes/No.

Bidder Seal & Signature.

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
Control & Relay Panel for 33 kV Feeder with SCADA compatible Directional
O/C and E/F protection and 33/11 kV Transformer Panel with SCADA
Compatible Differential Protection

FOR

VARIOUS 33/11 KV SUBSTATIONS

IN

West Bengal

1. 0 SCOPE:

This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, testing before supply,

inspection, packing and delivery and other basic technical requirements in respect of
control and relay panels for 33 kV feeders with Directional protection, and 33/11KV Power
Transformers with differential protection to be installed at various 33/11 kV sub-stations in
West Bengal. The equipment to be supplied against this specification is required for vital
installations where continuity of service is very important. The design, materials and
manufacture of the equipment shall, therefore, be of the highest order to ensure continuous
and trouble-free service over the years. The Bidder has to design the Schematics for
protection and Control of all equipments including monitoring indications, visual and
audible alarm, interlocking schemes among different equipment. Any other requirement
which are not specifically covered here but which are necessary for successful
commissioning of the Sub stations are also within the scope of the Contract.

The equipment manufactured should conform to the relevant standards and of highest
quality of engineering design and workmanship. The equipment manufactured shall ensure
satisfactory and reliable performance throughout the service life. The Schedule of
requirement of the Panel is furnished separately in details.

[Type text] Page 1

2. 0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
2.1. System particulars:
Nominal system voltage 33 KV & 11 KV

Corresponding highest system

voltage 36 KV & 12 KV
Frequency 50 Hz±3%
Number of phases 3
33 KV Grounded through Earthing
Neutral earthing Transformer
11 KV solidly earthed
2.2. Equipment supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
operation under the following tropical conditions:-
Max. ambient air temperature 60 ° C
Max. relative humidity 100 %
Max. annual rainfall 1450 mm
Max. wind pressure 150 kg/sq.m.
Max. altitude above mean sea
level 1500 mtrs.
Isoceraunic level 50
Reference Ambient Temperature
for temperature rise 50 deg C
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate
Climatic Condition conducive to rust and fungus growth

2.3. The climatic conditions are prone to wide variations in ambient conditions and
hence the equipment shall be of suitable design to work satisfactorily under these
conditions.

2.4. Auxiliary supplies available at the various sub-stations are as follows:-

2.4.1. Rating:

i. A. C. Supply 230 volts, with ± 10% variation, Frequency 50Hz with ±3%

30 V DC. DC system is 2(two) wire with necessary earth

fault annunciation scheme. DC supply shall be normally
D.C. Supply fed from Battery charger. In case of failure of AC supply to
Battery Charger, DC supply voltage will be available from
ii Lead Acid Battery.

2.5. Unless otherwise specified all equipment and material shall conform to the latest IS
applicable standards. Equipment complying with other internationally recognized
standards will also be considered if it ensures performance equivalent or superior to

[Type text] Page 2

 Indian standards. In the event of supply of equipment conforming to any
international \ internationally recognized standards other than the standard listed
below, the salient features of comparison shall be brought out and furnished along
with the bid. One copy of such standard specification in English language shall be
enclosed with the tender.
2.6. The equipment provided shall also comply with the latest revisions of Indian
Electricity act and Indian Electricity rules and any other applicable statutory
provisions, rules and regulations.

2.7. All equipment provided under the specification shall generally conform to the latest
issue of the following :-

a) IS 12063/1987 Degree of Protection provided for enclosure

of electrical equipment.

b) IS 5/2004 Colour for ready mixed paints & enamels.

Electrical relays for power system

c) IS 3231 / 1986 & 1987 protection

d) IEC 60255 Numerical biased protection relay

d) IS 8686/1977 Static Protective Relays

e) IS 1248/2003 Indicating instruments

f) IS 14697/1999 HT Static Tri vector TOD Energy meter

g) IS 6875 amended up to date Control switches

h) IS 4794/1968 & 1986 Push buttons

IEC 337 &337-1 Control Switches (LV Switching

i)
devices for control and auxiliary circuit)
IEC:60185 Current Transformers
j)

IEC:60186 Voltage Transformer

k)

IS 375 Marking and arrangement for

l)
Switchgear Bus
m) IS:5578/1984 Marking of insulated conductors.

CT, PT Ratio and Transformer Details:-

[Type text] Page 3

 CIRCUIT 33KV CT RATIO/CLASS
33KV Feeder 400-200/1-1 A 0.5,5P20
33KV side of 33/11KV transformer 400-200/1- 1-1A, 0.5/5P20/PS

11KV side CT for Transformer 600-400/1-1-1A, 0.5/5P20/PS at

phase side (Indoor Panel)

11KV transformer Bushing CT 600/1A, PS for 10 MVA 33/11KV

for REF transformers for both Phase &
neutral. 400/1A, PS for 6.3 MVA
33/11KV transformer for only
neutral.

33 KV PT 33 KV, single phase, Electro

magnetic type

PT Ratio/Class 33KV/√3,
110V/√3-110V/√3 ,0.5/3P

Transformer details 33/11KV,6.3/10 MVA, Dyn11

3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS :

3.1 CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL

The Control and Relay Panel shall be of Simplex type and the access door shall be provided at
the back of each Panel where no instruments or relays shall be mounted. The indicating and
signaling devices and relays etc. shall be mounted on the front side and the auxiliaries which
shall be inside the Panel. The access door shall be at the back side and of double door type of
height 1900 mm.

In front of Panel where relays and instruments are to be mounted shall be stretcher leveled steel
plate 3 mm. thick and side panel, doors and top covers shall be of 2mm. thick steel plate. Light
sections of structural steel shall be used for panel frame.
The individual panel shall be 2250 mm. in height with Channel base, 610 mm. in depth and of
suitable width limited to 1000mm to accommodate the equipment at a suitable height, suitable
gaps to facilitate easy workability as specified hereafter. Individual piece of Channel base of C&R
Panel is to be provided to obtain the flexibility of inter-changing the Panel, if any.

The complete panel shall incorporate all necessary instruments, meters, relays, auxiliary relays,
control switches, indicating lamps, mimic, annunciator, audible alarms, horizontal and vertical
wiring trough, wiring supports, interior lighting system, terminal blocks , fuses and links etc.

3.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

a) The Control and Relay Panel frame shall be suitable for erection of flush concrete floor
and secured to it by means of evenly spaced grout bolt projecting through the base channels

[Type text] Page 4

from members of the frame.

b) The manufacturer shall ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified
complementary equipment required for completeness of protection/control scheme be properly
accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary to provide panels with larger
width. No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed.

c) Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof
for tropical use. The enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-41 in
accordance with IS-2147. Type test report in this respect shall be furnished with offer.

d) Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise
structural frames enclosed completely with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled sheet
steel of thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of panels such as base frame,
front sheets and door frames and not less than 2mm for sides, door, top & bottom portions.
There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibration and
rigidity during transportation and installation.

e) Design, material selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat

appearance, inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent front outside, with all
exterior surfaces tune and smooth.

f) All holes and extension windows in the Panel shall be blanked and access doors shall be
lined with compressible liners at the edges. The WBSEDCL will shut off the bottom crevices with
cream cement, the Cable Entry holes with weak concrete and the cable trench with present R.C.
Slabs or checker plate. All control and supply cables will be laid in a distribution trench running
under the panel. The Cable will branch off into each cubicle through entry holes in the concrete
floor opening in the bottom cubicles. Necessary Drawings for concrete floor and trench shall be
supplied by the manufacturer to enable the WBSEDCL to construct the foundation floor for
these panels. The drawings shall show details of the distributing trench, cable entry holes,
glands and positions of grouting bolts. The WBSEDCL will prepare foundation with pocket for
grouting bolts. The manufacturer shall supply channel base, suitable grouting bolts, lock nut
and washers.

g) Control Cable entries to the panel shall be from the bottom. Bottom plates of the panels
shall be fitted with detachable gland plates to allow cable entries from the bottom. Gland plates
shall be suitable for fixing the cable glands at an elevated height of at least 100 mm above the
ground level. Terminal Connectors and Test terminal blocks for cables shall be fixed at an
elevated height of at least 200 mm above the Bottom plate. Side blocks cut out to be arranged at
the top of both sides of panel for inter panel bus wires. Dimensions of the cut out will be 300
mm X 50 mm, 255 mm from the top.

3.2.1 General: a) Materials shall be new; the best quality of their respective kinds and
such as are usual and suitable for work of like character. All materials shall comply with the
latest issues of the specified standard unless otherwise specified or permitted by WBSEDCL.

b) Workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to ensure reliable and vibrations free
operations. The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that the stresses to
which they may be subjected shall not cause distortion, undue wear, or damage under the most
severe conditions encountered in service.

c) All parts shall conform to the dimensions shown and shall be built in accordance with
approved drawings. All joints, datum surfaces and meeting components shall be machined and
all castings shall be spot faced for nuts. All machined finishes shall be shown on the drawings.
All screw, bolts, studs and nuts and threads for pipe shall conform to the latest standards of the
International Organization for Standardization covering these components and shall all conform
to the standards for metric sizes.

[Type text] Page 5

d) All materials and works that have cracks, flaws or other defects or inferior workmanship will
be rejected by WBSEDCL.

3.2.2 Assembly:- Necessary items of equipment shall be assembled in the factory prior to
shipment and routine tests shall be performed by the manufacturer as per the requirements of
the latest issue of IEC/IS as specified under each equipment in these specifications to
demonstrate to the satisfaction of WBSEDCL that the switchgear panels comply with the
requirements of the relevant IEC/IS standards.

3.2.3 Casting: - Casting shall be true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and of uniform
quality and condition, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, cracks or
other injurious defects, shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their intended purpose.

3.2.4 Welding:- Wherever welding is specified or permitted, a welding process, including

stress relieve treatment as required if necessary, conforming to an appropriate and widely
recognized professional standard shall be used. All welders and welding operators shall be fully
qualified by such a standard.

4.0 Mounting

a) All equipment on and inside the panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the
terminal blocks ready for external connection.

b) Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished
individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are readily accessible
without use of special tools. Terminal marking shall be clearly visible and of permanent nature.

c) The manufacturer shall carry out cut-out, mounting and wiring of the bought out items
which are to be mounted in the panel in accordance with the corresponding equipment
manufacturer's drawings.

d) The centre line of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than
750 mm from the bottom of the panel. The centre line of relays and meters and recorders shall
be not less than 450 mm from the bottom of the panel.

e) The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to
give a neat and uniform appearance. Likewise the top of all meters, relays and recorders etc.
shall be in one line.

f) The control switches for circuit breakers shall be located on the mimic diagram
corresponding to their exact position of the controlled equipment in the single line drawing.
The location of the switches shall be within working height from the floor level for easy and
comfortable operation.

g) No equipment shall be mounted on the doors.

h) All the equipment connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to
minimise the risk of fire and damage.

5.0 WIRING

5.1 All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 volts grade single core, multistrand flexible
tinned copper wires with PVC insulation which has provided its utility in tropical region
against hot and moist climate and vermin (Misc. white ant and cockroaches etc.) Rubber
insulated wiring will not be accepted. Wire numberings and colour code for wiring shall be
as per IS: 5578/1984. The wiring should be encased in suitable width PVC casing. The
wiring diagram for various schematics shall be made on thick and laminated durable white
paper in permanent black ink and same should be pasted on the inside surface of the door.

[Type text] Page 6

 5.2 The sizes of wiring in different circuit shall not be less than these specified below:

TABLE-I

Circuit Permissible size of wire

Metering and Relaying Circuits 2.5 mm²

connected

Current Transformer

Potential Circuits for metering and 1.5 mm²

Relaying, Control, Visual Audible
Alarms and Signalling Circuit

The following colour schemes shall be used for the Wiring:

TABLE – II

Circuit where used Colour of Wire

Red Phase of Instrument Transformer

Red
Circuits

Yellow Phase of Instrument Transformer

Yellow
Circuits

Blue Phase of Instrument Transformer

Blue
Circuits

Neutral connection, earthed or not

earthed in the instrument Transformer Black
Circuit

A.C. Control Wiring Circuits using

Black
auxiliary supply and

D.C. Control Wiring Circuit using Battery

Grey
Supply

Earth Connection Green

5.3 a) All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily
accessible and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters
& trough shall be used for this purpose.

b) Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be
used for inter panel wiring. Inter connections to adjacent panels shall be brought out
to a separate set of terminal blocks wires. All bus wiring for inter panel
connection shall preferably be provided near the top of the panels running
throughout the entire length of the panels.

c) Wiring connected to the space heaters in the cubicles shall have porcelain

[Type text] Page 7

 beaded insulation over a safe length from the heater terminals.

d) Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned
copper lugs which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be
provided to all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules
marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each
wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall off when the wire is
disconnected for any purpose. Termination shall be such that no strand of a
conductor shall left loose or overhanging. Conductor termination shall be secured to
the holding nuts/screws, terminal blocks etc. with washers interposed between the
terminals/holding nuts/screw heads. The terminals shall be so connected that no
conductor ferrule code gets masked due to overlay of conductors.

e) All spare contacts of relays shall be wired up to terminal blocks.

f) Each wire shall be continuous from end to end and shall not have any joint
within itself individually.

g) Wires shall be connected only at the connection terminals or studs of the

terminal blocks, meters, relays, instruments and other panel devices.

Terminal Ends of all wires shall be provided with numbered Ferrules . At point of
inter-connection where a change of number is necessary, duplicate Ferrules shall be
provided with the appropriate numbers on the changing end.

h) At the terminal connection, washers shall be interposed between terminals,

wire terminals and the holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by locking
nuts. The connection stud shall project at least 6 mm from the lock nut surface.
Wire ends shall be so connected at the terminal studs that no wire terminal
numbered ferrule gets masked due to succeeding connections. All wires shall be
suitable for bending to meet the terminal stud at right angles with the stud axis, and
they shall not be skewed.

i) All studs, nuts, bolt‘s screws etc. shall be threaded according to the British
Standard practice unless WBSEDCL‘s prior approval to any other practice of
threading is obtained.

6.0 TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTION

Terminal blocks shall be of clip-on design made out of non-trackable insulating material
of 1100 V grade. All terminals shall be stud type, with all current carrying and live parts
made of tinned plated brass. The studs shall be of min 4 mm dia brass. The washers,
nuts, etc. used for terminal connectors shall also be of tinned plated brass. All blocks
shall be shrouded by easily removable shrouds made of transparent die-electric
materials.

The terminal connector/blocks shall be disconnecting type terminal connectors for

PT and same with automatic shorting of C.T. secondary terminals shall be provided in
CT secondary circuit. All other terminal connectors shall be Non-disconnecting type.
Terminal should be shock protected in single moulded piece. Terminal block should have
screw locking design to prevent loosening of conductor. Provision shall be made on each
pillar, for holding 10% extra connection ( 5% incoming + 5% outgoing ).
At least 20% spare terminals for each type shall be provided. All terminals shall be
provided with ferrules indelibly marked or numbered and identification shall correspond
to the designations on the relevant wiring diagrams. The terminals shall be rated for
adequate capacity which shall not be less than 10 Amps for control circuit. For power
circuit it shall not be less than 15 Amps.

7.0 SPACE FOR CONTROL CABLES AND CABLE GLANDS

[Type text] Page 8

 Sufficient space for receiving the Control Cables inside the Panel at the bottom of the
cubicles and mounting arrangement for the terminal cable glands shall be provided.
Removable type separate cable entry plate (may be two) shall be fixed with bottom plate.
The specification does not cover supply of control cables and cable glands for which the
WBSEDCL will make separate arrangement.

8.0 SPACE HEATERS

240 V, 50 Hz Tubular Space Heaters suitable for connection to the Single Phase A.C. Supply
complete with On-Off Switches located at convenient position shall be provided at the
bottom of the Panel to prevent condensation of moisture. The Watt loss per Unit surface of
heater shall be low enough to keep surface temperature well below sensible heat. A
thermostat control unit with variable temperature shall be installed to control the heater.
The 240 V AC supply for the heater shall be controlled by a suitably rated single pole
miniature circuit breaker compartment to be mounted on an insulator. One AC Ammeter
with 0-1.0 Amp range shall be provided in series with the heater to monitor the current
drawal of the Heater.

9.0 DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL OF AUX. POWER CIRCUIT

9.1 D.C. CIRCUIT

There shall be only one 30V D.C. for the entire Control and Relay Panel fed from a D.C.
Distribution Panel. A continuous D.C. Bus shall be provided in the Control and Relay Panel
and D.C. supply for control, protection, indication and supervision of circuit breaker and
other equipment shall be teed off from D.C. bus through a set of 20 Amp rated H.R.C. Fuse
on positive and negative side. D.C. supply to be teed off shall be distributed within the Panel
as below:

(a) Control DC scheme both positive and negative side with 16 Amp fuse

(b) Close/Trip Ckt 1 and Trip Ckt 2 without fuse; closing circuit with 10A fuse.

(c) Indication Circuit through a set of 6 Amp. HRC Fuse both at +ve and –ve side

(d) Protective relay circuits through 6A fuse both at +ve and –ve side

(e) Annunciation ckt with 6Amp fuse on both at +ve and –ve side

(f) DC Emergency Lamp with 6Amp fuse both at +ve and –ve side

Three nos. of D.C. operated no-volt auxiliary relay(self reset type) provided with hand reset
type flag with inscription ― ‘Main D.C. Fail’ , ‘Control DC fail’ & ‘Protection DC fail’ with
4NO+4NC in each relay. 2 NC contact for ‘DC fail’ alarm and Indication, 1NO wired upto
SCADA TB and 1NO wired upto spare TB.

One Push button having N/C Contact used in Series with the above relay for ‘D.C. Fall Test’
purpose.

9.2 A.C. CIRCUITS

230 Volts, Single Phase A.C. Aux. Supply to the Control and Relay Panel will be fed from A.C.
Distribution Panel through a 16Amp MCB provided there. One 16 Amps rated HRC Fuse
shall be provided at the Control & Relay Panel for the Incoming A.C. Supply. Two A.C.
operated no volt auxiliary relay(self reset type) rated for 230V shall be provided with hand
reset flag with inscription ― ‘A.C. Fail’ & ‘DC Fail Accept’ with 4NO+4NC contacts for each
relay. One push button having N/C Contact used in Series with above relay for ― ‘A.C. Fail

[Type text] Page 9

 Test’ purpose.

9.3 P.T. SECONDARY CIRCUIT

There may be two nos. 33KV bus PT, one in each bus section. P.T. supply shall be available
from selected 33 KV Bus P.T through suitable PT selection scheme by switch. Two sets of Fuse
and link of suitable rating shall be provided for the Incoming P.T supplies and two sets, one for
each PT of 3 nos. coloured LED indicating lamps shall be provided for supervision of the Fuse.
Lamps shall be connected between respective phases and neutral. The arrangement of
distribution of P.T. Secondary Circuit shall be as follows:

(a) Potential supply to the protective relay circuit for Feeder where necessary shall be fed from
selected Bus P.T. supply bus.

(b) Potential supply to meters, Energy meters and indicating instrument of each panel
shall be fed from selected Bus P.T. supply bus.

(c) Selected P.T. secondary supply to the protective relays of each panel shall be fed through 4
poles - MCB and link in neutral in each panel where necessary with two change over contacts
for annunciation.

d) Selected P.T. secondary supply for metering and indicating instruments of each panel
shall be fed through 4 pole MCB in each phase and link in neutral in each panel of
33KV system voltage.

e) Two position (PT-1/PT-2), minimum 4(four) way PT selector switch (stay put type), minimum
16A rating shall be provided in each panel for metering ckt. Additional 4 way PT selector switch
is required for protection wherever applicable. The no. of way may increase during detailed
engineering.

9.4 FUSE AND LINK

Fuses shall be of cartridge type. Carrier and base for the fuse and links for all D.C. and A.C.
Circuits shall have imprint of rating, voltage and circuit designation.

9.5 MIMIC DIAGRAMS

a) Provision shall be made for 10 mm. wide painted and overall drawing mimic diagram by the
WBSEDCL on the exterior of the front panel to represent the single line arrangement of the
station equipment. Provision shall be made in such a way that centre line of the mimic bus shall
be at a suitable height from the bottom of the C&R Panel.

b) Colour scheme for mimic diagram as follows:-

KV Class Colour Shade Index as per ISS

33 KV Brilliant green 221
11 KV Air Craft blue 108
400/230 V Black 309
Earth White -
Canary yellow
110 V -
c) In 33 KV simplex type C&R panels, Symbol marking for the position indication of isolators,
earth switches etc, ON/OFF indication for Circuit breaker, PT supply indication, CB spring
charge, auto trip, trip ckt healthy etc. shall be mounted along the mimic diagram at appropriate
location. Non-Discrepancy type control switch for the C.B. shall be mounted within the mimic,
indicating the C.B. ON/OFF status.

10.0 Labeling

[Type text] Page 10

All front mounted as well as internally mounted items including MCBs shall be provided with
individual identification labels. Labels shall be mounted directly below the respective equipment
and shall clearly indicate the equipment designation. Labelling shall be on aluminium anodised
plates of 1 mm thickness, letters are to be properly engraved.

11.0 Earth Bus

Each panel shall be provided with two earth bus of size 25 x 6 mm (min) each. The earth bus
shall be of tinned plated copper, and all metallic cases of relays, instruments etc. shall be
connected to this earth bus independently for their effective earthing. The wire used for earth
connections shall have green insulation.

12.0 Circuit breaker Control Switch:

12.1 PISTOL GRIP TYPE Non- discrepancy T-N-C spring return type switch shall be
provided for remote operation of circuit breaker to ensure that manual pumping of
closing solenoid not possible. The switch shall be mounted in the mimic diagram itself
such that the stay-put ('N') position will render the continuity of the mimic. One green
LED for 'breaker open' indication and one red LED for 'breaker closed' indication shall
also be provided adjacent to the T-N-C switch.
12.2 Switches should have finger touch proof terminals. For the convenience of
maintenance, screw driver guide should be from top/bottom of the switch and not from
the side. Terminal wire should be inserted from the side of the switch terminal.
12.3 Terminal screws must be captive to avoid misplace during maintenance.
12.4 Switch shall be with 48 mm x 48 mm escutcheon plate marked with Trip & Close.

12.5 Trip-neutral-close, with pistol grip handle must be pushed in to spring return
to either trip or close position from Neutral position for safety and not just turn to
trip.
12.6 One contact to close in each position of Trip and Close. Contact rating shall be
12 A at 30 V DC.
12.7 One spare contact is required in off & on position.

13.0 Local/Remote switch:

Local/Remote switch should be 4-pole, 2 way Lockable and stay put type.

14.1. INDICATING LAMPS

L.E.D. Type Indicating Lamps shall be provided on the Control Panel to indicate the
following:

Sl. Functions Quantity Colour of Lamp

No.

1 C.B. Spring charged indication 1 No. Blue

C.B. trip Coil/Circuit healthy

2 2 No. White
indication

3 C.B. Auto tripped indication 1 No. Amber

4 Panel D.C. Fail indication 1 No. Amber

[Type text] Page 11

 5 P.T. Supply indicating Lamp 2 sets Red/Yellow/Blue

6 C.B. ―ON indication 1 No. Red

7 C.B. ―OFF indication 1 No. Green

All the lamps shall be connected to the auxiliary D.C. supply of the Sub-Station except Sl. No.
(4) & Sl. No. (5) which should be connected to the auxiliary A.C. supply and P.T. Secondary
supply respectively. The Lamp shall be suitable for Panel purpose and shall be Low Watt
consumption. All indicators shall have bright LEDs having long life. Conventional bulbs are not
acceptable. The indicating LEDs with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a
continuous basis. However, the specification of indicating lamps may likely to be changed/
modified as per requirement of WBSEDCL.

14.2 Contact Multiplier

230 Volts, Single Phase, 50 Hz A.C. Supply operated Contact Multiplier to be provided, if
required.

15.0 TERMINAL BLOCK / TTB

1. Terminal Blocks for incoming A.C and D.C. Circuit and C.T., P.T. & SCADA Circuit should
be located on the left hand side and Transformer supervision, breaker control and spare in right
hand side of the wall of the Panel seen from back side respectively.

2. 3-Phase, 4-Wire Link type Test Terminal Block having sealing provision shall be provided in
Metering Circuit of each Panel.

16.0 SAFETY EARTHING

1. Earthing of metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment on the Panel shall be done
with soft drawn single conductor bare Copper Tail connections shall have minimum area of 16
sq, mm. and the main earthing connection 60 [Link]. These wires shall be connected by
suitable terminals and clamps junction. Soldered connections shall not be employed.
2. The neutral point of star connected LV winding of instrument transformers and one corner
of the open delta connected LV side of instrument transformers shall be similarly earthed by tail
connected with main earth wire of Panel Earthing System. Multiple earthing of any instrument
transformer circuit shall be avoided.

17.0 PANEL LIGHTING

1. The Panel interior shall be illuminated by CFL lamps connected to 230 Volt Single Phase
A.C. The illumination of the interior shall be free from shadows and shall be planned to avoid
any strain or fatigue to the wireman likely to be caused due to sub-normal or non-uniform
illumination. One emergency D.C. light shall be provided for each panel with individual switch
with proper identification mark.

2. A toggle switch or door operated switch shall be provided for control of A.C. lighting in each
panel.

3. One combined 15 Amps 3-Pin and 5 Amps 2-Pin Power Socket outlet together with Plus
Pins shall be provided at convenient points in each Panel for A.C. Supply.

18.0 ANNUNCIATOR

A. ELECTRONIC ANNUNCIATOR

[Type text] Page 12

1. Suitable Multi-way Microprocessor based electronic Annunciator for the visual and
audible alarm on the control panel using bright LEDs shall be provided in each panel to
indicate over current and earth fault protection operated. In addition to above, each electronic
annunciator of Transformer Control Panel shall have provision to indicate Transformer trouble
trip/alarm function operated. Also one window of the Annunciator shall have to be used for
Non-Trip A.C. Fail Alarm Indication and one window for Trip Circuit unhealthy indication.
Each Electronic Annunciator shall have provision for connection with accept/reset/lamp
test/mute Push buttons for proper functions. Electronic annunciator shall have provision for
connection with Electronic Buzzer/Electronic Bell for Trip & Non-Trip Audio Alarm of common
annunciation scheme. Electronic Annunciation shall have provision for flashing illuminating
display with inscription for operation of respective Protection Relay. The Micro-Processor based
Electronic Annunciator should have separate coloured windows for Trip & Non-Trip
Annunciation for easy detection.

2. Annunciator fascia units shall have translucent plastic windows for each
alarm point.

3. Electronic Annunciator shall have first Fault Indication Facilities & System Watch Dog
4. Annunciator facia plate shall be engraved in black lettering with respective alarm
inscription as specified. Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more
than three lines and size of the lettering shall be about 5 mm. The inscriptions shall be visible
only when the respective facia LED will glow.

[Link] facia units shall be suitable for flush mounting on panels. Replacement of
individual facia inscription plate and LED shall be possible from front of the panel.

6. Unless otherwise specified, one alarm buzzer meant for non-trip alarms and one bell meant
for trip alarms shall be provided in each control panel (mounted inside).
7. Each annunciator shall be provided with 'Accept', 'Reset' and 'Test' push buttons, in
addition to external PB.
8. Special precaution shall be taken by the manufacturer to ensure that spurious alarm
conditions do not appear due to influence of external magnetic fields on the
annunciator wiring and switching disturbances from the neighbouring circuits within
the panels.
[Link] case 'RESET' push button is pressed before abnormality is cleared, the LEDs
shall continue to glow steadily and shall go out only when normal condition is
restored.

10. Any new annunciation appearing after the operation of 'Accept' for previous annunciation,
shall provide a fresh audible alarm with accompanied visual alarm, even if the process of
"acknowledging" or "resetting" of previous alarm is going on or is yet to be carried out.

Provision for testing healthiness of visual and audible alarm circuits of annunciator shall be
available.

16 Window Annunciation Scheme for individually controlled

Transformer Panel to indicate following functions:-

i) Differential protection(87) operated 1 no.

[Type text] Page 13

 ii) Non-directional protection (O/C+E/F) operated 1 no.

iii) Oil Temp./Winding Temp/MOG Alarm for transformer 1 no.

iv) Oil Temp./Winding Temp Trip for transformer 1 no.

v) REF 64R( HV side) tripped 1 no.

vi) REF 164R( LV side) tripped 1 no.

vii) Buchholz Alarm for transformer 1 no.

viii) Buchholz Trip for transformer 1 no.

ix) OLTC Buchholz/ Main Tank PRV Trip for transformer 1 no.

x) AC fail 1 no.

xi) Trip Circuit/Coil 1or Trip Circuit/Coil 2 Unhealthy 1 no.

xii) Non-directional O/C & E/F Relay Trouble 1 no.

1 no.
Differential relay trouble
xiii)
1 no.
Spare
xiv)

1 no.
Spare
xv)
1 no.
Spare
xvi)

Mounting Flush

No. of facia windows 16

Supply voltage 30 V DC

No. of LEDs per window 2 (Min )

Properly
Lettering on facia plate engraved

12 Window Annunciation Scheme for Parallel Feeders to indicate

following functions:-

[Type text] Page 14

 i) Directional O/C operated 1 no.

ii) Directional E/F operated 1 no.

1 no.
iii) Panel DC Fail

1 no.
iv) Trip Circuit/Coil 2 Unhealthy
v) Panel AC fail 1 no.

vi) Trip Circuit/Coil 1 Unhealthy 1 no.

Directional O/C & E/F Relay Trouble

vii) 1 no.
1 no.
viii) PT MCB Tripped
1 no.
ix) Spare
1 no.
x) Spare

1 no.
xi) Spare
1 no.
xii) Spare

Mounting Flush

No. of facia windows 12

Supply voltage 30 V DC

No. of LEDs per window 2 ( Min )

Properly
Lettering on facia plate engraved

B. PANEL D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME

Control & Relay Panel shall have a common ― ‘Panel D.C. Fail’ Alarm Scheme operated by 230
V Single phase A.C. Aux. Supply for audible as well as visual alarm in case of failure of D.C.
incoming supply to the Panel.

Another Single Element Relay without Flag and 1 no. self-reset type N/O & 1 no. N/C contact
having inscription ― ‘Panel D.C. fail’ alarm accept Relay shall be provided. Besides above, 1 no.
Indicating Lamp, 1 no. A.C. Operated Electric Hooter and 2 nos. Push Button, one having 1 no.
N/C contact, the other having 1 no. N/O contact shall also be provided for successful operation
of the scheme. All auxiliary relays required to render Annunciation System operative and shall
be considered to be within the scope of the tender.

[Type text] Page 15

AC fail, DC fail scheme shall be operated by relay not contactor.

19.0 INDICATING INSTRUMENT AND METERS

a. All instruments shall be flush mounted, back connected type and provided with dust tight
cases for tropical use with dull black enamel finish. All fixing screws, nuts and threaded parts
shall be designed to Indian Standards.

b. All instruments shall be of class 0.5 type. The calibration of the instruments shall function
satisfactorily when mounted on steel panels or alternatively magnetically shielded instruments
shall be used.

c. Instruments shall be capable of indicating freely when operated continuously at any

temperature from 0 to 50 degree C.

d. All circuits of instruments shall be capable of withstanding applied load of 20% greater
than the rated capacity for a period of eight hours.

e. The instruments shall be capable of withstanding the effect of shock vibration and a di-
electric test of 2000 Volts r.m.s. to ground for one minute as per relevant ISS.

19.1 Ammeters:

All ammeters shall be provided with direct reading scale. Full Scale Value of the Ammeters shall
be 100% of the nominal current of maximum C.T. ratio. The ammeters shall be connected to
measuring C.T. Core. Ammeters shall be suitable for R.Y.B. Phase measurements. However, the
ammeters to be supplied shall be “DIGITAL” type. The auxiliary power of the ammeters should
be 230V AC.

19.2. Voltmeters

Volt Meter shall be provided with direct reading scale. The maximum value of the volt-scale be
15% in excess of the normal Circuit Voltage. The rated voltage of the Volt Meter shall be 110V
A.C. However, the voltmeters to be supplied shall be “DIGITAL” type. The auxiliary power of the
voltmeters should be 230V AC.

19.2a Voltmeter Selector Switch

One Voltmeter selector switch having 7 position 6 way stay-put type shall be provided.

19.2b PT Selector Switch

One PT selector switch, 2 position, stayput type shall be provided.

19.3 Energy Meters

Tariff Metering Equipments

(a) Three element Tri-vector Meters shall be supplied by the WBSEDCL. But Panel Wiring for
the Meters along with Test Terminal Block and space for the Tri-vector Meters are to be provided
for the Panels.

20.0 NAME OF IDENTITY PLATES

[Type text] Page 16

a) All instruments, relays and such other similar electrical devices mounted on the control
and relay panel shall be provided with name plates bearing the manufacturer's name, serial
identifying number and the Electrical rating data.

b) 3mm thick and 25mmX150mm brass or plastic plates bearing suitable identification
marks shall be fixed under the terminal wiring at the test blocks, at the fuse blocks and at the
cable terminals. Similar plates shall be fixed on the exterior of the panel in appropriate places to
indicate function of control switches, push button etc. such as isolator control switch, breaker
control switch, DC fail test, accept reset etc. Suitable identification marks shall be provided for
individual casing part of the relays and other equipment. Plates should be screwed and riveted
to the Panel.

c) 50mm wide brass or plastic plate bearing suitable circuit description (which will be
furnished after order is placed) etched in 30 mm size letters shall be provided for each panel and
mounted on the top of both outer of the front panels. These plates shall be removable type.

d) Schematic Diagram of CT, PT, CB circuitry & AC, DC Ckt, Indication and
Annunciation Ckt along with protection circuitry giving the terminal nos. and Bus wire
details shall be printed in laminated durable stickers and pasted inside the panel Door
page wise of the respective panel.

e) Each unit of control and relay panel shall be provided with a label located at the bottom
on the front and shall contain the following details:

i) Manufacturer's name
ii) [Link]. and date
iii) Drg. Ref. No. pertaining to the panel.

21.0 PAINTING

Panel painting shall be done by the modern process of painting. All unfurnished surface of the
steel panel and frame work shall be sand blasted or suitably cured to remove rust, scale, foreign
adhering matter or grease. A suitable rust resisting primer shall be applied on the interior and
exterior surface of steel, which shall be followed by application of an undercoat suitable to serve
as base and binder forth finishing coat.

Details of Painting:-

Surface treatment by seven tank process

Paint type Powder coated. Pure polyester base grade A structure finish

Paint shade RAL 7032 for external & internal surface

Paint thickness Minimum 80 microns

22.0 RELAYS:

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENT

The main protective relays SCADA Compatible Numerical Differential Relay,Numerical

Directional/Non Directional O/C & E/F Relays shall be of panel manufacturer‘s own make.
However, multinational company manufacturing panel in India may import required/desired
relays from their foreign counterpart with same brand name at their own risk, cost and
responsibility without hampering the stipulated delivery schedule as stated in the tender
notification.

[Type text] Page 17

 Credential for offered relays shall also to be furnished along with C&R panel in tender
documents as pre-requisites of tender.

All numerical relays shall be provided with ‘Relay Failure Annunciation contact’.
Live demonstration of any offered relay has to be arranged by the party at the laboratory of
Distribution Testing Department of WBSEDCL, if felt necessary by WBSEDCL before finalizing
the Bid.

B. SCADA COMPATIBLE NUMERICAL DIRECTIONAL/NON DIRECTIONAL O/C & E/F

RELAYS & DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS

The primary requirements of the relays are to protect the respective single circuit or double
circuit feeders and 33/11KV Power Transformers in the event of fault. The Directional/Non
Directional E/F relays shall provide suitable sensitivity for limited earth fault current.

The relay should be suitable for substation automation, primary circuit breaker operation
through SCADA from remote control room.

THE DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF Non-Directional O/C and E/F RELAY IS AS PER

ANNEXURE-A OF SPECIFICATION

THE DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF Directional O/C and E/F RELAY IS AS PER ANNEXURE-B
OF SPECIFICATION

THE DETAILED SPECIFICATION OF DIFFERENTIAL RELAY IS AS PER ANNEXURE-C OF

SPECIFICATION

C. OTHER PROTECTIVE RELAYS

REF relay etc. may be of static type.

D. OTHER PARTICULARS RELATED TO ALL RELAYS

1) All shall conform to the requirement of IS: 3231 / IEC 255 and shall be suitable for
operation within a temperature range 0ºC to 55ºC and 95% relative humidity. Relays shall be
suitable for flush / semi flush mounting on the panel with connections from the rear, protected
with dust tight cases for tropical use and with transparent cover removable from the front.

2) All A.C. relays shall be suitable for operation at 50Hz. The current coils shall be rated for a
continuous current of 1 amp and the voltage coil for 230V normal. The contacts of the relays
shall be properly designed to prevent or minimise damage due to arcs which have to be broken
successfully against 30V +/- 10% volt DC. When open, the contacts shall withstand a voltage of
115% of the normal circuit voltage. The relays shall be designed for satisfactory operation
between 70% to 110% of rated D.C. voltage of the sub-station. The voltage operated relays shall
have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.

3) Timers shall be of static type. Pneumatic timers are not acceptable.

4) The Relays shall preferably be provided with suitable Seal-in-Devices. Relays should be
immune to all types of external influences like Electro static, Electromagnetic, Radio
interference, shock etc.

5) All the numerical relay should have provision for setting all the features available in the relay
and viewing those setting as well as different other parameters through both built in display unit
as well as through PC. All numerical relays shall have self monitoring feature with watch dog
contact. The supply of relay should be inclusive of necessary licensed software and hardware for
interfacing with a PC, to be supplied by the bidder.

[Type text] Page 18

E. PROTECTION SCHEMES

E-1 PROTECTION SCHEMES FOR 33 KV LINE PROTECTION

DIRECTIONAL PROTECTION

Directional O/C & Directional Instantaneous E/F Relays shall be required for 33 KV feeders as
specified in the schedule of requirement. Each Feeder shall be provided with 3 elements
IDMT Voltage polarized O/C Relays and single element voltage polarized E/F Relay. The
O/C Relays shall be IDMT type with high set element. The E/F Relay shall have directional
sensitive E/F setting having wide range of setting (1-40%) & wide range of definite time setting
range minimum. 0.1 to 10 Sec. The relay shall also have instantaneous unit. The relay shall
have necessary P.T. fuse failure monitoring scheme. The Directional O/C & E/F Relay should
have the Site-selectable provision for operating in both Directional & Non-directional
mode depending on site requirement.
Characteristics:-

O/C Element: IDMT with Current Settings & IDMT-50-200%, 0-3 sec, Inst.- 500-
High Set Unit Operating time 2000%or 400-1600%
MTA Selectable MTA for
Directional Relay should
cover 1st quadrant in a
non-effectively grounded
system
Polarized P.T. Voltage
110 V A.C.
E/F Element

1-40% (minimum.) in
Current Setting
very small steps
Operating Time of Relay
Instantaneous
0.1 to 10 Sec in very
Operating Time of Timer
small steps
MTA Selectable MTA for
Directional Relay should
cover 1st quadrant in a
non-effectively grounded
system
Open Delta P.T. Voltage
63.5 V A.C.

The numerical directional relay shall have in-built feature for derivation of zero sequence voltage
internally. If separate IVT is required for derivation of zero sequence voltage for directional earth
fault element, the particulars shall be as per following Technical Parameters:-

1 Insulation Level 1.1KV

2 Over Voltage Factor 1.2 Cont./1.9 for 8 Hrs.
3 Transformation Ratio 110 V/√3 / 110/√3
4 VA Burden/Phase 7.5
5 Accuracy Class 3P
6 No. of Phase Single
7 Type Epoxy Cast Resin Indoor Single Phase Voltage Transformer
3 nos. Single Phase P.T. shall be connected in primary as Star
8 Formation and Secondary as Open Delta with neutral of Primary and one
end of Open Delta earthed.

[Type text] Page 19

E-2 PROTECTION OF 33 KV INDIVIDUAL TRANSFORMERS

For protection of H.V. Side of the Transformers, following main protective relays are required

i) Numerical O/C protection.

ii) 2 sets Restricted E/F Relay shall be provided for HV and LV side of individual
control transformer panel.
iii) Differential Relay shall be provided for transformer protection.

Differential Relay shall be

a) Provided at 33KV panel of the transformers to be protected. It shall be numerical

adjustable/variable percentage biased type differential relay.
Necessary software, cables, connectors and other accessories as required for download,
analyze data etc. shall be within the scope of successful bidder.

b) The relay shall be very fast in operation with an operating time less than 40 millisecond
at 5 times setting.

c) The relays shall be inherently stable for external through fault conditions without
affecting the speed of operation for internal faults.

d) The relay shall have either a built in facility of ratio and phase angle correction or
necessary interposing Auxiliary current transformers of universal type, shall be provided in the
respective panel.

e) The relay shall be provided with 2nd harmonic restraint or any other inrush proof feature
to prevent operation due to magnetizing in rush current when the transformer is charged either
from HV or LV side. But this shall not affect the speed of operation for internal fault.

f) It shall be provided with 5th harmonic restraint features to prevent operation due
to possible over excitation of the transformer. This shall also not affect the speed of operation for
internal fault.

g) The relay shall have adjustable bias setting range 20% to 50% and adjustable operating
setting range of 10% to 50% at zero bias.

h) It shall have three instantaneous high set over current units for clearing heavy internal
fault.

i) The relay shall be with 2-bias winding.

j) The relay shall be such that there will not be any necessity of changing the setting
of the relay whenever the transformer taps are changed from +5% to-15%.

k) Differential relay shall have facility for setting, parameterization, downloading the storage
data, data captured by disturbance recorder etc. locally through PC. The necessary Windows
based licensed software for establishing the facility to be considered in the scope of the supply
by the Bidder.

m) The relay shall have disturbance recording (with time stamping) function with suitable no. of
analog and digital channels, Memory size and number of disturbances stored in the relay shall
be clearly indicated in the offer. No. of site selectable BI, BO and watchdog contact details,
communication port details (front, rear) along with necessary hardware and software details
shall be furnished with the Bid documents.

[Type text] Page 20

E-3 RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

The above protection shall be provided for 33/11 KV transformers at HV and LV side. The
Relay shall be:

a) Single pole type.

b) Current/voltage operated high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover
the maximum portion of transformer winding. Necessary
calculation to prove the above winding coverage shall be furnished along with the
tender.
c) Tuned to the system frequency.
d) Have suitable nonlinear resistor to limit the peak voltage and stabilizing
resistance.
e) Operating time shall be less than 40 ms.
f) Shall be standalone type.
g) Have suitable stabilizing resistor to prevent mal operation during external
faults if necessary.

E-4 A set of D.C. Voltage Operated Aux. Relays with 4NO self-reset contacts, hand reset flag
having continuous current rating coil for the following transformer internal trouble/fault

(a) Buchholz Alarm

(b) Buchholz Trip
(c) Winding Temp. Trip & winding temp. alarm
(d) Oil Temp trip & Oil Temp. Alarm
(e) Low Oil Level Alarm
(f) Pressure Release Device Trip
(g) OSR for OLTC trip

E-5 AUXILIARY RELAYS, TRIP RELAYS and TRIP COIL/ CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
RELAYS
Trip Circuit Supervision Relays - All Panels should be provided with D.C. Voltage
operated Trip Circuit Supervision Relay having provisions for pre & post close supervision of
Trip Circuit with set of self-reset contacts provided for Trip Circuit Healthy Indication and Trip
Circuit unhealthy indication& Alarm in respect of Trip Coil/circuits of respective Breakers.
Tripping Relays- All Panels should be provided with D.C. Voltage operated High Speed
Tripping Relays having electrical reset contacts capable to make, carry and break trip coil
current. Sets of Trip Contacts shall be provided for Inter-tripping function of corresponding 11
KV Incoming Switchgear and closing blocking function of 33 KV & 11 KV Breakers in respect of
Transformer Control Panels. Each set of trip relay shall have minimum two nos. NO and 1No.
NC contact as SPARES. The operating time of master trip relay shall be less than 40 ms and
electrical reset type with electrical reset contacts and hand-reset flag.

E-6 TRIP CIRCUIT/COIL SUPERVISION SCHEME :

Trip circuit supervision scheme shall be such that testing of trip circuit healthiness is possible
irrespective of whether the C. B. is in the closed or open position. The Trip Circuit Healthy LED
should glow continuously in CB ‘ON’ Position and on demand in C.B. ‘OFF” position. The rating
of dropping resistance in series with Trip Circuit Healthy LED shall be such that the Trip Coil
should not get damaged because of continuous current flowing through it.

[Type text] Page 21

E-7 Principal requirements of protective relays, metering equipments, auxiliary relays etc. are
as follows:
E-7-1 Ammeter:
Each circuit one ammeter shall be provided with the following:
Mounting Flush

Size 96 x 96 mm. case

Response Time 1 second

Operating Temperature Up to 55°C

Dielectric Strength 2 kV RMS for 1 minute

Auxiliary Supply 230 volt A.C, 50 Hz

Operating Current 1 A from CT Secondary.

Type Panel Mounting with 31/2 Digital Display.

E-7-2 Volt Meter :-

Mounting Flush

Size 96 x 96 mm. Case

Response Time 1 second

Operating Temperature Up to 55°C

Dielectric Strength 2 kV RMS for 1 minute

Auxiliary Supply 230 V A.C., 50 Hz

Frequency 50 Hz

Operating Voltage 110 V from PT Secondary.

Type Panel Mounting with 31/2 Digital Display.

[Type text] Page 22

E-7-3 Buzzer
One DC buzzer shall be provided in the panel for non-trip alarm. One DC Bell shall be
provided for Trip alarm and one AC Bell for Panel DC fail alarm.

E-7-4 High speed tripping relay electrically resettable type confirming to IS – 3231

Aux. voltage 30 V D.C

30V D.C., voltage band for satisfactory operation :

Coil rating
50 to 120% of rated voltage

Operating Time 40 m. seconds nominal at rated voltage

Burden of relay coil

Low burden 40 Watt at rated voltage
watts (Max)

Operating temp -10 deg C to 55 deg C.

Type and Operational

Electrical Reset type and Mechanical red colour Flag
indication Indication
6 NO + 4 NC combination Electrical reset contacts
Contact Configuration
and hand-reset flag

Contact ratings:

Make and carry A.C. 1250 VA with max 5 amp & 660 Volts

D.C. 1250 W dc with max 5 amp & 660 Volts

Make and carry for 3 sec. A.C. 7500 VA with max 30 amp & 660 Volts

D.C. 7500 W dc with max 30 amp & 660 Volts

Break A.C. 1250 VA with max 5 amp & 660 Volts

D.C. – 100 W resistive 50 watt inductive with max

5 amp & 660 Volts

Insulation 2 KV RMS, 50Hz for 1 min.

2.5 KV/1 sec between all terminals & case as per IS

3231.

[Type text] Page 23

 1 KV RMS, 50Hz for 1 min. across open contact

Type of mounting Flush

E-7-5 Non-Directional O/C & E/F Relay as per ANNEXURE-A

E-7-6 Directional O/C & E/F Relay as per ANNEXURE-B
E-7-7 Numerical based differential protection relay as per ANNEXURE-C
23. Guarantee:-

The panels shall be delivered to the various consignees of the WBSEDCL and shall be suitably
packed to avoid damages during transit.
The C&R Panel with relays with all integral parts of the Equipment will be guaranteed
for the period of five years from the date of last dispach.
In the event of any defect in the Equipment, relay, any integral part of the Equipment
arising out of faulty design, materials, workmanship within the above period, the
supplier shall guarantee to replace or repair to the satisfaction of WBSEDCL.
If the supplier fails to do so, within one month of receipt of intimation, WBSEDCL
reserves the right to effect repair or replacement by any other agency and recover
charges for repair or replacement from the supplier.
24. TESTS :
24.1 Type Test :

24.1.1 The Bidder should submit the Type test report including functional test for all the
protective relays and C&R panels carried out within five years from the due date of
submission of tender from CPRI/NABL accredited Laboratory/ Govt. Recognized
test house or Laboratory on the tendered Items as per relevant Standard & Tender
Specification with the Bid failing which the Bid may not be considered. The Type
tests for Numerical Relays is to be submitted as specified in Clause No. 27 of
Annexure-A & B & C of Relays specification.
24.1.2 Test at Factory:
The following Tests shall be carried out and 6 copies of Test certificates shall be
submitted for approval. The Equipments shall only be dispatched after approval of
the test certificates.
1. Checking of wiring of circuits and the continuity.
2. One minute applied voltage test. All Equipment on panel and small wiring shall be
tested for withstand voltage of 2000Volts to earth & between different voltage circuits.
3. Insulation resistance of the complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipments
mounted on the Board before and after H.V. test mentioned under 2 above.
4. Routine tests according to relevant National standard are on the Instruments, relays &
other devices.

25. INSPECTION:

25.1 Acceptance test at manufacturer’s works in presence of purchaser’s

representatives shall be carried out. The supplier shall give at least 15 days notice of
the date when the tests are to be carried out. Purchasers shall give the right to select
any quantity of the item wise offered lot for testing, offered for inspection and in the
event of failure in test(s), the purchaser shall have the right to reject the offered
equipments.

[Type text] Page 24

 25.2 All relays, meters & annunciators provided in the control & relay panels are to be
accepted only after successful hundred percent performance testing at testing
department of WBSEDCL.

25.3 The inspection may be carried out by the WBSEDCL at any stage of manufacturing.
The successful Bidder shall grant free access to the WBSEDCL's representative/s at a
reasonable notice when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any
equipment under this specification by the WBSEDCL, shall not relieve the supplier of
his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.
25.4 The manufacturer shall keep the WBSEDCL informed in advance, about the
manufacturing programme so that arrangement can be made from stage inspection.
25.5 The WBSEDCL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine
testing of the bought out items. The supplier shall keep the WBSEDCL informed, in
advance, about such testing programme.
26. TENDER DRAWING & LITERATURE

Triplicate copies of the following drawings and literature shall be submitted along with the
Tenders:-
(a) Principal dimension details of each unit cubicles, complete assembly of panel and proposed
arrangement of the Panel in a Control Room.

(b) Front and rear views of the Panel with instrument and device positions marked.

(c) Illustrative, descriptive literature, General Technical Data & Specification of Devices.

d) Make, type, particulars, literatures of each and every relay (protective & auxiliary), meters,
annunciators, switches, lamps, TBs, TTBs etc. in line with tender specification.

27. CONTRACT DRAWINGS & LITERATURE

In the event of an order materializing, the Supplier also submit four prints of each drawing for
approval of the WBSEDCL along with 2 sets of literature as mentioned in the spec.
The Contract drawings shall cover the followings:-

(a) Details of construction and dimensions of a cubicle and of the complete Panel.

(b) Template for foundation and details of Cable Trench and Cable Entry Holes in the
Foundation Platform.

(c) Elementary diagrams of all controls, metering, protection annunciation and other circuits. All
devices shall be numbered according to ASA or international usage, which shall be separately
coded.

(d) Cabling and wiring diagram of the cubicles and inter-connections between them. Ferrule
numbers, device number and grouping for cable take off shall be distinctly shown.

(e) Dimensional outline drilling diagram and special mounting arrangement if any, of such type
of various devices on the Panel.

(f) Inter-connection diagram between Control Panel and C.B. power and instrument transformer
etc.

[Type text] Page 25

(g) Wiring Schedule for Control & Relay Panel.

(h) Internal wiring diagram of all devices and elementary wiring diagram of relays where internal
wiring is in triplicate. Construction details of switches, terminal blocks and test blocks etc.

(i) After approval, 10 sets of the final contract drawing for each set of Control & Relay Panels are
to be supplied by the Bidder. One set reproducible tracing of the above drawings in soft format
shall also be supplied.

In the event of contract being awarded, 4 copies of the following literatures shall be supplied
along with the drawings as mentioned:-

(a) Literature describing construction, operation, adjustment and rating specifications of all the
protective and auxiliary relays, recording instruments, metering instruments and control
switches.

(b) Literature giving rating data, details and adjustments for calibration of the indicating
instruments.

(c) Calibration instruments for the metering instruments.

(d) List of spare parts, identification number of renewable parts of relays, instruments and
switches etc. with the help of which the WBSEDCL will be able to procure spare parts from the
bidder at any subsequent time.

(e) It is desired that the complete schematic drawing is provided on a permanently

laminated/engraved plate of suitable thickness which has to be bolted/riveted at the four
corners on the inside face of rear door. In addition, one more plate of similar type and dimension
shall be provided on the outside of the rear door providing guidelines and instructions for
operation. The guidelines and schematic to be provided on the plates shall be as per approved
drawings.

28. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED ALONGWITH THE OFFER:

The bidder shall invariably submit the following documents failing which the offers are liable
for rejection:-

28.1 Bill of Material (schedule-IA/IB).

28.2 Drawings, Literatures & Catalogues of the Equipment including all type of Relays as
per Clause No. 26 of the Technical Specification.

28.3 List of testing equipment available with the Bidder.

28.4 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

(i) Schedule-II -- GTP for C&R Panel

(ii) Schedule-III—GTP for Non Directional O/C & E/F Relay

(iii) Schedule-IV—GTP for Directional O/C & E/F Relay

(iv) Schedule-V—GTP for Master Trip Relay

[Type text] Page 26

 (v) Schedule- VI – GTP for Differential Protection Relay

28.5 Undertakings from relay manufacturer (Schedule-VII)

28.6 Type Test report as per Clause No. 24 of the Technical Specification

29. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

Immediately on receipt of the order you shall have to submit a “Quality Assurance Plan”
indicating the specific quality control procedure and practices adopted in the major activities of
production to ensure its standard.

30.0 Bus Configuration and Bill of material

30.1 33/11KV delta star individual control transformer panel having HV side control and
protection. Single main bus with bus section isolator scheme.

2 nos. Circuit label engraved suitably at front and inner side

1 no. Section of painted and overlaid mimic diagram

1 no. Circuit breaker control switch.

Local/Remote switch
1 no

Indicating lamps for circuit breaker ON/OFF, spring charged, trip circuit 1 & 2 healthy
6 nos.
and auto trip indication.

3+3 PT supply Indicating lamps, red-yellow-blue for each PT.

nos.

2 nos. Trip circuit supervision relay to supervise the TC 1 & 2 both under pre close and post
close condition.

3 nos.
96 mm x 96 mm ammeter scaled suitably.

1 no. volt meter of 96 mm x 96 mm

1 no Voltmeter selector switch, 4-position, RY—YB—BR—OFF.

1 no. Suitable space and wiring for non-tariff TVM for energy management.

1 set Three phase 4 wire test terminal block for above.

1 no Auxiliary relay with test push button for panel DC supervision relay.

16 Fascia window type annunciator complete with accept reset and test PB but without
audible bell.
way
Three Element, IDMTL, non-directional over current relay with setting range 50% -
1 no 200% for IDMTL units and 500% - 2000% for high set unit.

2 nos Restricted Earth Fault Relay current operated having setting range 10% to 40% both for

[Type text] Page 27

 HV & LV side of the Transformer.

1 no Electrical Reset typehigh speed master tripping relay with contacts as required.

Two bias Transformer differential relay with Interposing auxiliary CTs (universal type)
1 set where ever necessary.

PT selector switch, two position PT-1/PT-2 switch, stay put type (16 A)
1 no.

1 no. Space heater with On/OFF switch and thermostat.

Two element DC operated auxiliary relay having self reset type contact with hand reset
1 no. operating flag for transformer Buchholz trip and Buchholz alarm function. Each
element with 4NO Contact. Coil should be continuously current rated without cut-off
contact.

Two element DC operated auxiliary relay having self reset type contact with hand reset
1 no. operating flag for transformer winding temp. trip and alarm function. Each element with
4NO Contact. Coil should be continuously current rated without cut-off contact.

Two element DC operated auxiliary relay having self reset type contact with hand reset
1 no. operating flag for transformer Low Oil Level (Main Tank) and OSR(OLTC) alarm
function. Each element with 4NO Contact. Coil should be continuously current rated
without cut-off contact.
Two element DC operated auxiliary relay having self reset type contact with hand reset
1 no. operating flag for transformer Oil Temp. Trip and alarm function. Each element with
. 4NO Contact. Coil should be continuously current rated without cut-off contact.

Two element DC operated auxiliary relay having self reset type contact with hand reset
1 no. operating flag for transformer Main tank PRV trip and OLTC PRV Trip function. Each
element with 4NO Contact. Coil should be continuously current rated without cut-off
contact.
Two element DC operated auxiliary relay having self reset type contact with hand reset
1 no operating flag for OLTC Buchholz trip and spare. Each element with 4NO Contact. Coil
should be continuously current rated without cut-off contact.
Audible bell and hooter for trip and non-trip fascia annunciation.
1 set
AC operated single element, auxiliary relay having only self reset contacts and with
1 no reverse flag for incoming AC supply supervision with test push button.

DC operated, two element, auxiliary relay having only self reset contact and with reverse
1 no flag for incoming DC and alarm bus DC fail supervision.

Test push button for above.

2 nos.
Single element AC operated auxiliary relay having self reset contact only for incoming
1 no DC and alarm bus DC fail alarm cancellation.

Push button for incoming DC and alarm bus DC fail alarm accept.
1 no
Indicating lamp for incoming DC and Alarm bus DC fail indication.
1 no
AC operated buzzer for incoming DC and Alarm bus DC fail audible alarm.
1 no

1 no. DC operated emergency lamp with switch.

Cubicle illumination lamp operated from door switch.

1 no.
15A, 3 phase plug & socket with switch.
1 no.

[Type text] Page 28

 Panel accessories as necessary.
1 set
Other equipment, relays etc. as required to fulfill the scheme Requirement.
1 set

30.2 33KV Line Control C&R Panel with Directional O/C & E/F protection. Single main bus
with bus section isolator scheme.

Circuit label engraved suitably at front and inner side

2 no.

1 no. Section of painted and overlaid mimic diagram

1 no. Circuit breaker control switch.

1 no
Local/Remote switch

6 nos. Indicating lamps for circuit breaker ON/OFF, spring charged, trip circuit 1 & 2 healthy
and auto trip indication.

3+3 PT supply Indicating lamps, red-yellow-blue for each PT.

nos.

Trip circuit supervision relay to supervise the TC 1 & 2 both under pre close and post
2 nos. close condition.

3 nos. ammeter of 96 mm x 96 mm scaled suitably.

1 no Voltmeter of 96 mm x 96 mm scaled suitably

1 no Voltmeter selector switch, 4-position, RY—YB—BR—OFF.

1 no. Suitable space and wiring for non-tariff TVM for energy management.

1 no. Three phase 4 wire test terminal block for above.

1 no. Auxiliary relay with test push button for panel DC supervision relay.

Fascia window type annunciator complete with accept reset and test PB but without
12 way
audible bell.

1 no Triple pole, IDMTL, non-dir- over current relay as per clause 23

Single pole definite time sensitive E/F relay current operated having wide setting range
1 no. for single circuit line.

Triple pole, IDMTL, directional over current relay with setting range 50% - 200% for
1 no IDMTL units and instantaneous high set unit -500% - 2000% applicable for parallel
line feeder as per schedule

Single pole directional definite time sensitive E/F relay current operated having wide
1 no setting range for single circuit line. NECESSARY IPTs ARE WITHIN THE SCOPE OF
BIDDER

1 no. High speed master tripping relay with contacts as required with lock out and coil

[Type text] Page 29

 supervision scheme complete.

1 no. PT selector switch, two position PT-1/PT-2 switch, stay put type (16 A)

1 no. Space heater with On/OFF switch and thermostat.

Audible bell and hooter for trip and non-trip fascia annunciation.
1 set
AC operated single element, auxiliary relay having only self reset contacts and with
1 no reverse flag for incoming AC supply supervision with test push button.

DC operated, two element, auxiliary relay having only self reset contact and with
1 no reverse flag for incoming DC and alarm bus DC fail supervision.

2 nos. Test push button for above.

Single element AC operated auxiliary relay having self reset contact only for incoming
1 no DC and alarm bus DC fail alarm cancellation.

Push button for incoming DC and alarm bus DC fail alarm accept.
1 no
Indicating lamp for incoming DC and Alarm bus DC fail indication.
1 no
AC operated buzzer for incoming DC and Alarm bus DC fail audible alarm.
1 no

1 no. DC operated emergency lamp with switch.

Cubicle illumination lamp operated from door switch.

1 no.
15A, 3 phase plug & socket with switch.
1 no.

1 set Panel accessories as necessary.

Other equipment, relays etc. as required to fulfill the scheme Requirement.

1 set

Annexure – D

Standard Make of Relay and Fitments

Relays Schneider, ABB, Siemens, Alstom, CGL and other

1. reputed relay Manufacturers fulfilling Relay
specification as per ANNEXURE-A, ANNEXURE-B &
ANNEXURE-C and general requirement as per Clause
No.22 of the Technical Specification.
Breaker Control Switch/ Local- Kaycee/Recom/Switron
2. Remote switch

Ammeter/Voltmeter Selector Kaycee/ Recom

3. switch

Static Ammeter/ voltmeter AE/RISHAV/Secure

4.

[Type text] Page 30

 Push Buttons Vaishno/Teknic/Lumen/STS
5.
Indicating Lamps with lenses Vaishno/Teknic/Lumen/STS/SWITRON
6.
Panel wiring Finolex/Havvels/ KEI/ R. R. Kables
7.
Hooter/Buzzer/Bell Vaishno/STS/JVS/Bharani
8.
Annunciator
9. MINILEC/ALAN/ INSTALARM/EAPL

Annexure-E
Legend of Devices associated with 33KV C & R Panel

Symbol
Description Particulars
Reference

A1-A2-
Ammeter As specified
A3, Ah

V Voltmeter As specified

VS Manual Voltmeter Selector Switch As specified

EM Tri-Vector Meter As specified

CS Control switch T-A/T-N-A/C-C spring return type As specified

L/R Local/Remote switch As specified

IL-R CB ‘ON’ Indication Red lamp As specified

IL-G CB ‘OFF’ Indication Green lamp As specified

IL-W ‘Trip /Close signal received from Remote Indication white lamp As specified

IL-B “Spring charged” Indication Blue lamp As specified

IL-A CB “ Auto trip” Indication Amber lamp As specified

PB Push Button As specified

DC operated electric Buzzer and Microprocessor based Electronic

annunciator with built in watch dog and first fault indication facility.
ANN As specified
The annunciator shall have provision for trip and non trip alarm
functions and Accept/Test/Reset/Mute Push buttons

H,HS,TH Heater, Heater Switch, Thermostat As specified

FS Fuse As specified

[Type text] Page 31

 LK Link As specified

MCB1 MCB 2 pole 32 A for DC supply As specified

MCB2 MCB 2 pole 16 A for AC supply As specified

MCB3 MCB 2 pole for spring charging motor supply As specified

MVS Manual PT selector switch As specified

IR-I Remote inter tripping contact from 33 kV Transformer Control and As specified
relay Panel

TC Tripping Coil As specified

CC Closing Coil As specified

86 Tripping Relay for Tripping function As specified

52 Vacuum Circuit breaker As specified

52a,52b NO and NC contacts of Breaker Auxiliary switch respectively As specified

PT Potential Transformer As specified

CT Current Transformer As specified

TTB Test Terminal Block As specified

51/50 R- O/C and E/F protection As specified

Y-B-N

67 R-Y- Directional O/C and E/F protection As specified

B-N

64 Restricted Earth Fault Protection As specified

87 Differential Protection As specified

SCHEDULE-I A
(To be submitted, duly filled in, along with the offer)
Bill of materials for 33 KV feeder C&R panels

Sr. Make, Type

No Description Quantity etc.

1 Circuit label 1 No.

Mimic section(Brilliant green paint to shade No.221 of IS 5

2 to be used) 1 No

[Type text] Page 32

3 T-N-C type control switch for circuit breaker. 1 No.

4 Indicating LEDs for

Spring charge indication(Blue) 1 No.
Trip circuit healthy indication(white) one each for Trip ckt 1 and
Trip Ckt 2 2 Nos.
Breaker 'ON' indication(Red) 1 No.
Breaker 'OFF' indication(Green) 1 No.

5 Push button for

Trip circuit test 1 No
Alarm Accept/Reset/Test/Mute 4 Nos.

Numerical Directional IDMT over current and earth fault relay

6 with high set instantaneous trip feature 1 No.

7 High speed Master tripping relay (Electrically resettable) 1 No

12 window annunciation scheme with accept, reset and

8 LED test push button with self resetting 1 Set
audible alarm.
9 Space for HT Static TOD Tri-vector Energy meter and TTB. 1 No
10 Ammeter (96 mm x 96 mm.) 3 Nos.

11 Voltmeter (96 mm x 96 mm.) & selector switch. 1 Set

12 Local / Remote switch 1 No

Internally mounted

1 Space heater and control switch 1 Set

1
2 Cubical illumination lamp and door switch Set

1
3 Power Plug, socket and control switch set

Alarm bell for trip & non-trip

4 3 No.
5 MCBs As required
As required
Fuse and Links
6
As required
Control wire
7

[Type text] Page 33

 SCHEDULE-I B
Bill of materials for 33/11KV Transformer C&R panels with differential protection

Make
Sr. ,Type
No Description Quantity etc.

1 Circuit label 1 No.

Mimic section (Brilliant green paint to shade No. 221 1 Set

2 of IS 5 to be used)

3 T-N-C type control switch for circuit breaker. 1 Nos.

4 Indicating LEDs for

Spring charge indication(blue) 1 Nos.

Trip circuit healthy indication(white) ) one each for Trip ckt 1 Nos.
1 and Trip Ckt 2

Breaker 'ON' indication(Red) 1 Nos.

Breaker 'OFF' indication(Green) 1 Nos.

Push button for Trip Circuit Healthy Test, Alarm 5 Nos

accept/Reset/Test/Mute
5

6 Trip circuit Healthy test 1 Nos.

Numerical non-directional IDMT over current and earth 1 Nos.

7 fault relay with high set instantaneous trip feature

[Type text] Page 34

 8 High speed master tripping relay (electrically resettable) 1 No

9 Space for HT Static TOD Tri-vector Energy meter and TTB. 1 No

10 Ammeter (96 mm x 96 mm.) 3 Nos.

and 1 No.
11 Voltmeter (96 mm x 96 mm.) & selector switch. 1 Sets

12 Transformer differential numerical relay 1 No.

16 window annunciation scheme with accept, reset 1 No.

13 and
LED test push button with self resetting audible alarm.

Auxiliary relay for main tank Buchholz Alarm/trip (2- 1 Set

14 element)

15 Aux. relay for winding temp Alarm/trip (2-element) 1 Set

16 Aux. relay for OLTC Buchholz Alarm/trip (2-element) 1 Set

Aux. relay for low oil level alarm(Main Tank) & OSR(OLTC) 1 Set
17 Trip (2-element)

18 Aux. relay for oil temp alarm/trip (2-element) 1 Set

Aux. relay for Main tank PRV & OLTC PRV Trip 1 Set
19 (2-element)

Internally mounted

1 Space heater and control switch 1 No.

2 Cubicle illumination lamp with door switch. 1 No.

3 Power plug with control switch 1 No.

Alarm bell for trip & non-trip

4 3 No.
5 MCB. As required
As required
6 Fuse and Links
7 Control wire As required

SCHEDULE - II

DETAILS OF RELAYS, METERS, EQUIPMENT& DEVICES AS OFFERED IN SCHEDULE OF 33

KV SIMPLEX TYPE CONTROL AND RELAYS PANEL – TO BE FILLED UP BY THE BIDDERS
ALONGWITH SUBMISSION OF SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS

[Type text] Page 35

Sl. Description Make And Type (Catalogue Brief Description, with
No. Country Of to be enclosed) CT/PT details, contact
Manufacture configuration, Input/Output
details, characteristics,
range, suitability etc. for
clear perspective.

A SURFACE MOUNTING DEVICES

1 Circuit Level

2 Mimic Diagram

3 Circuit Breaker Control Switch

Spring return lost motion type

4 Ammeter 96 mm sq. for C.T.

Secondary rated Current 1A Scale 0-
100/0-200A Scale 0-200A / 0-400A

5 Voltmeter 96 mm Sq. for P.T.

Secondary 110 VAC (L/L) Scale 0-40
KV

6 Voltmeter Selector Switch 6 way &

off position having break before
make contact

7 Test Terminal block suitable for 3

phase 4 wire system with wire rear
connecting studs having provision of
sealing arrangement

8 Multi way micro processor based

Electronic Annunciator with
building- system watchdog first fault
indications and red & yellow
coloured windows with inscription
for Trip & Non Trip Alarm functions

9 Indicating Lamps LED type 63.5 VAC

for P.T. Supply indication with
RED/YELLOW/ BLUE Colours

10 Indicating Lamp LED type 230 VAC

for Panel D.C. Fail Common
Indication

11 Indicating Lamp LED type 30 VDC for

CB ON/OFF Auto up Spring Charge
Trip Circuit Healthy Indication with
RED/GREEN/ AMBER /BLUE Colours

12 Push Button for Panel DC fail test

13 Push Button for including AC fail test

[Type text] Page 36

14 Push Button for non trip Panel DC
fail Alarm Accept

15 Push Button for Annunciator Alarm

Test / Mute/Accept/Reset

16 3 Element normal IDMTL over

current Relay with instantaneous
high set unit

17 Single Element Instantaneous

sensitive Earth Fault Relay with
Timer

18 Triple Pole Directional Voltage

polarized Over Current Relay with
Directional High Set Unit on all
Element

19 Single Pole Directional Voltage

polarized Instantaneous sensitive
E/F Relay with timer

20 Hi balance Instantaneous Restricted

Earth Fault Circulatory Current Fault
Relay

(a) HV side of Power Trf.

(b) LV side of Power Trf.

21 Single Element High Speed Tripping

Relay with electrically reset Contact
& H/R flag/indication with required
numbers of contacts

22 Two Element 30 V DC Voltage

Actuated Auxiliary Relay with SR
Contacts & HR/LED Flag/indication
for Transformer Internal Trouble
functions

23 Single Element 30V DC Voltage

Actuated Auxiliary Relay with self
Reset Contact & Reverse Flag
indication for Panel DC Supply fail
function

24 Single Element 230V AC Voltage

Actuated Auxiliary Relay with self
Reset Contacts & Reverse Flag
indication for incoming AC Supply
fail function

25 30 V DC Voltage operated Relay for

Trip Circuit supervision purpose with
self reset contact

[Type text] Page 37

26 Single Element 230V AC Voltage
Actuated Auxiliary Relay with self
Reset Contacts without Flag
indication for panel DC fail Alarm,
Accept

27 Additional Involvement of Single

Element 30V DC Voltage Actuated
Auxiliary Relay

28 Extra Involvement of Auxiliary Relay

for not having sufficient contacts to
achieve required functions

29 Space & wiring for housing

purchaser‘s projection mounting
type Energy meter(not within the
scope of bidder

30 Common Electronic DC bell/Buzzer

Trip & Non-Trip Alarm functions

31 Common Electronic AC Ball for Panel

DC fail Alarm functions

32 Biased differential relay for Trf.

Control & Relay Panel

B Inside Mounting Devices

1 230V AC Cubicle illuminating lamp

with door operated Switch/Toggle
Switch

2 30V DC Emergency Lamp with

Toggle Switch

3 230C AC 60W space heater with

thermostat & Toggle Switch

4 16A Double V AC Combined 2/3 pin

plug and socket with Switch

5 16A Double Pole MCB for Incoming

AC Supply

6 Fuse

7 Links

8 Terminals

9 Panel wires

10 Earthing Arrangement

[Type text] Page 38

C Panel Make

1 Panel Height

2 Panel Width

3 Panel Depth

Note: All surface mounting devices excepting Energy meter,TTB & Bells are flush mounting type As per
Schedule requirement.

Schedule-III

GTP for Numerical Non-Directional O/C & E/F Relay

Sl. No. Feature and Function Supplier’s details

1.1 Make, Type, Model No and Version No

and Ordering Code

1.2 Conformance to

i. IEC255-4

ii. IEC 61850

1.3 No. of CT inputs for O/C and E/F

Protection

1.4 Type test report submitted(y/n)

1.5 Relay shall be of Numeric Design

1.6 Relay designed for line protection and

Control

1.7 Size of Relay LCD screen

[Type text] Page 39

 1.8 Relay is equipped with CB close and open
key/push buttons

1.9 Relay has following protection functions:

a. Three phase over current

b. Earth fault

c. Thermal overload function

d. Broken conductor protection function

e. Circuit Breaker Maintenance function

2. a. One time delayed element and two

high set elements

b. Setting range and step for IDMT

element for both current and Time
Multiplier Setting

c. Selectable Current/Time Curve for

IDMT element

d. Setting range and step for high set

elements for both current and time delay

3. Sampling rate and frequency of analog

signal

4. Whether remote controllable from

SCADA

5. a. No. of Digital Inputs

b. Voltage rating of Digital Inputs

c. Provision of testing without current

injection

6. Supervision for CB open and Closed

status

7. No. of programmable LEDs and no. of

Latched LEDs

8. Analog Measurement and display

[Type text] Page 40

 supported

9. Fault Record storage capacity

10. Event storage capacity

11. Disturbance record storage capacity

12. MMI with keypad and LCD provided

13. 1Rated DC Supply and tolerance

0
.

14. 1Rating of PT secondary

1
.

15. 1Rated frequency

2
.

16. 1a. Operating ambient temperature &

3 humidity
.
b. Withstanding capability of
Electromagnetic Interference as per
relevant part of IEC 61850

17. 1Mounting
4
.

18. 1Watchdog
5
.

19. 1a. Nominal Feeder current

6
.b. CT Ratio setting

c. Earth fault current with time delay IEC

Curves, 2nd stage for instantaneous
trip(less than 50 ms)

d. High set with delay

[Type text] Page 41

 e. IEC Curves for all O/C and E/F have user
selectable?

20. 1a. No. of Digital Output Contacts

7
. b. Contact rating

21. 1Mode of Time Synchronization

8
.

22. 1Type of Lugs and terminators

9
.

23. 2MTBF
0
.

24. 2Lifespan
1
.

25. 2Compliance to Type Test

2
.

26. 2Communication Port

3
. a. Rear port- details
b. Front port-details

27. 2Whether Communication Ports are

4native to the Relay
.

28. 2Protocol supported for Rear Port

5
.

29. 2Protocol supported for Front port

6
.

30. Start and trip output contacts are freely

programmable

[Type text] Page 42

 31. Cable for connection of Relay to
laptop(USB port) along with converter
and power supply if required for relay
local setting

32. Basic application software for setting

change, parameterisation

33. CD with software(licensed ) to download

disturbance recorder, event log and
evaluation of those records

34. Graphical configuration tool for I/P, O/P

and functional building block for
protection and control

35. Any other software required for

integration with SCADA.

------------------------------

Schedule-IV

GTP for Numerical Directional O/C & E/F Relay

Feature and Function Supplier’s details

Sl. No.

1.1 Make, Type, Model No and

Version No and Ordering
Code

1.2 Conformance to

i. IEC255-4

ii. IEC 61850

1.3 (a) No. of CT inputs for O/C and

E/F Protection - 5/1 Amp(site
selectable)

[Type text] Page 43

 1.3 (b) No. of PT Input - rated 110
Volt (L-L)

1.3(c) The relay should be able to

internally derive the “Zero
Sequence Voltage”

1.4 Type test report

submitted(y/n)

1.5 Relay shall be of Numeric

Design

1.6 Relay designed for Feeder

protection and Control

1.7 Size of Relay LCD screen

1.8 Relay is equipped with CB

close and open key/push
buttons

Feature and Function Supplier’s details

Sl. No.

[Type text] Page 44

 1.9 Relay has following Site –
Selectable protection
functions:

a. Three phase Directional &

Non – Directional over
current
b. Directional & Non –
Directional Earth fault
c. Thermal overload function
d. Broken conductor
protection function
e. Circuit Breaker Failure
Protection & Maintenance
function
f. The relay should have built
in single & three Phase
“VTFF” and have internal
feature to operate as a Non –
Directional relay in the event
of “VTFF”

2. a. Directional Characteristic
Angle setting range &
resolution.

b. One time delayed element

and two high set elements

c. Setting range and step for

IDMT element for both
current and Time Multiplier
Setting

d. Selectable Current/Time
Curve for IDMT element

e. Setting range and step for

high set elements for both
current and time delay

Sl. No. Feature and Function Supplier’s details

[Type text] Page 45

 3. Sampling rate and frequency
of analog signal

4.. Whether remote controllable

from SCADA

5. a. No. of Digital Inputs

b. Voltage rating of Digital

Inputs

c. Provision of testing without

current injection

6. Supervision for CB open and

Closed status

7. No. of programmable LEDs

and no. of Latched LEDs

8. Analog Measurement and

display supported

9. Fault Record storage capacity

10 Event storage capacity

11 Disturbance record storage

capacity

12 MMI with keypad and LCD

provided

13 Rated DC Supply and

tolerance

14 Rating of CT/PT secondary

Sl. No.

Feature and Function Supplier’s details

[Type text] Page 46

 15. 1Rated frequency
2
.

16. 1b. Operating ambient

3 temperature & humidity
.
b. Withstanding capability of
Electromagnetic
Interference as per relevant
part of IEC 61850

17. 1Mounting
4
.

18. 1Watchdog
5
.

19. 1a. Nominal Feeder current

6
.b. CT Ratio setting

c. Earth fault current with

time delay IEC Curves, 2nd
stage for instantaneous
trip(less than 50 ms)

d. High set with delay

e. IEC Curves for all O/C and

E/F have user selectable?

20. 1a. No. of Digital Output

7Contacts
.
b. Contact rating

Sl. No.

Feature and Function Supplier’s details

[Type text] Page 47

 21. 1 Mode of Time Synch.
8
.

22. 1Type of Lugs and terminator

9
.

23. 2MTBF
0
.

24. 2Lifespan
1
.

25. 2Compliance to Type Test

2
.

26. 2Communication Port

3
. a. Rear port- details
b. Front port-details

27. 2Whether Communication

4Ports are native to the Relay
.

28. 2Protocol supported for Rear

5Port
.

29. 2Protocol supported for Front

6port
.

30. Start and trip output

contacts are freely
programmable

Sl. No. Feature and Function Supplier’s details

[Type text] Page 48

 31. Cable for connection of Relay
to laptop(USB port) along
with converter and power
supply if required for relay
local setting

32. Basic application software

for setting change,
parameterization

33. CD with software(licensed )

to download disturbance
recorder, event log and
evaluation of those records

34. Graphical configuration tool

for I/P, O/P and functional
building block for protection
and control

35. Any other software required

for integration with SCADA.

36. Provision for Time Stamping

of all fault & event recorder.

------------------------------

[Type text] Page 49

 Schedule-V

GTP for Master Trip Relay

Sl. No. Description Bidder’s Response

01. Manufacturer Name

02. Type and designation

03. Electrical reset

04. Mounting

04. High Burden relay

05. Operating Time

06. Rated DC supply and

tolerance

07. No. of NO Contact

08. No. of NC Contact

---------------------------------

[Type text] Page 50

Schedule-VI

GTP for Numerical Based Differential Relay

Feature and Function Supplier’s details

Sl. No.

1.1 Make, Type, Model No and

Version No and Ordering
Code

1.2 Conformance to

i. IEC255-4

ii. IEC 61850

1.3 a. No. of CT inputs for

differential Protection

b. C.T. secondary current

c. Adjustable bias setting

d. Operation philosophy

e. Whether Programmable
HV/LV CT ratio of T/F &
vector group provided

1.4 Type test report

submitted(y/n)

1.5 Relay shall be of Numeric

Design

1.6 Relay designed for

Transformer differential
protection and Control

1.7 Size of Relay LCD screen

1.8 Relay is equipped with CB

close and open key/push
buttons

[Type text] Page 51

 1.9 Relay has following
protection functions:

a. Inbuilt REF protection

b. Inbuilt HV & LV side over

current & earth fault
protection provided

c. Thermal overload function

d. Circuit Breaker
Maintenance function

e. Circuit Breaker failure

protection.

2.0 Harmonic restrain feature

2.1 a. Percentage bias setting

b. Differential operating
current

c. Through fault stabilization

features

2.2 a. Nos. of time delayed

element and high set
elements for O/C & E/F
protection

b. Setting range and step for

IDMT element for both
current and Time Multiplier
Setting

c. Selectable Current/Time
Curve for IDMT element

d. Setting range and step for

high set elements for both
current and time delay

3. Sampling rate and frequency

of analog signal

[Type text] Page 52

 4. Whether remote controllable
from SCADA

5. a. No. of Digital Inputs

b. Voltage rating of Digital

Inputs

c. Provision of testing without

current injection

6. Supervision for CB open and

Closed status

7. No. of programmable LEDs

and no. of Latched LEDs

8. Analog Measurement and

display supported

9. Fault Record storage capacity

10. Event storage capacity

11. Disturbance record storage

capacity

12. MMI with keypad and LCD

provided

13. Rated DC Supply and

tolerance

14. Rating of CT secondary

15. Rated frequency

a. Operating ambient
temperature & humidity
16.
b. Withstanding capability of
Electromagnetic
Interference as per relevant
part of IEC 61850

17. Mounting

[Type text] Page 53

 18. Watchdog

19. a. Nominal Feeder current

b. CT Ratio setting

c. Operating characteristics of
the differential protection

d. Earth fault current with

time delay IEC Curves, 2nd
stage for instantaneous
trip(less than 50 ms)

e. High set with delay

f. IEC Curves for all O/C and

E/F have user selectable?

20. a. No. of Digital Output

Contacts

b. Contact rating

Mode of Time
Synchronization
21.

Type of Lugs and terminators

22.

23. MTBF

24. Lifespan

25. Compliance to Type Test

26. Communication Port

a. Rear port- details

[Type text] Page 54

 b. Front port-details

27. Whether Communication

Ports are native to the Relay

28. Protocol supported for Rear

Port

29. Protocol supported for Front

port

30. Start and trip output

contacts are freely
programmable

31. Cable for connection of Relay

to laptop(USB port) along
with converter and power
supply if required for relay
local setting

32. Basic application software

for setting change,
parameterisation

33. CD with software(licensed )

to download disturbance
recorder, event log and
evaluation of those records

34. Graphical configuration tool

for I/P, O/P and functional
building block for protection
and control

35. Any other software required

for integration with SCADA.

Date : Signature:

Name:

Designation:

Company Seal:

[Type text] Page 55

 ANNEXURE-A

Technical specification for IEC 61850 compliant non- Directional O/C and E/F Relay

Sl. No. Feature and Function Technical requirement

1 Purpose and It is intended to automate the Switchgears specified in the scope of supply
application and use Communicable Numeric relays for Protection, Control, Metering
and Status monitoring. This specification is based on the understanding
that an integrated Automation System along with protections shall be
provided and same shall have provisions for Integration with SCADA
system. All the feeders shall be remote controlled from WBSEDCL’s SCADA
and from the local console of the numerical relays.

Numerical multifunctional combined Microprocessor based Feeder

protection and management relay to protect the 33kV Feeder from all
electrical and other faults along with reporting system, Disturbance record
for fault analysis. Bidder should comply with any especial requirement or
feature asked for retrofitting the relays. Relay should be IEC 61850
compliant. Relay should have 4 CT input for O/C and E/F protection. There
should be option for derivation of E/F internally.

2. Main Protection 1. Relay should have minimum two group of setting. Setting group
Feature changeover required from digital status input.
2. Electrical over load protection with selectable IEC curves with two
stage, first stage to be used as Definite Time / IDMT and second
stage to be used as high set for short circuit protection.
3. Earth fault protection in two stages with IEC characteristics. First
stage to be used as IDMT/Definite Time and second stage to be
used as instantaneous elements. Earth fault element should be
suitable for both CBCT and residual type CT connection.
4. Negative phase sequence Protection with IEC Curves.
5. CB Fail Protection & time settable as per user.
6. The relay should be immune to DC switching while carrying
current i.e. no spurious trip should be generated if relay DC is
made On and Off
7. The relay should conform to the IEC255-4 or BS 142 for Inverse
time characteristics.
8. The relay should have features to monitor for broken conductor
and CB opening time
3. Processor feature Relay shall be completely Numerical with protective elements having
software algorithm based on sampling of Analog inputs. Sampling Rate of

[Type text] Page 56

 Analog Signal: The sampling rate should be 1000 Hz for 50 Hz signal or
better for each analog channel. Hardware based measurements shall not
be acceptable.

4. Operational The operation of Relay shall be possible both locally from the Switchgear
Philosophy and remote & Local Work station. The local position shall be displayed in
remote / local workstation and remote operation shall be blocked if the
switch is in Local. Clear control priorities shall prevent initiation of
operation of a single switch at the same time from more than one of the
various control levels and there shall be interlocks among various control
levels. The priority shall always be with the lowest enabled control level.
Relay accuracy shall not be affected by system frequency fluctuation.

5. Status/Optical 1. Minimum 7 number status inputs are required

Inputs/Digital inputs 2. All status inputs should be 30 V DC
3. Setting group is required to be changed with any Digital input
status.
4. Trip circuit supervision with DI status
5. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1ms
resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed
as change of state.
6. Relay should have comprehensive self diagnostic feature with
remote indication of relay failure and alarm shall be generated
without tripping of circuit
7. Provision of Testing output relays without any current injection.
8. No. of programmable LEDs - at least 4 nos. with latching option.
6. Main measuring and All measurements should be in primary quantities. Minimum following
reporting feature displays are required in alpha numeric:-

1. Three phase (Positive sequence) current

2. Neutral(zero sequence) current
3. All the trips should have clear indication on the relay terminals
4. Resetting should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
5. The default relay LCD shall be user defined to display primary
circuit loading.
7. Memory and 1. The relay setting and programming should be stored in EEPROM
Recording Feature so that during Aux. Power failure the said data is not lost.
2. Relay should have event log, trip log and DR record. All logs should
go in to history.
3. All tripping of relay should initiate DR in auto without extra binary
input. Triggering of DR with binary input should be user
configurable.
4. The last 2 fault DR records should be in flash memory and DR will
not erase in case of DC supply fail for more than 2 days.
5. Should be able to record at least 5 Oscillographic disturbances and
5 fault records and 250 event records.
6. Minimum Four no. of latest trip log with cause of trip should be
stored in memory along with date and time stamping. The
memory should not be lost with the switching off of DC.

[Type text] Page 57

 7. The relay should have fault-recording feature with current
waveform and Digital Input status. The fault waveform should
consist of minimum four current waveforms of three phase
current and zero sequence current and DI status. Triggering time
for Pre and Post should have user selectable. This record should
be in flash memory for minimum 7(seven) days even after
switching off the DC supply.
8. The fault should be date and time stamped.
9. Communication protocol IEC 61850.
8. Auxiliary Supply
30V to - 25% to + 10%, 2 wire unearthed system. Necessary software shall
be in-built for proper shutdown and restart in case of power failure.
Auxiliary supply burden will be around 20Watt.

9. Rated CT/PT 5/1 Amp(User selectable) , CTs used to be protection class

secondary

10. Rated frequency 50 HZ +/- 5%

11. Ambient condition 1. Operating ambient temperature upto 55 Deg C

2. Operating Humidity upto 100 %
3. Relay shall meet the requirement for withstanding
electromagnetic interference according to relevant parts of IEC
61850. Failure of single component within the equipment shall
neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to a complete system
breakdown.
12. Module and 1. Relay should be flush mounted type
Mounting 2. If module is drawout type then it should have CT shorting facility
of make before break type.
3. Mounting in switchgears located in non AC rooms.
4. Galvanic isolation between field connection and relay hardware
should be there.
13. Watchdog and self The relay should have facility to monitor the healthiness of its circuits and
monitoring components by own monitoring system. In case of any problems, the
alarm should be generated by one of the output contacts. The alarm as
soft signal to be sent to SCADA system as well. Necessary support
documentation explaining the self diagnostic feature shall be furnished
Watch dog contact shall be provided in addition to required 7BI and 7 BO.

14. Settings Approximate settings possible should be as follows:-

1. Nominal Feeder current 2% to 110 %

2. CT Ratio setting 10-1000(approx.)
3. Earth fault current 5 to 40% with time delay IEC Curves, 2 nd stage
for instantaneous trip(less than 50 ms)
4. Over current trip- 50% to 200% of 1/5 Amp with time delay as per
IEC Curves.
5. High set with delay 200% to 2000%
6. IEC Curves for all O/C and E/F have user selectable.

[Type text] Page 58

15. Output Relays Minimum 7 number output relays are required out of which

1. One potential free change over contact should be provided for

start inhibit of relay.
2. All o/p contact should be freely programmable.
3. Rating of trip contacts:-
a) Contact durability>10K operation
b) 15 Amp make and carry for 3 sec for trip contact
c) Make and carry for trip contacts L/R<=40ms
Rating of Alarm contacts:-

a) 8 Amp make and carry continuously for 5 sec.

Testing of Output relays through keypad on relay fascia and relay HMI
software. Output relay dwell time shall be user programmable or fixed at
100ms.

16. Relay software and 1. The relay should have native IEC 61850 Communication Protocol.
Man Machine 2. Should have password protected key padlock.
Interface 3. Necessary software for relay setting, retrieving DR, event log, trip
log should be supplied by the Bidder. Necessary License is to be
issued for WBSEDCL, if required.
4. Bidder has to supply communication hardware for relay setting,
DR downloading from front port. This device should be compatible
to USB/Ethernet port.
5. It shall be possible to transfer the data stored in the DFR to
computer on IEEE/COMTRADE format. The data format shall be
compatible for dynamic protection relay testing on relay test kit.
COMTRADE data viewing software to be provided.
6. Multiuser/Corporate license for installation on minimum 7 nos. of
PCs.
17. Date and time Date and Time stamping with faults and record. The clock should be
powered from internal cell and should not required setting after every DC
switching. The internal cell life minimum 5 years. Time synchronization by
IRIG-B or SNTP. For time synchronization through SNTP is to be provided
from clock signal coming from RTU. In case of IRIG-B, time synchronization
will be done with GPS clock signal from GPS receiver located at substation.

18. Lugs and terminators All CT and PT terminals shall be provided as fixed (screwed) type terminals
on the relay to avoid any hazard due to loose connection leading to CT
opening or any other loose connection. Necessary amount of lugs should
be supplied along with each relay for CT connection and control wiring.

19. Manuals, Drawings 1. The relays should be supplied with manuals with all technical and
and Literature operating instructions.
2. All the internal drawings indicating the logics and block diagram
details explaining principle of operation should be given at the
time of supply.
3. Mapping details shall be submitted in IEC format.

[Type text] Page 59

20. Standard 1. MICS document (model implementation conformance
documentation per statement)
Relay, according to 2. PICS(protocol implementation conformance statement
3. Conformance Test certificate from KEMA/CPRI.
IEC 61850
4. PIXIT document
All the above mentioned certificates shall be submitted along with
Techno-commercial Bid.
5. ICD file
6. SCD file
21. Extendibility in The Bidder shall provide all necessary software tools along with source
Future codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration
with SCADA by the User. These software tools shall be able to
configure relay, add analog variable, alarm list, event list, modify
interlocking logics etc. for additional bays/equipments which shall be
added in future.
22. Lifespan The supplier should mention following:-

1. Product maturity: The Bidder should mention the time period for
which the product is in the market
2. Expected production life
3. Hardware/Firmware change notification process. Upgrades to be
provided free of cost within the Guarantee period/5 years
whichever is later, if needed.
4. Lifespan of standard tools and processes for relay configuration,
querying and integration.
23. Standards The relay should conform to the IEC255-5 or equivalent BS / ANSI for
following:-

1. Overload withstand test

2. Dielectric withstand: 2kV in common, 1 kV in differential mode
3. Impulse Voltage: 5kV in common, 1kV in differential mode
4. Insulation resistance>100 M-ohm.
5. Vibration: Shock and bump and Seismic
6. Storing and transportation
7. Radio Interference: IEC 61000 for high frequency disturbance,
Transient disturbance, Electrostatic discharge
8. KEMA Certification for the particular model offered with respect
to IEC61850 Protocol.
24. Communication Port 1. Two nos. IEC 61850 protocol compliant Ethernet RJ45/F.O port for
communication with SCADA system through two managed
Ethernet Switches operating in redundant mode. The
communication shall be made in 1+1 mode between individual IED
to Switch, such that failure of one set of LAN shall not affect the
normal operation of SCADA. However, it shall be alarmed in
SCADA.
2. Functioning of Relay shall not hamper to fault occurring any
interconnected relay.
3. One Front port Ethernet RJ45/USB 2.0 for relay parameterization
and configuration etc. with the help of PC. In case RS-232 port
offered, suitable interfacing cable with one end having RS 232 port
and other end USB 2.0 to be provided to connect with PC free of

[Type text] Page 60

 cost.
4. Relay should generate GOOSE message as per IEC 61850 standard
for interlocking and also ensure interoperability with third party
relays.
25. Name Plate and Each IED shall be clearly marked with manufacturer’s Name, type,
marking serial no. and electrical rating data. Name plates shall be made of
anodized aluminium with white engraving on black surface.

26. Performance Relays will be guaranteed for the period of five years from the date of last
Guarantee dispach.
Any problem in the said period should be attended free of charge
inclusive of repair/replacement of relays/ component (both H/W, S/W).

27. Type Test  Dielectric Withstand Test—IEC 60255-5

 High Voltage Impulse Test, class III --- IEC 60255-5(5kV peak, 1.2/50
micro Sec;3 Positive and 3 negative shots at interval of 5 Sec.)
 DC Supply Interruption ---- IEC 60255-11
 AC Ripple on DC supply ---- IEC 60255-11
 Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions --- IEC 61000-4-11
 High frequency Disturbance ---- IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
 Fast Transient Disturbance ---- IEC 60255-22-4, Class-IV
 Surge withstand capability ---- IEEE/ANSI C 37.90.1(1989)
 Degree of Protection
 Electromagnetic compatibility
 Mechanical stress/vibration test
 Temperature withstand
Type test reports for the above tests shall be submitted for the approval of
WBSEDCL along with Tender, failing which the bid may not be considered.
Wherever the above mentioned standards and IEC 61850 overlap, the
latter will prevail.

28. Credential as pre- Qualifying Requirement:-

requisite of Tender
1. Copies of performance certificate for two years successful operation as
on the due date of bid opening for the offered relay in respect to
implementation of IEC 61850 protocols to any SCADA/substation
automation system from reputed Power Sector Utility in India shall have
to be furnished along with the Bid. Copies of Purchase Orders and
corresponding Delivery Challans /Stores Receipt vouchers/ Excise Duty
Invoice, etc., i.e. Proof of Execution of the Purchase Orders.

OR

Successful testing and operation of minimum one year in

WBSEB/WBSEDCL/WBSETCL network.

2. Documentary evidence for being manufacturers like registration

[Type text] Page 61

 Certificate issued by SSI/NSIC/Directorate of Industries/DGS&D, etc. for
Qualifying requirement.

3. The bidder should have testing facilities of all functional tests or should
have arrangement of all functional tests at government approved testing
laboratories.

Inter-operability test:-

After fulfilment of the above Q.R., inter-operability test of the offered

relay (other than Make & Model used in WBSEDCL) with the existing relay
in WBSEDCL Network will be tested in WBSEDCL Distribution Testing
Department, WBSEDCL for which due intimation for supply of sampled of
offered relay will be given to the Bidder. The Bidder needs to submit the
said relay to Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL within one week
from the said intimation.

The offered relay will only be accepted after fulfilment of above Q.R. &
successful inter-operability test at WBSEDCL system.

Checklist for Bill of Material for supply

Sl. No. Material

1. Relay (Model No.) Qty as per Tender

2. Lugs suitable for current and control, wiring Qty as per Tender X Number
of TBs in relay + 20% extra.

3. Cable for connection of Relay to laptop(USB port). 10 set

Along with converter and power supply if
required for relay local setting

4. Manual, Hard copy in good quality paper properly 10 set

bounded

5. Copy of Type Test certificate along with manual With offer

6. Basic application software for setting change, 10 nos.

7. CD with software(licensed ) to download 10 nos.

[Type text] Page 62

 disturbance recorder, event log and evaluation of
those records

8. Graphical configuration tool for I/P, O/P and 10 nos.

functional building block for protection

9. Any other software required for integration with 10 nos.

SCADA.

N.B All the above tools/ Software should be compatible to WINDOWS XP/WINDOWS NT/WINDOWS 7
Operating System.

ANNEXURE-B

Technical specification for IEC 61850 compliant Directional O/C and E/F Relay

Sl. No Feature and Function Technical requirement

1 Purpose and It is intended to automate the Switchgears specified in the scope of

application supply and use Communicable Numeric relays for Protection, Control,
Metering and Status monitoring. This specification is based on the
understanding that an integrated Automation System along with
protections shall be provided and same shall have provisions for
Integration with SCADA system. All the feeders shall be remote
controlled from WBSEDCL’s SCADA and from the local console of the

[Type text] Page 63

 numerical relays.

Numerical multifunctional combined Microprocessor based Feeder

protection and management relay to protect the 33 KV Feeder from all
electrical and other faults along with reporting system, Disturbance
record for fault analysis. Bidder should comply with any especial
requirement or feature asked for retrofitting the relays. Relay should be
IEC 61850 compliant. Relay should have 4 CT input, 3 input for O/C and
residual E/F protection will be derived internally. One CT input may be
used for unbalanced current protection. Relay should have 4 voltage
input , 3 input for VT element for directional O/C protection with
internally derived residual voltage for E/F protection. Another VT input
will be used for residual voltage protection. Relay should have two stage
over voltage and under voltage protection. The Directional O/C &
E/F Relay should have the Site-selectable provision for
operating in both Directional & Non-directional mode
depending on site requirement.
2 Main Protection 1. Electrical over load protection with selectable IEC curves with
Feature for directional two stage, first stage to be used as Definite Time / IDMT and second
O/C & E/F relay. stage to be used as high set for short circuit protection.
2. Earth fault protection in two stages with IEC characteristics. First
stage to be used as IDMT/Definite Time and second stage to be used
as instantaneous elements. Earth fault element should be suitable for
both CBCT and residual type CT connection.
3. Negative phase sequence Protection with IEC Curves.
4. CB Fail Protection & time settable as per user.
5. The relay should be immune to DC switching while carrying
current i.e. no spurious trip should be generated if relay DC is made
On and Off
6. The relay should conform to the IEC255-4 or BS 142 for Inverse
time characteristics.
7. VT fuse fail detection on NPS current/NPS Voltage or zero
sequence current/voltage based logic and blocking of under voltage
protection by VT fuse fail detection.
8. Three phase VT fuses fail detection on current based logic.
9. The relay should have features to monitor for broken conductor
and CB opening time.
10. The relay shall be designed for application in WBSEDCL’s
distribution network where the system is non-effecively earthed
through earthing transformer emanating at 33kV bus of 132/33 kV
substation.
11. Relay should have minimum two group of setting. Setting group
changeover required from digital status input.
3. Processor feature Relay shall be completely Numerical with protective elements having
software algorithm based on sampling of analog inputs. Sampling Rate of
Analog Signal: The sampling rate should be 1000 Hz for 50 Hz signal or
better for each analog channel. Hardware based measurements shall not
be acceptable.

4. Operational Philosophy The operation of Relay shall be possible from both locally from the

[Type text] Page 64

 Switchgear and remote and Local Work station. The local position shall
be displayed in remote / local workstation and remote operation shall be
blocked if the switch is in Local. Clear control priorities shall prevent
initiation of operation of a single switch at the same time from more
than one of the various control levels and there shall be interlocks
among various control levels. The priority shall always be with the lowest
enabled control level. Relay accuracy shall not be affected by system
frequency fluctuation.

5. Status/Optical 1. Minimum 7 number status inputs are required

Inputs/Digital inputs 2. All status inputs should be 30 V DC
3. Setting group is required to be changed with any Digital input
status.
4. Trip circuit supervision with DI status
5. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1ms
resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed as
change of state.
6. Relay should have comprehensive self diagnostic feature with
remote indication of relay failure and alarm shall be generated without
tripping of circuit
7. Provision of Testing output relays without any current injection.
8. No. of programmable LEDs- at least 4 nos. with latching option.
6. Main measuring and All measurements should be in primary quantities. Minimum following
reporting feature displays are required in alpha numeric:-

1. Three phase (Positive sequence) current, Three phase voltage

2. Neutral (zero sequence) current, MW, MVAR, Frequency, Pf,
MVA etc.
3. All the trips should have clear indication on the relay terminals
4. Resetting should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
7. Memory and Recording 1. The relay setting and programming should be stored in EEPROM
Feature so that during Aux. Power failure the said data is not lost.
2. Relay should have event log, trip log and DR record. All logs
should go in to history.
3. All tripping of relay should initiate DR in auto without extra
binary input. Triggering of DR with binary input should be user
configurable.
4. The last 2 fault DR records should be in flash memory and DR will
not erase in case of DC supply fail for more than 2 days.
5. Should be able to record at least 5 Oscillographic disturbances
and 5 fault records and 250 event records.
6. Minimum Four no. of latest trip log with cause of trip should be
stored in memory along with date and time stamping. The
memory should not be lost with the switching off of DC.
7. The relay should have fault-recording feature with current
waveform and Digital Input status. The fault waveform should
consist of minimum four current waveforms of three phase
current and zero sequence current and DI status. Triggering time
for Pre and Post should have user selectable. This record should
be in flash memory for minimum 7 days even after switching off

[Type text] Page 65

 the DC supply.
8. The fault should be date and time stamped.
9. Communication protocol IEC 61850.
8. Auxiliary Supply 30 V to - 25% to + 10%, 2 wire unearthed system. Necessary software
shall be in-built for proper shutdown and restart in case of power failure.
Auxiliary supply burden will be around 20Watt.

9. Rated CT/PT secondary 5/1 Amp(site selectable) , CTs used to be protection class.

3PT input rated 110 Volt (L-L)

10. Rated frequency 50 HZ +/- 5%

11. Ambient condition 1. Operating ambient temperature up to 55 Deg C

2. Operating Humidity up to 100 %
3. Relay shall meet the requirement for withstanding
electromagnetic interference according to relevant parts of IEC
61850. Failure of single component within the equipment shall
neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to a complete
system breakdown.
12. Module and Mounting 1. Relay should be flush mounted type
2. If module is draw out type then it should have CT shorting facility
of make before break type.
3. Mounting in switchgears located in non AC rooms.
4. Galvanic isolation between field connection and relay hardware
should be there.
13. Watchdog and self The relay should have facility to monitor the healthiness of its circuits
monitoring and components by own monitoring system. In case of any problems,
the alarm should be generated by one of the output contacts. The alarm
as soft signal to be sent to SCADA system as well. Necessary support
documentation explaining the self diagnostic feature shall be furnished.
Watch dog contact shall be provided in addition to required 7BI and 7
BO.

14. Settings Approximate settings possible should be as follows:-

1. Nominal Feeder current 2% to 110 %

2. CT Ratio setting 10-1000(approx.)
3. Earth fault current 5 to 40% with time delay IEC Curves, 2 nd stage
for instantaneous trip(less than 50 ms)
4. Over current trip- 50% to 200% of 1/5 Amp with time delays as
per IEC Curves.
5. High set with delay 200% to 2000%
6. IEC Curves for all O/C and E/F have user selectable.
7. Selectable MTA for Directional features for O/C relay should
cover 1st quadrant for effectively grounded system/ impedance
grounded system/solid grounded system.

[Type text] Page 66

15. Output Relays Minimum 7 number output relays are required out of which

1. One potential free change over contact should be provided for

start inhibit of relay.
2. All o/p contact should be freely programmable.
3. Rating of trip contacts:-
a) Contact durability>10K operation
b) 15 Amp make and carry for 3 sec for trip contact
c) Make and carry for trip contacts L/R<=40ms
Rating of Alarm contacts:-

d) 8 Amp make and carry continuously for 5 sec.

Testing of Output relays through keypad on relay fascia and relay HMI
software. Output relay dwell time shall be user programmable or fixed
at 100ms.

16. Relay software and 1. The relay should have native IEC 61850 Communication
Man Machine Protocol.
Interface 2. Should have password protected key padlock.
3. Necessary software for relay setting, retrieving DR, event log,
trip log, and downloading waveform should be supplied by the
Bidder. Necessary Licensed is to be issued for WBSEDCL, if required.
4. Bidder has to supply communication hardware for relay setting,
DR downloading from front port. This device should be compatible to
USB/Ethernet port.
5. It shall be possible to transfer the data stored in the DFR to
computer on IEEE/COMTRADE format. The data format shall be
compatible for dynamic protection relay testing on relay test kit.
COMTRADE Data viewer software is to be provided.
6. Multiuser/Corporate license for installation on minimum 7 nos.
of PCs.
17. Date and time Date and Time stamping with faults and record. The clock should be
powered from internal cell and should not required setting after every
DC switching. The internal cell life minimum 5 years. Time
synchronization by IRIG-B or SNTP. For time synchronization through
SNTP is to be provided from clock signal coming from RTU. In case of
IRIG-B, time synchronization will be done with GPS clock signal from GPS
receiver located at substation.

18. Lugs and terminators All CT and PT terminals shall be provided as fixed (screwed) type
terminals on the relay to avoid any hazard due to loose connection
leading to CT opening or any other loose connection. Necessary amount
of lugs should be supplied along with each relay for CT connection and
control wiring.

19. Manuals, Drawings 1. The relays should be supplied with manuals with all technical
and Literature and operating instructions.
2. All the internal drawings indicating the logics and block diagram

[Type text] Page 67

 details explaining principle of operation should be given at the
time of supply.
3. Mapping details shall be submitted in IEC format.
20. Standard 1. MICS document (model implementation conformance
documentation per statement)
Relay, according to IEC 2. PICS(protocol implementation conformance statement
3. Conformance Test certificate from KEMA/CPRI.
61850
4. PIXIT document
a. All the above mentioned certificates shall be submitted along with
Techno-commercial Bid.
5. ICD file
6. SCD file

21. Extendibility in Future The Bidder shall provide all necessary software tools along with
source codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete
integration with SCADA by the User. These software tools shall be
able to configure relay, add analog variable, alarm list, event list,
modify interlocking logics etc. for additional bays/ equipments
which shall be added in future.

22. Lifespan The supplier should mention following:-

1. Product maturity: The Bidder should mention the time period for
which the product is in the market
2. Expected production life
3. Hardware/Firmware change notification process. Upgrades to be
provided free of cost within the Guarantee period/5 years
whichever is later, if needed.
4. Lifespan of standard tools and processes for relay configuration,
querying and integration.

23. Standards The relay should conform to the IEC255-5 or equivalent BS / ANSI for
following:-

1. Overload withstand test

2. Dielectric withstand: 2kV in common, 1 kV in differential mode
3. Impulse Voltage: 5kV in common, 1kV in differential mode
4. Insulation resistance>100 M ohm
5. Vibration: Shock and bump and Seismic
6. Storing and transportation
7. Radio Interference: IEC 61000 for high frequency disturbance,
Transient disturbance, Electrostatic discharge
8. KEMA/CPRI Certification for the particular model offered with
respect to IEC61850 Protocol

[Type text] Page 68

24. Communication Port 1. Two nos. IEC 61850 protocol compliant Ethernet RJ45/F.O port
for communication with SCADA system through two managed
Ethernet Switches operating in redundant mode. The
communication shall be made in 1+1 mode between individual
IED to Switch, such that failure of one set of LAN shall not affect
the normal operation of SCADA. However, it shall be alarmed in
SCADA.
2. Functioning of Relay shall not hamper to fault occurring any
interconnected relay.
3. One Front port Ethernet RJ45/USB 2.0 for relay parameterization
and configuration etc. with the help of PC. In case RS-232 port
offered, suitable interfacing cable with one end having RS 232
port and other end USB 2.0 to be provided to connect with PC
free of cost.
4. Relay should generate GOOSE message as per IEC 61850
standard for interlocking and also ensure interoperability with
third party relays.

25. Name Plate and Each IED shall be clearly marked with manufacturer’s Name,
marking type, serial no. and electrical rating data. Name plates shall be
made of anodized aluminium with white engraving on black
surface.

Performance Relays will be guaranteed for the period of five years from the date of
Guarantee last dispach.
26. Any problem in the said period should be attended free of charge
inclusive of repair/replacement of relays/ component (both H/W, S/W).

27. Type Test  Dielectric Withstand Test—IEC 60255-5

 High Voltage Impulse Test, class III --- IEC 60255-5(5kV peak, 1.2/50
micro Sec;3 Positive and 3 negative shots at interval of 5 Sec.)
 DC Supply Interruption ---- IEC 60255-11
 AC Ripple on DC supply ---- IEC 60255-11
 Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions --- IEC 61000-4-11
 High frequency Disturbance ---- IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
 Fast Transient Disturbance ---- IEC 60255-22-4, Class-IV
 Surge withstand capability ---- IEEE/ANSI C 37.90.1(1989)
 Degree of Protection
 Electromagnetic compatibility
 Mechanical stress/vibration test
 Temperature withstand
Type test reports for the above tests shall be submitted for the approval
of WBSEDCL along with Tender. Wherever the above mentioned
standards and IEC 61850 overlap, the latter will prevail.

[Type text] Page 69

28. Credential as pre- 1. Copies of performance certificate for two years successful operation
requisite of Tender as on the due date of bid opening for the offered relay in respect to
implementation of IEC 61850 protocol to any SCADA/substation
automation system from reputed Power Sector Utility in India shall have
to be furnished along with the Bid. Copies of Purchase Orders and
corresponding Delivery Challans /Stores Receipt vouchers/ Excise Duty
Invoice, etc., i.e. Proof of Execution of the Purchase Orders.

OR

Successful testing and operation of minimum one year in

WBSEB/WBSEDCL/WBSETCL network..

2. Documentary evidence for being manufacturers like registration

Certificate issued by SSI/NSIC/Directorate of Industries/DGS&D, etc. for
Qualifying requirement.

3. The bidder should have testing facilities of all functional tests or

should have arrangement of all functional tests at government approved
testing laboratories.

Inter-operability test:-

After fulfilment of the above Q.R. inter-operability test of the offered

relay (other than Make & Model used in WBSEDCL) with the existing
relay in WBSEDCL Network will be tested in WBSEDCL Distribution
Testing Department, WBSEDCL for which due intimation for supply of
sampled of offered relay will be given to the Bidder. The Bidder needs to
submit the said relay to Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL
within one week from the said intimation.

Checklist for Bill of Material for supply

Sl. No. Material

1. Relay (Model No.) Qty as per Tender

2. Lugs suitable for current and control, wiring Qty as per Tender X Number
of TBs in relay + 20% extra.

3. Cable for connection of Relay to laptop(USB port). 10 set

Along with converter and power supply if
required for relay local setting

[Type text] Page 70

4. Manual, Hard copy in good quality paper properly 10 set
bounded

5. Copy of Type Test certificate along with manual With offer

6. Basic application software for setting change, 10 nos.

7. CD with software(licensed ) to download 10 nos.

disturbance recorder, event log and evaluation of
those records

8. Graphical configuration tool for I/P, O/P and 10 nos.

functional building block for protection

9. Any other software required for integration with 10 nos.

SCADA.

N.B All the above tools/ Software should be compatible to WINDOWS XP/WINDOWS NT/WINDOWS 7
Operating System.

[Type text] Page 71

 ANNEXURE-C

Technical specification for IEC 61850 compliant Differential Relay

The offered item should meet minimum following requirements:-

Sl. No. Feature and Function Technical requirement

It is intended to automate the Switchgears specified in the scope of supply

and use Communicable Numeric relays for Protection, Control, Metering and
Status monitoring. This specification is based on the understanding that an
integrated Automation System along with protections shall be provided and
same shall have provisions for Integration with SCADA system. All the
feeders shall be remote controlled from Employer’s SCADA and from the
local console of the numerical relays.

Purpose and
1
application
Numerical multifunctional combined Microprocessor based Transformer
protection and management relay to protect the 33/11 kV Transformer from
all electrical and other faults along with reporting system, Disturbance
record for fault analysis. Bidder should comply with any especial
requirement or feature asked for retrofitting the relays. Relay should be IEC
61850 compliant. Relay should have 4 current input each for HV and LV side
for differential protection of two winding transformer. However in total 7
current inputs may also be acceptable.

1. Relay should have minimum two group of setting. Setting group

changeover required from digital status input.
2. Relay should be suitable for differential protection of two winding
transformers above 6.3MVA, 33/11KV.
3. Relay should have 2nd and 5th harmonic blocking feature and
unrestrained High Set current tripping feature.
4. Relay may have backup O/C and E/F feature with IDMTL/Definite
Main Protection
2. Time. There should be option for derivation of E/F internally.
Feature
5. CB Fail Protection & time settable as per user.
6. The relay should be immune to DC switching while carrying current
i.e. no spurious trip should be generated if relay DC is made On and
Off.
7. The relay should conform to the IEC255-4 or BS 142 for Inverse time
characteristics.

3. Processor feature Relay shall be completely Numerical with protective elements having
software algorithm based on sampling of analog inputs. Sampling Rate of

[Type text] Page 72

 Analog Signal: The sampling rate should be 1000 Hz for 50 Hz signal.
Hardware based measurements shall not be acceptable.

The operation of Relay shall be possible from both locally from the
Switchgear and remote and Local Work station. The local position shall be
displayed in remote / local workstation and remote operation shall be
blocked if the switch is in Local. Clear control priorities shall prevent
4. Operational Philosophy
initiation of operation of a single switch at the same time from more than
one of the various control levels and there shall be interlocks among various
control levels. The priority shall always be with the lowest enabled control
level.

1. Minimum 8 number status inputs are required

2. All status inputs should be 30 V DC
3. Setting group is required to be changed with any Digital input status.
4. Trip circuit supervision with DI status
5. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1ms
Status/Optical resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed
5.
Inputs/Digital inputs as change of state.
6. Relay should have comprehensive self diagnostic feature with
remote indication of relay failure and alarm shall be generated
without tripping of circuit
7. Provision of Testing output relays without any current injection.
8. No. of programmable LEDs- at least 4 nos. with site - selectable
latching option.
All measurements should be in primary quantities. Minimum following
displays are required in alpha numeric:-
Main measuring and
6. 1. Three phase (Positive sequence) current and Phase angle (Both HV
reporting feature and LV side)
[Link](zero sequence) current,
3. All the trips should have clear indication on the relay terminals.
4. Resetting should be selectable as hand reset or auto reset.
[Link] relay setting and programming should be stored in EEPROM so
that during Aux. Power failure the said data is not lost.
2. Relay should have event log, trip log and DR record. All logs should go
in to history.
3. All tripping of relay should initiate DR in auto without extra binary
input. Triggering of DR with binary input should be user configurable.
4. The last 2 fault DR records should be in flash memory and DR will not
Memory and Recording
7. erase in case of DC supply fail for more than 2 days.
Feature 5. Minimum Four no. of latest trip log with cause of trip should be stored
in memory alone with date and time stamping. The memory should not
be lost with the switching off of DC.
[Link] relay should have fault-recording feature with current waveform
and Digital Input status. The fault waveform should consist of minimum
four current waveforms of three phase current and zero sequence
current and DI status. Triggering time for Pre and Post should have user
selectable. This record should be in flash memory for minimum 7 days

[Type text] Page 73

 even after switching off the DC supply.
[Link] fault should be date and time stamped.
[Link] protocol IEC 61850.
8. Auxiliary Supply 30 V with variation of - 25% to + 10%, 2 wire unearthed system

9. Rated CT secondary 5/1 Amp (site selectable), CTs used to be protection class.

10. Rated frequency 50 HZ +/- 5%

1. Operating ambient temperature up to 55 Deg C

2. Operating Humidity up to 100 %
11. Ambient condition 3. Relay shall meet the requirement for withstanding electromagnetic
interference according to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of single
component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation
nor lead to a complete system breakdown.
1. Relay should be flush mounted type
12. Module and Mounting [Link] module is draw out type then it should have CT shorting facility of
make before break type.
3. Mounting in switchgears located in non AC rooms.
The relay should have facility to monitor the healthiness of its circuits and
components by own monitoring system. In case of any problems, the alarm
Watchdog and self
13. should be generated by one of the output contacts. The alarm as soft signal
monitoring
to be sent to SCADA system as well. Necessary support documentation
explaining the self diagnostic feature shall be furnished.

Approximate settings possible should be as follows:-

[Link] Feeder current 2% to 110 %

[Link] Ratio setting 10-1000(approx.)
[Link] should have amplitude matching features by means of reference
power common to all winding.
4. Relay should have site selectable suitable for all available vector
groups. It will automatically taken care of zero sequence filtering of relay
currents depending on relevant chosen vector group.
[Link] bias operating characteristics of the relay shall have at least two
knees and site selectable highest tripping facility (8 to 15 times of Relay
14. Settings basic current). Relay should have site selectable percentage bias setting
from 20% to 45%. The differential operating current of the relay shall
have site selectable range from 10% to 40%.
6. Relay shall have through fault stabilization features up to at least 10
times of relay basic current in the event of through fault.
7. Relay should have 2nd harmonic restraint features in order to bring
stabilization under inrush condition. The percentage 2nd harmonic
restraint features shall have site selectable setting range from 15% to
40%.
[Link] relay shall have over fluxing restraint features based on site
selectable ratio of 5th harmonic to fundamental current. The relay shall
have also facility to activate/ deactivate the above features in site.
15. Output Relays Minimum 8 number output relays are required out of which

[Type text] Page 74

 [Link] potential free change over contact should be provided for start
inhibit of relay.
2. All o/p contact should be freely programmable.
[Link] of trip contacts:-
d) Contact durability>10K operation
e) 15 Amp make and carry for 3 sec for trip contact
f) Make and carry for trip contacts L/R<=40ms
Rating of Alarm contacts:-

a) 5 Amp make and carry continuously for 5 sec.

[Link] relay should have native IEC 61850 Communication Protocol.

[Link] have password protected key padlock.
3. Necessary software for relay setting, retrieving DR, event log, trip log,
downloading waveform should be supplied by the Bidder. Necessary
Licensed is to be issued for WBSEDCL, if required.
Relay software and [Link] has to supply communication hardware for relay setting, DR
16. Man Machine downloading from front port. This device should be compatible to
Interface USB/Ethernet port.
[Link] shall be possible to transfer the data stored in the DFR to computer
on IEEE/COMTRADE format. The data format shall be compatible for
dynamic protection relay testing on relay test kit.
[Link] be able to record at least 5 Oscillographic disturbances and 5
fault records and 250 event records.
Date and Time stamping with faults and record. The clock should be
powered from internal cell and should not required setting after every DC
17. Date and time
switching. The internal cell life minimum 5 years. Time synchronization by
IRIG-B or SNTP.

All CT terminals shall be provided as fixed (screwed) type terminals on the

relay to avoid any other any hazard due to loose connection leading to CT
18. Lugs and terminators
opening or any other loose connection. Necessary amount of lugs should be
supplied along with each relay for CT connection and control wiring.

1. The relays should be supplied with manuals with all technical and
Manuals, Drawings operating instructions.
19.
and Literature [Link] the internal drawings indicating the logics and block diagram details
explaining principle of operation should be given at the time of supply.
[Link] details of all the details shall be submitted in IEC format.
1. MICS document (model implementation conformance statement)
Standard 2. PICS(protocol implementation conformance statement
documentation per 3. Conformance Test certificate by KEMA/CPRI
20.
Relay, according to IEC All the above mentioned Certificates shall be submitted along with the
61850 Techno-commercial Bid
4. ICD file
5. SCD file
The Bidder shall provide all necessary software tools along with source
21. Extendibility in Future codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration
with SCADA by the User. These software tools shall be able to configure

[Type text] Page 75

 relay, add analog variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking
logics etc. for additional bays/equipment which shall be added in future.

The supplier should mention following:-

1. Product maturity: The Bidder should mention the time period for
which the product is in the market
22. Lifespan 2. Expected production life
3. Hardware/Firmware change notification process. Upgrades to be
provided free of cost within the warranty period/5 years, if needed.
[Link] of standard tools and processes for relay configuration,
querying and integration
The relay should conform to the IEC255-5 or equivalent BS / ANSI for
following:-

1. Overload withstand test

[Link] withstand: 2kV in common, 1 kV in differential mode
[Link] Voltage: 5kV in common, 1kV in differential mode
23. Standards [Link] resistance>100 M-ohm
[Link]: Shock and bump and Seismic
6. Storing and transportation
7. Radio Interference: IEC 61000 for high frequency disturbance,
Transient disturbance, Electrostatic discharge
8. KEMA Certification for the particular model offered with respect to
IEC61850 Protocol.
[Link] nos. IEC 61850 protocol compliant Ethernet RJ45/F.O port for
communication with SCADA system through two redundant managed
Ethernet Switches operating in redundant mode. The communication
shall be made in 1+1 mode between individual IED to Switch, such that
failure of one set of LAN shall not affect the normal operation of SCADA.
However, it shall be alarmed in SCADA.
24. Communication Port [Link] of Relay shall not hamper to fault occurring any
interconnected relay.
3. One Front port Ethernet RJ45/USB 2.0 for relay parameterization and
configuration etc. with the help of PC.
[Link] should generate GOOSE message as per IEC 61850 standard for
interlocking and also ensure interoperability with third party relays.

25. Name Plate and Each IED shall be clearly marked with manufacturer’s Name, type,
marking serial no. and electrical rating data. Name plates shall be made of
anodized aluminium with white engraving on black surface.

Relays will be guaranteed for the period of five years from the date of last
dispach.
Performance Any problem in the said period should be attended free of charge inclusive
26. Guarantee of repair/replacement of relays/ component (both H/W, S/W).

[Type text] Page 76

27. Type Test As per T/S of Directional O/C & E/F Relay Specification

Credential as pre- 1. Copies of performance certificate for two years successful operation as on
requisite of Tender the due date of bid opening for the offered relay in respect to
implementation of IEC 61850 protocol to any SCADA/substation automation
system from reputed Power Sector Utility in India shall have to be furnished
along with the Bid. Copies of Purchase Orders and corresponding Delivery
Challans /Stores Receipt vouchers/ Excise Duty Invoice, etc., i.e. Proof of
Execution of the Purchase Orders.

OR

Successful testing and operation of minimum one year in

WBSEB/WBSEDCL/WBSETCL network..

2. Documentary evidence for being manufacturers like registration

Certificate issued by SSI/NSIC/Directorate of Industries/DGS&D, etc. for
28. Qualifying requirement.

3. The bidder should have testing facilities of all functional tests or should
have arrangement of all functional tests at government approved testing
laboratories.

Inter-operability test:-

After fulfilment of the above Q.R. inter-operability test of the offered relay
(other than Make & Model used in WBSEDCL) with the existing relay in
WBSEDCL Network will be tested in WBSEDCL Distribution Testing
Department, WBSEDCL for which due intimation for supply of sampled of
offered relay will be given to the Bidder. The Bidder needs to submit the said
relay to Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL within one week from
the said intimation.

Checklist for Bill of Material for supply

Sl. No. Material

1. Relay (Model No.) Qty as per Tender

2. Lugs suitable for current and control, wiring Qty as per Tender X Number
of TBs in relay + 20% extra.

3. Cable for connection of Relay to laptop (USB 10 set

port). Along with converter and power supply if
required for relay local setting

[Type text] Page 77

4. Manual, Hard copy in good quality paper properly 10 set
bounded

5. Copy of Type Test certificate along with manual With offer

6. Basic application software for setting change, 10 nos.

7. CD with software(licensed ) to download 10 nos.

disturbance recorder, event logger collection and
evaluation of those records

8. Graphical configuration tool for I/P, O/P and 10 nos.

functional building block for protection

9. Any other software, if required for integration 10 nos.

with SCADA

N.B All the above tools/ Software should be compatible to WINDOWS XP/WINDOWS NT/WINDOWS 7
Operating System.

SCHEDULE – VII

Undertaking from Relay manufacturer

We hereby confirm that the main protective relay(s) type _____________________

i)
ii)
iii)
offered by us against your tender No._____________________ through
M/s._______________________ are in our current range of production. We also
confirm that these relays will not be phased out by us in the next 10 years from
the date of supply. Necessary repairs/replacements if necessary during this
period will be made available by us.

Name & Designation : ___________

Company Seal : _______________

[Type text] Page 78

 Technical Specification For 33 KV, Single Phase, Dead Tank Type Out
Door Current Transformer Of Different Ratio
1. SCOPE: This section covers the design, manufacturing, assembly, testing at the
manufacturer’s works, supply & delivery of Current Transformers as specified in Schedule-A
for protection and metering system in three phase power network of WBSEDCL.
2. STANDARD: The Current Transformers and accessories covered by this specification
shall comply with the requirement of the latest edition of the following standards unless
otherwise stated in this Specification.
 IS / IEC Title IS:2705 (Part-I-IV) :Specification for Current Transformers.
 IEC:185, IEC-60044 :Current Transformers.
 IS:4201 :Application guide for Current Transformers.
 IS:2099 :Specification for HV porcelain bushings.
 IS : 5621 : Specification for porcelain hollow insulator.
 IS:335 :Specification for new insulation oil for Transformers and Switchgears
 IS : 8603: Specification for Dimension for Porcelain Transformer Bushing for use in
heavily polluted area.
 IS : 3347: Specification for Dimension for Porcelain Transformer Bushing for use in
normal and lightly polluted area.
 IS : 2633: Specification for method for testing uniformity of coating on Zinc coated
articles
 . IS : 5561 : Specification for Electrical Power Connectors
 IS : 2147: Specification for Degree of Protection

Equipments meeting the requirement of any other authoritative standards other than
ISS which ensure equal or better quality shall also be acceptable. The salient points of
difference between the standard opted and the ISS standard given shall be brought out in
the tender along with a copy of relevant portions of the said standard.

3. GENERAL CLIMATIC AND ISOCERAUNIC CONDITION OF SITE : The climatic

and isoceraunic conditions at site are given below :
a) Max. Ambient temp :45 ˚C
b) Minimum ambient temp. : 4 ˚C
c) Maximum relative humidity :100%
d) Average number of thunderstorm day per annum. :75
e) Max. No. of rainy days/annum :120 days
f) Average Rainfall :1000 mm. to 3000 mm.
g) Max. Wind pressure/wind speed :150 Kg. Per Mtr. sq
h) Height above sea level(m)not exceeding :1000
i) Earthquake acceleration horizontal seismic co-efficient : As per IS:1893(1984) For
Class-III & IV Zones
Page 1
WBSEDCL
4. DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS :
The design features and construction details of Current Transformer shall be in
accordance with the requirement stipulated in Schedule –A :

4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT:

4.1.1 The Current Transformers shall be completed in all respects and shall
conform to the modern practice of design and manufacture.
4.1.2 The Current Transformers shall be of low Reactance outdoor type, Single
Phase,50 Hz, mounted in oil filled, self cooled, shaded porcelain bushing ,
suitable for operation under the service conditions as specified in the general
condition of site without protection from sun, rain & dust.
4.1.3 The maximum permissible temperature rise of the Current Transformer
winding with rated continuous primary current at rated frequency and
burden over an ambient temperature should be as per IS :2705 ( Part-I) :
1992, considering ambient temperature40 ° Celsius for design purpose.
4.1.4 .The Current Transformers shall be suitable for up right mounting on steel
structures and shall preferably be suitable for horizontal transportation.
Necessary flanges, bolts, clamps fittings etc. for base of CT shall be arranged
by the manufacturer to match with WBSEDCL’s standard base structure.
Fixing Hole center to center distance in ‘X’ & ‘Y’ direction shall be 330 mm. ( ±
5 mm by slotted holes ).
4.1.5 .The CT shall be complete with all accessories like terminal connectors,
weather proof terminal box for secondary connection, lifting lugs, grounding
terminals, oil level gauge glass, filling and draining plugs and name plate.
4.1.6 .The CT shall be oil immersed type provided with Class-A insulation. The
design and construction of CTs shall be sufficient to withstand the thermal
and mechanical stresses resulting from the specified short circuit currents.
4.1.7 .The core of the CTs shall be high grade non-ageing, silicon laminated steel of
low hysteresis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy confirming
to IS:[Link] core material used for metering shall be stated in tender.
4.1.8 The exciting current shall be as low as possible and the CTs shall be capable of
maintaining its rated accuracy at different burdens and saturation limits.
4.1.9 .CT characteristics shall be such as to provide satisfactory performance for
burdens ranging from at least 25% to 100% of rated burden in case of
metering CT cores and knee point voltage in case of Protection Special CT
core.
4.1.10 .Necessary markings for connections shall be marked on each CT and
load terminations at the associated terminal block. Provision shall be
provided for short circuiting and grounding of CT secondary at the terminal
blocks.
4.1.11 The CT secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof
secondary terminal box. The secondary terminal box shall be fixed in the P2
side of CT.
4.1.12 The oil immersed type CT shall be hermetically sealed to eliminate
breathing and to prevent ingression of air and moisture from the

Page 2
wbsedcl
 environment .Each CT shall be provided with oil level gauge, which can be
read from the ground level and a pressure-releasing device to just release the
abnormal internal pressure. If any inert gas is used particulars of gas above
oil and means of separation of oil from gas to be indicated.
4.1.13 Oil level indicator should be fixed in such a position so that oil level
should confirm that the Primary studs inside the CT are emerged in oil.
4.1.14 . The CT secondary to be used for metering and instruments shall be of
accuracy class and ISF as specified. The saturation factor of this core shall be
low enough so as not cause any damage to measuring instruments in the
event of maximum short circuit current.
4.1.15 The CT secondary to be used for protective relaying purpose shall be of
accuracy class as specified. The magnetization curve of the cores shall be
furnished with tender.
4.1.16 The ratio changing arrangement shall be provided on secondary side of
the CT. Terminal marking for connections shall be marked on both primary
and secondary terminals of each CT.
4.1.17 Above oil immersed type CTs must be Dead Tank type.
4.1.18 Primary& Secondary windings shall be of copper. Size, No. of Turns etc
are to be mentioned in GA drawing in line with Short Circuit Test Report.
4.1.19 C.T. Stud sizes shall be as follows :
a) Primary Terminal :Primary Stud of the CT will be of plain solid
round(threading is not required) with Tin Plate Electrolytic Copper
having minimum Diameter of 30 mm (negative tolerance is not
allowed) and minimum outside length of 80 mm.
b) Secondary Terminal : M8 type with 70 mm long Nickel Plated Brass
with suitable size along with suitable nuts & washers.

4.2 BUSHING :
4.2.1 Porcelain bushing conforming to latest edition of IS:8603 & IS:3347 shall
be used for the CT.
4.2.2 . Cast metal end caps for the bushing shall be of high strength & made
ofbrass. They shall have smooth surface to prevent discharge taking
place between the metal parts and porcelain as a result of ionisation.
4.2.3 . The insulation of bushings shall be co-ordinated with that of the current
transformer such that the flashover, if any will occur only external to the
CT.
4.2.4 Each of the primary terminals shall be complete with suitable rigid type
terminal connector suitable for CT Stud to ACSR Panther.
4.2.5 . Each of the porcelain bushing shall have Creepage distance for specified
voltage class.

4.3 TERMINAL CONNECTORS :

4.3.1 The primary terminal connector shall be made of Aluminium alloy.
4.3.2 All castings of connectors shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters,
cracks and cavities. All sharp edges or corners shall be rounded off.
4.3.3 No part of the connectors shall be less than 10 mm. thick.
4.3.4 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS:2633.
Page 3
wbsedcl
 4.3.5 Bi-metallic strips and sleeves, if require, shall be provided loose of about
2 mm. thickness as a part of connector.
4.3.6 All current carrying parts of the connectors shall have minimum contact
resistance.
4.3.7 Connectors shall be corona controlled and shall conform to IS:5561. 4
4.3.8 Connectors shall conform to type test as well as to routine test as per
IS:5561.
4.3.9 Connectors shall be suitable for connection with ACSR ‘PANTHER’ to CT
terminal along with suitable nuts bolts & washers.

4.4 GROUNDING TERMINALS :

Two grounding terminals on diagonally opposite sides of adequate size suitable for
connecting M.S. Flat of size of 50 mm. x 6 mm.

4.5 SECONDARY TERMINAL BOX :

4.5.1 All secondary terminals shall be brought out in a compartment on P2
side of each current transformer for easy access.

4.5.2 The exterior of this terminal box shall be hot-dip galvanized / painted
with weather proof paint.

4.5.3 The secondary terminal box shall be provided with a removable cable
gland plate at bottom for mounting cable glands of 1.1 KV grade steel
wire armoured, PVC insulated PVC sheathed 4 core ( 4 [Link].) stranded
copper conductor cables. The cable glands shall be included within the
scope of supply. The number of cable glands are equal to number of
cores in the CT.

4.5.4 The terminal box shall be provided with a detachable cover plate in
front so as to have easy access of secondary terminals. The cover shall
have a sealing arrangement and shall be suitable to prevent ingration of
moisture and rain water. The sealing arrangement shall be done by
drilling holes in the tightening bolts of the cover. The degree of
protection shall be not less than IP-55 as per IS- 2147.

4.5.5 . All terminals shall be clearly marked with identification number to

facilitate connection to external wiring with sufficient space in between.

4.6 INSULATING OIL :

The insulating oil to be used for CT shall comply in all respect with the provisions of
the latest edition of IS : 335.

4.7 PAINTING :
4.7.1 C.T. Tank wherever applicable, along with top metallic shall be either hot
dip galvanized or painted. All steel surfaces shall be cleaned by sand
blasting or chemical process as required to produce a smooth surface,

Page 4
wbsedcl
 free of scale, grease and dirt. Steel surfaces in contact with insulating oil
shall be painted with heat resistant oil insoluble insulating varnish.

4.7.2 . External surfaces shall be given a coat of high quality red or yellow
chromate primer and finished with two coats of synthetic enamel paints
[Light Grey (colour code-631) as per IS-5] / Epoxy paint. The paints shall
not scale off or crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal
handling.

4.8 RATING PLATE / NAME PLATE PARTICULARS :

The name plate shall be fixed in non detachable portion of the CT. It shall contain the
following data engraved / painted on it
a) . Name of the manufacturer.
b) . Purchase order reference.
c) . Electrical diagram of CT.
d) . Ratio, Class, Burden, STC, ISF/ALF, HSV etc.
e) . Serial number
f) . Year of manufacturer
g) . Property label " Property of WBSEDCL
h) . Guarantee for Five Years
i) Any other information as deem feet.
j) The name plate diagram shall be submitted along with the drawing for
approval.
5. DEVIATION :
Normally the offer should be as per Technical Specification without any deviation.
But any deviation felt necessary to improve performance, efficiency and utility of
equipment must be mentioned in the ‘Deviation Schedule’ with reasons of such
deviation. Such deviation suggested may or may not be accepted. Deviations not
mentioned in Deviation Schedule will never be considered.

6. TEST REPORTS AND TYPE TESTS :

The bidder shall submit complete test reports of all tests (including Type Test) as
stipulated in relevant IS/ IEC with Complete identification, date and serialno.,
carried out in CPRI/ NABL accredited/ Government recognized Test House or
Laboratory on tendered item/items for each items of identical design.

The Type Test Certificates should, however, bear the Logo of NABL accreditation.

Copies of following type test report for each item as per latest IS / IEC, carried out
within five (5) years, from due date of tender, from CPRI, NABL accredited/
government recognized test house or laboratory shall be submitted along with
tender documents as pre-requisites. Failing which their offer may not be technically
acceptable.

a) High voltage Power frequency wet withstand voltage test

b) Short time current test.

Page 5
wbsedcl
 c) Lightning impulse voltage withstand test
d) Temperature rise Test
e) Determination of error.
Each Type Test Report shall comply with the following information with Test results

I. Complete identification, date and serial no.

II. Method of application where applied, duration and interpretation of each
Test.
7. TESTS AT FACTORY AND TEST CERTIFICATES & ACCEPTANCE TEST :
7.1 .Each CT shall comply with the requirements of Type Tests & Routine Test as
specified in relevant Part-(I-IV) of IS-2705.
7.2 . All routine test at manufacturer’s works on all CTs shall be carried out and Test
Reports are to be submitted to CE, Procurement & Contract Dept. WBSEDCL.
7.3 .All Acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works on every lot
offered for inspection as per relevant IS in presence of the WBSEDCL’s and
Contractors’ representatives. Selection of samples for acceptance test as well as
rejection and retesting shall be guided by relevant IS. In addition to above, all
routine tests are also to be carried on the tendered items as per relevant IS. The
entire cost of acceptance and routine test that to be carried out shall be treated as
included in the quoted price of tendered items.
7.4 . Six copies of test reports duly signed by the inspecting officers, shall be submitted
to the Chief Engineer, Procurement & Contract Department , Bidyut Bhavan (4th
floor) Salt Lake, Kolkata -700091.
7.5 The manufacturer shall give at least 21(twenty one) days advance notice intimating
the actual date of inspection and details of all tests that are to be carried out, to the
CE Distribution Testing Department, WBSEDCL with a copy to SE ( Inspection ) P&C

8. TYPE TESTS ( after issuance of order ) :

Besides submission of Type test Report, carried out within five years as per tender
specification, Type Test at the discretion of Ordering authority, shall have to be
arranged by the successful Bidder from any lot offered for inspection, sample chosen
at random after successful routine test by our inspection team, as per relevant ISS
from CPRI/ NABL accredited/ Government recognized Test House or Laboratory in
presence of WBSEDCL’S representative. However the necessary cost of the type test
Charges will be reimbursed to the party on production of necessary supporting
documents.

9. ACCEPTANCE TEST :
The following Acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer’s works on
every lot offered for inspection as per relevant IS in presence of the WBSEDCL’s and
Contractors’ representatives. Selection of samples for acceptance test as well as
rejection and retesting shall be guided by relevant IS. In addition to above, all
routine tests are also to be carried on the tendered items as per relevant IS. The
entire cost of acceptance and routine test that to be carried out shall be treated as
included in the quoted price of tendered items.

Page 6
wbsedcl
 9.1 Visual checking and verification of dimension including verification of terminal
marking and polarity.
9.2 Determination of errors and other characteristics as per specification
9.3 Power Frequency voltage withstand test on both primary & secondary winding.
10. DRAWINGS :
10.1 The bidder shall submit to WBSEDCL the following tender purpose drawing
along with tender documents. The drawings in line with tender specification shall
also to be submitted after issuance of order for approval :

10.2 General outline dimension drawing of current transformers furnishing front and
side elevation top and bottom plan views, showing all accessories, mounting
arrangement on steel structures, spacing and size of the bolts, details of expansion
chamber, total and protective creepage distance of bushing, electrical diagram for
primary and secondary windings with polarity mark, technical arrangement for
secondary terminal box, size of primary terminals, grounding terminals and lifting
lugs, quantity of insulating oil, net and shipping weight, shipping dimension, fixing
hole centre dimensions etc.

10.3 Magnetisation characteristics curve of the protection core of the CT furnishing

knee point voltage and secondary winding resistance, rise etc.

10.4 It should be noted that :

10.4.1 . All notes and legends of the drawings shall be furnished in English and
all dimensions shall be marked in metric units. Purchase Order No. shall
be mentioned in the drawings.
10.4.2 Equipment shall be manufactured as per approved drawings.
10.4.3 Terminal Connectors & Bushings.
10.4.4 . Four sets of approved drawings shall be submitted for our record. One
set of drawing to be sent to each Consignee.

11. . INSTRUCTION MANUALS :

Four bound copies of instruction manuals and literatures of the CTs in English
language shall be supplied to the purchaser and one set for each consignee prior to
despatch of CTs. The manuals shall contain the following :

a) .A brief description of CT furnishing the constructional features.

b) Instruction for handling, storing, erection, commissioning and operation and
maintenance of [Link].
c) General outline drawing of the [Link] along with all components and accessories.
d) Marked erection points identifying the component parts of C.T.
e) Detailed dimensions assembly and description of all accessories.
f) .Detailed views of Core, winding assembly, winding connections and its tapping.
g) List of spares and other necessary information for [Link].
h) .A set of approved test certificate.

Page 7
wbsedcl
Schedule –‘A’

Specific Technical particulars of 33 KV Outdoor Type Current Transformer

Sl. No Description Particulars

1 . Rated system voltage 33KV
2 . Highest system voltage 36 kV
3 Applicable Standard IS:2705-1992 (Part -I-IV) /IEC- 185,IEC-60044
4 . System neutral earthing Non-effectively earthed
5 System freq 50HZ
6 Extended current rating 120% maximum
7 . Installation Outdoor
8 . Class of Insulation A
9 Type Single phase Outdoor Dead Tank Type
10 Basic Insulation Level HV: 36 KV / 70 KV / 170 KV(P)
LV:3 KV (rms.)
11 Instrument Security Factor .< 5 at lower ratio
for Metering Core
12 Minimum Creepage Distance 900 mm
13 Primary Terminal Connector Rigid type CT stud to ACSR ‘PANTHER’
14 Rated Short Circuit thermal 20 KA for 3 Sec
current
15 Rated Dynamic current 50 KA (Peak)
16 . CT Ratio, Class, Burden etc
b) Ratio : Core-1: metering core Burden- 15VA, Accuracy
200-100-50/ 1-1 A class- 0.5S
Core-2: protection core Burden- 30VA, Accuracy
class- 5P20
17 . Temperature Rise As per relevant IS/IEC
18 Suitability Should be suitable for upright mounting on Steel
Structure in outdoor Switch yard with matching to
WBSEDCL’s Standard base structure
19 Fixing hole center 330 mm both in X & Y direction
20 Fixing Position of Secondary . On P2 Side of the CT
terminal box

Page 8
wbsedcl
 Schedule of Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33 kVoutdoor
Current Transformer.
( To be submitted by the Bidder )
Sl. No
1 . Name of the Manufacturer
2 . Address
3 Type of CT
4 . Rated Voltage
5 Applicable Standard
6 CT Ratio
7 Ratio change over details
8 Core details Class Burden ISF / ALF
Metering Core ( Core – I )
Protection Core ( Core – II)
.. Min. Vk at Max. Ie at Vk/2 RCT
Protection Core ( Core – II) lower ratio

9 STC ( KA for 3 Sec)

10 . Rated continuous Thermal
Current
11 Temp. rise over ambient ( ° C ) Winding Oil Exposed
current
carrying part

12 Rated Insulation Level

a ) 1.2/50 micro second
Impulse withstand voltage on
Primary Winding ( KV Peak)
. b ) One minute Power
Frequency withstand voltage
(Dry) on Primary Winding
(KV rms)
c ) One minute Power
Frequency withstand voltage
(Wet) on Primary Winding
(KV rms)
d ) One minute Power
Frequency withstand voltage
on Secondary Winding (KV
rms)
13 Minimum Creepage Distance
(mm)
14 Insulation Class
15 Material of Core
16 Material & Size of Stud
(i) Primary Terminal
(ii) Secondary terminal
17 Whether bushing is
hermetically sealed

Page 9
wbsedcl
Sl no

18 Whether Nitrogen Gas

cushion is provided
19 Whether Pressure Relief
Device provided
20 . Cantilever Strength ( Kgf)
21 Weight of oil (Kg)
22 Volume of oil (Lts)
23 Fixing hole centre dimension
in X & Y direction ( mm )
24 Mounting details
25 Type of connector
26 . Painting process Paint shed
Paint Thickness
27 Fixing position of Secondary
Terminal Box
28 . Degree of Protection of
Secondary Terminal Box
29 Guarantee

Page 10
wbsedcl